This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.

https://books.google.com
 a n n
r sem
Hi e
5
188

Mar. gen . 70

Tur.3. 127
: 32

Misc Indic . e . 222

BOUND BY
L. Joshua
Mangalore.
 A

KONKANI GRAMMAR
BY

ANGELUS FRANCIS XAVIER MAFFEI

OF THE SOCIETY OF JESUS

MANGALORE
ON COMMISSION SALE AT THE
BASEL MISSION BOOK & TRACT DEPOSITORY
1882

Price Five Rupees

All rights reserved

 1
BASEZ

MISS ION
SSSTELS QUCTUESCE,

ESCEFLOR
CAESCE

ಣ Q

MANGALORE
ಲ
ಿ

I BRA RD
I A N L
BODLE
27 APR 35

OXFORD
 Imprimatur:
N. PAGANI, S. J. , PRO - VICAR APOSTOLIC
!
 CONTENTS

Page
Preface xiii

PART I. ORTHOGRAPHY
Chapter I. 1
Alphabet .
Chapter II. Accent . 7
Appendix . 8

PART II . ETYMOLOGY
Chapter I. Substantives 9
Art. I. Declension . 9
A. General Observations 9
B. Declensions in Particular 16
§ 1. First Declension 16
Exercises on the First Declension 20

2. Second Declension . 21

Exercises on the Second Declension . 25

8 3. Third Declension 26
Exercises on the Third Declension .
30
§ 4. Fourth Declension . 31
Exercises on the Fourth Declension ..
34
§ 5. Fifth Declension .
35
Exercises on the Fifth Declension 37
§ 6. Declension of Proper Nouns . 37
C. Observations about Declensions 40
Art . II . Gender of Nouns . 43
Chapter II. Adjectives. 48
Art. I. Adjectives in General 48
§ 1 . Common Adjectives 48
§ 2. Adjectives corresponding to the Genitive 51
$ 3. Adjectives derived from Postpositions 54
Exercises on 8$ 1 , 2 and 3 .
55
Art. II. Adjectives in Particular .
57
Numeral Adjectives • 57
§ 1. Cardinal Numbers . 57
§ 2. Ordinal Numbers . 62
vi CONTENTS

Page
§ 3. Distributive Numbers 62
§ 4. Reduplicative or Multiple Numbers 62
§ 5. Repetitive Numbers 63
8 6. Numeral Adverbs 63
Exercises on the Numeral Adjectives 63
Art. Ifi. Degrees of Adjectives 64
§ 1. Comparative 64
Exercises on the Comparatives 66
§ 2. Superlative 67
§ 3. Irregular Comparatives and Superlatives 68
§ 4. Augmentative and Diminutive 68
Exercises on the Superlatives .
69
Chapter III . Pronouns . 70
§ 1. Personal Pronouns 70
Adjectives derived from the Personal Pronouns 73
§ 2, Demonstrative Pronouns . 74
Adjectives derived from the Demonstrative Pronouns 75
§ 3. Relative Pronouns .
75
Adjective derived from " zo " 77
§ 4. Pronoun " apun" 0
77
Adjective derived from " apun" 78
§ 5. Interrogative Pronouns 78
§ 6. Indefinite Pronouns 79
Adjectives connected with the Indefinite Pronouns 80
§ 7. Reflexive Pronouns 81
§ 8. Emphatic Pronouns 81
§ 9. Correlative Pronouns 82
Exercises on Pronouns . .
83
Chapter IV. Verbs 86
Art I. Verbs in General and their Conjugation 86
$ 1. Preliminary Observations . 86
§ 2. Formation of Tenses 87
I. Affirmative form 87
II. Negative form .
93
§ 3. Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verbs " zatā ” and “ assā " 97
Zatā : I. Affirmative form .
97
II. Negative form . . 100

Assā : I. Affirmative form 102

II. Negative form 104

§ 4. Conjugation of the Regular Intransitive Verb “ Nid =
sleep " . 107
 CONTENTS vii

Page.
I. Affirmative form . 107
III
II. Negative form
§ 5. Observations on Verbs 115
1. Some forms seldom used 115
2. Insertion of the euphonical vowel 116
3. Future in “ an ” and “ in ” . .
117
4 First Person Plural Future " un" . 117
5. Use of Konkani Tenses 117
6. Passive Voice . 118
7. Leading Tenses 118
8. Future Absolute and Contingent . 118
9. Second Future .
119
10 . Participles 119
II . Conditionatum and Conditional 120

12 . Borrowed forms 121

13. Perfect and Past Perfect of " assā " negative . I 21

14. Infinitive Absolute . I 21

15. Spelling of the forms in " -50 " I 22

16. Gerund in “ -tastana " I 22

17 . Use of " zatā " and " assā ” . I 22

18. Changes of termination (Conjugation) I 22

19. Declension of Verbal forms 123

20 . Termination “ -unk ” of the Potential 123
21 . Different forms put under one tense 123
22 . “ Nāñ ” and “ nakā” 124
23. Euphonical changes of Genders 124
24. Double consonants . 124
25. Particles added to Verbal forms 124
26. Distinction of Tenses into simple and compound, and
of simple into declinable and indeclinable Tenses ;
usual terminations of Tenses I 24
27. Quantity of vowels . . . 126
28. Past Perfect . . I 26
29 . More common forms . 126
30. Potential and Necessary Moods .
126
31. Varieties of spelling .
127
Exercises on Verbs 128
Art. II. Different kinds of Verbs . 132
§1 . Causative Verbs 132
§ 2. Reciprocal Verbs . •
133
§ 3. Reflexive Verbs 133
 viii CONTENTS

Page
§ 4: Verbs excluding Companionship (perhaps Solitary
Verbs) . 134
$ 5. Compound Verbs . 135
§ 6. Periphrastic Conjugation . 135
8 7. Irregular Verbs 136
Conjugation of “ vetār.” 137
Conjugation of “ kăr” . 138
Conjugation of Verbs ending in a vowel 141
Conjugation of a Causative Verb and of its corres
ponding non-causative Neuter Verb .
142
8 8. Defective Verbs •
144
Exercises on Verbs ( continued ) . 144
Chapter V. Adverbs .
147
1. a ) Principal Adverbs of Place with the derived Adjectives 147
b) Principal Adverbs of Time with the derived Adjectives 147
c) Principal Adverbs of Quantity with the derived Adjectives. 148
d) Principal Adverbs of Manner with the derived Adjectives. 149
Exercises on Adverbs .
150
Chapter VI. Postpositions 151
Exercises on Postpositions . 154
Chapter VII. Conjunctions .
154
Chapter VIII. Interjections 156

PART III . SYNETYMOLOGY

Chapter I. Words used in speaking to or about persons 157
Chapter II. Suffixes modifying the meaning of Words . 160
Chapter III. Interrogative Particle . . 162
Chapter IV . Negative Form 163
Art . I. Substantives .
163
II. Adjectives . 164
III. Pronouns . 165
‫ور‬ IV. Verbs . .
165
V. Adverbs 166
VI. Conjunctions . 166
Chapter V. Derivation of Words . .
167
Art . I. Nouns 167
II. Adjectives .
170
III. Verbs . .
174
IV. Adverbs 176
Chapter VI. Composition of Words .
177
Art. I. Verbs 177
 CONTENTS ix

Page
Art . II . Nouns and other Parts .
178
Chapter VII. Nasal sound . 181
Chapter VIII. Changes of letters .
184
Chapter IX. On certain letters 191

PART IV . SYNTAX
Chapter I. Agreement or Concord 196
Exercises 201

Chapter II. Use of each Part of Speech . 202

Art. I. Nouns . 202

A. General Observations 202

B. Cases .
205
§ 1 . Nominative . .
205
Exercises . 206
§ 2. Dative . 206
Exercises 209
§ 3. Accusative .
209
Exercises 211

8 4. Instrumental 211

Exercises . 213
§ 5. First Locative .
214
Exercises 215
8 6. Second Locative 215
Exercises 217
§ 7. Original 217
Exercises .
219
§ 8. Original Case, with " lagiñ " or " kådeſ ” . .
219
Exercises . 220

220
§ 9. Original Case followed by other Postpositions .
Exercises 222

Art. II . Adjectives . 223

$ 1 . Adjectives in General .
223
§ 2. Adjectives in Particular . . 227
1. Adjectives derived from Postpositions . 227
2. Adjectives corresponding to the Latin Adjectives
in -bilis 229
3. Quasi-diminutive Adjectives •
230
4. Adjectives corresponding to the Latin instar 230
5. Verbal Adjectives 230
6. Complex Adjectives . 231
7. Participial Adjectives 231
B
х CONTENTS

Page
8. Numeral Adjectives 231
9. Comparative and Superlative 232
Exercise .
233
Art. III. Pronouns 234
§ 1. Pronouns in General 234
§ 2. Pronouns in Particular 234
1. Personal Pronouns 234
2. Relative Pronouns 236
3. Correlative Pronouns 238
4. Pronoun “ apun" 241
5. Interrogative Pronouns 242
6. Indefinite Pronouns 242
Exercises . 243
Art. IV. Verbs . • 244
A. Verbs in General 244
§ 1 . Tenses and Moods . 244
§ 2. Some other forms of Tenses 267
§ 3. Deficient and Corresponding Tenses . 270
4. Passive Voice . 275
B. Verbs in Particular . 280
§ 1 . “ Zatā ” and “ assā ” 280
§ 2 . Causative Verbs 281
§ 3. Frequentative Verbs 283
§ 4. Emphatic and Exclusive Verbs 283
§ 5. Inceptive Verbs . . 283
§ 6. Neuter Verbs n 284
§ 7 Reciprocal Verbs . 286
8 8. Reflective Verbs 286
8 9. Dubitative and Quasi-diminutive Verbs . 286
$ 10. Compound Verbs 287
Art. V. Adverbs 290
§ 1 . Adverbs in General 290
§ 2. Adverbs in Particular . 292
Art. VI. Postpositions 294
§ 1. Postpositions in General 294
§ 2. Postpositions in Particular 296
Art. VII. Conjunctions 302
§ 1 . Conjunctions in General 302
§ 2 . Conjunctions in Particular 302
Chapter III. Construction . 305
Art. 1. Partial Construction 305
 CONTENTS xi

Page
§ 1. Verbs of Finite Mood . 305
§ 2. Participles . 308
Art. II. Complexive Construction . .
310
§ 1. Collocation of Words . 310
§ 2 . Connexion of Sentences 312
Chapter IV. Considerations about Konkani . .
314
Art . I. Origin of Konkani . .
314
II. Present state of Konkani 316
III. What Konkani can become . .
317
IV. Rules for beginners in speaking Konkani . 321
V. Peculiarities of Kopkani . 323
Appendix I. Explanation of some difficult Modes of Speaking 329
Appendix II. Translation of some Chapters from the Holy Bible •
342
Genesis .
346
Proverbs . .
360
Gospel of St. Luke . 382
Gleaning and Cleaning, tápsprov 395

B*
 PREFACE

HIS Grammar was at first intended for private circu

lation among the Missionaries of this Vicariate. Hence

there are many things which will probably be unintelligible

to the general reader . It was only when a great portion
had already passed through the press , that at the repeated
request of friends it was thought not imprudent to present
it to the general public.
This book in the main has been composed, on account of
urgent necessity, within a few months , without any other
assistance than what could be derived from a study of the
spoken language in its many varieties, choosing the forms
which seemed to be more exact and forming some general
rules by way of induction, and this, after a year and half's
acquaintance with English and Konkani. Hence the reader
cannot expect either a perfectly English style or a masterly
arrangement of the various parts of the Grammar, or a thorough
accuracy in the formation of rules, or faultless purity in the
Konkani language itself.
One word about the second appendix. After careful con
sideration the author has deviated from the common way ,
in writing Konkani with Kanarese characters , and this for
the reasons touched upon in the Parergon . If this new
way does not prove suitable, the common one can be kept.
xiv PREFACE

In some secondary points, however, on account of hurry, a

constant manner of writing in this new way could not be
preserved.
Such therefore as this work is, it is offered first to the
Missionaries, in the hope of its promoting God's glory, to whose
help is due whatever good there is in this Grammar, and
secondly to the Konkani public, in the hope of its stimulating
the further study of their long neglected language.

Mangalore, January 1882 . A. F. X. M.

6
3. M. D. 6.
 Advertisement

In order to have a more complete or exact notion

of the various points of the Grammar, the correspond
ing pages of the Parergon , p. 395 , must be consulted.
 PART I ORTHOGRAPHY

CHAPTER I. ALPHABET

The Konkani language was formerly written with the

alphabet called Bālabodha or Nāgar ; sometimes it was written
with the Mödi Alphabet, which is the Mahrāțți Alphabet.
Now the Kanarese Alphabet is generally used, and although
it does not express all Konkani sounds , yet it is better adapt
ed for this than the Latin Alphabet. But as the Kanarese
Alphabet is not known to the greater part of my brethren,
for whom I write, I shall use the Latin Alphabet, with the
required modifications, which I am going to explain .
First of all, I premise that I pronounce and read all
7

Konkani words written with Roman characters, as Latin is

pronounced and read in Italy and more or less also in Eng
land by Catholics , with some few exceptions to be explained
later on .

Now let us explain the Konkani Alphabet and the modifi

cations to be introduced in the Latin Alphabet in order to
make it express the Konkani sounds.
Although I am aware that many things should be said
about this point of Orthography, yet I will limit myself for
the present to the most essential observations.
The vowels are the same as in Latin , but each simple
vowel has two sounds and in Kanarese two different characters :
one sound is long , the other is short. The long vowels are
 - 2

pronounced slowly and have the stress of the voice upon

them. The short vowels are pronounced quickly and have no
stress of voice upon them . Thus the Konkani long and short
vowels are not very different from the long and short Latin
vowels. The short à is considerably different: it can be
best learned from aa teacher.. The nearest approach tº to it is
the short u in English , e.g. but, or the a in faro ; although
even this u and a are not the Konkani short a. In words of
more than one syllable, this a short is pronounced almost as
a short o.
I shall mark, if required, the long vowels by this sign -,
placed above the vowel , the short vowels by this signº .
Moreover some vowels may have an open or closed
sound as in Italian l'oro, loro. I shall use the sign to
indicate the open , and the sign , to indicate the closed sound,
when it may be required.
Besides the usual full vowels a, e, i, o, u there is a half
vowel ; this is not an a, not an o, not an u : it is a middle
sound similar to the half vowel which is added by the Romans
to the words which end in a consonant. This sound is neces
sary, chiefly when a word ends in a double consonant ; be
cause without pronouncing this half vowel, the double con
sonant cannot be heard. Moreover there is a vowel , which
may be called nearly u, because it sounds almost like u. It
occurs in many words which have the accent upon the pre
ceding syllable, e.g. kēsụ =hair. It is similar to the preceding
half vowel ; yet there seems to be some difference.
As in Konkani no word can end in a pure full consonant,
it will not be necessary to express this in writing, if this
general rule be remembered, i.e. that no word can end in a
pure consonant . Hence, if a word ends in a consonant in
this Grammar and in the Dictionary, this half vowel must be
always understood. It is true that there are degrees in the
pronunciation of it, so that sometimes it is hardly heard,
sometimes it seems to be half a, etc. , yet for the present these
 3

niceties may be omitted . If it be required sometimes to in

dicate it, I shall write it a, as I write the nearly u.
What I said , that no Konkani word may end in a pure consonant, is true,
if we write Konkani according to Kanarese. But if we do not take this into
consideration, we may say that in Konkani words may occur ending in a pure
consonant, as in European languages. Of course at the end of each word
ending in a consonant, a kind of half vowel is, I may say, naturally pro
nounced ; but this is not a thing peculiar to the Konkani language. This is
one of the reasons why the Kanarese alphabet, following the Kanarese rules,
is not perfectly suitable to Konkani .
The consonants are the same as in Latin, except that
1. d, dh, n, 1, t, th may have two sounds, i.e. either as
in Latin (about db, th see below) or a sound which is got by
turning the tip of the tongue upwards, so as to touch the roof
of the mouth far away from the front teeth . For this reason
they may be called cerebral consonants. I shall mark these
cerebral consonants with a dot under them, e.g. ț. The best
way to pronounce, at least approximately , the cerebral sound
of ą and dh is to pronounce it like the English r, viz. not
full as in Latin , but half only. Yet this ļ and dh do not
always take such a sound , i.e, of the English r. Use will
teach you .
2. k or c hard, g hard (as g in gallus), g soft (as g in
genus, or as the English j) , č soft (like c in cinis) t, t, d, d, p
have two sounds, i.e. either as in Latin (and t, d, as explained
above) or aspirated, as if there were an aspirated English or
German h after the consonant , to be sounded distinctly from
the preceding consonant, e.g. d'h. It is nearly expressed in
the Irish pronunciation of the word which . I shall mark
these consonants with an h written after them, e.g. th.
3. The Latin c and g may change in the same word, the
soft sound into a hard sound : e.g. ager, agri; g, in the Nomi
native is soft, in the Genitive is hard . Not so in Konkani. If
g in the Nominative has a soft sound, it keeps it in all cases ;
and if it has a hard sound, it keeps it in all cases. The same
must be said of c hard or k and c soft. For the sake of dis
1*
 - 4

tinction I shall write the soft g, j. But this j must be pro

nounced sometimes rather like č (which sound can be explained
only orally) or thinner than the English j. The hard g I
shall write g . For the same reason I shall write the soft
c , č, and the hard c, k . So there is no necessity of a pure c ;
for its two sounds are expressed either by č or by k; yet,
wherever c occurs it must be pronounced according to the
Latin , namely before a, o, u as k, before ,
e, i as č. To express,
if required , the Latin j, I shall use the English y.
4. In Konkani there are five similar sounds, namely the >

first as a hard s (as in assis) , the second a soft s (as in rosa) ,

the third a hard z (as in Ital. sazio) , the fourth a soft z (as
in Zephirus or zio) , the fifth a very strong z (as in German
Zeit ). The first and second sounds very seldom occur ; but
the others are very frequent. In order to simplify, I will not >

introduce signs for the first and second sound ; where they
occur, I shall mark expressely their sounds. I mark the hard
z by s, the soft z by z only, the German z by tz or ts or tč.
This s may have many degrees, i. e ., from a sharp Latin s to the hard Italian z.
For the sake of simplicity, I express all these sounds from the sharp Latin s to
the hard Italian z by s, leaving those degrees to be learned by practice.
5. The Latin sound expressed by the Latin sc in scientia,
and in English by sh, I will express by š.
6. In Konkani there occurs at every step the nasal sound
expressed in Kanarese by o. If this sound occurs in the middle
of a word , it does not differ much from m or n. So in order
to simplify, in the middle of aa word I shall write it by mor n.
But at the end of a word, it has also the same sound , namely,
of an indistinct m or n pronounced through the nose ; but as
in Latin a final m or n has not such a sound, I shall mark
this nasal sound at the end of a word by ñ or ñ.
7. The Latin compound consonant gn as in magnus , is
usually pronounced , separating both consonants, as if it were
written g-n or, as they pronounce it in German , e.g. Ig -natius.
So in order to make this clearer, I write the two consonants
 - 5

separately g - n . If the consonants gn are written united, then

they should be pronounced as nh in Portuguese , viz. as one
sound, and as in Italian is pronounced in the word mugnajo.
This is chiefly the case in the Portuguese (or derived from
the Portuguese) family -names, e.g. Norogna.
1. Often I write the family -names having this sound gn by nh in tho
Portuguese way, because this is the custom .
2. Moreover lb , occurring in the family-names is pronounced as in Portu
guese, i. e. as gl followed by i in Italian, as in the word figlio ; e.g. Coelho.
3 . If sč occur, it cannot be pronounced as in Latin (scientia, scala ), but
the consonants must be pronounced separately as if it were written 8-c ; e.g.
hăs-čeñ = to laugh .
4.
Some other sounds should be noticed , but for the present may be
omitted. But exactness would require them, as also exactness would have ro
quired me to explain the above given sounds more distinctly, with some excep
tions and niceties.

The following then is the Konkani alphabet written with.

Roman characters, modified :
å, X = short a (often very near = closed e
to 6) = open e
ā, Ā = long a
> em or eñ = nasal e
a = common a
- f = common f
ಇ -half a == hard g, as gh in Latin
am or añ = nasal a gh Eg= hard aspirated
b = common b j = g soft, as j in English
bh = b aspirated jh = the preceding aspirated
č = C soft h = h aspirated as in English
ch = the preceding aspirated and German
k = C hard, English k ỉ, I = short i
kh = the preceding aspirated 1, Ī = long i -

d = common d im or iñ = i nasal
dh = d aspirated
- i = Latin common i
d = d cerebral 1 = common 1
dh = d aspirated ! = cerebral 1
ě, Ě = shorte m = common m
ē , Ē = longe n = common n
 - 6

ņ = n cerebral th = t aspirated
, V = short 0 t = t cerebral
ő, = long o th =- ţ aspirated
ó = closed o ů, Ŭ = short u
ò = open o ū , U = long u
O = common o umor uñ = nasal u
oſ or oñ = nasal o = half u or nearly u
р = common p V = v as in Latin , sometimes
ph = p aspirated, nearly f nearly u
q = as in Latin (qui). у = y as in English
r = common r tz or ts = very strong 2 , as in
S
= z hard, as in sazio, or German
as s in est kš = the Latin x
Z = 2 soft, as in zio m or ñ = nasal sound
= sh in English = sign of the accent (see
't = common t below )

The signs of aspiration of the cerebral sound etc. will

only be used when necessary. Sometimes by omitting some of
these signs, the meaning is entirely changed ; e.g. sõd= leave,
sõd = seek, etc.
If we had to write Konkani with Kanarese letters, some other observations
would be required , chiefly to show how pronunciation can agree with writing ;
e.g. what is written here e and ea should be written ye and ya ; au should
be written avu etc.

1.One consonant is often changed into another for the sake of euphony, ee.g.
a) All Adjectives ending in so or zo in the Nominative Singular Masou
line change the s or z into č or j in all other cases and genders ; e.g. mozo =
my ; fem . moji.
b) A word ending in z or s in the Nominative Singular changes this s or z
into j or č or š ; e.g. sānz = evening, sanjer = in the evening ; monis = man,
monšāk =
= to the man.
c) S followed by another s or t becomes š, if the second s is changed into
č on account of Declension ; e.g. has-ta = laughs, haščeñ = to laugh.
d) The nasal ñ or ñ becomes a pure n, if by inflexion a word loses the
consonant joined to ñ or ñ, so that ñ be followed by a vowel , or by another n ;
e.g. burgeanā = 0 children !
 - 7

e) The nasal sound ñ which is hardly heard at the end, is very distinctly
heard if, by adding some letter, it becomes medial ; e.g. atañ = now , atâñtz = just
now ; saddāñ = always, saddañtz = always (emphatic) .
f) The half vowel a, which, if final, is hardly heard in many cases, is
very distinctly heard if by adding a syllable it ceases to be final; e. g. apun =
himself; a is not heard , although if we write it in Kanarese, we should put the
semi-vowel a. But if we add to apun the emphatic tz, that a appears = apunătz.
g) Common people often pronounce h instead of s ; e.g. aha, instead of
asa ; kăbălo instead of kåssålo.
2. I said above that the Kanarese alphabet is not quite suited to the
Konkani language, because there are some sounds which cannot be expressed
exactly by the Kanarese alphabet . They are chiefly these : the hard Latin s,
the soft Latin s, z, tz, ạ. Moreover many names have the half vowel in such
a slight degree, that they seem to end in a consonant. But in Kanarese we
cannot express this exactly.
3. The sound expressed by tz sometimes seems to be rather tč, sometimes
ts ; hence sometimes it may be found written tz, sometimes tč or ts. The sounds
tz or ts are almost the same ; tè inclines a little to č, preceded by t ; nay
sometimes it is not clear whether it is č or to or tz.
4. Finally, the compound vowels (as all others) ei, ai, au , oi, ou , etc., as
hinted, are pronounced in the Latin way ; hence, e.g. baunta is pronounced not
as in taught but as ou in house : ou is not pronounced as in house, but with
the sound of o in note, followed by the sound of u in rule etc.

CHAPTER II. ACCENT

In order to enable ourselves from the very beginning to

read correctly we must know something about the accent.
As a general rule all Konkani words have the accent on
the last syllable .
1. I do not reckon as a syllable that which ends in a or ạ. Hence the
accent falls upon the preceding syllable, because the preceding syllable is truly
the last full syllable.
2. If the last syllable is a diphthong, usually the first vowel has the ac
cent, although there are some exceptions ; e.g. ui" = yes ; kai" = when ; khai" =
where ; tăi" = there.
3. I shall mark in the Dictionary the accent in doubtful cases. If nothing
is noted about diphthongs, it must be understood that the accent is on the first
vowel .
 - 8

Exceptions
1 . The cardinal numbers from 11 to 18 inclusive, (ac
cording to low castes) , and
2. Raja , sade and a few other words have the accent
upon the penultimate.
3 . Foreign words adopted , chiefly family -names, retain
their original accent, although common people are very fond
of making even these follow the general rule, especially Portu
guese words ; thus they say : Soz , Coel , Pint etc. instead of
Suza, Coelho, Pinto.
N. B. When it is necessary the accent will be shown by this sign " put
after the vowel which has the emphasis.

APPENDIX

about long and short vowels

Great care is to be taken in pronouncing the vowels ac
cording to their quantity. The quantity is often indicated in
the Dictionary. Moreover note this : a is long in the termi
nation of the 1st Declension, o and eñ are always long in
the 3rd Declension. Further e, the termination of the cases
in some declensions, is open. Generally speaking, I think that
if a word ends in a full vowel, it is long.
 PART II. ETYMOLOGY
or Parts of Speech

CHAPTER I. SUBSTANTIVES
The chief things to be considered about Substantives are
Declension and Gender.

Art. I. Declension

A. General Observations
The Declensions may be arranged more or less as in Latin ;
thus I shall simplify this apparently hopeless task. It is true,
there may be some exceptions, but what language is there
without exceptions ? This happens even in the most cultivated
languages; much more then must this happen in Konkani,
which is an assemblage of dialects rather than a formed
language. Moreover consider, that I am writing the Grammar
for the districts in which we are living ; perhaps going fur
ther north, some difference, though not a substantial one, may
be found .
How then can we arrange Konkani words in Declensions so
that they may be distinguished one from the other ? In Latin
we distinguish five Declensions, because there are five different
ways of modifying a word in the different cases. Thus any
Latin word is inflected in the different cases either as rosa or
as ager, or as homo, or as spiritus, or as dies. Moreover one
Declension is distinguished from another by the Genitive Case
which is different in each Declension ; whereas some other case
of one Declension may be the same as some other case of
2
 10

another Declension . In a similar way in Konkani there are five

different ways of modifying a word in the different cases ; and
as in Latin, we know the Declension of a Noun from the Genitive,
so in Konkani we may know the Declension of a Noun not from
the Genitive (as there is no Genitive, usually), but from the
case which is different in each Declension , which consequently
might be called the Characteristic. This case is the Original.:
Thus some Nouns have the Original ending in e or je, some in a
not preceded by e, some in a preceded by e (ea ), some in i, some
in u. I could not find another termination ; hence there are five
Declensions. I said now the Original in Konkani may be used
as the Genitive in Latin , in order to distinguish the Declensions.
But this Original in Konkani has an additional advantage over
the Latin Genitive ; for it is at the same time the stem from
which all other cases may be formed . And what I say, must .
be understood also of the Original Plural, namely from the
Original Plural we can form all other cases ; yet the Declension
is known only from the Original Singular. The Original
Singular is always given in the Dictionary. The Original
Plural will be given below. There are therefore five De
clensions. In each Declension there are two Numbers, Sin
gular and Plural.
In Konkani eight Cases may be distinguished ; namely, No
minative, Original , Dative, Accusative, Vocative, Instrumental,
1st Locative , 2nd Locative. The cases which require an ex
planation are Original, Instrumental , 1st and 2nd Locative.
Instrumental and Locative are used also in Kanarese and
Tulu. That case which is used to indicate instrument , cause,
manner, is called Instrumental from the chief meaning which
it has ; Locative is that which indicates chiefly place and time,
and is called Locative, because it is mostly used to indicate
place. I must subdivide this Locative into 1st and 2nd
Locative, because there are two different ways ; the first
corresponds to the English Preposition in , the 2nd to on
or upon .
 11

The Original Case does not exist in Kanarese and Tulu.

This case usually has the same form as the Vocative, just as
in the Latin 2nd Declension, Dative and Ablative have the
same form , yet the meaning is very different; hence I cannot
include it in the Vocative . This case is called Original,
not from the chief meaning as the other cases, but from the
chief use of it ; that is, this case is nothing else but the pure
stem from which all other cases (which have not the same
form as the Nominative) are derived by adding some termi
nations. Therefore, I call it Original ; it might be called also
stem or crude form . The use of it will be indicated in the
Syntax ; for the present it is enough to know, that usually
this case is used with nearly all Postpositions. What I say
here, must be understood also of the Adjectives; because even
these have their Original Case ; nay sometimes the Original
Case of the derived Adjective is used with some Postpositions
instead of the Original Case of the corresponding Substantive.
There is no pure Genitive Case, because the Genitive Case
is changed into an Adjective; e.g. the “ love of God ” is changed
into “ Divine love;" this will be explained below more dis
tinctly. But in order to meet the objection that there is a Geni
tive, I answer that the Genitive in Konkani follows in every
thing the rules of the Adjective: it has three terminations, like
the Adjective ; it agrees with the governing noun in gender,
number, case etc. Yet, if even this does not satisfy, let us at
least suppose the Genitive to be an Adjective; because thus
it becomes very easy : else, it becomes very difficult and, I
may say , inexplicable. Nevertheless I grant that a pure
Genitive sometimes occurs (see below). Now I explain each
Declension in particular : first I will try to give a general
rule for all Declensions, then I will explain the rule of each
Declension or rather apply the general rule to each Declen
sion . This general rule may render this point much easier ;
it should be read again after having learned the five Declen
sions.
2*
 12

1. I call stem that form of the noun from which all other cases may be
derived . This form is usually found in the Original Case, and is given in the
Vocabulary.
2. I call characteristic the last vowel or diphthong of the stem, viz : e for
1st Declension, a for the 2nd, ea for the 3rd, i for 4th, u for the 5th .
3. I call root what remains after having taken away the characteristic
from the stem ; e.g. in mõg = love, mõg - a is the stem, a the characteristic, mög
the root . Often the root is found in the Nominative, but not always ; e.g. in
the 3rd Declension , the Nominative is not the root.

How are Nouns to be declined ? Singular: The Nominative

and Original are given in the Dictionary ; the Dative is formed
by adding k to the stem , the Accusative in animate objects
is usually equal to the Dative ; in inanimate objects, it is
equal to the Nominative ; Vocative is equal to the Original ;
the Instrumental is formed by adding n to the stem. The 1st
Locative is formed by adding nt to the stem. The 2nd Loca
tive is formed by adding r to the stem, (or sometimes gér.
See below ) in the inanimate objects, or čer with animate ob
jects , (or we may say also by adding r to the stem of the
feminine-derived Adjective). In Latin the Instrumental should
be expressed by the pure Ablative or by the Preposition a,
per etc., with the required case. The Locative in Latin should
be expressed by the Preposition in ....supra....followed by
the required case. The Latin cases preceded by some pre
positions, which are not to be translated with the Instru
mental or Locative, are not expressed in Konkani by a pecu
liar case, but by the Original followed by the Postposition re
quired by the meaning ; e. g . bāpā višiānt = about the father,
de patre. Even the Instrumental and Locative sometimes
may be expressed by the Original, followed by the Post
positions required by the meaning ; e.g. instead of bāpān =
through the father, we may say bāpā vorvi ; instead of mezār,
mezā voir .
Plural : For the Nominative I could not find any general
rule ; because this as well as the Original differs in the diffe
rent Declensions. About the Original I can only say that it
 13

is always nasal ; and this must be borne in mind , as it must

be known in order to form the other cases of the Plural.
Nevertheless I put here the characteristics of the Original
Plural which might be called the stem of the Plural; for,
from this the other cases are formed . 1st Declension an,
2nd Declension añ, 3rd Declension ean,
eañ 4th Declension iňiñ ,
5th Declension uñ.
The sign ñ has to be considered as an indistinct . n which at the end of a
word is not so distinctly heard ; but if a consonant follows, it sounds moro
distinctly like n.
In order to form the other cases of the Plural proceed in
the same way as in the Singular, remembering that you have
to take as the fundamental form the stem of the Plural, i.e.
the Original Plural given above; whereas, in the formation
of the Singular, we take as the fundamental form the stem of
the Original Singular.
Here it must be observed about all or, at least, about
some Declensions, that, as in Greek , there are in Konkani
many contracted Nouns . It seems to me, that this general
rule might be laid down regarding this point. In Nouns of
more than one syllable in the Nominative singular, the vowel
before the last syllable of the other cases is usually dropped,
if the nature of the consonants allows it, or, more clearly, if
the word can be easily pronounced without a vowel . (It is un
derstood that if the Accusative is equal to the Nominative, the
vowel is not dropped.) Thus pātak=sin, in the Dative becomes
pātkāk , shortened from pāțakāk. The same rule is to be ob
served in the Plural. Thus here pātkāõ = sins. This con
traction is generally indicated in the Dictionary ; and it takes
place chiefly in the 2nd Declension and also in the 1st De
clension and in the 4th.
Usually the omitted vowel is a and by this omission the
Noun has as many syllables as in the Nominative. Yet some
times, this omitted vowel is also u or i ; e.g. zulum = violence;
Ablative : zulmen ; vonad, vondi = wall.
 14

1. I said above that in Konkani a contraction takes place as in Greek :

there is some difference ; for in Greek more usually the vowels are contracted ;
but here a vowel is simply omitted.
2. Sometimes I found inanimate objects having the Accusative in k, and
animate objects having the Accusative equal to the Nominative. Nevertheless I
think that the above general rule is always right, viz. in animate objects to make
the Accusative equal to the Nominative.
3. Though no general rule can be given for the formation of the Original
Plural, yet we may obtain its stem in the first three Declensions by changing
the characteristic of the Singular into -añ (except the Original of the 3rd
Declension which is -eañ), and in the 4th and 5th Declensions by making
the characteristic of the Singular nasal.
4. As in Latin so in Konkani there are Nouns which seem to follow one
or the other Declension ad libitum . Those Nouns will be put in the Dictionary.
5. Names of measures seem to be used in the Singular with Plural mean
ing ; e.g. tīn vār = three yards. Yet this is not so fixed, and I have heard
also tin vāri.
6. Nouns have no determinate article like the English the.
Tā, tī, tēñ = is, ea, id, or o, i , eñ = hic, hac, hoc, may be used for it ; yet it
does not correspond exactly to the English the. The undeterminate article
corresponding to the English a or an is yek. (See below.)
There occurs often a case in r not according to the above rules, viz. at the
nuns = mādringér ; at our house = āmgér ; at Coelho's house = Coelhiger. This
form seems to be used only to show place in a house, as in the given examples,
as in English : at Robertson's. This irregularity may be explained either by
saying that that ógér' is a corruption of găr = house, so that āmgér would be the
same as amče garār, or by saying that the postposition suffix čer is changed
into gér, if the meaning is as given above, i.e. to live in the house of ....
Now having already given the general rule for the Declen
sions , we may add some general observations about them .
1. I said that Postpositions are often added to the Origi
nal, e.g. bāpāvorvi. If the Postposition begins with a vowel,
this is omitted to prevent two vowels coming together.
2 . Some Postpositions are simply added to the affected
Noun in a separate word , some are joined to it in one word :
these are the Postpositions, which have been given above as
terminations of the Instrumental and Locative. Probably,
formerly they were true Postpositions; now they are used
only as terminations, except r, which perhaps is shortened
 15

from " voir" = upon , which voir is even now used as a true Post
position.
3. It is allowed very often to add the Postpositions to the
stem of the derived Adjective instead of adding them to the
stem of the Substantive ; e. g . " bāpāče višiānt" = about the father,
instead of “ bāpā višiānt" . Yet use sometimes may require the
one rather than the other form . Usually the shortened Post
position r of the 2nd Locative, is added to the stem of the
Noun with inanimate objects, to the stem of the Adjective with
animate objects; but in the Plural it is always added to the
stem of the Adjective. So " rukānčer ” = on the trees ; “ porvo
tānčer " = on the mountains .
4. There are only a few (perhaps only one) Postpositions
which are added to the Nominative, not to the Original ; this
is " paryant” = till, in Latin usque ; e.g. går paryant = till to
the house. Few others govern the Dative Singular Postposi
tions .
5. Some suffixes, if added to the Plural, undergo a little
change; €.g. -nt in the Plural becomes -niñ, r becomes some
times ri; namely, r becomes ri in the Plural, if it is added to
the stem of the Noun , and poetically sometimes ri is used
also in the Singular, added to the stem of the Noun, but this
is also poetical. So " garānt ” = at the house, “ garāniñ " = in
the houses. Nevertheless this change of Postposition in the
Plural seems not to be so strictly demanded ; for, I have some
times heard also " garānt" = in the houses.
6. If the English Preposition from ” in the meaning of
" out of” is to be translated into Konkani, the Noun affected by
that Preposition seems to become an Adjective in lo, li, leñ ;
hence this will be better explained in the paragraph on the
Adjective, e. g. “ J. C. delivered us from hell” . This from
hell” is changed into an Adjective: “ yemkaņdāntlo .”
7. The Nouns in a are seldom used in the Plural form ;
although the concord may be Plural , if the meaning is Plural ;
I say they are not used in Plural form , but they may be used
 16

with Plural meaning : " kurpa, or krupa" = grace and graces ;

-

“čintna"= thought and thoughts.

8. There are some Nouns in which the stem seems to be
derived from the Nominative by adding a whole syllable ; e.g.
“ dū ” = daughter, stem : “ duve"; but this is not really so, for that
v of the stem exists in the Nominative also, but not distinctly.
Yet there are Nouns in which the stem is formed by adding
two letters .
9. If many Nouns, one after the other, which should be
put in the Genitive, Dative or Accusative , belong to the same
thing, only the last Noun receives (or may receive) the full
termination ; the others are put often in the Original ; e.gi
Somia Jezu Kristāk namaskār kår” = adore the Lord Jesus
Christ ; “ Sargā āni souñsārāso ratznār ' = Creator of Heaven
and Earth ,
10. As in Latin, so in Konkani, there are some Nouns
used only in the Singular or only in the Plural ; e.g. “ ațevițe ” =
agony, is only Plural ; " lõk ” = people , is used more commonly
in Singular etc.
11. There are some indeclinable Nouns ; they will be
given in the Dictionary.
After these general considerations, each Declension is now
to be explained.

B. Declensions in particular
§ I. First Declension
Stem in e or Characteristic e

The Nouns of this Declension are usually feminine, as in

Latin . The Nominative may have different terminations,
namely i, a, u, or a consonant. Of these terminations only the
2nd is peculiar to the 1st Declension , viz. d. If you find a
Noun ending in the Nominative Singular in a, you may say it
is of the 1st Declension ; whereas the other terminations may
 17

be found in other Declensions also. In order to decline a

Noun of this Declension, the above rule (A.) is applied. To
know whether a Noun belongs to this Declension , see in the
Vocabulary whether it has the stem in e. It might be known
also by the meaning and termination, but not so certainly
and easily by a beginner. To determine by the meaning and
termination whether a Noun belongs to the 1st Declension ,
this rule may be laid down :
1. Nouns ending in a in the Nominative Singular are of
the 1st Declension. There are only a few Nouns ending in a, a
which do not belong to this Declension ; e.g.“ kulla” = dwarf,
and “ lotřebira ” = quack, which belong to the 2nd Declension .
2. Nouns ending in i or in a consonant of the Feminine
Gender are mostly of the 1st Declension . Those in i of Femi
nine Gender, if not of the 1st , are of the 4th Declension .
3. If you find a Noun having e before the termination
of the oblique cases, or if you find an Adjective derived from
the Noun, having e before the termination of the Adjective
(so or lo ), that Noun is of the 1st Declension ; e.g. kušālai
eso = pleasant, from kušālai, -e = pleasure.
4. Nouns ending in ai of the Feminine Gender usually
follow this Declension ; e.g. ladai = war.
The Nouns of this Declension are thus declined :

Singular.
Nominative, as given in the Dictionary.
Original, as given in the Dictionary .
Dative, add to the Original k.
Accusative, in animate objects as the Dative, in inanimate
objects as the Nominative.
Vocative, as the Original .
Instrumental, add n to the Original.
Ist Locative, add nt to the Original.
2nd Locative, add r, or čer, as it has been explained above.
3
 18

For the other Latin cases which cannot be translated by

one of these eight Konkani cases, use the Original, followed
by the Postposition required by the meaning ; e.g. Dēvā višiānt =
about God ; šārā thāun = from the town ; bāpā lāgiñ = with the
father ; Dēvā thăiñ " = in God ; māye kåde = close to the mother,
etc. The required Postpositions may be found in the Dictionary.
Moreover sometimes instead of using the Instrumental, 1st and
2nd Locative, the Original may be used, followed by the re
quired Postposition ; e.g. kurpen or kurpe vorvi = by the grace .
(See A. General Observations .)
The things said here about Original followed by a Postposition must be
understood also of the Plural .

Plural.
Nominative, add to the root o (is pronounced nearly yo
sometimes).
Original, add to the root añ (stem) .
Dative, add to the stem k.
Accusative, in animate objects equal to the Dative, in
inanimate objects as the Nominative.
Vocative, as the Original.
Instrumental, add niñ.
ist Locative, niñ.
2nd Locative, čer etc. as in the Singular.
Examples.
1. Animate object: Rāņi = queen ; stem : Rāņi-e (or Rāṇiye) .
Singular : Plural :
Nominative Rāņi Răni-o
Original Rāņi-e 1) Rāņi-āñ
Dative Rāņi-e-k Rāņi-āñ-k (=Rāņiāvk) )
Accusative Rāņi-e- k Rāņi-āñ - k (= Rāņiānk)
1) Exactly Rāņiye, and so in the other cases.
2) This n , which has not been put in the I. Chapter (as it is a nicety) should
be pronounced as ng in “ singing". The beginner may pronounce it as n , in
order not to increase the difficulties .
 19

Singular: Plural :
Vocative Rāņi-e Rāņi -āñ (Rāņiā-no, or
Rāņiānu, with the suffix )
Instrumental Rāni-e-n Rāņi-āñ-niñ (=Rāņiāniñ)
Ist Locative Rāņi-e-nt Rāņi-āñ-niñ ( = Rāņiāniñ )
2nd Locative Rāņi-e-čer Rāņi-āñ -čer
Original followed byRāni-e pāsun etc.Rāņi-āſ pāsun etc.
Postpositions
I write this example with the hyphens only in order to show the formation
of the different cases ; but usually the words are written without any hyphens.

2. Inanimate object : vāț = way ; stem : vāțe.

Nom . vāt vāt-o
Orig. vāt- e vāt-āñ
Dat. vāt-e-k vāt-āñ -k -( = vātānk )
Accus. vāt vāt - o [ suffix )
Voc. vāt-e vāt-āñ (or vāțāno with the
Instrum . vāt-e - n vāt-ā ñ -niñ (= vātāniñ)
Ist Loc . vāt-e -nt vāt-ā-niñ
2nd Loc. vāt-er vāt-an-čer
Orig. followed by vāt -e lägiñ etc.
vāt-āſ lāgiñ etc.
Postpositions
1. What has been said about the Accusative equal to the Dative for an
imate objects, and equal to the Nominative for inanimate objects, is not so cer
tain : Hence the above general rule must be modified according to the use.
Moreover this word " animate object” must be understood of subsistent animate
objects (subsistent in the philosophical meaning); hence čintna = thought, has
the Accusative equal to the Nominative, as it is not a subsistent animate object.
Ātmo = soul (of the 3rd Declension) is an animate object, but not a subsistent
animate object; hence Acousative ātmo equal to the Nominative. The names
of God and of angels follow the rule of animate objects. The plants and trees
have a vegetative life ; hence they could have the · Accusative equal to the
Dative ; yet as they cannot be called “ animate objects” in the same way as
animals and men, it seems that we may make their Accusative equal to the
Dative or to the Nominative. So we say “ ruk or rukāk poļeitā ” = (he) sees
the tree,

3*
 --- 20

2. As it appears from the Declension , the nasal ñ is sometimes changed

into a common n : exactly it should be written double ; e.g.
e vorsāñ-niñ = vorsānnið ;
yet, as it seems to be pronounced simple, I do not write two n . (See Part I.
Ch. I. )
These two Remarks belong to the following Declensions too.

Exercises
on the First Declension 1)
podvi , -ve = power čintna, -ne = thought
kurpa, -pea) = grace kumok, -mke = help
duv , -e = daughter māy, -e = mamma or mother
vāt, -e = way påtti , -e = list
sikša, -še = punishment bori = good ( fem .)
gărječi = necessary ( fem .) sobit = necessary
moji = my săma = right
assāñ or zaun assāñ = am assauñ = are (we)
assai = art
=
assāt = are (you)
=

assā = is assāt = are (they)

zatāñ = I become zatauñ = we become
zatai thou becomest zatāt = you become
zatā he becomes zatāt = they become
Singular : poļei = see Plural :

polei-tāñ = I see polei-tauñ = we see

polei-tai = thou seest poļei-tāt = you see
poļei-tā = he sees poļei-tāt = they see
māg = ask or pray
=
gāl = put
-

. māgā = ask
Pl. = motint = in the mind
1) The following Substantives are all feminine. The vowel put after them
indicates their Original Case, which is obtained by adding the vowel to the
Nominative. Sometimes the vowel is not added to the pure Nominative ; a little
change is to be made, e.g. the last vowel of the Nominative is cut off before
adding the Characteristic ; in these cases, usually, I write also the last letter to
which the vowel is to be added ; e.g. " vāț, -e ” means vāt, vāte ; “ kurpa, -pe "
means kurpa , kurpe ; “ kumok, -mke” means kumok, kumke.
2) Or krupa, as Hindu Brahmins pronounce.
 - 21

Kurpa gărječi (assā) . Māy duvek polei -tā. Bori čintna

bore vāțer gal-tā. Pătti săma zāun'assā. Vāt bori zāun
assā.. Duv mäye lāgiñ kumok māgtā. Kurpen duv sobit
zatā. Kurpā motint bori čintna gal-tā. Bori duv bore vāțer
assā. Moje māyek bori duv assā.

& II. Second Declension

Stem in a, or Characteristic a
The Nouns of this Declension are very numerous. As far
as I can learn , only Masculine and Neuter Nouns follow this
Declension . I found only two Substantives, which, according
to some persons, would follow this Declension , and are said to
be Feminine . But this is not certain ; for some other persons
told me the contrary. These two Substantives are “ kuli” =
tribe, and “ kurād " = axe. If these two Substantives are truly
used as Feminine, they follow another Declension, as I think ;
so I heard " kurāļin ” (of the 4th Declension) = by the axe.
The termination of the Nominative Singular varies , i.e.
the Nominative may end in any consonant and vowel, except
a, which is a sign of the 1st Declension, and o or eñ, which is
>

a sign of the 3rd Declension ; yet it is true that a full u very

often is a sign of the 5th Declension ; and i is a sign of the
1st or 4th Declension in the Nouns of Feminine Gender.
Consequently the chief terminations of the Nominative are a
consonant (sometimes with a, half vowel) or i, iñ, ai, u, uñ.
The Nouns of this Declension are known by the character
istic a given in the Vocabulary. They may be known also
by termination and by the meaning, but not so surely .
Namely, the following Nouns follow this Declension , although
not exclusively.
1. All Nouns of Masculine or Neuter Gender ending in
the Nominative Singular in a consonant. There may be per
haps a few Nouns of Masculine Gender ending in a consonant
(or in u) belonging to the 5th or to the 4th Declension.
 22

2. The Nouns in uñ, pon, ap (which always, or almost

always are Neuter) . Nouns in iñ of Neuter Gender follow this
Declension , Nouns in iñ of Feminine Gender follow mostly the
4th Declension ; e.g. ududiñ, -n ” = pumpkin, is of the 2nd
Declension ; whereas -buiñ ,” f., is of the 4th Declension .
3. Mostly also, the Nouns in auñ or aoñ (which usually
are of foreign origin) .
4. Finally a Noun having in the Oblique Cases a before
the termination, or Adjectives derived from Nouns having a
before the termination , belong to this Declension. Hence, no
Noun ending in o, eñ, and no Feminine Noun of any termina
tion follows this Declension .

In order to decline any Noun of this Declension , the above

(A) rule is applied.
Singular.
Nominative, as given in the Dictionary.
Vocative and Original, as given in the Dictionary or as known
by the above given rules.
Dative, add k to the stem.
Accusative, in animate objects as the Dative, and in inanimate
as the Nominative.
Instrumental, Locative etc., as in the 1st Declension .

Plural.

Nominative, Masculine equal to the Nominative Singular, in

the Neuter add añ to the root.
Vocative and Original, (Masculine and Neuter) , add añ to the
root .
Dative, add k to the stem.
Accusative, in animate objects as the Dative, in inanimate ob
jects as the Nominative.
Instrumental, Locative etc. as above.
 23

Example of an animate object

Putru or pūt = son ; stem : putr -a or pūt-a.
Singular: Plural :
Nom . putru putru
Orig. putr - a (or put-a) putr-añ
Dat. putr-ā-k putr-āñ -k (= putrārk)
Accus . putr -ā - k putr-an-k (= putrānk)
Voc. putr - a putr-āñ (or putrānu )
Instrum . putr -ān putr -āñ -niñ ( = putrānið )
Ist Loc. putr-ā-nt putr -āñ -niñ ( = ).
2nd Loc. putr - ā - čer putr -āñ - čer
Orig. followed by
putr-ā lāgiñ etc. putr-āñ lāgiñ etc.
Postpositions

Example of an inanimate object of Neuter Gender

Vórs == year ; stem : vors-a. $

Nom . vors vors-āñ

Orig . vors-a vors-āñ
Dat. vors - a - k .
vors-āñ-k ( = vorsārk)
Accus. vors vors-āñ
Voc. vors-ā vors- āñ (or vorsānu)
Instrum . vors-ā-n vors-āñ -niñ ( = vorsāniñ)
ist Loc. vors-ā-nt vors-än -niña
2nd Loc. vors-ā-r (vorsā-čer) vors-āñ-čer
Orig . followed by
vorsā lāgiñ etc. vorsáñ lāgiñ etc.
Postpositions
Remember that the Suffix in the 2nd Locative Singular can be added to the
stem of the Adjective ; so, instead of vors- ā-r, we may say vorsā-če-r. (See
below Adjective, and above General Observations.)
Observations.
1.1 . Kắšt = pain is Neuter in the Singular
and Masculine in the Plural ; consequently the Nominative
Plural is " kášť”. Yet many say that " kášt” is Masculine also
in the Singular .
 24

2. Contracted Nouns (see above A.) belong chiefly to this

Declension .
3. In this Declension there are many Nouns ending in u
in the Nominative, which u disappears in the stem . There
are other Nouns which end in uu and keep this u in the stem .")
The Dictionary will show whether they keep or lose this u.
But Nouns in auñ or aon change usually the uñ (or oñ) in a v ;
e.g. " sermauñ " = sermon , has in the stem : " sermav - a " , and so
many other Nouns like this ; very few Nouns in auñ follow the
5th Declension ; e. g. “ kordauñ”" = string. Moreover those
Nouns which end in a nasal sound in the Nominative Singular
lose it in the Declension, e.g. tāntiñ = egg ; Original: tāntia ;
although in the 4th Declension the nasal sound of the Nomi
native is sometimes kept also in the other cases ; e.g. bhuiñ =
earth.
4. Some Nouns of this Declension change the closed é of
the stem of the Singular into an open è in the Plural ; e. g. .

“ késu ” = hair; plural: " kės” .1) Moreover this y disappears in

the Plural.1)
5. In this Declension chiefly, (or perhaps exclusively)
there occurs sometimes a kind of Ablative in iñ ; it is an old
form , used chiefly to show manner, place, time . ..... 8.
“ ăntăskarņiñ " = heartly, from “ antaskărņ " = heart, instead of
“ antaskarņān ”; “ veļiñ ”, instead of " veļār” = at the time ; “ St.
Mark pustakiñ ” = in the gospel of St. Mark, instead of "
66
pustakānt” ; “ Bāpāče nāviñ ”, instead of “ Bāpāče nāvān " =
in the name of the Father etc. Yet in these cases the common
form too, might be, and is really, used sometimes.
6. There are a few irregular Nouns ; e.g. bāpui = father,
is declined as if the stem were bāpai or bāpā : those Nouns
will be indicated with their irregularity in the Dictionary.
1) About these points a general rule cannot at present be formed .
 25

Exercises
on the Second Declension .
går, -a = house (n .) kiteñ = what, which ?
kaliz , -lza = heart (n.) inām , -a = prize (n .)
bāgil , -gla = door (n.) kūd, -a = room (n.)
bāu , -ava = brother (m.) mez , -d = table (n.)
āz = today kām, -a = business (n.)
kăr = do
-
ò (pron . uò) = this (m.)
khăiñ " = where ?
=
tò = that (m .)
thăin " = there māróg, mārgā = road (m.)
dis, -a = day (m.) Deu , -eva = God
monis, monšarman (m.) vód = big
akmān , -a = offence (m.) lān = small
mozo = my tuzo = thy
āmso = our tumso = your
=

tāso = his di = give

tānso = their rūnd = broad
kumgār, -a =Communion (m.) ukto = open
pād = bad gī =(an interrogative particle)
ašir = narrow

Går vöd zāun assā. Mezār yek buk assā. Bāgil ukteñgī ?
Kūd lān zāun assā. Māróg åšir zāun assā. Az boro dis assā.
Moji māy khăiñ assā ? Tuji māy thăiñ assā. Vāț ašir zāun
assā. ī vāț rūnd. Ò monis boro, to monis pād. Deu
boreañ āni pāờ monšānk upkāraſ kartā. Bāglār yek monis
assā . Tuja bāvāk vód går assā, moja bāvāk lān går. Tujeñ
kām kiteñ ? Deu monšānk bore dis ditā ; monis Devāk akmān
kartāt. Az Pādri kumgār ditāgī ? Monis pād : tančeñ kaliz
vāit. Kumgārān monis boro zatā.
It has been said above (p . 22 , n. 2) that Nouns in uñ are Neuter and follow
this Declension. This must be understood thus : Nouns in uñ not preceded
by a or o are Neuter and follow this Declension ; because if uñ is preceded by
a or o (auñ , ouñ), those Nouns may be Masculine or Neuter (and then they
follow usually the 2nd Declension) , or seldom Feminine (and then they follow
4
 26

usually the 1st Declension) ; e. g. Irmauñ, -ava = confrier (m .); mātouñ, -ova =
= shed ( m .); kurouñ, -ova = crown (n.); louñ, love = wool ( f.); māuñ, māve = scar
or crust ( f.).

$ III. Third Declension.

Stem in ea , or characteristic ea.
This is the most . regular Declension and contains mostly,
if not exclusively , Nouns of Konkani origin ; whereas the other
Declensions contain many foreign Nouns.
Only Masculine and Neuter Nouns belong to this Declen
sion . The terminations of the Nominative Singular are only
two, ò for the Masculine, èñ for the Neuter, and are peculiar
to this Declension .
To determine whether a Noun belongs to this Declension ,
consult the Dictionary, or observe these rules :
1 ) Nouns having o or eñ in the Nominative, or (if the
Nominative is not known) having the termination ea in the
oblique cases, belong to this Declension .
2) When an Adjective derived from a Noun has ea before
the termination of the Adjective (lo or so) , that Noun belongs
to this Declension ; e.g. “ burgeānu ” = 0 children, is known to
=

be of this Declension by that ea; again, in " vānteāso" = partial,

that ea before so indicates that its original Noun must be of
this Declension .
3) All Participles and Adjectives ending in o in the Nomi
native Singular, if used as Pronouns in Masculine or Neuter
Gender, follow this Declension ; e.g. kello = done, kelleānt = in
doing ; boro = good , boreānk = to the good.
4) Finally, as the English Genitive is changed into an
Adjective of three terminations, and as the Adjectives of three
terminations follow , at least partially the 3rd Declension (see
below, Adjectives), so we may say that the Konkani Genitive
(as also the other Adjectives and Participles of three termi
nations [o, i, eñ ] not used as Pronouns) follows, at least parti
ally, the 3rd Declension.
 27

What is here said, will be better understood below Ch. II.

The Declension is formed according to the above given (A)
/ general rule ; viz.
Singular.
Nominative, as given in the Dictionary (o or en ).
Original, ea for both genders (as given in the Dictionary) ,
stem .
Dative, add k to the stem, or Original.
Accusative, as the Dative in animate objects, as the Nominative
in inanimate objects.
Vocative, as the Original .
Instrumental, add n to the stem .
Ist Locative, add nt to the stem.
2nd Locative, add r or čer to the stem .
Original followed by Postpositions, lagiñ, kåde eic. (as above
explained, 1st Declension ).
>

Plural.

Nominative, add to the root e for the Masculine, iñ for the

Neuter.
Original, add to the root eañ for both genders.
Dative, add to the stem k.
Accusative, as the Dative in animate objects, as the Nomina
tive in inanimate objects.
Vocative, as the Original .
Instrumental, add to the stem niñ.
Ist Locative, add to the stem niñ.
2nd Locative, add to the stem čer.
Original followed by Postpositions, lāgiñ, pāsun etc. ( as above
explained, 1st Declension).

4*
 28

1. Example of an animate object of Masculine Gender.

“ Burgo” = boy ; stem : “ burgea."
Singular : Plural :
Nom . burgo burg -e
Orig . burg-ea burg-eañ
Dat. burg -eā- k burg-eāñ-k (= burgeānk)
Accus. burg -eā - k burg -eāñ - k (= burgeāňk)
Voc. burg-eā burg-eāñ (or burgeāno)
Instrum . burg-eā-n burg-eāñ-niñ
IS! Loc. burg -eā -nt burg-eāñ-niñ
2nd Loc. burg-eä-čer burg -ean -čer
Orig . followed by burg -eā lāgiñ etc. burg -cāñ lāgiñ etc.
Postpositions
2. Example of an inanimate object of Neuter Gender.
“ Foļeñ ” = plank ; stem : " fo !-ea.”
=

Nom . foļeñ foļiñ

Orig. fol-ea fol-eañ
Dat. fol- ea - k fol- eāñ- k
Accus. fol- eñ fol-iñ
Voc. fol-eā fol-eāñ (or foļeānu )
Instrum . fol-ea - n fol- ean -nin
Ist Loc. fol- ea -nt fol-eāñ-niñ
2nd Loc. fol-eā -čer or fol-eā -r fol-eāñ -čer
Orig. followed by fol-eā kåde etc. fol-eāñ kåde etc.
Postpositions
3. Example of an animate object of Neuter Gender.
“ Burgeñ ” = child ; stem : " burg -ea."
Nom . burgen burg -iñ
Orig . burg-ea burg-eañ
Dat. burg -eā - k burg-eāñ-k ( = burgeānk )
Accus . burg -ea - k burg -eāñ - k
Voc. burg-eā burg-eāñ (or burgeāno)
Instrum . burg-eā-n burg - eāñ -nin
 29

Singular : Plural :
Ist Loc. burg -eā -nt burg -eāñ -niñ
2nd Loc. burg -eā -čer burg -eāñ - čer
Orig. followed byburg-eā lāgiñ etc. burg-eāñ lāgiñ etc.
Postpositions

Observations :
1. The termination ea, characteristic of the 3rd Declension ,
chiefly in speaking, is not to be confounded with ia of the
2nd Declension ; that is to say, many Nouns in i follow the
2nd Declension ; hence they have in the stem ia by adding
the characteristic a to the Nominative ; e.g. " pātki" = sinner;
" pātkiāk ” = to the sinner, is similar to “ burgeāk ” = to the boy ,
as regards termination . We can easily avoid this mistake of
confounding the termination ia of the 2nd with the termination
ea of the 3rd, if we recollect that all Nouns of this Declension
must end either in o or in eñ in the Nominative Singular.
Although there is the above difference, as regards spelling
in Latin letters, between Nouns in i of the 2nd Declension and
Nouns of the 3rd Declension in the oblique cases, yet the pro
nunciation is nearly the same (and in Kanarese they would
be written in the same way) ; because that ea,, characteristic
of the 3rd Declension , is pronounced not distinctly ea but as
a sound between ea and ia, like ya. Nevertheless I prefer to
write ea instead of ia, because thereby we distinguish it better
from the 2nd Declension . At all events we must make the
above difference , if not in pronunciation and writing , at least
in our mind ; because on it their different Declension depends .
2. The above 1st and 2nd rule (p. 26) , i.e. that, if the
oblique case or the derived Adjective has the termination
ea, that Noun is of the 3rd Declension , cannot be taken
exclusively, that is to say, cannot be understood thus : -when
ever the desinence ea occurs, only and always the 3rd Declen
sion is thereby indicated . The reasons of this limitation are
three : viz .
 30

a) The termination ia occurs also in the 2nd Declension

(see Observation 1.) , and in the oblique cases of the Plural
of the 1st Declension, if the Noun ends in i in the Nomina
tive Singular : but this ia can be easily confounded with ea,
nay, some might perhaps write both terminations by ya.
6) The termination ea (or ya) occurs also in the oblique
cases of some Nouns of the 1st Declension ; e. g. “ čintna
thought ; čintneāniñ = by thoughts. (See p. 18 , Declension of
the Plural .)
c) The Adjectives of three terminations have ea in the
oblique cases of the Plural Feminine and sometimes also of
to
the Singular (see below ,Adjectives); e.g. boreañ åstriānk
good women .
3. From this Declension chiefly, it appears that the Cha
racteristic of the Declension is not always added to the pure
Nominative. Sometimes the last vowel of the Nominative is
changed before adding the Characteristic. Moreover a con
traction often takes place before adding the Characteristic to
the root (see p. 20, Note 1. and A.General Observations ). The
Dictionary shows, whether the Characteristic is to be added
to the pure Nominative or whether a change is to be made.
This second observation regards the other Declensions too.
4. In this Declension chiefly, attention is to be paid to
the nasal sound ; else the Gender is easily mistaken. Thus ,
if you do not pronounce the nasal sound of the Neuter Nomi
native Singular, they would think that it is Nominative Plural
( e) etc.
Exercises
on the Third Declension.1)
burgo = boy nākāzāllo = nonsense
bēñ =- fear kāido = duty
=

māg-nen = prayer
= hageñ = hatred
vānto = part , division suņeñ = dog
1) The Gender and the Original of the following Nouns may be known by
the above rules.
 - 31

beleñ = crop
- kātår cut
ušār = clever puņ = but
auñsăraso = hasty
= distā appears
āltzi =: lazy boren = well
mogāl = dear , merciful meļtā = is found
såddāntz = always dovor = keep
sāng = say līp = be concealed
Tuzo bāu ušār burgo; puņ mozo bāu āltzi. Suņeāk ben
distā. To monis hagen kårtā. Auñsăraso burgo kām boren
kartāgī? Altzi monis beļen kātartāgi ? Ye burge săddāntz
nākāzālle sāngtāt. o mozo vānto, tò tuzo vāņto. Ušār
burgeānk inām meļtā : āltzi burgeānk šikšā meļtā. Bore
burge monšānk mogāļ ; vāit burgeānčer monis hageň dovortāt.
Māg-ņeā vorvi monšānk kurpā meļtā. Devā lāgiñ māg : tukā
(to you) boro vāņķo meļtolo ( fut.). To burgo beān liptā.
Burgeānu, āplo (own) kāido kårā : āuñinām ditolon.
$ IV. Fourth Declension.
Stem in i , or characteristic i.
This Declension contains chiefly Nouns of the Feminine
Gender.1) The termination of the Nominative is i (especially in
Masculine Nouns) , but it may be also a consonant. The ter
>

mination i in the Nominative is found also in the 1st and 2nd

Declension. Consequently there is no termination exclusively
belonging to this Declension, as is the case in the 3rd and
partially in the 1st Declension.
To know whether a Noun belongs to this Declension there
are two ways : 1 ) the Vocabulary, 2) meaning and termination .
As to the 2nd way, these rules may be laid down :
1. All Feminine Nouns ending in i , if not of the 1st De
clension (as mostly) , are of the 4th .
>

2. All Masculine Nouns ending in i, if of foreign origin,

seem to follow more frequently this Declension ; if of Kon
1) Nouns of males, of occupations proper to men etc. are Masculine. I do
not recollect now any Noun of Neuter Gender belonging to this Declension.
 32

kani origin , more frequently follow the 2nd Declension ; e.g.

" Pādri” = father, and " mutsudi” = treasurer (Hindustāni word) ,
=

are of the 4th Declension ; " pātki” = sinner, is of the 2nd

Declension. (The Masculine Nouns of this Declension end,
usually, in i).
3. Feminine Nouns in iñ and n (by which termination n
many Masculine Nouns are made Feminine) mostly follow
this Declension ; e. g. buiñ = earth, năiñ = river, bāiñ = well,>

gărkārn = house -wife.

4.All Feminine Nouns ending in a full consonant (with
out !and a) , if not of the 1st, are mostly of the 4th Declen
sion ( very seldom of the 5th) ; e.g. ākānt = distress.
In this Declension (as in the 5th ) the stem of the Singular
is kept also in the Plural, except that it is made nasal.
This Declension is formed according to the general rule
(A) namely :
Singular.
Nominative, as given in the Dictionary.
។

Original (stem ending in i) , as given in the Dictionary.

Dative, add k to the stem .
Accusative, in animate objects as the Dative, in inanimate as
the Nominative.
Vocative, as the Original.
Instrumental, add n to the stem .
Ist Locative, add nt to the stem.
2nd Locative, add r or čer to the stem .
Original followed by Postpositions, as above.
Plural.
Nominative , add 'i' to the root.
Original, make nasal the characteristic, i.e. iñ.
Dative , add k to the stem of the Plural .
Accusative, in animate objects as the Dative, in inanimate
objects as the Nominative.
l’ocative, as the Original .
 33

Instrumental, add niñ to the stem .

ist Locative, add nið to the stem .
2nd Locative, add čer to the stem.
Original- followed by Postpositions, as above.

1. Example of an animate object.

66
“ Pādri ” = father ; stem , " Pādri” .
66

Singular : Plural:
Nom . Pādr -i Padr-i
Orig . Padr-i Pādr-iñ
Dat. Pādr- i- k Pādr-in -k (= Pādrink)
Accus. Pādr-i-k Pādr-in -k (= Pādrink)
Voc. Pādr-i Pādr-iñ (or Pādrinu)
Instrum . Padr -i- n Padr-i-nin
Ist Loc. Pādr- i-nt Pādr-i-niñ
2nd Loc. Padr-i-čer Pādr - in - čer
Orig. followed by Pādr-i lāgiñ etc. Pādr-iñ lāgiñ etc.
Postpositions
2. Example of an inanimate object.
“ Vāt ” = candle ; stem : " vāt-i" .
Nom . vāt vät- i

Orig. vāt-i vāt-iñ

Dat. vāt-i - k vāt-in - k
Accus. vāt yāt-i
Voc . vāt-i vāt-iñ ( vātinu )
Instrum . vāt- i- n vāt- i-niñ
Ist Loc. vāt-i-nt vāt- i-niñ
2nd Loc. vāt-i - r (vātičer)
( vāt- iñ-čer
Orig. followed by
Postpositions I vāt-i kåde etc. vāt-iñ kåde etc.
Observations: 1 ) In this Declension in the Nouns ending
in i in the Nominative Singular, this i is to be cut off before
adding the terminations i, ik etc. in order to avoid two i.
5
 34

2) The Nouns of this Declension ending in iñ retain mostly

the nasal sound also in the other cases, much more distinctly
than the nasal sound ; e. g. of “ burgeāna is kept in the Dative
“ burgeānk ”. Hence, if we wish to comprehend all cases, we
must say, that the characteristic of this Declension is i or in .

Exercises

on the Fourth Declension . 1)

āvoi ?)
2 = mother kud = body
=

boiņ3) sister " = distress

ākānt )
pādri = father
=
yēk = a, an, one
saserdot = priest bāgivont = holy
čīt = note vātz read
zăr = fountain āpoy = call
kāls = chalice pidest = sick
Āvoik dogi boiņi (or boiņeo ) assāt . Moja gărā lāgiñ yēk
sobit zăr distā. Āmči kud kumgārā vorviñ bāgivont zatā.
Moji čīț khăiñ assā ? - Tuji čīt tuje āvoi käde assā. Akāntint
-

(or ākāntānt) Devā lāgiñ māg-neñ kăr, ani tukā ādhār (help)
meļtolo. Pādrik āpoy, moji āvoi piờest . Saserdot Igărjent čīt
vātztā . Devāso (divine) móg yeke zări bări ( fontis instar ).
ātmeā bitór (in the soul) zatā. Kuļik tel lãi (oil apply,
anoint). Bisp saserdotink benjer (holy) tel läitā, ani Pāp Sāib
Bispānk benjer tel lāitā. Āvoi duvek āpoitā ; pun tikā (to her)
beñ distā. Deu monšānk såbār pauți (many times) āpoitā , pun
monis tāčeñ uttar (his word) āikanānt (do not hear).
1) All these Nouns are of the 4th Declension and their Original is formed
regularly. The Gender is Feminine, unless the meaning requires Masculine
Gender .
2) Āvoi follows the 1st Declension in the Plural. Pronounce v almost like u.
See P. I.
3) Some decline it according to the 1st Declension in the Plural.
4) Some decline it according to the 2nd Declension.

1
 35

SV. Fifth Declension.

Stem in u, or characteristic u
A few Nouns belong to this Declension.
As far as I know, the Nouns belonging to this Declension ,
usually, are Feminine, unless the meaning requires the Mas
culine Gender ; e.g. guru = priest ; bāppu = paternal uncle.
=

The usual termination of the Nominative is u or u ; but

this ụ or u may be found also in other Declensions. Moreover
there may be a few Nouns ending in a consonant, of this De
clension. It seems to me that Feminine Nouns ending in u or
y are of the 4th Declension, or sometimes, of the 1st ; Mascu
line Nouns in u belong to the 2nd, sometimes to the 4th . I do
not recollect any Neuter Noun following this Declension.
To determine whether a Noun belongs to this Declension,
we may lay down these rules in addition to what is given in
the Dictionary.
1. The Feminine Nouns ending in u or y follow sometimes
the 1st, more frequently the 4th Declension ; e.g." sūru , -re" :
toddy ; " suru , -ruve " = beginning, are of the 1st, “ văstu " =
thing, is of the 4th Declension .
2. Among Masculine Nouns ending in u or y some follow
the 4th, some the 2nd Declension ; e.g. " bāppu” is of the 4th,
66
“ duddu” is of the 2nd Declension.
Perhaps no Masculine Noun ending in “ ų" follows this Declension.
3. Neuter Nouns ending in ų or uñ follow the 2nd De
clension , not the 4th.
This Declension is formed according to the general rule (A) ,
except that in Nouns ending in u or y before adding the
characteristic u, the u or ą of the Nominative is cut off in
order to avoid uu or yu, for the sake of euphony.
Singular.
Nominative, as given in the Dictionary (usually u or ).
Original, u (given in the Dictionary).
 -
36

Dative, add k to the stem.

Accusative, in animate objects as the Dative, in inanimate
objects as the Nominative.
Vocative, as the Original.
Instrumental, add n to the stem.
ist Locative, add nt to the stem.
2nd Locative, add r or čer to the stem.
Original followed by Postpositions, “ lāgiö " etc., as above.

Plural.
Nominative, add u to the root.
Original, make nasal the characteristic of the Singular.
Dative, add k to the stem of the Plural.
Accusative, equal to the Dative or to the Nominative, as above.
Vocative, as the Original.
Instrumental, and ist Locative, add niñ to the stem.
2nd Locative, add čer to the stem.
Original followed by Postpositions, as above.

1. Example of an animate object.

“ Guru ” = priest (pagan) ; stem: " guru ”.
Singular : Plural :
Nom . gur-u gur - u
Orig. gur-u gur-un
Dat. gur- u - k gur-un - k
Accus. gur-u-k gur -uñ - k
Voc . gur - u gur-uñ, (guruno)
Instrum . gur-u-n gur -uñ -niñ
Ist Loc. gur - u -nt gur-uñ-nin
2nd Loc. gur-u -čer gur-un -čer
Orig. followed by gur- u lāgiñ etc. gur -un lāgiñ etc.
Postpositions
 37 -

1. Example of an inanimate object.

“" Våstu ” = thing.
Singular : Plural:
Nom . våstų våstu
Orig. våst - u văst-un
Dat . văst - u - k våst - un - k
Accus. våst-u våst-u
Voc. văst-u văst-uñ , ( våstuno)
Instrum . våst-u-n văst- u -niñ
Ist Loc. våst-u-nt våst-u-niñ
2nd Loc. våst-u- čer våst-uñ-čer
Orig. followed by văstu kåde etc. våst-uñ kåde etc.
Postpositions
In this Declension there are many Nouns ending in “ y ” in the Singular and
“ u ” in the Plural ; consequently those Nouns have different accent in the Singular
and in the Plural . See P. I. Ch . II.

Exercises

on the Fifth Declension .

guru = priest (m.)
=
kharo (kharots) = true =

kāzų = cajou ( f.) fotkiro = deceiving

văstu = thing (f.) fotăi = deceive
hostų = host ( f.) lók, -a = people (m.)
betăi = offer såkåt = all
Annas Judevānso guru zāun vortavatalo. Konsekrār kele
hostunt ani konsekrār kele kalsint săg!o Somi Jezu Krist assā .
Devā thăiñ (in God ) såkåt boreo " văstu assāt. Dayā kårn ( please)
makā yēk kāzų dī. Kharots saserdot lókā pāsun sakrifis be
țăitā ani Devā lāgiñ māgtā : fotkiro saserdot lókāk foţăitā.

$ VI. Declension of Proper Nouns.

The Declension of Proper Nouns is not different from the
Declension of Common Nouns ; for, all Proper Nouns are'de
clined according to one of the given Declensions. But this is
peculiar to them , that some Proper Masculine Nouns follow
 38

the 1st Declension , whereas Common Nouns of the 1st De

clension are Feminine ; moreover many Masculine Proper
Nouns follow the 4th or 5th Declension , and a few Feminine
Proper Nouns follow the 2nd Declension ; whereas no Feminine
Common Noun follows the 2nd Declension .
To determine to which Declension a given Proper Noun
belongs, we may say thus :
I. Baptismal Names.
1. Names of Males. The greatest part of them follow
the 2nd Declension , or more distinctly, if they end in e, they
follow the 1st Declension , e.g. Zoze = Joseph, if they end in 0,
the 3rd , e.g. Lorso = Lawrence ; if they end in i, mostly the 4th,
e.g. Joki = Joachim ; if they end in u, the 5th, e.g. Gabru
=

Gabriel ; as, often, also if they end in auñ, e.g. Juāuñ = John .
The others seem to follow the 2nd Declension ; yet there are
some, among these, which do not follow the 2nd ; e.g. Mingel,
Mārtin , Anton, Manuel, are of the 4th Declension.
2. Names of Females.
a) Names of married or grown up females. The grea
test part of them follow the 1st Declension, or, more distinctly,
those in a or e follow the 1st ; of those in i some follow the
4th, some the 1st, those in u follow mostly the 5th ; those in
>

auñ seem to follow more frequently the 2nd, those in en, follow
the 3rd Declension ; of those in a consonant, some follow the
1st, some the 4th (seldom the 2nd) .
6) Names of girls. As girls are considered in grammar
as Neuter, hence also their Christian names are considered
as Neuter, and mostly follow the 2nd Declension. Thus " Mări’ =
Mary , if used for a woman , is of the 1st Declension, if used
for a girl , is of the 2nd ; e.g. O Mary = " Mărie” in the 1st case,
“ Măriā ” in the 2nd. There are a few names of girls not ac
cording to this rule. In the Dictionary the most common
baptismal names are put with the sign of their Declension .
 39

II. Family -Names.

1 . The (Portuguese) family -names, used now among na
tives here, generally follow the 2nd Declension ; e. g. Suz, -a,
Brit, -a, etc. A few names are not of the 2nd Declension ;
e.g. “ Koelh ” (or better “ Kuel” ) is of the 4th.
Moreover in familiar conversation family -names applied to
women take the termination of the Feminine ån or in or n ;
e.g. Suzin , Kuelin etc.
2. Foreign family-names (not Portuguese) follow, it seems
to me, more frequently, the 2nd Declension. Yet analogy
with the Declension of Common Nouns and euphony may re
quire another Declension . Thus “ Pagāni” is of the 4th, accord
ing to the rule laid down in the 4th Declension.
If the Christian and family -names are joined, only the 2nd
is declined ; e.g. " Pedru Souzāk ” . The same happens, if the
family-name is preceded by some title, e.g. Pādri Pagānik =
" to Fr. Pagani”; so also in other names, e.g. Šesar Augustā
čeñ forman = the order of C. Augustus.
Finally in Christian and also family -names we must distin
guish the full pronunciation and writing from the vulgar and
shortened pronunciation, e. g. Bonaventur, shortened Intru .
III. Names of Towns, Villages etc.
These Nouns more commonly are not declined ; e.g. " auñ
Kodiāl vetāñ = I go to Mangalore. Yet if the Proper Nouns
of places do not end in u or i (perhaps ši), it seems allowed
also to decline them ; e.g. “ auñ Kodiālak vetāñ " = I go to Man
galore. But it does not seem usual to say : auñ Bombăiak
vetāñ or Jeppuak vetāñ.
IV . Names of Mountains, Rivers, Kingdoms etc. seem to be
declined according to the general rules of Declensions ; yet
about this point a more particular rule cannot at present be
formed . Examples: Europānt = in Europe, Indiānt = in India,
Himālayāčer = on the Himalaya.
Names of places are very often followed by “ mollo = said ",7 (so called) ; e.g.
“ Rom mollea šerānt" = in the town called Rome, instead of “ Romā šerānt. ” If
 40

they are followed by šer or gāuñ and the like, it seems allowed to put the
Proper Noun of place in the pure Original, e.g. “ Roma šerānt,” and so also in
other examples, if euphony allows it ; or more generally, if a Proper Noun is
followed by an apposition, this only may be declined , and the Proper Noun
left in the Original, or simply, in its primitive form ; e.g. “ Israel, moje porječer,
rasvotkāi kăr” = reign upon my people Israel. 1

C. Observations about Declensions.

1. Omitting the minute things said in each Declension ,

we may now by one general rule know which Nouns chiefly
belong to each Declension.
a) Feminine Nouns ending in the Nominative Singular in
à or ai are of the 1st Declension .
6) Nouns in ap and pon are of the 2nd Declension .
c) Nouns in auñ or ouñ are mostly of the 2nd, seldom of
the 1st or 5th Declension .
d) Feminine Nouns in i are of the 1st, or of the 4th
Declension .
e) Masculine Nouns in i are of the 2nd or of the 4th
Declension.
f) Neuter Nouns in iñ are of the 2nd Declension.
8 ) Feminine Nouns in iñ are of the 4th Declension.
h) Feminine Nouns in u (or g) are of the 1st or of the 5th
Declension .
i) Masculine Nouns in u (ory) are of the 2nd or of the
5th Declension.
j) Neuter Nouns in uñ, preceded by a consonant, are of the 7

2nd Declension . Nouns in uñ, preceded by a vowel, may

be of any Gender and of the 1st, 2nd, or 5th Declension.
Ř) Nouns in o are of the 3rd Declension .
1) Nouns in e (Proper Nouns) are of the 1st Declension. 1

m) Nouns in eñ are of the 3rd Declension.

n) Nouns ending in a consonant are, if Feminine, of the
1st , or of the 4th, seldom of the 5th ; if Masculine,
mostly of the 2nd ; if Neuter, of the 2nd Declension .
 - 41

0) Nouns having in the termination of the oblique cases

or in the derived Adjectives e, are of the 1st ; having
a, of the 2nd (or also of the 3rd, as sometimes'ea is
pronounced as a) ; having ea, very often of the 3rd ;
having i, of the 4th ; having u, of the 5th.
2. The nasal sound n which is found in many Nouns
in the Nominative (and Accusative , often ), undergoes many
changes in the oblique cases ; the chief changes are these : in
Neuter Nouns in uñ, or iñ, this ñ is lost ; in Feminine Nouns of
the 4th Declension it is kept ; in Nouns ending in auñ or ouñ of
the 2nd Declension it is changed into a v ; in Nouns in auñ or
ouñ of the 1st Declension it is changed sometimes into v , some
times into n. Examples: goruñ, gorua (or goruva) = cattle
(n.) ; dudiñ, dudia = pumpkin (n.) (but Plural Nominative,
of course, dudiāñ) ; năiñ, năyñ = river ( f.); devăsāuñ, devăs
āva = devotion (n.) ; mātouñ, mātava = shed ( m .); māuñ ,
māve = scar ; dāuñ, dāune = running , turn ( f.). Many other
things to be said about this ñ will be explained more con
veniently elsewhere.
3. The Latin Prepositions are not all translated in the
same way : some are translated by Konkani suffixes, some by
true Postpositions. The first are per, in, super and similar
Prepositions having about the same meaning as these three.
The 1st is translated by n ( Instrum .), the 2nd by nt ( 1st Loc.) ,
the 3rd by r (2nd Loc.) . Probably, that n formerly was a true
Postposition " an ” , that nt also was " ant" , the 3rd is shortened
perhaps from " voir = upon ”. These two an and ant joined to
the Noun , lost the vowel and became n , nt (see page 14
n . 1 of the text) . Only these Postpositions (which might be
better called suffixes as forming a peculiar case) drop the
initial vowel (an = n, ant = nt), if joined to the Original or
pure stem ; so, “ mezā -ānt = mezānt etc. (See ibid .) The Post
positions which are added as a separate word, do not drop
any vowel ; e. g. yēkavorsā ādin = before one year.
6
 42

The second kind of Prepositions are all other Prepositions

different from these three. Nay , even these three may be
translated by some true Konkani Postpositions to be written
as a separate word. (See pp. 12 and 18.) The Postpositions
of the 2nd kind are chiefly these : vorvi = by ; lāgiñ, or kåde =
close, at ; pāsun = on account of, for; ādiñ = before; višiānt =
=
about, (Lat. de); mukār = in face, before (Lat. coram); såkål }

under ; voir = upon ; pāțleān = behind, etc.

4. As in Latin , there are some irregular Nouns ; some
used chiefly or only in the Singular, e.g. " kurpā = grace”,
“ lók = people”; some used only in the Plural , e.g. - kărkăr ”,
some heteroclite, e.g. āvoi of the 4th Declension in the Singu
lar, of the 1st in the Plural ; some declined a little irregu
larly, e.g. māļăi, māļi = story ; but as I do not recollect them
all at the present , they will be put in the Dictionary, as they
occur . Here I put down only those which now occur to my
mind besides the indicated ones .
a) Nouns of the 1st Declension ending in a are seldom
used in the Plural (see p. 15 , para. 7); yet some of them may
be used, at least , in some cases of the Plural ; e.g. " čintna =
thought” is not used in the Nominative Plural, but is used
in the Dative and Instrumental : “ čintneānk, čintneāniñ ” .
6) “ Monis = man (homo), if used for a woman is Neuter ;
then , commonly, it is joined to " bāil = woman ”, bāil-monšan
។

women (low expression) .

c) Some other Nouns used only or chiefly in the Plural
are “ dăgd, -añ = sufferings” (m); “ dāg, -añ = vaccine matter”
(m) etc.
d ) Some may be declined according to one or according to
another Declension ; e.g. skīd = insect ” is of the 2nd , " kīdo”
>
of the 3rd Declension . Some say that " kīd” means a smaller
insect, and “ kīdo " a bigger one. So also " ākānt = distress” is
of the 4th or of the 2nd Declension, ad libitum .
€ ) Some Nouns form the Original from the Nominative in a
rather different from the common way : these are chiefly some
 43

Nouns ending in ái; e. g . " māļăi = story” and “ vaļăi = white

ant”; Original : " māļie, valie ”. Moreover " vaļăi” means one
white ant or more ; it has no Plural form . Bāpui , if applied to
God is changed into “ bāp .” It may be declined in two ways,
i.e. “bāpa, bāpāk” elc. or " bāpai, bāpaik ”, etc.
5. There are some Nouns which may be applied to males
and females together, as in Latin homo ; e.g. primi homines
(Adam and Eve) . Those Nouns, if used to signify males and
females at the same time, are often put in the Neuter Gender,
although generally used as Masculine. These Nouns seem to
belong only or chiefly to the 2nd Declension ; e.g. “ monis ”,
pl. “ monsan” ; although , if used in a general meaning, it has
“ monis” (m.) also in the Plural.
6. As regards accent, the terminations ia, ea, eo, io ( or ya,
yo) which occur in the Declensions have the accent upon a
and 0, although diphthongs : if written with Kanarese letters,
they would not be diphthongs, because they should be written
yo,, ya ;; but y is not a vowel.. This must be understood also
of such terminations of the Adjectives. (See following Art. 2.)
Thus : “burgea", pātkia ", rāņio", boreo" " etc.
What has been said above, (Observation 1 ), that e.g. Feminine Nouns in i are
of the 1st or of the 4th, must not be understood thus : “ it is free to decline
them according to the 1st or according to the 4th , ” but thus : " some are of the
1st, some of the 4th Declension ."

Art. II . Gender of Nouns

There are three Genders in Konkani viz. Masculine, Fe
minine and Neuter.
The Gender may be known either by the termination or
by the meaning .
I. From the meaning :
Masculine
1. All names ( Proper or Common ) of men and of offices
peculiar to men are Masculine.
6*
 44

Exceptions: a) Small children are considered as Neuter ;

66
so also the Noun Burgen " = child.
b) If the Noun expressing some office of man , is used
figuratively and it was originally Neuter, it remains Neuter,
also if it is used figuratively ; e.g. " Pāp sāib amčeñ mostak" =
Pontifex est nostrum caput.
2. The names of male animals are Masculine .
Exceptions: a) If sex is not taken into consideration , ani
mals are considered as Neuter.
6) The names of some animals are always Feminine or
Neuter. ( See below .Notes 3-4 , pages 46 , 47) .
>

3. Names of hills , mountains, seas, months and days of

the week are also Masculine.
4. Nouns of false gods , of devils and of heavenly bodies
are Masculine .
Exception : Neketrų = star, is Neuter.
Feminine

1. The names (Proper or Common) of women and of

offices peculiar to women are Feminine.
Exceptions: a) Names of women in speaking to them , or
of them , by those who consider themselves equal or in some
way superior to them , are considered as Neuter. Thus a boy
says of his small sister steñ khăiñ gelen ? = where did it go ?”
So a man speaking of a Paria woman , uses the Neuter Gender.
6) Nouns of women before puberty or marriage, are Neuter ;
but if they speak of themselves in First Person , they use the
Feminine Gender .
c) Čeduñ = girl, is always of Neuter Gender.
2. Nouns of female animals are also Feminine.
Exception : There are some names of animals which are
always of Masculine or Neuter Gender. (See below Notes
3-4, pages 46 , 47) .
3. Names of rivers are also Feminine.
 45

Neuter

1. Names of kingdoms , cities , winds , ships , are Neuter. Also

2. The above exceptions ;
3. Names of fruits (with many exceptions );
4. The diminutives (in er and åt).
II . From the termination :
Masculine
1. All Nouns ending in the Nominative Singular in o are
Masculine.
2. Nouns in ai or i having the characteristic a (2nd De
clension), are Masculine.
Feminine
1. Nouns ending in the Nominative Singular in a, are
Feminine, provided they are of Konkani origin.
Exceptions: "“ vora = four Rupees” ; “ lottebīra = quack ” ;
" kul?a = dwarf”, and perhaps a few others are Masculine.
2. Nouns ending in ai, i, u, ų or in a consonant, with the
characteristic e, are also Feminine.
Neuter
1. Nouns ending pon are always Neuter.
2. Nouns ending in ap, iñ and uñ preceded by a consonant,
are also mostly or always Neuter, at least, if they have the
characteristic a, i.e. if they are of the 2nd Declension.
Exceptions: “ santap, -a = affliction”; “ gusăp,-a = confusion ”,
and perhaps a few others are Masculine.
3. Mostly also, foreign Nouns not inflected according to
the idiomatical Konkani sound , chiefly if they end in a con
sonant, are Neuter.
4. All Common Nouns ending in eñ, (which may be true
Nouns or the Infinitives of Verbs used as Substantives) are
Neuter.
As it appears from the above rules, the Gender of many
Nouns may be known also by the characteristic alone, 2.c, the
 46

characteristics e, i, u ( 1st , 4th and 5th Declension) are, mostly ,

a sign of Feminine Gender, if meaning does not require an
other Gender ; the characteristics a and ea (2nd and 3rd De
clension ) are a sign of Masculine or Neuter Gender.
If we consider the characteristics a and ea together with
the termination of the Nominative, then we may say thus : as
to a, if the Nominative ends as above (n. 2. Neuter) , a is a
sign of Neuter Gender ; if it ends in ai and i, mostly is a sign
of Masculine Gender ; if it ends in some other vowel or in a
consonant, that Noun having the characteristic a may be still
Masculine or Neuter. As to ea, if the Nominative ends in 0,
it is a sign of Masculine Gender ; if in eñ, Neuter Gender is
indicated.
The characteristic can be easily known considering the
termination of any oblique case of the Singular, as regards
1st , 2nd and 3rd Declension , and in the 4th and 5th Declen
sion , considering also the oblique cases of the Plural ; because
the characteristic of one Declension appears different from
all characteristics of the other Declensions in the Singular
of the 1st, 2nd and 3rd Declension ; as to the Plural, it appears
different only in 4th and 5th Declension ; because in these
two Declensions the characteristic of the Singular is kept also
in the Plural .
The Accusative sometimes is equal to the Nominative ; then
it cannot be considered, in order to find the characteristic.
1 ) If the meaning requires Masculine Gender, as shown before , the termina
tion cannot be taken into consideration ; e.g. Zoze = Joseph, is Masculine ;
although it has the characteristic " e " .
2) In this matter of Gender the chief difficulty regards only the 2nd De
clension . For, the first Declension has only Feminine Nouns, the 3rd only Mascu
line in " 0 ", and Neuter in “ eñ ", the 4th and 5th mostly Feminine Nouns.
3 ) Although the above rules about male and female animals is right, if we
consider the matter generally and " in abstracto”, yet in particular cases it may
be exposed to many objections. Hence we might perhaps say better so : Male
animals have often a name of Masculine termination, female animals have
often a name of Feminine termination ; e g. “ bokdo” = mutton ; “ bokļi” = sheep ;
in this case there is no difficulty. Often there is also a name used both for
 - 47

male and female ; such a name is often of Neuter Gender ; e.g. “ suņeñ = dog"
(male or female) ; but sometimes the names of male or female animals have
a termination not agreeing with their natural Gender ; e.g.“ kolgeñ = bitch” ( n .),
and then their Grammatical Gender follows the termination , although meaning
would require another Gender. Sometimes animals have a name, the termi
nation of which does not require a certain Gender ; in this case, more commonly
those names are Neuter. If in this last case, you want to express male or
female, I would add “ dadleñ” or “ bājleñ " .
Examples : " gõdo = horse” ( m .), “ gādi mare " ; " suņeñ dog " ( n . ) ,
-

-
“ peto = male dog” ( m .), “ kolgeñ = female dog, bitch ” (n .) ; “māzar = cat” ( n .),
" bokul = male cat ” (m ) ; “ asvel = bear" ( n .), “ dadleñ asvel male bear” ,
" bãileñ asvel = female bear ” . See also the following Observation:
4) There are some names of animals, (as stated above) which have only one
termination for the different genders, as in Italian “ oca ” which may mean
either male or female . Among these Nouns some have the termination of the
Masculine Gender, and are considered as Masculine ; some have the termination
of the Feminine, and are considered as Feminine, and some have the termi
pation of the Neuter Gender, and are considered as Neuter. In order to dis
tinguish male from female the words “ dadlo = male” , and “ bāilo female”
are prefixed to those Nouns, as in Italian we say oca muschio, oca femmina,
with the difference that in Konkani the words dadlo and bãilo take the termi
nations of the Adjective and agree with the corresponding Noun ; e.g. “ pārvo =
pigeon ” has the termination of Masculine ; hence " cock -pigeon = dadlo pārvo " ;
" hen -pigeon = bāilo pārvo ”. So : " girboji =sparrow", this is Feminine ; hence
=
" cock-sparrow = dadli girboji”, “ hen-sparrow = bāili girboji”; “dònk = crane,"
is Neuter ; hence : “ male crane = dadleñ dònk ” , “ female crane = bāileñ đònk .”
These names are called Epicene, i. e . common to both sexes.
5) There may be some exceptions more against the above rules of the text.
Only here must be well remarked , that, as the meaning sometimes must be
considered in order to establish the Gender, and not the termination (see
Note 1 ) ; so on the other hand sometimes the termination must be considered,
not the meaning. Thus, although , e.g. names of kingdoms are usually of
Neuter Gender (see above), yet if the name of the kingdom has a termination
and a characteristic of Feminine Gender, e.g. of the 1st or of the 4th Declen
sion, that Noun is Feminine ; thus “ India, -die = India ” is of the 1st Declen
sion ; “ Itali ”, is of the 4th , consequently they are Feminine. So also there are
some diminutives ending in “ ki” , or “ i” ; e.g. “ pādki" = small cow ; " guļo =
ball” , “ guļi = small ball (shot)”; those Nouns are not Neuter, but Feminine.
With this limitation the above rules must be understood .
 48

CHAPTER II. ADJECTIVES

I divide this chapter into three articles : 1 ) Adjectives in
general ; 2) Adjectives in particular ; 3) Degrees of Adjectives.
Art. I. Adjectives in General
SI. Common Adjectives
There are two kinds of Adjectives in Konkani.
1. Some have three terminations o, i, eñ for the three
Genders in the Nominative Singular, viz . o, i, eñ, as in Latin
us, a , um; e.g. boro, bori, boreñ = bonus, bona, bonum .
1
2. If the Adjective terminates with a consonant or with
any other vowel than o, it has only one form in the Nomina
tive Singular .
The first kind of Adjectives is easy and fixed; but the second
kind seems to be still vague.
Let us now see how they are declined. In order to learn
this, we have to distinguish the first kind from the second
kind of Adjective, and again in each kind we have to dis
tinguish the case in which they are true Adjectives from the
case in which they are like Pronouns ; e.g. in the sentence
“ God is good ” , good is a true Adjective. In the other sen
tence : “ God gives reward to the good ” good is like a Pro
noun , namely instead of good man.
The first kind of Adjectives, if they are true Adjectives ,
are declined as follows : in the Masculine, they have only two
cases, viz . Singular Nominative o, oblique cases ea ; Plural
Nominative e ; oblique cases eañ , just according to the 3rd
Declension . In the Feminine , as in the Masculine , they have
only two cases, viz. Singular Nominative i, in the oblique
case change that i into e ; Plural Nominative change i into
eo or yo in the oblique cases eañ, namely almost according
to the 1st Declension, except that instead of ie there is e,
and instead of o there is eo .
 49

This rule is to be applied whether the Adjective be attribute as “the merci

ful God has forgiven you” or predicate as “ God is merciful”.
If the Adjectives are used as Pronouns, then they are
declined like Nouns of the 3rd Declension .
Usually if the Adjectives are used as Pronouns, they are used in the Mascu
line Gender ; hence they are declined as the Masculine of the 3rd Deelension.
Yet if they be used, ( 1) in the Feminine, or (2) Neuter Gender, then they should
be declined in the first case as Nouns of 1st Declension , and in the second case
as Neuter Nouns of the 3rd Declension.

The second kind of Adjectives must be subdivided into Ad

jectives 1 ) ending in a consonant, or 2) ending in a vowel,
except o .
The Adjectives ending in a consonant, if they are used
as true Adjectives, seem to be declined only in the oblique
cases, namely they take a for the Masculine and Neuter ; e for
the Feminine in the Singular ; and añ for the Plural in all
Genders.
1.
Sometimes people use 'ea' in the Feminine Singular instead of 'e', and
e ' instead of lea '.
2. It seems to be allowed to use the Adjectives ending in a consonant as
indeclinables.
3. Some Adjectives, e.g. “ bhāgivónt =holy”, take 'i' in the oblique case
of the Feminine instead of 'e'; e.g. " bhāgivónti Mărie = holy Mary” .
The Adjectives ending in a vowel, except o, are not de
clined at all.
If these second kind of Adjectives are used as Pronouns,
then the Adjectives ending in a consonant are declined like
Nouns of the 2nd Declension. If they end in a vowel, except
o, they are not declined at all.
Exception. The Neuter Nominative Plural, which should
be añ, in this last case, ( viz. if the Adjectives ending in a con
sonant, are used as Pronouns) , is often equal to the Mascu
line; e.g. " såkåt = omnes et omnia." Yet we could say also
" såktāñ = omnia . ” Nay it seems better.
These rules are to be applied also to the Adjective, corresponding to the
Genitive (see below).
7

Y
 50

Examples.
1. a) First kind of Adjective: boro = good, bonus.
Singular: Plural :
Nom . boro monis bore monis
Orig. borea " monša boreañ monšāñ
Dat . borea monšak boreañ monšānk
Accus. borea monšāk boreañ monšānk
Voc. borea monšā boreañ monšānu
Instrum . borea monšān boreañ monšāniñ
Ist Loc. borea monšānt boreañ monšānin
2nd Loc. borea monšāčer boreañ monšāñčer
Orig. followed by borea monšā lāgiñetc. boreañ monšāñlāgiñetc.
Postpositions
6) Bori = bona ; bori åstri = good woman .
Nom . bori ăstri boreo " åstrio''.

Orig . bore ăstrie boreañ åstreañ

Dat. bore ăstriek boreañ åstreānk
Accus. bore ăstriek boreañ ăstreānk
Voc. bore ăstrie boreañ åstreānu
Instrum . bore ăstrien boreañ åstreāniñ
Ist Loc. bore ăstrient boreañ ăstreāniñ
2nd Loc. bore ăstriečer boreañ åstreāñčer
Orig . followed by bore åstrie kåde etc. boreañăstreāñ kådeetc .
Postpositions
c) boreñ = bonum ; boreñ balseñ = good baby.
Nom . boreñ balseñ boriñ balsiñ
Orig . borea" balsea" boreañ balseañ
Dat. borea balseāk boreañ balseānk
Accus. borea balseāk boreañ balseānk
Voc. borea balseā boreañ balseānu
Instrum . borea balseān boreañ balseāniñ
Ist Loc. borea balseānt boreañ balseāniñ
2nd Loc. borea balseāčer boreañ balseāñčer
Orig . followed by! [ etc.
borea balseā lāgiñetc. boreañ balseāñ lāgiñ
Postpositions
 - 51

2. Second kind of Adjectives

Võd = large; võd går = large house.
Singular : Plural :
Nom . vod går võd gårāñ or võdañ gårāñ
Orig . voda găra võdañ gårāñ
Dat. voda gårāk võdañ gărānk
Accus . vôd går võd gårāñ or vödañ gårāñ
Voc. võda gărā võdañ gårānu
Instrum . voda gărān võdañ gårāniñ
Ist Loc . võda gărānt võdañ gårāniñ
2nd Loc. võda gårāčer vodañ gårāñčer
Postpfollowed
Orig. by a gărā kăde
ositions võd etc.võdañ gărāñ kåde etc.
In this example in the Singular Accusative, I put " vod ” not " voda” , though
9

it is an oblique case, because, if the Accusative of the Noun is equal to the

Nominative, the Adjective too must be equal to the Nominative.
In a similar way you may decline “ såkåt vāț = all way, ”
of Feminine Gender, namely : Nom . săkát vāț ; Orig. sakte
vāțe , etc.
There is no need of putting an example of an Adjective
ending in a vowel different from o, as it does not undergo
any change, nor is there need of putting an example of the
Adjective as a Pronoun, as there is no difficulty.
How to form Adjectives, will be shown in the Appendix to
this II. Part ; now it is enough to say that a great many Ad
jectives are derived from Nouns by adding to the stem so, čiñ,
čeñ, (us, a, um of the Latin) or lo, li, leñ; e. g. souñsār
world, souộsārāso = worldly ; mög = love or charity, mögāso =
charitable ( fem . mõgāči, neutr . mögāčeñ) .

§ II. Adjectives corresponding to the Genitive.

The most simple way of making this Adjective or Genitive
is this : Make of the English Genitive an Adjective of three
terminations by adding to the stem of the Singular, if the
Genitive is Singular, or to the stem of the Plural , if the Geni
7*
 52

tive is Plural, so, či, ce (or seldom, lo, li, leñ) , and let this new
Adjective agree in gender, number, and case with the Noun
governing the English Genitive ; e. g. the Love of God =
“ Devāso mög = Divine Love" ; " the stones of the house = gårāde
fātor " , " the stones of the houses = garānče fātor " ; " the master
of the boys = burgeāñso mēstri”, “ the masters of the boy =
burgeāče mēstri” etc.
Observations.
1. If the Genitive is a Noun with an Adjective, the Noun
only takes the terminations so, či, čeň and the accompanying
Adjective is to be put in the case required by the concord
(Vide Syntax ). Yet, if the Noun governing the Genitive is in
the Nominative, and, consequently, the Noun in the Genitive
is to be changed into an Adjective of Nominative Case, the
accompanying Adjective, if it is an Adjective of three termina
tions, must be put in the oblique case of the Singular, if the
Genitive converted into Adjective was Singular ; Plural, if the
Genitive was Plural ; of the Masculine or Neuter or Feminine
Gender, according to the Gender of the Noun, Genitive con
verted into Adjective; e.g. “ the custom of all good men =
săktañ boreañ monšānči dastur” ; here, grammatically we
should say : " bori monšānči dastur ” ; yet such is not the cus
tom . For the same reason we must say " advarlelea rukāčiñ
foļañ = the fruits of the prohibited tree”, instead of “ advarleliñ
rukāčiñ foļañ ". In this point the Genitive follows the rule of
the Substantives more than the rule of the Adjectives ; be
cause if we consider “ monšāñči ” and “ rukāči ” as Nouns in the
>
oblique case, we should say truly “ boreañ” and “ advarlelea .”
It seems to me that this rule is in some way to be observed also
with Adjectives of one termination ; e.g. “ såmestañ rukānčiñ
foļañ = the fruits of all trees" ; " sămestañ” is an oblique case.
2. If the Adjectives are used like Pronouns, and they
are put in the Genitive, then they take the terminations so,
či, čeñ, just as if they were Substantives ; e.g. " the way of the
wicked = kottepoņāñso mārog ” .
 53

3. Sometimes the Genitive is not changed into an Adjec

tive, but the pure stem is used ; in this case, it seems, that
the stem should be put before the governing Noun ; e.g.“ Devā
( or Devāči) kurpa = the grace of God" . This is the pure Geni
=

tive of which I said above, that it occurs sometimes.

4. If there are many Genitives, then, if they are, I may
say, parallel, viz . all governed by the same name, only the last
Genitive usually is changed into an Adjective, though it is
no mistake if you change all into Adjectives; e.g. “ the duty of
the mother and father = āuoi bāpāso kāido " , instead of "āuoiso
ani bāpāso kāido” . If only the last Genitive takes the termi
nations of the Adjective, usually the Conjunction wani= and”
is omitted .
If the Genitives are subordinate one to the other, i.e. if
the 1st Genitive is governed by a word, the 2nd Genitive is
governed by the first etc., usually all are changed into. Ad
jectives, although sometimes only the last Genitive is made
Adjective; e.g. " the Feast of the Sacred Heart of Jesus= Somia
Jezu Kristāčeñ Kalzāčeñ fest", or " Somia Jezu Kristā Kal
9

zāčeñ fest ”; or, as some people say: " Somia Jezu Kristāča
Kalzāčeñ fest ”.
5. What I said above, (p. 49) viz . that the Adjectives take
sometimes 'e' or 'ea' indifferently in the oblique cases, is to
be applied to these Adjectives too. So “ Devāčea Māyek " or
" Devāde Māyek = to the Mother of God ”, “ mögāde burgeāk” or
"mõgačea burgeāk = to the dear child ."
6. Many Verbs are compounded with a Substantive and
a Verb , which consequently require the Genitive ; e.g. " lover
mog kår = make charity, make love " ; hence " love God ” is
translated as if it were in English " make the love of God =
Devāso mög kår " . But not all Verbs compounded of a
Verb and a Substantive require the Genitive. The meaning
must be consulted , or better, translate literally in English
the Konkani Verb, and then see whether it would require
the Genitive ; e.g. "molāk kāņe = buy, " literally : take at
 54

price" ; it does not govern the Genitive ; because, we should

say in English : “take at price a book”, not " take at price
>

of a book ” . In the Dictionary it is shown whether a Verb

governs this Genitive, by the sign G. - Genitive, with m. or
f. or n. ( = masculine, feminine, neuter) joined, to show the
gender of the Noun, united to the Verb ; because the Ge
nitive must agree in gender etc. with the Noun. Yet in
many cases this rule, i.e. of these compound Verbs, is not
observed ; e.g. " to pātkāñ kumzār zatā= he confesses his sins”,
instead of " pātkāñčeñ kumzār zatā”.
7. This Genitive or Adjective in so, či, čeñ is not only
used in cases in which in English there would be a Genitive,
but also in many other cases, as use will teach you ; e.g.
" dusreāñso rāg āilā = " anger against others came”, literally :
“ anger of others came" etc. (See Syntax.)

$ III. Adjectives derived from the Postpositions

tāun, voir, etc.

If the English from means distance of place or of time,

it is translated regularly by tāun ; e.g. “ Europā tāun āilo= (he)
came from Europe” ; “from 10 to 12 = dhā tāun bārā păriănt ";
or " dårn = taking” sometimes is used ; udhā uorañ dărn
bārā păriănt = from (lit. taking) 10 till 12 " . But if it means
out of, or better, if it means going out from inside, as
in the sentence " Jesus Christ delivers us from sin ” , then the
Nouns governed by from or a similar particle, is changed into
an Adjective, namely, that Noun is put in the 1st Locative nt,
and to it lo (or li, leñ for Feminine and Neuter) is joined in
one word. But, with which word must it agree ? This is not
so easily known. Yet I think, we may say that this new
Adjective must agree with the Noun which is meant to go out
of etc.; e.g. “ Jesus Christ delivers us from sin ” ; “ us” is the
thing which goes out of " sins” , figuratively ; hence = " Jezu
Krist amkāñ pātkāntle sodaitā" ; as appears from this ex
 55

ample, the Adjective in lo does not agree in Case, but only in

Number and Gender with the corresponding Noun. (See
Syntax .) Sometimes , chiefly when there is no Noun with
which this -ntlo should agree, it is put in the Instrumental
Case ; e.g. " it comes from the cloud = kupāntleān yetā ”, from
“ kup, -a = cloud ” .
A similar construction takes place with “ voir = up ", " bităr =
=
within ” , “ lāgiñ = close ”, " pois = far” etc.; they are changed
into Adjectives “ voilo, bitărlo, lāgso, poislo" and agree with the
governed Noun ; e.g. " porvatā voilo deuñlo = he descended
from the mountain " ; " Jezu Krist Saitānāk monšāvoilo sodai
tā = Jesus Christ expells the devil from man " ; " kon tumče
bitărlo = who among you ? ” “ võtz moja lāgso = go far from -

me ”, literally : " go from my neighbourhood ”; “ moja poislo

võtz = go far from me” .

Exercises on SS I, II, and III.

durbaļo = poor piko = ripe
porno = old ( of things) bāpui, -pā, or -pai = father (m .)
mātāro = old (of person )
=
lēsų, -a = handkerchief (m.)
dusro = other răng = colour
tāmdo = red zanel,, -a = window (n.)
dovo = white fo !, -a = fruit (n.)
kālo = black rūk, -a = tree (m.))
>

nilso = blue vāit = evil (n .)

=

pātzuo, or tarno-= green besteñ = in vain

ålduvo = yellow
=
kād = take away or draw
ubār = high nāuñ , -āva = name (n.)
moţvo = short sikoi teach
motto = fat mān , -a
-ă = honour ( m .)
vod = large or great di = give
tode = few uttar, -tra = word (n. )
săbār = many aika -tā = ( he) hears
=

ital, -tla = garden (n.) mor-tā dies

 56

adar = commit soţăi = deliver

lāgtā = is attached [m.) atāſ or atāntz = now or just
mög kår = love (make loveG. now

yemkaņd, -a = hell (n .) vondautā = is inclined

Mozo porno buk khăiñ assā ? To moje lāgiñ assā. To

mātāro monis mozo bāpai . Moje boiņik sobit tāmdeñ lugat,
moja bāvāk nilso lēsų assā. Mezār doveñ lugat galā. Moja
gårāčiñ zanelañ patzuiñ ; tuja gårāčiñ zanelañ kāļiñ. Teā
rukáčiñ foļañ pikiñgi ? Năiñ, ani tarniñ assāt. Moje går
ubār. Mozo bāpai moțvo monis ; tujo bāpai motto monis.
Tuja itlânt sobār rūk assātgī ? Nā , tode rūk assāt. Pedruso
burgo boro, Paulaso burgo pād. Såmestañ monšānčiñ kalzañ
vāițāk vondautāt. Monis săbār pauţi Devāčeñ nāuñ besten
kādtāt. Ya burgeačā bāpaideñ nāuñ Pedru. Somia Jezu
Kristāčeñ kaliz āmso mog kartā . Moja išķāso bāu āz gărā
(or gărānt) assā. Āmčañ burgeäñso mestri boreñ sikoitā .
Vodānk mān diā. Vodānčeñ uttăr aikā. Sămestañ pātkāñ
sāng ( say all sins ). Såmest monis mortāt. Såmestañ mons
ānk Deu kurpā ditā . Såmestānk kumok dī. Såkåt monis
pātak adartāt. Såktāñ monšānk pātak lagtā . Bore monis
Devāso mog kartāt, pād monis pātkāso mōg kartāt. Burgeāno,
āuoi bāpāso (or bāpaiso) mög kårā. Somi Jezu Krist monšānk
yemkaņdāntle ani pātkāntle sodaitā . Šerāntlo kon õilogi ?
(Is somebody come from the town ?) Või, Pādri ātāntz ailā.
Vo porno soro (wine): tò novo soro. Tāmdeñ lugaț mezār
boreñ distā. Tuje lāgiñ (with you ) dusreñ lugaț assāgi ?
Rukānčeo kollio tarneo.. Tuje kăde yēk åldovo lēsy assāgi ?
Durbaleānk aikā : Deu tumkā (you) aikatolo (will hear).
Mātāreānči dastur siņ uleuñso (custom of old men is to com
plain ). Tea ubār porvotār · (mountain ) yēk nād (village)
assā. Ubār porvotānčer dov (snow) assā. Sezāričea of the
neighbour) itlānt yēk sorop (snake) distā. Kåssålo (which)
răng tukỵ boro dista? Adâui advarlelea ( prohibited )'rukačen
fól khātā (eats) ani āče vorvi (hereby) pātak adartā ; Devāči
 57

kurpā bāir galtā (puts out, loses), ani nirbhāgi (wretched )

zatā. Tode monis sărgār (into heaven) rigtāt (enter), såbār
monis yemkandānt rigtāt : asseñ (thus) uleitā Somi Jezu Krist.
Sămestānk saimbāčeñ pātak lāgtā, baptism kāņeuñčea ādiñ,
[lo all, of nature sin (original sin) is attached before receiving
baptism , (of desire at least)].

Art.. II. Adjectives in particular

Numeral Adjectives
Now I will speak of the Adjectives in particular, but not
of all kinds ; about the Adjectives which are derived from the
Pronouns, it is better to speak in the chapter on Pronouns.
In this article I speak only of Numerals.
§ 1. Cardinal Numbers
First I put down the chief numbers ; because they can
not be put easily in the Dictionary.
1 = yēk 17 = sotrā
2 = dòn or
om dòg; dònior dogi = 18 = ắtrã
both 19 = yēkuņīs
3 = tīn or tèg 20 = vīs
4 = čār or coug, or tcóug 21 = vīs ani yēk, or better
5 = pānz or pānč yēkvīs
6 = så 22 = vis ani dòn ot bãois
7 = sāt (pronounced quickly) 23 = tēvīs or vīs ani tīn
8 = āt 24 =
= vīs ani čār, or čovīs
9 = nóv or nou 25 = vīs ani pānč or pontis or
10 = dhā pančvis
11 = įkrā 26 = vīs ani să or sovīs
12 = bārā 27 = vīs ani sāt or sattāvīs
13 = tèrā 28 = vīs ani āț or åttāvīs
14 = čoudā 29 = yēkuņtīs
15 = pondrā 30 = tīs
16 = sòlā 31 = tīs ani yēk or yektīs
8
 58
1
32 = tis ani dòn or bottīs 62 = besăst or beasăst
33 = tīs ani tīn or tettīs
=
63 = tresăst or treasăst
34 = tīs ani čār or coutīs 64 = čousåst
35 = tīs ani pānč or pāntīs 65 = pāəsast
36 = såttīs 1) 66 = sousåst
37 = sāttīs 67 = sātsåst
38 = attīs 68 = ātsåst
39 = yēkuņečālis 69 = yēkuņesăttăr
40 = čālis 70 = såttår
41 = čāļis ani yēk or yēke- 71 = yēkasåttår
=

čāļis 72 = beāstår (shortened

=

42 = bāvečāļis from bāve såttår)

43 = tečālis or tevečālis 73 = treasăttår or treas
44 = čāļis ani čār or čove tår
čāļis [čāļis 74 = čoveastår
45 = pončvečāļis or pānčve- 75 = pončástăr, or, more
46 = sovečālis commonly, paun
47 = såttečalis señ = i less hun
.48 = ăštečālis
=
dred (100 – 25)
-

49 = yēkuņeponās 76 = sóastăr or syastår

50 = ponās 77 = såtte-åstår or sat
51 = yēkpan or yēkāon tyåstår
52 = baupan or bāon 78 = ătte-åstår or attya
53 = tevepan åstår
54 = coupan 79 = yekuņe-ăišiñ
55 = pančāvan
= 80 = åišiñ
56 = soupan 81 = yekkyā -ăišin
57 = såttāvan 82 = beāšin or beäišin
58 = åttāvan 83 = teāšiñ or treāišiñ or
59 = yēkuņesāt teaišiñ
60 = sāt ( pronounced slowly 84 = čove-aišiñ
and cerebral) 85 = poněve-aišiñ
61 = yeksåst 86 = să -aišiñ

1) The common way of forming numbers by “ ani", e.g. here "tīs ani să ”
must be understood, although it is not always put.
 59

87 = săttya -aišin 121 = sembor vīs ani yēk

88 = attya -aišiñ or sembor ani yēk
89 = yēkuņe-nóvód vis
90 = nóvód 130 = sembor ani tīs etc.
91 = yēkanóvód 150 = dedseñ
92 = beanóvód or beannói 151 = dedseñ ani yēk or
93 = treanovoi sembor ponās ani
94 = couveanovoi yēk etc.
95 = pančanovoi 160 = dedseñ ani dhā or
96 = sóvanovoi sembor ani sāt etc.
97 = săttyanovoi
= 200 = donsin
98 = åttyanovoi 250 = ådeñsiñ
99 = yēkuņesembor or
= 300 = tinsiñ
novanói 350 = tinsiñ ani ponās or
100 = señ or sembor sādetinsiñ etc.
101 = sembor ani yēk 1,000 = hazār or sās
102 = sembor ani dònor 1,500 = ded hazār
dog etc. 2,000 = dòn hazārordon sās
110 = sembor ani dhā 2,500 = ådez hazār
111 = îkrā etc. 10,000 = dhā hazār
120 = vīs 100,000 = lāk

Observations :
1. Up to 20 there is no general rule for forming num
bers, which consequently must be learnt by heart ; from 20
it is enough to know the beginning of the decade ; for the
other numbers are formed, more usually , by putting the larger
number before and the smaller one after it, separated by
" ani = and ” . So “ 26 = vis ani so " , literally: " twenty and
=

six ” . Another way is to put the smaller number before, the

larger one after it without any conjunction. So " yēkvīs = 26 ” ,
“ pančvis = 25 (vulgar : pončis)". Moreover to say 22 , 23, 32,
33 , etc., the words bāve, teve (or shortened bā, te) are prefixed
to the larger number. This way of forming the numbers now
indicated by bā and te is commonly understood up to 33 in
8*
 60

clusive. Further, probably common people would not under

stand this way of counting by bā and te, nay many can count
not only the numbers formed thus, but also all numbers higher
than 33 , and they count by doubling or by adding lower num
>

bers. The numbers higher than 33 are not commonly used, nay
not even perhaps understood , except the decades, i, e. 40,
50, 60, 70 etc. Or better we may say so : the numbers lower
than 33 are known generally (although there are some, who
know only till 25) , they may be formed in any of the given
ways. The numbers higher than 33 may be formed in two
ways, i. e. either by adding the lower number from 1 to 9
inclusive to the decade ; e. g. “ tīs ani čār, tās ani pānč " etc.,
and this way, although not generally used, at least above 40
or 50, might perhaps be understood ; or they may be formed
by joining the lower number to the decade (usually prefixing
the lower number) as one word ; this way is not used and not
even understood, at least by common people. I did not learn
this 2nd way from common people, but I took it from the
Mahrātti ; yet also the numbers formed in this 2nd way are
Konkani words and should be used in order to make them
common , and to raise a little this neglected Konkani lan
guage .
19 , 29, 39 etc. are expressed, saying " one minus twenty"
etc. so “ pēkuņīs ” is shortened from " yēkuņeñ vīs = one minus
twenty '; but for 29, 39 etc. " yēkuņeñ ” is used instead of
" yēkun.”
To say 150 , 250 , 1500, 2500 etc. (in this order only) there
are peculiar forms as shown above, namely they are converted
into mixed numbers: So 150 = one hundred and a half, 100+ 100 ,
and then expressed “ deďsen ” etc. (ded = 1į, ådez = 24) .
To say 100 only, “ sembor" is more commonly used instead
of " señ " . In the Plural " sembor” cannot be used ; hence the
plural of “ señ " (3rd Declension) must be used “ donsiñ =
200 " , "tinsiñ = 300” etc.
2. The second form of 2 , 3 , 4 , is used only when speak
2
 61

ing of persons or irrational animals. Sometimes a third form

occurs of these three numbers, but seldom.
Are the Cardinal Numbers declined ? All may take
3.
an añ in the oblique cases, at least if they are joined to
a Substantive ; but the numbers 2 , 3, 4 have a peculiar De
9

clension , i. e. Nom, Masc . “ dòn, dog, tĩn, tèg , bar, “ oug ” ;

Fem , as the Masculine, or “ dòni, dògi, tīni , tegi , čāri , čougi”;
Neuter : " dònañ , dògañ, tīnañ, tegañ , čārañ, cougañ ”.
Oblique Case : all take añ in all Genders, i. e. “ dònan, dògañ ” ,
etc.
4. Common fractions are expressed in this way : " 1 = yēk
pāu” or “ pēk kaldo ”, this second is used as Adjective of three
terminations agreeing with its Noun ; " 2 = årdo ”, used also as
Adjective of three terminations (Lat. dimidius, a, um) ; " 4 =
pāuņo ", literally : " (one) quarter less ”, also declinable as Ad
jective of three terminations. They use also “ mukāl ” for 49
and “ tīn vante = three parts". To express 14 , 24 etc. the
literal translation is used, viz . " yēk ani yēk kāldo” etc. Yet
for 11 there is another form , viz. “ sovai ” indeclinable, or,
more clearly: “ sovai” alone means 11 ; " sovai " prefixed to
a number means i, e.g. " sovai ikrā = 111 ". To express 1 \ ,
2ų , there are peculiar forms, viz. “ dēd = 11” , “ ådēz = 22". >

Yet the ordinary form would also be understood. From 3 }

upwards the word " sāde ” is prefixed to the inferior number :
so “ 3. = sāde tīn ” etc. To say 3 , 4 etc. we may prefix
“ pāuṇeñ " (lit. (one) quarter less] to the whole number ; e.g.
“ pāuṇeñ tīn = 23 , lit. (one) quarter less three ”; “ pāuņeñ čār =
33 " etc.; or we might also affix, as a separate word, “ ani tīn
>

vante = and three parts ” to the whole number ; e.g. "dòn ani
tīn vante = two and three parts". This second way is not so
-

exact as the first.

My present circumstances do not allow me to explain
ulterior fractions.
1. As it has been already observed, “ dēd " and " ådēz " are used also to
express 150, 250, 1500, 2500 etc. , by prefixing them to the number which re
 62

mains after having taken away 50, 500, 5000 etc.; if the remainder begins
with 1 , " dēļ ” is prefixed ; if it begins with 2, « ăņēz” is prefixed.
>

2. “ Pāu” means a quarter, not of this or that kind, but generally ; hence
it must be joined to a Substantive ; e. g. “ yêk pāu uņdo ; yēk pāvu ser tandu !”
etc. “ yek pāvu ” without a Substantive (expressed or understood) means į abso
lutely .
3. “ Kaldo = 1 " may be used for time, e.g. " kaldeñ uor = į of an hour " ;
=

for money, e.g. “ kaldo Rupoi = 1 Rupee ” etc.; it must be joined as an Adjective
to the affected word.
4. " Pāuņo ” may be used either as a Noun or as an Adjective ; in the 1st
case, it is used commonly only for 1 of an anna or 3 pies, (i. e. of one “poiso
4 pies ” ); if it is used as Adjective, then it is joined to a Substantive in this
way ; "pāuṇeñ yēk moạ = i of a maund " lit: " one quarter less one maund ” ,
“ pāuṇeñ yēk rātlu = one quarter less one pound" etc.
5. “Mukāl = }" is also a general Adjective, which consequently must be
joined to a Noun ; this Noun (expressed or understood) often expresses time ; yet
it may express also some other thing ; e. g . “ mukāl ser tanduļ = seer of rice”,
" mukāl uor = of an hour” .

§ II. Ordinal Numbers

These are formed from the Cardinal Numbers by adding
vo (vi, veñ) , and are declined as Adjectives of three termina
tions ; so " pāns -vo = fifth ”,> “ SOVO = sixth ” etc.
The three first numbers are irregular, “ 1st = poilo (-i, -eñ )”, >

“ 2nd = dusro ", " 3rd = tisro” .

$ III. Distributive Numbers

These correspond to the Latin : singuli, bini, etc. They
are formed by doubling the first syllable of the Cardinal
Number ; thus : “ yĒyēk = one by one” ; “ dògdòg = bini ” etc.

& IV. Reduplicative or Multiple Numbers

They correspond to the Latin duplex, triplex etc. They
are formed in the same way as the Distributive Numbers.
The context must decide. Yet, more usually, these are formed >

also in another way, namely, duplex or double = "dodo ” (-i, -eñ)

or “ dubāri” ; “ threefold = tidodo” ; “ single = yekodo " ; from
 -
63

quadruplex to higher numbers we may say “ čārdodo, pānč

dodo" etc. or, better “ čār tarāniñ (or čār jinsāniñ) voạ = large
in 4 ways”. Instead of “ vód ” we have to put the Adjective
required by the meaning. It is more common, instead of
" čārdodo or čār tarāniñ vód ”, to say “ čār pāuți tzăd = four
times greater ” etc.
& V. Repetitive Numbers
They signify the repetition of aa thing at certain intervals;
e.g. once every tenth year. These are formed by doubling
the first syllable of the Cardinal Numbers , and consequently
are declined ; e.g. “ dādāvea vorsa = every tenth year” or “ dā
dāveañ vorsāniñ ” in the Plural .

& VI. Numeral Adverbs

For convenience, these Adverbs are inserted here, though
their proper place would be elsewhere. These Adverbs cor
respond to the Latin semel, bis etc. They are formed by
translating literally, sone time, two times = yēk pāuți , don
pāuți, tīn pāuți” etc.
Exercises
on the Numeral Adjectives.
vār, -i = àa measure nearly témp, -a = time (m.)
equal to a yard ( f.) uor, -a = hour (n.)
uņdo, -dea = bread or loaf (m.) zālo = became
=

dūdų, -da = milk (n.)

= uprānt = after
sumār = about
(
mās, -a = meat or flesh (n.)
molāk kāņe = buy (take for zūz, -a = war (n.)
price) sol!o, -ļea = peace (treaty of
=

zāi = is required peace) (m.)

kitlo = how much ? suru zatā = begins (principi
kutteñ , ' -ea = (a measure umfit) G. f.
equal to {į [or sometimes isvi, -ve = year (date) ( f.)
i] seer) (n.) pāuți = time (e.g. four times)
 64

tzal = walk monšākul, -a = mankind (n.)

sūrų , -re = toddy bădăl = different, changed
-

vetā = goes bogăr = but

šeār, -a = town ( n .)
> năints = not only
mollo = called bokši = forgive
=

Yēk pāu uņdo molāk kāņe . Tuja bāpaik kitleñ dūdų

zāi? Bāpaik dēļ kutteñ dūdų zāi. Boiņiči nesson karunk
kitleñ lugaț zāi ? Adez vāri zāi. Bāvāso kutāuñ karunk
kitleñ lugaț zāi ? Pāuṇeñ čār vāri zāi. Atañ kitleñ uorañ
zāliñ ? Sovāi ikrā zālið . Kitlo témp zāi tujeñ kām karunk ?
Kalden uor zāi. Pedručeñ kām karunk kitlo témp zāi ? Årdeñ
uor, yā mukāl . Atañ tzálči (current) isvi kitli ? Yēk hazār
āțsiñ åiši ani yēk isvi. Konstantin rāy zālea uprānt sumār
dēļ hazār vorsāſ zāliñ. Ded -šeñ (or deďsea ) vorsāſ ādiñ yēk
vód zūz zāleñ. Sumār ådéz seañ vorsāñ ādiñ Vestfālyo sollo
zālo. Dhā ani mukāl zāliñ. Sovāi zāleñ ( 14 o'clock ) . Kitleañ
uorāñčer mis suru zatā ? Sāde dhā uorāñčer . Tukā kitlo
undo zāi ? Makā yēk pāu zāi, moja voda bāvāk årdo, boiņik
yēk pāu, ani moja bāpaik yệk rātly. Yēk mon tanduļ molāk
kāņ -geunčeāk kitle rupoi lagtāt ? Tode pāuţi sāde čār rupoi,
tode pāuți čār, tode pāuţi sāde tin, tode pāuţi tin ani uņeñ
(and less) . Kristāvāñso poilo Pāp Sāib San Pedru assullo ,
dusro Sañ Lin, tisro Sañ Klet, čouto Sañ Klement , pānsvo
Sañ Anaklet. Dog -dog Igarjent tzålā. Pončisvea vorsa Pāp
Sāib jubileu ditā. Năiñtz sāt pāuţi, bogăr săttår ani sāt
pāuți tujā bāvāk bokši .

Art. III. Degrees of Adjectives

§ I. Comparative
There are three kinds of Comparative: of Superiority, of
Inferiority, and of Equality.
1. Comparative of Superiority.
a) This is formed in a similar way to the Kanarese, that is
to say, the Adjective has no proper Comparative form , but
 65

it is as if we had to say in Latin : sapientia bona est quam

divitiae, or, literally : divitiae quam sapientia bona est, with
the difference that the word which follows quam , viz . divitiae,
in Konkani is to be put in the pure stem or Original Case.
" Quam ” is expressed by " prås” or “ părăs” , put after the Noun
>

which it modifies, like the Kanarese " inta ” ; e. g. " grestkaie prăs
zaņvai bori = riches than wisdom good (is)”. Instead of " prås ”,
some other particle may be used ; e.g. " vorn ” or “ ki ” or, some
times smukār ” . Thus " grestkaie vorn zāņvai bori = riches
above wisdom good ”. If ki is used, the affected Noun is,
more commonly, put in the Original of the derived Adjective ,
Masculine or Feminine according to the Gender; e.g. " Pedručea
64
ki” instead of " Pedru prăs ” ; “ Mărieče ki” instead of - Mărie
prăs”. " Mukār” , literally means : in the face ; hence the sen
tence must be changed a little sometimes .
b) Another way of making this Comparative , corresponds
to the English “ more” and to the Latin magis, but it is not
often used : this 2nd kind of Comparative is formed by pre
fixing “ ădik = more " to the Adjective and then putting " prås"
or " vorn " , as before. Thus the Adjective itself becomes truly
Comparative ; e.g. " Antoni prăs. Pedru ădik boro = Peter is
better ( more good) than Antony ”.
c) There are some other ways, less obvious, of forming
this Comparative ; e.g. sometimes the pure Positive Degree is
used without any sign of comparison : only the context can
show the Comparative. So, to express : “ Which is the shorter
way of these two ? " we may simply say "konči vāț motvi ? =
which way is short ? ". So also " tsåd = much or more ”” . The
context must decide about the meaning ; e.g. if you ask aa
penitent " Did you commit this sin about a hundred times ? "
if he answers : " tsăd zāit” , the meaning is " more than a hun
9

dred times ” .
2. Comparative of Equality.
It corresponds to the English “ Peter is as good as Antony”.
This Comparative may be expressed a) with "“ bări = as" (Latin
9
 66

instar, sicut) put after the stem or Original of the affected

Noun ; e.g. " Ankuār Mări māye bări kākultiči = the Virgin
Mary is merciful as a mother " .1)
b) This Comparative may be expressed very often with
the Correlative Pronouns , as qualis talis (see below ch. III.) ;
e.g.6zăsso Pedru tăsso Anton = as Peter so Antony ”.
3. Comparative of Inferiority.
This does not seem to be very common , at least in this
form . It is as the Latin : Petrus minus bonus est quam Paulus.
a) The easiest way to translate this Comparative is to
change it into a Comparative of Superiority ; e.g. " Paulus est
melior quam Petrus = Paul Pedru prås boro " .
b) Another way is to change the sentence, so as to get a
Comparative of Equality with negative form ; e.g. “ Peter is less
good than Paul” , change it thus : " Peter is not so good as
Paul = Pedru Paulā bări boro năiñ ” .
c) This Comparative may be expressed also by “ titlo' or
“ itlo ” = such (Latin talis or tam) chiefly if in the sentence
the Noun of comparison is understood ; e. g . after having spo
ken of a good person , you say of another : " N. is not so good
as he = N. titlo boro năiñ ”.
-
A literal translation of the Eng
lish “ less good" is possible, but would not be according to the
nature of the Konkani language, although it occurs some
times, e.g. " un boro = less good ” (instead of “ ūņo boro" ).
Exercises

on the Comparatives.
bud, -i = wisdom ( f.)
-
sompūrn = perfect
duddu , -dua = money (m . ) (not pidā, -de = sickness (f . )
=

to be confounded with dūdų, durbaļkai, -e = poverty ( f. )

-da = milk n. ) grest or grestāso = rich
moladik = precious gāuñ, -āva = country (m .)
Bombăi , Kodiāla (Mangalore) prås ründ assā. Bud dudduā
vorn moladik. Sămestañ văstu prằs Deu boro ani sompürn .
1) Instead of " bări ” we may use " póri”, but this is not so common as “ bări.”
 67

Pātak pide ani durbaļkaie vorn väit. Pedru Paulā " prås boro,
pun Paulu Pedru prăs grest. Konči vāt motvi, īgi , ti ? Tī
vāt motvi, pun bori năin. Amso gäuñ tumčea gāvā prås ådik
sobit. Pedru bări , Paulu sikpi , puņ Pedru bări bhāgivånt (holy)
năiñ . Ankuār Mărie bări āmčeo sauñsārāčeo ( or sauñsă
rāntleo) māiyo amso mōg kartätgi ? Nā, Ankuār Mări saun
sārāceañ māiyan prås ădik kākultiči ani mogāļ. Kåsso bāpui,
tăso pūt, ani kăssi āuoi tăssi duv . Santānči kuši Devāk kalti
assălli , amči kuši titli bori näin

$ II. . Superlative
There are two kinds of Superlatives : 1 ) Absolute, 2) Re
lative Superlative .
First kind. This is very easy : it is obtained by prefixing
" bhou or tsåd = much " to the Positive Degree of the Adjective;
e. g . “ vod = great”, “ bhou võd = very great” ; “ tsăd pidest = very
sick ” . By prefixing “ bhou tsăd ”, the Superlative is still higher;
e.g. " to bhou tsăd pidest = he (is) sick in the highest degree ”.
Second kind . This is formed a ) in a similar way to the
Comparative, except that besides " prăs " etc. " bităr” may be
used as in Latin inter or super; l. 3. “ Antony is the most
clever boy = Anton såktañ burgeäñ bitår ušär" ; we may say 7

also : “ Anton såktan burgeāñ prås (or vorn ) ušār” .

6

b) Another way is to prefix “ ădik =more” to the Adjective,

putting then , if required, “ vorn" or " bităr”; e.g. " the Hima
layas are the highest mountains = Himālaya ådik ubār porvot”.
There are, besides these, some other ways of forming both
Superlatives; e.g. " pois pois = far far (very far ) ” etc.; these
may be learnt by practice.
Adverbs have no proper form of the Comparative and Superlative ; they
follow the rule of the Adjectives, except that sometimes to form the Compara
tive, “tsă d ” is prefixed, if the Adverb is the Instrumental of the Substantive ;
e . g . “ Peter walks more slowly than Simon = Pedru Simava prăs soukās tsăltā ” ;
" he talks Konkani more easily = to Konkani bhās tsad sasārāyen ulaitā ”,
literally : " he speaks Konkani with greater facility ":
1) Or “ Paulu ” ; for this word may follow the 2nd or 5th Declension, ad libitum .
9*
 68

§ III. Irregular Comparatives and Superlatives

Lān = little Comp. uņo (-i, -eñ) .
Bhou = much Comp. tsăd.
Boro = good Superl. bhou boro (reg .)
or uttăm or uttim : the 2nd form ,
i.e. uttim , is more common .
Pois far Comp. mukār = before, or further.

SIV. Augmentative and Diminutive )

They correspond to the Italian libriceino and librone as
regards Substantives , to piccolino and riccone as regards Ad
jectives.
1. Very often there is no proper form for these degrees.
Hence if it is required to use them , two or more words must
be used ; 1.g. a) sometimes the Augmentative is made by re
peating the Adjective or Substantive ; so “ pois pois= far far ” ;
" fulañ fulañ = many flowers ” , as in the Bible : tribus tribus;
but this is rather a Superlative, as regards the Adjective;
b) often the words “ illo (-i, -eñ)” or “ todo (-i, -eñ )” or “ tikeñ"
indeclinable (which all mean “ a little" ), can be prefixed to
make the Diminutive both of Substantives and Adjectives; e.g.
" illo boro, or tikeñ boro = somewhat good " ; " illeñ udak = a
= a

little water ” ,
2. Sometimes the Diminutive of Substantives has a proper
form ; h.e. a ) the Substantives are formed diminutive by adding
the termination -er or -at, and then they are , mostly , of the Neu
ter Gender ; e.g. “ rāuļ = palace ( m .)", " rāul-er = small palace
(n.)” (a part of a large palace) ; " kauļo = crow ( m .)", " kauļer =
small crow (f.)” ; “ vāg = tiger (m .)” , “ văgăt = small tiger ( n .)" ;
2

but this form of Diminutive is used only with a few Nouns .

6) With some other Nouns the Diminutive is formed by adding
-i or -ko, (-ki for the Feminine) or -geñ ; e.g. “ ghāt, -a = hill ( m .)”,
its diminutive is “ ghāti = hillock (f. )” ; “ pādo = little bullock , ”
1) For the sake of convenience I speak here also of Substantives.
 69

*“ pāļko = very little bullock”; “ padi = small she-calf”, “ pāờki= >

very small she-calf " ; " rānd = widow " , " rāndgen small
widow ( n .)” ; (“ rāņd” and “ rāņdgeñ” are very low, and rather
offensive words) . The terminations -i and -ki mostly are a sign
of Feminine Gender, -ko of Masculine Gender, -geñ of Neuter
Gender. Before adding these terminations, euphony may re
quire to cut off the last vowel, as the above examples show.
Besides the above given forms of Diminutive and Augmentatire, there are
some others , e.g. by prefixing “ dakto = little ” , “ sumār = moderate” ; as these
are very easy, I leave them to the private diligence.

Exercises

on the Superlatives
kotteponāso = wicked gårmi , -me = heat ( f.)f
rāz, -ja = kingdom (n.)) såsārāi, -e = facility ( f.)
sõd = leave khåro = true
ubir, -bra = mud (m .) dukh , -i = sorrow ( f.)
yer other reuñ, reve = sand ( f.)
dhairyavont = courageous bangār, -8-a == gold (n.)
sukh, -a = happiness (n. )

Deu bhou boro : monšāčeñ kaliz bhou kotteponačeñ. Sår

ginčeñ rāz bhou moladik : tāče păsun såkåt våstu söd. Săme
stañ văstun prăs Devāso mog boro : tāče mukār bangār reve
bări ya ubra bări. Khări pātkānči dukh sămestañ yerañ dukhin
vorn vöd. Såkțañ vāițāñ bitir pātak bhou tzăd väit. Pedru
yerañ burgeāñ mukär ådik dhairyavont burgo. Lān lān sukh
tode pāuți vod vāițānči suru zāun assā. Pedru Paulu vorn
tsåd sasārāyen siktā. Pedruso duddu uņo zatā. Atāñ gărmi
tsăd (or vòt tsăd) ; toqeañ disāð uprānt uņi zāteli . Lādru
(= Lazarus) uttim (or uttăm ) burgo. Goyiñ pois assā : Bombăi
ani mukār assā.
 - 70

CHAPTER III . PRONOUNS

§ 1. Personal Pronouns
Āuñ = I
Singular : Plural:
Nom . āuñ amiñ
Dat. makā amkan
Accus. makā amkāñ
Instrum . āuveñ amin
Ist Loc. not used not used
2nd Loc . mojer amčer
Orig . followed by moje kåde elc. amče kåde etc.
Postpositions

Tūñ = thou
Nom . tūñ tumin
Dat. tukā tumkāñ
Accus . . tukā tumkāñ
Instrum . tuven tumiñ
Ist Loc . not used not used
2nd Loc . tujer tumčer
Orig . followed by ! tuje kåde etc. tumče kåde etc.
Postpositions

To = he
Nom . to te
Dat . takā tankāñ
Accus . taka tankāñ
Instrum . tanen taņiñ
Ist Loc. tantu tantu
2nd Loc. tačer tander
Orig. followed by
tače pasun etc. tanče kåde etc.
Postpositions
 - 71

Ti = she
Nom . ti teo
Dat. tikā tankān
Accus . tikā tankāñ
Instrum . tineñ taniñ
Ist Loc. tantu tantu
2nd Loc. tičer tander
Orig . followed by / tiče kåde etc. tanče kåde etc.
Postpositions
Teñ it
Nom . teñ tin
Dat. takā tankāñ
Accus . takā ( sell, ten) tankāñ
Instrum . tanen taņin
ist Loc. tantu tantu
2nd Loc. tačer tancer
Orig. followed by /
tače kăde etc. tanče kåde etc.
Postpositions
Instead of to, remote Pronoun, o (uo) may be used , which
is approximate Pronoun . It is declined almost in the same
way ; but as there is some difficulty in the pronunciation, I
put its Declension too. According to the Kanarese, it should
be written o, i, eñ but pronounced uo, i, yeň. I will write it as
it is pronounced in order to remove this difficulty.
Singular : Plural :
m. f. n . m. f. n.

Nom . uo i yen ye yeo in

Dat . akā ikā akā ankan
Accus. akā ikā akā ankañ
( seld .) uo i yen ( seld . as the Nomin .)
Instr. aneñ ineñ aneñ aniñ
ist Loc . antu antu
2nd Loc. acer ičer acer ander
Orig. with ače iče ače kåde etc. anče kåde etc.
Postp .
 72

Observations :
1. The pure Genitive does not exist ; if required , the cor
responding Adjective Possessive is used, just as I have shown
above , of the other Genitives. So "amore tui = tujea mogān =
amore tuo" . Vocative and Original do not seem to be used .
If the Vocative be really required, the Nominative perhaps
might be used, although I have never found such an ex
ample ; e.g. “ O thou , man of God ! =ye , tūñ, Devāgelea monšā !”
Instead of the Original of the Pronoun , the Original of the
derived Possessive Adjective may be used.
2 . If a Preposition in English be joined to the Personal
Pronoun , it is translated into Konkani by the Adjective
Possessive in the oblique case, followed by the Konkani Post
position ; l.g. " Pray for me= moje pāsun māg ” ; “ the book is
=

with you = livrụ tuje lāgiñ assā” etc. Yet, see 7th Observation .
-

3. The Pronoun to, ti, teñ (as also o, i, en) may be used
either as a Pronoun (he, she, it) or as a Demonstrative Adjective
(ille, illa, illud) . If it is used as a Pronoun , it is declined
as above ; if it is used as a Demonstrative Adjective, it is de
clined like an Adjective of three terminations ; e.g. " give that
book to him = to livru takā di ” ; “ give the book to that man =
to livry tea monšāk di” .
4. The Pronoun tūñ is used in speaking with others, but
to show respect in speaking to a person " tumiñ ” is used, and the
Pronouns of the 3rd Person Plural, speaking about a respectable
person ; i.e. te for a man , tiñ (neuter) for a woman . (See Syntax.)
7

5. Chiefly the Personal Pronouns are sometimes used

in the second form of the Locative ( -ger instead of -der or -jer)
as has been explained (page 14).
6. Instead of the 1st Locative, which is not used, we may
use the Original of the derived Adjective followed by “ bităr =
within ” or “ thăiſī = in ” ; e.g. “ moje bităr = in me", or " moje
thăiñ ” .
7. Instead of tače" followed by the Postpositions “ pasun ,
vorviñ" etc. we may use " tea " followed by the same Postposi
 73

tions, if “ tače ” has reference to things ; e. g. " tea pasun ” in

stead of "taće pasun = therefore” . The same must be said
about -ya instead of -ače.
8. We meet sometimes another case of the Pronouns to
” , " antlean = from this.."
and 0o ;; h. e. " tantlean = from that", =

This case is the Instrumental formed from the derived, but

unused, Adjectives in -lo, “ tantlo” and “ antlo ” . This case
will be better explained in the Syntax. Some say " tantlu ”
and wantlu " instead of " tantleān " and " antleān "; yet the
first form is more common .
9. Instead of the given form of the Instrumental of the
Pronouns we meet sometimes another form in -an ; e.g. “mojān ,
tujān”. This form is used with “ nozo = it is impossible ”. It
is not peculiar to the Pronouns, we meet it also with the Sub
stantives ; e.g. "bāpāčān nozo = it is impossible to the father”.
It is the Instrumental of the derived Adjective in zo or so . This
form will be explained in the Syntax.
10. The Instrumentals “ antu " and " tantu " are not used
speaking of animate subsistent objects: instead of them, the
Original of the derived Possessive Adjective, followed by
“ thaiñ ” , is used ; e.g. " ti moji māi, tiče thaiñ mogāļ kaliz
assā = that is my mother, a good heart is in her” .
Adjectives derived from the Personal Pronouns.
These are the Possessive Adjectives.
From āuñ comes mozo, (moji, mojen )
tūñ 99 tuzo, (tuji, tujeñ)
to or teñ taso, (tači, tačen)
ti tiso, (tiči , tičeñ)
03

amin amso , ( amči, amčeñ)

99
tumin ‫לל‬ tumso, (tumči , tumčeñ)
tē or tīñ tanso, (tanči , tančeñ)
teo tinso , (tinči, tinčeñ )
Here you see a change of z into j, of s into č, i.e. the Possessive Adjec
tives which have z in the Masculine , change z into j ; those which have s,
change s into č. Cf. Part I. Ch . I. Prope finem .
10
 74

There is some difficulty about the use of the Possessive of

the 3rd Person. In English the Pronoun changes according to
the Gender of the possessor, so we have his, her, its; the same
in Konkani, " taso = his" , " tiso = her ”, “ taso its " . But besidesBC

this, in Konkani this Pronoun must agree in Number and Case

with the thing possessed, in Gender with the possessor, or, more
clearly, the terminations ( -0 , -i, -en etc.) of these Possessive Ad
jective must agree with the thing possessed ; the vowel of the
stem (e. g. a in taso) must agree with the possessor. So , e.g.
speaking of a boy, you say : " taso bāp, tači bóin, tačeñ går =
his father, his sister, his house”; speaking of a woman you say :
stiso dadlo, tiči duv, tičeñ går = her husband , her daughter,
her house ” , and so on.
I put here all these combinations.
[ Abbreviations : Ps. = possessor ; pd. = thing possessed ; sn. =singular;
=
pl. = plural .)
If ps. sn. m., pd. sn. m. = taso
7 12 17 n f. = tači
» 17 99
n . = tačen
22 1 n pl. m. = tače
92 9 n ‫מ‬ 17
f. = tačeo "
12 12 n 17
n. = tačiñ
79 72
m. = tanče
n f. = tančeo"
12. = tančiñ
gs t
The same thin are to be said abou “ aso, ači, ačeña , etc. which come
from o, i, eñ. The difference between “ to ” and “ o ” is as in Latin between ille
and hic.

§ 2. Demonstrative Pronouns
As in Latin hic and ille, so in Konkani “ to, tī, teñ, or uo,
ī, yeñ " may be 1 ) Personal Pronouns, or 2 ) Demonstrative
Pronouns, or 3) Demonstrative Adjectives. In the 1st and
2nd case they are declined just as given above , in the 3rd
case they are declined as Adjectives of three terminations.
(See p. 72 , n. 3.)
 75 .

Adjectives derived from the Demonstrative Pronouns.

Two Adjectives are derived from to and o, i.e. “ tåssålo and
åssålo = such"; the first is remote, the second proximate ; so
“ tåssålo = like that ”, “ åssålo = like this '; perhaps " tåssålo ” is
shortened from “ tea kăssălo = like that”, and “ ăssålo" shortened
from " ya kåssålo = like this ”. Moreover from to and o some
other compound words are derived, but shortened ; e.g. " yeu
sin = in this side” , instead of " ya kusin ”; “ teusin" instead of
" tea kusin = in that side ” . Finally from to and o " tåsso " and
“ ăsso” (used more frequently in the neuter) are derived :
ståsseñ = in that way "; " åsseñ = in this way".

$ 3. Relative Pronouns
Singular : Plural :
m. f. n. m. f. n.
Nom . zo ji jeñ je jeo jiñ
Dat . zakā jikā zakā zankañ
Accus. as the Dat ., seld , as the Nominative
Instrum . zanen jineñ zanen zanin
ist Loc. zantu zantu

2nd Loc. začer jičer začer zančer

Izičer
Orig.follow . (jiče zače kåde
by Postp. zače ziče etc. zanče kåde etc.

Observations:
1. The Genitive is formed according to the general rule,
viz. czaso, zači, začeñ ” , if the Noun to which this Pronoun
refers is Singular ; “ zanso, zanči, zančeñ ”, if it is Plural.
The observation about staso ” made on p. 74, is to be applied
also to " zaso " : the table about otaso ” likewise is to be applied
to " zaso " .
2. Though the full Declension of the Relative Pronouns
has been given, yet it is seldom used. In familiar language
10*
 76

they use rather the participle obtained by omitting the Rela

tive Pronoun or " taso = his” . (See Syntax.)
6
3. “ Zo, ji, jen ” may sometimes be used as Adjective,
namely if it is joined with a Noun ; and then it is declined
as an Adjective of three terminations ; é.g. "jea monšāk tūñ
guņāzo zači, āuñ takā guņāzo zatoloñ = cui homini tu propitius
9

fueris, ei ego propitius ero ” ; “jea sakramentā vorviñ = by which

sacrament" .

4. The Original of this Pronoun, as also of the Demon

strative Pronouns, does not exist ; unless we take as Original
" zea" or " jea ” for the Relative and tea or ea for the Demon
strative Pronoun. Indeed zea and tea or ea are sometimes
found as Pronouns after Postpositions in the same way as
we have seen in the Nouns ; e. g. “ tea pasun" instead of " tače
pasun ” ; “ jea vorviñ " instead of " zače vorviñ ". It seems to
me, that “ tea pasun, jea pasun ” etc. are used only for things ;
>
whereas “ zače pasun, tače pasun ” etc. are used for persons
and for things. Instead of the Original of the Pronoun, the
Original of the derived Adjective may be used ; e.g." zače vor
viñ = by which ”.
5. Instead of “zantu” the Original of the Adjective,
" zače” followed by “ bităr ” may be used as has been said
about the Personal Pronouns. We might say also jea " or
" zea bităr."

6. If a Preposition be joined to the Relative Pronoun, it

is translated by the Original of the derived Adjective followed
by the Konkani Postposition ; e.g. "for which = zače pasun " ;
sometimes the Original of the primitive Adjective (zea) is
used, instead of the Original of the derived Adjective. This
6th observation, of course, supposes that the Konkani Post
position governs the Original ; if the Postposition governs the
Dative or the Nominative, then the Dative or the Nominative
of the Pronoun is used. This limitation is to be applied also
to the 2nd observation , p. 72.
 -
- 77

The observations 8 and 9 about Personal Pronouns,

p. 73 , mutatis mutandis, are to be applied also to the Rela
tive Pronouns and will be explained in the Syntax.

Adjective derived from “ zo ” .

From zo is derived " zásso”, in Latin qualis, and it requires
a Correlative Pronoun ; because its exact meaning is " in that
way, which, or that which” and the like ; e.g. " zăsso ailo, tăsso
yeundi = let him come, as he came, or in the very state in
which he came" .

$ 4. Pronoun " apun "

The Latin ipse as in this sentence : ipse faciam , or ipse
facias, etc. is somewhat similar to this Pronoun. It may be
used in all persons, and in both numbers. There is some
other form of this Pronoun , but this is the most common . It
is declined like aa Noun of the 2nd Declension. In the oblique
cases it is like the Latin sui ipsius, sibi ipsi etc.
Singular: Plural :
Nom . apun apun
Dat. apnāk apņānk
Accus. apnāk apņānk
Instrum . apņeñ , āpņāpeñ apņeñ
Ist Loc. apņāpent apņāpent
2nd Loc. apņāčer apņānčer
Orig. followed by)
aplea kăde etc. apleañ kåde etc.
Postpositions
Observations :
1. The Genitive is formed as usually , namely " apņāso ”
Sing ., " apņānzo" Plural.
2. Not all cases of this Pronoun are used , at least, com
monly.
3. It seems to be used only for persons.
4. The pure Original or stem does not seem to be much
 78

used ; instead of it the stem of the derived Adjective waplo "

is used : yet sometimes “ apņa" as Original of “ apun" occurs.
Examples : “ to aplea kăde uleitā = he speaks with himself” ;
" apleā pasun to vāur kartā = he works for himself ", or " apņa
pasun to vāur kărtā ” .

Adjective derived from “ apuņ " .

This is " aplo” corresponding to the English his own, to
the Canarese " tanna ” . It is very frequent; and is declined
like an Adjective of three terminations. It is also used as
Adjective of 1st and 2nd Person " apliñ pātkañ sāngtañ = I
say my sins" , although more commonly both Pronoun and Ad
>

jective are used only for the 3rd Person .

$ 5. Interrogative Pronouns
1. Kon = who ? quis ?
Nom . kon kon
Dat. könāk kõņānk
Accus. kõņāk könānk
Instrum . kõnen kõņeñ
Ist Loc . not used not used
2nd Loc. kāņāčer kõņānčer
Orig. followed )
by kõna lāgiñ etc.
kāņāñ lāgiñ etc.
Postpositions
Observations :
1. The Genitive is formed as usually ; “ kõņāso" Singular,
“ kõņāñso” Plural.
2. Instead of the 1st Locative, we may use the Original
followed by “ bităr ” .
3. This Pronoun is used sometimes in the Plural when
we should use the Singular; e.g. “ gåra kāņ natelle” . [Perhaps
in this example it is not Plural, but the Neuter Singular (na
tellen) , as this kõņ comprehends both men and women, conse
quently Neuter Gender). (See p. 43 , n. 5.)
 79

4. All the above cases, chiefly in the Plural, are not com
mon ; on the contrary its Original “ kõņa” occurs sometimes,
although not often .
2. Kiteñ = quid , what ?
-

It is declined according to the Neuter of the 3rd Declen

sion .
Stem kitea " .
Nom . kiteñ Instrum . kiteān
Dat. kiteak Orig . followed by
kitea pasun etc.
Accus. kiten Postpositions
3. Kön to etc. = 'which ?
To express the English “ which ” , Lat. uter or qualis, “ kõn ”,
>

above given , may be used, or " kon to ” literally = quis iste

or konso (shortened from kõņāzo) which seems to be different
from “ khainso = of what origin ”, derived from “ khaiñ "
where” ; it may be derived also from “ khaiñ ? = what?" and
then it means qualis.
The Declension of “ kõn " is as above ; of “ kõn to ” the com
2
pound of the Declension of " kõn " and " to " ; the others are de
clined as Adjectives of three terminations.
There are other Interrogative Pronouns ; they may be found in the Dic
tionary, with their irregularity, if there be any.

$ 6. Indefinite Pronouns
1. I put first those which correspond to the Latin Adjec
tive in libet or vis. These Adjectives may be formed
a) By doubling the first syllable of the original connected
Pronoun ; e.g. " yeyeklo = every one” ; “ yeyek = every”, from
" yeklo and yēk = one" ; or
>
6) By adding " ei " or " i ” ; so from “ kon = quis”, we get
“ kõņei = quilibet", or " kāņi”. These Pronouns compounded with
“ ei” or “ j ” are declined only in the first part ; “ ei” remains
always the same. So “ kõņākei = cuilibet etc.
,
c ) The word “ khaiñ = something ” gives also an indefinite
meaning to the word to which it is added ; e.g. oto khaiñ pātak
 80

kărinā = he does not commit any sin at all” ; “ tuveñ titlen

khaiñ poļeunk nā = you did not see such a thing ” ; “khaiñ
=

beaña = no fear at all” ; “khaiñ yēk = any ( qualsiasi)” ; “khaiñ

illeñ = any little thing” .
There is no real negative Pronoun as in Latin nemo etc. ,
but if required, the affirmative Pronouns are used with the
negative particle joined to the Verb ; so instead of making
the Pronouns negative, they make the Verb negative; 1.8.
" nemo venit = kāņ yeunk nā” , literally = aliquis venit non.
2.
. Other Indefinite Pronouns are :
“ Kõņ = aliquis”, declined, as above ; “kāņ nā (' nā' particle
។

to be joined to the Verb, if expressed) = nemo (aliquis non )" ;

=

“ khaiñ or kiteñ = aliquid, something ” ; “ khaiñ nā = nothing

( aliquid non )”; “ yēklo = a man , aliquis, unus” ; “ kõnyēklo =
somebody" ; "ariyēklo = every one” ; “fălano or åmko = a cer
tain man ”, in Latin quidam .

Adjectives connected with the Indefinite Pronouns.

These are : “ könyēk or ariyēk = aliquis”, “yēk=a, an, some”;
e.g. " yêke pauți = sometimes”. From “ khaiñ ” are derived
the two very common Adjectives " kăsso or khăsso) ” and
“ khaiñso" the first="how", but it is used as an Adjective;
again, from “ kåsso " is derived another Adjective, “ kåssålo =
which, or how " . The second, “ khaiñso ", corresponds to the
>

Latin "qualis = of what quality or of what origin ”. They

are used as Adjectives of three terminations. (Cf. p. 75.)
The Declension of the Adjectives, compounded with " yēk ” , >

is as the Declension of “ yēk ”, viz. Singular Number syēk ” in

all genders, oblique case m., n. “ yēka "; fem . “ yēke”, but “ kõņ
yēk ” and “ könyēklo ” decline also the first part, i.e. they add
a to “ kõn" in the oblique cases thus : “ kõņayēka, kāņayē.
kleak ” , etc. The Pronouns in o are declined as Nouns of the
3rd Declension ; the others have been given above. The Ad
jectives in o are regular.
 - 81

§ % Reflexive Pronouns
They are like the English " myself ” etc.
These Pronouns are formed by adding to the original Pro
noun in each case the compound letter -ts or -tz. So, “ āuñts =
myself”, “ makāts = to myself”, “ tūñts = thyself”, “ tukāts = to
thyself ”.
If this -ts is to be joined to aa word ending in a or y, by the
addition off -ts, this g or y appears , although perhaps the word
before the addition of -ts, was written without a, ų, as not
necessary '). Nay, this ą or y seems to become sometimes
å, or, at least, & and ạ, by the addition of -ts are heard
more distinctly ; e. g. “ apun ” should be written “ apuņa ” ,
although it has been written " apun ” , in order to avoid un
necessary niceties. By adding -ts it becomes ““ apuņạts ” or
“ apuſăts ”. This or å might perhaps be inserted before
adding -ts, also in words ending in a pure consonant (see
p. 3 , note), if euphony requires it. This -ts is nothing else
>

than the emphatic -ts I am going to speak of.

$ 8. Emphatic Pronouns
I call Emphatic Pronouns those which add a peculiar
strength or emphasis to the original Pronoun. Thus nos ipsi
would be emphatic of nos. This emphasis seems to be a
Konkanism , because it is used very often , and gives some
times to the affected word a meaning which can scarcely be
rendered in English . So sto = he” by -ts becomes “ tots = he
truly” , or the same (Latin idem ). This -ts is added in all
cases (“ āuộts, makāts ” etc.) to the above given terminations
of the Pronouns without making any other change. This -ts
is added to the affected word : if this word is compounded of
two words , e.g. of a Substantive and an Adjective, it may be
added to either of them ; e.g. “ teāts uora or tea uorāts = at
the same hour ” ; “ Devā pasuntz = for God ” .
1) and
a u are not always written by me, but only or chiefly, if by not
writing them some ambiguity might arise. (See Part I. ch . I.)
11
 82

This -ts, emphatic, is added not only to Pronouns, but

also to all other parts of speech, except perhaps Interjections.
The right use of this -ts is to be learnt only by great
practice. In Italian it corresponds to giusto, propriamente,
esattamente etc. , -såg ! o = whole” , “ săgļots = tutto quanto ".
Examples: “ Pedru vāur kartātz = Peter works truly" ; " tuje
pasuntz o livrų = this book is just for you ” ; “ tuveñ makā
āpoilo dekunatz āuñ ailoñ = I came just becauseiyou called
me” ; “ tåssentz = just so (Ital . proprio così), or in the same
7

way ”; “ Ankuār Mări borits = the Virgin Mary is truly good ” ;

“ uo āmbo tarnõts = this mango is truly green or perfectly
green ” ; “ atāñ = now ”; “ atānts =just now ” ; “ kāiñ nā = nothing ” ;
C G
“ kāints pā = nothing at all” ; “ Jezu = Jesus” ; “ O Jezuts = =

O my Jesus”.
1. Another meaning which this “ -ts" gives to the original word is “ only " ;
e. g. “todeñ = a little”, “ todents = only a little ” ; “ gărā bită rats = only at home" ;
" gărječi văstų = necessary thing ” ; “ gărječitz văstụ = only necessary thing " ;
" uo = this " ; " uotz = only this ” . Even common people use this “ -ts ” in cases
in which it seems to be out of place.
2. Now I should speak of Pronouns quite contrary to the Emphatic Pro
nouns, i.e. of the quasi Diminutive Pronouns ; it will be better to speak about
them later on .

$ 9. Correlative Pronouns
These are like the Latin talis...qualis , tantus... quantus,
and also sicut... ita and the like, because these sicut ita etc.
are translated by Pronouns or Adjectives. The following are
the chief Correlative Pronouns .
kósso...tósso = sicut...ita, as ... so (more exactly " kåsso ,
tăsso, zăsso) "
zósso... tósso = qualis... talis, from “ zo " = qui, and “ toris"
kitlo ...itlo = quot ... tot ( proximate)
kitlo ...titlo ( remote )
kedo...yedo = quantus...tantus (proximate)
kedo ... tedo ( remote)
zo ...to = qui... is
zo koņ...to = quicumque...is, or quisquis ...is.
 83

Observations :
1. " Kedo...yedo” and “ kedo...tedo” are seldom used.
2. Some of these Pronouns may be used also absolutely ;
e.g. " kitle ? = quot? " " kăsso ? = how ? ", or " kåssåleñ ? ” .
3. Very often only the 2nd Correlative is expressed, the 7

1st is left out and understood ; e. g. " Jezu Kristān kelañ teñ
kăr = (what) Jesus Christ has done , do it ” . Nay,, this is the
more common way of using " zo ...to ” i.e. to leave out " zo " .
4. All except the last, are used as Adjectives of three ter
minations, usually in the Nominative ; but sometimes also in
the oblique cases .
5. If they are used absolutely and as Pronouns, they are
declined as Nouns of the 3rd Declension .
6. Of “ zo kon” only the first part szo” is declined as
the Relative " zo ”; it can be used in the Plural also. But
in the oblique cases, it seems better to omit " kön ” and to
use only the 1st part. Yet sometimes the Genitive is used ;
e.g. " Zo koņāso Deu mõg kartā , takā šikšā ditā = Quem Deus
diligit corripit” . Moreover sezo kõn " always requires a Corre
lative Pronoun as in Latin quisquis.
7. Sometimes they are united with another Adjective;
e.g. " kedo” with " võd ” = " kedo vod ? = how great?” fem . " kedi
6
võd ? " neut. “ kedeñ võd ?”
8. “ Kåsso = how ” is declinable and follows the rules of
concord (see Syntax) ; e.g. " kåsso assai? = how are you ? ”
(speaking to a man) , “ kåssi assai ? = how are you ?". (speaking
to a woman ) .
9. The difference between the proximate and remote Pro
nouns is the same, servala proportione, as the difference be
tween 0 and to.
Exercises on Pronouns
Personal Pronouns.
nozo = is impossible
= šivai = except, (praeter )
kårizāi = must do (= must be
=
kårni, -e = action ( f.)
done) zătān kāņe = take care
11 *
 84
-
åskåt weak sāmbāļ = keep [ (m .)
viņe = without upadés, -a = commandment
jiņi, -e = life ( f.) pāu = reach
jie = live adar = commit (v.)
Āuñ tukā, Deva, mojeñ kaliz ditāſ, tūñ makā tuji kurpā
dī. Anton ani Mingel moje bāu : to ušār, o altzi burgo; takā
inām, akā šikšā diā. Yeñ kām karunk mojān nozo : tuveñ
yeñ kām kărizāi. Monis Devāči ratčna : taņeñ Devāso mög
kårizāi : Devāče kurpe šivāi boreo kårneo adarunk tačeān nozo.
Tī amči āuoi : tineñ moji zătān kāņeizāi. Såkăț monis åskåt:
tankāñ Devāči kumok zāi : Devāče kumke vine bori jiņi jieunk
tančeān ") nozo. Moje lāgiñ yēk
yêk buk assā ; to tuje pasun assā.
Mojā vorviñ Devāk akmān zālo. Moje višiānt lók kiteñ uleitāt
(speak )? Moje sărsi (with) kāiñ nā. Tuje kåde kāiñ assāgī?
Moje lāgiñ kāints nā. Sărgār pāunk āuveñ kiteñ kårizāi ?
Sāmbāļ upadés.
Demonstrative Pronouns
kākult, -i = mercy ( f.) vodil, -a = superior (m.)
=

utar, -tra = word (n.) suāt, -e = place ( f.)

rāk = keep piso = foolish
Deu amso bāpui. Tāso mõg, tāči kākult ani tāčen utar
>

amkāñ sāmbāſtāt. Devāči māi amči māi, tiso mög ani tiči
kākult amkāñ såddānts meļtāt. Sărgār amčeñ går, tačeñ
bāgil ani tači tčāvi Sañ Pedru rāktā. Amče voờil Jezu
Kristāče suāter assāt . Amiñ tančiñ utrañ aikazāi. Āuoio
apleañ burgeānso mög kartāt, pun tode pāuţi tinso mög foțkiro,
tinčiñ utrañ pisiñ.
Relative Pronouns
pā ], -a = root (n.) yetā = comes

(Zo) atañ vetā, to mozo bāu. (Zakā) tūñ boksitai āuñ

takā boksitāñ . Rukāk , zāčiñ pāļañ lāmb , vāļāso rūk ( banyan
1) This form in " an" is found in all or in nearly all Pronouns : it is declined ;
consequently here we have " tančeān" instead of “ tačeān ” .
 -
85 .

tree) monțāt. To zo atañ yetā, mozo bāu. Devāče upadės

sāmbāļtolo Devāso mög kartā (or Devāče upadés sāmbāltā, to
Devāso mög kartā; or Devāde upadés sāmbāltāt, te Devāso
mog kartāt) .
Pronoun sapun ”
vadai = educate kiteak moleār = because
birānt, -i = fear ( f.)
f
Kön Pedručeñ går raktā ? Āpuņ raktā . Zo kāņ apņāk
jiuvsi martā , to Devāk akmān kårtā . Yeñ kåssen zāleñ ?
Apņāpentz (or apseñtz ) zāleñ . Mozo buk koņā lāgiñ assā ?
Tuzo buk apņā lāgiñ (or tuje lāgiñ ) assā. Āuoi bāpaino,
tumiñ tumčeañ (or āpleañ ) burgeānk Devāče birāntint vadaiyā ;
kiteāk moleār , tanče pasun tumiñ Devāk lek dīzāi . Yeñ
koņāčeñ går ? Yeñ moja bāvāčea putāčeñ går. Kitea pasun
to dusreānčea gårānt rautā ? To āz aplea išķāk beţtā . Konso
išt ? Pedru . To kåssålo išt ? To boro monis . Pedru kāņ to ?
Går bāndaitalo . Uņdo khainso ? Gauñso undo . Gauñso
undo kåssålo ? To boro rutztā .
Indefinite and Interrogative Pronouns
dótorn, -i = doctrine ( f.)
= tank-tā = can
zaņā = knows āilo = came

Devāče kurpen konāki boreo kårneo adarunk tank -tā .

Tumče bităr kon dótórn zaņā ? Kåssåloi burgo zaņā. Ye
yēklo apņāso mog kartā . Yeyēk monis apleañ văstunči zătān
kāņeitā .Baglār kon assā ? Kõn nā. Tukā kiteñ assā ?
Makā kāiñ nā . Tukā ani kāiñ assāgi ? Ani khaiñ (or kiten)
assā ? Baglār yēklo (or yēk monis) assā ; pole, kõn assā.
Fălāno såkål assā, takā āpoi. Ariyēklo pātkañ adartā . Ari
yēkleāk Devāči kākult zāi.
Reflexive and Emphatic Pronouns
åstri, -e = woman ( f.) betai = offer
Kāņ yetā mojā sangatā ? Āuntz, saibānu. Koṇāk āpoitāt,
 86

makāgi ? Ui tukātz āpoitað. Āpuņạtz yetāñ. Somi Jezu

Kristatz sărgārtāun āilo amče pasun. Ti åstri tuji āuoigi ?
Tītz (proprio quella). Yēkštz (only one) dīs såg!eñ kām pāò
kărtā. Tuji āuoi borigi ? Borītz ( truly good). Kõņso bānk
tukā zāi ? Võtz ( proprio questo or questo solo). Moja Devā,
āuñ tukā makātz săglotz (tutto quanto) bețaitāň.
Correlative Pronouns
Rupoi, -a = Rupee (m.)
Kitle rupoi makā title tukā assāt. Kedeñ vod mojeñ går,
tedeñ vod tujeñ går. Zo koņ pātkānt mortā, to yemkaņdānt
(hell) vetā. Zăssi tuji kuši sărgār zatā , tåssi sauñsārānt zāuñ
(be done). Kåsso to tăssi tī

CHAPTER IV. VERBS

Art. I. Verbs in general and their Conjugation

§ 1. Preliminary Observations
1. We may reduce all Conjugations to one ; because we
may find a paradigm , according to which all the different
kinds of Verbs are modified , except a few irregular Verbs .
2. The different Tenses and Moods will appear from the
Conjugation itself. I was obliged to introduce or rather to
give a name to Tenses or Moods, which do not exist in English
and Latin .
3 . Some Tenses have in some persons three terminations
according to the gender. These Tenses are chiefly those which
end in the 1st Person Singular in on. I say chiefly, because
sometimes also Tenses ending in añ have three terminations
for one person .
4. There is not a perfectly passive form ; but, on the
contrary, there are two forms, one for the affirmative, the
other for the negative Verb ; e.g. I say , I do not say.
 87

5. The First Person Singular, if it ends in a vowel, is

nasal. The Neuter is nasal in all persons ending in a vowel.
6. The forms ending in -ea, -eat, -eo, (or -ya, -yat, -yo )
have the accent upon the last vowel (a, o) , the forms ending
-ai, -auñ (or aoñ) have the accent upon a, i.e. upon the penulti
mate vowel. If there be any exception , it will be indicated.

§ 2. Formation of Tenses
First find the root , namely that part of the Verb from which
all Tenses may be derived by addition, and which, conse
quently, remains in all Tenses. This root usually is found
pure in the 2nd Person Singular Imperative. The root is
given in the Dictionary; to it add the following terminations ):

I.
1. Affirmative form
A. Indicative Mood
Present. Sing. 1 ) -tañ 2) -tai 3) -tā
‫לל‬ Plur. 1 ) -taoñ) 2) -tāt 3 ) -tāt
Imperfecte. Sing. 1 ) -taloñ (m.) -taliñ ( f.) -taleñ (n.)
‫לל‬ 2 ) -taloi (m.) -tali ) ( f.)
f -taleiñ (n.)
97 3 ) -talo (m.) -tali ( f.) -taleñ (n.)
Plur. 1 ) -taleaon 2) -taleat
‫ול‬ > 3) -tale (m.) -taleo ( f.) -taliñ (n.) "
1) These are the ordinary terminations ; yet euphony may require some
change; e.g. " rau " does not require “ unk ” in the supine as other Verbs, having
already “ u ” , ' but only “ nk” etc.; " di" has “ din ” not " diin " in the Contingent
Future .
2) Or " tauñ ”, and so whenever this termination Waoñ " of the 1st Person
Plural occurs, and this consequently must be understood , although not written
expressly.
3) This " ī” is pronounced nearly " ii "; we might write also " ii ", and so
whenever this termination "67 " , 2nd Person Feminine, occurs.
4) The three terminations of the 3rd Person are, according to the Adjectives,
80 " 0 " (m.), “ i” ( f.), « eñ” (n.) in the Singular, “ e ” (m.), “ eo ” (f.), " iñ” (n .)
in the Plural .
 88 .

Past. ( in Latin : amavi, in Italian : amai)

Sing. 1 ) -loñ (m.) , -liñ ( f.), -leñ (n.)
2) -loi (m.), -lī ( f.), -leiñ (n.)
99 3) -lo (m.) , -li ( f.), -leñ (n.)
>

Plur. 1 ) -leauñ, 2) -leat

3) -le (m.) , -leo ( f.), -liñ ( n .)
Perfect. (" I have loved ” in English, ho amato in Ital.)
Sing. 1 ) -lañ (m.), -liañ or -leañ ( f.),") -lañ (n.)
‫وو‬
2) -lai (m.) , -liai or -leai ( f.), -laiñ (n.)
3) -la (m.) , -lia or -lea ( f.), -lañ (n.)
‫כי‬

‫לי‬ Plur. 1 ) -leauñ or -leaon 2) -leat

3) -leat (m. f.), -leant (n. )
Past Perfect. (Latin amaveram ). Usually this Tense is
made by doubling the 1 of the Past ; e.g. " zalo, zallo; kelo,
kello” ; and then it is conjugated just as the Past. If this
cannot be done on account of the nature of the consonants ,
o is inserted between the two l ; e.g. “ tsål = walk ”; Past " tsal
lo"; Past Perfect “tsal-o-lo"; others, chiefly Brahmins, in
this case instead of inserting o between the two 1, add to the
root " ulloñ" or " alloñ " etc., e.g. " nid -ulloñ = I had slept” .
=

The Conjugation of " ulloñ ” in the different persons is the same

as the Conjugation of " -loloñ "; so we get
Sing. 1 ) -loloñ, -leliñ, -leleña)or -ulloñ, -ylliñ, -ylleñ
2) -loloi, -leli, leleiñ or -ylloi, -yllī, -ylleiſ
99
3) -lolo, -leli, -leleñ or -ullo etc.
Plur. 1 ) -leleaoñ, 2) -leleat, 3) -lele, -leleo, -leliñ or
-ulleauñ etc.
Ist Fut. Absol . Sing. 1) -toloñ , -teliñ , -teleñº)
2) -toloi, -teli , -teleiñ
‫לל‬ 3) -tolo, -teli, -teleñ
Plur. 1) -teleaoñ, 2) -teleät, )
3) tele,
-teleo, -teliñ.
1) Both “ lian " and " leañ” etc. may be used : in Kanarese it should be
written “ yañ ”, which may be rondered either by “ leañ” or “ liañ ” .
2) The first “ o” is changed into “ " in the Feminine and Neuter Singular,
and in the Plural for all three Genders.
 1

89

2nd Fut. Seldom used, yet if required, is thus :

Sing. 1 ) -an") ( sometimes “ -in " ), 2) -či (or -ši) , 3) -it (or
s -at” if the 1st Person is " -an ” ).
Plur. 1 ) -uñ, 2) -čat (or -šat), 3 ) -tit.
Sometimes the Future Contingent followed by " zaleār”, may
be used instead of this form ; e.g. “mārit zaleār = si percus
serit"; sometimes, though very seldom, the following form is
used, namely the Past Participle of the Verb followed by the
1st Future of the Verb “ assā = is”, just as in Italian in some
Verbs ; e.g. sarò andato = gelo astoloñ .
Contingent Future, very frequently used, has the same
form as the 2nd Future in an.

B. Imperative Mood

Sing. 1 ) -uõ , or -ungi (rare)

95 2) the pure root
3) -undi, or -un
Plur. 1) -yañ, (-iañ ") or -uñ
2) - or -ya (-ia")
99

3) -undit, or -un
C. Optative Mood

Present." -uñ” in all persons ; e.g." Deu boreñ kåruñ = Deus

faciat bonum " . This very form is sometimes used as a pure
Subjunctive.
Imperfect. The 1st Conditional (see below) with " puro ”,
or with " boreñ assăllen ” or sometimes only the Conditional
is used ; e. g. " to aileār puro = utinam is veniret" or " to
aileār ! = si veniret!”
Past. (Corresponding to the Latin utinam hoc fecissem !).
The Past Conditional is used; e. g . " õh to ailo asleār ! =
utinam venisset !" 2) “ Puro ” oroboreñ assăleñ ” may be added.
1) Some castes pronounce “ ăn ” in the 1st Person , “ -ət ” in the 3rd Person.
2) « Ailo " is declined as an Adjective of 3 terminations, " asleār" is indecli
nable.
12
 90

D. Subjunctive Mood
Present. " -uñ" in all persons. It is very seldom used as a
pure Subjunctive; instead of it the Indicative Present is used,
or the Gerund, or some other Tense.
Imperfect. Corresponding to the Latin ut amarem (ut ex
pressing aim, Ital. affinché ).
Sing. 1 ) -soñ (m.) , -siñ ( f.), -sen (n.)
3) -so (m.) , -si ( f.), -señ (n.)
Plur. 3) -se (m.), -seo" ( f.), -siñ (n.)
The 2nd Person Singular and 1st and 2nd Plural are
not used. An euphonical à or i is usually inserted between
the root and these terminations .
Past and Perfect. I do not remember to have ever heard
it. It is expressed by the Indicative or by the Past Participle
etc.; yet for this Perfect sometimes the Future Contingent may
be used, followed by theConditional Tense ; e.g. " sikat zaleār = =

si didicerit” . (See the Appendix to the Grammar.)

First or Present Conditional, " -leār" in all persons.
Second or Past Conditional is formed by the Past Participle
in lo , followed by the First Conditional of " assā ” or of " zatā ” .
First Conditionatum , (as the 2nd part in the sentence " if
you studied, you would learn'') the form of the 2nd Future
in -an , -či etc. is used .
Second or Past Conditionatum , (as the 2nd part in the sen
tence " if you had studied, you would have learnt" ,) is formed
by the Present Participle in -tolo (or, shortened , in -to) and
the Past of " assā ” .
Instead of the given form of the Present Conditional sometimes some other
form is used ; e.g. instead of " sikleār = if I learnt" , the 2nd Person Plural Im
perative with the Conditional of “ assā ” is used : “ sika zaleār", and instead of
the Past Conditional as above given, the termination “ -leleār" is used , etc. but
the above given forms are the most common .
E. Potential Mood

It expresses possibility, probability etc.

Present. There are three forms: 1 ) “ -iye", or " -iyet”, or
 91

2) “ tank -tā = is possibile” added to the Supine, or 3 ) “ puro ”

added to the Supine.
Past. Add to « iye " or " -iyet” 1) the Past of “ assā” i.e. " as
solloñ ”, or we may also add the Past of " tanktā ” to the Supine.
Future. 1 ) the Present is used also for the Future, or
2) the same terminations as in the 2nd Future in “ an ”, or
3) add to the Present ( -iyet) the Future of “ zatā” or of “ assā ”,
or 4) add the Future of " tanktā ” to the Supine.
F. Necessary Mood
It expresses the necessity of doing something.
To express necessity zāi is used : zāi alone means “ is neces
sary'' ; e.g. “ I am in need of the grace of God = makā devāči
kurpā zāi”.
To show a particular necessity, this zāi is added to the
root of the required Verb after having inserted sometimes, on
account of euphony, an a or i between the root and zāi. This is
for the Present and Future . For the Past it seems that the
Past of the Potential Mood, which should have also the meaning
of necessity, is used by some. Yet I doubt about it. I would
rather use the Future Gerund Passive, given above, call
ed in Latin Gerundivus with the Past of " assā ” ; e.g. " karčeñ
assalleñ = faciendum erat or fuit”. See below the Periphrastic
Conjugation. This periphrastic form , to express necessity,
can be used also in the Present and Future. Or we may
express the Past by adding the Past of " zatā” or of “ assā” to
the Present ; e.g. "kårizāi assalleñ" ; the Future may be ex
pressed also by adding the Future or zatā " or of " assā ” to
the Present of this Mood .

G. Indefinite or Infinitive Mood

About this Mood it is difficult to speak, if we keep the
denominations of the Latin or English Grammar, as there is
a great difference between the English and Konkani Indefinite;
nevertheless, for the present, I think we may say thus :
1) We might say also “ -iyeto, -ti, teñ” .
12 *
 92

Absolute Indefinite. I call by this name the Infinitive

which we would express in Latin saying :"( to legere = il leg
gere" as in the sentence ridere (or risus) abundat in ore stult
orum. These are the terminations : -80 ( m .), -či ( f.), -čeñ (n.) , -

or -unso , -unči, -unden ").

The form in -unso is used chiefly for Causative Verbs and
for those which, although not Causative, have a similar form
in ai or ei ; e.g. " ulei = speak ”; “ uleunčeñ= to speak," or end
in a vowel .
Supine. I call Supine the Infinitive preceded by the
Italian per (to show aim) or the Latin ad amandum , ut ama
rem , or the true Supine, (eo ambulatum) , though sometimes
it has the same meaning as the Absolute Indefinite. The ter
mination of the Supine is -unk, and is not declined. Sometimes
instead of the Supine in “-unk” , the Dative of the Absolute
Infinitive is used, e.g. " ulounčeāk ailo = he came to speak”.
All these are Present Infinitives: there is no Past Indefinite
Mood, nor a pure and simple Future Infinitive Mood, though
this can be expressed by some periphrasis, chiefly by resolv
ing the Infinitive into a Finite Mood by " -moņ = that” , as in
Latin ; e. g . spero eum venturum esse may be resolved into
spero quod ipse veniet.
H. Participles
Present. (-ns in Latin). 1 ) “-tolo (m.), -teli ( f.), -teleñ ( n .)" ;
2) “-ta to, -ta ti, -ta teñ ” . This is not a true Participle, but the
2nd part of a correlative sentence in which the Relative Pro
noun is simply omitted, without changing the construction :
hence that -ta of “ -ta to” is the termination of the 3rd Person
Singular Present Indicative; hence in the Plural 2nd and 3rd
Person it becomes 66“ -tat te ”, not « -ta te ” . See below in the
Syntax a more distinct explanation; 3) “ -so, -či, -čeñ” , the >

same as the Infinitive; or “ -unso, -unči, -unčeñ ,” if the Infinitive

1) More exactly “ -tso, -tči, -tčeñ ” and “ -untso, -untči, -untčeñ ” in order not to
confound this termination with “ -80 " quasi Diminutive.
 93

has this termination ; 4) " ta" used chiefly in composition

with " astanañ = being”", to form the Gerund.
7

Past. 1 ) --lo, -li, -leña; 2 ) “ -un " , if the root ends in u

or uñ , or if euphony requires , only n is added.
Future. “ -50, -či, -čeñ ” (or " -unso, -či, -čeñ ”, for the Verbs
which have the Infinitive in " unso " ).
I. Gerunds

Present. -tanañ or -tastanañ .

Imperfect. -un (or n, see above) .
Past. 1 ) -tåts.
2) -un (or n, see above).
Future (passive) -so, -či, -čeñ in Latin amandus, -a , -um (or
-unso as before ).
II. Negative form
There are many ways of expressing a Verb in the negative
form . I give that which is more common here in Mangalore
and the neighbourhood.
A. Indicative Mood

Present. It is formed by adding to the root [after having

inserted sometimes (see below) & or i] the negative particle
na, giving to it the termination of the affirmative form of the
Present.1 ) Thus we get :
Sing. 1 ) -nāſ , 2) -nai, 3) -nā
Plur. 1 ) -nãoñ , 2 ) -nānt, 3) -nānt ( instead of -nāt ).
Imperfect. Insert na between the root (with the euphonical
a or i, if required ) and the terminations of the affirmative
form , with some modifications which will appear from the
paradigm of the Imperfect to be given now.
Sing. 1) -natlon, -natliñ, -natleñ ; or -natuloñ, -nataliñ,
-nataleñ .
1) For the sake of brevity I call negative root, the root of the affirmative
form followed by “ na” with the insertion , often, of the euphonical " a " or " i " .
 94

Sing. 2) -natloi, -natli, -natleiñ, or -natuloi, -natali, -nata

leiñ ; 3) -natlo, -natli, -natleñ , or -natulo, -natali,
-nataleñ ;
Plur. 1 ) -natleauñ, or -natuleauñ (m.), -nataleauñ ( f. n. );
2) -natleāt, or -natuleāt (m.), -nataleāt ( f. n.);
3) -natle, -natleo, -natliñ, or -natule (m), -nataleo
( f.), -natalin (n.)
Past and Perfect. Add na to the Supine giving to it the
terminations of the affirmative form (but Plural 2nd and 3rd
Person " -nānt " ).
Past Perfect. Add " -natullo ", or " -natlo” or,better, " -na
9

tullo ” (conjugated as the Imperfect) to the Supine.

Contingent Future. Add the Contingent Future affirmative
of “ zatā " to the negative root. Sometimes the negative form
of the Absolute Future is used also for the Contigent Future
negative.
Ist and 2nd Future. Add to the root -80, -či, -čeñ (accord
ing to the gender) , and after it the negative “ -na” giving to it
the terminations of the Present. If a Verb has the root end
ing in a vowel, then in the Negative Future it takes “ -uñsonā ” ,
>

“ -unčinā ”, “ -unčenā ” , instead of “ -sona, -čina, -čena ” ; but if

this Future means a resolution of the will, such a Verb takes
“ -sonā ” etc. as the others ; e.g. " pie = drink ” , “pieunsonāñ = I
shall not drink ”, " piesonāñ = I will not drink ”, (although I
=

were compelled to drink) ; " ye = come”, " yeuñsonāñ = I shall

not come” ; “ yesonāñ = I will not come” .
B. Imperative Mood
Sing. 1st Person may be expressed by the negative form
of the Potential or Necessary Mood (see below) , or add " zauñ"
to the negative root.
2nd Person, add " naka" to the root.
3rd Person, as the 1st Person, or add to Negative
root " zāundi” or “ zāun ” (Imperative of " zatā” ), inserting, if
required, a or i.
 95

Plur. 1st, As the 1st Person Singular.

2nd , Add " nakāt” to the root .
3rd, As the 1st Person, or add to the negative root
the Imperative of “ zatā ” (zāundit or zāuñ) .
C. Optative Mood

Present. Not commonly used. If really required, I would

add “ zāuñ "' to the negative root in all persons, i.e. as one of
the forms of the Negative Imperative. Also the Imperfect
Optative might be used for the Present .
Imperfect. The same as the 1st Conditional Negative (see
below) followed by “ puro " or sboreñ assălleñ ” .
Past. The same as the Past Conditional Negative (see
below) , followed by " boreñ assăllen" , or " puro ”, or only the
Past Conditional Negative.

D. Subjunctive Mood
Present seems not to be used ; if it occurs in English, sonte
other Tense is used in Konkani. Perhaps " zāun " added to the
negative root may be used.
Imperfect is formed by adding the terminations of the af
firmative form to the negative root.
ist Conditional. Add the 1st Conditional of zatā " to the
negative root.
ander Conditional. Add to the Present Participle Negative
the Conditional of “ zatā ” (zaleār).
ist Conditionatum , as the 1st Future Negative or as
the Contingent Future Negative .
2nd Conditionatum , add to the root “ tonā ” (in one word) ,
and, if you like, besides “ tonā” add the Past of " assā”
>

Perfect. Sometimes it may be expressed by the negative

root, followed by " zaleār ”; yet this is rather a particular case
than a Perfect, corresponding generally to the Latin Sub
junctive Perfect: hence, if required, some other tense must be
used. (See Appendix .)
 96

E. Potential Mood 1)
Pres. There are three forms: 1 ) “ naye” (with the eupho
nical & or i); 2) " tankanā” added to the Supine affirmative;
3 ) " nozo” added to the Supine.
Future. 1 ) Add to the negative root the Potential Future
of “ zatā (zāin ),” or 2) add “ nozo zateleñ " to the Supine, or
3) add the Future of “ tankanā ” to the Supine.
Past. 1 ) Add the Past of " assā" to the first form of the
Present Potential Mood, or 2) use the Past “ nozo " (nozo za
leñ) added to the Supine, or 3) add the Past of " tankanā ”
to the Supine.
F. Necessary Mood
This Mood is not exactly Necessary Mood, in the negative form , but the
contrary or quite opposite to the Necessary, i. e. Impossible ; hence it should
be called Impossible Mood , yet in order not to multiply Moods, I retain the
same word “ Necessary .”
• Pres. " Nozo” added to the Supine, or sometimes to the
pure root. For the other tenses, I think, we might use the
" gerundivus” with the required tense of “ assā ”; or also we
9
may add the required Tense (Past or Future) of “ assā " or
of " zatā ” to the Present Negative of this Mood.

G. Indefinite Mood

Absolute Indefinite is not commonly used; if required ,

the Negative Present Conditional might be used ; sometimes
the Negative form of the Supine (see hereafter) may be
also used. Very often a periphrasis may be used ; e.g. " not
to sleep = nidanāstanañ rāunčeñ " , lit. " to remain without
=

sleeping ."
Supine. 1) Add na to the Affirmative Supine, or 2) add
“ zāunk " to the negative root.
1) The negative form of the Potential coincides mostly with the negative
form of the Necessary Mood, as will appear from the paradigm .
 97

H. Participles
Pres. -natlo, -natli, -natleñ, or -natulo, -natali , -nataleñ.
Past. -natullo, -natalli, -natalleñ.
Fut. -sonā, -činā, -čeộnā, or -uñsonā etc. (see above).
I. Gerunds
Present “nastanañ (after having inserted the euphonical
a or i, if required) .
Imperfect. There is no proper form ; if required, resolve it
into the Past Participle or some other form , chiefly into the
Negative Present Gerund in " nastanan ” .
Past. Add “ zatăts (Affirmative Past Gerund of " zatā” ) to
the negative root.
Future. -sonā, -činā, -čenā, or -uñso etc, as above, declined
as the Affirmative Gerund : (“ nā” indeclinable) .
1 ) Besides the given Tenses or forms of Tenses there are some other, not so
important Tenses or forms: they may be indicated, some at least, in the ex
amples of the Conjugation or in the following observations.
2) Under certain Tenses or Moods I have put some forms, which seem not
to belong properly to that Tense or Mood ; e.g. " tanktā'' preceded by the Supine
is called Potential . I did so , in order not to multiply Moods and Tenses without
an urgent necessity.

$ 3. Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verbs " zatā " and " a882 "
As in the Conjugation , the two Verbs “ zatā ” and “ assā "
are required, I put first these two Verbs, though they are
irregular: " zatañ = I become" ; " assañ = I am " .
2
6
Za tā "
I. Affirmative form
A. Indicative Mood

Present. Sing. 1 ) zatañ, 2) 2 zatai, 3) zatā ;

Plur. 1 ) zatauñ, 2) zatāt , 3) zatāt.
Imperf. Sing. 1 ) zataloñ, zataliñ, zataleñ;
2) zataloi, zatalī, zataleiñ ;
3) zatalo , zatali, zataleñ.
13
 98

Plur. 1 ) zataleaoñ , 2) zataleāt,

3) zatale, zataleo, zataliñ.
Past. Sing: 1 ) zaloñ, zaliñ, zaleñ ;
2 ) zaloi , zalī , zaleiñ :
3) zalo , zali , zalen .
Plur. 1 ) zaleaoñ, 2 ) zaleāt, 3 ) zale , zaleo, zaliñ .
Perfect. Sing. 1 ) zalañ, zaleañ, zalañ ;
2 ) zalai, zaleai, zalaiñ :
99 3) zala, zalea , zalan .
Plur. 1 ) zaleaoñ , 2) zaleāt,
3) zaleāt (m. f.) , zaleānt (n.)
Past. Perfect. zallon (conjugated as " zaloñ " ).
ist Fut. Absol. Sing. 1 ) zatoloñ, zateliñ, zateleñ ;
2) zatoloi, zateli,, zatelein ;
3) zatolo , zateli, zateleñ.
Plur. 1 ) zateleaon , 2 ) zateleāt,
3) zatele, zateleo, zateliñ.
2nd Future and Conting. Future :
Sing. 1 ) zāin , 2) zāči, 3) zait;
Plur. 1 ) zauñ, 2) zašāt, 3) zatit.
2

Another 2nd Absol. Future is this : zato, (-i, -eñ) assoloñ

7

(-i, -en etc. as the Past of " assā " , and " zato " as
an Adjective of three terminations.
B. · Imperative Mood
Sing. 1 ) zauñ ,
2 ) zā ,
3)
3 zauſ or zaundi ;
Plur. 1 ) zaun ,
2) zayā ,
3) zauñ or zaundit.
C. Optative Mood
Pres. zauñ ! or zata zauñ, in all persons.
Imperf. zaleār puro !
Past. zalo zaleār ! or zalo zaleār puro !
 99

D. Subjunctive Mood
Pres. zauñ , or zata zauň , in all persons.
Imperf. Sing. 1 ) zaissoñ, zaissiñ, zaisseñ ; 3) zaisso, zaissi ,
zaissen .
Plur. 3 ) zaisse, zaisseo , zaissiñ .
Ist Conditional. zaleār.
2nd zalo asleār, or Zalo zaleār , zali asleār etc.
ist Conditionatum . Sing. 1 ) zain , 2) zači , 3 ) zait..
Plur. 1 ) zaužĩ, 2) začat , 3) zatit .
2nd Sing. 1) zatoň , zatiñ , zateñ ;
2 ) zatoi, zati, zateiñ ;
3) zato , zati , zateñ.
Plur. 1 ) zateaoñ, 2) zateāt ,
3 ) zate , zateo, zatiñ.
E. Potential Mood
Pres. 1 ) zaviet , or 2 ) zaunk puro ( = it may be) , or 3) zaunk
tanktā .
Past. 1 ) zaunk puro assạleň, or 2 ) zaunk tank assali , or
3) zaviet assaleñ.
Future. 1 ) zaviet, or 2) zain, zači eto. (as the Cont. Fut.)
or 3 ) zaviet astelen , or 4) zaunk tank asteli.
F. Necessary Mood
Pres. zāizāi (compound of " za " root of " zatā ” the eupho
nic " j” and “ zāi = it is necessary ” ).
Past. zāizäi zaleñ .
Future , zāizāi zatelen .
G. Infinitive Mood
Absolute. záiso, zāisi , zāiseñ or better, zauñso, zaunči,
zaunčeñ.
Supine. zaunk.
H. Participles
Pres.
Future. zatolo, zateli , zateleň , or zauñso , zaunči , zaunčeñ.
Imperf. zatalo, zatali, zataleñ.
13 *
 100

Past. zalo, zali, zaleñ.

‫و‬ Perfect (or also emphatic). zallo, zalli , zallen. >

I. Gerunds
Pres. zatanañ . Imperf. zaun . Past. zatăts.

II. Negative form

A. Indicative Mood

Present. Sing. 1 ) zainañ, .2) zainai, 3) zainā.

Plur. 1 ) zainaoñ, 2) zainānt, 3) zainănt.
Imperf. zainatuloñ etc., as the Imperfect Negative of " assā ” .
Past & Perfect. zaunknāñ, zaunknai etc. (as the Present).
Past Perfect. zaunknatullon etc. (as the Imperfect.)
ist & 2nd Future Sing. 1 ) zasonāñ, začināñ, začeñnāñ ;
2) zasonāi, začināi, začeñnāi ;
3) zasonā, začinā, začeñnā .
Plur. 1) začenāuñ, začeonāuñ , začiñnāuñ ;
99 2) začenānt, začeonānt, začiñnānt;
3) ‫לל‬ ‫לל‬ >

or zauñsonāñ , zaunčināñ zaunčenāñ,

etc, as explained above.
Another and Future is this : " zatonā (zatină, zatenā) asso
66
loñ ” etc. as the Past of " assā ”, added to “ zato "
>

declinable.
Fut. Cont. 1 ) zainā zain ; 2) zainā zači, etc. only the
2nd part is conjugated, h.e. as the Affirm . Cont.
Future.

B. Imperative Mood
Sing, zauñnakā, Plur. zauậnakāt, or zainā zauň, in all
persons, (or zainā zaundi, zainā zaundit , in the 3rd person ).
C. Optative Mood
Pres. zainā zauñ, in all persons.
Imperf. nāzaleār puro !
Past. zainātullo zaleār ! zainatalli zaleār, etc.
 101

D. Subjunctive Mood
Pres. zauñnā, or zainā zauñ.
Imperf. zaisonāñ, zaisināſ, zaisenāñ etc. (as the Affirm .
Imperfect with the addition of " na " ).
Ist Conditional, nāzaleār.
2nd zainātullo zaleār.
Ist Conditionatum . zauñso nā (as the Future).
2nd Sing. 1 ) zatonāñ, zatināñ, zatenāñ,
2) zatonai , zatinai, zatenai etc.
(as the Affirm . 2nd Condit. with the addition of “ na" )
E. Potential Mood
Pres. 1 ) “ nozo" (the same as the Necessary Negative ), or
2) the Present Indicative Negative " zainā ”, or
3) zaunaye, or 4) zaunk tankanā , or 5) zaunk nozo.
Past. 1 ) zaunaye assaleñ, 2) zaunk nozo assalen,
3) zaunk tank natali.
Future. 1 ) as the Conting. Fut. or 2) zaunaye zateleň, or
3) zaunk tank aščinā.
F. Necessary Mood
Pres. nozo, or zaunk nozo.
Past. nozo zaleñ, or zaunk nozo zaleñ.
Future, nozo zateleñ, or zaunk nozo zateleñ .
G. Infinitive Mood
Absolute. zauñsonā, zaunčinā etc.
Supine. zaunknā.
H. Participles
Pres.
Past . zaunknatulo or zauñso nă, zaunknatali etc.
Future
I. Gerunds
Pres. zainastanān.
Past. nā zatăts ).
1) There are three otbor Auxiliary Verbs, viz. !'zāi , nozo, tanktā ” . “ Zāi" and
"nozo” have no proper Conjugation ; the required Tense of " assā " or " zatā ” is
added to them (see 7 of the 2nd Art) ; " tanktā ” is regular, except that it is
often resolved chiefly in the Past and Future into " tank assā etc.=power is etc."
 102

" Assa " 1 )

G

1. Affirmative form
A. Indicative Mood
Present. Sing. 1 ) assañ, 2) assai , 3) assă ;
Plur. 1 ) assaun , 2) assāt, 3 ) assät.
>

Imperfectº) Sing. 1 ) astaloñ, astaliñ, astaleñ ;

2 ) astaloi, astalī, astaleiñ ;
3) astalo, astali , astaleñ .
Plur. 1 ) astaleauñ, 2) astaleāt,
3 ) astale, astaleo, astalin .
Past Sing. 1 ) assolon " , assaliñ, assaleñ :
។

2 ) assoloi, assali, assaleiñ ;

3) assolo , assali , assạleñ.
Plur. 1 ) assaleauñ , 2 ) assąleāt ,
3) assale , assaleo, assaliñ .
Perfect: not used .
Past Perfect. asloloñ or assolloñ, assolliñ , assallen etc.
as the Past.

1st Absol. Future Sing. 1 ) astoloñ , asteliñ, asteleñ ;

2) astoloi, asteli , asteleiñ ;
3) astolo, asteli, astelen .
Plur. 1 ) asteleaoñ, 2 ) asteleāt,
3) astele, asteleo , astelin.
2nd Absol. Future and Conting. Future
Sing. 1 ) assan , 2) ašči, 3) assat ;
>

Plur. 1 ) assuñ, 2) aščāt, 3) astit .

1 ) According to the Kanarese we should write " asa ”; in order to prevent

a wrong pronunciation of the s, I prefer to write " assa ” .
2) This Tense is not often used ; instead of it, the Past is used .
3)
or assalo. The pronunciation of the 2nd vowel ( also in the other
persons) is not settled : we might perhaps write “ ă ore" instead of “ a".
The most simple way would be to write the 2nd vowel of Perfect Past and
Simple Past, always " a ".
 103

Another 2nd Future is this :

Sing: 1 ) asto (-i , -eñ) , assolon (-iñ, -eſ),
2) 92 assoloi (-1, -ein),
3) "
assolo ( -i , -en ) ;
Plur. 1 ) aste (-eo, -iñ) assale (-eo, -in ),
2) > assaleāt,
3) assale (-eo, -in ).
B. Imperative Mood
Sing. 1 ) assuñ , 2) ās, 3) assundi ;
Plur. 1 ) assuñ, 2) assa (not often used ),
3) assundit,
or astañ zauñ, in all persons.

C. Optative Mood
Pres. assuñ, or astañ zauw.
Imperf. asleār puro.
Past: assolo (assali, assalen) zaleār puro.
D. Subjunctive Mood
Pres. assuñ , or astañ zauñ in all persons.
Imperf. Sing. 1 ) assåssoñ assassiñ, assassen,
3 ) assasso, assassi , assassen,
1 ។

3 assasse, assasseo , assassin .

Plur. 3)
Ist Conditional, aslear.
2nd assolo. (assali, assaleñ ) zaleār.

99
matr Şing. 1 )
ist Conditionatum , assan etc. (as the 2nd Future).
2nd astoñ, astiñ, asteñ,
7

2) astoi, asti, asteiñ, etc. (as zatoñ) .

E. Potential Mood

Pres. 1 ) assayet, or asuyet 2 ) assunk tanktā,

3) assunk puro.
Past. 1) assunk tank assali , 2) assunk puro assaleñ .
Fut. 1 ) asayet , 2) assan (as the Cont. Fut.)
3) assayet asteleň, 4) assunk tank asteli.
 104

F. Necessary Mood
Pres. assazāi.
Past, assazāi asalleſ.
Fut. assazāi, or assazāi astelen .
>

G. Infinitive Mood

Absolute Infinitive, asso, aš-či, aš-čeñ.

Supine. assunk.
H. Participles
Pres. 1 ) astolo, asteli, astelen, 2) astañ.
Imperf. astalo, astali, astalen.
Past. assolo , assali, assaleñ .
Past Perfect. assollo, assəlli, assalleñ.
Fut. as -so aš-či, aš- čen , or astolo, asteli, astelen.
>

I. Gerunds
Pres. astanað or astañ.
Imperf. assun .
Past. astăts.

11. Negative form

A. Indicative Mood
Present. There are two forms, i.e. if it means
1) to be in a place, or 2) simple existence, the
form is thus :
Sing. 1 ) nāñ , 2) nāi, 3) nā. .

Plur. 1 ) nāuñ , 2) nānt, 3) nānt.

If it means quality, e.g." Peter is not good ” , the form is thus:
>

Sing. & Plur. năiñ" or nīð .

Imperf. Sing. 1 ) natuloñ, natəliñ, nataleñ, or
natlon, natlin, natleñ ;
92 2) natuloi , natali , nataleiñ , or
natloi, natlī, natleiñ ;
27 3) natulo, natali, natalen, or
natlo, natli, natleñ .
 105

Plur. 1 ) nataleaoñ, 2) nataleāt, 3) natale, nataleo,

nataliñ ; or 1 ) natleaoñ, 2) natleāt, 3) natle,
natleo , natliñ .
Past & Perfect. asunknāñ or assoñnāñ, assunknai etc. (as
the Present).
Past Perfect. assunknatulloñ etc. (as the Imperfect ).
ist Absol. Fut. Sing. 1 ) assoñnāñ ( m .), aščiñnāñ f u .),
aščeñnāñ (n.) ") (n .)
2) assonai (m.) , aščinai ( f.), aščeñnai
3) assonāñ (m.) , aščināñ ( f.),
aščeñnāñ (n.) ,
Plur. 1 ) aščenāoñ, (m.) , aščeonāoñ , ( f.),
ašciñnāon (n .)
2) aščenānt (m.) , aščeonānt ( .),)
aščiñnānt (n.)
3) aščenant (m .), aščeonānt ( f.),
99

aščiñnānt ( 11.) ").

2nd Fut. astonāñ (astināñ , astenāñ) assoloñ etc. as the
2nd Future Affirmative, except that you add -nañ
to the first part .
Conting. Future, assanāñ zāin , assanāñ zāči etc. (as the
Conting. Future of “ zatā ” ).
B. Imperative Mood
Sing. 1 ) assanāñ zāuñ, 2) assanakā, 3) assanāň zāundi.
Plur. 1 ) assanāñ zāuñ, 2) assanakāt, 3) assanāſ zāundit,
or aščeñ nā, in all persons ;
or Sing. 1 ) assuộ nakā,
2) assa nakā,
92 3 ) assuñ nakā, or assundi nakā.
Plur. 1 ) assuñ nakā,
2) assa nakät,
‫לל‬ 3) assuñ nakā, or assundit nakā.
1 ) This “ ğ ” followed by “ ç ” is pronounced like a Latin hard 8 as in assis ;
I use “ ” , because this letter " ş” renders this hard “ g” better than s, or any
other lotter. (See p . 4. )
2) This form is used sometimes also as 2nd Future.
14
 106

C. Optative Mood

Pres. assanāñ zāuñ, in all persons and numbers.

Imperf. nāñ asleār or assanāñ zaleār.
Past. natullo ( -i, -eñ) zaleār.
D. Subjunctive Mood
Pres. assanāñ zāuñ, or “ assuñ nāñ” in all persons.
Imperfect. Sing. 1 ) assanāsoñ, assanāsiñ, assanāseñ ;
97
3) assanāso, assanāsi, assanāseñ .
Plur. 3) assanāse, assanāseo, assanāsiñ.
Ist Conditional, nāñ asleār, or assanāñ asleār.
2nd natullo (-i, -eñ ) zaleār.
Ist Conditionatum . Sing. 1 ) assoñnāñ, aščiñnāſ, aščeñnāñ
etc. (as the Future).
2nd Sing. 1) astoñnāñ, astiñnāñ, asteñnāñ.
‫יל‬ 2) astonai, astinai, astennai,
‫יל‬ 3) astonāñ, astināñ, asteñnāñ.
Plur. 1 ) astenāoñ, asteonāoñ , astiñnãoñ,
2 2) astenānt, asteonānt, astiñnānt .
‫ور‬ 3) astenānt, asteonānt, astiñnānt.
E. Potential Mood
Pres. 1 ) asunaye, 2) assunk tankanāñ , 3) assunk nozo.
Past. 1 ) assunaye assaleñ,
9 2) assunk nozo zaleñ,
3) assunk tank natậli.
Fut. 1 ) assanāñ zāin, assanāñ zači etc. (see Cont. Future
of " zatā ” ), or
2) assunk nozo zatelen, or 3) assunk tank aščināñ.

F. Necessary Mood
Pres. nozo, or assunk nozo.
Past, nozo assaleñ , or assunk nozo assaleñ .
Fui, nozo zateleñ , or assunk nozo zateleñ .
>
 107

G. Infinitive Mood

Absolute, assunknāñ, or assonāñ, aščināñ, aščeñnāñ.

Supine. assunknān.
H. Participles
Pres. natlo or natulo, natali, nataleñ.
Past. natlo or natullo, natalli , natallen.
Fut. assonāñ, aščināñ, aščeñnāñ.
I. Gerunds
Pres. nastanān .
Past. nāñ astăts .
Fut. assonāñ, aščināñ, aščeñnāñ ( if used ).

$ 4. Conjugation of a Regular Intransitive Verb

“ Nid = sleep ” .!)
I. Affirmative form
A. Indicative Mood

Present. Sing. 1 ) nid -tañ ," 2) nid -tai, nid - tā = I sleep etc.
Plur. 1) nid-taoñ (or nid-tauñ), 2 2) nid-tāt,
3) nid -tāt.
Imperf. Sing. 1 ) nid -taloñ (m.) , nid -taliñ ( f.), nid-taleñ (n .)")
I was sleeping etc., Lat. dormiebam .
‫وو‬ 2) nid -taloi, nid-talī, nid -taleiñ .
3) nid -talo, nid -tali nid -taleñ .
Plur. 1 ) nid -taleauñ , 2 ) nid -taleāt, 3) nid -tale,
nid-taleo, nid -taliñ .
Past. Sing. 1 ) nid-loñ, nid - liñ, nid -leñ = I slept etc.,
Lat. dormivi.
92 2) nid-loi, nid-li, nid-leiñ ;
3) nid-lo, nid -li, nid -leñ ;
1) This “ n ” is pronounced nearly “ gn ”.
2) I write these hyphens only to show more distinctly the formation of the
tenses . In other cases they are omitted.
3) And so whenever three terminations occur in one person, they are for
the three genders, although m. , f., n . are not written .
14 *
 - 108

Plur. 1 ) nid-leaoñ , 2 ) nid-leāt, 3) nid -le, nid -leo,

nid-liñ .
Perfect. Sing. 1 ) nid-lañ , nid-leañ, nid -lañ = I have slept etc.
=

2) nid-lai, nid-leai, nid -laiñ ;

3) nid-lā, nid-leā, nid -lāñ.
Plur. 1 ) nid-leaoñ, 2) nid -leāt, 3) nid-leāt (m.f.),
nid - leānt (n.) .
Past Perfect. Sing. 1 ) nid-ulloñ , nid-ylliñ, nid-ulleñ = I
had slept etc.;
2) nid-ulloi , nid-ullī, nid-ulleiñ ;
3) nid-ullo, nid-ullī, nid -ulleñ.
Plur. 1 ) nid-ulleaoñ , 2) nid - ylleāt,
3) nid-ulle, nid -ulleo, nid - ylliñ ,
or the form nid-loloñ, nid -leliñ,
nid-lelen etc. p. 88.
ist Future Sing. 1 ) nid -toloñ, nid-teliñ, nid-teleñ = I shall
sleep etc.
"2) nid-toloi, nid-telī , nid-teleiñ .
3) nid-tolo, nid-teli, nid-teleñ.
Plur. 1 ) nid -teleaoñ, 2) nid-teleāt, 3) nid -tele,
nid -teleo, nid-teliñ.
- = 1I may sle
Conting. Future Sing. 1 ) nid-an ep, I shall
sleep,
=

perhaps sleep etc. 2) nid -či,

3) nid-at.
Plur. 1 ) nid-uñ , 2) nid-čat, 3) nid -tit.
2nd Future . 1) as the Contingent Future , or
2) Sing. nid-lo astoloñ etc. , (as the Future
of assā and nidlo as an Adjective of three
terminations) the meaning is : I might
have slept, as in Ital. “" avrò dormito;
or, può essere che abbia dormito " ,
or 3) Sing. 1 ) nid-to assoloñ etc. (as the Past of
assā and nidto as an Adjective of three
terminations) the meaning is : I shall
have slept .
 109

or 4) Sing. nidun astoloñ etc. ( only astolon is

declined, as the Future of assā) the mean
ing is I shall have slept, as the preceding
one, for which it can be used.
B. Imperative Mood
Sing. 1 ) nid-ungi = let me sleep, Lat. dormiam .
2 ) nid ,
3) nid-undi.
Plur. 1 ) nid -iañ,
2) nid-ā or sometimes nidiā,
3) nidundi ;
or niduñ in all persons, in Lat. dormiam ,
or nid -tañ zauñ in all persons = get sleep
ing, Lat. fiam dormiens,
or nida-zāi (in all persons) = Imust sleep etc.
C. Optative Mood
Pres, nid-uñ ! or nid -tañ zaun !") – Lat. utinam dormiam !
Imperf. nid-leār puro ! = Oh if I could sleep.
Past. Sing. nid-lo, (nidli, nidleñ) asleār! (boreñ or puro ! )
Plur. nid-le, (nidleo, nidliñ) asleār
= Oh if I had slept ! (it would be good) .
D. Subjunctive Mood
Pres. nid-uñ (rare), or nid -tañ zauñ = that I sleep.
Imperf. Sing. 1 ) nid-a-soñ, nid -a -siñ , nid-a-señ= that I may
sleep.
3) nid-a-so, nid - a -si, nid - a -señ .
ist Conditional ( present). nid-leār = if I slept.
2nd 77(past) . nid -lo asleār, ' nid-li asleār, nid-leñ
asleār etc, as above = if I had slept.
1)
Vulgar people use also this form : " nidundi-gā, Devā ! viz. “ -gā Devā
(O God !)” is added to the 3rd Person of the Imperative : but this form seems to
be too low .
 110

Ist Conditionatum ( present). nid-an, etc. (as the Cont.

Fut.) = I would sleep.
2nd (past). Sing. 1 ) nid - toñ etc. (as zāton
page 99) = I would have slept ; or this
form Sing. 1 ) nid -toñ assoloñ, nid -tiñ as
saliñ, nid-teñ assaleñ ; 2) nid-to assoloi
etc. conjugating " nid -to" as an Adjective
of three terminations and assoloñ as the
Past of assā.
E. Potential Mood
Present. 1) nid -iyet = it is possible or allowed to sleep.
2) nid - unk tanktā or nid-unk tank assā = there
is power to sleep.
3) nid -uñ (or nid -unk) puro = may sleep, perhaps
he sleeps.
Past. 1 ) nid -iyet assaleñ = it was possible or allowed tosleep .
2) nid -unk tank assəli = there was power to sleep.
Future. 1 ) nid -an etc. (as the Contingent Future) = perhaps
I shall sleep.
2) nid-iyet,
or nid -iyet asteleñ = it will be possible or allowed
=

to sleep .
3) nid -unk tank asteli = there will be power to sleep .
F. Necessary Mood
Pres. 1) nid - a -zāi = I must sleep etc.
> 2) nid-čeñ assā = Lat. dormiendum est.
Past. 1) nid -unk zāi assalleñ = it was necessary to sleep; or
2) nid-čeñ assaleñ, or 3) nida-zāi assaleñ.
Fut. 1 ) nid-a-zāi, 2) nid - a - zāi astelen,
3) nid -čeñ asteleñ = it will be necessary to sleep.
G. Infinitive Mood
Absolute, nid -so, nid-či, nid-čeñ = to sleep ;
some say : nid -uñso, nid -unči, nid -unčen.
Supine. nid -unk ( sometimes nid-unčeāk) = in order to sleep.
 - 111

H. Participles
Pres. 1 ) nid-tolo, nid -toli, nid-toleñ =he who is sleeping,
(or nid-toli , nid -teli, nid -telen );
2 ) nid -so, nid -či, nid-čeñ ;
3 ) nid - tā to, nid-tā tī, nid -tā teñ = (who) was sleep
ing, that ; 4) nid-tañ.
Imperf. nid-talo, nid -tali, nid -taleñ = he who was sleeping") .
Past. nid-lo, nid-li, nid-leñ = he who slept.
Past Perfect. nid-ullo (or nid -lolo, nid-leli, nid -leleñ ) = he
who had slept .
Fut. nid -so, nid-či, nid -čeñ = he who will sleep.
I. Gerunds

Pres. nid -tånañ, or nid -tastănañ, or nid -tañ astănañ = while

sleeping .
Imperf. nid-un.
Past. 1)) nid -tåts, 2) nidun = having slept.
Fut. nid -so, nid-či , nid-čeñ = to be slept.
Lat . dormiendum ( est),

11. Negative form

A. Indicative Mood

Pres. Sing. 1 ) nid-a-nāñ = I do not sleep. 2) nid -a-nāi,

3 ) nid-a-nāſ.
Plur. 1 ) nid -a -naon, 2 ) nid-a-nānt, 3 ) nid -a -nānt.
Imperf. Sing. 1 ) nid-a-nātuloñ, nid-a-nataliñ, nid -a -nataleñ =
I did not sleep , Lat. nondormiebam .
2) nid -a -natuloi, nid -a -natalī, nid - a-nataleiñ ;
3) nid -a -natulo, nid -a -natali, nid -a -nataleñ.
Plur. 1 ) nid-a-natuleaoñ (m.) , nid -nataleaoñ ( f. n.) ,
2) nid - a -natuleāt (m.) , nid-a-nataleāt ( f. n.)
3) nid -a -natule, nidanataleo, nidanataliñ .
1) This Participle, not given § 2, is formed by adding the terminations of
the Imperfect to the root.
 112

Instead of " natullo " etc. we may use the other form “ nat
loñ ” etc. (See page 93.)
Past. Sing. 1 ) nid -unk -nāñ, 2) nid -unk -nāi, 3) nid -unk
nāñ = I did not sleep, Lat. non dormivi.
Plur. 1 ) nid -unk-nãoñ, 2) nid - unk -nānt,
3) nid -unk -nānt.
Perfect: as the Past.
Past Perfect Sing. 1 ) nid -unk -natulloñ (-iñ, -en) = I had
not slept " ) .
‫לל‬ 2) nid -unk -natulloi (-i, eiñ) ,
‫לל‬ 3) nid -unk -natullo (-i, en);
Plur. 1 ) nid -unk -natuleaoñ,
> 2) nid -unk -natuleāt,
3) nid -unk -natule (-eo, -iñ ).
Ist & 2nd Fut.Sing. 1 ) nid -soñ -näñ , nid-čiñ-nāů , nid -čen nān
= I shall not sleep, I shall not have slept.
2) nid - so -nai ( -či-nai, -čeñ -nai),
3 ) nid -so -nāñ (-či-nāñ, -čeñ -nāñ ).
‫ני‬

Plur. 1 ) nid-če-nãoð (-čeo-nãoñ, -čiñ-nāoñ) ,

2) nid - če -nānt (-čeo-nānt, -čiñ-nānt),
3) as the 2nd Person .
Conting. Future. Sing. 1 ) nidanāñ zāin, 2) nidanāñ zači,
3) nidanāñ zāit ;
Plur. 1 ) nidanāñ zāuñ, 2) nidanāñ zašat,
3) nidanāñ zatit.
Another 2nd Future is this : nid - tonañ assolon
(conjugated as zatonañassoloñ, p. 100.)
B. Imperative Mood
Sing. 1 ) āuveň nidanaye, or mojān nidunk nozo or nidanan
zauñ ; the 1st form means it is not allowed to
me to sleep," the second about the same, the 3rd
“ get not sleeping ”.
1 ) " u ” of “ natullo " becomes “ a ” in the Feminine and Neuter, in all persons.
 113

2) nid -a-nakā, 3) tāņeñ-, tineñ nid-a-naye,

or tačān-,') tičān nidunk nozo, or to-, ti-, teñ nidanāñ
zāundi or nidanāñ zāuñ.
Plur. 1 ) amiñ nid-a -naye, or amčeān nidunk nozo,
2) nid -a -nakāt, 3) taņiñ nid-a-naye, or te-, teo-, tiñ
nidanāñ zāundit, or tančān nidunk nozo.
More simple forms of the Imperative are these :
1) nid-čeñ nakā, in all persons.
2) nidanāñ zāuñ = get not sleeping, in all persons.
3) Sing. 1 ) nidanāñ zāuñ, 2 ) nid -a-nakā, 3) nidanāñ zāuñ ;
Plur. 1 ) nidanāñ zāuñ, 2) nid -a -nakāt, 3) nidanāñ zāuñ.
In the 3rd Person Sing. and Plur. we may say " zāundi”
(Sing .) and “ zāundit ” ( Plur.), instead of " zāuñ ” .
C. Optative Mood
Pres. nidanāñ zāuñ ! = may I become not sleeping, in all
persons ).
Imperf. nidanāñ zaleār (purő) -= Oh if I could get not
sleeping (enough )!
Past. nidanatullo zaleār ! or nidanatullo zaleār boren ! =
Oh if I had been not sleeping (it would be good )!
D. Subjunctive Mood
Pres. nidanāñ zāuñ = that I may not sleep, in all persons.
Imperf. Sing. 1 ) nidanāñ -soñ, nidanāñ -siñ, nidanāñ -señ
that I might not sleep.
3) nidanāñ-so, nidanāñ-si, nidanāñ -señ ;
Plur. 3) nidanāñ -se, nidanāñ-seo, nidanāñ-siñ.
ist Conditional, nidanāñ zaleār = if I became not sleeping.
2nd nidanatullo (-i, -eñ) zaleār = if I had be
come not sleeping.
1) Or " tačeān ”; and so whenever this form occurs in any Gender, Number,
Case or Person.
2) Vulgar people say “ nidanāñ zāundi-gā Devā ” ; viz. they add “ gā, Devā ” to
the negative root ; but this form seems to be too low, as I said of the similar
affirmative form .

15
 114

1st Conditionatum . nid -soñ -nāñ etc. I would not sleep (as
the ist Fut. Absol.) , or nidanāñ zāin,
etc. = I might become not sleeping, (as
the Conting. Future of zatā added to
nidanāñ ).
2nd nid -toñnāñ, nid -tiñnāñ, nid -teñnāñetc. (as
2

>

zatoñnañ, p. 101 ) = I would not have

=

slept ; or nid-toñnāñ assolloñ etc. (con

jugating nid-toñnāñ as an Adjective of
three terminations with the addition of
nāñ and assoloñ as the Past of assā.)
E. Potential Mood

Pres. 1 ) nid -a -naye = is not allowed to sleep,

2) nidunk nozo = it is not possible to sleep,
3) nidunk tankanāñ = there is no power to sleep.
Past. 1 ) nidanaye assaleñ = it was not allowed to sleep ;
2) nidunk nozo assaleñ = it was impossible to sleep ;
3) nidunk tank natali = there was no power to sleep.
Fut. 1 ) nidanaye , or nidanayet asteleñ = it will not be
allowed to sleep ;
2) nidunk nozo zateleñ= it will be impossible to sleep ;
3) nidunk tank aš-čināñ = there will be no power
to sleep ;
4) nidanāñ zāin etc. = perhaps I shall get not sleeping.
F. Necessary Mood
Pres. nidunk nozo = it is impossible to sleep.
Past. 1) assalleñ = it was impossible to sleep ;
2) nid -čeñ natalleñ = Lat. dormiendum non erat (or
non fuit).
Future as Pres. Or nidunk nozo zateleñ it will be im
possible to sleep.
G. Infinitive Mood
Absol, nidanastanāñ raunčeñ = to remain without sleeping.
Supine. nidanāñ zāunk = in order not to sleep.
 115

H. Participles
Pres. 1 ) nid-a -natulo, nid -a -natali, nid -a- nataleñ = not
sleeping, he who does not sleep ;
2) nidanāñ = not sleeping (used with an Auxiliary
Verb );
3) nid -so -nāñ, -či-nāñ, -čeñnāň ( seldom used ).
Past. nidunk -natullo or nid -a -natullo = he who did not sleep.
Fut. 1 ) nid -a -natulo = he who will not sleep,
2) nid -so -nāñ, -či-nāñ, -čeñnāñ (seldom used ),
3) nid -to -nāñ, -ti-nāñ, -teñnāñ (used with an Auxiliary
Verb.) Some might consider this last Participle
as a finite Mood : yet the construction and form
of it is similar to the form and construction of
other Participles ; hence I put it as a Participle.
I. Gerunds
1

Pres. nida-nāstanañ or nidanan āstanañ = without sleep

ing etc.
Past, nidanāñ zatătz = not having slept.
Futur . nid-sonāñ ( -čināñ, -čenāņ) , or nidanāñ zāuñso
Lat. non dormiendum .
Although the Verbs having the root ending in a vowel follow mostly the
above given paradigm, yet, as in some small things, they have some peouliarity,
an example of these Verbs also should be given : but it will be more convenient
to insert it when I speak of the Irregular Verbs .

$ 5. Observations on Verbs.
Before explaining the different kinds of Verbs, let us make
some important observations, reserving others for the Syntax.
put them down as they come in my mind without order.
1. In the paradigm I have put all the persons, and, as
far as possible, also the most common Tenses. Yet, in parti
cular cases, certain Persons and Tenses are often either not
used or only seldom ; e.g. the 1st Person Neuter never or
almost never occurs ; for the ordinary case in which it should
15*
 116

be employed is if a girl (Neuter) speaks ; but although nouns

of girls are Neuter, yet when girls speak, they use the Femi
nine Gender for themselves. For this reason , I think, some
told me, when I asked about the 1st Person Neuter, that it
was like the 1st Person Feminine. I have tried also to supply
the deficiency of some Tenses by other forms, chiefly by Peri
phrastic Conjugation .
2. As hinted at in the paradigm, an à or i, for the sake of
euphony, is often inserted between the root and the terminations.
This happens chiefly in the negative form and in the Neces
sary Mood with "zāi ”. This a or i is usually inserted if the
root ends in a consonant, and the termination to be added
begins with a consonant. Yet, if the root end in n or ņ and
the termination begins with n, euphony does not require any
insertion of vowel ; e.g.“ moņ = say” , “ moņņānt = (they) do not
say', but " moņazāi” ; so also if it ends in 1, it does not require
any a or i; é.g. “ kaņķāļnā = he does not hate”, from “ kaņķā !”,
9 9

and so perhaps some other termination may not require any

insertion. If the root ends in i, 'u, e, o , mostly no euphonic
vowel is inserted ; because then euphony does not require it.
If it ends in a, it seems to be more common not to insert
any vowel; yet there are exceptions. I say a or i, but not
indifferently : in certain cases a is more euphonic ; in certain
other cases i is more euphonic, -- practice will teach you .
So “ khā = eat” requires i, because two à are not euphonic ;
“khāinā= ( he) does not eat”.
If the root ends in u, or uñ, or au, or auñ , this uu is changed
(in the above said cases, in which a or i must be inserted)
into v, and then the euphonic vowel is inserted : " rāu = remain ” ,
“ rāvāzāizit is required to remain "; " rāvanā=does not remain”.
Again, if the root ends in a, one v is inserted in the Potential
Mood : “ khā = eat”, “ khāviyet”; “ zā ”, “ zāviyet” .1) Moreover, if
>

1) The same happens, often at least, with the above said Verbs in “ u ” ,
" uñ" etc.; e.g. " rāviyet”, from “ rāu ” ; or better we may say so : they change
the " u " into “ p " .
 117

the root ends in a or e, for the sake of euphony i is inserted

between the root and the termination of the 2nd Person Plural
Imperative : “ poļe = see ", Plur. “ poleiā ”; “ khā = eat” , Plur.
“ khāiā ” ; “ zā = become”, Plur . “ zāiā ” . Finally, the Verbs ending
with a in the root lose this a in the Infinitive, and sometimes
also in the 2nd Person Singular Imperative: “ aikatāñ = I hear ” ,
“ aik = hear ” . Yet the pure form “ aik ” is not often used :
some affix is added ; e.g. " aik -re” speaking to a boy ; so also
“ volkatāñ = I know ” should make " vo ?k ”. Yet this is used
commonly with the affix, e.g. " voļk -re” , “ voļk -ago ". The gist
of this 2nd observation is this : à or i or v is inserted, as
euphony requires.
3. The Future Potential, as also the Contingent and 2nd
Future, end sometimes in an, sometimes in in. Perhaps the
following may stand in the place of a rule.
a) All Causative Verbs have in, although the original
Verb, from which the Causative is derived, was neuter ; thus
“ tzălain = I may rule (cause to walk )” ; but of the two i, one
of the termination, the other of the root, only one is kept.
(See below d .)
6) Generally, the Transitive Verbs, whether Causative or
not Causative, have in ; e.g. " mār-in = I may beat”; “ kår-in = I
may do ” .
c) The Neuter Verbs , whether they have a corresponding
Causative one or not, have an ; e. g. " pod -an = I may fall”;
=
>

“ tzal-an = I may walk ” .

d ) Verbs having the root ending in e or i, and mostly also
in a, add only n; e.g. " gē = receive” , Sing. " gēn, geši, gēt” ;
Plur. " geuñ, gešāt, getit”.
4 . The 1st Person Singular of the Absolute Future, if
interrogative , is uñ, as in the Present Subjunctive; the reason
may be, because if the Future is interrogative , it becomes
doubtful.
5. The use of the different Tenses, except perhaps the
Present, Imperfect and Past, is very different from the use of
 118

Tenses in our languages, as will be explained in the Syntax ;

e. g. some Tenses have a passive meaning : what has been
put as 1st Person, is often 3rd Person etc.
6. There is no passive form , at least not such as in our
languages. In the Syntax I will say how the passive meaning
may be expressed. For the present , if the passive meaning
occurs chiefly in the Past Tense, or in Tenses derived from
the Past (see 7) , make the construction as if the above given
forms of those Tenses were truly Passive ; and in the other
Tenses change the English Passive sentence into the Active
and then translate it.
7. In the formation of Tenses some are derived from the
Present, some from the Past. In the regular Verbs this scarcely
appears ; but it appears clearly in the irregular Verbs. The
Tenses derived from the Past, I say from the root of the Past
(which is found by cutting off the above terminations of the
Past) are the Perfect, Past Perfect, 1st Conditional (and 2nd
Conditional, if the form " -leleār ” is used . See p. 90) , Past
Participles in lo, and the Tenses formed with these Participles,
or, shorter, the Tenses formed by a termination which begins
with 1 or ọl. The others are formed from the root of the Present,
(viz. from the Imperative 2nd Person Singular, in which the
pure root is found ); e.g. " kår = do ”, Past “ ke-lo ”, Perfect
“ ke- lā ”, Past Perfect “ ke- llo” , ist Conditional “ke-leār”,
Participle “ske-lo". Hence also the 2nd Conditional is “ kelo
asleār” . What I say must be understood of the affirma
tive form .
8. Now in order to say something more in particular,
the Absolute Future differs from the Contingent Future in
this , that the first expresses, as the word absolute shows ,
that a thing will happen without fail; the second shows that a
thing may happen . Exactness would have required me to put
the Contingent Future only in the Potential Mood : yet by
putting it close to the Absolute Future their difference may
 119

appear more distinctly . What I call 2nd Future might be

called Past Future .
9. As 2nd Future I have put down the form of the Con
tingent Future, because many use truly the Contingent Future
also as a 2nd Future. Yet I think that this is not quite cor
rect. I think that the real 2nd Absolute Future of the affir
mative form is that which is compounded of the Participle in
" tolo " and " assoloñ ". The form given as another 2nd Future,
viz. “ nidlo astoloñ" might be considered as 2nd or Past Future
of the 1st Contingent Future. Again, I have put down the form
of the 1st Absolute Negative Future, as 2nd Future for the
same above-said reason ; yet here too, I think that the exact
form of the 2nd Absolute Future (or Past Absolute Future)
is the other, viz. snidtonāñ assoloñ ” . As 2nd Future of the
1st Contingent Future I would use the form " nidtonāñ assolo
zāin , nidtināñ assəli zāin , nidteñnāñ assaleñ zāin ” etc. conju
gating " nidtonāñ ” as given on p. 112 , and “ zāin ” as the Con
tingent Future of " zatā ”, and “ assolo ” as an Adjective of three
terminations.
10. The Participles are a difficult part of the Verbs;
even their spelling is complicated. As to the spelling , it
seems first that whenever they are used for the first Person
Singular, if they end in a vowel, they are nasal, although in
the paradigm this has not always been observed, as this point
as yet is not quite settled. Now, in order to say something
more in particular about them, two forms have been given
for the Present Participle, h. e. " nidtolo, nidteli, nidteteñ ", or
" nidtolo, nidtoli, nidtoleñ " . Perhaps the first of these two
forms might be better used as Future Participle, for it has
the terminations of the Future ; at any rate it can be used
as Future Participle, although not given on page 111 and $ 2 .
But I say besides this, that it is perhaps more exact to use
>

the first of the now given forms only as Future. Another Parti
ciple has not been given, as it occurs only in composition
with another part of the Verb ; this is the Participle in stoñ "
 120

in the affirmative, and “ tonāñ" in the negative form (nidtoñ,

nidtonāñ). The Participle Present in -tañ" (nidtāñ) is used
with the Gerund in " tanan " , shortened ; « kårtanañ = kårtañ
astanañ ” ; it is used moreover in the Periphrastic Conjuga
tion ; many Tenses have been formed by this participle and
an Auxiliary Verb. What is nidtāñ" for the affirmative
form , “ nidanāñ” is for the negative form ; this Negative
Participle likewise has not been put down in $ 2 , for it
occurs very seldom out of the Conjugation ; e. g. “ mortañ
monis = decrepit man ” . In the paradigm only one Past
Participle has been put (-10) ; but we may subdivide this into
two, i.e. into a simple Past Participle which would cor
respond to the Past Tense ; and this has been put down
in the $ 2 ; another would correspond to the Past Perfect,
and has the same form as the simple Past, except that it
doubles the l, or if this is not possible, by inserting one o,
or by adding to the root ullo, just as we have seen in the Past
Perfect. A Participle corresponding to the Perfect seems
not to be used, at least as a real Participle, although it might
be used as second part of a correlative sentence, as I said
of "-ta to" . About this last Participle in “ -ta to " it must be
observed , that as it is not a real Participle, it may become
“-talo to ”, “-tolo to” , “ -lo to” etc. according to the Tense of the
Verb of the corresponding relative sentence ; e.g. " yetā to
monis mozo bāu = the man who comes is my brother ” ; “fāleā
yetolo to monis mozo bāu = the man who will come tomorrow
is my brother ” ; “ kāl ailo to monis mozo bāu = the man who
came yesterday is my brother” etc.
11. Another difficult point is the Conditionatum. As the
1st Conditionatum ($ 2 , p. 90) I have put down the form of
the Contingent Future ; because this is really used in many
cases.. Yet I think that this form is neither general nor the
most exact one. As this Contingent Future always includes some
doubt, it may be used as 1st Conditionatum only or chiefly
when the Conditionatum includes some doubt : if no doubt is
 .
121

expressed or understood, the form of the 1st Conditionatum ,

is, as far as I can judge, the form in toñ " (" nidtoñ ” ), given
$ 4, as 2nd Conditionatum. Then , what remains for the 2nd
Conditionatum ? This very form (" nidtoñ” ) or better, “ nidtoñ
assoloñ ”, which 2nd form is, it seems to me, the exact form
of the 2nd Conditionatum, although the first is also used
sometimes. If the 2nd Conditionatum implies some doubt,
we might use the 2nd Contingent Future (“ nidlo astoloñ” ).
The same, servata proportione, is to be said of the negative
form , i.e. the real 1st Conditionatum should be “ nidtonāñ" ,
if no doubt is implied, “ nidanāñ zāin ” , if doubt is implied ;
the 2nd Absolute Conditionatum should be “ nidtonāñ ", or
better, " nidtonāñ assoloñ ” ; the doubtful 2nd Conditionatum
exactly is this " nidtonāñ assolo zāin ” ; yet “ nidtonāñ assoloñ"
seems to be often used also as doubtful 2nd Conditionatum .
As to the 2nd Conditional Negative, besides the given form
(" nidanatullo zaleār" ), we might use, nay, we should use
the other form “nidunknatullo zaleār" ; yet as " nidanatullo ”
is commonly used also for the Past Participle, the form given
in $ 3 and $ 4 may pass. As these things as yet are not quite
settled , I prefer to put them in the observations rather than
in the paradigm .
12. Some Tenses or some forms of Tenses have been form
edaby borrowing the forms of some other Tense ; e.g. in the
Imperative, besides the proper forms, I have put also some
forms of the Potential ; because the meaning allows it ; of
course in this case the borrowed forms follow the rules of the
Tenses from which they have been borrowed.
13. In the formation of Tenses the reader might have re
marked that the Imperfect Negative of “ assā” is used also
as Perfect, and Past : yet we could use also " assunknāſ ” and
rassunknatulloñ" instead of " natulo ” if the meaning requires
it. The same must be said of " tanktā ” if resolved into tank
assā " ; e.g. " tank natali”, used for the Past.
14 . As to the Infinitive, I said that some use " niduñso "
16
 122

instead of “ nidso, (and so also in the Participles of the same

form ): but although we may use it, we must not confound it
with the almost equal Infinitive of the corresponding Causative
Verb ; e. g. “ nid = sleep ", " nidai = cause to sleep ”; the first
has or may have " niduñso " , the 2nd has " nidouñso ” , although
> >

in the pronunciation these two forms can be scarcely dis

tinguished. (See below Art. II., Causative Verbs).
15. As regards the spelling of the preceding -80 or -uñso,
it has been observed already that its exact pronunciation
seems to be “-tzo, -tči, -tčeñ, rather than “ -80, -či, čeñ "';
consequently this s or č must be pronounced somewhat sharp ;
we might have written also “-tzo, -tči, -tčeñ.” This 16th
observation regards not only the termination of the Infinitives,
but also all other terminations ending in “ -80, -či, -čeñ,” or
“ -80, -si, -señ " as e.g. the Imperfect Subjunctive; nay, it
regards also the Adjectives in “-80, -či, čeñ” , as I shall say
>

later on .
16. The Gerund in “ -tastanañ ” is as much used as the
Gerund in “ -tanan " . As to the Gerund in " un " , we shall see
9

in the Syntax that our Present Gerund is often translated

by this Gerund, although it is used chiefly as Imperfect and
Past Gerund, for which reason I did not put it also among the
Present Gerunds. Moreover the Gerund in “ un ” is used some
times as a Participle, although for the reason just now indi
cated, I do not put it among the Participles.
17. In the Compound Tenses the meaning may require
" zatā " instead of “ assā ” and vice versa, although in the para
digm usually only one of these two Verbs has been put.
About this point I shall speak hereafter.
18. As to the modifications of the above forms, generally
speaking only the forms ending in o or oñ are conjugated , i.e.
they take i in the Feminine, eñ in the Neuter ; if they happen
.

to be used in the oblique cases, the rule of the Adjectives of

three terminations is applied to them. Ordinarily only the
Participles are sometimes to be used also in the oblique cases
 123

(see Syntax ). As to the forms in " a " or " an ", the paradigm
itself indicates the changes to be made.
This observation regards chiefly the compound Tenses
and the periphrastic Conjugation , which will be explained
more distinctly hereafter. Examples : “ poļeiyet assolo = cons
pici potuit"; the 1st part indeclinable, (but if we give to it
the terminations in o, declinable ), the 2nd part declinable :
" kårtolo assolo = facturus erit", both parts declinable ; “ nidun =
having slept, or sleeping ” , indeclinable, etc.
19. As regards the declension of the parts of which the
Verb is compounded , we must consider separately and
distinctly another point. In some Tenses there is a double
conjugation; e. g. in the Conditional Past, "zalo asleār”
the first part " zalo " is not only declined according to the
genders, (-i, -eñ, -e, -eo, -in) but can be also conjugated ; so
in the 2nd Person you may say : " zaloi ( -i, -eiñ) asleār” , and>

a similar form may be used, I think, whenever we have a

compound form , the first part of which ends in o in the
Masculine Singular.
Moreover in the Future Absolute Negative we have another
kind of Conjugation, because the first part takes the termina
tions of the Adjectives according to gender and number, and
the second part, i.e. the negative particle, takes the termi
nations of the Verb .
20. The Potential , formed with " puro ", is pronounced
by some in such a way that it seems to end not in unk but
in uñ ; and zāi of the Necessary Mood is pronounced by many
as je.
21. The different forms put under one Tense are not all
equal, h. e. we must not think it allowable to use them in
differently ; they will be explained in the Syntax. Moreover
if of some form in 8 4 no translation is given , we must apply
to it the translation of the form which is in the same sentence ;
one form has not been translated at all (p. 112) “ nidanāñ
zāin = perhaps I shall be not sleeping”.
16 *
 . 124

22. nāñ is changed into nakā in the Imperative, as in

Latin non facis, ne facias. This nāñ is always nasal.
23. As hinted in the paradigm , if a form is to be chang
ed from the Masculine into the Feminine or Neuter, some
euphonical changes take place : the principal changes are of
o or u into ą or å or e; these changes take place not exclu
sively but chiefly in the Participles in lo.
24. As regards the double consonants, although exactness
in this point was not so necessary throughout the Grammar,
yet in the matter of Verbs more exactness is required : thus
in some Verbs or Tenses, if you write a Participle with one 1,
it is Present ; if with two l, it is Past Perfect; e.g. “ natulo,
natullo or natullo " . About this double 1 it must be well ob
served, that it has very often an emphatic meaning ; nay,
this is the chief meaning of the double l in the Conjugation.
(See Syntax) .
25. Sometimes to the given forms chiefly in the Impera
tive, an Interrogative or other particles are added as one
word to the termination, so that it seems to have another
termination , as we have seen in the Vocative of the Sub
stantives, to which no or nu is added. This change of termi
nation is only apparent ; just as the change of the termination
by the adddition of the particle " nāñ" in the negative form is
only apparent and not real. Examples : " kårtāigi ? = do you
do....?” “ kår-re = do ” (or “ kår-go” speaking to a girl );
skårta - s0 = he seems to do ” , “ kårtā -tz = he truly does ” etc.
=

These particles will be explained later on. But as to “ nāñ ” ,

it apppears from the paradigm, that in some way the termi
nation of the affirmative form goes over to " nān " , with some
little changes .
26. In order to make still easier to remember and to
learn the above apparently difficult Conjugation, let us make
the following remarks: In the above paradigm in some Tenses
two or more forms are given ; one is, very often, simple,
another or the others are, mostly, compounds, chiefly of the
9
 125

periphrastic Conjugation. For the present let us put aside

these secondary forms and keep in view only one form , the
principal and more common one. Then, after having made
this separation, we may again distinguish the Tenses into
Simple and Compound ; but the Compound Tenses usually are
compounds of Simple Tenses ; consequently we may limit our
attention only to Simple Tenses. Now these Simple Tenses
may be divided into two classes, viz. into declinable, i. e.
modifying the termination according to the Gender, and in
declinable . The indeclinable Tenses are these : in the Indica
tive, Present, 2nd Future (in " an " ), Contingent Future ; more
over the Imperative ; in the Optative, Present, Imperfect
(-leār puro), one part of the Past (-leār); in the Subjunctive,
Present, 1st Conditional, one part of the 2nd Conditional
(-leār ), the 1st Conditionatum; in the Potential the forms in
yet, in an and with puro ; and if these two forms are joined to
another declinable part, they remain indeclinable; in the
Necessary Mood the forms with " zāi”, if joined to a decli
nable part, they remain indeclinable; in the Infinitive, the
Supine; in the Participles, only those in tañ and in un '); all
Gerunds except the Gerundivus, which, properly speaking,
is the Future Participle Passive. As to the Negative form ,
the reader himself can easily find out the declinable and not
• declinable Tenses. All other Tenses are declinable ; some even
have a full declension also in the oblique cases, as the
Participles in o ; some have only different terminations accord
ing to the Gender, as the Imperfect, Past, Perfect, Past
Perfect etc., moreover all or nearly all simple finite Tenses
have the first Person nasal, if it ends in a vowel. Further,
in the declinable Tenses the 1st Person Singular usually
ends in oñ, iñ, eñ, or añ, yağ, añ; the 2nd Person ends
in i (oi, i, eiñ etc. ) ; the 3rd Person ends in o , i, eñ or a, ya, añ.
The 1st Person Plural ends in un or auñ, the 2nd mostly in at;
the Plural is not declined (at least fully ). Finally the termi
1) About this participle in “un”, not pat down, § 4, see observation 16 .
 126

nation of the Neuter Gender is commonly nasal, if it ends in

a vowel , in any declinable Tense (i.e. having different termi
nations for the different Genders) .
27. As to the quantity of o and e, viz. whether closed or
open (see Part I. Art. I.) , the final o and e in the Verbs are
open according to the rule laid down in the Appendix to the
Part I.; so "marlò, marlė, marlòñ, marlėñ " etc. not " marló,
marlé, etc.
28. As regards the formation of the Past Perfect, I said
that o is inserted between the two I (see p. 88); because the
most common case in which this o is inserted is when we have a
Verb ending in 1, as the example given (p. 88) shows; yet if
we have a Verb ending in another consonant, which cannot be
pronounced easily with 1, of course then alsoo is inserted , not
between the two l, but between 1 and the last consonant of
the root.
29. Although the use of each Tense will be explained later
on , yet for the present we may say that the first form , if more
than one form is given in one Tense, is more common ; hence
the beginner had better to take the first, although in some
cases it may not be the most suitable.
30. A peculiar explanation is required for the Potential
and Necessary Moods, as they do not exist in our European
languages. First about their Conjugation . As the paradigm
shows, there are not two full Numbers, and three Persons un
less the Tense takes the form of another Tense, e.g. of the
Contingent Future. Sometimes the whole form is not conju
gated at all, e.g. the form in “ -iyet”; sometimes only one part
is conjugated , e.g. " kariyet assaleñ”. Although one part is
conjugated, the conjugation consists mostly in changing the ter
minations according to Gender and Number, unless, as I said,
a conjugated form of another Mood be used for the Potential,
e.g. the Contingent Future. Which are those forms to be parti
ally conjugated ? It appears from the above observation 26,
and from the paradigm . Finally in these two Moods many
 127

forms given in the other Tenses do not exist, e.g. the Gerund
of the Potential. Yet some Participles exist, which have not
been put in the paradigm in order not to terrify my readers
with so many forms; but I must put them here .
Potential. The first Participle of this Mood is formed by
adding “ assollo ” to the Present in “ -iyet” ; thus we get, e.g.
from " poļeiyet = it may be seen ” , “ poļeiyet assollo = which can
be seen , worthy to be seen " . The second Participle is formed
by adding the Future Participle of vassā ” or of “ zatā ” to the
same form in “ -iyet” ; so we get, e.g. " poleiyet astolor which
will be to be seen ” . In a similar way we may form the
Negative Participle “ poleiyet natullo = not to be seen ” .
Necessary. By analogy with the Potential , we may form
a Participle by adding " assolo ” to the form in “ zāi”, e.g.
" kărizāi assaleñ kām = the business which is or was to be
done" and " kărizāi astelen kām = the business which will have
=

to be done” . The Negative Participle would be “ kărizāi natul

lo "; but it seems not to be used. Some other forms might be
formed in these two Moods ; they may be indicated, some at
least, in the Syntax, if it be found necessary. As to the
termination --iyet” , given in the paradigm , I must say that
>

although I do not recollect now any Verb taking “ -ayet”

instead of "-iyet”, for which reason I have put down “-iyet";
nevertheless I think safer to say that the termination is
" -yet ” with the euphonical vowel inserted before “ -yet” which
vowel is mostly i.
31. Chiefly in this point of Verbs, the reader may remark
some inconsistencies, more than in other parts. The reason
is (besides the great hurry, which does not allow me to go again
and again through the MS.) the state of this uncultivated
language; there is nothing completely settled. Consequently
the same thing may be written in many ways, or one way
seems sometimes the right one ; at other times another way
seems to be the right one. Little by little these things may
 128

be settled, chiefly if we begin to write Konkani with Kanarese

or, still better, with Mahrātti characters, which are the proper
characters of the Konkani language.
Exercises on Verbs
kiaļ = play jik = gain
söd = seek ulei = speak
tūk = weigh bānd bind or tie
mār beat formai = command
=

obolsi = praise pēļ = flee

fūnk = blow lačil, -a = meadow (n.)
sår start răgat, -gta = blood (n.)
ghe = receive
=
saukār, -a = merchant (m.)
ub = fly
= fāleā = to -morrow
gāme = sweat usko , -kea = lap (m.)
råd = weep
=
āsro, -rea = refuge (m .)
pos = feed
=
sukneñ, -ea = bird (n.)
tzör steal vāreñ, -ea = air or wind (n.)
(
īk = sell uzo, -jea = fire (m.)
=

Present, Imperfect
Burge lačilānt keļtāt. Moje kåde livrụ nā. Mozo bāu tukā
sõdtā. Amso saukār sākår tuktā. Pedru uzo funktā . Fāleā
mozo bāpui angā tāun bāir sårtā ani Bombăi vetā. Zokon
Devāk obolsitā , takā Deu obolsitā. Ankuār Mări auoi bări
amkāñ aplea uskeār getā ani amso āsro zatā. Sukniñ vāre
ānt (vāreār) ubtāt. Somi Jezu Krist Olivet moleānt răgat
gāmetalo, ani amčeañ pātkañ pasun rădtalo. Zăssi yēk āuoi
apleñ burger (aplea burgeāk) postā, tăsso Somi Jezu Krist
aplea kudi ani aplea răgta vorviñ amkāñ postā. Zokon
tzortā ani Devāk akmānāčiñ utrañ montā (says) ani yerañ
mahā pātkāñ (mortal sins) adartā, to yemkaņņānt vetā.
Past, Perfect
Alexandrān sauñsārāso vodlo vāņto jiklo. To kiteñ uleilo ?
To nakāzalle uleilo. Judevāniñ Somia Jezu Kristāk bāndlo
 129

ani mārlo . Pilātān Jezu Kristāk mārunk nišțurāyen for

maileñ (or only māreilo = caused to be beaten ). Somia Jezu
Kristādea paisāvānt Apostolāniñ takā sāndlo.
Ist Future Absolute
bós sit , seat borei = write
mõd = break dākei = show
bouñ = walk
= fūt = crack , break
=

pie = drink nītidar, -a, = judge (m).

khā = eat aidān , -a = vessel (n.) [n.
pód = fall siāsan, -a = seat (of a bishop etc.)
Nītidar siāsanār bostolo phaisål ( sentence) utzārunk (pro
nounce ). Somi Jezu Krist yeuntea veļār (when Jesus Christ
will come) monis pietele ani khātele. Koinča disā Paskānčeñ
fest poļteleñ ? Åttrave tārker ( day) poďteleñ. Jezu Kris
tāso Vanjel săg ! ea sauñsārānt părgăt zātolo.
Imperative Mood
tzukoi avoid pāțlauſ, -ava = following (m.)
dék, -i = example ( f.)
=
pelo , -lea neighbour (m.)
Jezu Kristāso pāțlauñ kår, ani sasnāči jin tukā meļteli.
Āuven Somi Jezu Kristāči dék kāņezāi.") Monis pātak tzu
koundi. Amiñ yēka mekāso (each other) mōg kariāñ. Tumiñ,
monšāno, Jezu Kristāči kud seuā ; Jezu Kristāčeñ răgat
pieyā ; ače vorviñ tumče åtme posā. Tumiñ tumčeā peleāso
mög kåriā . Sākor apleñ kām kărundit. Atañ māg -neñ ?)
kărizāi. Āuñ niļānañ zāuñ. Foļañ pikanāñ zāundit. Sākor
yeundit (let the servants come). Mosor kårināñ zāundi (he
must not hate). Atañ mojān kéļunk nozo, iskulānt votzazāi.
Optative Mood
Deu boreñ kåruñ. Devāči kuši zāuñ. Tūñ sărgār pauleār
boreñ ! Tūñ săbār pauți vago raulo asleār (boreñ ): (vago rāu =
1) Or kāņeizāi .
2) About this hypen see p. 4, n. 7.
17
 130

be silent.) Ye, Somi Jezu Krist moje kåde aileār! (utinam

veniret Dominus 7. C. ad me !)
Subjunctive Mood
Makā kurpā meļazāi zaleār ") , kiteñ āuveñ kårizāi ? Māg-ņeñ
>

kărizāi. Amčeñ vodilāniñ amkāñ uleileār, amiñ kaltepoņān

(humbly ) aikazāi. Tuveñ lesãoñ sikleār , āuñ tukā yēk inām
>

din. Åstrie, tuveñ tujā daļleāk mān dillo zaleār , tuji duv
tuji kuši kårti assalli . Devāso ādhār amkāñ meļasso kiteñ
kăruñ ?
Infinitive Mood
bog = enjoy čintna, -ne = thought ( f.)
=

bò! -a = violence (n.) ničeu, -eva = resolution (m.)

rīg = enter dosmānkāy, -e = enmity ( f.)
Suk bogunk Devāči kuši kărizāi. Sărgārājānt rigonk 2)
amiñ amkāntz bòļ kårizāi. Tzád čestāi kårči bori năiñ. Čintna
såmestañ văstuñ thăiñ Devāči kuši kărunk Devāgeli cintna .
( The thought of doing in everything the will of God, is a
divine thought.) Ničeu dosmānkāy dorči, saitānāči (or ničeu
dosmānkāy dorso saitānāso).
Participles
mosor , -sra = hatred (m.) nimāņo = last
kanțāļ = abhor zărti, -e = judgment ( f.)
tăn , his moment (0)
Pātak adartā to monis, āplo åtmo kaņțāļtā. Monšāñso
mosor kårtolo (monis) Devāk akmān kårtā. Mosor kårso
monis Devāk ani monšānk kāņtāļso. Kāl keltalo burgo āz
mornāče tănir assā. Nimāņea disā yeuñso nītidar såmestāñči
zărti kărtolo . Devān rătzullo souñsār Devāče podveso gurtu
zāun assā. Monšāniñ adarleliñ pātkañ buďtugalāčeñ kāram
1) About this Tense, see the Appendix. It means : “ If you wish to re
ceive the grace.”
2) Some pronounce "onk” instead of “ unk” .
 131

zāun assalliñ. Yeñ går bāndlo monis ušār ani zaạto monis.
To tzallo mārog boro năiñ, āuñ gello mārog bhou boro. To
burgo zaso bāpui gelea vorsānt mello, vo. ( This is the boy,,
whose father died last year.)
Gerunds

argañ = thanksgiving 1) tčad = ascend

=

Deu amkāñ upkārañ kårtanañ amiñ takā argan dīzāi.

Somia Jezu Kristān Apostolānk ani disipulānk soukāsaiečiñ
utrañ sāngtătz, sărgār tčadlo. Amčāñ gårzaniñ kiteñ kårčeñ ?
Tuveñ karčeñ kām kiteñ ? Igarjent votzun pātkāñso ugdās
kår (make examination of conscience). Devāk poļeun bhou
kušālai bogtaoñ . Devāči sākri kårn, amkāñ soukāsai meltā .

Potential Mood

pāus, -a = rain (m.) bāipāț = by heart

pēņt, -e = market ( f.). boroi = write
rasim, -smi = silk ( f.)
Bore kušien ani zāgrutāyen såbār våstu kåriyet. Motin
Devāk uoļkunk amkāñ tanktā . Tuzo bāu falea yetologi ?
Yeunk puro . Pāus podatgi ? Podunk puro. Pentent rasim
meļtāgi? Meļat. Kumsār zāun kitlo temp zālo ? Tin moine
zatit. Tumiñ sangšāt : tukatz boro kår ; āuñ tumkañ sang
tañ : Kåssoloi profet aplea gāvānt manuonā.

Necessary Mood
Mestri, iskulnatallea disāniñ amiñ kåsseleñ kām kårizāi ?
Rajā " assaleañ disāniñāveñ tumkāñ dileñ lesaoñ bāipāt kårizāi ,
lek kărizāi ani vātzizāi. Āveñ yeo văstu moja burgeapoņā
taun keleāt; ani kiteñ karčeñ ? Sompurņ zāizaleār, votzun
ani sămest văstu ikun, moje patlauñ kår ani tukā sărgār yēk
båņdār meļtelen .
1) Nominative Plural Neuter, used only in the Plural.
17 *
 132

Negative form .
Sānganakāt : mojān nozo; kiteāk moleār, Devān tumkañ
kumok dileār, sărvụ văstu tanktāt. Amiñ amkañ bòļ karināñ
zaleār ani amkāñ ād yenāñ zaleār ( if we do not deny ourselves),
sårgarājānt rigunk nozo. Amiñ pātkañ nizzāun kaņķālleār ,
yeā mukār itleñ sompeñ pātkañ kårčenauñ. Tāņeñ aplo kāido
kello zaleār, āuñ takā sikšā ditonāñ (or ditonāñ assoloñ ).
Pātak kårināseñ pātkiāk būd sāngizāi . Mestri sikoitanañ
tāņeñ aikunk natựlleñ : ače pasun to atañ neņār. Āuñ sāng
taloñ : tumiñ aikallengi ?-Amiñ teo văstu aikunk natalleo.
Tumiñ yemkaņdānt podņañ zāunk Deu tumkañ kášt ditā.
Boreñ sikleār, Devā ani monšāñ mukār tukā ānånd meļtā.
Sikanāñ zaleār tukatz åkmān zatā. Advarlelea disāniñ mās
khāinaye (or mās khāunk nozo) . Zărtăr tūñ atañ veļ pāờ
kårtāi, māgir luksān săma kărunk nozo zāit . Zökön pātkānt
dhărun mortā, takā benjerkarnatulle suāter purtāt ( in not
consecrated place bury ). Dhăirān lådāi kårsonāñ to sojer kåšť
bogtolo. Sipoiyānčeñ mostăk beān aplo kāido kårinastanañ
sipoi beān dāuntāt. To apli suāt sodit zaleār, tåkā inām
dinaye.
Art. II. Different kinds of Verbs
$ 1. Causative Verbs
In Konkani, as in Kanarese and Tulu , almost all Verbs ,
Neuter and Transitive, can be made Causative. Some examples
66
will explain what I mean by Causative Verbs. " Tzăl = walk” ,
“ tzalai = cause another to walk"; " hās = laugh ", " hāsai = cause
to laugh ”; “ pāu = reach ”, “ pāuoi or pāvai = cause to reach” ;
“ kår = do” , “ kårai = cause to do ” . Yet , use does not allow us
to make all Verbs Causative, although in itself it might
seem right.
How are the Causative Verbs formed? Generally speaking
they are made Causative by adding ai to the root of the Verb.
Sometimes ai or i or oi , or ei is added ; e.g. " por -tañ = I turn,
go around "; Causat. " portitañ = I move around”.
 133

Exceptions: 1 ) Verbs ending in u, before adding ai, mostly

change u into v; e.g. " rāu = remain " , " rāvai = cause to re
main ” ; yet some of those Verbs might be made Causative also
by adding oi; e. g. " rāu” has also “ rāuoi” .
2) Of the Verbs ending in ñ some are made Causative
by adding -dai and changing the ñ into n (which in Kanarese
would be written nasal as before); e. g. “ dāuñ = run " ,
“ dāuṇdai = cause to run ”; yet some say also “ dāvoi” . Some
others are made Causative by adding oi, or ai and changing un
into v, or rather by omitting ñ and changing u into v ; e. g.
deuñ = descend ” , " devoi = cause to descend ” .
=

Their Conjugation is regular , although the original Verb

be irregular ; e. g. “ kårai ” has in the Past « kårailo” , although
6
" kår ” has “ kelo ” . They have few irregularities or rather
euphonical changes, which will be shown in $ 6 .
If we consider not the root of the not Causative Verb but the root of the
primitive word, we must say that not only those words which end in ñ but
others also are made Causative by adding " dai” ; e.g. " gusap = confusion ” , root:
" guspa ”; Causative Verb : “ guspadai”. Moreover some other Verbs take “ dai ”
instead of " ai” .

§ 2 Reciprocal Verbs
These are like the English " love each other ” . These
Verbs are formed by " yēkameka ( = one another ) " joined to all
persons of the Verb ; e. g. “ yēkameka keļtāt = they play
among themselves " . But if the Verb governs the Genitive
6

(as the Verbs compound with “ kår ” and a Noun) , then this
" yēkameka” takes the termination of the Genitive or Adjective
which must agree with the governing Substantive; e.g. " yēka
mekāso mog kårā = love (make love) each other ” .
§ 3 Reflexive Verbs
They are like the English " he beats himself” . These
Verbs may be formed in three ways :
1. By adding “ itleāk ” to the stem of theFemininePossessive
Pronoun corresponding to the person of the Verb ; e.g. " āuñ
 134

moje itleāk mārtāñ = I beat myself "; " tūñ tuje itleāk mārtai =
thou beatest thyself ”, etc.
2. By adding “apuņ= ipse (put in the required case) to the
different persons ; e. g. “ to apņāk mārtā = he beats himself ”.
3. There is also a 3rd way, viz. by taking away from the
Causative Verbs the Causative sign (ai or i) ; this way is not
suited to all Verbs, but only to some, chiefly to those which
from Neuter have been formed Causative ; e.g." paloai = quench ” ,
" paloa -tā = is quenched or quenches itself ”. These Verbs
should rather be called “ Neuter” . Their Conjugation is re
gular or irregular according to the primitive Verb.
4. There is another way but suited only to a few Verbs ;
this way is to change the o into u ; e. g. "sodlo= has been left”,
" sudlo = he got rid of, he left himself ”; “fodlo = has been broken”,
>

“fuļlo = broke”; “ soậtā = he leaves" , " suậtā = he gets rid of";

" fodtā = he breaks” , “ fuậtā = he gets broken .” These also
are rather Neuter Verbs than Reflexive.

§ 4. Verbs excluding Companionship (perhaps Solitary Verbs)")

There is another kind of Verbs which imply exclusion of
companionship or assistance ; e.g. “ I do this work by myself,
alone, without being assisted or helped by any one ; I live
alone” . These Verbs are formed by adding “ itleāk” to the
oblique case of the Feminine Possessive of the corresponding
person of the Verb ; e. g. “ āuñ yen kām moje itleāk kårtāñ =
I do this work by me alone" ; " tūñ yeñ kām tuje itleāk kår
tai = thou doest this work by thee " ; " to yeộ kām aplea itleāk ·
kårtā ”, etc. Their Conjugation appears to be regular or
irregular according to the Verb to which “ itleāk” is joined.
If the Verb is irregular, you may find its Conjugation here
after.

1) This expression " solitary ” is not quite suited ; but I cannot find a better
one for the present,
 135

§ 5. Compound Verbs
The Konkani Compound Verbs do not present such diffi
culties as other languages ; for the sake of brevity I shall
speak of them in the Part III. Only the Verbs compounded
of the Gerund in un are a little difficult; about these I speak
in Part III. and in the Syntax ; yet their construction is not
difficult. Here I mention a vulgar manner in which some
Verbs are used which seem to be Compound Verbs. Instead
of saying: e.g. " āuveñ takā mārleñ ", they say: " āuñ takā mā
run geloñ = I went to beat him"; viz. they add the correspond
ing tense of "vetañ = I go " to the Participle in un of the
principal Verb ; but the meaning is the same as if I said “ I
have beaten him ”, except that this manner of speaking implies
a resolution of not doing it any more.

§ 6. Periphrastic Conjugation
This is just like the English “ I am writing, I was writing”
etc., or like the Latin “amaturus sum, amandus sum ” etc.; by
its aid we may supply the apparent deficiency of many Tenses.
This Conjugation is formed in a similar way to the Latin , viz.
by joining the Verb “ assā or zatā ” to the Participle or Gerund
Present, or Past, or Future, according to the meaning ; this
Verb " assā or zatā ” is put in the Tense required by the mean
ing. So “ mārun assā = he is beating " ; for venturus est, you
must use the Future Participle , for faciendum erat you
must use the Passive Future Participle (Gerundive). “ He is
beating" could be translated by the Present Participle in
" -tolo ", yet the Participle in un seems to be more in use for
this Periphrastic Conjugation, if the meaning requires the
Present Participle.
Another more common way of making this Periphrastic
Conjugation is to add “ thăiñ = there ” and “ assā ” in the re
quired finite Tense to the Participle in -tañ of the principal
Verb ; e. g. " āuñ mārtāñ thăiñ assañ = I am beating, lit.
 136

(where) beating there I am”; “ mārtāñ thaiñ astoloñ = I shall be

beating ” ; “ mārtāñ thaiñ assoloñ = I was beating” etc.
To this paragraph of the Periphrastic Conjugation some
Tenses can be reduced, which are compounded of the prin
cipal Verb in a finite Mood, and of the Auxiliary Verb also in a
finite Mood ; e.g. “kărin zaleār= si fecero" ; "kårināñ zāin =non
fecero or non faciam ” (Future Potential Negative) ; here the
Conjunction “ mon = that ” is omitted, yet the whole construction
is as if it had been put. So it is not difficult to under
stand the above examples. Thus skărin zaleār” may be liter
ally translated thus by supplying the omitted " mon" = si fiat
(ut) ego faciam (-si fecero) “kårināñ zāin = potest fieri (ul)
ego non faciam ”.
$ %. Irregular Verbs
They are very few in number, and even these few are not
>

entirely irregular; for, usually only the Past and the Tenses
derived from the Past are irregular . Hence we may say that
only the Past, for the most part, is irregular ; for, the other
Tenses are derived from the Past regularly (see above) . Hence
I will not write the whole Conjugation of these Verbs, but only
what is required. But remark that the irregularity is only
in the affirmative form for the greatest part ; if there be ir
regularity also in the negative form , it will be indicated.
The two first Irregular Verbs are the Auxiliary Verbs
sassā ” and “ zatā ”, given above.
3. " nozo” which may be considered as another Auxiliary
Verb for the Negative Necessary Mood, means “ it is impossible”.
This form in itself has no Conjugation ; if other Tenses are
required, the corresponding Tense of " assā " or " zatā" is added
to “ nozo '; e. g. “ nozo zaleñ, nozo assalleñ, nozo zateleñ ” etc.
Perhaps this “ nozo" is shortened from " nā zaſtā) = does not
become, does not suit” .
4. Another Auxiliary Verb is “ zāi” , for the Affirmative
Necessary Mood ; “ zāi” means “ it is necessary" ; it has no Con
 -
137

jugation in itself, but the required Tense of " assā ” or, better,
of " zatā ” is added to “ zāi” , just as with “ nozo '; e. g. “ zāi
>

zateleñ, zāi zaleñ, zāi zatalen, zāi zāit etc.

5. Finally " tanktā ” , another Auxiliary Verb, is regular,
except that it governs the Dative of the person , and is often .
resolved into the Noun “ tank = power ” and the Verb “ assā ” ;
the Past Negative has also tanklenāñ ", and the Imperfect
" tank natali" is used also for the Past.
6. kår = do. Past, ke-lo . Neg. Past, kårunk -nān.
7. kha eat. Past. khe -lo.
8. ye - come. Past, ai-lo. Supine. iunk (vulg .), or
yeunk (reg .)
9. ve tāõ = I go. ( In North Canara and by Hindus voi-tāñ).
-
Past. gelo. Imperative. vótz (2nd pers. Sing.).
Supine, votzunk, but Abs. Inf. vetzo or veso.
Conting. Future.. votzan. Neg. Abs. Fut. vetsonāñ.
Neg . Imperf. votzanātlo. Pres. Neg. votzanāñ etc.
Hence of this Verb there are three roots or fundamental
forms ve, ge, votz ; the 1st is for the Present, Imperfect, Abso
lute Future, Absolute Infinitive, Participles (except " votzun " ,
and “votzuñso" ; see p. 121 , observation 14) , Gerunds ; the
>

2nd is for the Past and for the Tenses derived from the
Past, (see above Art. I. 85); the 3rd is for the Negative Form,
and for the Imperative, Optative Present, Subjunctive Present,
Supine, Potential and Necessary Mood, Contingent Future,
Participle in -un and -uñso of the Affirmative Form. As perhaps
some might think this too difficult to be retained, I put
the full Conjugation .

Affirmative form
A , Indicative Mood

Pres. vetāñ etc. Imperf. vetăloñ etc. Past. geloñ etc.

Perf. gelāñ etc. Past Perf. gellon etc. Fut. Abs. vetoloñ etc.
2nd and Contingent Fut. votzan etc.
18
 138

B. Imperative Mood
vótz , etc.
c. Optative Mood
Pres. votzuñ ! Imperf. geleār puro ! Past. gelo asleār
puro !
D. Subjunctive Mood
Pres. votzuñ. Imperf. votzasoñ. Ist Condit. geleār.
2nd Conditional. gelo aslear. Ist Conditionatum . votzan.
2nd Conditionatum . vetoloñ assoloñ.
E. Potential Mood

votzāyet.
F. Necessary Mood
votzazāi .
G. Infinitive Mood
Absol. veso or vetzo. Sup. votzunk.
H. Participles
Pres. vetolo. Imperf. vetalo. Past. gelo.
Past Perf. gello. Fut. vetzo.
I. Gerunds
Pres. vetanaſ. Imperf. votzun. Past. 1) votzun, 2) vetatz.
Negative form .
svotzanāñ etc." from the root " votz ' except " vetzonāñ " and
hvetonāñ ” .
After the Conjugation of vetā " I put also an example of
the full Conjugation of another Irregular Verb, to show
more distinctly how the Tenses of the Irregular Verbs are
either derived regularly from the Past or Regular
Kår do
Affirmative form
A. Indicative Mood
Pres. kårtāñ etc. Imperf. kărtaloñ etc. Past. kelon etc.
Perfect. kelañ etc. Past Perfect. kelloñ or keloloñ etc.
 139

ist Fut. Absol. kårtoloñ etc. 2nd and Conting. Fut, kărin etc.
Three other and Futures: 1) kărun astolon etc., 2) kårton
assoloñ etc., 3) keloñ astoloñ etc.
B. Imperative Mood
kărungi etc.
C. Optative Mood
Pres. kåruñ or karundigā, Devā ! etc.
Imperf. keleār puro ! Past. kelo asleār puro !
D. Subjunctive Mood
Pres. kåruñ etc. Imperf. kårisoñ etc.
Ist Conditional. kelear, and Conditional. kelo asleār.
ist Conditionat, kărin etc. 2nd Conditionat. kårtoñ etc.,
or kårtoñ assoloñ or kårtoloñ assoloñ.1)
E. Potential Mood

Pres. 1 ) kåriyet, 2) kårunk tanktā, 3) kărunk puro.

Past. 1 ) kåriyet assaleñ, 2) kărunk tank assali, 3) kårunk
puro assaleñ. Future. 1) kăriyet, 2) kårin etc., 3) kari
yet asteleñ, 4) kårunk tank asteli.
F. Necessary Mood
Pres. 1 ) kårizāi, 2) kårčeñ assā. Past. 1) karizāi as
saleñ, 2) kårčeñ assaleñ. Future. 1 ) kărizāi. 2 ) kărčeñ
asteleñ. 3) kărizāi asteleñ.
G. Infinitive Mood

Absol, kărso etc. Sup. kărunk..

H. Participles
Pres. 1 ) kårtolo. 2) kårso. 3) kårtā to. 4) kårtañ.
Imperf. kårtalo . Past. kelo. Past Perf. kello , or kelolo.
Fut, kărso, or kărtolo .
I. Gerunds

Pres. kårtanan. Imperf. kărun or kårn. Past. kărtătz.

1) This form , i.e. to use the Participle in “ -tolo " instead of the Participle
in “ -to” , with « assolo " , is as common as the other form put in the Paradigm ,
i.e. as “ -to ” or “ -to " with “ assolo”. (See 2nd Conditionatum $8 2 and 4.)
18 *
 140

Irregular Verbs ( continued )

10. Mór = die,
=
Past. melo ( different from mello and
mhèļo, and mór differentfrom mód).
11. Våd or vår = carry. Past. velo.
12. Mon = say. Past. molo. Participle Imperf. mon,
besides monun .
13. Ubza = proceed. Participle, ubzono. )
14. Bos = seat. The regular Past, " boslā " seems to be
used also for the Present (vulg. boholā).
15. Ge = receive. Past. getlo ; but the compound “ kāņ
ge ” has " kāņgelo or kāņgetlo ”.
16. " Aik = hear ” forms the Tenses regularly, but as if the
root were “ aika " , when it would be too hard to pronounce the
Tense formed from " aik ” ; so we have Pres. aikatāñ etc., but
Imperat. “ aik, aikā ”, Subj. " aikuñ" etc., as there is no caco
phony in saying “ aikā ” etc.
Besides these single Verbs , there is a whole class of Verbs
which properly are not irregular, yet require some euphonical
changes, I mean the Verbs having the root ending in a vowel.
But here again we have to remark :
a) The Verbs ending in u or un change in the Contingent
(and Potential , equal to the Contingent) Future uu and un into v
whenever the termination to be added to the root begins with
a or u (which u sometimes is pronounced by some o ). The
same change takes place if " zāi ” is to be added to them ; thus
“ rāu = remain ”, has “ rāvan , rāuši, rāvat, rāvuñ (rāvo), rāušāt,
rāutit, rāvazāi (some castes say " rābazāi" ): " dāuñ = run " , =

“ dāvan " etc., " dāvazāi" , " deuñ = descend ", " devan " , " devazāi" .
>

6) The Verbs having the root ending in a vowel except a,

take in the Absolute Infinitive and equal Participle and Ge
rundive,“ -uõso (or -untzo)" instead of “ -80 (-tzo)". But if the root
ends in ai, ai, oi, i, ei, as all Causative and some other Verbs, the
terminations “ -uñso" and " -unk" are added to the root omitting
1) Some do not admit as Konkani this “ ubzono” , they always say " ubzalo " .
 141

the i, as if the root ended in a, or e, or o ; e. g. “poļei, poļeunk,

poleuñso ” ; “ kårai, kărauñso, kåraunk or kårounk”. As I see
that there is some difficulty about these Verbs ending in a
vowel, I shall put hereafter an example.
c) Verbs ending in a , add in the Absolute Infinitive only
“ - so ." as also in the Future Negative Absolute.
d ) If the root ends in u or uñ, then euphony requires us to
add nk, instead of unk in the Supine, n instead of un in the
Gerund in un .
Some other changes, which are not put down here, may be
required by euphony. See also p. 94, Future Tense.

Conjugation of Verbs ending in a vowel

“ Pie = drink " 1)

Fut. Cont. Sing 1) pien, 2) pieši, 3 ) piet..

Plu . 1) pieuſ, 2) piešāt, 3) pietit.
9

Imperat. Sing. pie, Plur. pieyā.

Supine. pieunk ( vulg . piunk).
Infin. Absol.
Particip. pieuñso (vulg. piuñso ).
Gerundive
Fut. Neg. Abs. 1 ) pieuñsonāñ etc. = I shall not drink ;
2) piesonāñ = I will not drink.

" Dāuñ = run "

Future Cont. Sing. 1) dāvan, 2) dāuši, 3) dāvat ;

Plu . 1 ) dāvuñ, 2) dāuñšāt, 3) dāuntit.
Imperat. Sing. dāuñ,
Plu , dāuñā or dāvā,
Caus. dāundăi.

1) The Tenses not put down here are regular throughout.

 142

Conjugation of a Causative Verb and of its corresponding

Non -Causative Neuter Verb

“ Paloăi = quench "

Fut. Cont. paloăin etc.
Supine, paloăunk (vulg. palounk) .
Infin . Abs.
Particip. paloăuñso (vulg. palouñso).
Gerundive
Pres. Neg. paloăināñ etc.
Fut. Neg. 1) paloăuñsonāñ (vulg. palouñsonāñ) = I shall =

not quench.
2) paloăisonāñ = I will not quench.
66
“ Paloa -tā = is quenched”
Fut. Cont. Sing. 1) paloan, 2) paloaši, 3) paloat;
Plu . 1 ) paloauñ, 2) paloasāt 3) paloatit.
Supine. paloaunk.
Infin . Abs.
Participle paloañso.
Gerundive
Pres. Neg. paloanāñ.
Fut. Neg. paloañsonāñ.
In a similar way to the above Causative Verb are conju
gated also those Verbs, which although not Causative , have a
similar termination ; e. g .“ poļei = see” ; “ borei = write ”; “ kårtči
expend ” ; so " kårtzounk, kártzouñso ” etc.
From the given examples we may see the difference bet
ween the Causative and the Non -Causative (Neuter) corres
ponding Verb. I say “ Neuter”, because if it is not Neuter,
per se it has no peculiarity.
In order to make still easier the Conjugation of these Verbs,
let us put together all different things said in different places
about Verbs ending in a vowel, and frame a rudimental rule.
The general rule can be expressed thus : The Verbs ending
 143

in a vowel either insert some consonant, or change some

letter or do not take the full termination whenever euphony
requires that; or, more distinctly,
1. Verbs ending in a insert y in the form 5 -iyet” of the
Potential; ending in a and e insert y in the 2nd Person Plural
Imperative.
2. Verbs ending in u or uñ change u or uñ into Vy in the
form “ -iyet” of the Potential ; the same happens also in the
Contingent Future whenever the termination to be added to
the root begins with a vowel, and when “ zāi ” is added .
3. Verbs ending in a, e, i, mostly omit the initial vowel
of the termination in the Contingent Future, and those in a
omit also the vowel a of the termination -uñso, and those in
a or uñ omit u of the termination -uñso and -unk, or, we may
say, omit u and uñ before adding -uñso and -unk.
4. Verbs ending in any vowel usually take -uñso (and
-uñsonāñ in the Negative Future, see p. 94) instead of -80 (and
-sonāñ the Negative Future. See ibid a limitation); but if the last
vowel of the root is i ( ši, ai, ei, oi, i preceded by a consonant) ,
they add the terminations -uñso and -unk to the root, either
omitting this i, if it is preceded by a, e or o, or changing it
into å or o, if it is preceded by a consonant. There may be a
few exceptions, which practice will teach you.
What has been said (n . 3) must be limited thus : Verbs ending in " a" , drop
the initial vowel of the termination of the Contingent Future, if this is " -an” , as
this is usually the case ; because mostly this " a " is a sign of a Neuter Verb
derived from its corresponding Causative Verb in " ăi”, by omitting " i"; conse
quently it takes " an " not " in " (see p. 117, n. 3 , d.) ; but sometimes Verbs
ending in “ a” are transitive ; e.g. " khā = eat ” has " khā-in ” . For this reason
I say (p. 117. I. c.) mostly, not always, Verbs ending in " a " take only “ n ” .
What to say if the Verb ends not in “ a, e, i,” but in " u " and " o " ? If this
" u " is preceded by " e" or " a ",> e.g. "rāu, jeu, seu , " then see above n. 2. If
this “ u” is preceded by a consonant, first I say that I do not recollect now any
Verb ending in such a way ; yet with analogy to other cases, if such a case
happens, I would change this " u " into " p?, or add to " u " the terminations with
out the initial vowel; e. g. suppose that “ māru -tā ” be a Konkani Verb : then I
would say “ mārvan or mārun " .
 - 144

If the Verb ends in " o", if such Verbs exist and this " o " be not a short
" a (ă)”, then if it is transitive, it seems more euphonical to add the full ter
minations “ -in ” etc.; if it is Neuter, it does not seem prohibited per se to add
the full terminations " an " etc., chiefly if this “ o” be preceded by a consonant ;
yet, as in this matter, use is the rule, practice will teach you what is the best
way. I said above, “ unless this ' o' be not ă', " because these two letters can be
exchanged very easily ; so " mānuă-tā = pleases ” seems to be pronounoed by
many “ mānuo -tā " . This Verb has "mānuan" in the Contingent Future.
What I said in this matter about Verbs ending in a vowel, (as also in many
other cases) supposes that we write Konkani with Roman letters ; because some
of these rules would be useless, if we had to write it with Kanarese letters.
These little irregularities might perhaps induce some to put at least two
Conjugations, i.e. one of the Verbs ending in a consonant, the other of the
Verbs ending in a vowel. Yet, as both Conjugations are mostly the same and
the small differences between them are euphonical rather than grammatical, so
for the sake of simplicity I thought it better to put only one Conjugation.

§ 8. Defective Verb
The following Verbs, though a little irregular, may be
called Defective Verbs, because all the Tenses are not used.
1. Zāņañ = I know. Present, zāņañ , zāņai etc. (regularly).
The other Tenses which can be used are formed by adding to
“ zāņa ” the required Tense of “ assā ” .. Thus “ zāņañ assoloñ =
I knew", or " zānañ zāun assoloñ" .
2. “ Neņañ ") = I do not know ” may be considered as the
negative form of “ zāņañ ”; its Tenses are formed just as the
Tenses of " zānan " .
Moreover “ nozo” and “ zāi ” may be considered as defective
(see above).
Exercises on Verbs ( Continued)
Causative Verbs
hās = laugh
Burgeä , kiteak iskul karčea veļār hāstai ? To makā hā
saitā. Auveñ sāngleñ , kēlāingi ? Āuveñ kărunknāñ . Pedrun 0

1) Pronounce nearly “ neaņañ ”, passing over " noa ” very quickly.

2
 145

kåraitañ. Burgeñ tzåltāgī ? Nāñ ; āuoi takā tzšlaitā. Mēz

porti. Mēz vareān portatā . Āuoi bāpaino, tumiñ tumčeañ
burgeānk Devāče birāntint vādaiyā. Burgen khāināñ zāi
zaleār, āuoi takā khāuoitā"). Devāči kurpā amkāñ Devāk
mānuăitā "). Takā boreunčeāk lāi ) .

Reciprocal Verbs
Bāvānu , yēkamekāso mög kărā ; yeñ Somia Jezu Kristāčeñ
formān dekun. Burge lačilānt yēkamekā kéļtāt. Monis pele
āso mög kårčea suāter såbār pāuți yēkamekā zagadtāt ani
lădāi kårtāt. Bāp ani āuoi khăiñ assāt ? Yēkamekā gazāli
mārtāt (have a chat).
Reflexive Verbs
Sañ Luis apleā itleāk mārtālo , zărităr tāņeñ võd pātkañ
kedintz adarunknatựlliñ . Tuje itleāk boreñ čintun niščesi.
Sañ Francis Zaver Meliapurānt astanañ , vigārāčea gårā lāgiñ
assallea itlānt aplea itleāk ratir (or ratzo) băuntālo ani niāl
kărtālo .

Verbs excluding Companionship

Āuñ moje itleāk čintāñ : meleā uprānt dusri jini meļnā
zaleār amin såmestañ monšāñ prăs nirbhāgi. Monis apleā
itleāk såbār pāuți Devān keliñ upkāraộn niālleār, dubāu nas
tanañ Devāso tzăd mög karit. Tūñ koņāger rāutai ? Āungi?
Āuñ aplea itleāk jietāñ. Āuñ kāl tădir moje itleāk băunta
nañ ani utzambol dărio poļeitanañ, Devāčea rāgāčeñ sarkeñ
makā distāleñ.
1) Causative Verb from " khā ” ; it is formed irregularly.
2) Causative Verb from “ Mānuă -tā = pleases "; as the primitive Verb ends
in “ à ” , only " j " is added ; so also in other similar cases ; i. e. if the Verb (pri
mitive) ends in a consonant, the Causative Verb is formed by adding “ ăi ” (some
times " ai, ei, oi' ); if it ends in a vowel chiefly in " a" , then very often only
" j" is added , or " a" is changed into “ i ” (“portatāñ, portitāñ") or, seldom, " uoi "
or other irregular termination is added. See moreover the exceptions § 1 .
8) By " lãi = apply", many Verbs which cannot be formed Causative by “ ăi”
etc., take a causative meaning.
19
 146

Verbs compounded of the Gerund in un

Pedru khăiñ assā ? Āpoun ādtāñ. Moji pēt koņā lāgiñ
assā ? Anton kāņeun (vlg. kāņ) yetā. Mukār vótz : āuñ
tuzo livrụ kāņ yetāñ . Saibānu, tumiñ kāgad boreyā ; āuñ
dāņditāñ (dādun ditāñ). Kärt (master) apleā kuțmāk khāņ
aņditā (ādun ditā). Rāyān adli hukum kādun galleā. Pal
(canopy) ukoln dorā.
Irregular Verbs
kēļen, -ea = plantain (n.)
Tuveñ tuzo vāur keloingī ? Āven yedoị kårunknāñ, fālea
kårtāñ. Tuveñ kiten khelaiñ ? Āveñ don kēļiñ kheleānt.
Tuveñ kelleñ kām boreñ natụlleñ, tea pasun teñ portun kår
čeñ assalleñ. Mozo livrụ bhāir podlo, tukā mellāgī ? Makā
meļunknāñ. Tuzo bāpui melogi ? Morunknāñ, assā. Ya
bāint mhèlen ") udāk assāgi ? Ui, yere bāink votzazāi.
Periphrastic Conjugation
Āuñ boreun assān. Āuñ yetanañ to nidun assolo. Tūñ
zāun vortautāigī to zo yeunzo assā? Povitrų pustakānt kiteñ
boreun assā ? Devāčeñ utar boreun assā. Āuñ atañ boreitāñ
thăiñ assāñ, makā kårkar kår nakā. Zākāņ khālto zatā, takā
Deu vorto kårtolo ; zõkön vorto zatā, to khālto kelo zatolo.
Tūñ yeunčea veļār, āuñ siktolon astoloñ. Monšāñ kăde adhār
meļnatullea veļār, Devā thăiñ āsro kāņeuñso assā.
Verbs ending in a Vowel
Zōkōn Devāče kurpe bităr rāvanāña) to apņāk luksān,
1) This “ m ” which neither in Kanarese, nor in Marāthi is reckoned among
the aspirated letters, becomes aspirated by adding “ h " just as in Kanarese, by
adding so; or rather there are two different letters “ m ” and “ h ” .
2) “ U ” of “ rāu” becomes " q " not only when " zāi ” is added, but also in the
Negative form when “ nāñ " is added . See Art . I. § 5 n . 2. p. 116.) The above
rule ( p. 143) in order to be complete must be compared also with § 5 l. c.
chiefly nn . 2,2 3.
 147

Devāk akmān kårtā. Somia Jezu Kristāči kud seuñso Devāči

jini jietā.Aple dis tzád jeun ani pieun kårtsouñso monis
Devāso santos boganāñ. Tsåd ulounčeānt åib tzukčeñnāñ,
sangtā povitrų pustak.

CHAPTER V. ADVERBS

About the Adverbs many questions might be put. The

chief ones are these : 1 ) Which are the principal Adverbs ?
2) How are they formed ? 3) How are they used ?
1. a) Principal Adverbs of Place with the derived Adjectives
" angā = here" -angāso (angāsăr = here above)
" thăiñ " = there, thither "-- thăiñso
-

“khăiñ" = where, whither” —khăiñso

=

“ såg!ean" = everywhere” - Instr.of såg!o

" sårvụthåiñ " = everywhere” used chiefly in religious matters
“lāgiñ = close " -lāgšilo
" sărsi = close”_sărsilo
" pois" = far” -poislo or poisilo
“ voir = above, up stairs" -voilo
" såkål = down, below " _såklo
" pāti (or pațleān) = behind " -pāțlo
" mukār = before, in face" - mukāvelo
=

steusin = in that side”, shortened from tea kusin- teakusilo

" yeusin = in this side,” shortened from yea kusin-yeakusilo
cbităr = inside" -bitărlo
-bhāir = outside "_bhāilo

6) Principal Adverbs of Time with the derived Adjectives

“ āz = to-day ", -āiso
“fāleā, or phāleā = to -morrow " -- fāleāso
okāl = yesterday” – kālso
=

“ poir = the day before yesterday ” or por-porso

“porvāñ = after to-morrow”—porvāñso
19 *
 148

“ poruñ = last year” —poruñso

=

“ disā "dis = every day” –disādisāso

"sakāļin = early ”—sakāļiñso
=

“phanteār = at daybreak” —phanteāparāso

=

"sakāļiče = in the morning”

"“sānjer or sānječe = in the evening ” —sānjeso
abhou sakāliñ = early in the morning "
stodou = late”
“ vegiñ = early, in time” -vegiñso
" ādiñ = before"-ādlo
" māgir = afterwards”—māgirlo or māgirso
watāñ = now ” -atāñso
" purviñ or ādiñ purviñ = in ancient times” —purviño
" vođól = lately ” -vodolso
“ yedó! păriant = up to this” -yedolso
“ såddañ (emph. saddants) = always” —såddantso
“ kedints ...nāñ == never” _kedintso...nāñ
“ tovoļ or teaveļār = then , at that time” -tovoļso
=

“khăiñ" = when ( low castes say khoiñ )" _ khăiñso

roseki
dek ally aờieso
“ } = fin " —k
"ka
“ yea făde = afterwards in( future )”
" poilentz = already (first)"
" sove =: at the same time"
" aprup = seldom ” -aprupso, or aprupaso

c) Principal Adverbs of Quantity with the derived Adjectives

obhou
csăbār { = much ”
“ illo (-i, -eñ)
“ todo ( -i, -eñ) = a little ”
“ tikeñ (or čiken)
“ sumār = moderately, neither very much nor very little” —
sumārso
“ uņo (-i, -eñ) = less "
 149

" tsăd = much, more, too much ”

>

" ani = still, more” , e.g. ani dòn = two more

" puro enough "

d) Principal Adverbs of Manner with the derived Adjectives

“ boreñ = well ” (or boro, -i, -eñ)
=

“ pād = badly”
“ tzukon = wrongly"
" sompeñ
" sompepoņān easily ” —sompo, sasārāyeso
" sasārāyen
“kåštān = with difficulty ” -káštāñso
ostzăd uņeñ = nearly, about” (Latin circiter)
"lāgiñ lāgiñ = almost ” (Lat. paene), e.g. " lāgiñ lāgiñ tīs =
almost 30 (less than 30) ”
“tzådāvotzāun = generally, usually"
“kapas ! = very well ! perfectly !” (used often ironically)
" aučit
"yekăts pharā suddenly "
" čintinastanāñ
“ portun = again "
=

" neaņārpoņān = ignorantly ” -neaņārpoņāso

“ besteñ = in vain " _besto
" asseñ = in this way ” —asso
“ tassen = in that way”- tasso
“viñgåd = separately "
"sangatā = together"
"vottu = altogether"
6
“ kåsso (-i, -eñ ) = how ”
“ kăssălo (-i, -eñ) = how ”
" vegiñ = fast”-vegiñso
-

"soukās = slowly ” -soukāsāyeso or soukāsaiso

" nizzāun
" dubāunāstanañ certainly "
“drădzāun
 - 150

“ yekādevēļā = perhaps”
" zāit = well (yes)”
“ui" = yes"
uniñ
" năin " = no "
bonāñ
“ puņi or puņ = at least ” .
Besides these, which I may call primitive or original
Adverbs, (except very few , which are not primitive, e.g. kåštān)
there are many derived Adverbs ; of these I shall speak in the
III. Part, about Derivations.
2. See Part III .
3. I answer for the present (reserving the more exact.
explanation for the Syntax) that they are not declined, except
the Adverbs of Place ; and even these are not declined
when used absolutely. We must except the Adjectives which
are used also as Adverbs, as we shall see in the Syntax ;
those Adjectives agree with the corresponding Noun ; e.g.
among the above Adverbs “ kåsso, kássalo, poilotz" etc. These
Adjectives may be recognized by the termination " o (otz) or
en " . But if they are used to show some peculiar relation of
place, they are declined according to meaning, after being
changed into Adjectives, viz. after having given to them a
form of Adjective in so or lo ; e.g. " angā = here", "angā =

čeān = through here” , Instrumental from “ angāso "; " modeñ =

=

in the middle ”, “ modleān = through the middle ", Instrumental

from " modlo ” .
If " -50, -či, -čeñ " were to be taken as signs of the Genitive, we should say also
that the Adverbs of time etc. are declined ; so “ iso = of to -day "; " angāso
of here” . But, as I consider “ -80, -či, -čeñ " to be signs of the Adjective, or at
least I am allowed to suppose it, I will speak of them in the Chapter on
Adjectives in the Syntax, if possible.

Exercises on Adverbs
Āz Pedru āučit melo. Kāi Lorso čintinastanañ tzărlo.
Poir Simāuñ pident podlā. Poruñ kumsār zālloigi ? Āuñ
 151

kumsār zāun tintz moine zāle. Fāleā yā porvañ āuñ tumger

rāutoloñ. Fāleā Āitārā paisāvāso sermauñastolo; kālčeā Aitārā
sermauñ nātullo. Khăiñ vetāi ? Gårā vetāñ. Angāčeān votz
iyetgi? Geleār, zāgo pād zatā. Tujeñ går khăiñ assā ? Vā
deāčā modeñ assā . Gādiegārā, gādi modlean vór. O O monis
konso ? To angāso. Ani to monis? To porgāvāntlo. Āiso vānjel
kåssålo ? Aiso vānjel paisāvāso. Mögān sămestañ kăde ulei.
Grest monis kášţān sårgār pāutāt. Fāvote jinsiñ kumgār
kāņeitoleānk Devāči jiņi meļtā. Mēstri sāngtā, teñ čīt diun
aikāzāi. Mojeñ kām boren kårn kårunknāñ. Tui khin
vetoloi ? Auñ Bombăi vetāñ. Kăiñ Bombăi vetāi ? Fāleā.

CHAPTER VI. POSTPOSITIONS

1. Under this name are included what we call in our

languages Prepositions, because in Konkani all such words
are put after the affected part of the speech.
2. Postpositions which govern the Nominative :
oņasotr / = till
mpărian
Postpositions which govern the Dative :
ād
porte against
virodh
Postpositions which govern the Original :
ādiñ = before
mukār
= in face, at the presence of
hujir
phảdeñ = before, after (see Dictionary)
uprānt
magir { = after
pațleān = behind; Lat. retro
voir = above, upon
 -
152

såkål
khāl under
talā
pois = far
lāgin
kåde close
sărsi
thăiñ " = in , as regards, towards , e.g. “Devā thăiñ = in
God ”
bităr = in, within
bhāir =- out, without, beyond
viņe or vin = without (Lat. sine)
S

sangatā = with
vingăd = separately from
pasun or pasvot
khatir } = for, on account of
=
2

părmane = according to
=

băuntaņeñ = around
veslean or dikān = in the direction of
=

thāun = from , e.g. from Calicut to Mangalore, from 3-4

=

poltodi = beyond (ultra)

åltăţi = on this side (citra)
vorviñ = through
=

šivāi
karit } = beside (Lat.praete
. r)
bådlāk = instead of
suater = in the place of.
S

From some Postpositions are derived some Adjectives ; these mostly have
been given in Ch. V., because those Postpositions are also Adverbs.
3. Are the Postpositions declined ? If we consider the
true Postpositions , not the derived Adjectives, ΙI answer, no ;
yet in some cases they seem to be declined, for they change
according to the Number and Gender ; 6.8. “from hell = emkaņ
dāntlo": "gărānt = in the house "; "gårāniñ = in the houses ” .
Yet this is only an appearance, because in the first case, as we
 153

have seen above, the Substantive with the Postposition is

changed into an Adjective. The 2nd example would show
only that -nt is not used in Plural ; yet we have seen that
we can say also “ gărānt = in the houses ”, though not so well
=

as " gărāniñ ” .
4. What case do they govern ? This appears from the
given list.
5. The change of Postpositions into Adjectives is very re
markable, chiefly of the Postpositions " bităr, voir, lāgiñ”, (see
above Chapter II. Art. I. § 3) ; e.g. Among the Chapters of
the Canticle, this is the 3rd.” That “ Among ...Canticle ” is
considered as an Adjective of " Chapter"; hence it takes the ter
minations of the Adjective; “ Kantiklea avesvårā bitărlo vo
tisro avesvăr” ; we might translate it literally into bad Latin,
>

thus : existens intra capita Cantici hoc Caput tertium . So also :

" St. Paul is one of the Apostles = Apostalāntlo St. Paul yeklo ”.
It seems that if there is in the sentence, besides the word
governed by the Postposition, a Substantive or Pronoun with
which the Postposition has some connexion, the Postposition
is changed into an Adjective. About this later on .
6. Sometimes two Postpositions are joined in a similar
way as in the Latin sentence : “De sub cujus pede fons vivus
emanat" ; e.g. " sărgār thāun = from heaven" ; " sărgārānt =
above in heaven ”; i. e. they wish to express at the same time
two ideas: 1 , that heaven is above, 2 , that in this high place,
€.g. happiness is found.
7. Some Postpositions, if joined to Participles, prefer to
be joined to the Past rather than to the Present Participle ,
e. g. " uprānt = after” ; others on the contrary prefer to be
joined to the Present or Future Participle ; e.g. " adiñ = before".
There are some which seem to be joined indifferently to the
Past or Present Participle according to the meaning.
8. The use of the Postposition in Konkani is much more
frequent than in our languages ; many Tenses, which in Eng
lish or Latin are not preceded by any Preposition, are trans
20
 154

lated by a Postposition with the Participle, as will be shown

in the Syntax.
9. But on the other hand , some English or Latin Pre
Konkani .
positions are not translated at all in Konkani. This is the
case chiefly with so many Verbs compounded with Prepositions ;
often the English Preposition is omitted, because the simple
Konkani Verb renders the meaning of the English compound
Verb ; yet sometimes the English Preposition gives quite a
different meaning to the Verb ; then , of course, either a Konkani
។

Postposition or Adverb must be used, or a simple Verb which

corresponds to that changed meaning ; e.g. " call on ” is not
translated by "voir apoi", but by “ bet = visit” . Moreover
although the English Preposition (or Adverb) does not change
much the meaning, sometimes we may use in Konkani the
corresponding Postposition (or Adverb) .
Exercises on Postpositions
Kodiāla thāun mojeñ găr pāriant tīs kòs assāt. Šerāntlo
kòņ ailo ? Kòņ yeunknāñ. Devā thăiñ kitle zón assāt ? Devā
thăiñ teg zón. Amčea åtmeā thăin Deu kiteñ kårtā ? Ajapā
čeo văstu kårtā , amiñ takā kåbul dileār. Girã bitắc kèn
assā ? Gărā bităr kòņnāñ ; bāgil dāmpun assā. Igarje bair
votzun tumin aikalleñ vitzārnakāt. Pedru Simāvāk ād yetā,
tače pasun (tea pasun) Simāuñ Pedruk viródh yetā. Tumče
bitărlo kòm yemkaņdāntli kešt sosit ? Somi Jezu Krist saitānāk
monšāñ voilo sodounčea veļār, saitān bõb mārn sāngtălo :
“ Kitеāk amkāñ kắšť diunk ailāi?” Somi Jezu Krist nimā
ņea disā koţteānk sāngtolo : "Moje lagše votzā, maldisãoñ
podleleāno.

CHAPTER VII. CONJUNCTIONS

1. In Konkani there are not so many true Conjunctions as
in English, because many English Conjunctions are translated
by Correlative Pronouns ; e. g. “ as = zosso--tosso"; sometimes
they are translated by an Adjective, e . g. quam magnus, which
o
 155

quam is translated by an Adjective (kitlo or kedo ), though

we may say also that they are Conjunctions, but declined .
Some others are translated by Postpositions , e. g. “ because =
pasun ”; some others are omitted, e.g. “ either or ” are translated
by one Conjunction .
2. Principal Conjunctions:
kiteak - kiteāk moleār = why--because
dekun = because, therefore
tår therefore
puņ , puņi = but
bogăr = but (in opposition , e.g. not only....but also)
tări, zaleäri = nevertheless, yet
i = although , also
zărităr or zăritări = although
---

zărtăr = if
ki, mon = that
vo or uo, yā = or
muņčeñ or munjeñ = that is to say
=

săit ", legun = also, even

tače šivai besides, moreover
ani = and
Negative Conjunctions, e. g. “ neither nor” , are formed by
adding the negative particle to the affirmative. (See Part III.
Chapter IV.)
3. Among them there are some which may be divided ,
e.g. " zărtăr = if” , which can be divided in such a way that
zăr is put in the beginning of the conditional sentence , and tăr
in the beginning of the 2nd part , e.g. “ zărtăr te bhāgevånt,
sărgār vetāt = if they are holy, they go to heaven ” , or we may
say also " zăr te bhāgevănt, tår sårgār vetāt" ; so also
" zărităr = though ” , compound with " zărtăr = if ”, and “ i = also"
។ >

may be separated so as to put this i joined to the Verb, e.g.

" zărităr yēk ānj aileār = though an angel would come” , or
“ zărtăr yēk anj aileāri ”.
20 *
 156

4. Some Conjunctions are put after the affected word, as in

Lat. enim . So " pun ", if it means wat least”, is placed after the
affected word_ "vorsāk yēk pāuți pun kumzār zāizāi = once a
year at least we must confess ”. Moreover “ legun , sait, i” ,
which all mean “ also” , are placed after the affected word, as
in Latin quoque : i is not only placed after, but also joined
e. g. “ keleāri = though you did ”.
to the word , e.g.
5. Many English Conjunctions cannot be translated lite
rally, but by some circumlocution , as the Syntax and use will
teach . Something more about Conjunctions will be said in
the Syntax.

CHAPTER VIII. INTERJECTIONS

About these here I have nothing to say, but to put a list
of the most common of them .
“ ayo, katā , yē” expressive of sorrow, pain .
"ah, āh , ahaha " expressive of surprise, pleasure, jest,
reproach.
“แ āñ ? = what ? ” ; some use it also for " yes" .
Our “ 0 ” of the Vocative is expressed by " ye " ; e.g. ye
Fraskā = 0 Francis !
" O or vo ? = what ? ” in asking to repeat words not under
stood.
“ čhi! ” expressive of disgust .
 PART III. SYNETYMOLOGY
!

In this part I treat of certain points, which belonging

to some , if not to all , the Parts of Speech , may very appro
priately be classed under the head of Synetymology. They
are distinct both from Etymology properly so called, and
from Syntax.

CHAPTER 1.
Words used in speaking to or about persons
This chapter is almost a continuation of the Chapter VIII.
of the II. Part ; for, these words I speak of, are in some way
Interjections, although not in the common meaning : and so
this chapter may be the link between II. and III. Part.
1 . We have already seen that no or nu is the Interjection
added to the Vocative Plural ; e.g. bāvāno ! = 0 brethren !”
2. To show respect to a person the Plural is used not only
in addressing,but also in speaking of a person ; e.g." Sāibānu ! =
Oh lord !" " khăiñ gele ? = where is he (the lord) gone? ”
3. The second degree of honour is, when a man addresses
។

another superior in age or in some other respect, to affix to the

proper name the word or syllable " mā” for a man , and “māmie "
for a woman ; e.g. “ Antoni mā ! = Oh Antony !" " Mărie māmie !
= Oh Mary!” This “ mā" seems to be an abbreviation of
" mamā, vocative of " mām = uncle ”, and “ māmie" is the voca
tive of " māmi aunt” . If a more than common superiority
is to be expressed, instead of " mā" they use " agā " for a man ,
" age" for a woman ; if a still higher superiority is meant,
they use -babā ” (vocative of “ bāb ”) for a man, “ bāye” (vocative
of " bāy ”) for a woman ; finally the highest degree is “ Sāib
 158

or Somi or Suāmi” for a man, “ Sāibiņ ” for a woman ; although

this last, " Sāibin " among Christians is used almost exclusively
for the blessed Virgin Mary. Note that by joining “ age"
6
and " bāye” you have a smaller degree than by using only
“ bāye = 0 lady" .
4. Speaking to a boy, are is prefixed or re is added not
only to their proper name, but also to the Verb, to the Pronoun
etc.; speaking to girls and figuratively also to women , ago is
prefixed or go placed afterwards.
5. As a term of endearment towards children or young
persons amă, or băļ is used .
6. If they have not to address but to speak of other su
perior persons, the above words, in the Nominative, are used ;
but mă is often changed into am or m ; e. g. “ Anton-ām ”. It
is almost like our Mr.
Some examples will show the use of the above words.
“ Pedru mā, Sāib tukā apoitāt = 0 Peter, the master calls
=

you ” ; “ Heleni māmie, Igărjent yetāigī ? = 0 Helena, do you

come to the church ?" ; " age Mărie, kossi assāi ", or " Mărie,
kossi assāige ? = 0 Mary, how are you ?” “ Mărie bāye, makā
=

apoitāigi ? = Mary, do you call me?" or " age Mărie bāye, makā
apoitāgi?" or " Mărie bāye , makā apoitāige ?” “ ye Forsa babā,
makā yek Rupoi di = 0 Mr. Francis, give me one Rupee ” ;
“ Sāibā, hukum diā = 0 lord, give order ”; “ Silā-re=Oh Silvester
66

(boy )", " are Silā, yē = come, O Silvester" , or " Silā, yê -re ” ;
“ votz- re, lutzā = go, O rascal” ; “ Măriā -go, lānkud ād = 0 Mary
(girl) , bring firewood" , or " ago Măria ” ; “Mojea burgeā, yē
amā = 0 my dear child, come" ; " moja burgeā, khā baļā = 0
= =

dear child, eat” ; “ Amā ” and “ baļā ” must be separated from

the affected Noun .
From these examples we may form a rudimental rule about
the use of these particles.
a) Re and go are placed after the affected word ; if this
is alone, immediately after it ; if there is a sentence, joined,
often at least, to the Verb. " Emmānueli-re = 0 Emmanuel” ,
*
 159

“ Emmānueli, yê-re = come O Emmanuel"; Măria-go = 0 Mary”,

“ Măriā, yê- go = come 0 Mary ”.
b) Are and ago are immediately prefixed to the affected
Noun ; this may be alone or in a sentence; " are Emmānueli
O Emmanuel" , " are Emmanueli, vāur kår = 0 Emmanuel
>

work " .
c ) Mā, māmie, babā, bãye are put after the affected Noun.
d) Agă and age are put either immediately before the
affected Noun , or afterwards, but joined to the Verb and
losing the initial a.
e) Saiba, Suamiã,” , addressing a person , are generally used
> រ

without the proper Noun.

A) Amă and baļā are separated, usually, from the affected
Noun ; but “ burgiñ balan" is used.
As to speaking not to, but about superior persons, the
corresponding titles “ mām (shortened ‘ ām') , māmi, bāb, bāy,
sāib, suāmi, sāibiņ” are put after the affected Noun ; (“ agā
and age” , “ ago and are ", " re, go” have no Nominative) .
Examples : " Anton mām Bombai gelo = Antony went to Bombay ” ;
“ Serpin māmi gårā nāñ = Seraphina is not at home”; “ Nern bāb
pident podlo = Mr. Nern fell sick ”; “ Reicklin bāy vilāyet geli =
Mrs. Reichlin went to Europe " ; " Hohenlohe sāib mantri zālo =
Lord Hohenlohe became minister ” etc. As for girls and boys ,
no title is given when speaking about them, as also to others,
when no honour is intended. Remark that the Plural is used
very seldom to show respect ; generally they use the Plural
speaking to Priests, or to very high persons; out of these cases,
very seldom , except some customary cases, e.g. a daughter-in
-law uses the Plural to the mother -in -law ; the son-in-law to the
father-in - law , the father -in -law to the son -in -law ; the " yei" and
" yeña ( father or mother of bride and of wife's bridegroom) and
the " sāļu ” (husbands of two sisters) among themselves. Remark
moreover that “ bāy ” may mean also elder sister and child; in
both these cases “ bāy” is neuter, although declined according
to the first declension. " Bāb” may mean also elder brother.
 160

CHAPTER II.
Suffixes modifying the meaning of Words
1. Emphatic tz or ts : (see page 81.) It is used moreover
for many other purposes, e.g. to make a Verb frequentative.
(See Syntax.)
2. Quasi diminutive so. This termination gives such a
meaning to the affected word that now I do not find a more
suitable word for it than " quasi diminutive" . Some examples
will show what I mean to say thereby. “ Boro = good ”, “ boroso =
apparently good , or which seems to be good ”; “ piso= foolish”,
“ pisosorgiving some signs , although not certain of foolish
ness" ; " kărtā = he does" , " kårtāso = he seems to do " ; " går =
house” , “ gărseñ = a thing which seems to be a house" ; " buka
=

so = some papers which seem to be a book ” .

Yet sometimes this termination has a really diminutive
meaning ; e.g. " boroso ” may mean also “ a little good ”, not per
fectly good ; " tarnoso = a little green ”, not perfectly green ;
66
“ tāp = fever”, “ tāpasaso = feverish ” ; “ lonkad = iron ” , “ lonkļā
= -
9

s0 = of iron ", " lonkdāsaso = ferruginous, containing particles

of iron " , and so in many other cases.
common sentence
There is a common sentence which shows clearly the
meaning of this so, (si, señ). If a person complains to me
against another, and I do not like to offend neither this second
nor the first, I say to this second : " āuñ mārleñseñ kårtāñ, tūñ
rădleñseñ kăr = I will do as if I had beaten, you do as if you
weep ”, viz. by saying something, not serious, but having the
appearance of a serious reproach against the accused person.
Hence it appears that this -so is just the contrary of the em
phatic -tz. (See p. 82.)
Which is the use of this -so ? a) First it is joined as one
word to the affected word. In order to make it known to
the readers, I will separate it at least sometimes by a hyphen.
b) It is joined to any part of the speech , as I said of the
emphatic -tz, except perhaps Interjections.
 161

c) It is changed into -si for the Feminine and -sen for the
Neuter ; Plur. -se, -seo, -siñ etc., just as the Adjectives of three
terminations; so if added to a Neuter Noun, it is -señ ; if to
a Feminine Noun , -si etc.
d) The word to which it is joined does not undergo any
change; e.g. “ kăr = do ” , becomes
Pres. Sing. 1. kărtāñ -so, kártāñ -si, kårtā -señ; :
2. kårtai-so, kårtai-si, kårtai-señ ;
3. kårtā -so, kartā -si, kartā -señ.
Plur. 1. kărtãoñ-se, kårtāoñ-seo, kårtãoñ -siñ ;
2. kărtāt-se, kărtāt-seo, kårtāt-siñ ;
3. kårtāt-se, kårtāt-seo, kărtāt-sin.
Past, āuveñ keleň -señ etc.
Although this -80 can be used without adding any other
6
word, yet the Verb “distā = appears "' is very often added ; and
the word to which -80 is added, is considered as an Adjective ;
e.g. “ kunkad ubtaseñ = the hen flickers" , or " kunkad ubtaseñ
distā ” .
This -so is a beauty of Konkani. Other such niceties
doubtless are to be found which would show that Konkani,
if cultivated, may surpass even some European languages.
3. The terminations of the diminutive may be also rec
koned here (see Chapter II. Art. III. S iv.) ; yet those termina
tions are not common to many parts of speech ; hence they
are better put in the 2nd Part.
4. The words ago, are, -ge, -re, etc. in addressing may
be also considered as changing the meaning a little ; but
they may be written in two words , whereas I speak of joined
particles; secondly , they are not peculiar to Konkani and
present no difficulty.
6 p. 79 ; but
5. I or ai. I spoke of this i, in Part II. Ch. II . $ 6.
it is added also to other words; hence we must speak of it
again here ; i, added to Pronouns or Adjectives, gives to them
an indefinite or general meaning, as the Latin libet, in Italian
= any ”, “ kòņākai = to any one.. ”
siasi ; e.g. "kăssoloi = The
21
 162

particle « -kăi ” has also a similar meaning. (See l.c.) I said

i or ai; yet this second is seldom used.
This i is added also to Verbs and Nouns, and gives
them a permissive meaning (" although ” etc. ). This particle
is put at the end of the Verb (“ keleāri = though you did ” ),
but with Pronouns , Adjectives and Conjunctions , it may be
put also in the middle of them ; e. g . “zărtăr = if", " zărităr =
although (if also )”; “ kòņiyēk = any" . Instead of i, sometimes
“ ui= also" is used , almost in the same sense as i ; e.g. " teñui =
that also ” (or " teñi” ), a compound of " teñ = that”, and “ ui";
>

so " zărităr Deu amkāñ šikšā ditā, amso mögui kărtā = though
God punishes us , yet He loves us” . The same i is used in
the very common phrase " záleāri = yet”, compounded with
“zileār = if it happened ”, and “ i = though ”.
។

This i sometimes added to a word, has only the meaning

of also, chiefly if added to Nouns. The context must decide
which meaning must be preferred ; perhaps the permissive
meaning is not different from the meaning of also ; this particle
in certain context naturally takes a permissive meaning.

CHAPTER III.
Interrogative Particle
1. To ask, “ gī " is used, joined to the word which it
affects in one word ; e. g. " did you perform your duty ?" Here
the word affected by the interrogation is " perform ”; hence this
must have the interrogative particle. “ Tuzo kāido kelāingi ?"
Remark that this " -gī ” can be used not only in direct , I may
say, interrogative sentences, but also in sentences which ex
pressed directly would be interrogative , e.g. " kedea santošān
āuñ ăilogī mon tumiñ saumzayet = you may understand with
what pleasure I came” . Here a direct interrogation may be
supposed " Did you come with great pleasure ?" and in a similar
way this " -gī” can be used whenever a similar oratio obliqua
occurs . Some use " -gai ” instead of " -gi”.
 163

2. This particle is commonly used only in asking; yet

sometimes I have heard it also in non-interrogative sentences ;
€.g. " tukā kitleñ assāgī, makā titleñ assā = as much is to
you , so much is to me” .
3 . This particle is not used with words , which of them
selves, I may say , are interrogative ; e. g. " kon = who ?" " kiteñ =
what ?" in a similar way as in Latin , though in Latin we may
say sometimes quidnam ? This particle « -gì ” is exactly the
Latin nam or num. So we cannot say “kiteñgi ? or kóngi?"
only " kiteñ or kòn ” etc, is used. But if these words ("kiteñ
etc.) are used as Indefinite Pronouns, then they can take" -gi.”
This " -gi” is used in the common and vulgar sentence " assāgi
nāñ = is it (or) not ? ” used as intercalar at every step. Be
sides in interrogations this " gi" is used in the sentence :
“kåsseñgi molleār” as if you say = " e.g ” . Finally, distinguish
this “ -gi” from “ -ge” shortened from " age”. (See Ch. I.)

CHAPTER IV. NEGATIVE FORM

Art. I. Substantives
Substantives are formed negative by prefixing a, (like
the Greek alpha privativus), if the Noun begins with a
consonant , or an, if the word begins with a vowel , " åpå (vulg.
ak-), nis-, nir-” etc. But these prefixes cannot be used pro
miscuously, nay, use does not allow us to make certain Nouns
negative by any particle. Examples : “ măriād = honesty "
" ăñmăriād = dishonesty, impoliteness"; " upkār = benefit ”, >

“ ănupkār” or better sånupkārpon = ingratitude” ; “ kăpăț ==

=

=
simulation ", " niškăpăț = sincerity”; “ băruńso = hope”, “ ăpă
băruăso = despair "; " dhăir = courage", “ ăpădhăir = fear,
despair ”; “ mān = honour ”, “ ăpămān ( vulg. åkmān ) = offence";
-
" bāg = happiness” , “ nirbāg" or better wirbāgipon = unhap
piness ". Sometimes, as in English so in Konkani some
Nouns can be made negative, by changing the sentence into
21 *
 164

the negative; e. g. “ this has not been done nicely = yeñ sarkeñ
kărunknāñ " . Finally some Nouns are made negative by pre
fixing " nāñ "'”; e.g. " păsănd = approval ”, “ nāñpăsănd = disap
>

proval"; " bolaiki = health ”, nāñbolaiki = unhealthiness” .

If we have an English or Latin Negative Noun, which
cannot be rendered by any of the above prefixes, then let us
see whether there be some other word , although not in the
Negative form , which corresponds to that word ; if no word
exists, then we must resolve it, chiefly by the Gerund Negative
in “ tanañ ” or by the Negative Participles ; e. g. “ pik = ripeness”
cannot be made Negative ; but the non -negative “ tarnepon "
exists , which has the same meaning. We might also resolve it
thus : " unripeness causes harm = piknatalleo văstu lukšān
kårtāt = unripe things cause harm ” .

Art. II. Adjectives

These are made Negative a) by affixing “ natullo ”, Nega

tive Participle of " assā " to the Positive Adjective; e.g. “ sar
ko = exact” , sarkonatullo ” . By this termination we can not
only change some Adjectives into the Negative, but we can
also form new Negative Adjectives, i.e. by adding this “ natullo”
to Nouns ; e. g. “ morn -natullo = immortal” ; “ jiv-natullo =
=

lifeless ” .
6) Negative Adjectives are formed by adding " vin = with
out" to a Noun ; e.g. " mornā -vin = immortal” .
c) Adjectives are made Negative by prefixing “ năiñ " or
“ niñ ” ; e.g. " năiñzallo = not becoming”.
d) By affixing “ năiñ assolo ”, another Negative Participle
of " assā ” , we may change the Adjective from Affirmative in
to. Negative ; e.g. " fāvo-năiñ assolo = not being worthy, un
worthy ”.
e) The above prefixes of the Nouns (an-, nir- etc.) may be
used also for Adjectives; e.g. “nirbāgi= unhappy”, “anupkāri =
ungrateful” ; “ niškåpți = sincere ” .
 165

Usage does not allow us to use all these particles promis

cuously or in any case ; then the above indicated plan for the
Nouns must be employed also for the Adjectives.

Art. III. Pronouns

(See page 80.)
These have no proper Negative form , but the Affirmative
Pronoun is used with the Negative Particle joined to the Verb ;
e.g. “ I know nothing = makā kāiñ kålnāñ” ; “ I know nothing
at all = makā kāintz kålnāñ ". " Nobody came = kòn yeunk
nāñ ” . Sometimes it seems that the Negative Particle is joined
to the Pronoun itself and thus an apparent Negative Pronoun
6
is formed ; e. g. “ Who is there ? = thăiñ kòņ assā ?” “ Nobody =
66
kòạnāñ” ; “ What have you = tukā kiteñ assā ?" "Nothing =
kāiñāñ ”. But this is only an appearance ; because if no Verb
is there, the Negative Particle must, of course, be joined to
some word ; hence it happens that sometimes the Negative
Particle must be joined to the Pronoun. Or we may say,
that in the sentence “ khăiñnāñ” (see above), that “ nān” is
itself the Verb, i.e. the negative form of " assā ” (see p. 104) .
And so also for the, I may call , Emphatic Negative Pronouns ;
e.g. “ none” ; the particle “ i (or ui) = also ” affixed to the pri
mitive Pronoun and the Negative Particle are used ; e.g. “ no
impure soul can enter into heaven " yēkui nită?natullo åtmo
sărgār riganāñ”.

Art. IV. Verbs

The negative form of the Verbs has been given in Part II. ,
as it is an important and a great part of the conjugation. Yet
remark that the given negative form is not the only one used
even in Mangalore, as I hinted (p. 99). So, e.gi ' some say
“ kelen-nāñ " instead of " kårunknāñ", " kårtāt-nānt" instead of
“ kårinānt”, although this second example is not so common .
 166

Art. V. Adverbs

The Adverbs usually follow the rules of the Adjectives, as

we have seen when speaking of their Comparative and Superla
tive (p. 67) . Yet we must distinguish the true Adverbs, I mean ,
true in form and meaning , from the apparent Adverbs, which
are really Substantives . ( See below Chapter on Derivation ) .
The true Adverbs may be either original (see Part II. Ch. V.)
or derived ; the original Adverbs have no proper form , just as
in English ; the common way of using them is to use a negative
sentence ; e.g. “ āz = to -day ” , “ āz niñ = not to -day". The same
9

can be said of the Adverbs which are only the Instrumental of

the Substantive ; e. g. “ såsārāyen = easily ”, “ not easily = såsā
rāyen niñ ” . The derived Adverbs follow mostly the rules of
the Adjectives .
Yet, as to Adverbs, we must consider which form they take
in each case ; because often the negative form is suggested
naturally by the Adverb itself, considered in concreto ; where
as a general rule might seem obscuring rather than clearing
up this point.

Art. VI. Conjunctions

What has been said of Pronouns, can more or less be said
of Conjunctions, i.e. the Affirmative Conjunction is used with
the Negative Particle joined to the Verb, if there be any ; and
so the Conjunctions formed by adding “ ī = also ” (Indefinite
or Emphatic Conjunctions) are made negative in the same
way ; " ... " he is neither in the town nor in the village = to
šerāntināñ nāļāntināñ = lit. he in the town also not, in the
village also not"; " he is neither good nor bad, he is a middle
thing = to boroi niñ, pāļi niñ, sumārso zāun vortavatā ” .
 167

CHAPTER V. DERIVATION OF WORDS

Art. I. Nouns

Nouns are derived by adding chiefly the following termi

nations, -poņ, -ai, -kai, -ap, -gár or -kár, -dár, -an, -sāņ, -neñ, -ni,
-sarken, -i, -ist or -st.
To what are these terminations to be added ? They are
often added to the stem of the original word , which frequently
is found in the concrete Noun or simple Adjective; e.g. “ mög = -

love" , " boro = good " ; stem " moga, borea " ; but euphony re
>

quires us very often to add these terminations not to the stem,

but to the root or to the pure form of the primitive word , as
the examples will show.
Now to explain each terminations. With -pon many Neuter
Abstract Nouns are formed ; e.g. " kotto = wicked ", " kottepon
= wickedness"; " boro = good ” , “ borepoņ = prosperity ”; “ nităl =
>

pure” , “ nitalpoņ = purity ”; “ kuddo = blind ”, “ kuddepoņ = blind

>

ness”” . It seems that -pon is more commonly added to Adjec

tives, which themselves may be derived; e.g. from "mög " you
get “ mogāļ = dear ”, from it “ mogālpoņ = amiability" ; yet we find
-pon added also to Nouns ; e.g. " monis = man ”, “ monsapoņ =
humanity ” , “ Deu = God ”, “ Deupoņ = Deity" .
=

By -kai and -ai are also usually formed Abstract Nouns ;

e.g. " niškal = chaste ", " niškalai = chastity "; " nento= humble,
innocent” , “ neņtuai = humility ”; “ åskåt = weak ”, “ åskåtkai
weakness ” .
These derived Nouns in -ai and -kai are for the most part,
if not always, Feminine. I say " derived " , because non -derived
9

Nouns in -ai may be of another Gender ; e.g. " upāi = means”.

By -ap, not to be confounded with -äp or -óp, are formed
many Nouns which mostly express either action as in Latin
-io or -tio or something abstract ; e.g. “ bărei = write ”, “ bărap =
writing ”; “ sīk = learn " , " sikap = instruction ”. These derived
 168

Nouns in -ap are mostly Neuter ; but Nouns in -ắp or -op, or -ab
may be often of another gender.
By -gār or -kár are formed concrete Masculine Nouns, as in
Latin by -tor; e.g. " går = house” , “ gărkār = householder ” ;
>
=

" motzo = shoe”, “ motčegār = shoemaker" ; " gādi = carriage” ,

“ gāļiegār = bandyman ” .
By -dár are formed concrete Nouns about in the same way
as by -gār and -kār ; e. g. “ nīt, -i = justice ” , “ nītidār = judge”;
>

“ monsub = judgment”, “ monsubdār = judge” .

7

The terminations -gár or -kār are often used to indicate

origin from a place ; e. g. “ Goiñkār = a Goanese "; " Tčinkār =
a Chinese” . Yet some Nouns of this kind are formed differently
e.g. "Roman = Romanso " .
Yet this -kār cannot be used so often as the Latin tor; use
does not allow us to form such Nouns except in certain cases .
Then we may use the Participle in -tolo, although this termi
nation seems to express in a transitory way what is ex
pressed by -kār; e.g. " buyer, Lat. emptor = molāk kaņeitolo ”;
"seller , Lat. venditor , or better vendens = iktolo ”. This ter
mination can generally be used.
By -sáņ are formed some Nouns (usually Feminine) chiefly
from qualificative Adjectives; e. g. " kodu = bitter", "kodsāņ =
bitterness ” ; “ gòdu = sweet" ; " godsāņ = sweetness” .
។

By -neñ are derived many Abstract Nouns which corres

pond to our Verbal Nouns ; e. g. bāir -gāl = put out”, “bāir
gālneñ = expulsion "; råd = weep " , rådneñ = weeping " .
=

Remark that the Verbal Nouns can be expressed not only by

-neñ, but also by -ap , (see above) and -čeñ (which last is the 1
termination of the Absolute Infinitive ), or, seldom, by -ni or -an ;
.
e. g. “ sôd = leave”, “ soạni = abandonment"; ” mór = die",
“ moran = death ”; “ kår = do ”, “ kāraņ = cause”. By the above
=

terminations can be formed not only Verbal Nouns, but others

too ; e.g. “ jie = live”, “ jiņi = life”, “ kår = do” , “ kărņi = action”
9

(although these two Nouns might be considered in some way

as Verbal Nouns).
 169

Sårkeñ corresponds to the English -ility or Latin -bilitas;

i. e , it expresses suitableness etc. for any thing ; e.g. " docility
= sika-sărkeñ ”; “vanti-sărkeñ = divisibility”.
By i many Nouns are derived which have about the same
meaning as the word from which they are derived, except that
they are concrete; e. g. " šāstrạ = religion ” , “šāstri = religious
man , or doctor, chiefly of a sacred science (D. D.)”; yet it
seems that such Nouns can be used, often at least, also as >

Adjectives; e. g. " bezāri = tired ”,, as also sometimes by i Ab

stract Nouns are formed from Concrete Nouns ; e. g. udost
favourite" , " dosti = favour, grace " .
-ist or -st is employed to form Concrete Nouns almost in
the same way as -kár or -tolo ; e . g. " sermauñ = preaching” ,
" sermavist = preacher ”; “mukhia = principal”, “ mukhiest =
- -

head "; " buiñ-māp = geometry" , " buiñ -māpist = geometer ” etc.
>

To this point of derivation we may reduce the derivation

of the Feminine from the Masculine . The Feminine is
derived from the Masculine very often by adding n or in ; e . g.
" gărkār = householder” , “ gărkārn = house-wife ”; sāib = lord ”,
>

“ sāibiņ =
lady”; “ Goiñkār = Goanese (man )”, “Goiñkārn =
=

Goanese (woman )” ; sometimes by changing o of the Masculine

into i ; e. g. “ pādko = small bullock ” , “ pādki = small cow ”;
" bogdo = mutton ”, “ bogời = sheep” . Yet many are formed
irregularly ; e.g. udādlo = man ”, “ bāil, or åstri = woman ”;
“ bāu = brother" , " boiņ = sister"; " burgo = boy ”, “ čeduñ = girl ";
=

" peto = dog ", " kolgeñ = bitch ”;; “ pāļo = steer" , " pāļi =
=

cow ” etc.
Corollary : If we compare the above terminations with the
Latin terminations, -pon and -ai or -kai correspond to -tas
or -us of the Abstract Nouns ; e. g. sanctitas, servitus, -ap, -ni,
-neñ, -čeñ correspond mostly to -tio or -ctio; e. g. scriptio,
elatio , actio, ambulatio ; -găr, -kār, -dár, -ist, -i correspond
very often to -tor or similar termination of the Concrete Nouns;
e. g. scriptor, emptor, Mangalorensis, Goanus, Bombayensis;
-san corresponds to -do or -udo of qualificative Nouns; e.g.
22
 170

dulcedo, amaritudo ; sårkeñ corresponds to -bilitas or -ilitas;

e.g. divisibilitas, docilitas ; -an seems to correspond to -ctio or
-tio ; sometimes it expresses something permanent.

Art. II. Adjectives

1 . The most common form of derivation is by adding -80,
-či, -čeñ or sometimes -lo, -li, -leñ. The first termination is
usually added to the stem of the corresponding Noun ; the
second termination is added more frequently to the 1st Loca
tive of the Noun ; consequently these Adjectives in -lo seem to
imply some locative meaning ; e.g. " sauñsārāntlo monis = man
(living) in the world ” . The Adjectives in -ntlo (-lo added to
the 1st Locative) are used moreover to indicate coming out of
.
... ; e. g . “mātientlo = coming out of the earth ” ; sometimes
the termination -lo is the termination of the Past Participle;
e. g. “kond-lo = fossil ”, from " kond = dig "; then it is not added
=

to the 1st Locative. The Adjectives in -80 usually mean qua

lity, taking the word " quality " not in a rigorous sense.
Some Adjectives are formed irregularly, e.g. from “ sărg =
heaven ”, “ sărgiñso” instead of " sărgāso" ; from " går = house”,
>

" gărso " instead of " gărāso " or better, " gărso " means " domes
tic, a member of, or living in, the family ” ; “ gărāso ” means
" of the house” , e.g. “ the roof of the house” .
1. As regards the above terminations “ -so, -ci, -ceñ” of derived Adjectives, we
must now expressly observe, what has been already cursorily remarked in Part II.
Chapter IV. page 122, viz. that the exact spelling (i. e. according to the pronun
ciation of high castes) of these terminations would be “ -tso, -tči, -tčeñ " . Up to
this I wrote “-80, -či, -čeñ"' ; for this spelling is more simple and more usual,
yet it is not so exact. But if an Adjective in “ -so ” is not derived, it may have
“ -80” not “ -tso ” ; e.g.“ piso”. Moreover the quasi-diminutive “ -30” is exactly “ -so” ,
not " tso ” .
2. All Adjectives in “ o, i, eñ ” ,> if used for the 1st Person Singular, according
to the best pronunciation have a nasal termination ; e. g. " āuñ boreñ nīñ = I am
not good ” .
2. Another rather bold manner of forming Adjectives is
to add the terminations -lo, -li, -leň to the 2nd Locative in
 171

-ger (see p. 14) , omitting r of -ger on account of euphony ; so

we get “ gelo, geli, geleñ " instead of “ gerlo, gerli, gerleñ ”;
e.g. here in Mangalore the Adjective “ Mādringelo ” is common ;
it is derived from " Mādringer” , 2nd Locative Plural of “ Mādri
= nun ”, meaning " at the nuns or being at the nuns" ; hence
" Mādringelo " has the meaning as " at the Nuns”; e.g. " Mā
dringeli rivāz = custom as the nuns, or coming from the house
of the nuns ”” . So they form from " Deu = God ” , the Adjective
>

“ Devāgelo ”, which exactly means was at the house of God or

devout”; 6.8 : " Devāgelo monis = devout man ’; from “ to = that”,
•

they form " teāgelo = : he who, or that which, is there, or at

that place ” ; from “ mārañ = Parias”, the Adjective “ mārañgelo ”
is formed . We might say also that these Adjectives are formed
by adding -gelo to the original ; yet I prefer to say that they
are formed by adding -lo to the 2nd Locative in -ger, because
this seems to be the origin of that -gelo; moreover the mean
ing of these Adjectives suggests this explanation ; conse
quently it is easier to be retained and more reasonable. In
a similar way many other Adjectives might be formed , for
which we have no corresponding Adjectives of one word in
our European languages, Italian , English, German etc.
3. Some Adjectives are derived from Nouns by adding
to the root of the Noun the termination -ést; e.g. " pida
sickness", " piąést = sick”; “ čintna = thought" has “čintést =
>

gloomy” .
4. Another rather difficult way of deriving Adjectives is
to add “ -šilo or -velo ” . The meaning which the Adjective
receives thereby is strange ; I explain it by examples ;
" lāgiñ = near " , " lāgšilo = he who is near or that which is
near ” ; “ pois = far” , “ poišilo = he who is far or that which is
>

far” ; “ mukār = before ”, “ mukāvelo = he who is before or that

=

which is before" ; " pāus = rain ", " pāušilo = rainy ". Now some
sentences : -- Seeing two boys, one far, the other near, IΙ say:
“ lāgšilo yeundi = he who is near shall come”, " poišilo ye
9

undi = he who is far, shall come near (or come near )” ; “moja
22 *
 172

lāgšilo votz = go far”, or literally: " you who are near, go from
me (far ), or go from being near to me” ; “ poišilo yē = come
near, or come from being far (to me), or come thou being
far (to me)". We may explain the use of these Adjectives
with philosophical terms, thus : In Konkani the terminus ad
quem is omitted and only the terminus a quo is expressed ; in
our languages the terminus ad quem is expressed, and the
terminus a quo is omitted. This is an easy way, I think , to
explain these Adjectives which seem to imply a contradiction.
The Adjectives in “ -šilo ” and “ -velo ” which have, no relation
to place, e.g. " pāušilo” do not present such a difficulty.
5 . Some Adjectives are derived , or rather formed , as in>

Kanarese and Tulu , viz. by adding to the Nominative of the

Noun the Past Participle of assā = is” , which almost cor
responds to the Latin habens; e.g. " podvi assollo = being power
ful (having power)". But this kind of Adjectives is more
frequently used joined immediately to a Substantive or at
= aa
least not used as predicate ; e. g. “ podvi assollo monis =
powerful man ”. We could not say : " to monis podvi assollo
zāun assā = this man is powerful”.
6 . Some Adjectives are formed by adding to the stem of
Noun “ dig ”; e. g . “ mānadig = glorious" ; " fol-a -dig = fruitful”.
Sometimes only -ig is added ; e.g. “ amolig = of infinite price” ,
or some other letter is put before " -dig ”.
7 . Many Adjectives are derived from Postpositions and

Adverbs, chiefly by adding -80 or -lo, i.e. as Adjectives are

derived from Nouns (see above 1.) ; so from " hangā = here” ,=

comes “ hangāso = of here "; " bităr = within”, “bitărlo = inte

rior ”; “ voir = above” , “ voilo = of above" ; " āgiñ = near”, “ lāg
so ” , and “ lāgšilo (see above 4.) ; “ ādiñ = before" , " ādlo ”; “ mā
gir = after", " māgirlo " , " modeñ = in the middle " , modlo” etc.
(See Part II . Chapter V.)
8 . The Adjectives which in Latin end in -bilis are formed
by adding to the Nominative of the Substantive “ fāvozallo = due ” ;
e . g . " nămåskär fāvozallo = adorabilis" . Sometimes instead
 173

of " fāvozallo" , the termination -80 added to the stem may

suffice; e. g. " kantālo fāvozallo, or " kantālaso = abominable”; :
this 2nd termination is more vulgar. In the above case the
termination -bilis means “ due” . “If it means possibility of
doing something, then the Adjective is formed by adding the
Participle " assollo ” to the Potential Mood in -yet; e. g.
" accessible place = votsayet assollo zāgo "; " accessible moun
tain = čădăyet assollo porvot". In the negative form the
Participle is added to the Necessary Mood of negative form ;
e . g " votsun nozo assollo zāgo = inaccessible place " 1) .
9. By -särko some Adjectives are formed , which mean
.
“ fit to do .. " ; e.g. " saumzāisărko= fit to persuade” ; “ movāļai
=

sărko = fit to move” ; sometimes before adding “ -sărko” another

intermedial word is inserted ; e. g. “fār = explosion ”, “fārazāi
=

sărko = explosive ”.
10. Some Adjectives are derived by adding to the stem of
the Noun the particle -vánt, which seems to denote possession ;
e.g. " bud = wisdom " , " bud - i-vănt = wise " , " nīt = justice ”, nīti
>

vănt = just”.
11. Some others are derived by adding i ; e. g . " mosor =
envy " , " mosri = envious" ; " souñsār = world " , " souñsāri =
wordly, laic". See on page 169 the meaning of this i.
12. The Participles derived from the Verbs and the quasi
diminutive so and the emphatic -ts (see Ch. I.) may also be
reckoned here.
Chiefly pay attention to the Participles of the Potential
and Necessary Mood explained in $ 5 . If a Past Participle
is used as an Adjective, then it doubles the 1, as it contains
some emphasis.
There are some other difficult Adjectives; of these we
will speak when treating of Participles, in the Syntax.
1) This is a Negative Participle of the Necessary Mood not given in the
Part II .; it is formed by adding the Past Participle of “ assā ” to the Present
Negative of the Necessary Mood ; or we may say that it is the same as the
Past Tense (see page 114).
 174

Corollary: The termination -tso shows quality or also what

is due, -lo place, the Participle " assollo" possession (of quality ),
-dig also quality, (sometimes it has a causative meaning , e.g.
“ mānadig = causing honour, or glorious” ); “ fāvozallo ” means
something due, “ assollo" with the Potential means possibility,
with “ nozo" impossibility, “ vănt” possession, wsărko” fit to ;
-80 (quasi-diminutive) corresponds to the termination -neous
( ferrugineous); -ts has an emphatic or also exclusive meaning.
Art. III. Verbs

If we distinguish Derivation from Composition, as we

really do , it seems that a very few Verbs can be called de
rived ; because the derived word of course must be not so simple
as the word from which it is derived ; but many Verbs not
compounded seem to be themselves the primitive and most
simple form of the word, from which other forms are
derived ; or at least often the root of the Verb (2nd Person
Singular Imperative) is as simple as the corresponding Noun
or as other corresponding part of speech ; e.g. “ mār = beat” ,
Substantive and Verb . Notwithstanding there are some
Verbs not compounded which seem to be really derived from
a more simple form . Of these I intend to speak.
1 . The most simple mode of derivation is to add some
vowel to the primitive or at least approaching to the primitive
form , e.g. " kårtz = expense” , “ kårtči = expend ”; about the
,
=

change of -tz into -tě (see below Chapter VIII.); “ gām = perspi
ration ”, “ gāme = perspire ”. Thereby it seems that the Verb
expresses the act of that thing which is expressed by the
original word, so that if the original word implies a Neuter
meaning, the derived Verb is Neuter; e.g. « gām , gāme” ; if
the original word implies a transitive meaning, the derived
Verb is transitive; e.g. " kårtz, kårtči”.
Yet sometimes by the addition of i we have a Causative
Verb, and by the addition of a we have a Neuter Verb. (See
here below, and Part II. Chapter IV . Art. II. § 1. 3.)
 175

2. Another mode of derivation is to add to the simple or

approximately simple form ăi (sometimes äi, ei, oi or only i),
if it ends in a consonant ; or only i or uoi or some other ir
regular termination, if it ends in a vowel ; or dai or voi (with
some little change in spelling) , if it ends in ñ. Thereby we
have Causative Verbs (see l. c. and p. 145 , 2nd footnote).
3. A third mode of derivation is to cut off from the
Causative Verb the termination by which they become Causa
tive . Thereby we have the original non-causative Verb,
Neuter or Transitive as it was before being made Causative ;
e.g. “ kårăi = cause to do ”, skår do ” ; khāuoi = cause to
eat” , -khā
“ ” " mānuăi = cause to please ", " mānuă =
= eat";
please”. Yet we must remark that many Verbs by losing
only the Vowel i of the Causative termination, become Neuter ;
2

this is the case not with all but with some Verbs, having the
root ending in a vowel ; provided the meaning allows it, and
provided they have not become doubly transitive by the cau
sative termination ; e.g. “ khā = eat”, “khāuoi = cause to eat” .
So from " paloăi= extinguish” we get " palo : = get extinguished,
be extinguished by itself” . Of the Transitive Verbs ending
in a consonant, now I recollect only one « kātăr = cut”, “ kātă
răi or kātrăi = cause to cut”, which becomes Neuter or in some
>

way passive by taking away -ai and making the a of the

root long, " kātår = cut" , as in Sanskrit nāhyňte = he binds" ,
“nahyāte = he is bound ” . (See Max Müller's Sanskrit Grammar
Chapter xv. $ 398.) There may be some other Transitive Cau
.

sative Verb which becomes Neuter by taking away only i, or

by producing the vowel of the root. See another mode 1.c.
$ 3 n. 4 , and some explanation of this,3rd way I. c. $ 1 and
alibi. Art . II.
This 3rd mode, as the reader sees , is not properly a deriva
tion ; because the non -causative Verbs are not derived from
the Causative, but rather the Causative are derived from the
non-causative Verbs ; yet I put them here for the sake of
convenience .
 - 176

Art. IV. Adverbs )

1. Very often the Instrumental of the Substantive is
used as an Adverb ; this happens chiefly in Adverbs of manner,
because the Instrumental hasalso this meaning ; e.g. " kåštān =
with difficulty ”.
2. Sometimes the Neuter of the Adjective is used as an
Adverb ; e.g. uboreñ = good or well” . This happens with Ad
jectives of three terminations.
3. Many Adverbs are formed by using the Gerund in -un
of the required Verb added to the Substantive ; e.g. " atten
tively = čit diun = giving attention "; " boreñ kårn kårunknāñ -

(he) did not perform it well” . In this example we have, I may

say, a double Adverb ; for, “ boreñ " is one Adverb, to it the
Gerund in -un contracted into -n ) is added ; or perhaps we may
say , that " kårn " is added to sboreñ” considered as a Sub
stantive. This way is rather a composition.
4. From Pronouns ( Relative and Demonstrative) Adverbs
of manner are derived by adding to the stem “ -sseñ ” ; e.g.“ tås
señ = in that manner ”, “ asseñ = in this way ” , “ kåssen or zás
9

señ = in that way in which ( =as)" ; though, properly speaking ,

these are Adjectives in the Neuter Gender used as Adverbs .
5. From the same Pronouns are derived Adverbs of place
by adding -ņeñ ; e.g. " teņeñ= through that way, in that side” ;
“ yeņeñ = in this side "; or also by adding “ -ssiñ ”, e. 8. sissiñ ,
tissiñ = here and there ” . This " yeņeñ" and " teņeñ " are the In
strumental of -o and -to of Feminine Gender, and issiñ , tissiñ " >

are shortened from " yeā kusin , teā kusin ” .

6. If the Adjectives have only one termination, Adverbs
of manner are formed from them by adding " zāun ” or some
other Gerund ; " khăņditzāun = positively” from " khăndit =
positive ”, “mukhiăzāun = chiefly " from " mukhiă = principal” .
?

This last method, i. e. by adding “ zāun ” is very often used ,

1) What I say here, cannot always be called properly Derivation ; for the
sake of convenience I put things together which should be separated.
 177

and whenever we cannot use another way, let us try this

last form ; this " zāun ” can be added not only to Adjectives
but also to Nouns . Sometimes the Instrumental of the
corresponding Substantive may be used as an Adverb;; e.g.e. g.
“ sobitāyen = nicely”, from “ sobitāi = nicety"
” and this from
osobit nice ” .
7. Finally the negative form , the emphatic -ts and the
quasi-diminutive -80 are other modes of derivation belonging
not only to the Adverbs but also to the other parts of speech .
(See above Chapters II. & IV.)

CHAPTER VI. COMPOSITION OF WORDS

Following the order observed in the former chapters of this
Third Part, I should speak first of all about the composition
of Nouns ; but as this is not completely settled as yet, let us
speak first of the more common composition , I mean the
composition of Verbs .
I must remark from the very beginning that under the
name of composition I include not only those words which
must be written as one word, originating from two or more
words , but also those words which are written or at least
might be written separately and those words, about which
there is some doubt whether they are better written as one
or more words. About this see below.

Art. I. Verbs
1. As the first mode of composition of Verbs, let us put
the mode in which foreign Verbs are Konkanized .
Many foreign Verbs are Konkanized by affixing to their
foreign Infinitive the Verb “ kår = do ” , if transitive, or “ zā ” if
>

intransitive; e. g. “ kanonizār kår = canonize ", " kanonizār zā

= get canonized ” . But this should be, as far as possible,
carefully avoided, as there is such an inclination to Konkanize
foreign words in this way, that Konkani would become very
23
 -
178

soon half Konkani , half English or Latin. Although it is

difficult to translate literally many foreign words , yet accom
modating ourselves to the nature of Konkani, we can find the
Konkani corresponding word.
2. Another mode of composition is to join a Substantive or
an Adjective to a Verb. The Substantive may be of any kind,
but the Verbs more commonly used in this composition are
“ kår = do” , by which perhaps half the Konkani Verbs are formed ;
then " gāl = put"; " di = give"; " ghē := receive”; “ zā = become" ;
=

e. g. “ mög kår = love, lit, make love ”; “ bautism di = baptize,

=

lit. give baptism ”; “ badlām gāl = calumniate, lit. put calum

niation "; " jīvănt zā = rise from death, lit. get alive etc.”
3. Another thoroughly Konkani mode of composition is to
join the Gerund in -un of the principal Verb to another Verb
in a finite Mood, i.e. in the Mood and Tense required by the
meaning. Remark that this other Verb is not an Auxiliary
Verb ; both Verbs might be called principal, although that
-un seems to prevail, e.g. " abolish = kādn or kādun gāl, lit.
having taken away, put or put down " . This way of compo
sition is common to Kanarese and Tulu , and , as I have heard,
also to the Malayālam language. I will speak more distinctly
in the Syntax about it, as this point is not so easy.
4. A fourth form of composition is to prefix some Adverb
to a Verb ; but this perhaps is not exactly a composition ,
because the Adverb does not make one word with the Verb; e.g.
“approach = lāgiñ pāu , lit. reach near” . Postpositions are
7

not prefixed , as in Latin perficio, conficio etc., because all Post

positions are joined with Substantives (at least understood, if
not expressed) , Pronouns and Participles. (See page 154 n . 9.)
Art. II . Nouns and other Parts
As to the composition of Substantives, if we do not con
sider the matter thoroughly, we might think that there are
>

no Compound Substantives, and I myself was of this opinion

some time ago. Yet I hold now as certain that there are many
 179

Compound Nouns. But here we must distinguish ; for, there

are two modes of composition : the first is to change the go
verned Noun into an Adjective and then there is no composi
tion, but a mere apposition ; e.g. " clergyman ”, we may express
it by “Igărjeso muniāri = minister of the church ”; another way
is to join immediately the two Nouns into one word. In this
case there is a true composition. How is this composition to
be made ? I do not know a perfectly fixed rule, as I have
no example to go by. I propose the way which is certain
as to the pronunciation ; but as to writing, it should be intro
duced now . The most common way therefore to make this
composition is to put first the governed Noun in the Original
case, Singular or Plural according to the meaning, and then
to join to it the governing Noun in one word and give to
the compounded Noun the Gender of the second or governing
Noun as in German. But how to join the two Nouns, by hy
phens or without hyphens ? Following the analogy of other
languages I would suggest a hyphen between the 1st and 2nd
word, to show more distinctly the composition. Yet, if we
write Konkani with Kanarese or Mahratti letters , we should
omit the hyphens . You find many compound words in
the Dictionary, some of which are used, some are not com
monly used, because in many cases the idea itself does not
commonly exist in this country ; yet they are Konkani words ,
formed according to the nature of Konkani language. Exam
ples : for " convent" here many say " konvent”, and in familiar
9

conversation we may use it ; but if we want to speak correctly

and a pure language, we might say "săngăt-vāsiñ-măț ( n .)”
from " săngăt-vāsi = cenobite ”, and “ măț = convent", or shorter,
only “măt"; this word is not used at all ; yet all elementary words
are used, except “mat” which is used only for pagan convents ;
why could we not use also the compounded word ? Either
we must follow this way or use foreign words ; which is better ?
As we see from this example, there may be a composition even
of more than two words. " Chapter (of Canons) = koņikañ-mē!
23 *
 180

9
(m.) lit. = reunion of canons” , from " koņik = canon ” and
“mēļ = reunion ”. In both cases the governed Noun has been
=

put in the Original Plural, because the meaning required it ;

in the following the Singular is used : " Igărje-muniāri, lit.
minister of the church ” .
As to the Verbs, we might write them with a hyphen , if they
are joined to an Adverb , though not true compounds. But if they
are joined to a Noun, e. g . “ mög kår = love ", it seems better
=
>

not to join them at all, and really sometimes the Noun is

separated from its Verb; €.g. " Deu amso mõg tzád kårtā =
God loves us much”. So also the other compositions considered
above (Art. I. nn . 1 , 3.) are not true compositions ; consequently
the two words are written separately. As to the composition,
chiefly of Nouns, we must remark that the above rule of
joining the governing Noun to the Original of the governed
Noun , cannot be used in every case ; the prevailing custom
is to be observed, which in some cases requires a true
composition , sometimes only an apposition of a Noun and
an Adjective.
Besides the composition of two or more Nouns, there may
be a composition of other parts of speech, e.g. of a Noun
and an Adjective, as “ såma-podneñ = harmony" ; " sărvų >

podvi = almight”; of a Noun and a Postposition , e. g. “ såkål

podneñ = downfall ”; of two Adjectives, e.g. “ sărvụ-boro
infinitely good "; of a Pronoun and an Adjective or of two
Pronouns, e. g. “ kòn-yēk = some” , 66“ kòņ -yēklo = somebody”
>

(see pp. 79-80); of a Conjunction and another part of speech,

e.g. " sāngleār-i = although you said"; "amkāñ-i = to us too" ;
"kòņāk-i = to any one" ; " āuveñ kărunk-nāñ = I have not done"
etc. To this point we cannot reduce, it seems, the emphatic -ts
and the quasi-diminutive -80 (see above Ch. II.) ; because -ts
and -so are not words used also separately, but only suffixes .
As to the way of joining ; if Nouns are joined, the second
is joined more commonly to the Original of the preceding
Nouns, as I said ; yet in some cases this rule is not observed ;
 181

because the Nominative instead of the Original is used, or

some change is made; e.g. “ aple ičhādhipăti = despot”, shorten
ed from “ aple ičhe-adhipăti "; if not two Nouns, but a Noun
and an Adjective or some other parts are joined, either they
are simply joined in their primitive form , or the changes indi
cated throughout the Grammar are made , or some other
way is followed which can be fixed later; for, these rules
about composition are very rudimental, and consequently
must be completed and perfected after having carefully
considered this branch of the Grammar. Even in the com
position of this second kind I would, for the sake of distinction,
suggest a hyphen, unless there be evidently a mere apposition.
As to the declension of these compound words, if one
Noun is joined to the Original Case of another Noun, the first
part is not declined at all ; the declension takes place only
in the governing or second Noun. I say “ if... joined to the
Original”, because I remember now one word apparently
compounded, “ bāuto-kăţto = lighthouse” , which is declined in
both parts.

CHAPTER VII. NASAL SOUND

This and the following Chapters may be considered as a
Tápepyoy to the Part I. , as the preceding Chapters are like a
tápspyoy to the Part II. Yet the things treated of in these Chap
ters are in some way also etymological ; and as they are
common to all or at least to many parts of speech, we can
consider these points as belonging to the Synetymology.
My readers might have been surprised in seeing the nasal
* sound ñ so often used ; but they must know that Konkani is
a nasal language xat'ěçoxýv. For this reason it is required
to form some rudimental rules about this ñ.
First of all, in the beginning I thought it unnecessary
to use ñ also in the middle of the word ; yet afterwards I was
aware that sometimes we cannot avoid it without losing much
 182

exactness ; hence you find ñ also in the middle, contrary

to what I said in Part I. Chapter I.
2. When is it used ? A complete rule cannot be given ;
we can give some cases in which it is used. It is used :
a) In all oblique cases of the Plural of all declensions,
and in the Nominative Plural of Neuter Nouns ;
b) In the Nominative Singular of the Neuter Nouns end
ing in e and, very often , in i and u;
c) In all cases of some Feminine Nouns ending in i of
the 4th Declension (see pp. 32, 34) ; some Nouns in uñ seem
also to keep this ñ in all cases of the Singular ;
d) In the Neuter Nominative Singular of the Adjectives
and Participles of three terminations ; and also in the Mas
culine and Feminine Nominative Singular of all Adjectives
and Participles of three terminations, if used for the 1st
Person , e.g. " āuñ boroñ niñ = I am not good ” ;
e) In the Nouns ending in au ; e. g . “ Juāuñ = John"; " guni
āuñ = fault" .
f) As to Verbs, in all Neuter Persons of declinable tenses,
and also the 1st Person Singular and Plural of any Gen
der, if ending in a vowel, (except -ungi of the Impera
tive) ; the forms in u ( Subjunctive, Imperative etc.); the Ge
runds in tana and true Participles in -tā and -to (nidtā ñ
nidtoñ) . As it is too difficult to remember all forms with ñ,
let us proceed per exclusionem : In the Verbs this ñ is not
used , of course, if the form ends in a consonant. Then , gene
rally a form of the Verb ending in a vowel has ñ, but with
these limitations : 1 ) the 2nd and 3rd Person Singular and
Plural Masculine and Feminine of declinable tenses, 2) 2nd
and 3rd Person in indeclinable tenses are not nasal ; the
forms neither conjugable nor declinable (not modifying ter
minations in any person) ending in a vowel (as the Subjunc
tive and Optative) , follow the general rule, i.e. take ñ. The
Participles in o, i, eñ follow the rules of the Adjectives (see
 183

above). A few exceptions to this rule can be found out by the

reader himself.
The above rules about Nouns and Adjectives can be ap
plied to Pronouns. As to the other parts of speech, I cannot
for the present frame a certain particular rule. Generally I
can say, that if a word ends in a vowel , it ends more fre
quently in ñ ; chiefly all words compounded with the final
negative particle náñ or niñ are nasal ; for nāñ or niñ are nasal.
3. What change does this ñ undergo ? The following rule,
if not general , contains at least many cases.
a) If to a word ending in ñ some consonant is added, e.g.
the emphatic tz, it becomes more similar to n , but not always
in the same way ; euphony is the rule ; so if a guttural con
sonant is added, it becomes similar to the Canarese letter 20 ,
or as -ñg in singing (see p. 18, Note 2) ; if it is followed by a
palatal, it seems to become a little palatal like ŋ, and so on .
I do not always mark these differences in the Grammar, as
they are too subtle.
c) If it is followed by a vowel, frequently it seems to be
come a pure n. II have aa faint remembrance of words in which
this ñ is found also before vowels.
d) The ñ of the Nominative is usually left out in the ob
lique cases, chiefly if the termination to be added begins with
a consonant ; in some rare cases it is kept (see p. 34 ).
e) About other changes of ñ see pp. 41 , 116 and Art II. of
Chapter IV. Part II. and alibi.
Some might think it unnecessary to pay attention to these niceties. I
answer : In some cases it may be true ; for this “ ñ ” has many degrees, in some
cases it is difficult even to native learned men to ascertain whether there is “ ñ ”
or not ; yet in some cases it is so clear that by omitting it, the meaning would
be changed ; chiefly if another consonant, e.g. “ tz,” is added , if you do not take
into consideration this ñ, you would get a wrong composition, e.g. " āuñ = 1” ,
" āuntz = myself " . If you do not pay attention to that ñ, you would get “ autz "
which is not understood at all , and so in many other cases. (See also pp. 6 , 7. )
 184

CHAPTER VIII. CHANGES OF LETTERS

Although something has been said about this in Part I. ,
yet only now are we enabled to understand these things
better.
The letters which not exclusively, but chiefly undergo some
changes, are 8, 2, 0, ñ, é, i, u, a, u, d, t; about ñ a peculiar chapter
7

has been put. As regards s, z, as a general rule we may say

that whenever a declinable part of speech ends in the Nom
inative Singular in s, z, or so, zo, this s is changed into č and z,
into j in the cases in which the termination of the Nominative
Masculine is changed ; e. g. in the Neuter Nominative and
in the oblique cases ; so " rus” or more exactly “ ruts = taste” , >

Orig. " ručik or rutčik "; " dobazo = pomp " , " dobajea "; " rāz =
kingdom " , " rāja ” ; “ mozo = mine”, “ mojeñ, moja”. Conse
quently the words ending in -tso following the third declension
change this s into č. Many Adjectives and Participles are
formed with the termination -tso ; hence “ kårtso, kártčeñ” ;
moreover the English Genitive is usually changed into the Ad
jective in -tso. Yet this change does not always take place
60
in the Nouns ; e.g." kuris = cross” , “ kursa " , because it is " kris"
>

not " krits” . Chiefly as to the termination -so of the Adjec

tives, we must distinguish the true termination -80 from -tso
or -tzo; we have seen that the true terminations of the Adjec
tives in -80 corresponding to the Genitive would be -tso; where
as -so is the termination of the quasi-diminutive and of some
other Adjectives. The first mostly undergoes the above change,
not the second ; because (as I think) this -ts in Kanarese and
in Maharātti is written with a letter which in Kanarese
usually, in Maharātti often sounds like č ; consequently if this
letter -ts before some letters does not sound so euphonical, it
is changed into its cognate č ; so this -tz does not sound so
well before ea, a, e, as before o ; therefore before a , ea, e is
changed into č. The same is to be said of z and j . This z
 185

is written with a letter, which in Kanarese usually, in Maha

rātti often, sounds like j. If this last reason of harmony does
not satisfy, as it does not fully satisfy me, let us keep the
rule without the given reason .
Now I am aware that the above rule is not very suitable,
if we do not distinguish the s which sounds ts or tz from the
s which sounds simply s. Up to this I have very seldom made
this distinction in writing, and this for the sake of simplicity ;
but simplicity must not prevail over exactness or be a source
of confusion. Consequently in the Dictionary I will try to
distinguish these two letters ; moreover, as not all words can
be put in the Dictionary, chiefly derived words, this rule may
throw some light. The following words must be written with
ts instead of s : 1 ) The derived Adjectives in -80 ( -tso ). 2) All
Adjectives corresponding to the Genitive ( see Part II. Ch. II .
Art. I. $ 2 , p. 51) ". 3) All forms of the Verbs ending with
a sharp so ; these are the Participles in -tso of the affirmative
form , e. g. “ nid -tso ”, the Gerundive, the Future of the Negative
form , the Infinitive, the Negative Participle in “ -tsonāñ”
and so on ; but the Negative Participle formed by adding
so to the Negative root, of which I will speak in the Syntax,
e.g. " nidanāñ- so ”, and the Imperfect Subjunctive are written
with a pure s. Generally speaking, the sharp s is equal to ts ,
a simple, not sharp, s is written s. Paying attention to the
pronunciation, we can distinguish these two s very easily.
.
Examples of 1. “ kaņķālatso,”; of 2.“ Devātso” ; of 3. “ kårtso ” .
As to Nouns, not so many are written with ts .
Therefore we have to distinguish these similar sounds :
simple s as in “ piso” , sharp s or ts (tz) as in “ Devātso” ,
2 ។

č as in “očar” , tč as in skårtči”; and so also z, as in “ mozo” ,

j as in " moji”. Ts, tz and tč are written in Kanarese and
Mahrātti with one letter ; yet tč is somewhat different from
ts or tz. After these distinctions we may lay down the above
1) The Adjectives of this second kind are not entirely distinct from the
A djectives under n. 1 .
24
 186

rule more clearly, thus : The words ending in ts or 2, 80 , zo

in the Nominative Singular, or in the first Person Singular
Masculine, change ts into tč, and z into j , in the cases in
which the termination of the Nominative or of the first
Person Singular Masculine is changed. Examples : " motso =
shoe”, Plural : “ motče ”; “ mār = beat”, Future Participle and
>

Gerundive : “ mār-tso, mār -tči, mār-tčeñ"; Future Negative:

“ mār-tsoñ -nāñ, mār-tčiñ -nāñ " , etc. Future Negative Participle
>

and Negative Gerundive : “ mār-tso -nāñ, mār-tči -nāñ " etc., but
66
" mārināñ -so, mārināñ -si etc. = which cannot be beaten " , and so
also “ mārisoñ, mārisiña ; (Imperfect Subjunctive): “ khărts =
>

expense ” ; “ khărtči -tāñ = I expend "; " khărtsountso = expend

ing" ; (here ts is not changed into tč, because o follows).
“Bātso = nephew" , " bātčeāk = to the nephew".
From these examples it appears that if the termination
of the Nominative is changed, and an o follows, ts or z may
remain .
If some words have ts or z followed, not by o, but by an
other vowel in their original form , more frequently they
do not change ts or z. Yet there may be some exceptions
against this point, as also there may be some words not
changing ts or 2, according to the above rule.
Words ending in a simple s, or in a simple so, usually do
not undergo such a change ; now I recollect only “mănis =
man ”, which changes s into š, i.e. into a cerebral š. But the
reason of this change seems to be quite peculiar to this word ;
in Kanarese it is written in the Nominative summating, viz. with
a cerebral š ") . Very probably there may be some other words
changing a simple s into č or into a cerebral š, or into a
simple š. I have a faint remembrance of such words. Remark
that tč seems to sound very often like a simple č on account
of euphony.
1) This “ ğ ” is used by the Authors of some books printed at the Basel Mission
Press, as the sign of a cerebral “ ç”, for which I have no sign pp. 5, 6. (See
Chapter IX.)
 187

When a word has the root ending in s, then the following

ts cannot sound distinctly ts ; and when this ts is changed into
č, the first sibilant s cannot remain sibilant according to the
rules of euphony ; but it is changed into a somewhat thick
8, similar to the Latin s in assis (see p. 105. n. 1 ); e.g. " hās ==
laugh " , "hās-tso (bāsso), hās-tči (hās-či) . For this thick s
I did not put any sign in the Alphabet ; this can be done
in future time ; for the present we may use š, because this š
is the nearest letter to the thick s. Moreover a sibilant 8s be
comes thick almost naturally before č; consequently there is
not an urgent necessity to find out a sign for it. Perhaps
the above change of s into a thick s may take place in some
other cases . I have indicated the most common case.
As to o, we have hinted in the Paradigm that o is changed
into e in the Future and Past Perfect -lolo (see p. 88 , n. 2)
viz. when o of the penultimate syllable is not followed by
another o in the last syllable. The same change takes place
in other words of a similar form . In some other words o
of the penultimate seems to be changed into ą; e.g. “ assolo,
assalli” etc. I say " seems" , because it is not so easy to dis
tinguish what kind of vowel is such substituted vowel. Further
some change this o not in a but into another letter ; e.g. some
say “assollo, assilli, assilleñ ", and " kåssolo, kăsseli, kăsseleñ " .
The forms laid down in Part II. seem to be more common and
more correct ; therefore they should be used in order to have
some uniformity and to elevate the language.
As regards u, we may say almost the same as of o ; namely
it is changed in some tenses into a, chiefly in the Feminine
and Neuter (see Part II. Ch. IV. 882 , 3 , 4, 5). Moreover it is
>

changed often into v, e.g. in many Nouns ending in " āuñ ”,

in Verbs ending in au etc. (See Part II. Ch. IV. Art. I. § 5 ,
Art. II. § 1 etc.)
About e I have only to remark the change of this é into è
(see p. 24, n. 4) . About this point perhaps some rule may
be found later.
24 *
 -
188

About i only one change is here to be remarked. As I

write Konkani with Roman characters following the Latin
pronunciation , consequently IΙ write, e. g . “ sobitāi” not «sobi
tāy = beauty ” ; but in the oblique cases this last i sounds like
y, consequently it should be written also y, although I have
not always done it, because by writing, e.g. " sobitāi-en”,
according to the Latin pronunciation we get nearly the same
sound as by writing “ sobitāyen ” (see page 18 , n. 1 ) . The best
way of getting rid of many niceties would be to write Konkani
with Kanarese characters .
A, corresponding to the Kanarese 6, as has been observed
2

in P. I. , should be written at the end of all words which do not

end in a vowel, if we write according to the Kanarese. But
this would not be the case, if we had an Alphabet in which we
could have words ending in a pure consonant ; because this
kind of 6 is so small in many words that it is not different
from the half vowel which is naturally pronounced at the
end of a word ending in a consonant, in all languages, which
consequently can be omitted ; and as I write in the Roman
Alphabet, which has no 6 , hence I do not write itit.. Yet it is
true that in some words this 6 is somewhat more distinct ; in
those cases I write, though not always, ą. If some consonant
is added, to such a word, e. g. ts, then this ą, written or
understood, appears and seems to be changed almost into an
à; e.g. " āpuņăts " from " āpun" or more exactly " āpuņa ” . Yet
in this point we must make a very fine distinction . I say that
if some consonant is added, the 6 is very often changed into å,
or at least, 6 is pronounced much more distinctly; sometimes
it becomes not å but ŭ or perhaps i. Of the change of 6 into
i I do not now recollect any example ; but this is a fact that,
e.g. " livr = book ”, which is pronounced with a kind of half
vowel at the end , becomes " livrůtz ”, and “ gurt” also pronounc
ed with 66 becomes “ gurtůtz” by adding tz, and so in some
other cases. When is the final 6 changed into å by the addi
tion of a consonant, and when into u or perhaps i ? I have
 189

no general rule ; yet it seems that those Nouns which are

written by me with a final ų , more often change 6 (or u) into
ŭ, and those written by me with a, change it more often into å.
Whether this be quite certain or not, the fact is that the Kana
rese 6 is pronounced in Konkani words not always in the same
way ; 6. g. more commonly 6 of øvåst”, is pronounced diffe
rently from the 6 of " īt = fertility ”; the 6 of the first is nearly
u; the other is scarcely heard , or approaches a.
The change or resolution of 6 sometimes into a, sometimes
into u, was one of the reasons why I put down in the Alpha
bet two signs for the Kanarese 6 ; because although I was
not well aware of this change, yet I had some suspicion , and 2

I was well aware of the two different sounds of this 6 if used

in Konkani. Yet I acknowledge that we could express these
two Konkani sounds ą and u only by one letter, as in the
Italian words oro and molto the o has two different sounds,
viz. Ò, ó ; moreover the difference between and น sometimes
cannot be exactly perceived.
Somebody might write my u by u ; this perhaps could be
done ; but then the simple rule about accent (P. I. Ch. II.)
should be changed and another, if there be any , more compli
cated should be laid down ; because if you write " våstu " , then
the accent is upon the penultimate, and you should establish
a rule to know which words have the accent upon the pen
ultimate .

A, u and 'u of the Nominative of some Nouns disappear in

the Plural (see p. 24), ą and u mostly also in the Singular ;
e.g. " dūd- ų, dūd -an = milk , by milk ” .
-

Finally ụ in the Nouns of the 5th Declension is changed

into u in the Plural. (See p. 37 , note .)
To this point we may reduce also the omission of some
vowels (see page 13.) , and the change of ă into á (see p. 175) .
The cerebral letters d, dh, t, th, if a vowel follows, are
pronounced cerebral, yet keeping the nature of d and t; but
if another dental letter follows, they seem to sound like r, not
 190

fully but nearly. Although d , dh etc. be before dental letters ,

or be final, some pronounce them almost r; and I hear that in
Goa usually this d is pronounced like r.
Finally the rule of assimilation seems to hold good, i.e.
that for the sake of euphony , if a letter comes together with
another of a different kind with which it does not perfectly
agree, the first letter changes the following letter into another
cognate letter with which it can better agree. But what is
this other letter ? We might say that cerebral agrees with
cerebral, palatal with palatal etc. Consequently if two letters
of different kind do not agree, the above principle is applied.
I say if they do not agree, because in some cases different
letters agree very well ; practice is required ; e. g. 1 which is
the initial letter of the termination of some tenses, becomes
ļ, if preceded by !
Here we may remark also, that the aspirated letters com
monly cannot be used, if another consonant, at least of the
>

same kind, follows; the reason is, because the aspiration sup
poses a kind of half a vowel after the aspirated letter; else
it is not possible to pronounce it, but such half vowel is not
there, if an aspirated letter is followed by another aspirated ,
at least of the same kind.
About double letters remark that in some cases it is alto
gether required to pronounce them ; and then I write them ;
in some cases it is doubtful; then I omit them , because this
point requires a long practice. I omit chiefly the double con
sonant when it would cause some obscurity ; e.g. “ dīs = day"
can be written, nay must be written , according to the Latin,
with one s; but if you write in the oblique cases “ dissā " etc.
what reason can you give of one s added ? Especially as people
seem to pronounce one s and according to the Alphabet laid
down in Part I., it renders also one s satisfactory enough.
Many other things should be said about this point, which for
the present must be omitted.
 191

CHAPTER IX. ON CERTAIN LETTERS

At the end of this Part III. , for the sake of convenience,
let us make some remarks which properly do not belong to
this part. I said in Part I. that I omit some signs which
exactness would require. I say a few things here about them.
First, I think that in Konkani there are three or four a, or
better, that a has at least three sounds ; the first is ä, pro
nounced approximately as u in the English but, or as a in the
Italian word farò, passing over a very quickly and approaching
somewhat to ó. The second is á which is about equal to aa.
The third is a (see Part I. Alphabet) which is pronounced as a
common Latin a, not too long nor too short. Examples : " kād"
is nearly “ kaad ”, “ mar ” is as in Latin the a of aro ; “ kår" is
like the a substituted in some dialects, to the e of " legno
(lågn)”. Moreover I remember to have found some words in
which ä is pronounced slowly, almost åă; consequently if we
had to express the sounds with as many signs, we should say
that there are two ä and two á, i.e. one å pronounced quick
ly, one ă pronounced slowly, one á pronounced not very slow
ly, one á pronounced very slowly ; å might be called closed ag
á might be called open a , just as I said of ó and ò which can
be moreover o and 7. Yet for the sake of simplicity, let us
keep only two a (ä, ā) as in Kanarese, Mahrātti and Sanskrit;
moreover a common à for the common cases ; nevertheless
haec meminisse juvabit.
I have put only one š, yet there are some words which
have a cerebral še.g. “ šēļ = cold " ; this š corresponds to the
Kanarese a , whereas the simple š corresponds to g . We could
express such a sound by š, as we use the dot underneath also
for the other cerebral letters ; so we simplify these things.
Max Müller expresses it with sh ; in the Tuļu Grammar and
in the Polyglot Vocabulary printed at the Basel Mission
Press, I find š; in the Mahrātti Grammar sh, in the Kanarese
 192

Grammar by Hodson sh, as he uses sh instead of š. Yet I must

acknowledge that the cerebral sound of this š is somewhat
different from the cerebral sound of the other cerebral letters.
I remember moreover to have heard some words with a
kind of very guttural sound expressed by the Kanarese 20 ,
which sound can be explained only orally ; it is pronounced al
most entirely with the throat. It is expressed by Max Müller
in his “ Sanskrit Grammar " , by the Author of the “ Student's
9

Manual of the Mahrātti Grammar ”, by the Author of the " Tuļu

,

Grammar” and by the Author of the Polyglot Vocabulary "

printed at the Basel Mission Press in Mangalore, by n ; in the
Kanarese Grammar by gn; yet I must acknowledge that I
have heard some words pronounced so guttural that their i
seems to be remarkably different from å of " sing" which is
the example given in the Mahrātti Grammar for this ń. (See
p. 18, n. 2.)
Finally another sound is go and as, represented in the
above mentioned books by ri, ří (but in the Polyglot Voca
bulary ?, 7, in the Tuļu Grammar by și, rī ); this sound is
approximately represented by rỉ and rī, or better by r with a
kind of vowel , which seems to be nearly 6 or half vowel (see
p. 20 , n. 2.)
What I write gn (not g -n) is in Kanarese represented by
3, and in the above quoted Vocabulary by ń, in the Grammar
of Max Müller and in the Mahrātti Grammar by ñ ; as for
me, I prefer gn, because the Latin gn is pronounced nearly in
the same way ; because I was compelled to choose ñ as the sign
of the nasal n, and because it is, perhaps far easier to distinguish
>

so many different n,, if we write gn . (See p. 5.) What I write

g-n would be expressed in Kanarese by joining the two conso
nants 8 and or ea . Also by writing jn we would get almost
the same sound , as the Konkani j is thinner than the English j .
>

The reader might have observed that very seldom or never

are i, o , ŭ used , although put in the · Alphabet. The reason
is, because, as I said in Part I. , I use these signs only when there
 193

is any necessity ; but for å very often there is a necessity,

not so for i, o , ú.
Those who know Kanarese and Mahrātti might have
remarked that for the Kanarese 25 and Mahrātti 5, I put
two letters (j, z) ; the reason is because this letter has two
sounds in Konkani ; and as I do not know a rule to distin
guish the two sounds, so I write two letters. The same must
be said of 2, Mahrātti 7, for which I put č, tě, ts, tz ; ts
and tz may be considered as equal ; č is not so sharp as tč,
yet sometimes it does not differ much from tč ; moreover
euphony does not allow us to write to in all cases in which
to should be written ; hence you find sometimes č instead of
tč; but ts or tz differ somewhat more from tč and still more
from s. The same must be said of ts, i.e. if euphony requires
us to write s instead of ts contrary to the above rules, I write
henceforth s not ts. Perhaps if we write Konkani with
Kanarese letters , we could put some sign, e.g. a dot
above and to distinguish these sounds ; as we could put
the Sanskrit and Mahrātti “ virāma” to express the absence
of any vowel or half- vowel at the end of a word, the “ virāma” is
marked by an oblique line placed at the foot of a consonant ( * ).
About f. Properly speaking, no f should occur in Konkani,
but only aspirated p (ph) , and really in the villages this f
does not usually occur ; e.g. they say “ phot”, “ phālea ” , not
6
" fot" " fālea ” ; yet in the town this f is used, so let it pass.
About v. This letter is very often indistinct , so that it is
not easily perceived whether it is u or v. One of the reasons
may be, because the Konkani words beginning with o take
a kind of v or u before them , as the words beginning with
។

e take y. We have a proof of this in the way in which some

Natives pronounce Latin : some say , e.g. yeleison , yergo instead
of eleison and ergo, nay some seem to add this y even in the
middle ; e.g. meyam instead of meam ; and some seem to say
vordo or uordo instead of ordo. This depends , I think, on the
Kanarese pronunciation.
25
 194

About aspirated letters. Besides the aspirated letters given

in the Alphabet some others may occur ; e.g. m of “ mèļo ” is
pronounced somewhat aspirated. What to do in such cases ?
If we write Konkani with Roman characters , the easiest and
most simple plan is to write h after that letter, just as with
the other aspirated letters ; if we write with Kanarese cha
racters, we can use the Kanarese letter so joined to the letter
which is to be pronounced aspirated . This must be under
stood if the aspiration belongs to the consonant, i.e. if the as
piration must sound between the consonant and the following
vowel ; if the aspiration must sound after the vowel of the
consonant, then in Roman characters we may use h as above,
in Kanarese characters we should use the medial % ; here we
could not use the above jo, because so is a consonart, whereas
that aspiration after a vowel is a vocalized h. We have a
proof of this in the union of all vowels with so , so as to be
come ha, hi, hu, he, hei, ho, hou, which union does not take
place with %. So, e.g. " dūkų = pain , sorrow ”, exactly should
be written dukhụ " .
There are some Nouns which end in a kind of half-vowel,
e.g. “ jin = life”; this half vowel seems to be changed into i
in the stem , “ jinie” ; consequently this would be an example of
a new letter different from a and y, namely it would be į ; yet
it is better and more simple to explain this change by saying
that in some Nouns the stem is formed from the Nominative
by adding not only one vowel as usually , but two vowels (see
p. 16, n. 8) . The stem, however, is not always formed from
the Nominative (see p. 30, n. 3) .
Here let us remark that by writing y instead of i, e.g.
ya instead of ea or ia, we would simplify very much the rules
about accentuation of diphthongs. I said (page 7) that many
diphthongs have the accent upon the second vowel, many upon
the first, or, shorter , no suitable rule has been given. By
>

writing y instead of i, whenever it is possible, many apparent

diphthongs would disappear ; consequently their accent would
 195

become known at once. The final diphthongs which usually

have the accent upon the first vowel are chiefly au or ao, ou, eu,
ei, ou or oi. Ai commonly has the accent upon a, if this is
long ; e.g. " khāiñ = something" ; upon the 2nd vowel , if a is
short ; e.g. " khăiñ =where ", " kăiñ = when " . On the contrary
=

eo, ie, ui, io, ea, ia etc. which in Kanarese would not be diph
thongs, have the accent upon the last vowel. The termina
tions aie, ua, ie and the like which occur in some Declensions,
have the accent upon the last vowel; i.e. the termination has
the accent .
Finally we must pay attention not to confound å with o ;
in many words they seem to be very similar ; yet exactness
does not allow us to change these two similar sounds. In
pronouncing å the mouth is more opened and the voice deeper
than in pronouncing ó. The difference between ó and å ap
pears especially when ä has the accent ; in other cases we
would not lose much exactness by pronouncing ó instead of a.
Europeans must pay attention not to pronounce this å, espe
cially accented å, like the German ö or French eu ; this pro
nunciation is entirely wrong .
About this å remark further that in the same word it may
become á, modifying thereby the meaning ; e.g. " isăr or vi
săr = forgetfulness”, " isār or visār = forget”; “ kātăr = cut”,
" kātār = be cut” (see p. 175) ; the same may happen with other
vowels .
These things may be settled in future times, as in this
first attempt many niceties were to be omitted. If we write
Konkani with Kanarese or Mahrātti letters, many things will
be settled by themselves, i. e. only by writing in a more
suitable Alphabet, especially if we prefer the Mahrātti or
Sanskrit; because with Kanarese something would remain
still doubtful, e.g. the final 6 which cannot be omitted in Kana
rese, if no vowel is there, and which must be often omitted in
Konkani, unless we introduce some new signs to modify the
Kanarese letters and make them suitable to Konkani.
25 *
 PART IV. SYNTAX

CHAPTER 1. AGREEMENT OR CONCORD

For the reader, for whom I write, many particular rules
are not required , for they are the same as in our languages.
Between the different parts of speech there must be concord
in Gender, Number and Case.
This rule contains a great many particular cases. But
the following restrictions are to be made :
1. If a word is to agree with many others of different
Genders , that word is put in the Neuter Gender ; yet sometimes
it might agree with the nearest one, at least in Gender, and
often also in Number. So if an Adjective has reference to
men and women , it is put in the Neuter Gender. Nay, this
happens not only with Adjectives, but sometimes also with
Substantives; e.g. " månis = man
man ” . If it is used for a man
and a woman , as in the example : “ the first men were Adam
and Eve” , “ monis ” becomes Neuter and is declined according
to the Neuter of the 2nd Declension ; whereas absolutely it is
Masculine and follows the Masculine form of the 2nd Declen
sion ; so also “ gărtso = domestic" etc. The same rule holds for
the Verbs ; e.g. " tiñ geliñ = they went”, speaking of a man and
of a woman .
2. · The Participle and some tenses of Transitive Verbs have
quite a peculiar concord, which will be explained later on.
For the present read page 118 , n. 6, and consider that if a
Verb has no subject or the subject is a sentence, the Neuter
Gender of the Verb is used,
3. It has been mentioned already that speaking (a) to or
(6) about a respectable person, chiefly Priests, the Plural is
 197

used, viz. the Verb is put in the Plural , in the 2nd Person in
the (a) case, in the 3rd in the (6) case ; in the Masculine
Gender, if the person is a man ; in the Neuter, if a woman.
Yet this rule is not always observed, so that the rule ex
presses rather what is allowed to do (to use the Plural) than
what is commanded to do. Especially the part of the rule
about women is not certain ; doubtless I heard some ex
amples according to the above rule ; for this reason I have put
the observation 4th ( page 72); yet I heard also many examples
contrary to it. Consequently the part of the rule to use the
Plural when we speak to a woman of high rank, is certain ;
the part of the rule to use the Plural when we speak about
a respectable woman and even in the Neuter Gender, is un
certain ; and, omnibus consideratis, it seems safer to use the
Singular. Not only the Verb, but also the Adjective and
the Pronoun which have reference to a respectable person
seem to be put in the Plural
4. The Nouns of the 1st Declension ending in a, not used
in the Plural , require the Verb in the Plural, if the meaning
is Plural (at least I have found some examples according to
this rule ; I cannot ascertain whether this is the common
case)." But the Adjective in such a case may remain in the
Singular ; e. g. “ souñsārāči čintna yetāt”.
5. A Noun in apposition agrees with its name; e. g. " the
town of Mangalore = kodyāl šār ” . Here read the note page
39 , to which we may add that if a Substantive (especially or
only Proper Noun) is followed by a title or by a similar word,
the first Substantive either is not declined or put only in the
Original ; e.g. “ Dāvid -rāyān = by king David” . (See also
page 16, n. 9. )

1) I heard sometimes Feminine Nouns of the 1st Declension having the

Verb in the Neuter Plural, e.g. “ monšāniñ vāit čintna čintleānt = bad
thoughts have been thought by men " . I cannot tell whether it was a mistake
or not .
 198

6. If an Adjective of three terminations is a predicate,

as in the example " God makes us good ”, or if an Adjective
takes the place of the Genitive in the Compound Verbs , it is
left in the Nominative, Singular or Plural, according to the
Number of its Substantive ; e.g. “ Deu amkāñ pātkāntle soạeitā =
God delivers us from sins " ; " Deu amkāñ bore kărtā = God
mōg kår = love thy neighbour"..
makes us good ” ; "“ peleāso mög
The same happens sometimes with Substantives , viz. if they
are used as predicate or as indirect object of a Transitive
Verb, they are placed in the Nominative : “ tūñ tukā kon
moạtai = thou whom doest say ?” Moreover, if an Adjective
in Nominative Case, corresponding to the Genitive (see Part II.
Chap. II. Art. 2) , has another Adjective before itself, this preced
ing Adjective is put in the oblique case Masculine or Femi
nine or Neuter, Singular or Plural , according to the Gender
and Number which the Genitive converted into Adjective had
before being changed into an Adjective; l.g boreañ monšānči
sóvói = the custom of good men '; yēka borea monšāči sóvói =
the custom of a good man ; " " yēka tarāči nesson = dress of
one kind ” . The same rule is observed , if two Genitives
are changed into Adjectives; the subordinate Genitive is not
put in the Nominative ; 4.g. "the name of this boy's father =
yea burgāčeā bāpāčeñ nāuñ ” . This rule seems to hold good
for all kinds of declinable Adjectives.
7. The Adjectives or Pronouns " kăsso, tăsso etc, must
also agree with their Substantive ; although in English we
have an Adverb, e.g. " how do you do = kăsso assāi?” But
what is this Substantive with which they must agree ? Some
times it is difficult to know it . This rule may make easier
this point ; translate the English sentence into Latin using
qualis for " how " and see which word is qualified by this qualis;
that is the word with which “ kåsso” must agree ; e.g. “ how
did you succeed in that affair ? = tukā teñ kām kăsseñ zāleñ ,
“" How did God create the
lit. what did that affair turn out ?" 66

world ? = Devān kåsso souñsār rătzlo ?"

 199

8. The Adjectives in -ntlo (see p. 84) agree regularly with

their Substantive, if they are used as attribute ; e. g . “ the men
of the world = sauñsārāntle monis"” ; " by the men of the
world = sauñsārāntleañ monšāniñ ” ; but if they are used in
some other way, it does not appear with which word they
should agree ; then they are put in the Instrumental of the
Singular ; e.g. " who among you has ever suffered such a pain
as our Lord Jesus Christ ? = tumčer bitărleān kõņeñ Somia
Jezu Kristā bărits tassălo kašt soslā ?" The same may happen
with other Adjectives, chiefly with Adjectives derived from
Postpositions or Adverbs. Generally speaking it seems that
such .Adjectives, if their agreement is not evident , are put in
the Instrumental Singular ; e. g. “mukhāveleān votz = go
before".; yet here too, cases occur in which these Adjectives
agree with a Noun with which, it seems, they should not
agree ; e.g. “ God separated the waters above the sky from
the waters under the sky = Dēvān molabā voir assåliñ udkan
moļabā khāl assåliñ udkāntliñ vingăd keleānt” . Here we
could use also the Instrumental.
9. If an Adjective is used as a Predicate in a Participial
sentence contracted from a Relative sentence in which it was
used as a Predicate in the Nominative or Accusative , this case
is kept also in the contracted sentence although, perhaps the
Noun with which it should agree be not in the Nominative;
e . g. “ honour Our Lord , exposed on the Altar = Altārir ukto
kårn dovorleleā Somiāk mān diā”. We might perhaps gene
ralize the rule by saying that in such sentences the Ad
jective is left in the case in which it was in the full sentence .
I explain by two examples, in order to be shorter and clearer what I mean
to say by Predicate and Attribute . “ God is good ; God makes us happy in heaven"
etc.; here the Adjective is Predicate ; " the good God ” “ the happy man " ; here
the Adjective is Attribute.

10 . Sometimes the Adjective agrees with its Noun not

grammatically , but according to the meaning ; e. g. " inno
>

vator” can be translated by “ nove măriādegār ”; here we should

 200

say grammatically “novo măriādegār ”; but this Noun “ mări

ādegār” , derived from “ mariād = habit, custom ” , means a man
9

making customs ; in order to get the meaning of “ innovator ”,

we must add " of new things” ; hence, omitting thing, we get
“ nove ” in the oblique case ; exactly we should say “ novean " .
In the same we may explain po -dispodte vordi = journalist”.
If we say “ dispodto vordi” , the meaning would be “ daily man
of news” , whereas the meaning requires “ man of daily news ” .
Not all speak so ; yet this mode seems to be more correct and
used by more learned men .
11. The Adverbs formed with an Adverbial Declinable Ad
jective joined to the Gerund in -un (see p. 176) , either may
be declined and follow the general rule of concord (as far
as regards the Adjective united with the Gerund) , or may be
not declined , ad libitum ; e. g. "behave yourself well = boro
kårn tsål, or boreñ kărn tsål” .
The Adverbs in -eñ (Neuter of the Adjective) may be
declined, or not declined ad libitum ; e. g. " to boro vātstā, or
to boreñ vātstā = he reads well” .
12. If the subject of the sentence is 3rd Person Plural of
Neuter Gender, the Verb may be put in the Singular ; e.g.
“ tāņeñ apliñ pātkañ sānglañ = he has confessed his sins" . Nay,
sometimes the Singular of the Verb is used, although the
subject ( real , though perhaps not grammatical subject) is
Masculine ; e.g. " āuveñ poise kaneilāñ = I have taken money ” .
Very probably this second manner is a mistake : the first
manner is not certain .
13. We must remark that in Konkani some words are
considered as connected which in Latin and English would not
agree (see below about Adjectives); consequently those words
must follow the rule of concord ; e. g . " dusreāntso rāg = anger
of others” ; whereas we would say “ anger against others ” .
2

This point cannot be taught by rules : practice is required.

Further some words may have a double relation, i, e. to two
>

or more words of different Genders etc.; then often it is

 201

allowed to choose among those words as terms of agreement,

that which we like whether it be the nearest one or not. So
also the Absolute Infinitive in some cases may agree either
with the word governing it or with its object; e. g. " ničeu
dosmānkai dorči saitānātso ”; or some say also : “ ničeu dos
mānkai dortso saitānātso " . The first expression is better.
14. Finally we must pay attention to those Adjectives
which correspond to the Latin indeclinable quantum, minus,
and the like, as " uņo, titlo, kedo, tedo"; but in Konkani are de
clinable, and if joined to another Adjective, they agree with
it ; e.g. " kedi voờli = how big ? ” (Feminine) , in Latin quam
magna , “ uņi ajapāči = less admirable"; " tedo boro = so good "
etc.

Many other things should be said about this point ; but,

in order not to overwhelm the mind and not to make this
chapter too difficult, I will speak of them in other places,
as they occur .
Exercises

Bāpai, āuoi, boiņi, bāu, såkåt bāir-geleānt. Kòn gặra

raunk -nāñ . Mozo mām ani moji māvoln bhou boriñ : tīñ
makā sărginči vāt sikoitāt. Poiliñ monšañ Ādāuñ ani Yēv,
tīñ sămestañ monšāñtso årămb 1) (origin ). Sāibānu, moja gårā
yeun, takā bessãoñ diā. Pādri khăiñ " geleāt ? Takā āpoun ād
>

(call him ). Sāibiņ Agatha durbăļeānk tovo! tovo! ( from time

to time) ismāl ditā ?). Sāibiņ Rejin gårā āiligī ? Yedo! pă
riănt yeunknāñ, atāñ yeteli. Amiñ răsārkårčea veļār, să
bār pāuți săuðsārāči čintnā yetāt ; amiñ teo bāir-gālizāi.
Ritan păţăn Kadra påtnā prås vodleñ. Thăiñ kitlo lók astit ?
Āuñ sărkeñ neņāſ : moje ālõčeni părmāņe tsåd-uņeñ ponās
hazār lók assāt (may .be ). Āuoi bāpānu, tumčea burgeānk
1) In Kanarese they say e do viz. " ārămbha" , yet the Konkani Christians
seem to pronounce wărămb" ; this remark holds good for some other words.
2) « Agatha” in Konkani should be “ Agda” ; but as “ sāibiņ ” is not commonly
used for Native ladies, it is better to keep the Latin word Agatha.
26
 202

bore kårā ; kiteāk moleār tumiñ tanče višiānt lek dīzāi. Bur
gea, boro tzăl ani āuoi bāpāk mān di; yea vorviñ tukā kurpā
ani suk melteleñ. Yea gărādea dhåniātso išť kāl melo : teā
pasun dhåni āz gårā nāñ ; to mornāk gelo.

CHAPTER II. USE OF EACH PART OF SPEECH

Art. I. Nouns

A, General Observations
The Nouns, except the names of common things, are rather
seldom used in Konkani, particularly Abstract Nouns. Though
there are some Abstract Nouns, and Verbal Nouns also, yet,
except in a few cases, it is better to avoid those Nouns and
change the sentence so as to get a finite Mood of the Verb .
I say “ finite Mood ", because Verbal Nouns are the same as
the Infinitive of the Verb in the Neuter Gender. The Tense of
finite Mood, which may be substituted, is, very often, the
Conditional in -leār (see Conjugation ); e. g. " learning is useful" :
though we might say : " sikčeñ upkārāk podřā ”, yet it is
better to say : " sikleār = if you learn " . The Conditional is,
we may say, the favourite Tense in Konkani ; for, it is like
a panacea to supply the pretended poverty of this language.
For this reason too, I do not put down in the Dictionary all
Verbal Nouns. What I say must be understood of the common
and vulgar language, not of the high and cultivated language
or rather of the language to be cultivated ; because there
is no cultivated language.
After these general considerations let us say something
in particular about the more difficult Nouns.
The fundamental difficulty regarding the use of the Nouns,
may be this, viz . many Nouns do not exist in Konkani. How to
express, e.g. hypostasis, hyphen, hydrostatics, hypothesis,
abstraction ?
 203

To this difficulty I answer : look in the Dictionary and

you will find the translation, without circumlocution, of the
above and other similar words, although such words cannot
be popular, as they are not popular even in our cultivated
languages.
The second difficulty is about the use of Abstract Nouns.
We have already seen (Part III. Chapter V.) that Abstract
Nouns are formed chiefly by the terminations -pon and -kai or
-ai. This kind of Abstract Nouns is usually rightly employed,
and the greatest part of them are of this kind ; yet there are
also some primitive Abstract Nouns ; e. g. " kårt = improve
ment, especially material” ; “ guņ = improvement, especially
immaterial.9”
The third difficulty is about Verbal Nouns corresponding
to the Latin Nouns ending in -ctio or in a similar termina
tion. The easiest way of getting rid of this difficulty would
be to use the Infinitive of the Verb which is at the same time
a Verbal Noun ; yet this is not elegant and according to the
nature of Konkani. Another way would be to change the
Verbal Noun into a Verb ; and though this is not against
the nature of Konkani, it is too low, at least often. Yet
sometimes this way may be well employed. The third and
best way is to use the termination given in Part III.
Chapter V. The more common termination is -neñ; yet the
termination -ap is not so rare, the other terminations given
1.c. are rather rare, at least for real Verbal Nouns.
The fourth difficulty is found in the Nouns which end in
-ility or in a similar termination. The way of translating
these Nouns is to add " -sărkeñ" (v. I. c.) . This “ sărken "
means equality, hence, e.g. " vānti-sărkeñ ” means " a thing
which is equal to parts or a thing which in potentia is equal
to its parts”. This is the only or, at least, the chief termi
nation, as far as I remember, by which we can form this
kind of Nouns. This mode although very philosophical , more
perhaps than the Latin, English, German, French , Italian
26 *
 204 -

modes , is not popular. The negative form of this kind of

Nouns is somewhat difficult; I speak of it here below.
The fifth, quite a peculiar difficulty, is about some Nega
tive Nouns. You find many of these Nouns in the Dictionary
under In-. First remark that common people often change the
sentence into the Negative, i.e. instead of making the Noun
Negative they make the Verb Negative ; e.g. instead of saying
“ ămorăņ = immortality ' , they say " åtmo morånāñ " . This
popular mode may be employed with advantage in some
cases in which the Negative Noun would not sound well ; yet
generally speaking the best mode is to use the Negative form
of the Noun , as has been explained in Part III. Chapt. IV.
Among those terminations, the most common is 6 -nán ” prefixed
to the Noun. The termination -āñ, or sometimes only å, occurs
also. But the other terminations are not frequent. Besides
.

the terminations given l.c, there are some others, such as “ be- " ;
e.g. " ābru = character ", "beābru = want of character "; " ād- =
against” , e. g. " āločen = judgment" , "ādāločen = a judgment
" .
against ... "; "čintna = thought” , “ āļčintna = against thought
(distraction )”; “ -nāstanāñ = lit. not being ”, e.g. "kāran
nāstanāñ= no cause (unreasonably) ”; as the reader sees, some of
these modes are not simply negative, but rather contrary.
Compare this with the Propositiones contradictoriae and
contrariae of the philosophers.
The Nouns in -särken may be made Negative in many forms;
the first is to prefix -nāñ, e.g. “ nāñ -vāņti-sărkeñ ”. The second
is to insert -näñ in the middle before « sårkeñ ”; e. g. “ sika
.

sărkeñ = docility "; " sikanāñ-sărkeñ” or “ nāñ-sikā-sărkeñ = in

docility ": Not only the Nouns in “ -sărkeñ” but also some
other words may be made negative in many ways, as some
Nouns are derived from the primitive form in many ways.
In Konkani we must remark the use of Nouns compounded
with two or more Nouns , one of which is accompanied by some
Postpositions, or at least not put in the Original Case, as
it should be, according to the general rule ; e.g. " angār -podneñ
 205 -

= inroad, assault ” . The reason is, because the Verbal

sentence is “ angār pod = lit. fall on body” ; hence the Noun is
>

used keeping the original form ; else the meaning would not
be the same .
In Latin and in some other languages different words
must be used for the fruit and for the tree bearing the fruit;
so malum, malus, pirum , pirus In Konkani usually the same
word may express both fruit and tree, e. g. " limbo, nāring " ,
although we may add the word " rūk = tree” to express more
distinctly the tree, e.g. " limbeātso rük ”, if from the context
the meaning is not clear. Yet there are some Nouns which
are used only for fruits, and some only for trees ; e. g. “ nārl =
cocoanut ”, “mād= cocoanut-tree (palm-tree )”; “ ke!eñ = plant
ain ; "kelambo = plantain -tree" etc.

B. Cases .

§ 1. Nominative.
Omitting things well known to those who have some
knowledge of Grammar , as I always suppose those to be
for whom I write, I make these few remarks about the Nomi
native .
1. The Nominative is used when a Noun is used as
an explanation of another word ; e. g. " he has been appointed
Governor or as Governor = takā ădhipăti nemsilā ” ; “Jacob
took Rebecca as his wife = Jākobān Rebekāk āpli åstri mon
=

kāņeileā ”. In these examples the first direct object is put in the

Accusative, the 2nd object, indirect and explanatory, is put
in the Nominative with " mon ”, which " mon " will be explained
later on .
2. The Nominative is used, instead of the Accusative
a) with inanimate objects (see pp. 12. 19); b) sometimes also
with animate objects, chiefly if they are Proper Nouns. This
second case is rather an exception than a rule, whereas the
first is ordinary. “ Deu = God ” is often put in the Nominative,
 206

when it should be put in the Accusative ; e.g. “ Deu kāņei

tāñ = I receive God (H. Communion ) ”.
3. In Verbs having in some Tenses passive meaning, the
word which in Latin would be put in Passive Verbs) in the
Nominitive, is put sometimes in the Accusative, as I explain
later on .
Exercise

Rāņien N. Sāibāk mēlnītidār nemsilā. Somia Jezu Kristān

Sant Pedruk Apostolānčeñ mostăk kårn dovorlā . Burgeānu,
vāit burgeānk išţ vintzun kādnakāt ; kiteāk moļeār tanče
vorviñ tumiñ pāļ zāšāt. Deu āple kurpen amkāñ aple išt
kårtā ani sărginče dāiji. Frask yea dākțea burgeāk aplo
posko pūt kårtā. Såmestañ monšānk tuzo sezāri mon čint
( consider all men as your neighbour ), ani sămestānk kumok
di ; tukā sărgār tzăd inām meļteleñ.
$ 2. Dative
About this Case as also about other Cases there may be different opinions ;
for somebody might perhaps say that what I call Nominative is not Nomi
native, but Accusative, as in Latin bellum ; or again that in the example :
“ bāpāk āpoi = call the father”, the Dative “ bāpāk” is used instead of the Ac
cusative ; but all these are questions de verbis.
Now I see that the Author of the Mahrātti Grammar really calls Dative
what I call Accusative. I have said that the Accusative is equal to the Nomi
native in inanimate objects, equal to the Dative in animate objects. He says
on the contrary that animate objects are put in the Dative. The final conclu
sion is the same in both ways ; yet I prefer the first manner ; because thereby
the things seem to be more simple, and because the first manner seems to be
more satisfactory to the mind ; at all events in dubiis libertas.

The Dative is used 1 ) to show purpose or aim ; e.g. " kiteāk

āiloi? = to what (why) did you come ?” “ javaņāk āiloñ = I came
for dinner ”" . The second form of the Infinitive in -unčeāk
is just this Dative, formed from the Nominative -untso; e.g.
oto boreuñčeāk āilo = he came to write ” . Instead of it we
might use also the Original with “ pasun" ; e. g. " fārikpoņāk,
or fārikpoņa pasun = for reparation”,
 207

2. It is used with many Verbs, with which the use of the

Dative is quite natural ; yet in our languages we have a
different construction. So, as there is no word meaning exactly
“ have” in Konkani, the Dative is used as in Latin mihi liber
est = makā yēk pustak assā ” . About this Dative it must be
observed that, if the thing possessed, is such a thing of which
instead of " I have .... ” we could not say : apud me est, then
the Dative is used ; if we could say apud me est, then very
often the Original with skåde or lagið " is used. Hence we
can say : " makā yēk går assā = mihi est domus" ; on the
contrary “moje kåde yēk pustak assā = apud me (mini) est
liber ", or "moje lagiñ yēk pustak assā ” .
3. In some Konkani phrases ; e. g. “ dotorn makā yetā =
I know the Catechism, lit. to me the Catechism comes" ; " makā
ugdās yēnāñ = I cannot remember, lit. remembrance does
not come to me" etc.
4. To show motion to a place, the Dative may be used,
though the 1st Locative is also used ; e. g. “Igărjek vetāñ = I go
to the Church " or "Igărjent vetāñ ” . In the meaning there may
be a little difference between Dative and Locative. Some
Proper Names are used without any change, to show motion ;
e. g. " āuñ Jeppu vetāñ " = I go to Jeppoo (see above Declension
of Proper Nouns.)
5. To show advantage or disadvantage two Datives are
used, as in Latin " hoc tibi commodo est = yeñ tukā upkārāk
poạtā, lit, it falls to thee to benefit ” .
6. To show for whom a thing is done, and the like, the
Dative is used ; e.g. “ this has been done for me = yeñ makā
zāleñ ”, etc. This case might be reduced to the preceding.
9

7. To show time in answering the question : " how many

times a day, a week, a year ? ” the words day, week etc. are
put in the Dative; e... " voršāk yēk pāuți pun Bombai
vetāñ = at least once a year I go to Bombay”; in these cases
it might be used also in the Original with “ modeñ = in the
middle, during "; but this is not so exact.
 208

8. To say : " I give something to .." the Dative may be

used ; yet very often the Original with skådé or lagiñ ”
is used just as I said in the second case.
9. The Dative seems to be used also with the Verb “ mon
say ” , if it has the meaning of " call" , namely “ call by name” .
The thing which is called by name is put in the Dative, the
name itself in the Accusative ; e.g. "tumiñ yea fatrāk kiteñ
mhoạtāt ? = how do you call this stone ?” and the same in
similar sentences .

10. Price is frequently expressed by the Dative, pro

vided the Verb allows it ; e. g. “ vo sāmān kitleañ Rupoiānk
kāņgelai = for how many Rupees did you take (or buy) this
article ?
?" But if you use "podtā = falls", or " lāgtā = is
>
=

applied ”, you must use not the Dative, but the Nominative,
because the meaning of the Verb does not allow the use of the
Dative. So, “ takā dhā Rupoi lāglerit cost ten Rupees" , or " takā
dhā Rupoi podle”. With these two last Verbs, the thing itself
should be put in the Dative ; for, translating literally, in our
languages too, the Dative of the thing and the Nominative of
the price would be used, “ to it ten Rupees fell or have been
applied".
11. The Verbs meaning " to speak, to say" and the
like, may be used with the Dative of the person to whom
we speak ; yet very often the Original is also used with “ lagið "
or " kåde” ; e.g. " āuñ tumče lāgin uleitāñ = I speak to you ” ,
“ mestri burgeāñ kăde vitzārtā = the master questions the boys”.
12. Sometimes Dative is used to show place as in the
sentence : “ tīn disāče vāțek gelo = lit. he went to a way of
three days, he walked three days”.
13. Finally, we may perhaps call Dative that which
(p. 19) has been called Accusative, b.g. " rukāk mār = beat to
S

the tree ”, and similar examples ; yet this may be explained

also in some other way. (See ibid .)
 209

Exercise
Devān amkāñ kiteāk råtzleāt ? Takā vo?kunčeāk (or vol
kunk) ani meleā uprānt sărginčeñ suk bogunčeāk (or bogunk ).
Somia Jezu Kristāčea kålzāk åkmān kelleā pasun fãrikpon
diunčeāk amiñ kiteñ kărizāi ? Amiñ disā modeñ săbār pāuți
tačentz káliz ani tačea kålzāče seguņ takā bețăizāi , sărvụ
văstu thăiñ tače kušie părmāņe tzălăzāi ani amčeñ kirkoļi
kaliz takā dīzāi : tovo! amkāñ tačeñ āširvād meļteleñ ani bhou
vegiñ amiñ seguņā thăiñ ( in virtue) sompūrņ zateleāuñ ;
mukhiăzāun tači tzădăjăpāči sălgi meļteli ( familiaritas
stupenda nimis invenietur). Kålikuțāk votzunk kitliñ uorañ
lagtit ? Paiväten tzülleär, săbär dĩs zãi ; &gbotin sumr đón
dis zāi. Ani Bombăi votzunk kitleñ zāi ? Sumār Čār dis.
Kõņāk yēô văstur kelõiñ ? Makātz. Pātak átmeāk ani kudik
lukšānāk poạtā. Kotepoņāče mănis, săngtā povitrų pustāk,
årdejiņient mortele . Disāk kitle pāuți ami Dēvātso ātou
kărizāi ? Tanktā titleñ (as much as you can). Dēvāk melon
åtme găţie gădien apleñ kăliz Dēvāk bețaitāt, ani yea sauñ
sārānt astănañi, sărgār tančeñ mon assā. Burgeā, moje
kåde (or makā) tujeñ káliz di : assen uleitā Somi Jezu Krist.
Pedru mamā, yea rukāk tumče bašen kiteñ moņtāt ? Akāgi ?
Amiñ voạātso ruk montāuñ. Ani teā rukāk kiteñ moņtāt ?
Sāibānu, makā gottunāñ (1 do not know) . Yeñ bhou sobit
pustak : takā kitle Rupoi lagleāt ? Yeñ bhou mārăg pustak ;
sumār pānz Rupoi podleāt takā. Tasseň asleār, makā kuši
nāñ yeñ pustak molāk kāņeunk.
$ 3. Accusative
First of all, as the Accusative is very often (especially in
animate objects) equal to the Dative, sometimes (especially in
inanimate objects) to the Nominative , we require some rule
to know when the same form is a sign of one case and when
of another . This principle may be laid down : According to
the philosophy of the grammar , Accusative indicates the di
rect object of the action expressed by the Verb ( from accu
27
 - 210

sare); the Dative denotes the indirect object of the action of

the Verb , or the object cui accidit, or to whom really or
metaphorically the action of the Verb (which directly aims
at the word put in the Accusative) is indirectly given ( from
dare); e.g. " God has given His Son to the world " ; Son denotes
the direct object of has given ; to the world denotes the thing
cui accidit or cui datur, to which is given the direct object of
has given. Of course I do not speak of any kind of Accusa
tive and Dative, but of that Accusative and of that Dative
which are simpliciter and, I may say xat'- ětovýv, Accusative
and Dative. Hence I do not consider here the Accusative
and Dative governed by Postpositions etc. Moreover this fun
damental principle may be somewhat modified according to
the nature of the different languages, e.g. in English we say
“ I study the Latin Grammar ”, whereas in Latin they say
- Studeo Grammaticae Latinae ."
Hence we may draw a corollary, i.e. that it is more agree
ing to the above principle to say, " Accusative of animate ob
jects has a termination equal to the termination of the Dative, ”
than to say “ animate objects are put in the Dative, although
they are the direct object of the Verb ”. For this reason I said
(p. 206) that the first manner is more satisfactory to the mind.
After these preliminary remarks, let us see when the Ac
.

cusative is used . This case is used

1. In all cases in which the direct object of the action of
the Verb is denoted, unless there be some peculiar exception .
This first point is the same as in other languages ; conse
quently it does not require further explanation. This first
point includes, we may say, all ordinary cases in which the
Accusative is to be used.
2 . According to the above principle we should also con
sider as Accusative the two first cases considered on p. 205
as Nominative ; because although their form is equal to the
Nominative, yet the meaning does not allow us to call them
Nominative.
 - 211

3. To express time in answering the question how long ;

e.g. " the war lasted three years = zuz tin vorsañ urleñ ” .
4. To express space or measure to the question " how
high ”, “ how broad ” ; e.g. “ this field is twenty feet long = VO =

gādo vīs futi lāmb ” .

Exercise
Burgeā, kiteāk āz titlo todou kårn ailāi ? Bāpā, āz iskul " )
sade tin uorañ urlāñ. Phot mārtai; kelluloi. Nīñ, bābā :
āuñ phot mārināñ, mēstri kåde vitzārā. Văgo rāu, nakāzālle
sāngnakā : phoț tuja toņdār distā. Antoni, makā yēk pét
zāi. Saibānu , kedi vöd lämbāi, ani rūndai ? Tin vāri lamb
ani dēļ vār rund. Kålleñ, Sāibānu ; poise diā, foļiñ, kiļe
ani yer sāmān ādunk. Fådpoši vāur kårnakā ; sărkeñ kå
rināñzaleār, āuñ tukā samba! kāiñ disonāñ. Zāit, Sāibānu ;
Anton kedintz fădpoši vāur kårināñ. Foļiñ aďleānt, pun tanči
lāmbai pāvănāñ ; ani să Rupoi diā, kuši asleār . Ah, lutčeā,
tūñ nadi kărtai, dillo duļu tzăd zatā.
§ 4. Instrumental 2)
This case is used :
1. To show the agent in the tenses of passive meaning
(or of passive construction) of the Transitive Verbs (see below
those tenses) ; e.g. " Devān amkāñ rătzleāt = God has created
us” ; “ Burgeān tanțe keleāt = the boy has done mischief” .
2. In some tenses of the Neuter Verbs (see those tenses
below ); e.g. " āuveñ votzazāi = I must go ", " āuven votzunk
gărz assā, = lit. by me to go is required ; in Latin = a me iri
necessitas esl" ; stāņeñ votzayet = he may go” .
1) The Konkani word would be “ vidyā-sāl” or “ vidyā -šāl”,7 used also in Mah
ratti; " iskul" is entirely foreign and not a good word . I use for the present
this and also some other foreign words only because they are often used ; but
they are a corruption of the language.
2) For the sake of convenience, I speak in this paragraph not exclusively
of Nouns, but also of other parts of speech . This remark must be applied to
other paragraphs too.
27*
 212

3. To express cause or instrument; e.g. " to takā tålvārin

mārtā = he kills him with the sword ” , “ to monis ariče piden
melo = that man died of palsy ”.
4. To express the material out of which a thing is made,
although in this case the Adjective may also be used ; e.g.
“ Dēvān amči kuļ mātien' keleā = God made our body out of
earth " .
5. To express manner; e. g . " mānān ulei = speak reverent
ly ” , “ mānān kāņge = receive with honour ” .
6. To express direction ; e.g. " to tēņeñ gelo = he went in
6
.
that direction ” , “ to yeņeñ gelo = he went in this direction ” ;
(these two words " teņeñ, yeņeñ” are irregular Instrumentals ) ;
" tea margān gelo = he went through that way". In this case
sometimes the 2nd Locative or the Dative are used ; e.g.
66
“ Bădgāk = at the North ”, we may say also “ Bădgān ”..
7. To express the relation through a place ; e.g." go through
the town ” . Yet here we must use the Instrumental , not of the
Substantive , but of the derived Adjective in -lo or in -tso. With
the Substantives usually the Adjective in -ntlo is employed, with
the Adverbs sometimes the derived Adjective in -lo is used ,
sometimes the derived Adjective in -tso. The Pronouns of the
3rd Person (to, o) have an irregular Instrumental to express
going through a place (see above para. 6). Examples for all
these cases : “ to šerāntleān gelo = he passed through the
=

town"; " rāy angāčeān vetā = the king goes through here” ;
" to mukhāveleān vetā = he goes before (i. e. through a place
which is before ) ”; “ poisleān vetā = goes through a distant
place” ; “ tāntleān votz = go through that place” , “ āntleān votz =
go through here" etc.; " teñeñ, yeņeñ votz = go through that,
this (place )” . See about the Adjective in -ntlo , p . 54.
As regards Adverbs, when is the derived Adjective in -lo
to be used , when the derived Adjective in tso ? Some Adverbs
have the corresponding Adjective in -tso, some in -lo ; hence
if the Adverb has the Adjective in -tso, this Adjective is to
be used ; if the Adverb has the Adjective in -lo, this second
 213

Adjective is to be used. Very seldom or never an Adverb has

two different corresponding Adjectives, i.e. in -tso and -lo.
In the Chapter V. Part II, the derived Adjectives are given ;
the Adjectives in -lo are more frequent: I mean to say Adjec
tives derived from Adverbs of place.
With the Substantives, we might use, I think, also the
>

pure Instrumental ; e.g. “ šerān" instead of “ šerāntleān ” ,

although perhaps not so correctly. I think also that as to
Adverbs, the rule given here should be observed also to express
direction put under para. 6 ; e. g. " pațleān votz = go behind.”
8 . The Instrumental is used also to express how much
one thing is superior to another ; e.g. “ yeñ lugaţ tea lugtā prås
tin vārinin lãmb = this cloth is three yards longer than that
cloth .” In this case we might use also the Dative or, still
better, the Accusative.
9. If a Verb is in the Negative Necessary Mood with “ nozo ” ,
then the agent or the person to whom something is impossi
ble, must be put not in the pure Instrumental , but in the
Instrumental of the derived Adjective in -tso ; e. g. “ bāvāčān
nozo = it is impossible to the brother"; " mojeān (or mojān)
nozo = it is impossible to me” .
This and the form under para. 7 are the forms of which
I spoke in Part II. Ch. III. $ 1. Observations 8 , 9.
There are some Adverbs which express direction by them
selves; e. g. “ thăiñ = thither” . These Adverbs may be used
without any change, although we might also say “ tāntleān "
instead of “ thăin "

Exercise

Moja Dēvā, āuveñ sărgāčer ani tuje mukār pātak kelāñ,

bógós, Somia ; tuzo pūt moņunk makā fāvo niñ. Pāție, Devān
tujeñ pātak bogšilāñ ; yea mukār pātak sukoi. Monšān kiteñ
kărizāi sompūrņ zāunk ? Såmest văstu ikun , Jezu Kristātso
pațlāu kărizāi. Tumin sāngā-nakāt ; amčeān nozo ; kiteāgai
moļeār, Devān amkañ ādhār dileār, såkåt våstu tanktāt, Sa
 214

krān rāvăzāigi ? Tāņeñ votzayet, tačeñ kām zāleñ. Naiñt")

sisăr assā ; ani lokāk vāit kărtā ; kiteāk tumiñ tikā bănduken
mārinānt ? Bietātgi ? Phālea aitārā amčeñ mostak yetolo ,2)
amiñ takā mānān kāņeizāi. Sipoiān Somia Jezu Kristāči
kádvăl tălvārin papsilā, tantleñ răgat ani udāk bāir sărlāñ.
Burgo kăinče piden melo ? Tāpān . Khăinče dikān Goyiñ
assā ? Goyiñ Kodiālā bådgān assā. Kodiālboilāk votzunk
yeā mārgān (or mārgār) votzăyetgi? Teñen votzayet, yeņeñ
votzăyet; dõni Kodiālboilāk vortāt. Bombăi votzunk Go
yāntleānt votzazāigi ? Nīñ , āgboţin nīt Bombăi pāvayēt.
Ratnādea Tāsildārātso samba! kitleañ Rupoiāniñ Kadrāčea
Tāsildārāčea sambalā vorn tsåd assā mon āuñ sărkeñ nēņañ.
§ 5. First Locative
Usually the Grammarians of Indian languages do not dis
tinguish between 1st and 2nd Locative ; yet I was obliged, for
the sake of distinction, to distinguish them , 1 ) because the
termination is different, as every one knows, 2 ) because the
meaning is different. As to the 2nd point, we may say that
the fundamental meaning of the 1st Locative is in (not consider
ing whether this in means on the surface) and inside; where
as the fundamental meaning of the 2nd Locative is upon .
Yet it is true that in some cases, as to the meaning both
cases can be used indifferently, because extrema se tangunt,
or also sometimes the fundamental meaning does not appear
clearly, as it happens also with some other cases.
The first Locative is used :
1. To show that a thing is in a place, as I said above ;
e.g. " to kudānt assā = he is in the room " . Yet, this is not
always expressed by the Locative ; for this may be also ex
pressed by “ thăiñ " and " bităr ”. Though I cannot yet explain
the exact difference between these three particles, I think we
1) Strictly speaking, we should write “ naiñnt” . Cf. p. 32. para. 3.
2) Although “ mostak ” grammatically is Neuter, the Verb is put in the
Masculine Gender, because the meaning is Masculine.
 215

might say perhaps thus : The first Locative means to be really

in a true physical place, not considering expressly that the
place is surrounded ; it expresses also inside; " thăiñ ” means
more commonly a metaphorical place ; e. g. “ Dēvā thảiñ kitle
zón assāt ? = in God how many persons are there ?” “ átmeā
6
thăiñ = in the soul" etc. " Bitar " is as the Latin intra; e. g.
within two years the building will be finished = don vorsañ
bitărbāndăp tirsat"; " gărā bităr sămādān assāgi ? = at
home is there peace ?" Yet in many cases “ bităr” and the
1st Locative can be used indifferently; hence it is impossible
to establish a complete difference between these three manners.
As already mentioned, -nt becomes -niñ in the Plural (see Part
II. Ch. I.). I think, this -nt is just as in Kanarese egg which
is not a word having a certain meaning by itself, but a pure
termination to show place ; this is one of the reasons , why
I made of it a peculiar case.
2. The 1st Locative is used to show motion to a place ; e.g.
“ to nāļānt vetā = he goes to the village". Better , use the Dative.
3. It is used to show cause ; e. g. " to monis tea pident
.

mélo = that man died of that illness " . The Instrumental is

better.
4. It shows time ; e.g. utea disānt = on that day".
Exercise
Saib girã assägi ? Vói, to kudãnt assẽ. Tāntu kiten
kărtā ? Yēk kāgad boreitā. Tūñ šerānt") vetāigi ? Auñ atāñ
votzånān. Votānt takā ulăp ailo. Kăiñčea disānt Somi Jesu
Krist yeā souñsārānt yetolo ? Nimāņea disā. Yēk pātkiān
prăčit kelleānt, bodve săntos pāutāt.
§ 6. Second Locative
The 2nd Locative seems to be the abbreviation of a longer
expression , viz. of " voir = upon ”. If this voir" is shortened
into r, this r is joined in one word with the Noun . Though
1) Some say “ šār” or “ šyār" instead of “ šer” .
 216

‫و‬
“ voir ” means chiefly upon, yet it is used in many cases in
which the Original meaning disappears. This 2nd Locative
is used :
1. To show relation of place (upon); e.g. “ găţiāl mezār
assā = the watch is on the table ” .
2. To show time in answer to the question when " ; e.g.
66
“ sānjer = in the evening (Ital. sulla sera )” .
3. To show place, as in English to or at, the 2nd form
of this Locative given in the Declension, is used ; e . g. " mā
dringer vots = go to the nuns ”"; " dhu āvoiger assā = the
daughter is in the house of the mother”; “ amger = in our house” ;
“ Tolager = in the house of Tola” ; “ kòņāger assā to ? = in -

whose house is he ?"

4. With the Verbs " believe, trust , hope " and similar
others, the person in whom you believe etc. is put in the 2nd
Locative ; e.g. " Dēvāčer patie = trust in God ”; “ Dēvāčer
sătmānd = believe in God ” .
5. To show place, when we should use in, if a high place
is meant, or the surface of a thing; e.g. " sūriār = in the sun "
(Latin in sole); yet in this case, sometimes the 1st Locative
may be also used ; e.g. " souñsārānt in the world ”.
6 . To show manner ; e.g. “ tea tărār kår = do it in that
way” or tea jinsār kår ” .
7. In many Konkani expressions ; 6.g. "porječer rasvot
kāi kår = reign over the people”. .
8. To express " to be present at... or during ..." ; e.g. ?

" misār aščeñ = to be at mass” , “misār = during mass” ; “ kāmār

assā = he is on duty ”.
9 . This case seems to be used sometimes also in the mean
ing of " against?'” ; e. g. " to mojer uleitā = he speaks against,
me” ; yet more frequently it is joined with “ ād = against” ;
e.g. " to mojer ād -uleitā ” .
This 2nd Locative is used , I said, under 2 , to show time ; yet this is not the
general way of expressing time, because the general rule is this : to the ques
tion “ when ” , time is expressed a) by the pure stem, e. g. Waitārā = on Sunday " ;
 217

b) by the Accusative, e.g. “ aitār” ; c) by the stem of the Feminine Adjective Singu
lar derived from the Noun, e.g. " aitārāče ”; d) by the 1st Locative. To the
question “ during what time” , we use a) the stem with the Postposition “ mo
deñ = in the middle ”, e.g. “ disā modeñ = during the day' ' ; b) the Adverbial
phrase compounded of the Adjective and the Substantive “ vé! = time” in the 2nd
Locative ; e.g. “ rātče vēlār = during night”. To the question “ within what
time” , a) the stem with the Postposition “bităr" is used, e.g. " tīn vorsañ
bităr = within three years”; b) or the 1st Locative.
Sometimes the time is expressed by the Adjective, which agrees with
a Substantive with which it seems not to have a strict relation of agreement ;
e. g. “ tāņeñ aitārātso vāur kelā = he worked on Sunday, lit. he made work of
Sunday" .
Exercise

Mezār lugat gallāiñgi ? Galtāñ. Suriār kiteñ assā mon ,

amkāñ sărkeñ kålnān : zikpi mănis montāt, suriār såbār kåtañ
assāt. Kitleañ uorānčer amiñ yēzāi ? · Dăñparā yā sānjer.
Amiñ Devā kurpā sāmbaltāuñ moņasăr, Deu amger rāutā.
Pātkiānger Deu rāutāgi ? Rāutā, pun išţa bări niñ. Tuzo
pūtų khăiñ assā ? To seireānger assă. Tūñ khăinčea gărānt
assāi ? Āun Porbuger assāſ, mozo bāu Kāmtiger, moji boiņ
Nāikāger, moji māusi Šētiger, mozo sentur Šeņăiñger ). Somi
Jezu Krist vāur kårtālo, teātz jinsār tūñ vāur kăr ani assen
sompūrņ zatoloi. Zākoņ Jezu Kristāčer sătmāndināñ, pātienāñ
ani tātso mög kårināſ, takā zărti zāun záli.

§ 7. Original
This, as I said on p. 11 , is a new Case quoad vocem, not
entirely quoad rem; because it is what is called in Kanarese
crude state, although the Konkani Original seems to be more
extended and used much more than the Kanarese crude
state (which is not a peculiar case); hence we can make of it a
particular case. I see now that in the Mahrātti Grammar
1) These five names : " Porbụ (or Probų), Kāmot, šet, Nāik, šeņai” are the
names of five classes of persons ; their original meaning seems to have been
“ lord, cultivator, merchant, warrior, writer " . Even now the families are often
called by these names.
28
 218

the Original or crude state is included in the Vocative. As

for me, I prefer to make a peculiar case ; because the meaning
is quite different from the meaning of the Vocative. If the
same termination were a sufficient reason for making of two
different cases only one case, then in Latin too we should
make, e.g. of the Dative and Ablative Plural one case, because
in all Latin Declensions the Dative and Ablative Plural have
the same termination .
This case is used :
1. We may say with nearly all Postpositions , because, aa
few excepted, these are added to the stem, i.e. to the Original.
2. With the Comparatives , i.e. the Noun preceded by
“ prăs, vorn” etc. is put in the Original; e.g.smonšāñ prås Dē
vātso mog kårizāi = we must love God more than men ” .
3. Instead of the Genitive when this is not converted into
-
an Adjective; e.g. “ Dēvā kurpā = divine grace” .
4. With compound words, i.e. if two Nouns are joined as
one word, the governed Noun is usually put in the Original.
See Part III. Chapter VI.
5. If many Nouns, which should be put in a certain case,
come together, only the last is put in that case, the preceding
Nouns are put or may be put in the Original (see p. 16 ,
para. 9).
6. If a Proper Noun in an oblique case has an apposi
tion, the first Noun is put in the Original (sometimes in the
Nominative) ; e.g. " Loreñsa (or Loreñs) Sāibāk ”, or, seldom ,
“Sāibā (or Sāib) Loreñsāk ” ; “ Ankuāri (or Ankuār) Măriek ”;
“Kodiāla (or Kodiāl) šerānt” ; but in the Nominative only
“ Loreñs Sāib Koạiāl šer" etc. (see p. 39 , note).
7. In some Konkani expressions , e.g. " gărā votz = go
home” , “ gårā assā = (he) is at home ” etc.
8. With the Nouns which imply a repetitive notion , e.g.
"every month = moineā moineāk ”, " every year = vorsā vorsāk ”.
In such cases the Noun is repeated just as with repetitive
numerals, except that here the whole Noun is repeated and
 219

the first time it is put in the Original, the second time in

the Dative. If from these Nouns Adjectives are derived , the
first Noun remains in the Original e.g. " moineā moineātso =
monthly , of every month ” .
Exercise

Romā šerānt adiñ purviñ Čičero ani Čezār nāvādle zāle.

Dēvātso mög sămestañ våstu prăs molădig : duduā prăs,
grestkāye prăs, bolāike prăs, santosā prăs, nāzuk khāņā prăs
(above delicate food ) boro. Dēvä kurpā sămestānk zāi . Añ
kuār Mări sårgā ani sauñsārāči rāņi zāun vortautā. Kon
gårā assāgi ? Kūņ nān . Dēvā Putrāk sămestāniñ dimbio gāli
zāi , sărgān, souñsārān, yemkåņdān. Ankuāri Măriek Ga
brielā bodveān kăbar ādlyā, tiče kusin Dēvā Putfų sămbāu
tolo moņ . Arkanj1) St. Mingelik Saitānā kåde yek zūz
assalle , povitrų pustăkānt sangleā părmāņe.

§ 8. Original Case, with " lagiñ or kådeñ ”

This is called in Tulu , Communicative Case ; because it is
chiefly used when we communicate with others. In Tulu it
has a peculiar termination, joined in one word with the
Noun. Hence in that language it may be called a peculiar
case , but in Konkani it is not so. It is formed like the other
kinds of Original (with Postpositions) , of which I will speak
hereafter, namely , by adding (not in one word) to the stem
the above named Postpositions . Yet as it is very frequently
used , I will say a few words about it separately. This Original
followed by lagiñ or kåde, which , for the sake of brevity,
we may call Communicative, is used with Verbs meaning
1 ) to talk or to speak , 2) to ask, 3) to beseech, 4 ) to in
quire, 5 ) to show relation to another, e.g. " my heart is not
good with him” , 6) to show possession of a thing, where we
could substitute in Latin apud (see above) . In all these
1) The pure Konkani word would be “mel-boờvo” or “ šrest-boờvo” .
28 *
 220

cases the person , whom you ask etc. is put in the Communi
cative Case ; yet sometimes the Dative might also be used.
Examples “ Dēvā lagiñ māg = pray God ” ; “ moje kådeñ dudu
nāñ = I have no money " ; "Mojew mon tāče thăiñ boreñ năiñ =
my heart is not good towards him ” .
Exercise
Dēvā lagiñ māg, ani to tukā tujā monāčeo kušeo dādos
kårtolo. Khăiñ khărentz suk meļta mon souñsārāceañ monšāñ
kåde itzār nakā, tankañ kålnāñ dekun . Sāng nakā “mojeñ mon
tea monšā kăde vāiț niñ ; mātrụ āuñ tače kåde uleināñ ; tujeñ
mon tukā phoţăitā; motint ād kiteñ Somi Jezu Krist amče
lagiñ montā moņun : " tuje thăiñ tuja bāvā kåde kāiñ asleār,
tuji kāņik altārir soạn , votzun bāvā kåde samādhān kår ; mā
gir pāți yeun , tuji kāņik Dēvāk bețăitoloi” . Amiñ Pādri
lagiñ såkțañ amčiñ pātkañ sāngleār, amkāñ Dēvā thāun tančeñ
bogsaņeñ meļteleñ ; ače šivāi, pātkānčeñ bogsaņeñ melnāñ.

$ 9. Original Case followed by other Postpositions

This is just as the Communicative Case , namely, it is
formed by adding, in a separate word, to the stem of the
Noun , the Postposition required by the meaning; e.g." Pātkiāñ
pasun māg = pray for sinners”; “ Dēvā višiānt ulei = speak
about God” etc.
Here a large field would be open to explain the use of the
Original followed by the different Postpositions ; but this
cannot be done for the present. Only I shall say in general,
that the use of the different Originals with Postpositions is
suggested, quoad substantiam , by the chief meaning of the
Konkani Postpositions, although sometimes the knowledge
of this chief meaning is not sufficient to know all the uses of
the Postpositions ; among these Postpositions, “thăiñ” is one
of the most difficult; hence I shall say a few words about the
Original followed by “ thăiñ.
 221

The chief meanings of thăin” are there and in , as explained

above (S 5 ). Hence the Original with “ thăiñ " is used
1. Chiefly to show the relation of one thing to another.
But the Postpositions " kåde” and “ lagiñ ” are also used in
this meaning ; how can we then distinguish which Postposi
tion is to be used ? Perhaps in this way : When we could
express in English that relation also by in or a similar word ,
then more frequently “ thăiñ ” is used ; when we could express
that relation more properly with the Dative or with the Latin
apud, then more frequently “ kåde or lagiñ ” is used. Yet these
three words are used sometimes promiscuously. Examples :
" we have many duties towards God = Dēvā thăin amkāñ săbār
kāide assāt” ; “ the children must show to their parents love,
reverence, obedience = burgeāniñ apleañ āuvoi bāpāñ thăiñ
mög, mān ani khaltepon dākeizāi” .
2. It is used to show place , not material in the common
meaning ; e. g. “ Dēvā thăiñ guṇānči sompürņāi assā = in God
there is fulness of perfections” .
Now I should speak of the Vocative and Genitive : As to the Vocative, it
does not present any serious difficulty ; about the Genitive I speak in the article
on Adjectives, for the reason explained more than once.
Somebody might think it not well done to have eliminated the Genitive, which
exists also in Mahrātti and in Kanarese.
But what use is there in keeping this case, if we can eliminate it ? Perhaps
the reasons which we have for Konkani do not hold good for Mahrātti and Kana
rese . Are perhaps the cases which remain too few ? That we can eliminate
the Genitive, nobody who considers the matter, will deny (see p. 11 ). Moreover
I had a peculiar reason to eliminate, i.e. the great number of the other cases.
Again, somebody might think that one case which exists also in Kanarese
and in Mahrātti has been omitted , i. e . the Ablative, which should express the
source whence any thing proceeds, and would correspond to the Kanarese ter
mination 3 OJOS (deseyinda) and to the Mahratti 577, 27.
I answer that we have no necessity to introduce this case in Konkani ; be
cause the Kanarese and Mahrātti Ablative can be expressed either by some case
of the derived Adjective in “ -ntlo or -lo ” (see pp . 54, 199 etc.) , or by the Ori
ginal followed by “ thāun = from " , or by a similar Postposition.
But somebody might insist by saying : Just what you have put as Instru
mental of the Adjective in “ -ntlo " should be considered as Ablative,
 222

I answer : If you wish to have it as Ablative, you may keep it ; as for me, I
see three good reasons for not considering “ -ntlo” as a peculiar case : first, it
follows the rules of the Adjectives, mostly at least ; moreover considering
that “ -ntlo ” as an Adjective, its construction is not so difficult ; whereas in
the other case it is almost inexplicable ; finally, also without this Ablative, we
have cases more than enough , if not to overwhelm the mind , at least to make
the Konkani Declensions somewhat difficult ; so let us avoid at least the cases
which are not absolutely necessary.
Exercise
Nimāņo dis pāunčea adiñ såbār khuņa zāteleo moļabār ani
buiñčer. Dēvā hujir amiñ kiten ? Kāiñ nāñ. Atāñ tukā boreñ
zāleñ ; yeā fude pātak kårnakā, tukā kāiñ tzád vāit zāinasseñ.
Yeā fude to kiteñ kartolo ? To vetolo. Såkåt karčeo văstu
keleā uprānt , amiñ sāngiāññ: upkārāk pădănātulle sākor amiñ.
Votzun lesāuñ bāipāt kår (learn by heart) ; tače māgir inām
tukā diviet. Gāļiegārā , atāñ gāļie pațleān rāu. Rūkā ñ voir
såbār sukniñ gāyan kårtāt (sing), ani Dēvāk argāñ ditāt. St.
Pedruče Igărječe dărņi ponda ani yek buiñtli Igărz assā ; thăiñ
săbār navādleañ monšānčeo kudi isou kāņeitāt. Văţilānu ,
tumče khāl asleānči zătan kāņeyā ; kiteāk moļeār, tumin
Dēvāk tančeñ lēk dīzāi . Somi Jezu Krist kursa taļa tīn pāuți
podlo . Pātak sorpa bări tuje pois" kår , ani tukā Dēvāčeñ
āšīrvād pāuteleñ. Dēvā thăiñ tèg zon assāt. Bāvānu , åtmea
pasun kiteñ kårtāt ? Kuļiči lakšā kāņeitāt , tītz pun åtmeāči
kāņeitātgi ? Kurpe bităr mortāt, te sărgār vetāt ; mahā pāt
kānt mortāt , te yemkandānt vetāt. Igårje bāir votzun , Dēvāče >

aikalleñ utar visārnakāt ; pun tače părmāņe trălā. Zo-kon

Jezu Kristā sangatā luanāñ to simpdaitā. Zo -kon Dēvā săr
silo vingåd zatā, to apleāñ dusmānānčea gulāmpoņānt podtā.
Såmestañ pasun răzār kåriāñ. Mogalā Jezuts, Dēvā Bāpā
lagiñ māg. Ankuāri Mărie , amāñ pāpiā kātir vinoti kår
atañ, ani amčeā morņāče kāļiñ. Moje pasun yea vadălak
årămb zālo : makā dăriānt udeyā. Jeruzaleñ molleñ šer
kainčeā dikān assā ? Kodiāla badgā astamti (north -west)
dikān assā. Bombăi thāun Europ păriant kitle kos (miles)
assāt ? Mojān sărkeñ sāngunk nozo : āgbõțin poināk sumār
 223

vīs dīs lagtāt ; pun poināčeā veļār săbār pāuți tāru ñ rāutā,
drăšķāntāk ( e.g.): Aden ani Portesaid molleañ bằndrañ kåde
(maritime towns). Pātkāñ vorviñ Dēvāk åkmān zatā, åtmeāk
sărg antartā ; ani săbār yēr dăgd yetāt. Pātak ādarn soukāsai
meļčea bådlāk (or suāter) tzurtzure ani kắšť ani khănt meltā.
Gărje šivāi aitārā vāur kårunk nozo. Amčer ād yeunčea kărit
(or šivāi) Somiā Jezu Kristātso patlāu kărunk nozo.
( Here I add a few examples of Postpositions which govern
the Nominative or Dative. See Chapter on Postpositions.) Kårt
(master) gårā assāgi ? Yedo? moņăsăr yeunk-nāñ. Tuzo khā
vănd (lord, master) dhā uorañ thāun tin vorañ păriănt kiteñ
kårtā ? Makā gottunāñ. Ani tīn uorañ dărn pānz părănt
kiteñ kărtā mon tukā kaltāgī ? Auñ kāiñ neņañ. Hangā
thāun går påriyant ani kitleñ zāit ? Yēk ulo, Sãibānu (a call,
i.e. as far as the voice reaches ). Sārațān ( by carriage) Igărz
moņasăr votzayetgi ? Năiñ, bābā : pāivățen tzălazāi. Bāpai
putrāk virõdh assolo, putrụ bāpāk porto. Zo-kon apleā bāvāk
porto tzaltā, to Dēvātso sărken mög kårinān. Saštrāč ād ulei
nakā : ani apleā peleāk virõdh tzal nakā.

Art. II. Adjectives

§ 1. Adjectives in General
Generally speaking we may say that the Adjective is very
frequently used, though there are not many original Ad
jectives. A general rule might be perhaps as follows:
Whenever a word does not express a substance, but affirms
or denies only a quality or a similar thing of another, the
Konkani language prefers to use the Adjective in -tso, -tči, -tčeñ,
or -lo , -li, -leñ, though in our European languages another
part of speech is used. Hence the Adjective is used .
1. To express the Genitive ; for, the Genitive expresses
something of the governing Noun ; e. g. " bāpāčeñ går = the
house of the father" , the words “ of the father” answer to the
question " what father ?”
 224

2 . To show origin ; hence usually the Adverbs of place

or time are converted into Adjectives, if they are used to ex
plain in some way the Nouns ; e. g. sthis man is of here”; in
this example the Adverb " of here” is like an Adjective of
“ thisman ” hence the Adverb is changed into Adjective “ yo monis
hangātso ”; or, to speak more simply, if we have in English
the Adverb preceded by “ of”, in Konkani we make an Adjec
9

tive of it , adding -tso, -či, -čeñ, or -lo , -li, -leň, which, of course,
>

must agree with its Noun, according to the general rule .

There may be some exceptions to this rule.
3. Some other Adverbs or adverbial phrases, or a Noun
with a Preposition are often translated in Konkani by an
Adjective, if they are an explanation of some Nouns. Thus
“aitārātso vāur = work on Sunday, servile work ”; “ dusreāntso
>

rāg = anger against others” . In both examples the Nouns

with the Preposition are like Adjectives, though not gramma
tically. Yet we could say also : “ aitārā vāur kår = work on
Sunday ".
4. Adjectives are used in many elliptical sentences ; for,
they qualify a Noun not expressed . Thus " rātče = during
night”, here " veļār = in time” is understood; “ sonoārāče = on
Saturday ”, here too "veļār or dis =day ” is understood.
-

5. The Adjectives in -tso, -tči, -tčeñ , (usually the Neuter

Singular) are used in sentences corresponding to the Latin
consulis est providere reipublicae, hominis est errare; e.g.
“ tzukčeñ monšāčeñ, pun pātkānt rāunčeñ koțepoņāčeñ = to fail =

is human, to persevere in sin is wicked " .

6. The Adjective (or Genitive) is used also often to show
the material out of which a thing is made ; e .g. " mātietso = of
earth , earthen ” .
7. The Genitive or Adjective is used when in Konkani
the Verb is compounded of a Verb and a Substantive and ,
translating it literally, we should put the Substantive, which
is the direct object of the Verb , in the Genitive ; e. g. “ I ex
plain the doctrine”, “ explain = vivor sāng, lit. say explanation ";
 225

hence we should say : " I say the explanation of the doctrine =

dotornitso vivor sangtāñ ”; yet this rule is often not observed
by common people.
8. The Adjective is used when some Pronoun or Adverb
is followed by the Particle “ bări = as” , Latin instar; as this
Konkani Particle usually is not joined to Adverbs or Pronouns ,
the Adverb and Pronoun are changed into an Adjective; e. g.
" ādlea bări = as before " ; "amče bări = as to us " ..
9. Instead of the corresponding Noun, see p. 15 , para. 3.
10. With the Adjective " sărko" and the like ; e. g. stače
sărko = similar to that” . Yet we may also say “ takā sărko ” ,
especially if it means “ similar to him ” ; but " Dēvā-sărko" is
more common than “ Dēvāče sărko ” .
In all these cases more commonly the Adjective in -tso
is used , seldom the Adjective in -lo. Yet properly speaking,
there is some difference between these two Adjectives. The
1st has the meaning of the above explained cases , the 2nd
in -lo seems to express , we may say , a local quality or, more
clearly, the Adjective in -lo seems to be a contraction of a
whole sentence which shows the place of a thing; e . g. " the
men who are in the world ” ; the whole sentence “ who are in
the world ” is like an Adjective of “ men ”, showing the place in
which they are. Hence the whole phrase may be expressed
with one Adjective in -lo added to the 1st Locative. Thus we
get " sauñsārāntle månis . " Yet sometimes this could also be
expressed , although seldom , by the Adjective in -tso or by trans
lating literally the whole phrase. Nay, sometimes we meet
still bolder contractions ; as we have seen two Postpositions
joined together (see p. 153 , n . 6) , so we might form similar Ad
jectives ; but they are not in common use.
Remarks : a) Wehave seen that often our Adverbs are ex
pressed in Konkani by Adjectives. Sometimes just the contrary
happens, viz. our Adjectives are expressed by Adverbs. This
is the case , when our Adjective is a predicate as in whomo est
29
 226

mortalis " and we might change it into an Adverb without

any detriment to the meaning, then , I say, in Konkani the
Adverb with the Gerund in un may be used ; e.g. " be firm =
tirzāun rāu = lit, remain constantly".
b) The Genitive follows the rules of the Adjectives, keep
ing, however , some signs of a Noun especially in some points
of the concord . The first sign is this : a Pronoun which refers
to a preceding Noun converted into the Adjective, follows the
Gender of that Noun , although regularly it should follow the
>

Gender of the Noun with which that Adjectival Genitive

agrees ; e. g. “... et memorari Testamenti sui Sancti quod
juravit (Luc. I. 73) = ani părmāņāțso ugļās kărunk jeñ tāņeñ
....kelen" . The 2nd sign can be found on page 52 , para. 1 .
The 3rd sign is to be found in the construction or collocatio
verborum ; because the Genitive converted into an Adjective
is indeed placed before its Noun , at least usually and in the
common cases ; yet if there are other Adjectives belonging
to the same Noun, more frequently it is put before them ,
as if it were a Noun ; e. g . " a sign of charity = mogātso yēk
gurtų, lit. charitable a sign ” , whereas we would say “ a
charitable sign ”. So also “ Dēvāčiñ bhou vortiñ dēņiñ = the
very sublime gifts of God, lit, the Divine very sublime gifts”.
I need not say that although the Konkani Genitive gram
matically can be considered for the sake of facilitating its
construction as an Adjective, as to the meaning it may
differ from common Adjectives, as in the above first example,
there is some difference in English between “ a charitable
sign" and " a sign of charity ” ; yet in Konkani the same
word and the same construction can be used in both cases .
This little difference as to the meaning may be a reason for
distinguishing the Genitive -Adjectives or Adjectival Genitives
from the other Adjectives, but cannot be a reason for making
of it a peculiar case with the only advantage of making, I
may say , an inexplicable and imaginary case.
.
 227

$ 2. Adjectives in Particular
In the first place we should speak of the Genitive-Adjec
tives ; but as they have nearly the same construction as the
common Adjectives and are in some way general , so we have
put them in the preceding paragraph. Those which I am
going to speak of in para. 1 , are also in some way general,
yet they present some peculiar difficulty ; hence we can speak
of them here .

1. Adjectives derived from Postposition

This point which has been touched upon (pp. 54 , 153 , n.5)
must be now particularly explained, although it is contained in
9

the above general rule. An easy, although not very scientific ,

rule may be this: A Postposition is changed into the corres
ponding Adjective wherever the Adjective can be substituted
without detriment to the meaning; e.g.“ who among you has stolen
my watch ?” Here we may change , not in English but in our
mind , that among into an Adjective of who; hence we say
" tumče bitărleān kāņeñ moji gădiāl tzorlyā ? " See their
construction on page 199 , para. 8.
More scientifically we may express the same thing as fol
lows : When a Postposition with its governed word explains
like an Adjective, some Noun etc. , this postposition with the
governed word is converted into an Adjective.
When is the Postposition with its governed Noun to be
considered as such an Adjective ? This is the difficult and
practical point. From many examples which I considered, I
think we can draw this rule, which alone is sufficient for the
right use of this kind of Adjectives in the common cases : the
Postposition can be changed into the corresponding Adjective,
whenever this Adjective could be resolved into a relative
sentence. This relative sentence would consist usually as
follows: the Relative Pronoun which refers to the Noun af
fected by that Postposition -Adjective, the Verb “ to be” in the
tense required by the meaning, the Noun governed by the
29 *
 228

Postposition , finally the Postposition itself. Examples will

explain what I now said. There are some cases which seem
not to be explained enough by this rule ; yet I think it holds
good for all cases , although not always very clearly. Exam
ples :“go beforeme” ; here we must say “ mukār”, not “mukāvelo”,
because we cannot resolve “ mukāvelo ” into a relative sen
tence. If we said " mukāvelo votz” the meaning would be :
“ you who are before me (lo the relative sentence !) go"; " who
among you can suffer everlasting pains ? ” Here we can use
bitărlo ” , because we can resolve that “ bitărlo” into a rela
>

tive sentence, i.e. " which man , who is among you, can ” etc. =
kõn tumče bitărlo sasnāče kašt sosit ?" Now I put some other
examples to show the application of the rule ; the reader him
self will make the application. “ The birds are singing upon
the trees = sukniñ rukañ voir gāyăn kårtāt” ; “ let the man
come down from the tree = to månis rukā voilo deundi" ,
. “ the men in this place are frugal = yeā gāvāntle mănis hål-.
tān khātāt "; " in this place there are many learned men =
yeā gāvānt såbār sikpi mănis assāt”; “ put a hurdle before
the window = zanelā mukār yēk izăi gāl”; “ that hurdle before
the window prevents light = zanelā mukāveli izăi uzuād kāņtā ” ;
" come after me = moje pāti ye" ; " he who comes after me shall
come before = moje pāțlo mukār yeundi"; " he came down
from the mountain = porvotā voilo deuñlo (he who was upon
the mountain )”; “ go away , 0 devil , from that man = teā mon
šā voilo votz, būtā ” .
When the Adjective in -ntlo, instead of the Adjective in -lo
or -tso, must be used, can be known from & III. p. 54 etc.
Again , when the form -ntleán (Instrumental) must be used, can
be known from $ 4, para. 7 , p . 212 etc. By the above expla
nation also the construction of these Adjectives has been
facilitated .
For further understanding of this rule see page 171 ,
para. 4. Something more about this point will be said per
haps in Art. VI.
 229

Remark that not all Postpositions , e.g. “ thäun ” , have a

>

corresponding Adjective commonly used ; then necessarily the

pure Postpositions must be used . A similar thing happens
with the Adverb. See derived Adjectives in Part II. Chapter V.
Remark finally that the use of the pure Postposition in
stead of the Adjective seems also allowed, although perhaps
not so correctly and so elegantly .
2. Adjectives corresponding to the Latin Adjectives in..bilis
The touchstone, we may say, of a Konkani scholar is the
right use of the Adjectives corresponding to the English
divisible, impermeable, inflammatory and the like, and to
the Latin Adjectives in ...bilis. In Part III. Ch. V. their
derivation has been explained, i.e. by " sărko" . Yet some
times this " sărko” does not suit, or we get too long words
especially in the negative form . Then we may use other
forms, i. e. the Participial Adjectives in -so ; e. g. instead
of “ riganāõ -sărko = impenetrable ”, we may say “ riganānu -so” .
This Participle has not been given in Part II.; yet it is also
used, and has nearly the same meaning as " riganāñ-sărko” .
We must not confound this -80 with the quasi-diminutive -so,
although the spelling is the same. Moreover we may use
the Gerundive in -tso (affirmative) and “ -tsonāñ " (negative) ;
but the meaning is not entirely the same ; the meaning of
these Adjectives is best rendered by the Latin Gerundives ;
e.g. amandus, non amandus = to be loved, not to be loved ”.
Another way, which , although very elegant, is rather long and
not so easy, is to use the Participial Adjectives of the Potential
2

or Necessary Mood. They are formed as I have indicated on

pp. 127 , 173 , note. Their meaning corresponds to the tense
to which they belong ; e. g. " kăriyet assolo = which might be
done "; " kărizāi assolo = which is to be done" ; " sătmandunk
nozo assolo = incredible” etc. Yet sometimes it is better to
resolve such long Adjectives into Verbs in a finite mood as
common people usually do.
 230

3. Quasi-diminutive Adjectives
.

Another kind of difficult Adjectives are the dubitative,

the diminutive and the like. These have sometimes a pro
per word ; yet mostly the quasi-diminutive -80 must be added to
them (see Part III. Ch. II.); e.g. " improbable ” may be expressed
in many cases by “ sătmandunk nozoso” : “ sătmand = believe ”,
" sătmandunk nozo = is incredible " , " sătmandunk nozo - so =
approaching to be incredible " ; " dovo = white ", " dovoso =
= =

appearing to be white (gray ) ” etc.; " boro = good ", " boroso
somewhat good, or apparently good ”.

4. Adjectives corresponding to the Latin instar.

Another kind of Adjectives difficult to translate are those
which correspond to the English as or to the Latin instar;
e. g. “ he is as a lion " . The best way is to use the Particle
“bări= instar” , preceded by the governed word ; yet I have
heard also Adjectives formed from " bări”, i. e. “ băriso " .
>

So they say " sivā băriso mănis = a man like a lion ” . I

need not say that such Adjectives are not popular. Dis
tinguish this " băriso " from “ bărit" which is used to form
some other Adjectives of different meaning ; e.g. " fălabărit =
66
fertile” , from "fål = fruit” and “ bårit ” : “ băriso " comes from
" bări ” and the quasi-diminutive " so " . We may remark here
what has been omitted in Chapter V. that some Adjectives are
formed also by adding -al; e.g. " īt = fertility”, " īļāl = fertile ” ;
9

and not only by -est (see p. 171 , n. 3) but also by -ist or only
-st, and by some other termination.
5. Verbal Adjectives
Rather strange Adjectives are those which etymologically
are Verbs , but are used as Adjectives. I mention here these
two Adjectives : “ yênāñ zalo = he refused (to come) , lit. he
became ' I do not come'. " Here “ yenan "” is used according to
the meaning as an Adjective. So also : " Taņið kāiñ zāp diunk
 231

nozo zali = they could not answer any thing, lit. they became
incapable of giving any answer ” . Both Adjectives seem to be
indeclinable.
6. Complex Adjectives
Sometimes a whole sentence takes the place of an Ad
jective ; this happens chiefly with the Participial sentences.
About this later on .

7. Participial Adjectives
Here the Participial Adjectives can be mentioned ; but we
must be very careful in the use of them, because out of the
Participial sentences , they can be seldom used properly.
8. Numeral Adjectives
Although about the Numeral Adjectives many things should
be said, I must limit myself to say these few things.
a) As to the declension , it is true that all may take " an "
in the oblique cases, if joined to a Noun (see p. 61 , para. 3) ;
>

yet they can take sometimes also “ i ” . So we find “ dòniñ, tīniñ,

čāriñ" etc.; e.g. "čāriñ vāreāntleān = from the four winds” etc.
Sometimes they seem to prefer i instead of a in the oblique
cases ; this happens especially if they are not joined to Nouns.
b) The number “ dhā = ten ” is often taken in an indefinite
meaning ; hence “ dhā-zon = committee, lit. ten persons”.
c) Distinguish between " sāt" and " sāt" , the first is not cere
bral ; moreover it seems to be pronounced not so slowly as “ sāt” .
d) The vowel å of să (6) is short, but pronounced slowly.
This and the preceding example show that there are really
two å and two ā, as stated on page 191. If perhaps these
two examples are not sufficient to persuade my reader, he
must know that there are many other examples , clearer than
these two.
e) Some pronounce the vowel en after un for 29 , 39, etc.
The full form would be really “ yēkuņeñ tīs ” etc., and seems
also to be better, as hinted on page 60, although in the list
>

of the numerals that eñ by chance has been omitted in 29.

 232

9. Comparative and Superlative

Here I will put some difficult cases. If two Adjectives
are compared, the common rule is not suitable ; e.g. she is
more holy than learned ”, we should say according to the
common rule : " zaạteā prăs bhāgivont" , or " zaạteāčeāki prăs
bhāgivont”; but this is not used ; we must change the sentence
in some way : I say ssome” because there are many ways ;
so the above example may be rendered thus : " kitlo zaộtogī,
tačeāki bhāgivont = lit. how much he is learned, above that
holy” ; or “ to zantoi, pun tsăd bhāgivont = lit. he is learned
indeed, but more holy ”. In a similar way, if we have the
comparative of inferiority of Adjectives, we may translate
it, changing the sentence somewhat . The comparative of
as much as
= as
equality is best rendered by “ kitlo — titlo =
much ” ; e.g. " he is as much learned as holy = kitlo zanto
titlo bhāgivont ” .
The English “ too much” is expressed with “ tzad " (pronounce
nearly “ tzăăd " ); e.g. “ that is too much = yeñ tză ” ”. This word
is used especially with the comparatives of a form somewhat
different from the ordinary one, when , namely the thing in
which one term is compared with the other is not expressed
66
but understood ; e. g . “ A. is more than B. = A. B.vorn tzăď ”.
I heard, as far as I remember, this “ tzad ” used, although the
comparative has a common form , just as we would use " more" ,
and as “ ădik ” is sometimes used (see p. 65 , 6). The same word
atzăď" is used to express the English wtoo long , too short,
too bad etc. = tzăd lāmb, tzăd motvo, tzăd väit".
Another not easy mode of forming the comparative is to use
" ani” . The first meaning of “ ani" is " and "; yet in some
sentences it seems to mean “ more” ; or we may suppose its mean
ing to be this ; because its construction is as if its meaning
were “ more” . It is used especially when the terms of compa
rison are not distinctly expressed ; e.g. “ there is something
more (than you believe) etc. = " ani kăi assā, tit. = there is also
something ". It corresponds to the Latin et which in some
 233

cases means etiam or adhuc and may be used in a similar way

to the Konkani " ani” . In one word, the construction of " ani”
is similar to the Latin construction of et when it has the above
meaning.
Another form of the comparative compounded of this
" ani” is " aniki” . Etymologically it seems to be derived from
" ani” and “ -ki" used sometimes instead of " vorn " or " prăs"
(see p. 65). Its meaning seems to be that of an Adjective,
which in itself is comparative and corresponds to the English
" some more” ; e. g . " aniki utrañ mon = say some words more” .
.

We might render it in Latin thus: adhuc supra (ea quae

dixisti) verba dic. It is indeclinable.
As to the Superlative I mention here the mode of express
ing such a degree by repeating the same Adjective; €.g.
" boro boro = very good ”, (the first Adjective is pronounced
with pathos) , which mode is used also with Nouns, as in
Hebrew.
Among the modes of strengthening the superlative and
comparative, I mention here only a ) “ sărivin = without compa
=

rison ", e.g." sărivin boro = incomparably good ”; b )“ voir = above” ,

e.g. “ deki voir = lit. above example", or " so high that he can
not be imitated, or inimitable ”; c) “ tzăd = much ” , e.g. " tače
prås tzád budhivănt = he is much wiser than he” ; and d) " jīv
sodn = lit. giving up life ” , e.g. "jiv soạn khāuñtso = eating
=

very much ” . This last mode is often used, but rather with
Verbs and Verbal Adjectives, for animate objects, and in cer
tain sentences only .
Exercise

O mănis hangātsogi părki ? O månis hangātso nīñ; zaleāri,

hangāči bhāš tzålti uleitā. To månis khăiñ thāun āilo ? To
Ritan serāntlo äilo. Ritan ser khăindea gāvānt assā ? Kălpăņa
mollea jilleānt. Pāusāče veļār (or pāusānt) lok kostāt, gimā
čeā veļār pik luntāt. Tujeñ kām kiteñ , burgeā ? Mojeñ kām
siunčeñ. Disātso sămbaļ kitlo ? Čār aạe kūl , Sāibānu ; káštān
30
 234

yeā vorviñ mojeañ burgeānk postāñ. Hålt nastanāñ khāunčeñ

monzātičeñ ; mitmerin khāunčeñ monšāčeñ. Yeñ aidān kåssa
leñ ? Yeñ aidān mātiečeñ ; teñ bangārāčeñ. Tumče bitorlo
kön yemkaņdāntso uzo sosit ? Somi Jezu Krist sărgā voilo
deuñlo. Bāpui apleān burgeān lagšilo pois sărlo. Kumsārā
vorviñ Deu yeke jinsiñ åtmeā voilo Saitānāk sõdaitā. Såme
stāõtso ) mög kărizāi, sămest månis amče bāu dekun. Dusreāntso
rāg aileār, Somia Jezu Kristāče kášť niāļ ani tači dék kaņe.

Art. III . Pronouns

$ 1. Pronouns in General
1. All Personal and Relative Pronouns add one a to the
k by which the Dative and Accusative of Nouns are formed .
2 . In the Pronouns the Accusative is more frequently
equal to the Dative, although used sometimes for inanimate
things. (Cf. pp. 12 , 17 , etc.)
>

3. The Original does not exist pure ; what has been put in
Part II , Ch. III. as Original followed by Postpositions, is not
the pure but the derived Original, i. e. of the corresponding
9

Adjectives. Yet in the Pronouns of the 3rd Person and in

the Relative Pronouns and in some others too a kind of pure
Original occurs; but it is not commonly used except when
followed by some Postpositions ; hence we can say that the
pure Original does not exist ; the Original followed by
Postpositions exists in some Pronouns ; in some others the
derived Original is used.
§ 2. Pronouns in particular
1. Personal Pronouns
a) The Personal Pronouns usually are not omitted, if they
1) If the Adjective or Participle is used as a Pronoun, it takes the termination
" -tso ” of the ' Genitive or Adjective as a Noun ; this takes place although the
Adjective itself be derived by the addition of “ -tso" , then it takes this termina
tion twice ; e.g. " kårčeātso vivor = programme” .
 235

are the subject of a sentence, except in some peculiar cast 9

e. g. in some interrogative sentences, etc.

6) Among the Pronouns only “ āuñ” seems to have two
roots, one in the Nominative, Instrumental and perhaps
Vocative, the other in the other cases. Compare its declension.
c) The Personal Pronouns are used when in English the
derived Adjectives would be used as in this and similar
sentences : " my head is turning = makā māteñ guvntā = to me
head is turning ”. Yet we may use also the Adjective.
d) The Pronoun o of the third person, or Demonstrative
Pronoun , if you like to call it so, must be used besides, to fix
the attention chiefly when it is joined to the Relative Pronoun ,
as in this and similar sentences : this is the man whose house
is burnt = to månis zāčeñ går lāsleño, lit. that man whose house
burnt, is this” . Here that " to " seems to be only a kind of
article ; hence we could translate also thus “ the man whose
house burnt, is this ” . About this “ to ” remark that it seems
to be used sometimes really as determinate article ; e.g. " āuñ
vortautāñ to khăro gou?i = I am the good shepherd ” .
The Adjectives derived from the Personal Pronouns, chiefly
those of the 3rd Person , have been explained in Part II. Ch. III.
Here only remark that the table on p. 74 gives the combina
tions only of one or mostly of two (as Masculine and Neuter
are equal), derived Possessive Adjectives, and even these are
incomplete, because by chance the Singular “ tantso, tanči ,
tančeñ ” have been omitted, as you may see from p. 73 in which
" tantso" is given. Besides those combinations of the Mascu
line (and Neuter, equal to the Masculine) Gender there are as
many combinations of the Feminine " titso ” which is put on
the same page 73. Further from the Proximate Pronoun o, i,
yeñ, are derived “ atso, ači, ačeñ " ( from o, yeñ) and “ itso, iči ,
ičeñ” ( from i); each of these two derived Adjectives has the same
combinations as “ tatso” ; consequently altogether we have 48
(if not 60) combinations, and these are not only theoretical
but also practical. Yet if we keep in our mind the rule given
30 *
 236

on p. 74, the great number of combinations will not over

whelm our mind, but only show the fulness of the Konkani
language , called by some, poor and good for nothing.
Now I give some examples to show the application of this
rule : " This is my mother; her love towards me is very great = i
moji māi, itso mög bhou võd ”; “ this is my father, his name
is Peter = uo mozo bāpui , ačeñ nāuñ Pedru ”; “this is my
brother, his age is 20 years = uo mozo bāu , ači pirāi vīs vorsañ' ';
“ those men are my friends, their house is far = te moje išt ,
tančeñ går pois" etc.
2. Relative Pronouns
A peculiar and distinct explanation would be required for
the Relative Pronouns ; yet the most difficult things about
them are connected with the Participles ; hence for the sake
of brevity we will speak of them more distinctly later on.
For the present let us say only a few words. First, instead
of the Relative Pronoun 1) the corresponding Participle, as
in Latin, or 2) the Demonstrative " tātso" is used, or 3) the
Relative Pronoun is simply omitted ; this last case takes
place especially in correlative sentences. Examples : “ he
who commits evil, hates his own soul = vāit kårtso månis
aplo åtmo kantaltā ” = in Latin " Faciens malum odit animam
suam ”; or according to the third way we may say : " vāit
kårtā, to aplo åtmo kaņķaltā = lit. (he who) commits evil , that
(man) hates his own soul” . This " kårtā to” is that Participle
of which I said (Part II. , Ch. III. , Art I. $ 2.) that it is not a
true Participle. The second manner cannot be used in the
above example , but only in this and similar sentences : « the
tree, the roots of which are long, is very large = ruk tačiñ pāļañ
lāmb, bhou võd ”. In the 3rd case, the construction is as if
the Relative Pronoun had not been omitted : this is the most
simple and exact rule for using the 3rd mode.
As for me I think that this substitution of the Demonstrative to the Relative
is only a popular way in order to avoid a less obvious construction , as
 237

happens in our languages, when common people speak. Hence it seems more
correct to avoid this mode of substitution .
In order to explain more distinctly this difficult point, let
us add a few observations.
a) If in sentences in which Demonstrative and Relative
Pronouns occur connected, we use the true Participle, then,
in the second part it is not required to use " to " ; e. g. " pātăk
kårtolo apņāk kantaltā = he who commits sin hates himself”;
yet, I think , we might also use it. With " zo -kāņ = whosoever” ,
9

we must use the corresponding “ to ”; e. g. " zo -kõn pāták kărtă,

to apņāk kaņķaltā ”.
6) Though it is quite according to the nature of the Konkani
language to omit the Relative Pronoun, yet the sentences are
sometimes so complicated that we do not know how to change
them into participial expressions ; then it is better to keep
the Relative Pronoun . On the contrary , sometimes the De
monstrative Pronoun is omitted and not the Relative Pronoun,
66
as in this and similar sentences : " That which you say is
true = jeñ moạtai, khăreñ ”, as in Latin “ quod dicis ( id ) verum
est” . Again, we may use the Relative Pronoun, but then in
the correlative sentences, the Latin construction is preferred
(qui-is ), viz. put first the Relative, then the Demonstrative
Pronoun. But here too , sometimes the sentences are so com
plicated or so arranged, that it is difficult to put the Relative
Pronoun first. In such a case, keep that construction which
is more natural and clearer ; e. g . stūñ to zo yeuñtso assā,
zāun vortautāigi ? = an es tu is qui venturus est ? are you
he who is to come?" Remark also that the Demonstrative
Pronoun can be put at the end , although its Verb be put in the
>

beginning and separated from it ; e... " jeñ tuveñ deveñ assā,
teñ di ”; or “ di tuveñ deveñ assā teñ = give what you owe" .
c) In such connected sentences the two connected Pro
nouns may be in different cases, i.e. the Relative may be in
one case, and the Demonstrative Pronoun in another case ;
and even in this case the Relative Pronoun may be omitted ,
 238

though it be accompanied by a Preposition ; e.g. " to gelo

66
mārog boro = the road on which he went , is good ”. “ Buddhi
pråkāšāk pāule gădie apņāk Dēvāk betailo = the moment in
which he came to the use of reason, he offered himself to
God ” .
About these Relative Pronouns remark that they are to
be found in many other forms, although somewhat modified ;
but the fundamental form and meaning always remain ; e.g.
from zo the Adverb " zăin ” is formed , which means "where, in
the place in which ”; “ zăiñ āuñ vetāñ, thăiñtumiñ yeunk nozo =
non potestis venire quo ego vado = you cannot come where I
am going ”. This " zăiñ ” may be used also instead of the 1st
Locative “ zantu ”; e.g. " poļeyā to zāgo zăiñ takā gāllo = see
the place in which they have put him ” . Again from zo is
formed “ zosso " , Correlative Pronoun, meaning " as” , Lat.
qualis, which Pronoun has a suspensive meaning, i.e. it re
quires a Correlative Pronoun. Hence it appears that the
sentence in which the Relative Pronoun in its original or
derived form occurs, must be a secondary or dependent one ;
this is the principle which may guide us in the use of this
Relative Pronoun .
What has been said about the Adjectives derived from the
Personal Pronouns, must be applied, servata proportione, to
the Adjective derived from zo ; here we have at least 24
combinations.

3. Correlative Pronouns
As some of these Pronouns are intimately connected with
the Relative Pronouns, a few things about them necessarily
have been said in the preceding para.; here they must be
explained more distinctly.
First of all let us explain the distinction of these Pro
nouns into Proximate and Remote Pronouns, which distinc
tion is to be applied also to some other Pronouns. This dis
tinction springs from the difference between 0o and to hinted at
 239

on p. 74, n.; " 0 " means “this , close by ”; “ to ” means that, far” ,
absolutely or relatively ; so also the derived Pronouns or Ad
jectives. An application of this rule is to be found on page 82 ;
"itlo = as much” , i.e. when the term of comparison is close by,
hence “ as much (as this )”, “ titlo = as much ”; i.e. when the term
=

of comparison is far, hence was much (as that)”; of course, the

term of comparison is not always expressed, then we must
consider the meaning ; e.g. keeping in my hand some coins,
if I say of another, that he has as many coins , I must say :
“ takā itliñ nāniñ assāt" ; if another has the coins , with which
I compare those of a third person, I should say : " takā titliñ
nāņiñ assāt". This distinction is well-grounded and certain ;
yet common people often do not observe it, and we hear
" titlots ugdās assā = that is all what I remember " . The
same thing must be said of “asso—tasso, yedo — tedo ” etc.
As the word itself shows , these Pronouns are connected
each other, so that where one is , the other too must be. But
this must be understood thus, i. e. when they are used as
Correlative, because some at least of these Pronouns can be
used also absolutely (see p. 83 , n. 2) . Moreover one of the
Pronouns can be understood, e.g. " to sangtā tăssentz zāleñ =
it happened just as he says" ; the full sentence would be :
“ kåsseň to sangtā tăsseñtz zāleñ ” . Nay sometimes both Pro
nouns are omitted ; e.g. " āuñ zaņañ sangleñ = I have said -

what I know " . Generally, only the first of the Correlative

Pronouns can be omitted, or both are used ; the omission of
both Pronouns is wrong .
a) "Kosson—tasso”:1) correspond to the Latin talis qualis, or
quemadmodum ita, or sicut... ita ; e.g. " as he came so he
went = kosso ailo, tasso gelo ". If " kosso_tasso " refer to a Noun ,
1) According to the Kanarese we should write “ koso, taso " . Further, some
people pronounce “ kaši, kašeň” in the Feminine and Neuter. This pronunci
ation is not common even among educated people ; moreover according to the
general rule (see Part III. Ch. VIII.) it seems better “ kăsi, kăseñ ”. Finally
" o " is changed int wă ” ; “ kăsi, kåseñ ", etc. (See Part III. Ch. VIII.)
 240

showing some quality etc., they are often changed into « kås
solo_tåssolo, i. e. into the derived Adjective, but used in the
same way ; e.g. " as life so death = kåssăli jiņi tåssåleñ mòrn ” .
Both " kosso ” and “ tasso" can be used also absolutely ; then
“ kosso” corresponds often to " how ", (see its concord above in
។

Ch.I.) and “ tasso" means “ such or in that way ". ' They can be
used in the Neuter Gender too and then they are a kind of
Adverbs; so “ tasseñ = in that way ”". The Proximate Pronoun
of “ tasso " , is " asso "; and the Proximate Adverb is “ ăssen " .
6) " Zosso (zăssi, zăssen)-tasso". The 2nd is the same as the
6
Correlative of " kosso" (v. supra ); the first is derived from “ zo ” ;
consequently the meaning is : “ in which way...in that way ” .
Here properly we should say : ' in that way ... in which ”; but in
Konkani the Latin construction is preferred, viz. to put first the
Relative Pronoun qui —is, qualis - talis. This " zosso " can be
replaced by “ kosso ” with nearly the same meaning, except that
“ kosso" seems to indicate more expressly some quality or a
similar thing, whereas " zosso" expresses directly the connexion
between two things; e. g. " zosso ailoi, tasso võtz = lit. in
66
which way you came on that go ” ; “ kosso ailoi, tasso võtz =
as you came in the very state go ”. Moreover “ zosso” cannot
be used absolutely (see above) .
As to the construction of “ zosso — tasso ” , the same things
said about the construction of " kosso_tasso ”, p. 198 , must be
applied to these Pronouns too. This construction cannot be
fully understood before explaining the construction of the
Verbs. Here let us put only some examples “ zăsseſ bāpān
makā dhadlā, tăsseñ āuñ tumkāñ dhadtāñ = as the Father sent
me, so I send you ” ; “ zăsseñ zăglaņeñ bāir sårtā udienti
thāun ani dišti poạtā åstamti păriant, tåssents zateleñ yeņeñ
mănšāčeā putrāčeñ = as lightning cometh out of the east, and
appeareth even into the west, so shall also the coming of the
Son of Man be.
c) “ Kitlo — itlo” (proximate), or kitlo — titlo” ( remote) cor
respond to " how much ... how many " , not in quantity but in
>
 241

number, as in Latin quot tot ; but it differs from the Latin,

because it can be used also in the Singular. Yet some use
this “ kitlo ” also in the meaning of " how much ” , of quantity,
>

in Latin quantum. Both “ kitlo ” and “ itlo” or “ titlo" can be

used also absolutely ; e. g . kitleñ = how much ?” Further they
may be joined to a Noun ; e.g. " kitli pirāi = how great age ? ”
d) The Pronouns which express the Latin quantus tantus
are “ kedo..yedo”, (proximate), and “ kedo...tedo” (remote) =
was great ... as great ”. Yet some expressthe samemeaning also
by adding " võļ = great”, or some other Adjective, declining this
“ kedo” according to the Gender ; so they say : " kedo vôd, kedi
vod , kedeñ vöd = quantus, quanta, quantum ; " kedo sobit =how
nice " . This manner is similar to the Latin quam magnus.
From " kedo " the Adverbs “ kedo! = how long time (perhaps
shortened from " kedo vēl), “ keda veļa, or kedaļa = when " ; from
stedo " the Adverb “ teda vēļa ” or shortened “tedaļa = then , at
that time” are derived. To all these Adverbs the Indefinite i
can be added (or ai); e.g. “ keda vēļai = at any time" , etc.
e) “ Zo ... to ” has been already explained.
In the first member or apótaOLS of correlative sentences the Particle “ gi”
can be used. (See p. 163, para. 2.)

4. Pronoun “ Apun "

This Pronoun refers to the person who speaks etc. Properly
it is a Pronoun of the 3rd Person , although sometimes used
also for the 2nd and 1st Person . The derived Adjective waplo ”
should be used as in Latin suus, in English wown ” ; yet not
seldom “ tasso" is used instead of " aplo ". I think that this is
not quite correct ; at least I do not see any reason to justify
this use .

Among the forms hinted at, but not given , on p. 77 , here I

mention « āpāpint” or emphatic “ āpāpints” ; 1.g. “ Dēu āpā
pints assolo = God was in Himself” , as we see in the common
catechism .

31
 242

5. Interrogative Pronouns
a) “ Kiten " . This Pronoun besides the meanings given in
Part II. has also the meaning that which ", as in Latin quod;
e.g. " kiteñ montai, khăreñ niñ = what you say is not true" .
It is used in the same way as the Latin quod; the demonstrative
Pronoun -teñ correlative to “ kiteñ ”, is not absolutely re
។

quired , but it is better to use it (see p. 239) ; 6. g. " kiteñ

montāi ten (or yen) khăren niñ" . This " kiteñ " is used some
times instead of " kaintso = which"; e. g. “ tujeñ nāuñ kiteñ =
what is your name?” “ akā kiteñ moņtāt = how do you call
this ? ” But vice versa the Adjectives are used instead of
Interrogative Pronouns sometimes ; e.g. " kåssåleñ = how, lit.
=

which ? "
6) There are two or three Interrogative Pronouns or Adjec
tives which are very similar; these are " khăiñtso, kontso,
kāņto” : “ khăiñtso ” may mean either " of what quality ” ( from
khaiñ = what') or « of what origin ” ( from 'khăiñ" = where') , .
the context must decide ; " kontso " is derived from " kòn " ;
hence it means which almost in the same meaning as “ kòn ”.
6
More frequently this “ kontso ” is used when the question is
about few things , e.g. “ in which hand do you feel pain ? = kontso
hāt duktā ? " If the question is about many, " kāņto” could
be used ; yet this difference is not strictly observed . This
" konto " literally means “ who that ?"
Examples to show the difference between these Adjectives :
“ What kind of bread do you like ? that coming from A or
that coming from B ? = khaiñtso undo tukā rutztā ?" " what
kind of man is he (good or bad) ? = khaiñtso mănis to ?”
“ which person of the most Holy Trinity became man = kontso
zoņ mănis zālo ?” “ which man (who) is he who came ? = āilo
månis konto ? "
6. Indefinite Pronouns
First, there seems to be some difference between the In
definite Nouns formed by doubling the first syllable and
 243

those formed by i. The first are rather distributive, the

others are indeterminate; e.g. " yeyēk månis yēundi = let each
man come" ; " kossoloi månis yēundi = let any man come” .
Again , both seem to differ from “ kaiñ ”; “ kaiñ ” means
"something' '; this fundamental meaning is kept also when it is
used as an indeterminate Pronoun ; €. g. “ Dēvāk kaiñ pātak
lagātgi ? = may perhaps something of sin be attached to God ?”
“Dēvāk kaiñ pātak laganāñ = to God no sin is attached ” .
Perhaps the Particle “ kaiñ " might be called dubitative in
questioning, emphatic in answering. It corresponds to the
Latin num or an and to prorsus; to the English " any" and
" at all” (“not, nothing") , to the German " irgend " and "gar".
If we keep in view the derivation and original meaning of
these Pronouns and Adjectives, we may succeed in using
them correctly .
From the examples given , it appears that these Pronouns
can be joined also to Nouns, and thus be used as Adjectives.
Strictly speaking, some Pronouns, if used as Adjectives, should
change their form somewhat ; e.g. " yēklo ” Pronoun ; " yēk ”
Adjectives; yet I have heard “ yēklo” used as Adjective also.
Exercise

Kurpek ād vetā, to soukāsāi bogināñ. Månis začeñ kaliz

sadeñ năiñ , Devāk mānuonāñ. Yeuñtso assā, to āilogi ?
To månis kāņākui soukāsāyen rāvonk soļināñ : to såkțānk
dostā. Sastrāk såma kāiñ mon Sabathā-dis yekā pidevontāk
boreñ kărčeñ (Luk. xiv, 3.) ? Pharisevāñ bităr yekleān, šastrā
zāņāran , vitzārleñ Jezu lāgiñ : Mēstri , sămărtitso vodlo upades
kāņ to ? Ruk khăiñ") podtāgī, thăiñ rāutā. Kāņānki tankleñ
nāñ Somia Jezu Kristāk utrānt sāmpadăunk. Rāyān lek
geunk suru kărtăts, hādlo tače lagiñ yekleāk, zaņeñ takā deve
zatale dhā hazār talent. Jezun poļeun gouji ji kărtăle vhaspi
månis ani yer lõk, sangleñ : Vāt sodā ; čeduñ morunk -nāñ:
1 ) Khăiñ and thăiñ” are two Correlative Adverbs which follow the rules of
the Correlative Pronouns.
31 *
 244

ani te takā bepārveān hasle. Vāurādi zo piuņeāk lāglo zāun

assā , grestātso zāināñ. Yēk pāuli Rupoiātso kedo vănto ?
Yēk pāuli Rupoiātso āțvo vāņto') . Māi sõņeānt,a) vīs®) tarker
Koờiāl aili ; mojea bāvān tikā pāuoili.

Art. IV. Verbs

A. Verbs in General
$ 1. Tenses and Moods
1. Indicative Mood

It is in most frequent use, even in many cases in which

in Latin the Subjunctive is used, as we shall see in the expla
nation of the tenses .
1. Present. It is used and has the same meaning as in
our languages , except that it is very often used for the Future
a ) to show a very near future thing, b) to show the certainty
of a future action, c ) to show a future thing connected with
our present resolution, e.g. instead of saying “ I am resolved
to do so ” , they say, “ I do..." ; again, to the question " will he
>

come?” they answer " yetā = he comes"; to the question : " will
you do it ?" they answer " kårtāñ = I do ” . Moreover it is used
in the oratio obliqua instead of the Imperfect or other tense ;
e.g. " yetāñ mon taņeñ sāngleñ = he said that he would come" .
This point will be explained more distinctly later on. Other
cases in which the Present may be used for the Future, e.g.
the historical present are as in Latin.
2. Imperfect. This tense is used generally as the Latin
amabam or as the English “ I was loving ” , yet not so often , as
> >

1) This is the easiest way of expressing the fractions, i.e. to join the re
quired Numeral Adjective to “ vāṇto = portion " ; so we get “ āțvo vāṇto = } " ,
“ dhāvo vāņto = 16”, “ sõļāvo vāņķo = 16 " etc.
2) A month corresponding nearly to our September. See Appendix to the
Dictionary.
3) To express the date the cardinal numbers are used.
 245

in Latin ; for, sometimes , the Past is substituted . Besides ,

while we use in Lati n very ofte n the Impe rfec t to show time, e.g.
cum regnaret Servius Tullius... quando ipse ambulabat ...;
in these and similar examples, the Konkani language prefers to
use the Participle with “ veļār = in time”, or the Gerund in
" -anañ ” , although it can be used also in the Imperfect with
រ

“ kăiñ = when "; e.g. “ when Tippu-Sultan was reigning = Tīpu

Sultān rāsvot kārtanan ", or " Tipu -Sultān rāsvot kårčeā
veļār " , or " kăiñ Tīpu-Sultān rāsvot kărtălo ”.
3. Past. This tense is used like the Latin amavi, as this
"amavi" is translated by the English Past (for, amavi is ex
pressed by : " I loved, and I have loved " ); moreover it is used
in some cases in which we should use the Imperfect; e.g.
" to ghăt zāuñ assolo = he was (erat) strong ” .
4. Perfect. It is expressed by the Latin " amavi” , as this
is expressed by the English “ I have loved ” . It seems to be
used, especially when it expresses a time entirely passed ;
e.g. " last year I went to Bombay = gelea vorsānt āuñ Bombăi
gelāñ ”.
5. Past Perfect. In Latin amaveram . This tense pro
perly expresses a time past , compared to another past time . As
such it is rare ; because a) when this tense is governed by a
Conjunction (when , after ... ), it is translated by the Participle ;
.

6) sometimes the simple Perfect is used ; but, on the other

hand , sometimes this tense , perhaps not quite correctly,
seems to be used instead of the Perfect; e. g . “ taņeñ apleñ
kām kårunk natylleñ = he has not performed his work ” . Again ,
sometimes it is used for the Imperfect, sto nidyllo = he was
sleeping ”. As emphatic , viz. as an Emphatic Perfect, it is
often used ; and this seems the most common meaning of
this tense.
Let us try to give a better explanation of the three last
tenses . Although Past, Perfect and Past Perfect are very
near as to their meaning, for which reason sometimes they
are used promiscuously, yet in some cases we must distin
 246

guish them, and use them not promiscuously. As far as I could

learn from many examples considered in this minute and
difficult point, this difference is made in Konkani: Past is used
to show a past thing which does not any more continue ; Per
fect shows a past thing which in some way still continues, or
at least, it is unknown whether it ended ; if two past things are
considered, expressly or implicitly, of which one is anterior
to the other, the Past Perfect is used, although in English the
Perfect or Past perhaps would be used. Examples : “ Yester
day I wrote a letter = kāl āuveñ kāgad boreilen " . If we say :
" boreilāñ ", it would implicitly show something which still
continues ; e.g. " up to this I did not get any answer". " Where
is your brother ? = tuzo bāu khăiñ assā ?" " he is gone to
Bombay (and is still there) = to Bombăi gelā" ; " Antony
died three years ago = Anton tīn vorsañ adiñ melā " ; " yester
day I walked three hours, to -day two hours = āuñ kāl tin uorañ
tsalựlloñ, āz don uorañ tsalloñ ” .
Although this seems to be the difference between these
tenses, we cannot pretend to explain all cases according to
>

this rule or to have it observed by all .

6. Ist Future Absolute . It is used a) to show a future
thing, without any doubt; b) yet sometimes it seems to be used
also for an uncertain future event, chiefly if it was consi
dered at a particular past time about to happen ; e.g. " hariyekā
kšaņa amkāñ bēñ distaleñ to moruñ mon or mortolo moņ = we
were every moment afraid that he would die ” . Yet to show
a doubtful future the Contingent or the Potential Future
(see below) is commonly used, viz. the Future in an or in.
c) It is used also in this and similar sentences : “ Why should
he run ? = kiteāk dāuntolo ? " although such sentences might be
expressed also by the Necessary Mood ; e.g. " kiteāk dāvazāi ?”
or also by the Infinitive as in Italian " perche correre? = kiteak
-

dāunčeñ ? ” d) It may be used also to show not a future thing,

but a potentiality ; e.g. " he has no teeth, how can he bite?
takā dānt nānt, kosso sābtolo ?" yet, here, it would be better
 247

to use the Potential Mood. e) Finally it is used to express

aim or purpose instead of the Supine; e. g. " zărtăr āuñ favote
jinsiñ sāngtoloñ ani tumiñ băktien aikateleāt, devāči kurpa
amkāñ zāi = for me to speak properly and for you to hear
with devotion , is required the grace of God ”. This last mode
is not very common , although it seems to be elegant.
7. 2nd Future or Past Future : in Latin, e.g. vocavero. This
tense is seldom used ; for, if the Latin 2nd Future is preceded
by some particle , the Participle is used ; moreover the 1st
Future is often used instead of the 2nd. If, however, it is re
quired, the Potential Future (in -ån or -in) is used by many ;
yet see p. 119 , para. 9 , from which we can understand that
“ nidtoñ assoloñ ” can be considered as the 2nd Absolute Fu
ture , “ nidlo astolo or nidun astolo” as the 2nd Contingent
Future ; whereas " nidān " seems to be an incorrect form of the
2nd Future. Moreover a periphrastic 2nd Future often occurs,
corresponding to the Latin ; e.g. si fecerit omnia quae prae
cepta, sunt vitam vivet = to upadēs sambaļăt zaļeār, jiņ ji
etolo " : i. e. the Future Potential joined to the Conditional of
szatā ” , lit. “ if it happens (that) he will keep the command
ments" etc. Hereby its construction is also known . It seems
chiefly used with a Future preceded by " if ;" about this later
on .

II. Imperative Mood

This Mood is used not only to command, but also 1 ) to
inquire, to consult, e.g. " amiñ kiteñ kåriāñ ? = what can we
=

do ?" 2) to exhort, e. g. " răzār kåriāñ = let us pray".

Pay attention to the difference between the 1st and 2nd
Person Plural , h.e. the 1st Person is “ nasal”, as usual , the
2nd is not nasal” . The 2nd form of the 2nd Person Plural
is used only in some cases. The form in a may be always
used .
Many forms of Imperative have been given in Part II. The
first form is more common in the really imperative meaning,
except the 1st Person “ -ungi” which does not often occur.
 248

The 2nd form in “ -uñ " is rather permissive, optative and

benedictive, or rather it expresses also Imperative, but mixed
with the Benedictive , Permissive and Optative Mood (the
Benedictive which is put by Max Müller in Sanskrit, may
be considered as contained in the Optative); if nothing of
Imperative is expressed by the Verb, then it is only Optative
or Subjunctive which has the same form . The 3rd form ,
periphrastic, cannot be used promiscuously, because it seems
to express some permanent thing ; we may see whether in
English or Latin we could use that periphrastic form ; then
we may , usually, employ it also in Konkani ; so we cannot
say : " fias transiens = become crossing (e. g . the river)". The
last form expresses not only command but necessity : there
fore it cannot used indifferently, we may employ the plan just
now suggested.
III. Optative Mood
As hinted above, the meaning of this mood implies not
only desire , but also blessing etc. Consequently in Konkani
there is no necessity to distinguish Optative from Benedictive
with Max Müller. By this we do not mean that whenever
desire or blessing is expressed, the Optative Mood must always
be used ; often the Indicative or some other Mood may used ;
e.g. “ makā nidunk khuši assā = I am willing to sleep ”.
Only three tenses have been given, because usually those
tenses are sufficient. If some other tense be required, it
will be not difficult to find out from the given forms of the
paradigm , a suitable one to express this other tense. The
Future Optative may be expressed by the Imperfect; yet in
our European languages also a pure Future Optative is not
commonly found. That " boreñ " or " puro " put in the para
digm, is not necessarily to be used, but can be used in the
Imperfect and Past, as strengthening the meaning ; or rather,
it expresses explicitly what by omitting those words, would
be implicit ; " assăllen" can be omitted as usually.
 249

IV . Subjunctive Mood
As in this Mood many tenses are contained, which differ
considerably one from the other, and on the other hand I do
not wish to introduce new moods, without necessity , so it is
somewhat difficult to speak of this Mood generally . Hence I
will speak of each tense in particular.
1. Present. It is very seldom used as a pure Subjunctive
(often as Optative), yet sometimes it occurs a) like a permis
sive Verb ; e. g. “ buk mezār gāluñ = he may put the book on
the table”; b) to consult or to ask sāuñ kiteñ kăruñ ? = what
can I do ? = quid faciam ." It coincides almost with the
Imperative, or we may say that what has been given as
Imperative is , strictly speaking, rather Subjunctive. The
Latin Subjunctive, as in the sentence " qui possum scire = how
can I know it”, may be expressed by the Absolute Infinitive,
sometimes, sāuveñ kåsen zāņa zāunčeñ ? ”
2. Pure Imperfect, as in Latin indigebamus gratia Dei
>

ut faceremus bonum. First remark that on p. 109 the 3rd

Person Plural has been omitted which however has been put
at p. 90. Remark moreover that thes of the termination , is to be
pronounced not as ts, but as a pure s. It occurs very seldom,
and only in this meaning, as in the above example, viz. to
show aim . In reading, I remember to have found it about
three times. It seems to have only two persons in the Singular
and one in the Plural, but three terminations for the three
genders. What is to be done, if another Person occurs ?
Another Person can very seldom occur, because this tense,
in Transitive Verbs, has a passive meaning. Yet, if it occurs
at least in Neuter Verbs , I heard the given terminations of
the 3rd Person are suitable also for the 2nd Person ; at all
events we can use another tense, e. g. the Supine. I have
not heard the other persons used, i. e. 2nd Singular and
1st and 2nd Plural ; hence I could not put them down, in
order not to invent a language; by seeking more exactly,
we may perhaps find thein. I must , however, add that I
32
 250

tried, by asking, to find whether the other Persons in oi etc.

could be used ; but from the answers which I received, it
seems that they are not used . Common people do not use this
form ; books do not exist, at least in such quantity as
to throw sufficient light ; hence it is not so easy to determine
this point. If we find a difficulty in this tense, we may use
some other tense for it, e.g. the Supine.
Besides the given form of this tense, another occurs some
times ; i.e. instead of adding “ -soñ" etc. “ -sărkoñ ” is added ,
modifying this “ -sărkoñ ” in the same way as " -soñ ” .
Let us now give some examples to explain this tense :
" Jesus Christ sent the Holy Ghost in order to enable the
Apostles to preach the Gospel all over the world = Jezu
Kristān Spirita Såntāk daļlā Apostolānk Evanjel săg!ea
souñsārānt părgăt karisso ” ; “ I give you a prize in order to
encourage you to learn = āuñ tukā yēk inäm ditāñ, sikunk
tukā dhăirivont kårisso” ; “ the father gives a punishment to
>

the daughter in order that she may become good = bāpui

duvek šikšā ditā , tikā bori kärissi ".
Though I. have used this tense also in the negative form ,
yet, I think, this is not so often used , and instead of it, the
Supine Negative might be used.; e.g. " āuñ tukā šikšā ditāñ
pātkānt portun podanāñ zāunk = I give you punishment in
order that you may not fall again ” .
3. Past, Perfect, Past Perfect. A special form for them
does not exist. I will show in the Appendix how they can
be expressed. For the present it is enough to know, that very
often the Indicative or the Participle or the Gerund are used
in their place .
4. ist Conditional. Latin si facerem . In general, the
Conditional form is most largely used ; because it is used not
only when we should use the conditional , but in many other
cases too, provided the meaning does not forbid it. This
tense does not only express the Latin si facerem , si fecisset,
but also any tense preceded by " si= ši vis” etc., though on the
 251

other hand not always is a tense preceded by si to be trans

lated by the Conditional in " -leār.” Hence as many English tenses
have not their corresponding tenses in Konkani, the Conditional
is one means of supplying the apparent deficiency in some way ;
e.g. “ you should go to the church every day ” ; this “ should go"
has no exactly corresponding tense in Konkani ; hence we may
express it by the Conditional thus : “ tuveñ hăriyek dīs Igărjent
geleār bhou boreñ = lit. if you were to go every day to the
Church, this would be very good ” . Yet there are other modes
of translating such sentences. This 1st Conditional therefore
is used, a) as I have just now said ; b) sometimes to show time
(though perhaps not quite correctly) , instead of the Gerund in
" -anañ ”; c) sometimes it expresses desire, but then it is Opta
tive ; d ) common people use sometimes the 1st Conditional in
stead of the 2nd Conditional; but this is wrong.
Remarks. a) There are at least three forms for expres
sing this Conditional, viz. 1 ) the termination " -leār "; 2) " zăr
tăr = if ”, with the Contingent Future, €. g. “ zărtăr to sikat
if he learnt" (see the distinct explanation of “ zărtăr” in
2.
Art. VII.) ; 3) " pokšek = in case that ..."; it is used like a
-

Postposition , i. e. joined to the Participle ; e.g. " pātak adarle

lea pokšek = in case that sin should be committed ” . " Pokšek"
is the Dative of “ pokša = side ”.
6) Sometimes the termination “ -leār” takes an i at the
end : then the meaning is "although" . Instead of this i , " zări
tắr” may be used with the Contingent Future .
c) The first part of the Negative form should be conju
gated as the Negative Present Indicative : " nidanāñ zaleār,
nidanāiñ zaleār” etc., although common people do not conju
gate it. See below $ 2 .
5. 2nd Conditional. Many things said about the 1st
Conditional can be applied to the 2nd Conditional. Instead
of it we may use " zărtăr ” with the Past Perfect; to express
" although ”, i is added to the 2nd part, or " zărităr” (zăritări)
>

is used with the Past Perfect; e.g. “ širāp tukā, Korozāim, ši

32 *
 252

rāp tukā, Bethsaida; kiteāk zărtăr tumče thăiñ zallyo-tåssålyo

podvedig környo Tyrus ani Sidon mullea serānt zallyo, te
bhou témpa adiñ prāčitačeñ văstur ani gobor gāln prāčit ada
runk pāute assalle = woe to thee, Chorazim , woe to thee,
Bethsaida, for if in Tyre and Sidon had been wrought the
miracles that have been wrought in you , they had long ago
done penance in sackcloth and ashes ” . (Matthew xi. 21.)
6. Ist Conditionatum , in Latin the 2nd part of this sen
tence, si diligeres Deum , servares ejus mandata. In Greek it
is called atówooıç. I call it Conditionatum , because it expresses
what would happen , if a condition be fulfilled (as in Theology
Conditionata). See page 120 , para. 11 , about the exact form
of the 1st Conditionatum, and its meaning.
Though the regular and usual Conditionatum is as given
in the paradigm , yet sometimes it is allowed by the meaning,
to use also the Present or the Future in its place ;. in such a
case it seems that in the apótaois the form in “ -leār” is not
properly used ; the Present or some other tense, as the meaning
requires, should be used instead of w -leār” ; e.g. " zărtăr tuñ
Dēvāće kušie pårmāņe tzáltai, tukā santos meļtā = if you walk
according to the will of God , you will find joy”.
7. Past or 2nd Conditionatum . First observe that
by accident the more common form of it in “-tolo" given in $ 2 ,
has been omitted in $ 4. Then see page 120 for the exact
form and different meanings.
The tenses of the Conditional and Conditionatum , strictly
speaking, should form a peculiar Mood .
V. Potential Mood
This Mood, as distinct from other Moods, does not exist in
many languages ; its meaning is expressed by some other Mood
or with circumlocutions. In Konkani we must distinguish
this Mood, because it has peculiar terminations , at least in
the principal form ( -iyet” ). I find this Mood also in the
Kanarese Grammar by Hodson , although this author compre
។
 253

hends under such a name also what I call Necessary Mood.

I do not see this Mood in the Tuļu Grammar or in the
Grammar of the Mahrātti language which should have, as
some think, great similarity with Konkani. The fact is that
Mahrātti might have had great similarity in former times ;
now many things are different, and we cannot make objections
against some rules of this Grammar by saying that in Mahrātti
the things are not so. I must however add that in Mahrātti
there are Potential Verbs, derived from a simple Verb by the
addition of 1 to denote possibility.
After these introductory remarks, consider, that although
in the paradigm (p. 110 etc.) in some forms the neuter of
" assā ” has been given , sometimes the context may require
another Gender ; e. g. “ assolo” instead of " assạleñ ”. Remark
further, that this Mood is varied in many different ways,
which can be hardly reduced to rules. The given forms are
only the most common and even these are formed by some in
a different way .
1. This Mood is used to indicate a ) whether a thing is al
lowed, b) whether there is probability that a thing will be done,
c) whether there is power ( potentia physica) to do something.
To indicate the first meaning, more commonly the first form
in “ -iyet ” is used ; to indicate the second meaning, the same
first form in " -iyet ” is used, or often also the third form ; to
indicate the third meaning, more commonly the second form
with stanktā or tank assā ” is used . This must be under
stood of the affirmative form . For the negative, in the first
meaning, “-naye" is used, or often also " nozo " ; in the second
“ nozo ” , in the third " tankanāñ ” . As regards the Future
Potential a distinct explanation is required ; for it is of very
frequent use. This Future in an (or in) is used a) to show a
future thing, but with some doubt, e. g. if I ask, “ is such
.

thing found in the bazār” ? If there is some probability

of finding it, they answer : "meļat = it will be probably found”.
On the contrary, if they are certain to find such a thing, they
 254

answer : smeļtā ” or “ meļteleñ ”. So, if seeing a sick man we

say : " to mortolo " we mean to say: all signs of approaching
death are there. If we say : “ morat”, we mean to say : “ I
do not see certain signs of approaching death, yet he may
die " . b) This future is used also to express these and similar
English phrases : “ I should like to ask you = āuñ tujeñ lagiñ
itsāran ”, you might perhaps say : " tumiñ sangšāt”.
2. With the Potential Mood a kind of periphrastic conju
gation takes place by adding the Verb “ assā ” in the required
tenses to the form in “ -iyet”; e. g. " poleiyet assalleñ = it was
to be seen " . And again the same form of Potential prefixed
to some Participles, becomes an Adjective corresponding to
the Latin Adjectives in -bilis ; e. g. " poleyet assalleo văstu =
res visibiles”, h. e. exposed to the sight of all, or which are
worthy to be seen . About this see below.

VI. Necessary Nlood

This Mood is not put in the Kanarese, Tuļu and Mahrātti
Grammars, which I have seen ; yet its meaning occurs in all
languages ; why, therefore, introduce this new Mood ? I
answer : because it seemed to be as necessary, as I thought
the Original and the 2nd Locative are , which are not to be
found in Kanarese and Mahrātti. I must, however, acknow
ledge that, strictly speaking, we might perhaps have avoided
this new Mood by saying that its meaning is expressed by
adding “ zāi” to some other tense of the Verb, or by using
the periphrastic conjugation , as in Latin necesse est ut faciam ,
faciendum est etc. I preferred to make a special tense ; be
cause a) the union of " zāi” with the Verb seems to be not
only an apposition , but a real composition. It is true that
the termination “ zāi" does not change, and another peculiar
termination does not occur ; yet the first reason probat nimis,
because it would prove also that the Potential Mood is not a
peculiar Mood, which nobody will grant ; the second reason
proves only that not all tenses or forms of this Mood are
 255

peculiar to this Mood ; and I grant that if no peculiar termi

nation would occur, I would not have introduced this new
Mood .
b) The Necessary Mood renders this part of Grammar
much easier and clearer. This reason must be joined to the
first reason in order to have its strength. You will perhaps
say : non sunt multiplicanda entia sine necessitate. In this
matter a great utility can be considered as quaedam necessi
tas; moreover, although this could not be called necessitas,
why must be prohibited multiplicare modos cum magna uti
litate ? All philosophers say that ex duobus bonis melius est
eligendum vel eligi potest. At all events , in dubiis libertas,
you are allowed, as for you , to eliminate this Mood , which is
not absolutely required.
After these introductory remarks, a few words about its use.
1. The necessity expressed by this Mood may be of any
kind, i.e. moral (obligation) , or physical , or of every day life,
not regarding obligation ; consequently it can be used whenever
some kind of necessity is to be expressed, although such a
necessity be concealed by different expressions of other langu
ages ; it corresponds to the Latin debeo, necesse est, con
venit, expedit, and to many other similar expressions. It is
used moreover, joined to the Conditional of “ zatā ”, to express
sentences like this : " if you wish to go to heaven , keep the com
mandments = sårgār votsazāi zaleār, sambaļ upadēs ”. Here
two notions are expressed at the same time : first, the condi
tional notion, then the necessity of doing this and that, in
order to obtain what is expressed by the Conditional.
2. The use of the different forms of Necessary Mood is un
derstood by the translation of each form given in the paradigm.
Only you must remark that this Mood is managed in so many
various and elegant ways as to render it impossible to give all
the different combinations or to reduce them to certain rules ;
practice will teach you ; yet something will be said hereafter.
The given forms are the fundamental forms only.
 256

3. " Zāi”, which expresses necessity in general , has no conju

gation not only when it is used alone, but also when it is joined
to another Verb. If this " zāi” is used to express necessity in
general, the other tenses may be formed by adding the cor
responding tenses of " zatā " to " zāi" ; e.g. " makā zāi zateleñ =
I shall be in need of..." ( see p . 136 , $ ?, para. 4). Its con
struction is regular, viz. the thing which is necessary is put
in the Nominative, the person to whom it is necessary in
the Dative, just as if the literal meaning were : " it is neces
sary” . In the Negative form the root is different, for the
reason shown in the conjugation. This “ zāi” is often pro
nounced " jāi” ; some say also jè" ; but this pronunciation
seems to be vulgar.
4. Not all tenses of this Mood are used. Hence what is
to be done if we require such tenses ? I think, that the peri
phrastic conjugation may help us to supply those deficient
tenses .
VII. Infinitive Mood
This Mood, along with the Gerunds and Participles,
presents many difficulties.
1. Absolute. This mood has two forms, viz. either " -tso ,
(-či, -čeñ )” or “s-untso, -unči, -unčeñ" (see pp. 92 , 121 , para. 14) .
It is used a) absolutely to express the meaning of the Verb :
we would say in Latin tò legere, tò scribere ; b) like the Gerund
in di of the Latin : voluntas discendi; c) for the Future (see p.
246 , para. 6) ; d) for the Subjunctive (see p. 249 , para. 1 ) . In
the a) case it agrees with its object; e.g. " to read a book
= yēk pustak vātčen " ; " to beat a beast = yēk monzāt
mārči”; “ to do a work = yek kām kårčeñ " . In the b) case
it agrees with the Noun governing this Genitive. If this
Infinitive has moreover an object, the Infinitive may agree
with the object or with the Noun governing the Genitive, e.g.
“sărgār vetči khuši = the desire of going to heaven "; " yen
kām kărčeñ khuši = the wish of doing this work ", or " yeñ
kām kårči khuši ” . Yet see p. 201 , para. 13. The four pre
 257

ceding cases are easy and more or less used also by com
mon people. The two following cases are somewhat high
and elegant. e) The Absolute Infinitive is used for the
· Present in descriptions , as in Latin the Historical Infinitive ;
e.g. " taņeñ sakālinčeñ ani sānječeñ răzār kårčeñ bhou aprup ;
taņeñ sakrament kāņgeunčeñ bhou uņeñ = he recites frecite)
his morning and evening prayers very seldom ; he receives (re
ceive) the sacraments very little ( seldom )”. Yet we could
explain this example literally also in this way : his reciting
prayers ( is) very rare” etc.; then this Infinitive would not be
used for the Present : the former explanation however is more
natural ; f) it is used, as in Latin the Accusative with Infini
tive , e.g." khăinčea-i mănšān tuje lagiñ māgči tukā gărz nāñ món ,
yeu vorvịũ amiũ sắtmandtauũ tuũ ailãi món Dễva lagtso =
thou needest not that any man should ask thee, by this we be
lieve that thou camest forth from God ” . Remark that “ māgči”
agrees with “ gărz ", although it is in a different sentence.
In these cases, the subject of the Infinitive is more frequent
ly put in the Instrumental, although the Verb be Neuter.
In the cases e) and f) it seems to be not only more frequent,
but also usual to put the subject in the Instrumental ; this
point will be explained more distinctly below. As regards
the construction of the Instrumental with the Infinitive, the
rule is the same as in Latin, i.e. the subject is put in the Ins
trumental, the Verb in the Absolute Infinitive; if there be
some Noun by which this Infinitive is governed, as in the
above example, it agrees with that Noun ; else it is put in the
Neuter. No Past Infinitive is in use, as we shall see below.
8) It is used in the Dative instead of the Supine ; because the
Dative is used also to express purpose ; but then as to the
meaning it is rather the Supine : “ Dēvān amkāñ rătsleāt āmtso
åtmo bačāu kărunčeāk = God has created us to save our soul” .
Yet in similar sentences, generally speaking, it is better to
use the Supine, or the Participle with " pāsvot”.
Remark a) that the Absolute Infinitive having a declina
33
 258

ble form can be not only conjugated but also declined ; i. e.

put e.g. in the Dative just as Nouns , if according to the
general rules one or the other case is required (see p. 123 ,
para. 10 and alibi); e. g. " boreunčeāk lāi = lit. apply to write
(cause to write). Remark b) that in some cases it may
used promiscuously with the Supine, even in some of the
cases stated above; e.g. " morunk makā khuši assā, or morči
makā khuši assā = I wish to die ” . Remark finally c) that
the a) case comprehends also the Verbal Nouns as stated at
page 168, 1. 8, a fine.
The Absolute Infinitive, as regards the form , is the same as the Participle
Future, the Gerundive etc.; hence the context must decide. Somebody might
perhaps reduce all forms in « -tso " to one ; for the sake of distinction we
are allowed to keep them separate.
2. Supine. a) The chief meaning of the Supine is to show
purpose or aim and corresponds to the Latin Supine in um
and to the forms with sut = in order that” . 6) Yet sometimes
it is used also to show an implicit aim, i. e. when in Latin
we should use neither the Supine nor ut, there being however
the notion of some aim implied in the sentence; e. g. “ do you
like to go ? = votzunk tukā khušigi?” c) Finally it may be
used sometimes for the Absolute Infinitive, although no aim
seems to be expressed ; e.g. -peleātso mosor kårunk pātakgi ?=
is it sin to hate the neighbour ?”
Remark that to express aim very often instead of the
Supine we may use the Participle, especially that in -tso
with some Postposition having a meaning agreeing with the
fundamental meaning of the Supine ; e.g. " pāsvot = for”; “ khātir
= for”; so we may say : " săkaț văstu moje motin poļeileāt bud
sikunk = I have considered all things with my mind in order to
learn wisdom " , or " ... bud sikčea pāsvot” ; “ magā ani tumkāñ
meļteleñ, tumtso santos bhorpur zāunčea pāsvot = ask and you
shall receive : that your joy may be full ” . The use of
" pāsvot..." with the Participle is perhaps more common than
the Supine, especially when the Verb has an object. The
Future can also be used for the Supine (see p. 247 , e).
 259

In some Verbs the termination -onk seems to be used

instead of -unk .
VIII. Participles
1. Present. There are many forms; almost all may be
used as Adjectives or as Pronouns ; e. g . “ vātstolo mănis = a
reading man " , or only " vātstolo = he who reads” .
The form in -tso is the same as the Future Participle. It
seems that, strictly speaking, the Participle in ' -tso cannot be
used also as a Pronoun , whereas the Participle in -tolo can be
so used ; e . g . " vāit kårtolo sikšā bogtolo = evil-doer will suffer
.

" .
pain” ; we could not say correctly: " vāit kårtso..... "; we >

should say : "vāit kårtso månis .. "

The form in -tā to is not a true Participle, and does not
follow the rules of the Participle, but the rules of the corre
lative sentences (see passim Part II. Chapter III. and Part IV.
Chapter III.) ; e. g. “ God will give a reward to those who walk
uprightly = (je) săma tsåltāt, tankāñ Deu inām ditolo" . The
most simple rule for the right use of such a Participle in
-tā to is not to consider it at all as a Participle, but to
consider to as a Correlative Pronoun of zo understood. This
kind of Participle is, however, often used even in cases in
which we should not use a correlative sentence ; e. g .“ the man ,
who is coming, is my brother = yetā to månis mozo bău ”. It
seems that it is used instead of the forms in -tolo or -tso,
when we want to give some emphasis or to point out some
thing.
As regards the Participle in -tolo, -teli, -teleñ, although I
have heard it also used as a Future Participle, yet as it cannot
be used promiscuously, it will be safer, especially for begin
ners, to use for the Future Participle only the form in -tso,
and to use the form in -tolo only as a Present Participle.
The rule, however, seems to be this : the form in -tolo, -teli,
-teleň (see p. 119, para. 10) is used as a Future Participle ,
but following the rules of the Correlative Pronouns , as we
have said of the Participle in -tá to ; the form in -tolo,
33 *
 260

-tåli, -tåleñ” (s. I. c.) is often used as a Future Participle,

.

but following the rules of the common Participles.

The Participle in -tāñ is used in composition, chiefly
a) with " astanañ " in the Present Gerund “ kārtastanañ " , or
shortened, “ kartanañ = doing, or been doing, or while doing" ;
6) with “ zāuñ” in the compound form of the Imperative
" midtañ zāuñ = let him be sleeping”; c) in the periphrastic
conjugation : " āuñ kårtāñ thăiñ assāñ ” . Now I remember
only “ mortāñ månis = decrepit man ” , in which sentence “mor
tāñ ” is used out of composition, (if it is really a Participle,
from “ mor = die ” and not another original word) . The chief
meaning of all these forms of the Present Participle, except
that in -tă to, and perhaps the Participle in -táñ, is, mostly, like
the meaning of the Latin Present Participle in -ns, i.e. the
contraction of a relative sentence ; e.g. " nidtolo or nidtso
mănis = the man who sleeps" etc.
The Participle in -un, or shortened, -n, is, I may say , every
thing, viz. Participle Present and Past Gerund etc.; for this
reason you find this form among Participles and Gerunds.
As a Participle it is used but seldom in the periphrastic
conjugation, e.g. “ nidun assā = he is sleeping ”; it has some
times also a passive meaning, e.g. " boreun assā = it is written ” .
Besides the given forms, another occurs compounded of
ståssolo = such ”, added to the Participle in -tolo etc.; this « tăssolo”
is added also to the other Participles ; e. g. "kårtalo tăssolo ,
kello tăssolo " etc. What is the construction of this Parti
ciple ? If we consider it as a real Participle, its construction
cannot be satisfactorily explained ; just as I said of the Geni
tive, which is almost inexplicable, if it is considered as a Noun.
If we consider that ståssolo ” as the Pronoun which means
" such , ” added as a Konkanism to the Participle, its construction
is easy ; because it is the same as the construction of such a
Pronoun if it were used to strengthen the Participle ; i.e.
as we have seen, " tåssolo " is correlative of " kåssolo " ; the first
correlative is often omitted ; hence it remains only ståssolo ” .
 261

In the common cases it has no peculiar difficulty, yet there

are some sentences in which it cannot be easily explained
otherwise than by making the supposition stated above ; e.g.
“ åtmo åskåt zatā, yā pātkā vorviñ mortā, dekun takā portun
ghăț kårunk, vo mahā pātkānčea gratsarān jīv kādlolo tăssă
leāk portun jivont kårunk thodeañ voktānči gărz assā= the soul
becomes weak or dies by sin ; therefore in order to give her
new strength or to give her a new life, if she unfortunately
should have been deprived of her life, some medicines are
required ". Here the Participle “ kādlolo tăssolo " is divided
into two parts , one of which agrees with “ jiv (kādlolo )”, the >

other agrees with stakā ”; why such a division ? No reason

can be given if this participle is like the others ; on the con
trary if we consider “ tăssolo ” as I said , then it is very easy ,
because we can translate so : “ ...or to strengthen such (a soul)
deprived of her life ..." etc.; or, more literally: “ ... she (who
has been) deprived of her life by mortal sin, to such to give
... " . This literal translation explains in the most simple
and natural way the construction of ståssolo ” .
I said that « -un ” is sometimes contracted into “ n ” ; this contraction cannot
always be made ; euphony and use must be consulted ; e. g. “ kāņeun ” cannot
be contracted . It seems that the Verbs having the root ending in a consonant
take only “ n ” whenever it is not too hard to pronounce it. The Verbs having
the root ending in a vowel, more frequently , if not always, take “ un ” . More
over I have often heard “ on” instead of “ un ” ; this may be a variety ; yet it
4
seems rather convenient to use “ on ” , if “ v” precedes, as is the case with the
Verbs in " au” which change “ u ” into “ y ” when the termination to be added
begins with a vowel. (See p . 143 , para. 2.)
2. Imperfect. This is the contraction of the Relative Pro
noun with the Imperfect Tense " qui faciebat = kårtalo " . It
may be used also in the correlative sentences ; e.g. " the man
who was yesterday laughing, died to-day = kāl hastālo mănis
az melo " . This Participle is better used, adding to, i.e.
as the Participle in -tā to (see above) . It may be used also
as a Pronoun .
Though really this Participle seems to differ from the Present Participle,
yet common people are not aware, I think, of such a difference.
 262

3. Future. This is, as the Latin venturus, a short ex

pression of the Relative Pronoun with the Verb in a Future
Tense wille qui venturus est. = yeuộtso ” . Besides the form in
-tso we may use also the form in -tolo (see above, Present
Participle) .
This Participle is used a) to contract sentences with the
Verb in a Future Tense ; b) in the periphrastic conjugation
with future meaning " yeuñtso assā = is venturus est."
4. Past. This is the contraction of a relative sentence
with the Verb in a Past Tense : qui venit. In Latin we have
no Past Participle corresponding to this qui venit, except the
deponent and aa few other Verbs ; in Konkani , we have it, if the
Verb is Neuter ; "Wilo mănis = homo qui venit ” .
=

But in the Transitive Verbs, the Participle has a passive

meaning, because the Participle has the same nature as the
tense, of which it is a contraction ; hence, as the Past of the
Transitive Verbs has a passive meaning, the Participle too has
a passive meaning ; yet sometimes I have found it used in an
active meaning ; e.g. "kākult keleānk kākult meļteli = lit, those
who have done mercy will find mercy ". Yet there is a way
of explaining this example without saying that the Participle
has an active meaning .
Although this Participle exists, yet it is very seldom used ;
generally they use the Past Perfect Participle ; so " āz tukā
mello månis mozo bāu = the man whom you met to-day (is)
my brother.” This Past Perfect Partíciple is used especially
in contracted relative sentences.
5. Perfect. This should be “ kelā ” ; but it is not used,
except by a few , it seems. Yet the form “ elā to ” might
be used in the same way in which “ kartā to” is used ; e.g.
to those who have performed their duty I give a price =
aplo kāido kelā, tankañ yek inām ditāñ " .
6. Past Perfect. It differs from the preceding Participle,
only because the 1 is doubled, or, if this is not allowed by
 263

the nature of the consonant, oor u is inserted" ) (see Part II.

Ch. IV.); e.g. " kelo" is Past Participle , " kello ” Past Perfect.
The chief meaning of this Participle is the same as the mean
ing of the Past, as I said just now ; moreover it is emphatic.
Hence in the formation of the Adjectives called Participial
Adjectives, as there is a certain emphasis, this Participle is
used ; e. g. “ adorable = nămăskār fāvozallo” etc.
1. What I said about the Past Participle, viz. of its passive meaning,
must be said , of this participle too and of the Perfect Past.
2 . The Participles in “ lo' ' are declined as Adjectives of three terminations

if they are used as Adjectives, as Nouns of the 3rd Declension if they are used
as Pronouns ; e.g. " yek pātki prāčit keleānt Anjea thăiñ santos assā = lit.
in having a sinner done penance, angels rejoice”, Here " keleānt" is 1st
Locative from “ keleñ ” .
3. Here the Participle in “ to ” must be also mentioned. This, as I said
on p. 119, para. 10, occurs only or chiefly in composition with a Verb. I have
found it also joined to a Noun, just as the other Participles, but very seldom,
and used only by some, as in the sentence “ kādto vodto tāp = intermittent fever .”
IX . Gerunds
1. Present. As appears from the paradigm, it has two
forms, or rather only one form written in two ways, long or
short. The 2nd form is a compound of the Present Gerund
of “ assā ” , and of the Participle in “ -tāñ ” . Hence “ tsăltas
tana” means “ be walking” .
This Gerund is used chiefly to show time, as in this and
66
similar sentences : “ When God invites you, follow him = Deu
tumkāñ apoitanañ, tačen utar aikā ” . It is used by preference
by these people, even in cases in which it seems out of
place. This Gerund with the Conditional is a makeshift to
supply the deficiency of some tenses. This Gerund is Present,
yet used sometimes for the Imperfect, Past, and Future ;
6.g. " Cetera autem , cum venero, disponam = āun yetanañ, dus
reo văstu săma kårtoloñ ” . By this Gerund we may translate
many cases of the Latin Absolute Ablative, with this difference
that in Konkani the subject is not to be put in the Ablative ,
1) At Goa, so I have heard, they always put this " " between the two “ l” .
 264

as in Latin, although the subject of the principal sentence

were not the same as the subject of the secondary sentence ;
e.g. “ Regnante Servio Tullio, Roma munita est = Servius
Tullius rasvot kărtanañ, Rom molleñ šār ghăț zaleñ ” .
Instead of using this Gerund, the Participle with “ vēļ =
time” , put in the 2nd Locative can be used; e.g. in the above
>

example " Servius Tullius rasvot kårčea veļār = lit. at the time
(in which ) Servius Tullius reigned ... ". This second way of ex
.

pressing time is also very frequent (later on I put its con

struction) . Yet this 2nd form can be properly used when ,
translating literally the Konkani into English, as in the above
example, the meaning is not altered.
2. Imperfect. In form it is the same as the Participle
Imperfect given above ; but that Participle has also the mean
ing of a Gerund. It is used a) as in Latin the Gerund in do,
meaning manner and cause ; e.g. uby doing evil you cause loss
to your soul = vāit kårn, aplea åtmeāk lukšān kărtai = malum
agendo, damnum infers animae tuae”; “ to bób mārn gelo = he
went away crying ”. Probably in the 2nd example it is not a
Gerund, but the Participle Present ; in Latin we could trans
late it thus : ipse clamans abiit; in Italian we should use the
Gerund : se ne andò gridando. b) It is chiefly used when
the Conjunction " and " between two Verbs is omitted as in
this and similar examples : " go and ask” ; omitting “and ”
we get " going ask = votsun itsār” . This way of speaking is
almost universal ; it is a true Konkanism ; if we put " and " ,
they would understand it ; but it would not be, often , according
to the character of Konkani. c) It is used to form many com
pound Verbs (see hereafter these Verbs); e.g. “ uko ?n -dor =
keep raised " ; " Jezun sămzon te čintāt món apņā lāgiñ vitsā
runk sāngleñ = Jesus having known that they intended to ask
him , he said ” ; this 3rd case , quoad substantiam , is not different
from the second. d) It is used also to denote time in cases
in which we should use in Latin postquam etc.; strictly speak
ing, in this case it is Past Gerund, h. e. it has the meaning
 265

of the Past Gerund, although materially it is the same ; e.g.

“ kumzār zāun kitlo témp zālo ? = after you have confessed ,
how much time passed ? " " garā votzun kiteñ kărun ? = after
having gone home, what can I do ?” In some of the examples
given above it appears rather as a Present Gerund.
Instead of the Gerund in -un to express manner, cause etc.
we may use also the Past Participle with “ -pasun or -nimtiñ =
on account of" , or " vorviñ = by” ; e. g. to burgo sikleā vorviñ
ušār zālo = that boy having studied became clever " .
3. Past. There are two Past Gerunds very different in
their use .
a) The first in tăts" is used like an Ablative Absolute of
the Past Tense. Generally it could be translated by cum and
the Past Perfect of the Subjunctive; yet the subject is not to
be put in the Ablative, as in Latin. An example will make
it clear : “ Somi Jezu Krist iñ utrañ sangtăts gelo = after Jesus
Christ spoke these words went away = cum Jesus Christus haec
dixisset, abiit, or his dictis abiit ” . In some cases the subject
.

is put in the Instrumental, as I say later on. Instead of this

Gerund we might use the Past Participle with “ uprānt” ; e.g.
“ iñ utrañ sangleā uprānt gelo = lit. these words said after,
went” .
As appears from the given examples, this Gerund is not
>

declined ; because, generally speaking of Gerunds and Parti

ciples, only the forms ending in o are declined.
6) The 2nd Gerund (in -un) is the same, materially, as
we have seen, as the Participle and as the Imperfect Gerund.
Sometimes its meaning is of a Past Gerund as in the above
examples: “ kumzār zāun kitlo témp zālo ? = after you
confessed, how long time is it ?" It is somewhat similar, e.g.
to the Latin sentence : eo profecto multa mala nobis acciderunt.
This Gerund is used 1) if 'and' is omitted, viz. the preceding
Verb is put in this Gerund , it may be in a Present or in a
Past Tense. Although the Verb preceding “and' were in aa Pre
sent Tense, yet the resulting Gerund is Past ; because if we
34
 266

translate it literally, we get in English also a Past Gerund;

e.g. “votsun itsār = go and ask, or after having gone ask ”.
2) It is used to show time, elapsed, as in this and similar
examples : “after he died , three years elapsed = to morn pāvon
tīn vorsañ zāliñ " . 3) It is used sometimes instead of the Condi
tional, as in Latin quum or postquam are used sometimes,
although perhaps not quite correctly, instead of si. The 2nd
case may be reduced to the first; in the second case too,
we might use the Participle Past with “ uprānt” ; e.g. sto morn
pāulea uprānt tīn vorsañ zāliñ ” .
4. Future Gerund. Properly speaking, this is not a Ge
rund, but the Future Passive Participle ; in Latin it is called
Gerundivus; e.g. " faciendus, amandus.” It has the same use
as the Latin Gerundivus, and it includes the meaning of neces
sity; hence it may be used instead of the Necessary Mood,
chiefly in the periphrastic conjugation. Thereby we may
express many English tenses which seem not to exist in Kon
kani ; e.g. " you should have done it = yeñ tuveñ kårčeñassaleñ = =

hoc a te faciendum erat or fuisset.” Although properly speak

ing, it can be used only with Transitive Verbs, as it is passive,
yet, as in Latin , so in Konkani, even Neuter Verbs may take
this form ; e.g. " veniendum est = yeuñčeñ assā ” . Sometimes
it seems to have the meaning also of possibility ; e. g . “ kårtso =
which must be done , or which can be done"; it can be used
sometimes instead of the Adjectives in " sărko ” . I would almost
say that this Gerund expresses also the effect of .. ,) as in the
example " poďaso kărtā = causes to fall”; yet it is more natural
to say that here “ podaso " is Imperfect Subjunctive (which
can have also this meaning) , as its termination shows.
Materially it has the same form as the Participle Future
Active ; hence the context must decide whether it is Active,
Passive or Neuter.
What has been said in this paragraph about the use of tenses must be
understood only of the obvious cases and of the more common and more
correct way of speaking ; it is therefore neither exclusive, nor applicable to
less obvious cases .
 267

§ 2. Some other forms of Tenses

1. First I will mention some other forms of Verbs not
expressly noted in Part II . 88 2 , 4 ; some of these have been
>

hinted at in several places. I will put them here together.

Imperfect Indicative.. Although commonly the vowel a is
not changed into e in the Plural , yet sometimes I found this
change. It does not seem to be very exact ; hence, to have
uniformity , we should not use the form in e.
Past Perfect Indicative. Some seem to use a full u,
u instead
of u ; e.g. " nidullo " instead of " nidyllo” .
Past Conditionatum . The form " nidtolon assoloñ" is as
common as " nidtoñ assoloñ ” .
Participles. The Participle in “ -to ”, i.e. formed by adding
9

only “ -to” ( -to, -teñ ) to the root, seems to be used very seldom ;
yet I think that this form , if really used, has been used to
avoid a more difficult pronunciation ; e.g. " vod -to ” and “ dis
to " instead of " yod -tso" and " diš -tso " . Hence this form does
not seem to be correct and common . The Participle, or
whatever the form in “ -ton" may be, which seems to be
66
shortened from “-toloñ ”, is the same as the above Participle ,
but used only joined to the Verb, not as a true Participle.
Among the Negative forms, remark the form , e.g. " dīna
tullo " instead of “ diunatullo ” , the Participle of the Poten
7

tial ; e.g. " kårunk-nozo assollo” ; and the Conditional " nida
nāñteleār" instead of “ nidanāñ zaleār" . Recollect moreover
the Imperfect in " sărko", the Participle in “ tăssolo”, the
9

Negative Participle in -so meaning possibility and some other

forms, if there be any more omitted in Part II. but explained
in Part IV .
For the sake of convenience, I add a few words about
66
bassā ” .
First instead of “ assān" etc. some say “ astāñ, astai" etc.;
then the Verb would be regular. Some say that there is a
small difference between the two forms: " astāñ" should mean
34*
 - 268

5
" I am and shall still be” etc. Moreover in the Past Tenses
many say " ăssulo, åssullo " etc. instead of " assolo” , and
change u into i, or e, instead of changing into a; e.g. " ăssilli,
åsselleñ ” . This form seems to be not very rare. Further
some say " natulleār " instead of ' nāñ asleār” .
Some other forms both of " assā ” and “ zatān ", as also of
the Regular Verbs , may occur, which cannot be explained,
else there will be no end ; practice will teach you.
2 . Besides these easy forms, there are some others more
difficult, which depend on the modified meaning ; e. g. we meet
also the form dusro apoilo assayet = it may be that another
be called " . This form seems to be Past Potential , which
according to the paradigm, should be “ apoyet assollo ” . Yet
this would not render the meaning of the above English
sentence, because the Konkani means “ it was possibļe to call
another, or it may be that another has been invited ” . Hence
according to the English meaning we must invert the order,
and instead of saying " apoyet assolo” we must say : " apoilo
assayet”. Perhaps we might explain this example more
satisfactorily, by saying that this “ apoilo assayet” is Present
Passive of the Potential, as I explain below.
Some other forms similar to this may occur.
3. The most difficult and important forms are those
which result from the different combinations of the simple ,
or also of the compound tenses in a finite mood. Hence it
is rather a difficult task to enumerate all of them , on account
of the different combinations. Therefore I will limit myself
to laying down the fundamental principle, with some deduc
tions or examples.
This principle may be expressed, in the most general form ,
thus : The forms given in the 2nd and 4th Part, are joined
together according to the meaning ; e. g. in some cases the
meaning of a Future Tense is joined to the meaning of the
Conditional Tense ; then we must use the Contingent Future
joined to the Conditional; e . g. " when thou shalt sit to eat with
 269

a prince, consider diligently what is set before thy face =

kuvorāger seuši zaleār, tuje mukār gāleleā višyānt tsătrai
kāņge” (Prov. xxiii, 1 ) . The Holy Bible expresses here not
only what would happen, if a certain condition is verified ,
but also that you may perhaps find yourself invited to take
dinner with a prince.
At other times the meaning of a Conditional is joined to
the Present ; e. g. “ if there is a man swift in his work, he
shall stand before kings = yēk tzurk mănis assā zaleār, to
rāyā dõstint rigtolo ” (Prov. xxii , 29). A similar explanation
is to be given here as above. And so many other similar
combinations many occur, the knowledge of which can show
a good Konkani scholar. As the reader sees, here we have a
kind of periphrastic conjugation, but different from the Latin
and English, because in Konkani both tenses are put, or may
be put in aa Finite Mood, whereas in Latin we have the Auxiliary
Verb “esse = to be”, joined to some Participle of the principal
Verb. We may better understand this kind of conjugation, if
we remember that in Latin we have also aa similar construction ,
except that in Latin the Conjunction should be expressed ; e.g.
the last sentence could be translated into Latin thus : si fiat
(ut) adsit vir velox in opere suo, is coram regibus stabit.
Sometimes we meet very complicated forms of this kind,
which, however, can be easily explained by supplying in our
mind the Conjunction “" móņ = that”; e. g . "ani te dis motve
zāināñ zatit zaleār, kossolo jīv vānčasonāñ = and unless those
days had been shortened, no flesh should be saved ” (Matt.
xxiv, 22) ; consequently the construction of such Verbs is as
if “món" had been put. The Conditional Negative (uidanāñ
zaleār) seems to be of this kind ; for this reason I said in $ 1 ,
that it should be conjugated in the first part; so “ nidanai
zaleār = if you do not sleep ”, or better “ if it happens (that)
you do not sleep ". See another example p. 255 , para. 1 .
Remark that in this way we can not only translate
sentences of the above kind, but also more simple sentences,
 270

and use it also for expressing the passive meaning ; e. g. " he

is bound ” ; no passive occurs in the Present ; hence we can do
so by employing the above plan ; “ bound = bāndlo ” , “ is = assā ” ;
hence “ bāndlo assā ” or perhaps also “ bāndun assā ” . Of course
such a proceeding is not indifferently allowed in all cases,
we must consult also the use, for this is the key.

§ 3. Deficient and corresponding Tenses

In English and much more in Latin there are certain
forms, besides the given regular ones , which you could hardly
translate into Konkani, looking only to the paradigm. There
fore I will give here some general principles, reserving a more
distinct explanation of each difficult form in particular, to
the Appendix ; you will find a great help for this purpose in
the preceding paragraph, if you know it thoroughly ; besides
that, we may lay down these rules :
1. If you find in Latin or in English some form , for
which you cannot find the corresponding one in Konkani,
look whether that form is preceded and governed by some
particle. If so, use the Participle Present or Future or
Past, as the meaning requires, followed by the Postposition
which corresponds to the Latin or English particle ; e. g. “ Cum
Marcus Antonium aggressus sit, ab Antonio occisus est ” .
Here we have the Perfect Subjunctive, which in Konkani does
not exist. This aggressus sit is governed by cum = because” ,
in Konkani “ pāsun = on account of”. Hence we may translate
it with the Past Participle followed by the Postposition " pāsun ”.
6
Thus we get " Mārk Antoničea angār podlea pāsun, Antonin
takā jivsi mārlo = lit. Marcus on account of having assaulted
Antony, has been killed by Antony".
This way is nearly always possible, if the Verb is governed
by some Preposition or other Particle. I say “ Preposition or
other Particle" , because although it is not a Preposition in
English, we can employ usually the Postposition in Konkani,
provided the meaning does not reject it altogether. Moreover,
 271

although the Verb is not expressly preceded by a Particle, yet

we should try, if possible, to translate it by a Konkani Post
position , because this form is more according to Konkani ;
e.g. " having heard his words, he went away = hīñ utrañ
aikaleāñ uprānt gelo or hīñ utrañ aikun gelo” .
2. Another way of translating the above given and similar
examples is, to look whether there is a Particle or Conjunction
corresponding to the English or Latin Particle. In the above
example “ cum = because" can be translated by “ kiteāk moleār ”
or “ dekun ” ; we can therefore use this Particle and employ
the Indicative Past, instead of the Perfect Subjunctive. This
is therefore the second way, useful in some cases only , to
employ the corresponding tense of the Indicative, if we have
notthe tense of the Subjunctive exactly corresponding : " kiteāk
moļeār Mārk Antoničeā angār podlā ” etc.
3. The third way is to see, whether the Conditional might
be used instead of the defective tense, because this is another
of the favourite tenses of Konkani ; e. g. " themselves should
do this work = taniñtz teñ keleār boreñ ” . Yet to express this
" should do" and the like which imply the notion of a duty, 9

.
but not rigorously, we could well employ “ distā = appears” ;
e. g. " I should visit my friend = mojeā išķāk bēt kårunk distā ” .
We could use also the quasi-diminutive -80 (see below) .
4. A fourth way is to employ the periphrastic conjugation,
joining the Participle required by the meaning to that tense
of " assā or zatā ”, which is required by the context. This peri
phrastic conjugation in some cases is very easy ; yet some
times it is made in such a way, that it presupposes a certain
knowledge of the language. This more difficult kind of peri
phrastic conjugation is formed, as I said in g 2 , not only by
joining the Participle to " assā or zatā ”, but also by joining two
tenses of finite mood ; e. g. si hoc fecerit,punietur. Although
this " fecerit could be translated by the Conditional " keleār”,
yet it is much better to use this periphrastic conjugation
“ yeñ kårit zaleār, sikšā bogtolo = lit. si fiat (ut) hoc faciat” .
 - 272

5. If you cannot find at all, by the above rules, a tense

corresponding to our tense, then, keeping in your mind the
meaning, see whether one of the given tenses might in some
way render the meaning of the English or Latin Verb ; if not,
we must change the sentence, keeping however the substance
of the meaning .
This change is often to be made, because the nature of
Konkani is very different from that of our languages ; hence
by not changing the sentence, we could not get an expression
agreeing with Konkani. This is the way of translating into
Konkani, English or Latin sentences, viz. to accommodate our
selves to the nature of the language, not to accommodate the
language to our European grammars. This is the key to the
Konkani language. If this is not taken into consideration,
Konkani may seem very poor and deficient, whereas the
poverty is only about English -Konkani sentences, not about
true Konkani ones .
As I see that these observations are rather general , I
will show in a table the correspondence of Latin and Konkani
difficult tenses ; “ vātz = read, lege ” .
>

1. Vāts-unk (Supine) = 1 ) ad legendum , 2) ut legam ,

in or
3) ut legerem , 4) lectum (Supine) =
der to read ;
5) legendi (e. g.
.
. voluntas) = of reading ;
6) legendo (e. g. paratus) = to read.
The first four meanings are about the same. The two last
are very nearly the same.
2. Vāts-so ( Infinitive Absolute ).
1 ) tò legere ( Neut. « vāts-čeña ) = reading ;
2) legendi (voluntas) = of reading ;
3) legens = reading ;
4) lecturus = (he) who will read ;
5) legendus = to be read .
3. Vāts-tolo = legens (quilegit) = hewho reads,—is reading.
 273

4. Vâts- tā to (qui) legit, is (e.g. " vāts -tā to ušār burgo =

qui legit, is laudabilis puer est) = (he who) reads, that ...
5. Vāts-talo = legens (qui legebat) ; or, better, " vātstalo
to = he who was reading " .
6. Vāts -lo = lectus ( = seldom qui legit, he who read) = read
(not often used) .
7. Vāts-lā to = lectus, which has been read , that ....
(qui ) lectus, is....
8. Vāts- lolo or vāts -yllo = lectus (qui fuit or fuerat
lectus) = read. It means also wit had been read, or it has
been read , or it has been truly read ” .
9. Vāts-tanañ = 1) cum legeret, 2) cum legebat,
3) inter legendum = while reading..
=

10. Vāts-un 1 ) legens (not meaning " qui legit " but
" legens est' ) = reading ;
2) lectus (as " vātsun assā = it is read ” );
3) legendo (manner and cause) = in or by
reading ;
4) cum legisset = having read .
11. Vāts-tăts 1 ) cum legisset or lectus esset, 2) lecto ( libro),
3) postquam legerat = having read.
=

12. Vāts-an 1 ) potest esse quod legam = I may read ;

2) vellem legere = I would like to read ;
3) legero = (whatever) I shall have read. ")
13. Vāts-iyet 1) licet legere, 2) nihil obstat quominus
legatur, 3) possum legere ( physice) = I may
or can read .
14. Vāts -unk tanktā 1 ) possum legere (physice ), 2) licet
(mihi) legere, 3) nihil obstat quo
minus legam = I can read.
15. Vāts-an zaleār 1 ) si fiat (ut) legam = if I should read ;
2) si legero = if I should ( have)
read .
1) In this and similar sentences it seems that the Future in « -an" can be
used correctly as 2nd Future.
35
 - 274

Now let us give some examples of the tenses with Postpo

sitions. The Principal Postpositions are “ pāsun or pāsvot =
on account of or for”, nimtiñ = on account (not often used ; “ pā
7
=

sun " is used instead of it) , svorviñ = by, through ”, “ uprānt =

after", " adiñ = before”, “ veļār = in time, while, during” (this
>

" veļār” is the 2nd Locative of “ véļ = time” ). Among these

Postpositions " uprānt” usually governs the Past Participle") ,
“ Adiñ ” is not joined, usually, to the Past Participle, but
to the Participle in -tso ; the others govern the Participle
in -tso or the Past Perfect Participle, as the meaning requires .
It is not quite correct, it seems to use the Past Participle
with the above mentioned Postpositions. “ Uprānt ” might be
66

used with the Past Perfect Participle , when the meaning of

the Past Perfect Tense occurs , although also in such a mean
ing the Past Participle is more common. Therefore
16 . Vāts-čeā adiñ 1 ) lectum ante, or antequam legam ,
2) antequam legerem ,
3) legerim ,
4) legissem = before I read,
before I had read.
17. Vāts-leā uprānt= lectum post, or
1 ) postquam legerim ,
2) legissem = after having read.
>

18. Vāts-čea veļār = dum lego = while reading.

19. Vāts-ylleā veļār = dum legerem = while reading.
20. Vāts-čeā pāsvot 1 ) ut legam , 2) ut legerem ,
3 ) ad legendum , 4) lectum (Supine)
)5) quia lego = in order to read, on
account of reading.
1) What has been said above that the Past Participle is not commonly used ,
must be understood with some limitations ; we might perhaps say that, if the
Past Participle is used as an Adjective or in a similar way, in such a case,
more frequently , it is changed into the Past Perfect Participle ; so in the
compound tenses formed with the Past Participle, the Past Perfect Participle is
used ; e. g. " āuñ gelloñ asleār = if I had gone” . Yet euphony may require
sometimes the Past instead of the Past Perfect Participle ; e. g. “ apoilo ”.
 - 275 -

21. Vāts-ylleā pāsyot = quia legi = on account ofhaving read.

22. Vāts-čeā vorviñ = per lectionem , 2) legendo = by reading.
23. Vāts-ylleā vorviñ = by having read etc.
I said, there is no Past Infinitive as in Latin " amavisse" .
But this Infinitive is resolved by “ món = quod, that”, or by
some other particle into a finite mood. The construction of
“ món ” will be explained below. The Future Infinitive, as
in Latin amaturum esse, is resolved in a similar way into
a finite mood by “ món " or some other particle. Yet sometimes
there occurs a kind of construction similar to the Latin con
struction of the Accusative with the Infinitive, except that in
Konkani the Instrumental is used instead of the Accusative,
as the Infinitive bas often a passive meaning ; such Future
Infinitive is the Absolute Infinitive, the termination of which
is the same as the termination of the Future Participle. So
we can say : " taņeñ večeñ āuveñ čintāñ = I think that he will
go, puto eum iturum esse ” . (Cf. p. 257 , para. f .)
1. As in English, there are some tenses which seem not to exist in Kon
kani, on the other hand in Konkani there are some forms which are not used
in English. One of these is the Past Participle, chiefly of the Verb " zatā =
I become” , which is inserted after Nouns followed by a Postposition, when we
do not use it ; e. g. “ after mass = mis zaleā uprānt, lit. after mass done ” .
2. About the Participle governed by other Postpositions see Art. VI.

$ 4. Passive Voice
There is no regular passive form , how then can we express
passive meaning ?
First of all , let us distinguish passive meaning from passive
construction ; the second may be used, although there be no
passive meaning ; and again, passive meaning may occur
without a passive construction. In this paragraph I speak es
pecially of passive meaning ; passive construction will be taken
into consideration as far it is required for the explanation of
the passive meaning, or, sometimes, although not absolutely
required here, it will be touched upon only ; the passive con
struction will be fully explained in Chapter III.
35 *
 276

Now in order to answer this question, I say that there are

many modes to express the passive meaning ; the following
modes are more in use.
1. There are some tenses which in Transitive Verbs have
only or chiefly passive meaning. Those tenses are Past, Per
fect, Past Perfect, both Conditionals, the pure Imperfect Sub
junctive, the tenses with the form -iyet of the Potential, and
with the form zāi of the Necessary Mood, the Participles
derived from the Past, Perfect, Past Perfect, Gerundive. More
over sometimes the following tenses : Supine and Absolute In
finitive, the Participle in -n or -un, and the Gerund in -tåts, and ,
seldom , also that in tanan. The Intransitive Verbs also take
a kind of passive form (as in Latin ventum est, veniendum
est) in the Gerundive and also in the Infinitive and in the Ge
rund in -täts ; e. g. " yeuñčeñ assā = veniendum est" ; and
=

always in the Necessary Mood with " zāi” and in the Nega
tive form with “ nozo " . About this see Chapter III. In order
to help our memory to retain all these tenses, we may say :
a) the Past and the tenses derived from it (Perfect, Past Per
fect, Conditional, Participles in -lo ); 6) Potential (-iyet) and
Necessary Mood ( -zãi, -tso) ; c) sometimes the forms in -täts, -un
and -tso (či, čeň) have passive meaning in the Transitive Verbs.
a ) If the passive meaning occurs in the above tenses which
usually are passive, nothing is to be done ; for they are already
passive. Their construction consequently is as if they were
passive, although not entirely. Thus “ mārlo " from “ mār = beat” ,
does not mean “ I beat” , but “ I was beaten ” . Hence it appears
that the different persons of Transitive Verbs in the Past Ten
ses, have not the same meaning as in Latin or English . For
this reason, I did not put a Transitive Verb as an example of
a conjugation. Yet the passive meaning is not so attached to
those tenses as to exclude entirely the active meaning. Though
seldom , yet sometimes active meaning occurs in those tenses.
If somebody thinks this is not a passive meaning, I say
that we may at least suppose it as passive ; because thus
 277

their construction is more easily understood; moreover these

Verbs in their concord follow mostly such rules as if they
were passive.
Consequently if we have to translate English sentences in
which those tenses occur in active meaning, we have to do
with them, what we should do in Latin with sentences of
active meaning in which the Verbs cvapulo = I am beaten ” or
" veneo == I am exposed to be sold ”, should be used in Past
Tenses , namely change the sentence into passive and then
translate it into Konkani .
6) The tenses of which I said that they often have a passive
meaning, are employed as passive, if the context requires it ;
and then it is clear, the Nominative is put in the Instrumental,
although the Verbs were Intransitive which, as I said, some
times, are used as passive ; e.g. " tuven yeuñčeñ assā = tibi
veniendum est (lit. a te ...)”.
Remark, however , that we might perhaps exclude from
those tenses the Gerund in -tänañ. I certainly found it
used also in passive meaning or form ; yet this is not quite
correct, at least I am inclined to think so. Moreover it seems
that the Gerunds in -un and -täts can be considered as pas
sive or active indifferently, at least often. The same seems
to hold good for the other tenses of this b) class. In one
word, if we have in English passive sentence in the tenses
of this b) class, these tenses can be considered as passive,
although we might consider them also as active. Such is
not the case with the tenses of the a) class.
c ) For the tenses which have no passive meaning, the
easiest way is to change our passive voice into active and
then translate it into Konkani, as we do in Latin, when we
have to translate a passive sentence with a deponent Verb.
2. Another way , not always possible, is to use the Verb
" zatā ” . A great many Konkani Verbs are compound with
kår = do ” and a Substantive, or some other part of speech as
in Latin " commonefacio = lit. I make admonition, admoni
 -
278

tionem facio". As in Latin the Verbs in facio are made

passive by substituting fio for facio, so in Konkani Verbs
compounded with “ kår”, are made passive by substituting
" za -tā” = fio for “ kår-tāñ " . This way of making the passive
voice can be used not only in the tenses which have no
passive meaning, but also in tenses which have a passive
meaning. Hence it appears that in Verbs compounded with
“ kår ”, the passive meaning in the above mentioned tenses
can be expressed in two ways, viz. a) by employing " kår”
put in one of those tenses, b) by employing “ zatā ” ; e.g. " suru
kår = begin , lit. make beginning ” ; “ I begin my work = mojea
kāmāči suru kårtāñ ” ; Passive : “mojea kāmāči suru zatā " ;
in the Past : "mõjea kāmāči suru zali or mojea kāmāči suru
keli” .
Somebody might say : this is not a true passive form , but
a neuter Verb . I answer : grammatically speaking, this is
true ; yet it expresses in some way the passive meaning ; and
if we have no better forms, we must be satisfied with what
we have.
3.
0
Another way, suitable for some Causative Verbs, is
this : Take away from the Causative Verb the causative sign
( ai, or ei, or oi, or i), or sometimes only i, the remainder will
be the passive voice ; e. g . " tsădai = increase ", taking away äi
it remains “ tsåļ = it is increased ” ( superabundat); “ paloài =
quench ", " paloa = get quenched ”. The Verbs made causative
by adding only i, very often (if not always) are made passive
or Neuter, substituting a for i; e.g. " porti = turn ”, “ portă = be
turned ” . It is true this is rather a Neuter Verb ; yet this too
.

expresses in some way the passive meaning.

I said above " some Causative Verbs ”, because only the
Intransitive Verbs made causative by adding “ ăi or ei” , can
usually be made passive in such a way. And even the In
transitive Verbs are not always made passive by taking away
the causative sign ; e.g. " tsălai = cause to walk ”, taking away
ai, you get " tsål = walk ” . It depends, therefore, on the nature
 279

of the Verb. The Transitive Causative Verbs , by taking away

the causative sign , become simply Transitive, whereas with
the causative sign, they were double Transitive, e.g. “ kår =
do”, “ kărăi = cause to do" (by another ); “ āļ = bring" , "ādăi =
cause to bring ”. About this point see Neuter Verbs, below,
B. , $ 6.
4. The preceding ways might be called rather a supple
ment of the passive voice than the passive voice. The fol
lowing can be called passive, although not general, viz. a) add
the participle in -un to the Verb “ zatā or assā ”; e.g. " boroun
assā = it is written "; " born zatā = it is filled, impletur" ; or
=

b) add the Past Participle in -lo of the principal Verb to “ zatā

or assā ” ; e. g. “ omnis collis humiliabitur = sårvų gudo khālto
astolo = every hill shall be brought low". Yet, in the 1st ex
ample there is not a pure passive meaning ; " boroun assā ”
is corresponding to the Latin scriptum est; e. g. in libro
Moysis, to the Italian sta scritto. Moreover such a mode is
not in common use.
5. Another mode is to substitute for the Active Verb some
Verb which in itself implies a passive meaning , although it
has no passive form . This mode is used especially with Verbs
compounded with “ dī, gāl, kår” etc.; e.g. “ bāptizār kår = bap
tize ", " bāptism gē = receive baptism " ; " badlām gāl = put
calumnies” , " badlām gē = receive calumnies or be calumniated”.
6. This, which I am going to speak of, is the most perfect
mode of expressing the passive meaning, although this too is
not general . On page 175 , 1. 26 , I expressed the suspicion that
there may be other Verbs besides " kātăr” , which become passive
by producing the vowel of the last syllable of the root. That
suspicion has been changed into certainty, and although I
have not as yet examples enough to establish a general rule,
I can however say that there are many Transitive Verbs,
which can express the passive meaning by producing or mak
ing the vowel of the last syllable of the root open, and this
in all tenses ; e.g. " top = prick ” , “ tòp = be pricked "; " badăl =
>
 -
280

change", " badāl = be changed " ; "bór= fill ", " bòr = be filled ”; 7

"gåd = found" , " gād = be found” (or happen) ; “ mód = break ”,

>

“ mòd = be broken ” ; “ vód = pull ”, “ vòd = be pulled” etc.

This rule supposes that that syllable has a closed vowel ;
.

what is to be done, if the syllable has a long or open vowel ?- )

Then the rule does not hold good. There are, however, some
Verbs ending in a long or open vowel , which can have both
meanings , i.e. active and passive ; e.g. " tās = hew ” and “ be
hewn " ; " pind = tear” and “ be torn ” . Later, perhaps it may
be found that there are many such Verbs ; for the present
this rule must be left incomplete , because longer consideration
is required. Remark that by the above mentioned change of
vowel, those Verbs can become either neuter or passive as the
meaning requires ; e.g. " suri katārtā = the knife cuts ” , “ ruk
katārtā = the tree is cut” . This rule is in conformity with
Sanskrit (see Max Müller, 1.c. on p. 175 ).
7. Finally there is one way, yet doubtful, hinted at in
Part II, page 134, $ 4 ; i.e. some Verbs express the passive
meaning by changing the o of the last syllable of the root
into u ; e. g. " fód = break " , " fut = be broken "; " sód = leave” ,
stuț = be left, get rid " . But as these Verbs change also the
consonant ( into t) , somebody might think that “ fód " and
" fuț” etc. are two different original Verbs . See another mode
B. , $ 6.
B. Verbs in particular
§ 1. Zatā and assă
In many cases, especially in the conjugation, we must use
sometimes “ zatā ”, sometimes " assā ” , even in the same tense.
When is the former to be used , and when the latter ? This
depends on their fundamental meaning. " Zatā ” originally
means " become”, in Latin fio ; it expresses therefore some act ,
some passage, real and metaphorical, from one state to another :
1) About the difference between long and open, short and closed vowels, seo
page 2 , l. 13 .
 281

" assā ” means “ to be” , not any being , but existence either abso
។

lute, i. e. opposition to nothing, or relative, e.g. existence

of prudence in a man ; moreover it means to be in a place.
Consequently czatā ” and “ assā ” correspond partially to the
philosophical expressions in fieri and in facto esse. If the Eng
lish “ to be” is used to say, e.g. that " a man is good, bad ... 9

then the Verb “ zāun assā or zāun vortautā or vortautā ” must

be used. Yet if some, I may say, exterior quality is denoted ,
" assā” is used ; e.g. " bāgil uktēñ assā = the door is open ”.
Nay, we find some examples in which wassā ” is used also for
true qualities : whether this be wrong or not, I cannot tell
with certainty ; doubtless such is not the general rule. It seems
that “ assā ” used as Auxiliary Verb , can express also some
quality . The Verb " to be" in Konkani is usually omitted
in the Present, if it expresses quality ; e. g. “ Deu bhou boro =
God (is) very good .”
Therefore in the conjugation we must keep in view this
fundamental meaning of the two Verbs , in order to know
which Verb must be preferred ; yet much practice is required
for it. Nevertheless in some cases assā ” or “ zatā” can be
used indifferently.
The fundamental meaning of " zatā" can explain many cases
in which this Verb is used when we should omit it altogether ;
e.g. " he came as governor = ådhipăti zāun ailo "; " obediently =
khalto zāun "; " after. mass = mīs zalea uprānt”. The Konkani
language loves to express by " zatā ” the different stages through
which a thing must pass, which in other languages are either
understood or expressed simply by particles , affixes etc. The
Verb “ zāun assā ” will be better understood by comparing
the compound Verbs in -un (see below) .
§ 2. Causative Verbs
We must carefully remark that the Causative Verbs are
used not only when the causative meaning occurs in the
usual form , e.g. do, cause to do ; laugh, cause to laugh ;
36
 282

but also in many other cases in which the causative meaning

is concealed by different expressions ; e . g . " excite" may be
considered as causative of “ rise” , hence we may express it by
the causative form of “ uț = rise” . And so almost innumerable
other English expressions , which cannot be rendered literally,
can be expressed in a truly Konkani mode by some causative
form , concealed in the English expression. You find many
examples in the Dictionary. This is the proper way of getting
at the nature of Konkani ; some might try to translate
English into Konkani, keeping the same form ; and as this
very form often does not exist, he will say that Konkani
has no expressions for many English sentences . But first I
could say the same of the English, h. e, that English has no
expression for many Konkani expressions ; because trying to
translate literally Konkani into English , certainly often you
will not find the corresponding English sentence. Secondly, I
say that in Konkani very beautiful expressions are to be found,
but unknown to those who complain about the poverty of
Konkani.
Yet, as I remarked in Part II. , not all Verbs have a causa
tive form , especially those which have in their original non
causative form a causative termination ; e. g. " borăi = write" ,
“ lãi = apply ”, “ ulăi = speāk” etc. How can we distinguish
those which can be made causative ? Mostly the more com
monly used causative forms are given in the Dictionary ; but I
could not put them all. Moreover some causative forms might
be used, though they are not popular, (provided they be not
against the nature of Konkani) because in this uncultivated
language we cannot limit ourselves to the popular forms and
words; of many things the common people everywhere have
not even the idea. What is to be done with those Verbs which
have not the causative form we are in need of ? We must
betake ourselves to some circumlocution . The most common
Verb used for it is " āi = apply” (see p. 145 , note 3) which
expresses a really causative meaning as the form in -ăi. Some
 283

times " di = give" is also used ; e.g. " sămzāun di = give to

understand, or cause to understand ” .
As regards the rule given in Part II. for making Causa
tive Verbs , I need not say that there may be some other rare
forms.. The same rule could be laid down more clearly, dis
tinguishing Verbs having the root ending in a pure consonant,
Verbs ending in a vowel , and Verbs ending in ñ. The Verbs
ending in a vowel may again be subdivided into Verbs ending
in a diphthong (au ... ) and Verbs ending in a pure vowel .
For each case the rules are somewhat different; you may
find them by comparing with § 1 , p. 145, notes 2, 3 and alibi .
>

§ 3. Frequentative Verbs
They correspond to the Latin dormito, cursito etc. Some
times the frequentative meaning can be expressed by the
emphatic ts (see Part III., Ch . II.); e.g. " he goes often to that
house = to tea gărāk vetats ” . Sometimes although seldom,
the repetition of the same Verb expresses in some way the
same idea, or "portun portun” is added to the principal Verb,
yet, strictly speaking, this mode is emphatic rather than fre
quentative, or frequentative and emphatic mixed. Both ways
cannot be used in every case ; use is the master. The third
way is to use some circumlocution ; e. g. " tovo! tovo! = from
time to time" ; " såbār pāuți = many times" ; " sovoi assā =
custom is ” .
§ 4. Emphatic and exclusive Verbs
These are formed by -ts, as stated on p. 82 . As to the
exclusive meaning, I must say that -ts is not used commonly
with the exclusive meaning with Verbs, but with Nouns etc.
(see p. 82 , note). Yet it sounds Konkani also with Verbs ;
hence if there be necessity , we might use it ; e. g. " āuñ poļei
tats = I only look ”. These Verbs differ from Solitary Verbs.
$ 5. Inceptive Verbs
They correspond to the Latin splendescere, lucescere etc.
and to the English : " begin to say, to speak ” etc. This meaning
36 *
 - 284

may be expressed in many ways , yet a thoroughly Konkani

mode is to use the Verb «-lāg= lit. be attached "; e. g . " moņunk
lāglo = he began to speak” ; “ uzuāļ zāunk lagtā = it begins
to get light” ; “ porzálik zāun lagtā = it begins to become
shining ” . We might use, although not always so elegantly,
.

" suru zatā = lit. beginning becomes ” .

For the sake of convenience, I mention here another mode
somewhat similar to the preceding one ; our English : " come
so far as, to ..." ,and the Latin eo pervenit ut can be rendered
with the very form , i.e. " pāu = reach" ; e.g. "by not avoiding
idleness, he came so far as to commit a great sin = älsai kårn
-

vód pātak adarunk pāulo.” This Verb “ pāu ” is used in some

other elegant expressions , as practice will teach you.
$ 6. Neuter Verbs
There are many original Neuter Verbs ; e.g. " rāu = re
main ”, “ tzăl = walk ” etc. I do not mean to speak about these,
as they have no peculiar difficulty, but about those which are
connected with the Causative Verbs , as hinted at on p. 134,
para. 3 , and touched upon again in A. , $ 4 ; here they must
be explained more distinctly. These Verbs are sometimes a
mean , both as to meaning and form, between active and pas
sive form ; e. g. " kātăr = cut ”, “ kåtār = get cut" , " kātrailor
has been cut” .. They can indeed , as I said above, be used
also to express the passive voice ; yet strictly speaking , their
first meaning is Neuter, partaking somewhat of the passive
meaning too. At any rate their construction is not the con
struction of Passive Verbs, i.e. requiring the agent (if this is
an animate subsistent agent) in the Instrumental , in the same
way as the really Transitive Verbs , of which I spoke above.
So we may say : " divo pāloatā = the light gets extinguished ” ;
we may even say " funkin dīvo pāloatā = the light is extin
guished by a blow ”; but it does not seem the general use to say,
c.g. , " teā månšān dīvo pāloatā or pāloalā = the light is or has
been extinguished by that man ” .
 285

In order to simplify matters about Neuter Verbs con

nected with Causative Verbs , keep this simple rule : " by tak
ing away from the Causative Verb those letters by. which it
became Causative, the Verb becomes what it was originally ,
i.e. Neuter or Transitive. Hence , as the Verbs ending in a
pure consonant more frequently become Causative by adding
äi, by taking away ai you get the original ; and as the Verbs
ending in a vowel , more frequently become Causative by ad
ding only i, by taking away i you get the original Verb ;
and if the original Verb, in both cases, was a Neuter Verb,
that is the Neuter Verb which we aim at ” . We might express
this rule more simply thus : Many Verbs can be made neuter
by adding one a to the root or by producing the vowel of the
last syllable of the root. These two modes cannot be used
indifferently; the first mode especially cannot be used if the
Verb ends already in a or e. To this simple rule we must add
these remarks or limitations.
1. Some Verbs seem to have a middle form between the
causative and the original active form , i. e. a neuter form .
This 3rd middle form is obtained, either by producing the
last short vowel of the root of the original, or by adding to
that root one a ; e.g.
e. g. " kātår = cut”, “ kātrăi = cause to cut” ,
=

“ kātār = cut”, e.g. the knife cuts; “ tās = hew ”, “ tāsăi =

> = cause
to hew ”, “ tāsā = be hewn ”. Sometimes, instead of adding
anything, the original form itself is used both in active and
neuter meaning : " tās = hew , get hewn " .
2. Some Verbs are used only or chiefly in the causative
form ; e. g . “ goļāi = chew ” ; some others are used only or chiefly
in a neuter form and meaning.
3. We cannot from all Causative Verbs form a derived
Neuter Verb , although in itself it would seem possible ; use
must be also considered .
4. The same Verb may sometimes have a merely neuter
meaning, sometimes it may almost coincide with a Passive
Verb ; the context and the different combinations must decide ;
 286

e. g . " dīvo pāloalo = the lamp ceased to burn "; " dīvo funkin
pāloalo = the lamp has been extinguished by a blow ” .
5. Consequently these Verbs too, sometimes, can be made
passive in certain tenses in two ways , i.e. by using either
the Neuter Passive Verb, or the Causative Verb in a tense
of passive meaning ; the first mode is not thoroughly pas
sive and cannot be used when the agent is animate and
subsistent ; e.g. “ divo funkin pāloala or månšān divo pāloailā ” .
6. More frequently Verbs ending in a are neuter con
nected with a Causative Verb .

87. Reciprocal Verbs

About this point I only remark, that the reciprocal form
and meaning can be concealed, by some different expressions
and way of thinking ; then also we can use the reciprocal
form , after having tried to give to the foreign expression a
Konkani dress ; 6.g. “ the father will betray the son , the son
will betray the father"; although we can translate this as
in English, yet we can use this shorter form : " bāpui ani pūt
yekāmekā kuț kårtele ”.
$ 8. Reflective Verbs
The form " -itleak ” can be used not only in the meaning
explained in Part II. , but if it is applied to mental operations,
can express a really logical reflexion ; e.g. "āikalleñ tumče
itleāk čintā = think over, ruminate what you have heard ”. Yet
this meaning could be expressed also in some other way ;
e.g. by “ portun = again ” , which is derived from “ porti = turn ”
(transitive) or “ portā = turn ” ( intransitive), corresponding
exactly to the Latin reflecto.
$ 9. Dubitative and Quasi-diminutive Verbs
By the often mentioned -80 we can express very elegantly
and shortly these dubitative and quasi-diminutive Verbs.
Some examples have been given in Part III. , some in the Dic
 287

tionary. Here only I remark that this -80 cannot be used

indifferently ; e . g. it would not sound well " āuñ čintāñ -so =
it seems that I think ” ; because it would almost show that I
do not know certainly whether I think or not. But of another
I can say sto čintā -so = he seems to think ” .
As stated above, the affix -80 gives not only a dubitative
meaning, but also a diminutive one and the like ; thus “ to
apleñ kām kårtāso distā ” means not only she seems to do his
business”, but also " he performs it perfunctorily" ; " to čintā
>

so " means not only he seems to think ” , but also " he shows
inclination to think so and so” etc. Yet the original mean
ing from which the others are derived is dubitative. Further,
remark that use sometimes does not allow us to employ this -so ,
although in itself it would seem right. Finally, many English
sentences which cannot be rendered literally, can be rendered
by this -80,, which is a nice Konkanism ; this happens especially
in some dubitative or diminutive sentences ; so, e.g. , we might
express the English sentence : " I should do this and that” by
this -80, “ yen, teñ kårizāi-señ distā” . In this last quasi-diminu
tive meaning it is not commonly used with Verbs; yet it does
not seem to be against the nature of Konkani ; consequently
we might use it, if there be any urgent necessity.
As to its construction, it must be joined to the word which
is affected by the dubitative or quasi-diminutive meaning ;
as above, the affected word is “ kărizāi” . It does not change
the construction , just as if there were no -80 ; hence in the
above example we must say -señ not -80 ; because the subject
of that " kărizāi " is " yeñ teña ; hence it must be put in the
Neuter .

§ 10. Compound Verbs

1. Compound Verbs in -un
This kind of Verbs is compounded of the form -un or -n of
one Verb and of another Verb in a finite mood ; e. g. pull
down = kāạn gāl = lit. drawing put”. Here really there are two
 288

Verbs, which, however, express one idea which in Latin and

in some other languages, may be expressed by one Verb .
The way of understanding these Verbs is this : as this
language sometimes has no Verbs in sufficient number to
express a certain notion , what means does it employ ? It
divides, I may say, the idea into two parts , one of which is as
genus, determinabile, materia, i.e. element to be determined,
the other is like diferentia, determinans, forma, i.e. determin
ing element; both together give the whole notion ; e. g . " choose
= vintsun kād = lit. seeking take out” . The idea of choosing is
divided into the first part, which is required in order to choose
viz . to seek ; and into the second part which follows the act
of seeking, viz. to take out or to take up. Consequently the
Verb in -un expresses the genus, the materia, the determina
bile, and the means by which something is obtained ; the
other Verb expresses the differentia, the forma, the determi
nans and that which is obtained . This manner, although it
seems to be a sign of poverty, is , however, a great nicety
and elegance of Konkani, and far superior to our European
manner of expressing the same thing. Many of our simple
Verbs must be translated in this way . This is another means
of getting at the nature of Konkani. Which are those
Verbs ? You find many in the Dictionary ; here I can only
say that such Verbs are especially those , which explicitly or
implicitly involve the above mentioned compound notion of
means and end, determining element and element to be
determined ; yet the right use of them is not so easy. Moreover
there are some consecrated by universal usage, others which ,
although right in themselves, are not in use. Many Verbs
compounded with an Adverb or with a Preposition , are also
translated often by this kind of Verbs . The English Prepo
sition sometimes can be omitted ; e. g. " go away = votz " ;
sometimes it can be rendered by a Konkani Postposition or
Adverb , e.g. " go before = mukār votz” ; sometimes it can be
=

translated by this kind of Verbs, e. g. " pull down ”. “ Pull"

.
 289

could be rendered by “ kād ” , but the Preposition « down”

changes somewhat the meaning, i.e. " by pulling, put it down” ; >

hence we may translate " kādn gāl” . This kind of Verbs is

so peculiar to Konkani, that it is used also when there is no
strict necessity ; e.g. “ show ” could be translated by “ dākei” ;
66
yet Konkani prefers to say “ dākon dī = by showing give or
having shown give, or give shown"; so also offer ” is translated
by " betoun dī” instead of the simple “ betei"; " dison yetā"
instead of “ distā = appears”. This shows that this kind of
Verbs is not used only on account of poverty, but as an
elegance of Konkani. Here let us put down only a few ex
amples : " apoun ād = call, lit. having called bring" ; " kāņeun
ye (or shortened «kāņ ye') = having taken come" ; " dāņ di
=

(exactly dādn di') = send, lit. having sent give "; " ukoln
dór = raising keep, lit. keep raised "; " āļn di (vulgar ‘āņ dī')=
purchase”; “ rāun ulei = stammer, lit. speak stopping ”. Many
such Verbs are used also by common people very elegantly.
Such Verbs are used also in cases in which they seem out
of place, yet well considered they add much beauty. So, to
say " receive the Blessed Virgin as a Mother" can be trans
lated " Ankuāri Măriek āuoi kårn känge = lit. having made the
Virgin Mary (as) your mother, take her” . And so in many
other similar examples which cannot be taught but by prac
tice. We shall see below that many of our Adverbs are ex
pressed in this way.
2. Other Compound Verbs
In Latin , in English and in German especially, the Verbs
compounded with Postpositions are often difficult ; not so in
Konkani. I have already said elsewhere that the composition
of Postpositions (or Adverbs) with Verbs, seems to be a mere
apposition , viz. so many Latin and English Verbs compounded
with Prepositions (or Adverbs) are translated, if the Adverb
or Postposition is to be expressed, by simply joining the
Adverb to the Verb; more frequently the Latin Prepositions
37
 290

in compound Verbs must be translated by an Adverb ; e. g.

“ proceed = mukār vots ” ; sometimes the compound Verbs in
-un must be used. Moreover there are other kinds of com
pound Verbs (see p. 177).
What case do they govern ? This depends on the word which
is united to the simple Verb. Generally speaking to know
what case is to be used, try to make a literal translation of
the Konkani word into English or Latin , and the case which
would be required in using this literal regular translation ,
is the case which is to be used in Konkani . There are some
exceptions, but very few ; e.g. " saitānāk pāți-kår = send back
Satan ”, although the simple Postposition "pāti" seems to govern
the Original (or better " pāțleān ", because “ pāti" seems not to
be used as Postposition). Probably “ saitānāk ” is here governed
by " kår ”, not by “ pāți” .

Art V. Adverbs

$ 1. Adverbs in General
If we consider as Adverbs only those parts of speech ,
which have a form grammatically distinct from the form of
the other parts, then we could almost eliminate the Adverb
from the Konkani Grammar, because except the original Ad
verbs given almost all in Part II. , the others usually called
Adverbs, have either the form of a Noun in the Instrumental
Case , or of an Adjective, or of a Gerund etc. Further the
original Adverbs themselves are changed into Adjectives, we
may say for the slightest reason . Nevertheless, if we consider
this question from a higher point, i. e. from the regions of
philosophy, we are not allowed to eliminate so many Adverbs.
I explain my meaning. Adverb in its essential notion expresses
some determination of the Verb, whereas the Adjective expresses
something of the Noun cui adjicitur. Hence it follows that
those parts of speech which determine the Verb are to be
considered as Adverbs, although they may have a form of
 291

Adjective or Gerund etc. After this fundamental observation ,

let us go to say something about their use.
1. There are not many original Adverbs, i. e. parts which
determine the Verb , grammatically distinct from the other
parts of speech, as stated above. How does Konkani express
so many other Adverbs ? It uses other parts of speech, especially
Adjectives, Gerunds, Nouns.
a) As to Nouns, this happens also in our European langu
ages ; e. g. the Ablative of the Noun is used to express manner
just as the Instrumental in Konkani; e. g. “ with difficulty
kăšķān ” ; hence there is no need of further explanation.
b) As to Adjectives, Konkani not only uses them for Ad
verbs, but, which is peculiar to Konkani, also lets them agree
with a word, with which they have no strictly logical connexion
of agreement ; e. g. " to boro vhaztā = he plays well. ” Here
the word “ boro" determines " yhaztā " ; yet it agrees with sto " ,
with which it has some remote relation. Yet we might use
also the Neuter : “ to boreñ vhaztā ”. The first mode, although
perhaps apparently not so logical, seems to agree better with
Konkani .
c) As to Gerunds, Konkani is particularly fond of express
ing Adverbs, chiefly of manner, in a way similar to the com
pound Verbs in -un (see above $ 10) , because the Gerund in
-un expresses also manner ; so instead of using, e. g. “čitin =
attentively ”, the Noun with the Gerund in -un of the required
Verb is used. This required Verb is often “zatā” ; hence we
find so many Gerunds with " zāun " . The meaning of such
Adverbs is similar to the meaning of the compound Verbs in
-un, nay we might perhaps consider this kind of Adverbs not
different from that kind of Verbs in -un . Such a mode of
using the Adverbs is similar to the Kanarese mode in en (āgi) ,
Participial Gerund of worlu (āgu) = become” , and to the Tuļu
mode in gos (ādų) , Participial Gerund of woga (āpini) = to
=
become”; “ zāun” is exactly the Participial Gerund of szatāñ =
I become" . The construction of such a kind of Gerundial
37*
 292

Adverbs is not different from the construction of Gerunds (see

above) .
2. Many of our Adverbs are translated by Adjectives;
namely, if the Adverbs are in a sentence which is explicitly
or implicitly a relative sentence, then the relative sentence is
changed into a participial sentence : but such a sentence is
somewhat different from the common participial sentences ;
because here instead of changing the Verb into a Participle,
the Adverb (or Postposition) is changed into an Adjective;
e. g. " you , who are far come near = tuñ poislo lagiñ ye” .
In such a case sometimes a strange thing happens, viz. the
English Adverb is translated by a Konkani Adverb which
seems to have the contrary meaning ; e.g. " go far = lagšilo
votz" ; " come near = poislo ye ”. The reason of this paradox
=

has been given at p. 172 , para . 4 . Some derived Adjectives

have not been given on pp. 147-150; e.g. “ purto " from “ puro”, etc.
3. Finally remark that the same words may be used either
as Adverbs or as Postpositions according to the different
combinations to which they are liable ; e. g. “ adin, mukār,
uprānt".
§ 2. Adverbs in Particular
Now each Adverb given in Part II. Ch . V. should be care
fully explained, and this would be , no doubt, worth while ;
but as this would require too long a time, I shall limit myself
to the most necessary observations, leaving some more pecu
liar ones to the Dictionary. Some Adverbs, however, will be ex
plained in Art. VI., because many Adverbs are also Postpositions.
1. Correlative Adverbs. As we have found Correlative
Pronouns, so we find also Correlative Adverbs; e.g. " zăin
thăiñ = where—there, or whither - thither ” , and as the first of
the Correlative Pronouns can be omitted, so also the first of
the Correlative Adverbs can be omitted ; e.g. “whither I go,
thither you cannot come = āuñ vetāñ thăiñ tumiñ yeunk nozo”.
In English too, one of the Correlative Adverbs could be omit
 293

ted , but, usually, the second of them, or better (as there is no

fixed place for them ) the " atówool-"'; whereas in Konkani the
"repótasie
potages" is omitted. This is the best way , it seems to me,
to understand some elliptical sentences, which are very different
from the English or Latin forms of speech. Interrogative,
Relative etc. Adverbs need no explanation, or will be learnt
by practice.
2. Adverbs of place. If used absolutely, they are as given
in Part II. Ch. V.; if the notion through
“ . ..." is expressed,
then they are changed into an Adjective and put in the Instru
mental according to the rule (see pp. 212 , 213 , para. 7). If
the notion “ from ... " is expressed , they can be used followed
by “ thāun ” or some other word without making any change;
this must be understood also of other Adverbs. Sometimes
the original Adverb is used also in this meaning. So we say
" hañgāčeān=through here” ; “tāntleān=through there"; " poisi
leān = through a distant place"; "hangā thāun = from here” ; “ āz
legun = from to-day ”. About this point we must remark, that
not only can the same word be used both as an Adverb and
as a Postposition as stated above, but also the Instrumental
of the derived Adjective can be used as Postposition. So we
can say : " to moje mukāveleān vetā ”, instead of sto moje mu
។

kār vetā = he goes before me" .

According to the above explanation we could not use the
form in -eān, if the Adverb is used absolutely ; yet sometimes
we meet such a form : I doubt about its correctness. Conse
quently we say “ to mukār assā, to pāți assā " (some also say
“ mukāveleān, pațleān assā )”; “ to mukāveleān vetā or mukār
vetā "; " to moje mukār vetā " ( Postp .); “ to moje pațleān vetā ” .
In the last example we cannot use " pāti” ; then the meaning
would be " he comes back, returns" . This " pāti "” therefore
seems to be used only as Adverb.
3. Some of the given derived Adjectives are seldom used;
e.g. “vegiñtso ” .
4. To some Adverbs the Particle -gi gives an indefinite
 294

meaning; e. g. “khăiñgi gelo = (he) has gone somewhere, (he)

has gone I do not know where” ; -kossengi kelāñ = in some
way or other has been done (somehow or other)". To express
such a meaning it seems to be necessary to add this -gi.
Moreover it can be added as a pleonasm to the Correlative
Adverbs. (As to the correlative pronominal sentences see
p. 241.)

Art. VI. Postpositions

§ 1. Postpositions in General
These are just the opposite of the Adverbs, because the
Konkani Postpositions are as frequent as the Adverbs are
rare, I mean grammatically. Many English or Latin tenses are
.

expressed by Postpositions (see above ); some Conjunctions too

can be rendered by a Postposition ; e.g. " because = pāsun ”,
Latin propter. The Postpositions are, I may say, the favourite
part of speech of Konkani. But on the other hand they are
not so frequent as in English ; because so many Verbs com
pounded with Prepositions can be rendered by a simple Verb.
Moreover we have seen (see pp. 5, 227 ) that sometimes they
9

are changed into Adjectives. This use of Postpositions renders

the sentences more simple ; because out of two or more sen
tences only one sentence is formed, which, however, is so long
>

and complicated that we do not gain much perspicuity.

1. About the case governed by Postpositions you have the
list in Part II. Ch. VI. If some other Postposition should
occur, what case does it govern ? As far as my knowledge
goes, the Original : I do not remember now to have ever found
(except " pois ” which can be joined to the Dative, e.g. " santi
poṇāk pois = far from sanctity") any Postposition , which governs
the Dative or Nominative besides the given ones. Yet remark
that it is not prohibited to join them, if the meaning requires
it, also to the 2nd Locative as hinted at on p. 153 , para. 6 ;
e. g. “from the carriage = gādier thāun ", here we want to
 295

express descending from a high place. Perhaps some Post

positions might be joined also to some other case.
2. The Postpositions can be joined to Nouns, Pronouns
(sometimes to Adjectives too) , Verbs, i.e. Participles, Adverbs.
3. As regards the union of two Postpositions (see p. 153 ,
para. 6) this must be understood not only of the 2nd Loca
tive, ( for I said that the termination r of the Locative can be
considered as a contraction of " voir" ), i.e. not only can a
Postposition follow the 2nd Locative, but also two real
Postpositions can be joined. This takes place when two no
tions , as stated at p. 153 , are to be expressed , which are not
sufficiently expressed by one Postposition . The Postposition
which more frequently is joined to other preceding real Post
positions or Postposition -Adjectives is " thāun " ; e. g. “moje
lagiñ thāun pois votsā = lit. go from near to me far”; if we
consider that " pois” as a Postposition , we would have three
Postpositions together. Yet here " pois" seems to be rather an
Adverb. " Dēvā kåde thāun sărvų ailāñ = lit. everything came
from near to God ” . As to the example given loc. wsărgarānt” ,
in which not two pure Postpositions , but two cases are con
founded, i.e. the terminations of the 1st and 2nd Locative
together are added, this, I say , is not in common use. I
have put it down , because I have heard or read it some
where , but this must be considered as an incorrect form . To
express such an idea this expression is more common " ũnts
sărgār = aloft in heaven ", " ūnts mezār = aloft on the table";
=

or the 1st Locative only will suffice.

4. About the change of Postpositions into Adjectives see
p. 227. Further what is said in Art. V. about the change
of Adverbs into Adjectives servata proportione holds good also
for Postpositions.
About the construction of Postpositions , chiefly about the
long sentences which they govern, see Ch. III., below.
‫ܕ‬
 296

§ 2. Postpositions in Particular
Here too, it would be worth while to explain each Post
position ; I must limit myself to these few points.
1. First, there are some Adjectives derived from Post
positions not laid down in pp. 147-150 ; e. g. “ phudlo ” from
“ phude” ; “ uprāntlo” from “ uprānt” etc. Moreover some other
Postposition not given there may occur ; e.g. " višyāñt = about" ,
Latin de; bări = Latin instar"; this last, " bări ” , although per
haps strictly not a Postposition, has, however, nearly the
same construction : (see also p. 225 para. 8). About this “ bări”
remark further, that some use " porri " instead of “ bări", chiefly
in religious matters.
2 . “ Moņasăr, păriant = until” . “ Moņasăr”, if used with
Verbs, is often shortened into “ săr ” (see Appendix to the Gram
mar). Both “ păriant ” and “ moņasăr ” seem to be used in
differently. Both can be used also with Verbs, although with
Verbs more frequently " moņsăr” is used.
3. “ Porteñ” is derived from " porti = turn ”; hence it means
sturning ” and is like a Participle, which must be declined as I
said of “ kosso " etc.; as to the meaning, it is a Postposition, yet
grammatically it is an Adjective; e. g. sthe father will be
against the son , and the son against the father = pūtų bāpāk
porto astolo, ani bāpai putāk ”. If we say " porteān” or “ por
tun ” , the meaning is " again ".
4. “ Ā ” and “ virodh" are, very often , used indifferently
with “ porteñ ".
5. “ Phudeñ” is a strange Postposition , because it seems to
have two contrary meanings, i.e. after and before. Yet this
is only in appearance; its original meaning is close to, but
still in future; hence according to the way of conceiving such
a meaning, it can be expressed either by “ before ” (close to,
in future) or " after " (after this time, in future ). So we can
say : " yea phudeñ pātak kårnakā = in the time which is be
 297

fore thee or before thy face (in future) do not commit sin " .
66
“ Phudeñ" seems to come from “ phuda = future time” .
From it the Adjective “ phudlo = future" , or that which is
=

immediately after the present, or before another thing, e.g.

“ Paskā phuậlo upās = Lent, or fasting which is before Easter ” .
66
6. “ Uprānt, magir ”. Both have the same meaning " after "
as in Latin post ; " uprānt" seems to be more used as Post
position, and joined as far as possible with the Participles of
Verbs ; “ magir " is more common as Adverb ; e.g. " kām keleā
uprānt = after having performed the business"; " āuñ magir
yetāñ = I come afterwards ”. Yet sometimes they can be used
indifferently. “ Uprānt” and “ magir” are usually joined to
the Pure Past Participle .
7. " Pațleān ” is the Instrumental of " pațlo” derived from
“ pāți = back ”. It may be used also as Adverb, e.g. " to pațleān
yetā = he comes behind ”. Yet, although it be used as Adverb,
as to the meaning it may differ from " pāti”; so to pāți yetā =
he comes back” ; “ to pațleān yetā = he comes behind (after
us)". The reason of such difference may be this : " pāți = back ” ,
" pațleān = through that way which is measured in going back,
or behind ” (see above) .
8. “ Voir ” properly means “ upon ”; yet figuratively it can
7

be used also to express " in ", but with a certain emphasis; e.g.
" saitān teā mănšā voir assā = the devil is in that man " . Instead
of woir ” we may use the 2nd Locative , but not in every
case ; use must be consulted.
9. " Såkål, khāl, tala, ponda = under ". Sometimes they can
be used indifferently; in many cases however they must be dis
tinguished : " såkål " seems to be used rather of material things
and of a non-contiguous inferiority, and, more frequently as
Adverb, e. g. " såkål podlāñ = it fell down ; " khāl" more com
monly is used in figurative meaning, e.g. " to mojea khāl assā -
he is under my jurisdiction ". The Goanese use “ khāl” also
for material things. “ Tala ” and “ ponda” are used more
38
 298

frequently for contiguous inferiority; “ ponda ” is the most

common Postposition to express " under” and “ below ".
From these Postpositions we have the derived Adjectives:
“ săkăilo, khālto, pondlo ".
10. “ Kåde ” has been explained elsewhere. About it
remark only the Adjective " kådtso ” which is used in a strange
manner, to express " from " instead of “ thāun " ; the reason has
been given elsewhere , i.e. skåạtso = that which is or was
near”; “ Somi Jezu Krist Bāpā kådtso āilo = our Lord Jesus
Christ came from the Father, lit. came being near to the
Father ” . Some say “ găde " instead of “ kåde”.
11. " Bhāir = out” is used not only to express place, but
also figuratively ; e. g ogărje bhāir = without necessity” ; “ more
than I am obliged = kāideā bhāir" ; " beyond your power =
podvie bhāir” etc.
12. " Vin, or viņe” is not often used, because the English
“ without ” is better expressed by the Negative Gerund in
" -tanan" or by the Conditional Negative, or by “ šivāi” .
Nevertheless it occurs in this and similar meanings : ( without
necessity = gărje viņe ", " without comparison = sări vin " etc.
If "without” occurs with a Verb, it is expressed by the
Negative Gerund, as I said ; if it occurs with a Noun, then
it is translated sometimes by the negative form of the
Verb, if such a Verb is understood; e. g. "without communion
man cannot live a supernatural life = kumgār kāņeināstanañ
săimba - vorto jīv jieunk nozo.” We have seen already that
“ bhāir ” can be used also in the meaning of “ without” .
The derived Adjective “ bhāilo " means “ exterior " , e. g.
bhāileo mādri = exterior Nuns" (Tertiaries), as they say
here in Mangalore.
13. " Sangata = with ” properly means “ society ”'; and even
in this meaning of “ society ”, it is replaced sometimes by
“ kåde”, if our “ with ” expresses directly the term of an action ;
>

e.g. " to have to do something with "; consequently " sangata "
seems to express directly “ company ”. Notwithstanding in
 . 299

some cases “ sangata ” and “ kåde ” or ilagið " might be used

indifferently; e.g. “ Dēvā kåde” or “ Dēvā sañgata meļon mănis
ajapañ kårtā = man united with God makes wonders ”. In
this example however gangata " is better used.
14. “ Viñgăd” , strictly speaking, seems to be an Adjective,
meaning " separated "; yet its use corresponds to the English
" apart, aside”; e. g. “ Somi Jezu Kristān apostolānk viñgåď
dovorleāt = Our Lord Jesus Christ took apart the Apostles. ”
Instead of svingă ” we can use " veg !o = separated ”. Some
say that “ veg !o " is used for persons, " viñgăd " for things, yet
such difference is somewhat doubtful.
15. “ Pasun , pasvot”. Commonly these two Postpositions
can be used indifferently in the meaning of " on account of"
and " in order to " or also " for” , Latin pro. Yet if I were to
66
9

judge from the use made by some of these Postpositions , I would

say that “ pasun” means “ on account of" , " pasvot = in order
to or for” . Future considerations may determine this point.
16. Khātir " seems to be more commonly used in the >
meaning of " for” , e. g. " moje khātir māg == pray for me."
17. “ Nimtiñ " can be used in the same meaning of pasun " ,
i.e. " on account of” ; it is rather rare.
18 . “ Părmāņe" seems to be an old Original, from " pår
māņ = manner ", not used except in the Original . We have
a sign of its origin from a Substantive in the sentence ;
"fāvoteā părmāņe = in a proper way” . Notwithstanding it
follows the rules of the Postpositions ; so we say " kāideā
pårmāņe = lawfully ” ; “ šastrā părmāņe = according to or in con
formity with religion ” ; “ povitra pustakānt sānglea pårmāņe
khăiñ mhèļeñ sărgār rigănāñ = as it is said (according to the
said) in the Holy Bible, no unclean thing enters into heaven ” .
This Postposition can be joined also to the Past Participle.
19 . “ Bhountaņiñ ” (not “ băuntaņeñ ”, as on p. 152) . It
is derived from bhouñ = go round " ; it seems to be the
Instrumental (see p. 24, para. 5) of some old Substantive, no
more in use. It is used in this and similar sentences ; "Roman
38 *
 300

pårzā yeun Jeruzaleā bhountaņiñ vedo mārteli = the Roman

people will come and put a siege around Jerusalem . ”
20. “ Veslean " seems to be the Instrumental of the obsolete
Substantive " veslo ” ; yet it is more natural to say that it
comes from “ issiñ = in this way" ; " issilo = which is in this
side”, “ issileān = through this side” ; the initial v is prefixed
as this is often the case with words beginning with i.
21. “ Dikān ” is the Instrumental of dik = side, direction " :
hence it may require sometimes the Original of the Adjective
instead of the Original of the Noun. From the explanation
given of vesleān ” we can learn that " dikān ” and “ issileān "
are synonyms indeed, yet not to be used always in the same
way. In order to know which must be used , recollect that
" dikān” means " in the direction of ” , “ issileān" means “ in
this side or through this side” ; in a particular case consider
which of these two literal translations is more suitable. Ex
amples: " In what direction is Europe ? = Vilāyet khăinčea
dikān assā ?" Here we could not use so properly “ issileān ” .
“ Europe is in this side = Vilāyet issileān assā " ; " the country
called Gnosis is in the direction of the place called Ener
geia = Gnosis mollo gāuñ Energeyā mollea gāuñčeā dikān assā .”
22. “ Thāun ” , as hinted at, means " from " , as in the sent
> >

ences which express distance, real or metaphorical ; e. g. " from

good resolutions to execution there is a great distance ; there
fore the Holy Bible says : desires kill the lazy man = boreā
ničevā thāun sovoi păriant bhou pois assā ; teā pasun povitra
pustak moņțā ki khušeo aļsi månšāk jivsi mārtāt món ”.
This Postposition has been explained elsewhere also.
23. “ Poltoņi” originally means “ on that side” ; e.g." ofthe
river or beyond '; in the metaphorical meaning of “ beyond ”
it seems not to be often used ; " bhāir ” is rather employed in
such a meaning.
From “ Poltoời the Adjective " pelo = ulterior” is derived ;
"%.
it means exactly “that which is beyond. ..."; e.g. " pelo burgo
yeundi = let the boy come who is beyond the....”.
 301

24. “ Altădi" is the opposite of “ poltodi": the derived Ad

jective is " āilo” .
25. “ Vorviñ ” means “through” , in German " durch” as in
the sentence : “ through continual prayer we shall save our
soul, and obtain from God every thing = khālinastanañ magčeā
vorvin amiñ amtso åtmo bačāu kărteleāuñ ani Dēvā thāun
sărvụ kurpā zodteleāuñ ". It means therefore “ means, instru
ment, cause ” .
26. “Šivāi and karit” correspond to praeter ; e.g. " tače
šivāi = beside this" . They are used also to express the English
“ except”; eig. " except sin nothing is a true evil = pātkā šivāi
vāit kăiñ nāñ ” . By this Postposition we can also translate
elegantly many negative conditional sentences ; e.g. " if we do
not suffer now with Jesus Christ, we shall not enjoy with him
everlasting joy= Jezu Kristā sañgatā amiñ atāñ sosanāñ zaleār,
tačeā sangată sasnāčeñ sukh bhogunk nozo " . The mean
ing itself of “ šivāi" seems to exact , if joined to a Verb, the
Participle in -tso ; yet there may be some rare case in which
some Past Participle might perhaps be used.
27. “ Badlāk” comes from " badăl = to exchange ” hence
literally it means " at or in the substitution of ” ; thereby its
meaning and use are already known.
28. -Suāter" is the 2nd Locative of " suāt = place ” ; yet its
construction is as if it were a Postposition. I must however
acknowledge that its use is rather complicated, and connected
with the construction of Participial sentences ; e.g. " by un
worthy communions , instead of receiving God's grace, you
drink your own judgment = uo undo fāvonăiñ astanañ seutā
to, ani Somia kals pietā to kurpā zođče suāter apņākats zăţti
seutā ani pietā món Sāñ Paul sangtā ”.
66
29. “ Višyānt” is like the Latin de or the English " about” ,
e. g. " if we love God, we shall speak of Him willingly = amiñ
=

Dēvātso mog keleār, tačeā višyānt kušālāyen uleizāi” .

From “ višyānt ” I found somewhere derived the Adjective
“višyātso= which is about, relative” , e.g. “ Dēvā višyātso niāl =
>
 302

meditation about God "; many do not acknowledge it as a

Konkani word ; yet it seems to sound well.

Art. VII. Conjunctions

$ 1. Conjunctions in General
We can say of the Conjunctions what we said of the
Adverbs , viz . that if we understand by this name any word
which performs the office of the English or Latin Conjunctions,
there may be many Conjunctions ; if we understand words
which formaliter and grammatically also may be Conjunctions,
distinct from all other parts of speech, we must say that
there are few ; because a) many of our Conjunctions are
expressed by Postpositions, as Konkani is very fond of
them , e.g. " because" is often expressed by " pasun " with the
Participle: " you commit sin , because you do not pray =māgņeñ
kårnatullea pasun pātkānt podtai” . We could use also the
.

true Conjunction " kiteāk molleār”; b) sometimes the Pro

nouns are used instead of Conjunctions, e. g. “ as - as = kosso
tasso, or zosso-tosso ; c) sometimes the English Conjunction
is omitted in Konkani, e.g. " in one or in the other way =
kossogi” ; “ is it right or wrong ? = tsuk såmagī?” d) The
Negative Conjunctions are expressed by the Affirmative Con
junctions, with the Negative Particle joined to the Verb, e.g.
" a proud man does not please either God or man = gårvi
månis Dēvāki månšānki mānuånāñ = lit. to God also to men
also does not please ".
$ 2. Conjunctions in Particular
A few words about the most common Conjunctions:.
1. " Kitеāk ” means " why ? lit. to what?" Dative of “ kiteñ ” .
Instead of " kiteāk ” we may use " kitea pasun ? = for what ?":
as in Latin propter quid, instead of " cur ” . Its construction
is regular, e.g. " kiteāk poļetai tuñ teñ kuskuț tujea bāvāčea
doļeānt ani čintinai to tó! zo assā tujea doļeānt ? = and why
-
 303

seest thou the mote in thy brother's eye ; but the beam that
is in thy own eye thou considerest not ? ” (Luk. vi. 41.)
2. “ Kitеāk moleār = lit. to what if you say", used for
“ because ". The construction is regular. Both are put in the
beginning of the sentence, as in English. Sometimes only
kiteāk” is used . Instead of it very often a corresponding
Postposition (pasun .... ) with the Participle, is used, or
9

3. “ Dekun ” . If this is used as a Postposition, it is put at

the end of the sentence, e. g. “ Dēu lekāvorto boro dekun amiñ
tatso mög kărizāi = we must love God, because he is infinitely
good .” Sometimes “ dekun ” and “ kiteāk” are joined together
thus : “ .kiteāk Dēu boro dekun ”. The first mode seems
to be better. " Dekun ” can be used also as an illative particle ;
then it is put in the beginning; e.g. “ Déu amtso rătsnār, dekun
amiñ tači sevā sākri kărizāi = God is our Creator, therefore we
must serve Him ” . “ Dekun" is used also as Postposition , in
stead of " pasun ", but seldom ; e. g. “ månis bhou åskåt, tea
dekun takā Dēvāči kumok zāi = man is very weak , on this
account he is in need of God's help ”.
4. “ Thăr” is commonly used as an illative particle in the
beginning of a sentence : “ souñsār amkāñ photaitā, thår amiñ
kiteñ kårizāi ? = the world deceives us, then what to do ? ” It
is joined to “ zăr” and “ zări ” ( see below) .
5. “ Puņ = but”, Latin sed, German aber. If “ but” corres
ponds to the German sondern , i. e. in oppositions, more
frequently, " bogăr” is used . When this but is in connexion
with “ not only" and the like, the preceding " not only...” is
translated by the Negative particle and the emphatic -ts ; e.g.
" God is not only good but also just = Dēu nåints boro, bogår
nītivănt" .
It seems that the English “ but ” is very often omitted in
Konkani, unless there be a peculiar emphasis upon “ but” .
6. “ Thări” is compounded of“ thår ” and “ i = also, although ” .
It may be used absolutely as in this sentence : "forty years
long I was near to this generation , yet it did not know my
 304

way = āuñ čāļis vorsāñ ye kulie lagiñ assullo, thări tiņeñ

moji vāț voļkunk-nāñ (Ps. xcvi. 10 , 11 ). It can be used
also joined to “ zari ” (see below) .
7. " Zaleāri” is compounded of “ zaleār” and “ i”, hence the
>

literal meaning is “ although it happened ”. It can be used

however also absolutely, i.e. as the English " yet or notwith
standing ”; e. g . " yeñ vojeñ bhāradik khărentz ; zaleāri sosazāi
this burden is heavy indeed, nevertheless (we) must suffer it ” .
8. “ Zărtăr, zărităr” (see p. 155). Here only about its
construction . The first can be used to express the conditional
(if ) and the second for the permissive (although ). If the
meaning is merely conditional or permissive, then they govern
more frequently, the tenses indicated at p. 251. Yet sometimes
the conditional or permissive notion is mixed with some other
notion (see p. 268, para. 3) ; then we might use that tense
which comes nearer to the notion which is to be expressed.
I cannot say more here in general ; for the particular cases
may be very many and different. Remark however that
common people may use some forms which do not agree with
the philosophy of grammar, considered together with the use
of more learned people ; hence those forms can be eliminated
as wrong . Among these wrong forms we might perhaps reckon
the compound form of “ zărtăr or zărităr and -leār” ; e.g.
“ zărtăr tuveñ yeñ keleār, tukā yêk inām meļat = if you did
this, you would receive a prize” . This form is not acknow
ledged as right by some natives themselves. “ Zărităr and
zăritări " can be used indifferently; the only difference is that
“ zăritări” has twice the permissive particle i.
9. " Ki, món ”. Many things should be said about these ;
but as they are intimately connected with the construction, I
shall speak of them in Ch. III. More exactly we should write
" mhón ”.
10. “ Vo, uo, yā ”. Such Conjunctions are not often used,
they are not seldom omitted especially in interrogative sen
tences (see 1 ) . All three mean “ or ” .
 305

11. " Muņčen " is the Infinitive Absolute of “muņ = say" ; it

corresponds exactly to the English, except that Konkani leaves
out that is ” .
12. " Nāñ, năiñ, niñ = no " . The English no is translated
by “ niñ or năiñ ” , if some quality is denied and the Verb “ to
be ” is understood ; in other cases “ nāñ ” is used. Very often
the whole sentence is repeated , in the negative form , as in
Latin ; e.g. " āilogi to ? = did he come ? ” “yeunk-nāñ = no, he
6
did not come” see p. 104. " Niñ " probably is “ năiñ " , but pro
nounced quickly .
13. " Săit” means “ also, together ”; its construction is thus :
either it is placed after the affected word without modifying its
case, or it may govern the Original of the affected word ; e.g.
" soul and body together will go to heaven = ătmo ani kud
săit sărgār vetāt , or åtmeā ani kuţi săit sărgār vetāt" . I
cannot ascertain whether this 2nd form is quite correct , al
though it occurs.
Some other Conjunctions and Particles can be found, with
their use in the Dictionary .

CHAPTER III. CONSTRUCTION

Art I. Partial Construction

§ 1. Verbs of Finite Mood

The Mahrātti Grammarians distinguish in this point three

“ Prayogas” or Constructions , i. e. “ Kartari " or Subjective,
6
“ Karmaņi” or Objective, " Bhāvi" or Neuter construction. As
the " Kartari Prayoga" does not differ from our construction ,
and the “ Bhāvi Prayoga" is seldom used, so I do not follow this
rather difficult mode of explanation , but I explain this point
according to the rules of Passive Voice especially, which exists
in our languages ; so it will be easier, for there is a transition
a noto ad ignotum . This point proves once more that Kon
kani has not always the same rules as Mahrātti, as some think.
39
 306

The “ Kartari ” Construction is the same as the construc

tion in Latin or English in similar sentences , therefore it
can be omitted ; generally, in the points which are not indicated
as irregular, we may follow nearly the same construction as
in English or Latin. For the other points we must distin
guish Transitive and Intransitive Verbs.
1. Transitive Verbs. The Transitive Verbs in the tenses
of passive meaning (see page 276) have a construction , as if
they were passive. Hence the subject is put in the Instru
mental, the Accusative in the Nominative, and the Verb
agrees with this new Nominative ; e . g. " āuveñ mojeñ kām
keleñ = I performed my business , or by me was performed ...'
To this general rule we must add these limitations :
a) If the direct object of the Transitive Verb is an animate
subsistent object, it remains in the Accusative also in the
tenses of passive meaning, although the Verb agrees with this
Accusative in gender, number and person (Karmaņi Prayoga ).
6) If the direct object of the Transitive Verb is a person ,
and sometimes also if the subject is not a person, it seems
allowed (although not often used) to put the Verb , if it is in
the above named tenses, in the neuter ; sostaneñ bāpāk āpoileñ=
he called the father ” , instead of staņeñ bāpāk āpoilo” . (Bhāvi
Prayoga ).
c) In the Potential Mood , the Noun which should be put
in the Instrumental , can be put in the Dative , or if it is a
>

Pronoun, in the Instrumental of the derived Adjective. So :

" he may eat = taņeñ khāviet" , or " takā khāviet" , or “ taceān
.

khāviet” , from “ khā = eat” .

d ) As to the Potential and Necessary Mood, the Transitive
Verbs have the above construction only , if the forms in “ iyet”,
or in c -zāi ” occurs ; as to the Negative Necessary, the agent
is put in the Instrumental in “ -čeān" or vjeān” (see p. 213,
para . 9).
e) If the agent is the 2nd Person Singular, in the Past,
Perfect, Past Perfect, the Verb remains in the 2nd Person
 307

e.g.
Singular Neuter ; e. g. " did you hear my words ? = tuveñ mojin
utrañ aikålāiñgi ?” (some seem to use the Masculine “ aikă
loigi” ). In non -interrogative sentences it seems allowed to
have the Verb agreeing with its object; e. g. “ tuveñ mojiñ
utrañ aikåleānt, or aikalāiñ = you have heard my words” .
So in confessions, when asking we must use the 2nd Person
Singular Neuter. Instead of the Neuter 2nd Person Singular,
some use the Feminine ; e. g. “ tuveň mojeñ utrañ aikåleāigi ? ”
f ) There are a few Transitive Verbs which have the
same construction as the Intransitive Verbs. These are the
following: “ sik = learn ” , “ visăr = forget”, “ jeu = eat " (rice) ,
“ pie = drink” , “ nes = dress" , " pāñgurų or pāñgru = cover
=

oneself ”, “ tsuk = be missing or mistake", ” " hās = laugh ” ,

“ bhēt = visit” , “ voļkå = know ”, “ ulei = speak ” , " somza = under
>

stand ” and a few others which use will teach you ; e. g. “ to

uloilo iñ utran = he spoke these words ”.
2. Neuter Verbs. These , as also those few Transitive
Verbs now excepted, have the above construction , i.e. the
Nominative goes in the Instrumental in the following cases :
a) If they are joined to “ zāi”, e.g. " āveñ votsazāi = I must
go” ; and also more commonly in the Potential Mood in " -yet” , >

e.g. taņeñ votsayet = he may go " .

6) In the Past Gerund in “ -täts” , e.g. " mănšāniñ tsăd pie
tăts săma uleinānt = if men have drunk much, (they) do not
speak rightly ”. Yet with this Past Gerund the Neuter (as
also the Transitive) Verbs may follow the common construc
tion ; e.g. " mănis pietăts..... "
c) In the Infinitive corresponding to the Latin Accusatives
with Infinitive ; e.g. " tumkañ gărz assā āveñ večeñ = expedit
vobis me ire” . Yet here too we may follow the “Kartari Pra
yoga ” : “ āuñ vetso tumkañ gărz assā ” .
66
d) With “ nozo” the Instrumental in “ čeān or -jeān” is
used. (See p. 213, para. 9. )
In other cases the Intransitive Verbs have a regular
construction .
39 *
 308

$ 2. Participles
Though the Participles follow the general rule, yet they
require a particular explanation, because the application of
the general rule is difficult. First, about their construction
in relative sentences.
1 . Omission of the Relative Pronoun. If we have a sen
tence governed by the Relative Pronoun , this is omitted and
the Verb is changed into its corresponding Participle ; e.g.
" the man who was working died = vāur kårtālo mănis melo ” .
The omission can take place, although the Relative Pronoun
is accompanied by some Postposition ; e.g. " the road on which
you walked yesterday, has been spoiled = tūñ kāl tsăllo mārog,
=

pāļ zālo".
The omission of the Relative Pronoun , which naturally
precedes its Noun and can have , as we shall see, before itself
some other word either as Subject or as Object, gives rise
to very long and rather difficult sentences, which will be
more conveniently explained below. (Art. II. § 1.)
2. Concord. With which Noun must this Participle
agree ? The following is the answer and general rule :
The Participle agrees in Gender, Number and Case, not
with any word which may be a part of the relative sentence ,
but with that word , of which the relative sentence is like an
explanation or like an . Adjective.
In the example, given above, the words " on which you
walked ” are an explanation and used as an Adjective of “ road” ;
therefore the Participle agrees with road. “ Tūñ ” before
utzallo " is the Nominative of the relative sentence; hence it
must not be taken into consideration in this point.
If we had had above a Transitive Verb in a Past Tense,
then we should have said “ tuveñ "'; because the Participle has
the same construction as the Original Verb ; e.g. -the road ,
which you have seen , has been spoiled = tuven poļeilo mārog
pāď zalā ” .
 309

Corollary 1. In order to change a relative sentence into

a participial sentence a) omit the Relative Pronoun , b ) change
the Verb into the corresponding Participle, c) let this Parti
ciple agree in Gender, Number and Case with the word , of
which the relative sentence is an explanation, . d) leave the .

words of the relative sentences in the same order, e) place the

participial sentence before the affected Noun , (see an example
here below ) . .
Corollary 2. In a participial sentence there may be a
Nominative or other Case before the Participle; e.g. " to boro
zallеā pasun sărgār gelā = he went to heaven, because he had
become good ”. “ Zallea” is Original, “ boro" Nominative, be
cause we should say : " to boro zallo”; hence the Participle,
although in the Original keeps the same construction . More
over there may be an object governed by the Participle, e.g.
" the tooth with which the tiger bit the ox, is this ” . First lite
rally : " dāntụ zaņeñ vāgān băilāk sābyllo uo ”; now a participial
sentence according to the first corollary : " vāgān băilāk sāb
ullo dăntų uo ” . There are numberless examples like this.
This last corollary must be well remembered in order to
understand some long participial sentences, in which the
Participle is accompanied by many Nouns.
The above rule is not to be applied to the so-called Participle in “ -tā to ” .
(See pp. 236, 259.)
Although this participial construction is very frequent,
the use of the Relative Pronoun is not prohibited . (See its
construction , p. 236) .
3. Case governed by Participle. From the given examples
we learn that the Participles of Neuter Verbs have no Accusa
tive, except in a few cases similar to the Latin vitam vivere
etc. Participles of Transitive Verbs govern the same case as
the Verbs from which they are derived and have the same con
struction and meaning. Hence if we have a compound Noun
of a Transitive Participle, and of another Noun governed by
this, the first Noun is not put in the Original (see p. 179) ; e. g.
 310

“ lugat siuñtolo = he who stitches a cloth "; but “ lugta siuñkār".

Consequently no change of case takes place by changing the
Verb into the corresponding Participle; e.g. " he went home
to garä gelo "; " to the house to which he went = to geleă
garāk " ; " he cut a tree = taņeñ yēk ruk kātårlo ” ; " the tree
which he cut is very large = taneñ kātårlo ruk bhou võd ”.

Art. II. Complexive Construction

$ 1. Collocation of words
The following principle may throw some light : “ The less
important words precede the more important ones ” ; hence
a) the secondary sentence precedes the principal ; b) in each
sentence the Adjective, if taken as an attribute (see p. 199,
nole) precedes the Noun ; c) a whole sentence which takes the
place of an Adjective precedes the affected Noun ; d) the Verb
is put at the end ; e) if many subordinate Nouns occur, the
governed Noun precedes the governing one ; e.g. " I gave my
book to the son of the brother of my friend = āuveñ mojeñ
pustak mojeā išķāčeā bāvāčeā putāk dileñ " ; f) if there be two
words or cases independent of each other, there is no fixed
rule ; yet here too the above mentioned principle might be
applied.
We may say also thus : the various parts of a sentence
are very often so connected that some are like genus, materia ,
determinabile ; some are like differentia, forma, determinans :
genus etc. precedes differentia etc. Yet we cannot explain
all examples by these two ways ; use is the master. Hence
a) in preaching and religious matters a somewhat different
construction is used, as b) often also in familiar conversation ;
c) in some cases the complication of words requires some
other arrangement.
This most general rule will be explained for the sake of
brevity, with some examples. “ The man who has been
66

created by God to His own image with great love, becomes

 311

dear to God by Divine love =- Dēvān apleā sărkeatso tsăd

mögān rătsullo månis möga vorviñ Dēvāk mögäl zatā”. The
sentence beginning with " who" is like an Adjective of " man " ;
hence omitting the Relative Pronoun, “ månis” is put after it.
Further in the same relative sentence the Participle is put
at the end , immediately before “ mānis ” , as Verb; " by God”
>

precedes sto his... " , as the second part has more emphasis ;
>

and again , " aplea sărkeātso ” precedes 'tzád mõgān", because

this second part determines “ rătsựllo ”. The following words
need no explanation.
6
“ The brother of the father of my friend, has to suffer
1 ) on account of the war, 2) which took place 3) between the
>

King of Arsuzia and the Emperor of Kadimeri 4) in the 2nd

year 5) after his arrival 6) in this country = moje išķātea
bāpaitso bāu yeā gāvānt ailleā dusreā vorsā Arsučitsea rāyā
ani Kadimeričea mahā -rāyā bităr zalleā zuzā vorvin sostā ” .
At the end the Verb, in the beginning the subject preceded by
the governed Nouns; and among these, that which is governed
and governs , precedes ; of the remaining words this is the
order of determination : " 1) on account of the war, 2) which
took place , 3) between ... , 4) in the 2nd ... , 5) after his
arrival , 6) in this country ". The 2nd determines the 1st,
the 3rd determines the 2nd and so on ; consequently we must
put them in this order : 6), then 5) , then 4) , then 3), then 2) ,
)

then 1 ) . In this example you see also how the Participial

sentences must be constructed .

Although this is the nature of Konkani as to construc

tion , yet if such long sentences occur, it will be better to
resolve them into smaller sentences . Yet even in smaller
sentences the same rules which have been laid down above,
and shown in the above two examples must be observed.
Many other things about this important point should be said,
which however for extrinsical reasons must be omitted. At
any rate the gist of them has been touched upon.
 312

Remark further 1 ) that titles are usually put after the

affected word , seldom before; e. g. " pādri sāib " . 2) The in
terrogative words are put as close as possible to the Verb ;
if this is not expressed , at the end ; e.g. " why does your hand
tremble ? = tuzo hāt kiteāk kamptā ?” “ who is that man ? = to S

mănis kon ?" If we say “ kāņ to månis:" it means “what kind

of man is that ? " 3) The article " yēk ” prefers to be joined
immediately to its Noun, if there are other Adjectival Genitives;
e. g . " a man of this country = yeā gāuñtso yēk månis”; if we
=

say " yek gāuñtso månis ", some understand “ a man of a

country ” . Some more examples about construction will be
given perhaps in the I. Appendix.
S 2. Connexion of Sentences
There are co -ordinate and subordinate sentences ; each
kind can be subdivided : here I speak only of some subordinate
sentences ; the others are either easy or are explained in the
Dictionary. Secondary sentences are connected with prin
cipal ones by Postpositions and Participles (see p. 274 et alibi),
very often by “ món and ki = that” . Their construction is this :
1. Put first the secondary sentence, then " món ”, then the
7

principal one ; e.ģ. “ to phaleā yetolo món āuñ čintāñ = I think

that he will come to-morrow" . Yet if the Verb is not put at
the end as often happens, “món " also is not put at the end ;
e.g. " to assā món apleā gårānt āuñ čintāñ I think that he
=

is in his house ". Yet it is better to put the Verb at the end.
2 . Put first the principal sentence, then “ ki”, then the
secondary sentence ; e.g. " āuñ čintāñ ki to yetolo = I think
that he will come " .
3. Put first the principal sentence, then “ ki” , then the
រ

secondary sentence , then “ món " ; e.g. " āuñ čintăñ ki to yetolo
món ”.
4. Omit altogether the Conjunction; " āuñ čintāñ to
yetolo " . Among these modes, the first seems to be more correct.
In such sentences the Verb is put in the mood required by
 313

the meaning ; if the meaning is imperative, exhorting and

the like, then the Imperative is used ; e. g. " request God to
forgive you = Dēvā lagið māg bogos món ”". Therefore if in
Latin or English we have an oratio indirecta governed by
“ món ”, in Konkani the oratio directa is often used, retaining,
>

however “món” as in Hebrew ; e. g. " he requested him to.

lend him a book = tače lagiñ māglāñ yők yēk pustak di món ””;
“ cum responsum accepissent ne redirent having received the
=
answer not to go back = zāb meļtăts, portun votsanaye món " .
Gi or gai seems also to be used to connect sentences both
co-ordinate and subordinate ; it may be joined also to “ món ";
e. g. " kăiñ, khăiñ ani kòņā pasun mag-neñ mòņazāigai món
poļeyā = let us see when , where, for whom we have to pray ” .
Remarks. 1. Using "mon " is the easiest way of ex
pressing in Konkani the Latin Past or Future Infinitive. I
say “ the easiest way ”, not the " only way ” , because the con
>

struction of Instrumental with Infinitive, can also be used

(see p. 257). Even the above examples might be expressed
in some other way ; e.g. " to fāleã yēuñk puro = he might
come to -morrow " , which has nearly the same meaning as “ to
fāleā yetolo món āuñ činta "; the exact meaning of the 1st
sentence is : " it may be that he comes to -morrow ” .
2 . Instead of “ món ” , we can use also “ moņun ”, namely
if an oratio indirecta is reported. It is just like the Hebrew
dicendo dicit and the Tulu eoor = andų or sous go = åndụdų.
3. " Món" is sometimes changed into “ molleñ = said",
nay sometimes it is declined like an Adjective; e.g. " by
thinking that I have offended God, I am very much displeased =
āuveñ Dēvāk akmān kelā molli čintnā makā zaļaitā ”. When
is this " mollen” to be used when we could substitute in a
literal translation " said ” for “ saying".
4. " Món" is used also in the oratio directa, as in the
Holy Bible : dixit quod ego veniam ; so also : " tikeñ rāu,
āuñ yetāñ món = wait ( that) I come”” (see above l. 3) . It
is used, although another word of aa similar meaning is there ;
40
 314

e. g. " to somzunknāñ kåseñ gadleñ món = he did not under

stand how it happened ” . To use the oratio directa with
" mon " is usual. Nay it seems that this " mon " is used as a
general means of connexion , although there is no othat” or
similar particle in English : to learn such a use great practice
is required. Here I can only say in general that Konkani
prefers to join secondary sentences with principal ones ex
pressly ; hence if no other joining particle is there, “món " is
used .
5. Some English secondary sentences do not require a
peculiar connexion in Konkani , because they are embodied
in the principal sentence so as to form one sentence. This
is the case especially with the participial sentences governed
by Postpositions (see above).

CHAPTER IV . CONSIDERATIONS ABOUT KONKANI

Art I. Origin of Konkani
Konkani is derived from Konkan , a province along the
Western Coast of India , approximately between 169 and 20 °
of latitude. Hence Konkani language etymologically should
mean the language originally spoken in Konkan. Yet now Kon
kani is spoken in provinces far away from Konkan, i. e. in
South Kanara by almost all Christians, by many thousand
pagans, and also somewhat in Malabar and , so they say, still
more South . We must however distinguish two branches of
Konkani : the Goanese branch spoken in Goa and, as I heard,
elsewhere also, and the Konkani of South Kanara ; of this
only I speak both in the Grammar and the Dictionary.
This language, formerly called Kanarine language, is
so called , because the Konkani speaking people are said to
have come from Konkan in ancient times.
The language of Konkan was and is, mostly at least,
Mahrātti; this shows that most probably Konkani is derived
 315

from Mahratti , as French, Spanish, Portuguese etc. are said

to be derived from the Latin. Indeed many Konkani words
and some rules too agree with the Mahrātti, yet not to such
an extent as to enable us to make much use of Mahrātti.
Those who know Mahrātti are well aware of this ; for those
who do not know Mahrātti, out of many proofs I choose these
9

few :
1. For the Mahrātti termination 37, which has no gen
ders, Konkani has -ntlo (-i, -en ).
2. The multiplicative numbers in Mahrātti are formed
by 9a, in Konkani by " dodo ".
3. Adverbial numbers of frequency are formed in Mah
rātti by di; this mode is no longer common in Konkani.
4. 379T is used for your honour” etc.; not so in Kon
kani .
5. The Causal Verbs are formed by , in Konkani by ai ,
6. There are moreover the terminations of the cases and
of the conjugation, which, although sometimes similar, are>

however often quite different.

Although Mahrātti seems to be the chief stock, Kanarese,
Tulu , Malayālam etc. seem to have also contributed to form
Konkani. The fact is that there are in Konkani many words
which occur also in Tulu , Kanarese etc. I cannot ascertain
whether these have been adopted into Konkani on account of
their vicinity, or were common to Konkani and those langu
ages ; the first supposition is more probable, because there
occur in Konkani some words used also in some of the above
mentioned languages, and as far as I could learn , not used
in Mahrātti. The most probable reason of it seems to be this :
as Konkani for a long time has been neglected, especially or
also on account of its having abandoned the seat of the mother
tongue, many Mahratti words have been abandoned , and on the
other hand it has taken up some words from its new neigh
bours. Consequently, although Konkani in the main seems to be
a Gaurian languages (for it seems to be the niece of Sanskrit),
 316

yet it partakes of some of the qualities of Dravidian languages ,

as Kanarese, Tulu , Malayālam etc. are reckoned by Caldwell
(Comparative Grammar, page 9) as Dravidian languages .
Art II . Present state of Konkani
Konkani is a rich and beautiful language, although at
present in an ignoble state, because it is far more perfect
than many European languages ; yet it is altogether unculti
vated and appears to be the most imperfect. But as to this
point the Konkani spoken by Hindus, as far as I can gather,
is in a somewhat different condition from the Konkani spoken
by Christians. The Hindus, besides some little varieties in
pronunciation and also in some words , have not adopted into
their language so many Portuguese words as the Christians.
What are the reasons for saying that Konkani is in an
ignoble state ? The reasons are : a) the total neglect of this
language ; hence no common written language, no uniformity,
and therefore, what is worse, many Natives themselves despise
it as a good -for -nothing language ; 6) it is corrupted, parti
cularly in the town of Mangalore , by very many foreign
words, especially Portuguese and , latterly, also English. We
might say that certainly a great part of religious words,
especially the more elevated, are foreign. The reason of so
many foreign words in religious matters is to be found, most
probably , in the history of the conversion of their ancestors .
c) Above the varieties of Konkani according to the castes,
which thing cannot be avoided in familiar conversation , there
is no really cultivated language common to all castes, as there
is in our European languages, which have a form above all
the dialects of the same language .
Notwithstanding the present miserable state of Konkani,
I will never call Konkani a corruption of Mahrātti , in its
derivation ; for, if the derivation, under any form , of one
language from another is to be called corruption, then many
 317

European languages should be called a corruption of another

language. If people mean to say that Konkani is a corruption
of Mahrātti, because it is a dialect of Mahrātti, without pro
per forms or rules, I certainly deny it. For a) the similarity
of forms of one language with the forms of the mother -tongue
cannot be called corruption ; b) there is no want of ruling prin
ciples and of common forms at least on the way of perfection ;
because notwithstanding some varieties, common forms and
ruling principles exist, as the whole Grammar shows. Corrup
tion of a language is the introduction of extraneous elements
which are a beginning of resolution into elements (see S.
Thomas , III. q. 50, a. 5 , c.) . Consequently a dialect, without
2

common forms and rules can be called a corruption of the

stock -tongue. But this is by no means the case with the
language of which we speak, as we have already said in this
article, and study will show, although we can say that it has,
as it is spoken by many, some elements of corruption, which
in the long run would bring on a true corruption or rather
destruction . The reason of the first part of my assertion ,
i. e. that Konkani is a rich and beautiful language, is partly
given in this Grammar, partly in the Dictionary, but cannot
be fully understood but by careful study and future cultiva
tion of this language .

Art. III. What Konkani can become

As Konkani in itself is a beautiful language, but is re
duced to servitude, it can become, or rather can be shown to
be a beautiful language, if taking pity on it, we deliver it
from slavery. To such a work first of all the natives them
selves should contribute ; for after religion , one of the most
important elements of civilization in a nation is its language.
It is truly a pity to see a people endowed by God with so
many gifts, without a language. To gain this end what
should be done ?
 318

Some might think we should borrow from Mahrātti or

Sanskrit, both words and rules, or at least words.
This would not perfect but destroy Konkani, or make of
it either a phantom of Sanskrit and Mahrātti or an aerial
language. Whatsoever may be the origin of Konkani, we
must now take it as it is and try to elevate it. I grant,
however, that we may borrow from the Mahrātti . or rather
resuscitate some Konkani words which, as all probability
shows, must have been used in former times and even now
are more or less understood by more learned people, and I
have done so in the Dictionary. But whenever we do not
find a Konkani word for some idea, to take it from the
Mahrātti, would be wrong : this could be done perhaps if Kon
kani were a dialect of Mahrātti. A fortiori I would call it
wrong to borrow in such cases, the words from Dravidian lan
guages, although some words can be borrowed also from them,
as is the case with all languages What is therefore to be
done ? Out of many things which I could propose, I choose
only the following ones which, I hope, will meet the common
approbation.
1. We must avoid so many foreign words and expressions.
Foreign words are well employed, if there are no proper
words; but using foreign words when there are proper words,
and even without a grave reason, is against Philology. I
make one exception for religious words. A great part of
them are Portuguese, yet Konkanized , as they have been used
since centuries ; moreover it would not be without some risk
to use the true Konkani words, used only by Konkani-Hindus.
Perhaps we might use the Konkani word for secondary
religious matters. I said Portuguese ”, because the English
words used also by some are not lawfully Konkanized as yet.
2. But on the other hand we must avoid eliminating
those words, which although Kanarese or Tulu originally, are
in common use . Let us hear what a great master says on
this point.
 319

Ut silvae foliis pronos mutantur in annos

Prima cadunt; ita verborum vetus interit aetas ;
Et juvenum ritu florent modo nata vigentque.
scentur quae jam cecidere, cadentque
Multa renascentur
Quae nunc sunt in honore, vocabula, si volet usus,
Quem penes arbitrium est et jus et norma loquendi.
(Horace, De Arte poetica, v. 60-73.)
If there be any extravagant Purists, let them well meditate
these verses of one of the greatest Latin Poets ; especially the
last verse is always to be kept in view in order not to go
astray both in rules and words. Consider however that one
thing is usus, another abusus ; Horace speaks of usus ; e.g.
employing so many foreign words, although in use, must be
called abusus.
3. You will say : For many things there are no Konkani
words .
I answer : There are many Konkani words, not in common
use, yet good ; moreover many words are said not to exist,
because Konkani is not studied, or because some try to find
a literally corresponding word or expression , which way is
often wrong. Moreover (and this is the third thing which
we should do we must employ new words, not in common use.
How ? Especially by way of composition (see P. III. , Ch. V.) .
>

This way cannot be used indifferently or by every one ; the

rules laid down l.c. and especially harmony and usage must
be taken into consideration . By " usage" I mean to say whe
ther a word, though new in form , sounds as Konkani to Kon
kani people. You find very many such words in the Dictionary
marked also as new words, which, however, have been tried
to a Konkani ear. This way is necessarily to be followed ,
else two other ways only or chiefly would remain , i.e. either
to use foreign words or to use circumlocutions . But although
foreign Mahrātti or Kanarese words are not entirely in dis
cord with Konkani, yet this way is against the philosophy
 320 .

of languages; words of Latin origin, e. g. English or Portu

guese, or also of Greek origin , except a few , are thoroughly
foreign to Konkani and require translation ; the 2nd way,
viz. to use some circumlocution or some words which approxi
mately express a certain notion ; but this evidently is childish
and a sign of ignorance .
But on this point of the composition of words I am in a
somewhat difficult position. I will explain my position can
didly to the reasonable and interested reader. In other
formed languages the words have already a fixed meaning : but
before reaching that fixed meaning, many years have elapsed ;
many events have sometimes contributed to the meaning of a
word ; sometimes a chance was the origin of some words , which
events and chance however through many years have been
forgotten and the meaning of the word became, we might
say, independent of the first etymological meaning ; e.g. phi
losopher = pedócopos, originally means “ friend of wisdom ” ,
which meaning afterwards became a less obvious meaning.
Hence although the etymology of many words can lead us
to find the corresponding Konkani compound words, yet in
many cases especially with words of the above mentioned kind
as " philosophy ”, the etymology cannot be kept in view. Then
what remains ? There remains to be considered the essential
notion of the thing to be termed, and to find a fit expression .
But without speaking of the long time which would be required ,
it is almost impossible to find a new expression which now
may have the same much extended and commonly accepted
meaning as the similar Latin or Greek word ; for the Latin
word itself underwent many vicissitudes before receiving such
a fixed meaning. Consequently there remains only to try now
to choose the most suitable word, as far as this can be done
within the short limit of time, which is at my disposal, leaving
the perfection and settlement of the things to Divine providence
which ludit in orbe terrarum . I do not give any examples ,
for the Dictionary is almost a continued example. Here only
 321

I mention the words harmonium , organ , diameter etc., the ge

neral etymological meaning of which has been restricted by
long usage to the present meaning. So " diameter " etymolo
gically means “ measure through ”, but now it means " a line
passing through the centre... ” . If we translate " diameter ”
literally, e.g. “ ād -mezap ”, such a word would not be taken in
9

the same limited meaning, as " diameter" , except after a long

use. In the beginning, it would be taken in its general ety
mological meaning. Such words are many : hence the difficulty.
I remark finally that this mode of composition is not entirely
new ; for many compound words in common use exist already ;
moreover this is used also in other Indian languages, e.g. in
Kanarese, much more is this used in many European langu
ages, especially in German and English . It is however true that
Konkani is perhaps not in need of so many compound words
as some other languages are ; for, one simple Konkani word
is used to express many other connected meanings, for which
other languages have different words ; and what seems to be a
sign of poverty , is a sign of perfection ; for the fewer the
means required to obtain an effect, the more perfect, ceteris
paribus, is the cause ; in a similar way to God , who in His
>

infinite simplicity obtains the most varied effects. Many

proofs of this assertion are to be found in the Dictionary ;
some have been given throughout Grammar.

Art. IV. Some rules for beginners

in speaking Konkani, especially with common people
1. Avoid carefully abstract terms, because such terms
are few in common use ; there are many others, but their
use requires some practice and often are not understood. If
therefore you have to translate into Konkani abstract terms,
resolve them .
2. Express metaphysical and abstract notions by words
taken from material things, which have some similarity with
41
 322

that notion . Although this is the case in all languages ,

particular attention is to be paid to it ; because in other lang
uages the material origin of many words has almost disappeared ;
hence in our languages we do not think about the first mate
rial origin , whereas if we hear the Konkani word , the first
notion which we get usually is the first original meaning ,
e. g. hearing “ to retract ” (one's word) , we do not think of its
origin from trahere ; and when we hear the Konkani “ kād" 66

we do not think of the meaning “ retract”, but only “ draw "

(trahere) etc.; hence without considering this rule, we might
perhaps go far to seek a corresponding word for " retract” ,
and as perhaps we could not find it, we would say there is no
Konkani expression for " retract ”, and we would use a circum
locution , whereas we may use the same " pāți kād" which in
the main is the same as " retract" . From this example judge
of many others.
3. If there are many synonyms which slightly differ, do
not seek as many Konkani corresponding words ; be satisfied
with one or few ; so , e.g., “ think" and " imagine" differ, no
doubt, yet be satisfied with " čint” . So generally the most
common term is used for the various English synonyms ,
and the general term is used also for the particular one.
4. The numerous compound Verbs of European langu
ages are either translated by the simple Verb or by the Verb
and the required Adverb. Yet sometimes a different Verb is
required.
5. Often, in order to be understood , the English word
must be expressed by a circumlocution ; and the English sen
tence must be expressed by a different Konkani sentence ,
keeping however the meaning. This is the case especially
with figurative sentences; because many figures of European
languages differ from Konkani figures. If you do not know
whether an European figure can be used in Konkani , substi
tute for the figurative expression the proper one and then
translate .
 323

Resolve complex sentences into simple sentences ; else

you would not be understood , or you would not be able to
finish the sentence.
7. Peculiar attention must be paid to the construction,
(see Ch. III.) even when speaking with common people who use
also Participles ; yet if the beginner finds any difficulty, he
may use the full relative sentence .
8. Not only Abstract but also some Concrete Nouns are
not used by vulgar people ; e.g. not many Nouns in “ -går or
kår" are used.
9. The parts of speech more to be used are Verbs, original
Nouns, concrete original Adjectives , original Adverbs and
Postpositions.
Yet if we write , then we should use Abstract Nouns,
derived words etc.

Art. v. Peculiarities of Konkani

In this Article I explain some general peculiarities, if I
may be allowed to say so, which may show in some way the
different manner of conceiving many things. A more dis
tinct knowledge of this point, as far as I could learn, (because
a full knowledge requires many years' practice) can be got
by a collection of Konkani phrases and sentences which will
form one of the Appendixes to the Dictionary. Some of the
following remarks have been touched upon throughout the
Grammar. I thought it useful to collect the principal of them .
1. Konkani makes a great use of Postpositions, and ,
when possible , prefers to substitute them for Conjunctions and
sometimes for Adverbs too (see p. 294). These are at the
same time the most common connexions of sentences, changing
thereby two or more sentences (English ) into one (Konkani)
without changing however the cases ; this is done by joining
certain Postpositions to Participles (see p. 274) .
2. The Participles are also frequently used, especially by
omitting the Relative Pronoun ; this may be united to a Pre
41 *
 324

position in English) . The Participles are inserted also with

out any real necessity (see p. 308 ).
3. The Compound Verbs in -un are very often used ; by
them many Latin Compound Verbs are expressed. The same
form in -un, sometimes accompanied by a Noun, is also often
used instead of our Adverbs (see p. 291 ).
4. The Conjunctions are often omitted or replaced by
Postpositions (see p. 302) .
5. The Present is often used for the Future, and even
rather long time is expressed by words meaning short time.
6. A great number of notions for which English or Latin
has different expressions, are expressed by -ts and -so (see
passim ).
7. Negative notions very often are expressed by the
Affirmative form and by the Negative joined to the Verb :
(Compare Part III. Ch. IV.) Among common people the
Negative form is expressed by “ -rãu" and the Negative Gerund
in " -tanan" (see p. 114).
8. The more important or emphatic words are very often
put quite at the end (tun kāņ ?) .
9. A large use is made of Causative Verbs (see p. 281 ).
10. Konkani loves to express the different stages through
which something must pass (see l. c.).
11. Even long sentences, explanatory of some word , are
considered as Adjectives; hence so many long sentences
sometimes precede the Noun , in which sentences many cases
may occur.
12. A use almost continual, of “món " is made not only
66
to express our " that", but also, I might say, like a comma,
or to breathe a little : the nearest word to it, besides that” , is
>

perhaps " as ”, although in many cases we cannot translate

it at all. It is used also as a particle connecting sentences.
Nevertheless I do not see a great nicety in its too frequent
use, at least I doubt of its correctness. Our common people
 325

in Europe also use some particles out of place (see pp. 312,
313 , 314) .
13. Konkani prefers to conceive things, very often, in
a way similar to genus and differentia or to materia and
forma (p. 288).
14. Konkani often expresses the comparative degree
without a proper form ( p. 65 , c.) .
15. Konkani is bold in concord (Part IV . Ch. I.).
16. Konkani likes harmony ; hence so many euphonic
vowels (p. 116).
17. Konkani is a nasal language (p. 181 ) .
18. The ruling principles in arranging sentences are
chiefly 1 ) importance of words (p. 310) , 2) order of dependance
(p. 311 ) , 3) strict connexion (p. 314) , 4) unity (p. 323).
After these general considerations or recapitulations, let
us consider the use of some Verbs peculiar to Konkani.
1. " Mār = beat” , yet on account of analogy it is used in
>

innumerable other cases ; e. g. to express beating with sound,

to apply pressure, to ring, to sew a piece to a cloth, to pitch
a tent etc.

2. “ Meļ = be found, or perhaps be attached ” ; but it is

still more used than “ mār” , to express that some thing reaches
in possession of, or is received from ; so it is used for to meet ,
to receive, to be united, to find” and the like.
3. “ Pód = fall”, but it is used also very often when some
sudden thing appears, in any way , e.g. the rainbow, folds, etc.
4. “ Kād = pull ”, but it is used to express the notion of
drawing, or taking out, or of doing something with some
application, e.g. to make the sign of the holy cross, to put
liniment etc.
5. "Lāg = to be attached ” , is used in many cases in which
the original meaning seems almost to disappear ; yet if we
consider well, still remains figuratively ; e. g. make impression
as a sermon, begin to .... etc.
 326

6 . “ Lãi” perhaps is the Causative Verb of " lāg” ; it is

used especially to express the action by which some thing
becomes attached, really or figuratively ; hence it means
" apply , plant, induce, ascribe, give (food ) ”.
7. “ Zatā ” is used not only for become”, but also for
many other connected meanings ; e.g. happen, be fit, agree etc.
The original meaning of the above-mentioned Verbs does
not render the notion which we, Europeans , have in mind ,
when we wish to express the other connected meanings, that
is to say , the way of conceiving itself is different, and the
figures are different.
These are some of the most used peculiar Konkani Verbs;
a great part of the Konkani sentences or figures are expressed
by these Verbs; but only few hints have been given, more will
be said in the Dictionary, and still more you will learn by
practice. Let us conclude with an example in which we show
the different way of Konkani construction .
“ If also men of such a sublime holiness fell into tempta
tion and went so far as to commit such faults, then we who
are men very far from their holiness and who are weak, how
much have we to fear ? "
First let us translate into Konkani literally : " zărtăr yek
1

månis săit tedea vortea santipoņāče talnient podle ani tedeo

vód tsuki adarunk pāule, dekun amiñ je zāun vortautāuñ
minis bhou pois tančea santipoņāk ani bhou askat, kitlen
biyeunk fāvonăiñ ?"
Now let us translate with the Konkani idiom : zărtăr
tedea vortea santipoņādea mănis legun talnient podon tedeo
vodlyo tsuki adarunk pāule, tår tančea santipoņāk bhou
pois ani åskåt zāun assalleañ vorviñ amiñ kitleñ biyeunk
fāvonăiñ ?” The reader himself may consider the difference,
especially the use of Participles.
Another example : " There is no other means so strong to
resist the violence of anger, of envy, of luxury as to receive
often holy communion " . Literally : “ dusro upãi itlo ghāt
 327

rāgādeſ, niskusarāčeñ ani mostičeñ bol modunk zosso kumgār

nāñ ” . The same in a manner more according to Konkani :
“ krodhāčeñ, niskusarāčeñ ani mostičeň bol modunk kumgār
kāņeunčea bări tzăd boró upāi yekui nāñ ” .
From all these observations we may perceive a little the
nature of Konkani, very different from the nature of Euro
pean languages; hence we cannot, usually, translate literally
English into Konkani or vice versa : to this point especially
we must pay attention. In order to know a little more of the
nature of Konkani , the reader should go through the whole
Grammar, from which here only a few points have been col
lected ; Chapter III . of Part IV. especially contains many
peculiarities of Konkani.
 APPENDIX I.

Explanation of some difficult modes of speaking

A. Some Particles and Tenses connected
with them
Ut = in order that
1. Ut meaning " aim ” is expressed a) by the Supine, e.g.
" veni ut te viderem = I came to see you = tukā poļeunk äiloñ " ;
or 6) by the Participle followed by “ pasun (or pasvot) or
nimtiñ = propter, on account of ” , as : “ āuñ tukā poļeunčeā
pasun āiloñ ” .
In some cases it may be expressed by the pure Imperfect
Subjunctive.
2. Uț, called “ consecutive”, is expressed by “ ki”, Indica 9

tive Mood preceded by “ itlo or aseñ jinsiñ = so ”, e.g. “ God is

so good as to forgive also great sinners = Deus est tam bonus
ut parcat etiam magnis peccatoribus = Dēu itlo boro (or asen
jinsiñ boro) zāun assā ki vođā pātkiānk legun bogšitā ”.
This “tam ” is expressed in Konkani by an Adjective which must agree with
the affected word, as appears from the given example.
3. Ut, meaning " although ” , is expressed a) by the Condi
។

tional in -leār, followed by i ; e. g. ut desint vires, tamen est

laudanda voluntas = tankanāñ zaleāri, bore khušiek mān dizāi =
although strength be wanting, yet the good will is to be praised ”;
b) by " zărităr or zăritări = although”, e.g. “ zărităr tankanāñ,
bore khušiek mān dīzāi” .
4. Ut, meaning " time", is expressed by the Gerund in
“ -täts ”, or in “ -tanañ ”,> or in “ -un ”, or by the Participle fol
lowed by " uprānt = after” , e.g. " ut S. Franciscus X. venit in
រ

Indias, apostolicos labores exantlavit = Sāñ Frančis Zaver In

dient aileā uprānt bhou tsăd vāur kelo, or S. Francis Zaver
Indient yetăts, etc. or S. Frančis Zaver Indient yeun .... " .
42
 330

Ne = that not

1. Ne, meaning " aim ”, is expressed a) by the Negative

Supine, or b) by the Participle Negative followed by the Post
position " pasun ” ; c) by the Negative Imperfect Subjunctive ;
e.g. " in order that we may not fall into sin, we must pray =
Ne incidamus in peccatum, orandum est = pātkānt podanān
zāunk māg-ņeñ kărizāi or pātkānt podanatulleā pasun etc.”
2. Ne, after the Verbs of " fearing ” is expressed a) by
" món " with the Future Potential ; e. g . " I fear that he may
fall sick = timeo ne .. = āuñ beatā to pident poďat món ';” 6)
b by
the Future Indicative " podtolo món ”; c) by the Negative
Supine ; e.g. " ne... offendas ad lapidem pedem tuum = lest
thou dash thy foot against a stone = yēk fātor tujea pāyāk
laganāñ zāunk " .
Quominus = that not
This may be expressed by the Supine or by some circum
locution ; e.g. “ Religio non impedit quominus Officia urbani
tatis impendamus = religion does not prevent us from observ
ing politeness = monšān thăiñ măriädin tsălunk šastir adva
rināñ ” .

Quin = that not , or without

>

Quin, after the Verbs of doubt, may be expressed a) by

the simple “" ki or móņ = that” : “ Non dubito quin teniat = I
-

do not doubt that he will come = to yetolo món āuñ dubā

vanāñ" '; or b ) by some change of the sentence: " dubāuvasta
nañ to yetolo = no doubt he will come ” ; c) if it corresponds
to the English -without”, followed by the Gerund, it may be
expressed also by the Negative Gerund in “ -tanañ”, e.g. “ Si
>

abierit quin faciat hoc... = if he will start without doing this

yeñ kårinastanañ to geleār"; or by " šivāi ” with the Participle:
“ Non intras in coelum quin tibi zim inferas = you do not
enter into heaven without doing violence to yourself = tukā
bòļ karinastanañ sărgār riganāi”; or d) by the Conditional.
 331

Quia = because
Quia may be expressed a) either by “ kiteāk or kiteak
moļeār = because” , with the Verb in the required tense of the
>

Indicative, or b) by “pasun = on account of", or c) by " vor

viñ = through ”, preceded by the Participle; e. g. “Quia credidit
sanatus est = because he believed he has been cured = kiteak
moleār pātielā to boro zālo, or pātieleā pasun to boro zālo” ;
" quia studuisti, doctus factus est = because you studied you
became learned = sikạlleā vorviñ sikpi zāloi or kiteāk moleār
sikpāk lagloi, sikpi zāloi” .
Quippe qui = since
“ Animus fortuna non eget, quippe quae probitatem ....
neque dare neque eripere potest = the soul needs no fortune,
=

since goodness she can neither give nor take away (Sall.)
atmeāk gratsārāči gărz nāñ, akā segun diunki kādunki tank
natalle, pasun " .
Ac si = as if
“ Lacrimatur ac si vapulasset = he weeps as if he had
been beaten = to rădtā mārn paulleā bari ” .
=

Remark : a) bări” in Lat. instar, joined to the Participle.

6) An elegant use of " pāu ” to express the passive voice ,
2
lit. was one who reached beaten ."
Quum, or cum = when, as
a) If it means “ quia = because ” (see above b) : “ Cum 7. C.
sit exemplar nostrum eum imitari debemus =
= as J. C. is our
exemplar, we must imitate Him = Somi J. K. āmtso nămuno
assalleā pasun amiñ tači dék kāņeizāi” .
b) If it means “ when ”, it may be translated as ut, mean
> 9

ing “ time” (see above) or also literally by " kăiñ or yedvān

“ when ” , followed by the required tense ; e..." kăiên ruk fol ditā,
tumkāñ kaltā gim lāgiñ pāulo món = when you see that the
tree gives fruit, you know that the dry season has approached ”;
“ kăiñ kotepon templānt poleišāt = cum videritis abomina
tionem = when you will see the abomination in the temple” ; >

42 *
 332

" cum venerit filius hominis, putas quia fidem inveniet ? =

when the Son of Man will come , will he find faithful ? = =

månšātso putrụ yetanañ , bāvāậti meltitgi? ”

9

Postquam = after
It is expressed a) by the Gerund in -tats, b) by the
Gerund in -un , c) by the Participle followed by " uprānt ” ;
e.g. “Postquam autem abiero mittam vobis Spiritum veri
tatis = āuñ sărlea uprānt, tumkāñ sătāčea Spiritāk dadtoloñ =
after I shall have gone, I will send you the Spirit of truth ” ;
" postquam adimpleveritis omnia praecepta, dicite: servi in
utiles sumus = after having fulfilled all commandments , say:
we are useless servants = såkåt upades sambāļn, sangā : up
=

kārāk podanātulle sākår" ) amiñ ” . Yet the Gerund in -tåts

seems to be better in this meaning.
Antequam , Priusquam = before
It is expressed by “ adiñ = before”, preceded by the Parti
ciple ; e. g. Priusquam ipse veniat, ego abibo = to yeunčea
adiñ āuñ vetolo = before he come, I shall go ".
Si = if
It is expressed a) either by the Conditional in -lear or
b) by " zărtăr = if”, followed by the Future Contingent, or by
>

the Past Perfect (see p. 251 ) , if it is a pure Conditional ; or

by another tense, as the meaning requires, if it is not a pure
Conditional (see p. 304) ; or also followed by a tense of the
Indicative Mood ; e. g. “ si homines bene orarent, salvarentur
omnes =
= mănšāniñ boreñ răzar keleār, såkåt sårgār vetit = if

men would pray well, all would go to heaven ” ; “ si hoc feceris,

praemium dabo = tuven yeñ keleār, āuñ tukā inām ditāñ, or
zărtăr tun yeñ kårtai , āuñ tukā inām ditāñ = if you do this, I
shall give you a prize; " c) by " pokšek ”, but this last mode
corresponds rather to the English “ in case that” (see p. 251 ).
1)
Many Masculine Nouns ending in “ ó" change “ 6” into “ ă ” , sometimes
into " " in the Plural ; see gleaning parergon , below.
 333

Nisi
It is expressed a) either by the Negative form of the
Conditional, or b) by the Participle followed by všivāi or
kărit = praeter," or c) very often by the Gerund Negative in
“ -tanan ” ; e.g. " Nisi poenitentiam feceritis, omnes peribitis =
prăjit kårināñ zaleār, såkåt yemkaņdānt veteleāt, or zărtăr
tumiñ prăjit kårinānt etc. or tumiñ prăjit kellea šivāi (or
kårit) etc. or tumiñ prăjit kårinastanañ etc."
Dum = while
It may be expressed a) either by the Gerund in “ -tanan " ,
or b) by the Participle followed by “ veļār (or veļa) = in time ”,
or c) by " kăiñ or yedvāñ = when ” , with a 'tense of the Indi
7

cative ; e.g. " dum regnaret Canutus rex Angliae, scientiae

florebant = Kanut Inglez rāi, raspot kårtanañ, lok sikpāk tsåd
lagtālo, or. Kanuț raspot kårčea veļār, or kăiñ Kanuț raspot
kartālo etc. = when Canute was reigning, the sciences were
flourishing”.
6. Without”
The English without” joined to the Participle correspond
ing to the Italian senza, to the Latin quin, e. g. " without
doing this, you cannot get what you wish ”; this " without”, I
say, is translated by the Negative Gerund in “ -tanañ ”, or with
Negative Conditional as has been said of quin . Often this
Negative Gerund in “ -tanan" is joined to the Verb “ rāu” ;
e. g. « vāur kårinastanañ rāutāñ = I remain without working,
I do not work ” .
If “ without ” is joined to a Substantive, it may be trans
lated by “ viņe ”, e.g. " without doubt = dubāva viņe" ; or by a
Compound Negative word, e.g. “ without fault = guniāuñ-na
tullo " .

“ Unless”, see Ne after the Verbs of fearing.

Dummodo, or modo = provided
>

It may be translated a) by the Conditional , e. g. " dummo

do tu facias quod in te est, Deus te adiuvabit = provided you
 334

do what is on your part, God will help you = tuje hātānt assā
tuveñ teñ keleār, Déu tukā kumok kårtolo” ; b) sometimes
by the Gerund in “ -tanan” , although not so exactly.
7

Donec, usquedum = until

It may be expressed a) by " moņasăr” (or also “ păriant” )
placed at the end of the sentence, and leaving the Verb in
the required person with its regular and full termination , or >

b) by -sar added to the pure root (with the euphonical à or i

inserted before « -săr ”, if required) ; e. g. “ non praeteribit
>

generatio haee donec omnia fiant = yeñ monšākul sărseñ-nāñ ,

sårvụ văstu gădtāt moņasăr, or gădăsăr = this generation will
not pass until all these things have happened ”. The first
form seems to be more used .

Statim ac = as soon as

It may be expressed a) by “ uprānt” preceded by the

Participle joined to "far or kšăŋ = moment” , thus : “statim
។

ac Petrus exivit flevit amare = Pedru bāir geleā uprānt, teāts

farā tsăd rådlo = (literally) after Peter went out, in that very
moment he wept bitterly ' ; or also 6) by the Gerund in -un
and " far” or “ kšăn " , as before, e. g. « Pedru bāir votzun
teātz farā tzád rådlo "; or c) only by the Past Perfect Parti
ciple followed by " farāk”, e.g. " tun uțulleā farāk = as soon
as you get up ".
Quamvis (and synonyms) = although
(see above uł)
Utrum - an , ne-an
“ Utrum - an, or Ne - an = gi - yă, or only -gi” . “ Ubi est ?
in ecclesia an in cubiculo = to khăiñ assā ? Igårjentgi yā
kudānt ? = is he in the church or in the room ?" Nescio utrum
bene an male fecerit = taņeñ boreñgi vāit kelāñ āuñ neņañ = I
do not know whether he has done well or wrong "; " nescio
utrum hoc sit rectum an pravum = yen tzukgi sămā āuñ
neņañ = I do not know whether this is right or wrong ”.
 335 -

Sive - sivc
“ Sive - sive = zāuñ - zāuña , literally corresponding to the
Italian sia - sia; for this " zāuñ " is Subjunctive of “ zatā ” ,
e. g. " sive sit ex urbe, sive sit ex pago, vectigalia solvat
šerāntlo zāuñ, gāvāntlo zāuñ kåppo dīzāi” . This “ zāuñ” is
put after, as it is a Verb ; yet sometimes it is put also before
។

the affected word.

Si vis— si vultis (joined to some other Verb)
This may be translated a) literally by " kušivartāñ = I
desire” put in the required tense; b) yet it is more common
to use another form , i.e. szatā” put in the Conditional
Present, and preceded by the root of the principal Verb and
“ zāi ” ( inserting, if required, the usual euphonical a or i) ;
e. g. “ si vis ad vitam ingredi, serva mandata = 1 ) zărtăr
zărgār votsunk khuši assā, sambāļ upades, or 2 ) sărgār votsa
>

zāi zaleār, sambāļ upades” ; literally it may be translated

thus: “ if it happens (that) you must go to heaven , keep the
commandments " (see page 255) .

B. Some difficult tenses in some sentences

1. "Si breviati non fuissent dies illi = te dis motve zāi
nāñ zatit zaleār = if those days had not been shortened ” .
This Verb is compounded of the Adjective “ moţve = short " ;
" zāināñ = does not become” , Present Negative ; " zatit” Future
Past ; " zaleār " Conditional. Literally we may translate :
“ if it did not happen (that) those days would have become ,
not to become short”, or better we may say: here we have the
Conditional joined with Future Contingent Negative (see
p . 269) ; or still better : " zatit zaleār” is the affirmative mixed
Future Conditional (p. 269) ; “ zāināñ zatit zaleār ", the same
tense but Negative.
2. Rogate ne fuga vestra fiat in sabbato = magā tumčen
poļăp sonvārā găďanāñ zāundi = lit. pray (that) your flight
may not happen on Saturday”.
 336

This Verb is compounded of the Imperative Negative of

“ gadtā = happens”. It is a peculiar kind of Negative Impe
rative (see the Paradigm of Conjugation ).
3. " Manducate quae apponuntur vobis = khāyā jeo văstu
tanče lagiñ astit" .
Here the Past Future is used, because “ apponuntur" has
this meaning in this context ; in Latin we might say : quae
apposita fuerint or also it may be considered as Contingent
Future .
4. " Vis, eamus, et eradicemus ea ? = vortautā tuji khuši
amið votsun teñ lăunči ? = lit. is thy will, we to go (having
gone) to eradicate it ?"
Here , " läuñči" is the Infinitive Absolute governed by
voluntas, and agrees with it.
5. " Conveni quod darem unum denarium = yēk poiso
ditāñ món kărār kelā = I made the agreement that I give a
half-penny (l. 4 pies) .
Here it is used quod ( món) , although we have the oratio
directa as in Hebrew ; dixi quod vobis dabo.
66. " Promitlis ne te hoc non amplius facturum = yeſ tūñ
66

eā mukār kărsonāi món utar ditāigi?"

Here the Infinitive Future Active is resolved by the Con
junction “ móņ = that”, in the Future Indicative.
7. " Spero , cum tibi probatum iri = to tukā mānuotolo
món āuñ pātietāñ = I trust that you will approve this, lit. Ille
tibi placebit quod, ego confido.?i The Infinitive Future Passive
is resolved as the Active Infinitive Future .
8. “Nec quisquam rex Persarum potest esse, qui non ante
Magorum disciplinam perceperit ( Cic.) = nor can any one be
king of the Persians who has not first learnt the discipline of
the Magi = ani kon Peršiāntso rāi zāināň, zotišāñči vidyā
neņāñzāit zaleār."
You see the Perfect Subjunctive rendered by the com
pound tense of Conditional and Contingent Future.
 337

9. " O fortunate adolescens, qui tuae virtutis imitatores

inveneris = 0 fortunate youth, who hast found (i. e. in that
thou hast found ) imitators of thy virtue ! = 7 sukhi burgeā,
zakā pāțlaugār melle !...pāțlaugār melleā pasun !" Here the
Perfect is rendered by the Indicative or by “ pasun ".
10. “Sunt qui dicant M. Crassum non ignarum esse
consilii ejus = they say M. Crassus to be no stranger to his
scheme = M . Krassusāk tatso nămuno kaſtā món moņtāt" .
Remark the omission of “ they” in this and similar sen
tences .
11. " Pātak nåiñ -zallеā sărvụ văstunt voờilāñčeā utrāk paļo
dīzāi = we must obey the word of the superiors in all not
-

sinful things".
Remark the construction according to the above rules,
especially of " pātak năiñ-zallеā sarvụ” which is like an Ad
jective of “ văstunt " .
12. "Tuje tābent aščeañ såmestāñči favoti zătăn kăr =
take care of all who are under your care ” .
Remark, again , the collocation of words ; then " sămestāñči”
double Adjective.
13. "Peleāk tačeñ boreñ nāuñ melasew kårizāi = we must
cause our neighbour to have his good name restored . "
Remark the use of the Imperfect Subjunctive.
14. " Peleātso mög kör kåso tuzo = love your neighbour
as yourself " .
“ Pelo ” becomes “ peleātso” , because it depends on "mög" as
Genitive ; " kåso" is declined and agrees with " mõg " understood.
Literally in Latin we should say : qualem amorem tui facis,
( talem ) amorem proximi fac. Hence “ kåso ” agrees with “ mõg” .
15. “ Māg -neāñ bāir amiñ prājit kărizāi= besides prayer
we must make penance ".
Remark the use of “ bāir ” .
16. " Såkråmentānceañ guņātso amkāñ vivor somzouſ
čeāk, Jezu Kristān yêk dišți poďči bhāili khuņā nemsilyā =
43
 -
338

Jesus Christ instituted au exterior visible sign to give us to

understand the effect of the Sacraments " .
“ Somzouñčeāk” Dative of “ somzouñtso” Absolute Infinitive,
from " somzăi", Causative Verb ; it is Dative to show aim .
"Guņātso" Adjectival Genitive governed by “ vivor ” . “ Nemsi
leā ” agrees with “ khuņa ”, as it has a passive meaning.
17. " Bāutism ghetoleāče takler udāk ghāl = pour out
water upon the head of him who receives baptism ” .
Remark 1 ) the participial construction ; " bāutism ”, govern
។

ed by the Participle , precedes it ; 2) the Participle " ghetolo "

converted into an Adjective in -tso, because it is Genitive.
18. " Såkråment diunčeā veļār amiñ Jezu Kristān form
aileānt tiñ utrañ moņazāi = while giving the Sacrament we
must say those words (which) have been commanded by Jesus
Christ ” .
Remark 1 ) the omission of the Relative Pronoun without
participial construction ; " formaileānt” agrees with " utrañ" ;
it is 3rd Person Plural Perfect.
19. Kumgar köneigãi zaleär, mặdhe rati thaun ăn udak
6

gēnaye = if you want to receive holy communion, you cannot

take any food or water from midnight”.
Remark the form “ kāņeizāi zaleār ” .
20. If it is the duty of a good king to help the state , it
is also the duty of good citizens etc. = zărtăr boreā rāyātso
kāido assā stitik kumok kårunk, borean răitāntso -i kāido
assā ” etc.
21. “ With the exception of Plato, I am inclined to think
I should be right in calling , Aristotle the first philosopher
of antiquity = Plato šivāi, Aristotlų porneañ kālāntlo poilo
gināna-sodnār mollo săma-señ makā distā ” .
Remark 1 ) the Konkani manner to express the quasi-di
minutive notion " I am inclined to think ” ; here two modes
C
are employed, i.e. “ distā = seems”, and as “ distā ” does not
suffice, because it means " it seems or I think, I have the
opinion ”, hence 6 -señ ” is added, whereby we get the full mean
 339

ing ; lit. " it seems to be somewhat right." 2) Remark “ kā

lāntlo” which agrees with “ gināna -sodnār ” , because it is the
Adjectival Genitive (see p. 52) ; here the Genitive is converted
into an Adjective in -lo, because it means in. Remark 3) that
" poilo ” agrees also with " gināna -sodnār” , because it belongs
directly to this word , not to " kāl” ; if it belonged to skāl ”,
it should be put in the oblique case (see p. 52) . Remark
4) the change of “ món " into “ mollo” which moreover agrees
with “ gināna -sodnār” .
22 . “ Multi in parandis equis adhibent curam, in amicis
eligendis negligentes sunt = many take pains in getting horses ,
but are careless in choosing friends ( Cic.) = săbār månis gode
=

(or godeānk) kāņeuñčeānt preyetăn kårtāt, išķānk vintsun

kādčeānt fădpoši zāun assāt ” .
Now a few examples about Participial sentences governed
by Postpositions.
23. “ We all like to tell our sorrow to one who after having
heard, will be willing and able to have mercy on us and to
help us = amkāñ õikon amčer kākułt dovorunk ani amkāñ
kumok kårunk khuši ani tank assellea lāgiñ amiñ sămest amči
duk sāngunk khuši vartāuñ."
Remark 1 ) the use of the Participle wassellea ” followed by
a Postposition ; it is preceded by “ khuši ani tank ”, because
these two words are the subject of " assellea " ; they are left in
the Nominative as if the Verb were in a finite mood.
2) These two words are preceded by “ amčer kākuļt ....
because these words are governed and determined by “ khuši
ani tank ” . The other words are clear.
24. « Come to me, who am your God , says our L. J. C. =
tumtso Dễu xãun asselleã moje lẫgiũ yeã, món sangtã Somi
Jezu Krist ” .
Remark here too the use of the Participle .
25. . Yeke băilmånšek assollo titso yekắts pūtų morn pāul
leā veļār Somia Jezu Kristān tičeñ răờneñ poļeun tičea putāk
portun jivont kellea pori, to tujeñ rådneñ poļeun , tujea vistatso
43 *
 340

åtmo zo taņeñ apleñ amolik rågtāčea nimāņo thembo vikraun

sodăilolo to, dubāu nastanāñ portun jivont kårtolo = as our
Lord Jesus Christ having seen the weeping of a woman, when
her only son had died, resuscitated him ; so he seeing thy
weeping, will, no doubt, resuscitate the soul of thy friend,
whom he redeemed by having shed even the last drop of His
precious blood ” .
Remark 1 ) the long sentence governed by the Postposition
“ póri = as ” . All words governed by ' póri ” precede it accord
ing to the order of dependence ; hence first the Participle
" kellea ” , then “ jivont”, because it is immediately governed
6
by " kellea" and determines “ kellea " (what done ?) , then
“ portun ", because it determines “ jivont” (which time has he
given life ?), then the object of " kellea ” , viz. stiče putāk ” ,
because the object precedes the Verb, then " Somia poļeun,”
because this sentence is adverbial explaining “ when Jesus
Christ resuscitated ”, hence it must precede ; and in this
sentence first the Instrumental, because also in a sentence
of finite mood, the Instrumental should precede (Somia Jesu
Kristān poļeilāñ) , then the Accusative, then the Verb; finally,
in the first place the sentence “ yeke... veļār” , because it is
another adverbial sentence explaining the following ; conse
quently it must precede it ; in this sentence itself the subject
preceded by the governed words (“ yeke. . . putų ” ) is put in the
first place, then the Verb, (“ morn ... veļār ') which here has an
adverbial form . Or more exactly " veļār" might be considered
as Postposition ; hence, it is preceded first by the Participle,
then by the subject of the Participle, with all words belong
ing to the subject.
Hence we see that the general rule (as said in Ch. III.) for
arranging sentences is to put the explaining parts before the
explained ones ; if in an explaining sentence there are words
or parts explaining and explained (or determining and deter
mined) , the explaining are put before the explained parts. As
to the others, Postpositions are put at the end of the governed
 341

sentence, joined to the Participle ; in a participial sentence

the words are left nearly in the same order as in the full
pronominal sentence.
26. “Altārir assellea amčea sodvondarāče hāt kurpe bărit
zāun assāt = the hands of our Saviour who is on the altar are
full of graces” .
Remark here too the Participial sentence.
If we wish to insert all the difficult sentences, we should
never come to an end , so let us finish the first Appendix here,
leaving something also to private diligence and to practice.
 APPENDIX II.

Translation of some chapters of the Holy Bible

1. The following translation was intended for beginners ;
wherefore it is very literal , and here and there not well agree
ing with the nature of Konkani ; if it had been somewhat
free, as it should be apart from such necessity, the begin
ners could not have found in the English translation the
Konkani sentence. This aim must be kept in view in order
to judge about this translation. I grant that a freer transla
tion would have been more Konkani.
2. The words between brackets are not words of the
Holy Bible but explanations inserted by me when the literal
translation was not sufficient to convey a clear notion . Such
explanations, together with the footnotes, have been taken
either from Menochio or from the English Douay Version.
3. In the translation with Kanarese letters I introduce
three new signs in order the better to express thereby the
Konkani sounds. These are z = z , ž = ts ; above the conso
nant to express y or a (half vowel). This has been used
already in such a way by the Basel Mission Press of Manga
lore ; see Polyglot Vocabulary, p.xv. The simple x = j, 2u = č.
I use 6 for the Sanskrit “ virāma”, i.e. as a sign of the

absence of any vowel or half vowel, as in Kanarese too

this 6 has such a meaning.
4 . For the sake of convenience I put first the Kanarese
alphabet.
 343

A. Vowels

Medial Corresponding
Initial
and final Roman Approximate Pronunciation
forms
forms Characters
es

å like a in about' or in adoro

a

a in far' or in aro
ข
&

9
a i i in thin ' or in aridus
ī i in ‘police or in marinus
O

ŭ 99 u in ' full ' or in coluber

ū or in rubor [ -centre
ua in ' rule' or in rubor
9

gos ř vocalized short r, nearly as r in

pa
$
5
3a

6eG

M T long r
23

like e in effort' or in comedo

63
33

De ē ea in ' swear' or as e in terra

slebo

ei ei in 'height
o in ' not' or in operari
ose e Ō o in vote' or in ordine
ou ou in house' or in laudo
f

u u or a, viz. half vowel .

6 sign of the absence of a vowel (Sanskrit virāma) .
on nasal sound , an indistinct n.
8 vocalized h.
 -
344

B. Consonants

Form and
Consonants
position Correspond
with the when com
ing Roman Approximate Pronunciation
inherent bined with
other Conso- Characters
vowel e a
g

nants
dg ouae a

ka like ka in kalendar
du 3&
&
l8&ta

kha the same aspirated

2 n

ga as ga in 'gallon
gha „ aspirated
ec

nga a very guttural and nasal ga

3

ča as cha in ‘chapter or c in cinis

w

cha ča aspirated
e [t and s combined
E.

as z in German , viz. the sounds of

.&
E

tsa
tsha aspirated
ja as ja in Japan' but thinner
323

jha aspirated
za as sa in 'nasal or in rosa
313•

zha ‫לי‬ aspirated

gna as nya in banyan' or gn in agnus
&

the cerebral ta
ed

ța
tha ța aspirated
a

da the cerebral da
dha da aspirated
ņa the cerebral na
ta common ta
08เ

tha ta aspirated
da common da
e
S
O

dha da aspirated
na common na
 345

Form and
Consonants
position Correspond
with the when com
inherent bined with ing Roman Approximate Pronunciation
other Conso- Characters
vowel as a
nants

ра common pa
&
et&ở
à
at

pha pa aspirated
ba
w

common ba
)
bha ba aspirated
હ ma a common ma
os S ya as ya in ‘yam' or as j in ajo
ರ ra common ra
Cc
{
32

la
Edl

common la
el
a
8o1
21
&
C

va common va
ವ
ša
palatal English sha
щ
ša cerebral > sha
sa as sa in ' salute'
ha as ha in ‘ harangue’
8

la cerebral la
kša combination of ka and ša, Latin x
कर

N. B. In the approximate pronunciation , and in the corresponding Roman

characters I have written ka, ga etc. , because each of the given consonants
contains a short a.

44
 346

ಅ ರ ೦ ಬ್ A RÅMB GENESIS
Avasvår I. Chapter I.
ಆವಸ್ವರ್ I,
1 ಸುರುವೆರ್ ದೇವಾನ್‌ ಸರ್‌ 1 Suruver Dēvān sårg 1 In the beginning God
ಆನಿ ಸೌಂಸಾರ್ ರಚ್ಚೆ. ani souñsār råtslo. created heaven and earth.
2 ಪುಣ್ ಸೌಂಸಾರಾಕ್ ರುಪ್ 2 Puņ souñsārāk rup 2 And the earth was
ed apartment Jay Još Blans, ani jīvio văstu nātạlleo, void and empty, and dark
era sa SF6 SZABO DJODD ani kālok asolo guņness was upon the face of
aos jojob; so toegazio 20Fs dāye voir ; ani Dēvātso the deep ; and the Spirit
ಉದ್ಯಾಂಚೆರ್ ಚಲ್ತಾಲೊ. Spirit udkāñčer tsål- of God moved over the
tālo. waters.

3 761)yada
asservon. essado: ev uzuād
eventos 3 Ani") Dēvān
zāundi.moļeñ: 3 And God said:: Be
Ani light) made. And light
ಜಾಲೊ. uzuād zālo. was made .
4 ಆನಿ ಉಜ್ವಾಡ್ ಬೊರೊ ಜಾ 4 Ani uzuād boro zāun 4 And God saw the
evas e do conto deajo do asā món Dēvān poļei- light that it was good ;
500; eso eraas saflotao leñ; ani uzuāļ kāļo- and he divided the light
ತೌ ವಿಂಗಡ್ ಕೆಲೊ.
M
kāntlo viñgad kelo. from the darkness .
5 ಆನಿ ಉಜ್ವಾಡಾಕ್ ದೀಸ್ ಮೊ 5 Ani uzuādāk dis món 5 And he called the
entre oPS, GO TO EATIF 083 mo!o, ani kālokāk rāt light Day, and the dark
se; erg Jaozgs en Zay. moļi ; ani sānz ani să- ness Night ; and there
ಏಕ್ ದೀಸ್ ಜಾಲೊ. kāļiñ yēk dīs zālo. was evening and morning
one day.
6 ದೇವಾನ್ ತಾಚೆ ಶಿವ್ಯಾ ಸಾಂ 20 6 Dēvān tače šivāi 6 And God said : Let
evwa o isto tayo236?)
ಗ್ಲೆಂ : ಉದ್ಘಾಂ sangleñ: udkāñ modeñ there be a firmamentº)
waevoa; eo ewgo ewe moļab” zāundi ; ani ud- made amidst the waters ;
ತಿಂ ವಿಂಗಡ್ ಕರುಂದಿ. kāñ udkāntliñ viñgăd and let it divide the
kårundi . waters from the waters.
7 ಆನಿ ದೇವಾನ್ ಮೇಳಾವ್ ಕೆ 7 Ani Dēvān moļab 7 And God made a fir
6%, eo uos sudes või keleñ, ani moļbā khāl mament, and divided the
Do ಉದ್ಯಾಂ
evazo taggor
ಮೊನ್ಸಾರ್ ezems ၊asalliñ udkañ moļbār waters that were under
1) « Uzuāļ” muņčeñ : uzuāļ zo udeun ani podun sānz ani săkāļiñ zāunk kārăị zāun
asolo . — “ Light” , viz : light which by its rising and setting make morning and evening.
2) « Molab” muņčeñ : buiñ ani bhou ubār neketrāñ modeñ assollo zāgo.— « Firmament" ,
viz : the space between the earth and the highest stars.
 347

evwzoso Wonoso @ 096; asalleā udkāntliñ viñ- the firmament, from those
ಆನಿ ಅಸೆಂ ಚಾಲೆಂ. gåd keliñ ; ani aseſ that were above the fir
zāleñ. mament ; and it was so.
8 ಆನಿ ದೇವಾನ್ ಮೊಳ್ಳಾಕ್ ಸ 8 Ani Dēvān moļbāk 8 And God called the
AF Lieto; es poorzo esp sărg moļeñ; ani sānzani firmament, heaven ; and
ಸಕಾಳಿಂ ದುಸೊ ದಿಸ್ ಜಾಲೊ. såkāļiñ dusro dīs zālo. the evening and morning
were the second day.
ಆನಿ ದೇವಾನ್
9 es segons haono:
ಸಾ ಗ್ಲೆ ೦ 9 Ani Dēvān sañgleñ:
sañgleñ : 9 God also said : let the
700F voos šioo evazo sărgā khāl asaliñ ud- waters that are under the
* LUDOTOS LUTJoa36; en kañ yēke suāter me- heaven , be gathered to
Luis BOHO a quod eseno !undit ; ani suko zāgo gether into one place;and
ಜಾಲೆಂ. disundi. Aniaseñzāleñ . let the dry land appear.
And it was so done .
10 ಆನಿ ದೆವಾನ್ ಸುಕ್ಕಾ ಜಾ 10 Ani Dēvān sukeā 10 And God called the
moto wo tom pov, es zāgeāk buiñ món moli, dry land, earth, and the
evwa,oua, totu ,To HGF. ani udkānčeā zomeāk gathering together of the
Best ovo 281880 waer as costo dărio. Ani yeñ boreñ waters, he called seas.
ಮೊ ದೇವಾನ್ ಪೊಳ್ಳಲೆಂ. zaun asā món Dēvān And God saw that it was
poļeileñ. good.
11 ಆನಿ ಸಾಂಗ್ಲಂ; ಬ್ಯುಂ ಉ 11 Ani sañgleñ: buiñ 11 And he said : let the

ಬೃಂದಿ ತರ್ನೆ ೦ ತಣ್ ಆನಿ ಬೀ ೦ | ubzoundi tarnei tan earth bring forth the
ಕರ್ಚೆఆన్
ಆ లైన్ Tod DJJFFs, e ani bīñ kərčen aplea green herb, and such as
T2F0EJOS
a revista desoars dues tărā părmāņe , ani (ub- may have seed, and the
wims 300 JOJOFT agosto Devo zoundi) foļadik ruk fruit-tree yielding fruit
tva, zato 2020 Jou 250$ aplea tără părmāņe fol after its kind, which may
huoW302304. Gouto sae .. diuñtso, začeñ bīñ ta- have seed in itself upon
če bităr asuñ buiñ- the earth. And it was so
čer . Ani åseñ zāleñ . done.
12 oo wopos eveydes 12 Anibuiñn ubzaileñ 12 And the earth
3 Fo, es un aevo230 tăn tărneñ , ani foļ diuñ- brought forth the green
e ou mais'300 DJJOFM , CA Durčeň aplea tără părmā- herb,and such as yieldeth
Vaaff, BOUFOpoe tudo ne, ani ruk foļādik, seed according to its kind,
2000 Bruno 300 JOJ JOFFS. en håryekleāk asun bīñ and the tree that beareth
ovo 23880 Bongo pasa por una aplea tărā pårmāņe. fruit having seed each one
ಲೈಲೆಂ. Ani yeň boreñ món according to its kind. And
Dēvān poļeileñ. God saw that it was good .
44 *
 348

13 ಆನಿ ಸಾಂಜ್ ಆನಿ ಸಕಾಳಿ ೦ 13 Ani sānz ani să- 13 And the evening and
ತಿಸೊ ದೀಸ್ ಜಾಲೊ . kāļiñ tisro dīs zālo. the morning were the
third day .
14 ಆನಿ ದೇವಾನ್ ಸಾಂಗ್ಲೆಂ: 14 Ani Devan Sang- 14 And God said : let
ಉಜ್ವಾಡಿಕ್ JA waevo @ gs leñ : uzuādik văstu zā- there be lights made in
FA Foog ozof, ep and undit sărgiñčeā moļbār, the firmament of heaven,
| ರಾತ್ ವಿಂಗಡ್ ಕರುಂದಿತ್ , ಆನಿ| ani disantli rat viigad to divide the day and the
Rut'F eRosso( watuevos ") kărundit, ani gurtų a- night, and let them be for
ವೇಳ್ ಆನಿ ದೀಸ್ ಆನಿ ವರ್ಸಾ ೦ : sundit (dākounk) vēl signs, and for seasons,
ani dis ani vărsāñ : and for days and years :
15 ತೊ ಸರ್ಗಿಂಚ್ಯಾ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ ಪ 15 Teo sárgihea mol 15 To shine in the fir
sărgiñčeā mo!-
ರ್ಜಳುಂದಿತ್, ಆನಿಬ್ಯುಂಕ್ ಉಜ್ವಾಡ್ | barpÁrzÀ]undit, ani bu- | mament of heaven, and
ದಿಉಂದಿರ್ ; ಆನಿ ಅಸೆಂ ಜಾಲೆಂ. iñk uzuād diundit. Ani to give light upon the
aseñ zāleñ. earth , And it was so

done .

16 ಆನಿ ದೇವಾನ್ ದೋನ್ ವೋ 16 AniDēvān dón vód 16 And God made two
as evenatt JHJ1) Sleg:no uzuāờik văstu " ) keleo : great lights "); a greater
ವೋಡ್ ದಿಸಾಚೆರ್, ಆನಿ ಏಕ್ ಲಾನ್ |yek vbd disaber, ani yek| light to rule the day, and
odsitos dozio bend forves, lān rātičer rāzvotkāi a lesser light to rule the
ಆನಿ ನೆಕೆತ್ರಾಂ, kărisio, ani neketrañ. night, and the stars .
17 ಆನಿ ತಾಂಕಾಂ ಸರ್ಗಿಂಚ್ಯಾ 17 Anitankah sargii- 17 And he set them in
noeg om nooo wujoss ergo o čeā moļbār galiñ buiñk the firmament of heaven
ದಿಉಂಕ್, uzuād diunk, to shine upon the earth,
18 ಆನಿ ದಿಸಾಚೆರ್ ಆನಿ ರಾತಿಚೆ 18 Ani disāčer ani rā- 18 And to rule the day
ಈ ರಾಜ್ಯೋದ್ಯಾ , ಕರುಂಕ್ ಆನಿ ಉ| titer razvotkai karunk and the night, and to
ಜ್ವಾಡ್ ಆನಿ ಕಾಳೊಕ್ ವಿಂಗಡ್ ಕ ani uzudd ani kalok divide the light and the
Dogs. ero so isto Jono viñgăd kărunk. Ani teñ darkness. And God saw
ದೇವಾನ್ ಪೊಳ್ಳಲೆಂ. boreñ món Dēvān polei- that it was good .
leñ .
19 ಆನಿ ಸಾಂಜ್ ಆನಿ ಸಕಾಳಿ ೦ 19 Ani sāpz ani săkā- 19 And the evening and
ಚೌತೊ ದೀಸ್ ಜಾಲೊ. ļiñ tsouto dīs zālo. morning were the fourth
day.
20 ಆನಿ ದೇವಾನ್ ಸಾಂಗ್ಲೆಂ: 20 Ani Devan Sang- 20 God also said : let
evwgo erzia evod zs wer leñ: udkañ ubzoundit the waters bring forth
wowo Waves en groepes tujiudād jiveā åtmeāči the creeping creature
 349

to wjOdot ta Forsa, Boogani sukņiñ buiñčer sår- having life, and the fowl
ಖಾಲ್, giñčeā mõlbā khāl. that may fly over the
earth under the firma
ment of heaven.

21 ಆನಿ ದೇವಾನ್ ರಚೊ 21 Ani Devan råtzlo 21 And God created the
್ವೆ
ಮಾಸ್ಕೋ
ವೋಡ್ varias
opas
ಉಜಾತ್
enಿ ಸರwar
ಆನ « voạ māsļeo ani sărvụ great whales,, and every
( 2 evwą ogó sobga) jiuzāt ( ji udkānt jietā) living and moving crea
NOOTD evwe,po eww.desio se zankā udkāniñ ubzail- ture, which the waters
ತರಾ ಪರ್ಮಾಣೆ,
womens 300
బ్లాం JUFPS, con lo | leo aplea tărā părmāņe, | brought
ಆನಿ (ರ forth, according
ಸರ್ವೆ ಸುಸ್ಲಿ
2. ) For
) Autoಂ go ani ((rătzliñ)) sărvụ su- to their kinds, and every
eps ತರಾ
ಪರ್ವಾಣ.
ego go isto kņiñ aplea tărā părmā- winged fowl according to
ಮೊಣ್ ದೇವಾನ್ ಪೊಳ್ಳೆಲೆಂ . ,
ņe. Ani teñ boreñ món |its kind. And God saw
Dēvān poļeileñ. that it was good.
22 ಆನಿ ದೇವಾನ್ ತಾಂಕಾಂ ಅತಿ 22 Ani Dīvān tankāñ 22 And He blessed them
JOF" ado Jonuda: Jago aširvād dileñ sāngun : saying: Increase and
zaves do F1oevas,ovāļā
ಉದ್ಯಾಂ ani tsăņā ani da- multiply, and fill the
Baod, en Auto wyordom wriāčiñ udkan borā, ani waters of the sea, and
ಡುಂದಿತ್ . sukņiñ buiñčer tsădun- let the birdsbe multiplied
dit . upon the earth .

23 ಆನಿ ಸಾಂಜ್ ಆನಿ ಸಕಾಳಿಂ 23 Ani sānz ani să- 23 And the evening and
ಪಾಂಚೊ ದೀಸ್ ಜಾಲೊ . kāliñ pāntsvo dis zālo. the morning were the
fifth day .
24 ತಾಚೆ ಶಿವಾ ದೇವಾನ್ ಸಾಂ 24 Tače šivāi Dēvān 24 And God said : let
wzo waoo suono: 3075 sangleñ : buiñ jiveāñ the earth bring forth the
ಉಬ್ಬೊಂದಿ ಆಜ್ಞಾ ತರಾ monzātink ubzoundi living creature in its kind,
ರ್ಮಾಣೆ, ಸಾದ್ಯಾಂ ಮೊನ್ಸಾತಿಂಕ್, aplea tara pårmane sa- cattle andcreepingthings
zerwa@ cat, daru ,los tono dean monzātink, jiudā- and beasts of the earth ,
ತಿಂಕ್ ಅ ಪಾ
ಅಪ್ಪಾ ತರಾ ಪರ್ಮಾಣೆ. ಆನಿ| dink, ranvot monzatink| according to their kinds ,
ಅಸೆಂ ಜಾಲೆಂ.
apleã tărā pårmāņe. And it was so done.
Ani taseñ zāleñ.
25 ಆನಿ ದೆವಾನ್ ಬುಂಚ್ಯಾ ಮೊ 25 Ani Dēvān buiñ- 25 And God made the
3076 HOURS Jaolag Joo aj čeā monzātink keleo beasts of the earth ac
2u

JUOFN eS nad seda 8076tančeā tărā părmāņecording to their kinds,

ಆನಿ ಸರ್ವ ಜಿಉದಾದಿಕ್ ಬ್ಯುಂಚೆ | ani sade monzatink ani | and cattle, and every
 350

goize, too IJUOFPS. ep 30 sărvų jiudādik buiñče thing thatcreepeth on the

ಬೊರೆಂ
23880 ಮೊಣ್ Spaarpo ಪೊಳ್ಳೆಲೆಂ
Sam ದೇವಾನ್ y $ 8 .. tačeā tărā pårmāne. earth after its kind. And
Ani teñ boreñ món God saw that it was good.
Dēvān poļeileñ.
ಸಾಂಗ್ಲೆಂ: ಮನ್ಯಾಕ್
ಆನಿ Foro:
26 en DU 26 Ani sangleñ : mån 26 And he said : let us

FobaFo ea wo em eva šāk kåriāñ amče bări make man to our image!
2 20

Foo Frio!) ees to avanz . ani amčeā sărkeātso "); and likeness ; and let him
230$ Hobafuas eso Huyosº ani to māsļiānčer dåriā- have dominion over the
Hos og Sopp 302306 og čeā, ani sukņeāñčer ani fishes of the sea, and the
గాnego wyoor ಆನಿ
en ಸರ್ ವೆ
F wo monzātiñčer ani săgļea
zo'r fowls of the air, and the
go WF8 Javno dostopdo buiñčer ani sărvụ buint beasts, and the whole
ಕರುಂದಿ.
tsărtele jivāļičer rāzvot earth , and every creep
kărundi. ing creature that moveth
upon the earth .
27 es ಾನ್s Du
ದೇವson
ಆನಿ Sea go್
ಮನ್ಯಾಕ 27 Ani
27 Ani Dēvān månšāk
Dēvān mă nšāk 27 And God created

Helo e 18,F20: 8pma kelo aplea sărkeātso : man to his own image: to
ಚ್ಯಾ ಸಾರ್ಕ್ಯಾಕ್ ತಾಕಾ ರಚ್ಚ, Devatea sarkeak taka| the image of God he
wodle
ದಾದ್ದೂ ea
ಆನಿ este 300vdo rătzlo, dādlo ani åstri created him, male and
Owc036. tankā ñ rătzliñ. female he created them .
28 en dessous googoo OS 28 Ani Dēvān tankāñ 28 And God blessed
JOFM Deras soon : Joda, āširvād diun sangleñ : them , saying : Increase
es uno?), e a wezo23.008 so vāļā, ani tsăņā ”) , ani and multiply”) and fill the
>

350 Doll Fod, Bo BobaF23 buiñ bhorā ani tikā earth, and subdue it, and
>

JUOTR.0280
ಮಾಸ್ಕಾಂ೦ euro Fundo khālti kårā, ani dăriā- rule over the fishes ofthe
Ww ;0230% odono duedo30% če māsļiānčer ani să- sea, and the fowls of the
ಈ ರಾಜ್ಯೋಟ ಕರಾ, mestañ buiñčer hälte- air, and all living crea
leañ monzātiñčer rā - tures that move upon tho
zvot kărā . earth .
ದೇವಾನ್pats too
ಆನಿ tega
29 eo ಸಾಂಗ್ಲೆಂ
o
!: 29 Ani Dēvān sangleñ: 29 And God said : Bo
jatotta, edo gjatve,o DJ s poļeyā, āuveñ tumkāñ hold I have given you
JM aero 2010 devozio wjo sårvụ tăņ dilāñ, bīñ every herb bearing seed
1) « Amčeā sārkeātso ” : Dēvāčeñ sarkeñătmeānt asā; kiteāk åtmo morn natullo ani spirit
zāun asā dekun. — “ To our image” : This image of God is in the soul , which is immortal
and spiritual.
2) « Vādā ani tsădā” : I hukum naiñ, bogār fóļ ubzounčeñ āširvād. — “Increase and
multiply ': This is not a precept, but a blessing rendering them fruitful.
 351

ಸಮೆಸ್ತೆ Dugo
ಆನಿ mu
230 $,, eo ಆಪ್ಲಾ diunčeñ buiñčer ,,ani să- upon the earth,, and all
ರುಕ್ emang
ugos 280 euros JJJJOO mest ruk aplea bitărbīñ trees that have in them
ಖಾಣಾಕ್ ಜ್ಞಾಸೆಂ: asun tumkāñ khāṇāk selves seed of their own
zāiseñ : kind, to be your meat :
30 ಆನಿ ( ಆವೆಂ ಯೆಂ ದಿಲಾಂ ) ಸ 30 Ani (āveñ yen di- 30 And to all beasts of
JUDO w /ouza, AJO 3006, lāñ) să mestanbuiñčeāñ the earth, and to every
ಆನಿ ಸಮೆಸ್ತಾಂ ಸುಕ್ಲಾಂಕ್ ಮೊ monzatink, ani same- fowl of the air, and to
ಧ್ವಾಚ್ಯಾ, ಆನಿ ಸಮೆಸ್ತಾಂ ಬ್ಯುಂಚೆರ್ stah Sukneank mo]ba- all that move upon the
ಹಾಲೈಲ್ಯಾಂಕ್ , ಚಾಂಕಾಂ ಜಿವ್ ಆ | bea , ani såmestah buih - earth , and wherein there
ಸಾ, ತಾಂಕಾಂ Jaevor eso čer hālteleānk, zankāñ is life, that theymay have
ಸಂ , ಆನಿ ಅಸೆಂ ಚಾಲೆಂ. jiv asā, tankāñ khā- to feed upon. And it was
unk asāseñ. Ani aseñ so done .
zāleñ .
31 ಆನಿ ದೇವಾನ್ ಸಮೆಸ್ ಆ 31 Ani Dēvān såmest 31 And God saw all the
ಫೆಂ ಕೆಲ್ಲೊ ವಸ್ತು ಪೊಳ್ಳೆಲ್ಯೂ, ಆ apneh kellio vastu po- thingsthat He had made,
o paev 28.ada, ez dasi es leileo, ani bhou boreo and they were very good.
ಸಾಂಜ್ ಆನಿ ಸಕಾಳಿಂಸೊವೊ ದೀಸ್ | asalled ; ani sana ani And the evening and
ಜಾಲೊ. såkāļiñ sovo dīs zālo. morning were the sixth
day.

ಆವಸ್ವರ್ II,
. A vasvår II. Chapter II.
1 ತರ್ ಸರ್ಗ್ ಆನಿ ಬ್ಯುಂ ಆನಿ 1 Tår sårg ani buiñ 1 So the heavens and
ಸರ್ವ ತಾಂಚೊ ಸುರುಂಗಾರ್ ಸ೦ ani sarvgtantso Surub- the earth were finished ,
ಪೂರ್ಣ ಜಾಲೊ
ಜಾ . gār såmpūrn zālo. and all the furniture of
them .
2 ಆನಿ ದೇವಾನ್ ಸಾತ್ತೊ ದೀಸ್ 2 Ani Dēvān sātvo dīs 2 And on the seventh
erotom Jaevos ytor apņeñ kello vāur purto day God ended His work
3AF8 ; eo. Adeseas, tirsilo ; ani sātvo dis which Hehad made : and
F
Jos Fadervos que par jo sårvụ vāur månna kårn He rested on the seventh
ಕಾಸ್ಯಾ ಕಾಣ್ಯಲ್ಯಾ. soukāsāj kāņeileā . ) day from all His work
which He had done.
3 ಆನಿ ಸಾತ್ವಾ ದಿಸಾಕ್ ಆತಿ 3 Ani sātveā disāk 3 And He blessed the
ರ್ವಾದ್ ದಿಲೆಂ ಆನಿ ತಾಕಾ ಪವಿತ್ರೆ Sirvad dilei ani taka | seventh day, and sancti
ಕೆಲೊ; Joy
tele; ತ್ಯಾ ದಿಸಾ ಸರ್ವೆ eಆಪ್ಟೆ påvitra kelo : tea disā | fied it;; because in it He
ana fir
4) " Soukāsāi kāņeileā ”, muņčeñ: ani dusreāñ tărāñčeo văstu kărunknānt. — “ Rested ”,
viz : He ceased to make new kinds of things.
 352

ವಸ್ತು ರಚುನ್ ಆನಿ ಕರ್ನ್ ರಾಉಲೊ | sarvg apleo vastu rat- had rested from all His
ದೆಕುನ್, sun ani kårn rāulo de- work which God created
kun . and made .
4 ವೊ ಸರ್ಗಿಂಚೊ ಆನಿ ಬ್ಯುಂ 4 Vo sărgiñtso ani bu- 4 These are the gene
ಜೋ ಅರಂಟ್ : zo Sessoas iñtso årămb : aseñ Dē- rations of the heaven and
ತಾಂಕಾಂ ರಚ್ಚಾಂತ್ .1) vān tankāñ råtsleānt. ') the earth, when they were
created, in the day that
the Lord God made the
heaven and the earth :
5 ಆನಿ ಅಸೆಂ ದೇವಾನ್ ರಚ್ಚಿ 5 Ani aseñ Dēvān råts- 5 And every plant of
77** * 500 ,ordo eruta liñ såkåd setañgādeāñ- the field before it sprung
dao, en FETUS. Imao čiñ ubzounčeā ādiñ, ani up in the earth, and every
nbevordo te Foung cao!); săkåờ tăņañ gāunčiñ herb of the ground before
+39, JAV ,06 mewada ise kirlouñčeā ādiñ") : kite- it grow : for the Lord God
Ja Ja Jaerias aomops Jacu āk moleār Somia Dēvān had not rained upon the
clima W10280$, es wujo 23783 pāus dādunk natullo earth ; and there was not
ಕರ್ಚೊ ಮನಿಸ್ ನಾತುಲ್ಲೊ. buiñčer, ani buiñ besāi a man to till the earth.
kărtso mănis natullo .
6 ಪುಣ್ ಎಕ್ ಜರ್ ಮಾತಿಯೆಂ 6 Puņ yêk zăr māti- 6 But a spring rose out
a wo OS TIFO 7795 Wj02323 entlibāir sărtăli såg!ea of the earth, watering all
ಮೆಲ್ಬಾಗಾಕ್ ಉದಾಕ್ ಸಿಂಪ್ಟಿ, buiñčeā melbhāgāk u- the surface of the earth.
dāk simpči .
7 ತರ್ ದೇವಾನ್ ಮನ್ಯಾಕ್ 7 Tăr Dēvän mănšak 7 And the Lord God
ಕೆಲೊ ಮಾತಿಯೆಚ್ಯಾ ಉಬ್ರಾನ್ ಆನಿ kelo matiebeaubran: ೩- formed man of the slime
ತಾಚ್ಯಾ twozao36 xais ev ni tačeā toņdānt jivātso oftheearth: and breathed
102, omotivo , eso es to JUDJs usuās funklo, ani aseñ into his face the breath
ಅತ್ಮಾನ್ ಜಿವೊ ಜಾಲೊ. månis åtmeān jivo zālo. of life, and man became
a living soul .
8 ಆನಿ ಸೊಮಿಯಾ ದೇವಾನ್ 8 Ani Somia Dēvān 8 And the Lord God
DUSIEDZo jo tudo tu khušālāyečeñ văiñkut had planted a paradise of
ರ್ವೆಂತ್ ಗಲ್ಲೆ೦, ಆನಿ ಥೈಂ ಆಪ್ಲೆಂ suruvent gÁdyllen , ani pleasure from the begin
ಕೆಲ್ಲಾ ಮನ್ಯಾಕ್ ಗಾಲೊ. thăiñ apņeñ kellea mån- ning, wherein He placed
šāk gālo . man whom He had formed .

1) Lit. In this way God has created them.

2) Lit. Thus God created all plants of the field before they germinated , and all herbs
|

of the country before the germination .

 353

99 desars ಉಬ
es ದೇವಾನ್ eve್ಬdel
ಲೆ 9 Ani Dēvān ubzăile 9 And the Lord God
ಮಾತಿಯೆಂತ್ಪಾನ್
JJO 3089032 for fiFoor mātientleān sărvụ ta- brought forth of the
ರುಕ್, ದಿಸ್ಟಿಕ್ ಸೊಭಿತ್ ಆನಿ ರುಚಿ rance ruk, distik sobit ground all manner of
36 Tue ass,en joruba to ani rutsik suādik, ani trees, fair to behold, and
do udoguztie du 861) to vaiñkutā modeñ jiņietso pleasant to eat of: the
des gaz dos some duze o ruk ") ani bore ani vāit tree of life ") also in the
85.2) zāņvāiyetso ruk.") midst of paradise, and
the tree of knowledge of
good and evil .
10 ಆನಿ ಏಕ್ ನೈಂ ಖುಶಾಲಾ 10 Ani yêk nằin khu- 10 And a river went
otuz Juego wojos Agro šālāyeče suātentli bāir out of the place of plea
;oFJévars erwars do jogs,sărtāli văiñkuțāk udāk sure to water paradise,
wazi, opjo poeru Je, vom J206 simpunk, zače, thăiñ which from thence is di
van36. thāun , čār vāņţe zatāt. vided into four heads.
11 270230 Joevo desno: 11 Yēkāčeñ nāuñ Phi- 11 The name of the one
3 Fines of goods Boyes no zon : ti săg!ea Hevilāth is Phison : that is it which
Jao wordo Joerza,, pomollea gāvāñ boun- compasseth all the land
WOOND06 23000.
tăņiñ vāutā, thăin ban- of Hevilath, where gold
gār zatā. groweth .
12 Jos naerozo waondos 12 Tea gâuũºen ban- 12 And the gold of that
elsen 280o: dejo es el es gār bhou boreñ : thăiñ land is very good : there
wo tão possos tuys bdell ani onikin fātor is found bdellium and
meļtā. the onyx stone.
13 en duen 230230 Joero 13 Ani dusre năiñčeñ 13 And the name of the
H88.222 : j Ano nga bes nāuñ Gehon : ti săg !ea second river is Gehon :
stones nogo wdog do Jo Etiopiā mollea gāvāñ the same is it that com
enjo . bountăņiñ vāutā. passeth all the land of
Ethiopia.
14 32 pzozo Joero 3 14 Tisre năiñčeñ nā- 14 And the name of the
*: e 4 Bota na 100 un Tigris : ti Assiriā third river is Tigris : the
1) « Jiņietso ruk”, munčeñ : tačiñ foļañ bolāiki ditāliñ. --- “Tree of life”, i. e. its fruits had
the power of preserving in a constant state of health.
2) u Zāņvāietso ruk " = tačiñ foļāñ zāņvāi ditāliñ, sorpān fót sangloā părmāạo. — “ Tree
of knowledge”, i.e. its fruits had the power of giving a superior kind of knowledge, be
yond that which God was pleased to give, as the deceitful serpent had said .
45
 354

Boenza .
Go todos no way isileān vāutā . Ani tsou- same passeth along by
PD 36. ti năin Euphrāt. the Assyrians. And the
fourth river is Euphrates.
15 gos, essas muda 15 Tår,Dēvān månšāk 15 And the Lord God
poter as Jard a JFDOSOtura, kāņeun takā khušālā- took man, and put him
jogjébdogo nads, 80 2373 yečeā văiñkuțānt galo, into the paradise of plea
ಕರುಂಕ್ ಆನಿ ರಾಕು ೦ ಕ್ . teñ besāi kårunk ani sure, to dress it and to
rākunk . keep it.
16 ಆನಿ ತಾಕಾ 1 ) ಹುಕುಮ ದಿಲಿ 16 Ani takät ) hukum 16 And he commanded
120810no: Too s
tubiawo odili sāngun : sărvụ văiñ- him ) saying : of every
DOUDOU , 4200 Saer kuţāčeañ rukānčeañ tree of paradise thou shalt
odszy : foļāntliñ khāuyet : eat :
17 yeni 2398 erg Joyéos 17 Pun bore ani vāit 17 Butofthe treeofknow
Borge, Opuzzo, Butautaso ydo zāņvāyečeā rukāčeañ ledge ofgoodand evil,thou
para sod 2002,0%, foļāntliñ khāinakā .Khā shalt not eat. For in what
gegezt az adator Stof ši zaleār, teāts disā day soeverthou shalteatof
2

morn mortoloi . it, thou shalt die the death.

18 ಸೊಮಿಯಾ ದೇವಾನ್ ಆನಿ 18 Somia Dēvān ani 18 And the Lord God .
soort: Jupar w I 275 es his sangleñ : Mănis yeklătz said : It is not good for
indopo: GJUO JOGO 07670 aso boro năiñ : amiñ man to be alone : let us
3875 F2F Joma3ms jau takā yēk kumok kårči make him a help like
JotF FOOVOFo. sangātiņ tače sarki unto himself.
kắriāñ.
19 ತರ್, ಸಕಡ್ ಮಾತಿಯಂ 19 Tår , såkåd māti. 19 And the Lord God

39,90 Boda 8075 eo

తెల్ల్యం entleāñ monzātink ani having formed out of the
.೦ಕ್ Seasons
toys,uogoTJERA :07 såkåd moļbāčeañ suk- ground all the beasts of
erwer 13728, saotao o neānk Dēvān ubrān kår-the earth, and all the
evo Juugadh nado, ajo tevor tătz ,tankāñ Adāuñ mu- fowls of the air, brought
Thə saovao evera F3F vs kār galiñ, poleunk kåso them to Adam to see what
S : $ 30,a soyasos, eo tankāñ ulo kårtā món : he would call them : for
Gwaens eruda 3086 eveto kiteāgi moleār, kăsåleñ whatsoever Adam called
of Bus Deo Joozio Joeno. Adāun jiuzātink ulo any living creature the
kelo tăsåleñ tančeñ nā- same is its name.
uñ.

1) « Takā” muņčeñ : tankāñ. — “He commanded him " , i.e. the singular is used for the
plural ; for the precept has been given to both , Adam and Eve.
 355

20 es etwaevas DIJAD
mauno 20 Ani Adāun săme- 20 And Adam called
terasa 3075,Zug ,o hur so stañ jiuzātink, săme-
o
all the beasts by their
95 Avg,232, ero uno stañ sukņeānk moļbā
for morej names, and all the fowls
wjo2880 soapBoys 300iše čeañ ani sămestañ buiñ- of the air, and all the
DJ Joo. I a waev076 ceañ monzātink tānčiñ cattle of the field : but for
1975 Jadr Joonases wus nāvañ moļiñ. Pun Adā- Adam there was not found
ತಿಲ್ಲಿ. unk yēk sarki sangātiņ a helper like himself.
meļnatulli.
21 ತವೊಳ್ ದೇವಾನ್ ಆದಾ 21 Tovo! Dēvān Adā- 21 Then the Lord God

evogs ups ppas ja jo es so unk yēk nīd podšili ani cast a deep sleep upon
to apos angois, 13.00,og takā nid podtats, bo- Adam : and when he was
20716 Fome, JJS DJJS gaz reantli yēk kādn , mā- fast asleep, he took one
ಬದ್ಲಾಕ್ ಬುರಾಕ್ ಭೂರ್ಲೋ, sān tače bådlāk burāk of his ribs, and filled up
bhorlo . flesh for it .
22 ಆನಿ ದೇವಾನ ಆದಾae೮roso 22 Ani Dēvān Adāuñ- 22 And the Lord God
Todo 2006 +0: es tli kādụllibor ăstri keli:built the rib which he
ತಿಕಾ ಆದಾಉಂ ಮುಕಾರ್ ವಲಿ. ani tikā Adāuñ mukār took from Adam into a
veli . woman : and brought her
to Adam .
23 eo ender
caseras A207 : 23 AniAdāun sangleñ: 23 And Adam said: This
No tags Lateso detodo yeñ hāļ mojeañ hādānt- now is bone of my bones,
eso no Jums Lawes JO do leñani yeñ mās mojea and flesh of my flesh; she
80; 3280 Deroauza,qaevas māsāntleñ ; tičeñ nāuñ shall be called woman,
ego e Blo, Juay quaeris månšā thāun āili aste- because she was taken out
ego stuns. leñ , månšā thāun āili of man .
2

dekun ,
24 goz yaw at wortin e 24 Tea pāsun dadlo 24 Wherefore a man
Wa Jogh eso estejos rio apleā bāpāk ani āuoik shall leave father and
cor ofugas ovarius ero, sodn, aple åstriek lā- mother, and shall cleave
es warto Jua naogs Londogtolo, ani yekắts mā- to his wife: and they shall
ಆಸ್ತೆಲಿಂ. sānt dogāñ astelin. be two in one flesh .
25 ಆನಿ ತಿಂ , ಮೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ ಆದಾ 25 Ani tiñ, móleār 25 And they were both
evo eso was, Deseš 00,? Adāuñ ani Yev , viņgiñ naked : to wit, Adam and
ರಾಜನಾತಲ್ಲಿ ೦. asaliñ ,ani lāzanātəlliñ . his wife : and were not
ashamed .
45 *
 356

ಆವಸ್ವರ್ III . A vasvar III. Chapter III.

1 ಪುಣ್ ಸೊರೊಪ್ ಸಮೆಸ್ತಾ ೦ 1 Pun sorop samestan 1 Now the serpent was
Bewa16 top solongso g 26 Dēvān kelleañ monzā- more subtle than any of
Jottes . Jordo e outof 100 tiñ prås nādgo. Taņeñ the beasts of the earth
mo: +38, de Jos buvo åstrie kăde sangleñ : which the Lord God had
Bageafo, 700 m jouuda kiteāk Dēvān tumkāñ made. And he said to the
uzas Butautas soodo 250 advarlāñ,kåsăleiñ văiñ- woman : Why hath God
eNort ? kutāčea rukāčea foļā- commanded you, that you
ntleñ khāunk ? should not eat of every
tree of paradise ?
2 gato mais ouos saus a 2 Takā ăstrien zāb 2 And the woman an
U

evas zoolo:2330Fudbao 36ex diun sangleñ : văiñku- swered him saying : Of

empfo
ಬ್ಲ್ಯಾ OUTRODO VDogo es tānt asalleañ foļantliñ the fruit of the trees that
Joeno : amiñ khātāuñ : are in paradise we do eat:
3 years agotuloa todos 3 Pun văinkuţā mo- 3 But of the fruit of the
Home
ಸಲ್ಲಾ Outawa Dodo od deñ asallea rukāčeä tree which is in the midst
evors es dogs ndevors, suo foļāntleñ khāunk ani ofparadise,God hath com
opo maenops gewo is en hāt gālunk, morana manded usthatwe should
OOF O.
zāunk Dēvān advarlāð . not eat, and thatwe should
not touch it, lest perhaps
we die .
4 tuoajono RiodeFito e 4 Tovo! sorpān åstrie 4 And the serpent said
o 768 morfo: Wupperupa kåde sangleñ : dubāu - to the woman : No, you
AD,JOO BUNUO JOJOF 320F nāstanañ tumiñ morn shall not die the death .
Joogs. morčinānt .
5 * 32 ** Banos Beer 5 Kitеāk moleār Dēu 5 For God doth know
oma ಕಿ+ ಖೆಲ್ಲಾ
ಜಾಣಾ going and guardezaņā ki khellea disā that in what day soever
2

ದೊಳೆ ಉಕ್ಕೆ ಜಾತಲೆ ಆನಿ ದೇವಾ ಬರಿ| tume dole ukte 2atele you shall eat thereof,your
Dates", esto es doylos ani Dēvā bări zāteleāt, eyes shall be opened : and
ಜಾಣಾ ಜಾಉನ್. boreñ ani vāit zaņā- you shall be as gods,
zāun . knowing good and evil.
6 grups, de 996 208 do DJ 6 Dekun, fo ! boren 6 And the woman saw
evowe,us, or Ava036 , khāuñčeāk, ani sobit that the tree was good
UD AUTODO S La ferowa, distik , ani khušālāye- to eat, and fair to the
yo ena LOM ,oupas ao per čeñ poļeuñčeāk asā món eyes, and delightful to
 357

de, fodeo gazo ya46, og åstrien poļeun , kādleñ behold : and she took of
38. Bo Goog wadog56 tačeñ fol, ani kheleñ the fruit thereof and did
ದಿಲೆಂ ಆನಿ ತಾಣೆಂ ಖಲೆಂ. ani aplea dadleāk dileñ eat, and gave to her hus
ani taneñ khelen. band who did eat.

7 ಆನಿ ದೊಗಾಂಚೆ ದೊಳೆ ಉಕ್ತ 7 Ani dogānče doļe 7 And the eyes of them
zde ಆಪ್ಲಾಂ do wo
ಜಾಲೆ11): cಆನdಿ ebook ukte zāle ") : ani apņānk both were opened "); and
ponto de senas, DowOD2 , 3. vingiñ món poļeun, an- when 9 they perceived
oao lado doepof ROM jurāčeo kholio sivon ap- themselves to be naked,
ಕೆಲಿ. ņānk neson keli. they sewed together fig .
leaves, and made them
selves aprons .
8 eo sio waobo Bwords
ಆಕುನ್ ಜೋ
ತಾಳೊ your
sadla
8 Ani Somia Dēvātso 8 And when they heard
so jotjeva 036 tālo aikun zo văiñku- the voice of the Lord God
wapon en 036Jou wao tānt dăn parā uprānt walking in the paradise
gadva, swaevo eso gard es vāreāk bountālo Adāuñ at the afternoon air,
Odostawavo Bead JWTOOS ani tači åstri lipliñ Adam and his wife hid
OjoTubowe, OUTDO dedo. Somia Dēvā mukār vaiñ- themselves from the face
kuțāčeañ rukāñ modeñ . of the Lord God, amidst
the trees of paradise .
9 een suoda segons 9 Ani Somia Dēvān 9 And the Lord God
Gwaenors dagoenas JOTI Adāunk āpoun takā called Adam, and said
ಗ್ಲೆಂo: ಮೈಂ ಆಸ್ವಾ? sangleñ : khăiñ asāi ? to him : Where art thou ?
10 ತಾಣೆಂ ಸಾಂಗ್ಲೆಂ: ತುಜೊ ತಾ 10 Tāņeñ sangleñ : tu- 10 And he said : I heard
:

to eyeon jotubudo36 en zo tāļo aikalā văiñku- thy voice in paradise ;

Juara 30 AtoB Esao tānt ani makā bheñ dis- and I was afraid , because
>

ದೆಕುನ್ ಆನಿ ಲಿಪ್ಲಾಂ lāñ viņgo asāñ dekun I was naked, and I hid
ani liplān. myself.
11 ತಾಣೆಂ ಸಾಂಗ್ಲ ೦: ಕೊಣೆಂ 11 Taņeñ sangleñ: ko- 11 And he said to him :
Buto Walio, WESO e boj so ņeñ tukā dakăileñ viņ- Who hath told thee that
nos, uso wa drooyapo go asāi món , āveñ ad- thou wast naked, unless
ತುವೆಂ ಬೆಲ್ಟಾ ತಿವಾ ? varleleñ foị tuveñ khel- thou hast eaten of the
lea šivāi ? fruit of the forbidden
tree ?

1) « Ukte zāle ", muņčeñ : tiñ voļkaliñ apli tsuk.— “And the eyes etc.” viz. they got
>

aware of the committed sin ; i.e. they made the unhappy experience of having lost the
good of original grace etc.
 358

12 es endeu soonfo: | 12 Ani Adaun sang- 12 And Adam said :

Judo Juer a esasou sleñ : tuyeñ makā dille The woman , whom thou
JUODOS SUS Devas, oso åstrien makā foļ diun , gavest me to be my com.
ಬೆಲೆಂ. āveñ kheleñ. panion , gave me of the
tree , and I did eat .
13 ಆನಿ ಸೊಮಿಯಾ ದೇವಾನ್ 13 Ani Somia Dēvān 13 And the Lord God
es RJES DOC: +302, ovo åstriek sangleñ : kiteāk said to the woman : Why
fogjo ? Mo Barto Devas yeñ kelāiñ ? Tişen zāb hast thou done this ? and
ADORO: LUSTFJÓ JUOTO diun sangleñ : Sorpān she answered : The ser
ಲೆಂ ಆನಿ ಆವಂ ಬೆಲೆಂ. makā foțeiliñ ani āveñ pent deceived me, and I
khelen . did eat .
14 ಆನಿ ಸೊಮಿಯಾ ದೇವಾನ 14 Ani Somia Dēvān 14 And the Lord God
Lied F46 2070: owo ton sorpāk sanglen : yen said to the serpent : Be
BOLUR,JS ಸಮೆಸ್ತಾಂ
ಪಾಸೊತ್ FIJADO Beraso, kellea pasvot sămestañ cause thou hast done this
( ) suara do 2506 5380 - jiuzātiñ, (ani) monzātiñ thing, thou art cursed
03ds usado: guza owe F bităr tukā sirāp poduñ: among all cattle and
EFSE; Go Faungo tujā hårdeān tsărtoloi beasts of the earth : upon
28808528 , JADF80 JUS so ani sămestañ tujeā ji- thy breast shalt thou go,
Svo eroz. niečeā vărsāniñ māti and earth shalt thou eat
khātoloi . all the days of thy life.
15 Gero Juta Toz nə 15 Āun dusmānkāi 15 I will put enmities
ಲೊಲೊಂ ತುಜೆ ಆನಿ ಅಸ್ತ್ರಿಯ ಬಿತ , galtoloi tuje ani ೩strie between thee and the
Juwer cabo eo 305 Woolo bităr, tujeā biã ani ti- woman, andthy seed and
20306: 3 Judo Dogs Juod čeā biā bităr : ti tujeñ her seed : she shall crush
30 guo 375 3.486875 dans mostak mostiteli ani thy head, and thou shalt
ಕರ್ತೊಲೊ . tuñ tiče khotek nādi lie in wait for her heel.
kårtoloi.
16 ಆನಿ ಅಸ್ತ್ರಿಯೆಕ್ ಸಾಂಗ್ಲೆಂ: 16 Ani åstriek sang- .16 To the woman also
Gevo z AJJFD2 274 leñ : āuñ tujea gurvār- he said : I will multiply
vi en sus diso: dotis jaots poņāče kášť tzădăito- thy sorrows, and thy con
yLUF36 jo , eo Wawes loñ : dukin putānk pur- ceptions:: in sorrow shalt
330C6 exoe, ego fuo 30 sut zatelī, ani dadleā thou bring forth children,
ಜೋ ಧನಿ
is a devas
ಜಾಉನ್ unuele. khāl astelī, ani to tuzo and thou shalt be under
dhăni zāun astolo. thy husband's power, and
he shall have dominion
over thee.
 359

17 es esdevoto zaoro 17 Ani Adāunk sang- 17 And to Adam he

guest
ತುಜೆ es, Usedo evios
ಅಸ್ತಿಯೆಚೆಂ ಉತರ್ erop,
ಜೈಕಲ್ಯಾ leñ : tuje ăstriyečeñ u- said : Because thou hast
Ja tuzo es europea, puta tar aikalleā pasun ani hearkened to the voice of
230 pour steps Jigar en advarleleā rukāčeñ fol thy wife, and hast eaten
ತುವೆಂ oso
Judo ಅದಾರ್ಲೆಲ್ಯಾ Jo khelleā pasvot, ani tu- of the tree, whereof I
ಯಂ badFeo,
Love, 36 wujours doods to tuo: veñ yen adārleleā pas commanded thee, that
Jdevos pats googo odevo vot, buink širāp poduñ : thou shouldst not eat,curs
56 Inch Juvāur kårn tantleñ khă- ed is the earth in thy
ಜಿಣಿಯೆಚ್ಯಾಂ ದಿಸಾನಿಂ, unk ghetoloi sămestañ work : with labour and
tuje jiņiečeañ disāniñ. toil shalt thou eat thereof
all the days of thy life .
18 8 FIF. FDOES en 200 18 Ti tukā kante ani 18 Thorns and thistles

is eewango do wyostro 3 * khuņte ubzăiteli ani shall itbring forth tothee;

ಖಾತೊಲೊ , buintleñ tăņ khātoloi . and thou shalt eat the
herbs of the earth .
19 ಕಪಾಲ್ ಗ್ರಾಮವುನ್ ಜೀ | 19 Kåpāl gāmeun jā- 19 In the sweat of thy
agons BDF88, Juva vodovon kårtoloi, tukā kād- face shalt thou eat bread
ava G MO IJF IS 3.0907 leli māti portun zātāi till thou return to the
OS, 3 , y se Yoges A3d moņasăr, kiteāk moļeār earth, out of which thou
232 szaevu s ago IFengo es matietso zāun vortautāi wast taken : for dust thou
ಮಾತಿ ಚಾತೊಲೊ. ani māti zātoloi. art, and into dust thou
shalt return .

20 ego ewaevas e 20 Ani Adāun aple 20 And Adam called

ofjes was 88. Side, 3 måstriek Yev món moli, the nameof his wife Eve :
GUIDO WJO ,esae
O Dedeuvisao ti sămestañ jiveānči because she was the mo
ವೊರ್ತ ಉತಾ ದೆಕುನ್ auoi zāun vortautā ther of all the living.
dekun .
21 ಆನಿ ದೆವಾನ್ ಆದಾಉ ೦ ಕ್ಕೆ 21 Ani Dēvān Adăunk 21 And the Lord God
so goz e dy 083752320w2, 2333 ani tače åstriek tsam- made for Adam and his
Bioing to'ng eso saotao bạeāčeo nesoņio keleo wife garments of skins,
naees ani tankāñ gāleo. and clothed them .
22 e 2000: Jos, e 22 Ani sangleñ : pole, pole , 22 And he said : Behold
1)
Woevo!) e due como WEPO )
ఎ ం Wo Adāuñ') amčeāntleāye- Adam") is become as one
dado uso eg Jazeer zoma klea bări zālo boreñ of us, knowing good and
1) " Pole, Adāuñ ”: iñ utrañ Dēvān sangloant bestāuñčeāk. — “ Behold Adam ” : This was
spoken by way of reproaching.
 360

saevar: sos, egao (Usuo ani vāit zaņazāun : tăr , evil : now , therefore, lest
3oon events 50xz), azs atāñ (amiñ takā aðkăļ perhaps he put forth his
noeien W8808,780 ಫೋನ್
tops kårizāi), hāt gāln ji- hand , and take also of
appos eo saevas wao niečeñ foļ kādčeāntlo the tree of life, and eat,
236 odjevowe, od ani khāun sådānts jie- and live for ever.
unčeäntlo .
23 yg his wuala Segods 23 Ani Somia Dēvān 23 And the Lord God

gora eugaonodu ootu takā khušālāyečeā văiñ- sent him out of the para
daoto waos nodis Jaka to kuțāntlo bāir gālo takā dise of pleasure, to till the
ಡೌಲಿ ಬ್ಯುಂ ಬೆಸ್ಕಾ ಕರುಂಕ್ kādleli buiñ besāi kă- earth from which he was
runk. taken .
24 ಆನಿ ಆದಾಉಂಕ್ ಬ್ಯಾರ್‌ 24 Ani Adāunk bāir 24 And he cast out
noelo ed eu good deeg jo gālo ani khušālāyečea Adam ; and placed before
du a JWTOOS HD 29 Judogo es văiñkuța mukār keru- the paradise of pleasure
Berussa, e8gosoduro Tulio bimānk ani ujeāči ani Cherubims, and a flaming
Dag 3103,06 nöOleag ou hăryeke kusin hālči tal- sword, turning every way
tais Jadano OaTuoti to vār jiņiečea rukātso to keep the way of the
ROOF . mārog rākunk dovorli. tree of life .

ಗಾದಿ. GĀDI PROVERBS

ಆವಸ್ವರ್ I. Avas vår I. Chapter I.

1 na baba ev zbog อ 1 Gādi Sālmāučeo, zo 1 The parables of Solo
dowwazi's mygt, ang boses Dāvidātso put, Izrāye- mon, the son of David
is Jag lātso rāi . king of Israel.
2 rats to be enah) was 2 (Ye kāide asāt) bud 2 To know wisdom , and
es samed PT18076: ani zānvāi sikūnk : instruction :
3 3002 sofo Jungges | 3 Tanče vorviñ mån- 3 To understand the
ಬುದಿಚಿಂ ev 330 Body 3036, šāk budičin utrañ som- words of prudence : and
waldo
ಆನಿ ಜಾಣ್ವಾಯೆಚೆ೦ ಸಿಕಾಪ್, ನೀತ್ zatat, ani zanvaye&ei to receive the instruction
eg tiow to e dos algo sikap, nīt ani somzikāy of doctrine, justice, and
ani nãy meltã. judgment, and equity.
4 WOWO: 079 was, IF 4 Sādeānk bud, tår- 4 To give subtilty to
ಬ್ಯಾಂಕ್ ಜಾಗ್ವಾ, ಆನಿ ಗಿನ್ಯಾನ್| nateank Zanway ani little ones,, to the young
oowa . gineān labtā. man knowledge and un
derstanding.
 361

5 ಬುದಿವೊಂತ್ ಆಕುನ್ ಅಧಿ 5. Budivont aikun , 5 A wise man shall

walaogó inde; es adhik budivont zātolo ; hear and shall be wiser :

Luomi ei iscloevord zorupF ani somzoņi tsălounči and he ' that understan
zlarisesse. sāmărthi bhogtolo. deth , shall possess go
vernments.
6 ವೊಪಾರ್ ಆನಿ ತಿಚೊ ಅರ್ಥ್, 6 Vopār ani titso årth, 6 He shall understand
www.googdido ev szo erg Joo budivontāčiñ utrañani a parable, and the inter
zಚೆ Tubbs ಸೊಪ್ಪು
SUB .
Leontodos tānče gut somzatolo . pretation, the words of
the wise , and their mys
terious sayings.
7 Seagold 2003036 waris 7 Dēvāči bhirānt bu- 7 The fear of the Lord is
edom mods was es ditso årămbh . Neņār the beginning of wisdom .
ಕಾಸ್ ಬೆಪಾರ್ವೊ ಕರ್ತಾತ್ . bud ani sikap bepārvo Fools despise wisdom and
kårtāt . instruction .

8 ಅಕ್ , ಮೊಜಾ ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾ, ತು 8 Āik, mojea burgeā , 8 My son, hear the in

nog wƏJa23ler , ea tujea bāpāčeo sikoņeo, struction of thy father,
ತುಜೆ ಆವೊಡೆ ಉಪದೇಸ್ ಸೊಡಿ ani tuje avoice upades and forsake not the law
POTO : sodinakā : of thy mother :
9 a $5075 ziada gunan 9 Meļonk sobitāi tujeā 9 That grace may be
Juan Foot, es posen 302 , mostăkāk, ani neton tu- added to thy head, and
700gt". jeā găleāk. a chain of gold to thy
neck .

10 staza, JO, JOS 10 Mojea putā , pātkiā- 10 My son, if sinners

Juva o dozof, yaogao en niñ tukā fuslāileār, shall entice thee, consent
ಕಾನಾಕಾ. tankāñ aikānakā . not to them .

11 ತಾಣಿಂ
gotdo naona 6808
06:05 11 Taņin sangleār : 11 If they shall say :
nonosa , ORJS Jongo amče sangatā ye , răgat Come with us, let uslie in
evogs Jaa Favaro, nudo, vāvounk nāļi kăriān, wait for blood, let us hide
ero Još op for women toets guniāuñ-natụlleāk bes- snares for the innocent
ಕಯಾ fo : ten mos kåriāñ : without cause :

12 ತಾಕಾ ಜೀವೊ ಗಿಳಿಯಾಂ, 12 Takā jīvo giļiāñ, 12 Let us swallow him

obatizo wo, ep ( 351) yemkóņdā bări, ani (ta- up alive like hell, and
Etho (npotao) wyd 599,034 kā) såg!o (giļiāñ) yekā whole as one that goeth
బుడా
Los బరి. tåleānt buďčeā bări. down into the pit.
46
 362

13 ಆಮ್ಯಾಲ ( ತಾಚಿ) ಸಗ್ನಿ ಮೊ 13 Amkāñ (tači) săgļi 13 We shall find all

ಲಾದಿಕ್ en Lugo,, two
ODOFs ಆಮಿ ೦ molādik āstmeļteli , precious substance, we
Rodo euliar ಭೂರ್ತೆಲ್ಯಾ
ಗರಾಂ ಲುಟನ್ withopero. ಉ ೦ . amčiñgărañaluţin bhor- shall fill our houses with
teleāuñ. spoils.
14 ಆಮೈ ಸಾಂಗಾತಾ ವ್ಯಾಪಾರ್ | 14 Ambe Sangata ve೩- 14 Cast in thy lot with
pos, Note3s una de Juego es pār kår, yekăts poti us : let us all have one
ಸುಂದಿ , amkāñ asundi. purse .
15 ಮೊಜ್ಯಾ ಪುತಾ, ತಾಂಚೆ ಸಾಂ 15 Mojea putā, tanče 15 My son, walk not
ಗಾತಾ ಚ es ನಾ , ತುಜೊ Jaz sangatā tsålnakā, tuzo thou with them , restrain
JDOUB ?s Jazaodeo svet og to pāi tančeā pāivāțentlo thy foot from their paths.
ಕಾಡ್ , pois kād.
16 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್, ತಾಂಚೆ16 Kitеāk moleār ,tān- 16 For their feet run to
ಪ್ಯಾ ವ್ಯಾಟಿಕ್ ಚಲ್ತಾತ್; ಆನಿ ರ be pai vaitak tsáltat ; evil, and make haste to
ಗತ್ ವಾವೊಂಕ್ ಅಉಸರ್ತಾತ್ . | ani ragat varounk au- shed blood .
sărtāt .
17 ಪುಣ್ ಬೆಸ್ಟಂ ಸುಕ್ಕಾ 0
ಮು 17 Pun besteñ sukņe- 17 But a net is spread
ಕಾರ್ ಜಾಳಾಂ ಗಾಲ್ಯಾತ್ . āñ mukār zaļañ galtāt. in vain before the eyes of
them that have wings.
18 ತೆ ಆಜ್ಞಾ ಜೀವಾಕಿ ನಾಡಿ ಕ 18 Te aplea jīvāki 18 And they them
ರ್ತಾತ್ , ಆನಿ ಆಪ್ಲಾಂ ಅತ್ಯಾ ೦ಕ್ | nadi kartat, ani apleaf selves lie in wait for their
ಮೋಸ್ ಕರ್ತಾತ್ . åtmeānk mos kártāt. own blood, and practise
deceits against their own
souls .
19 ಅಸೆಂಚ್ ಸಮೆಸ್ತಾಂ ಸುರಾ 19 Asents să mestañ 19 So the ways of every
30028 @g wallo, eparhia 0,028 surātiānčeo vāțo bhog- covetous man destroy the
ಆತ್ಮ ಒಸ್ಮಿತಾತ್ , toleānče åtme bàsmi- souls of the possessors.
tat .
20 ಬುದ್ ಬ್ಯಾರ್ ಬೊಬ್ ಮಾ 20 Bud bāir bõb mārn 20 Wisdom preacheth
DGF eve; ga; 20p @ ogs on 30 ulăitā ; bīdint aplo tā- abroad, she uttereth her
ಭೂ ಕೈಕಾಸೊ ಕರ್ತಾ . lo aikāso kartā. voice in the streets .

21 ತಿ ಪೊರ್ಜಾ ೦ ಚ್ಯಾ ಸಭಾಂ ಮೊ 21 Ti porjānčea sa- 21 At the head of multi

ದೆಂ ಅಪ್ಲಾಕ್ ಪರ್ಗಟ್ ಕರ್ತಾ , ಪ bhan moden apnalk pår- tudes she crieth out, in
éso owa wang
3 bogăț kårtā, patņāñčea the entrance of the gates
ಉತ್ರಾಂ ಉಚಾರ್ತಾ ಸಾಂಗುನ್ : bāglañ kådeapliñutrañ of the city she uttereth
utsārtā sangun : her words, saying :
 363

22 ಕೆದೊಳ್ ಪರಿಯಂತ್ , ಬು 22 Kedó! păriant, bur- 22 O children,how long

ರ್ಗ್ಯಾನು, ನೆಣಾರ್ಪೊಣಾಚೊ ಮೋಗ್geanu, neņārpoņātso will you love childishness,
FD0F36, en hoor euro, Jars mög kårtāt, ani neņār and fools covet those
Lag 3*,Brig JAY PJS toF6, luksānāk podtāt, teo things which are hurtful
ಆನಿ ಬುದ್
eo was ನಾತು ಜಾಣ್ಯಾ too văstu aša kårtele, ani to themselves, and the
a super home,
ಟಾಳ್ಳೆಲೆ? bud-nātựlle zāņvāikaņ- unwise hate knowledge ?
tāļtele ?
23 enero Juae O
23 Auñ tumkāñ beš 23 Turn yo at my re
ತನಾಂ , 23128 so aus : 30 taitanañ, bore zayā : proof: behold I will utter
ato, eserio close to go36 20 poļeyā, āuôn moje mo- my spirit to you, and will
do do EU JUDO evro FF tint čintāñ teñ tumkāñ shew you my words.
O

Oo, os loco er te,o Juaugo ugteñ kårteliñ ani mo

ದಾಕ್ತೆಲಿಂ. jiñ utrañ tumkāñ dā.
keiteliñ.
24 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್, ಆವಂ 24 Kitеāk moleār , ā- 24 Because I called,
( ZUJUB, )e tejejoes su Jo veñ (tumkāñ) apoileāt and you refused : I stret
agg on todo, esto loro ani tumiñ inkār kelān, ched out my hand, and
000 JÓ ID ODF Go toponāveñ mozo hāt vistārlā there was none that re
open ozó ado . ani koņeñ poleunknāñ. garded.
25 (esto ou o a ) 7725 (Āveñ tumkāñ dil- 25 You have despised
warto sudo ಬೆಪಾರ್ವೊ
2 ಕೆಲಾ| le)) sågļe buditso tumiñ all my counsel, and have
e lode ; evro,es esa bepārvo kelā ani mo- neglected my reprehen
ಕರುಂಕ್ ನಾಂ . jea bestauneāk lakša sions.
kårunknāñ.
26 serjo Jumps win weg 26 Āuiñ tumčea bos- 26 I also will laugh in
$9306 Jak oo, evo gumačeā veļār hasteliñ, your destruction, and will
20

27 in FIFOO JU JUO 2008 30 ani tumči čestai kårte- mock when that shall
36 toc Juaryas somos
20a totardos. liñ tumiñ bhiyetāt teñ come to you which you
tumčer podčea veļār. feared .
27 seved 36 SF2036 Foto 27 Aučit ākānt káš- 27 When sudden cala
gazdo eso pags Jonasa wo taitanañ anināš vādāļā mity shall fall on you,
Bano Joergdao, sve ostane bări lagiñ pāutanan, and destruction, as
20
a

ಆನಿ ವಿಗ್ಸ್ ಯೆತಾನಾಂ, tumčer dăgd ani vign tempest, shall be at hand,
yetanañ : when tribulation and
distress shall come upon
you :
46 *
 364

28 ತೊವೊನ್ ತೆ ಮಾಕಾ ಅಪ್ರೊ | 28 Tovol te maka -

ತಲೆ ಆನಿ
- 228 Then shall they call
Gevo e fuoris Jao: poitele ani āuñ aik- upon me, and I will not
çdosaros eveneen bero untsonāñ : phanteār ut- hear: they shall rise in
ತಾಂಕಾಂ
ಮೆಳೊನಾಂ: țele ani āuñ tankañ the morning and shall
meltsonah : not find me :

29 ಸಿಕಾಪ್ ಕಾಂಟಾಳ್ಳೆಲ್ಲಾ 29 Sikap kåņțāl?elea 29 Because they have

ಸುನ್ ಆನಿ ದೆವಾಚಿ ಭಿರಾಂತ್ ಕಾಣೆ | pasun ani Devati bhi- hated instruction , and
ನಾತೆ ಬ್ಲ್ಯಾ ಪಾಸೊತ್ , rānt kaņenatullea pas- received not the fear of
vot , the Lord ,

30 ಆನಿ ಮೊಜಿ ಬುದ್ ಇನ್ಯಾ 30 Ani moji bud in- 30 Nor consented to my
06 tommet til ,ss es mots kār kellea pasvot ani counsel , but despised all
ತ
>

aveh dillea my reproof..

ಸ್ತಾಂ ಆವೆಂ ದಿಲ್ಯಾ Wಬುದಿಂಚೆ ಎ samestan āveň
vibiant vait u
ಶ್ಯಾಂತ್ ವ್ಯಾಟ್ ಉಲ್ಲಾ ಪಾ| budin&e višiānt
ಸ್ಪೂತಿ, lăilleā pasvot.
31 ದೆಕುನ್ , ತೆ ಆಜ್ಞಾ 0
ವಾ 31 Dekun, te aplea 31 Therefore they shall
83280 jogoo agades eso es vāțečiñ foļañ khātele, eat the fruit of their own
ಹಿಕ್ಕತಿನಿಂ ದಾದೊಸ್ ಜಾತಲೆ. ani aple hikmatiniñ way, and shall be filled
dados zātele. with their own devices.
32 ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾಂಚೊ ಚುಕಿ ತಾಂ 32 Burgeānčeo tsuki 32 The turning away
Fao
ಕಾಂ ಜಿಪ್ಟಿ JatFeve estankāñ jivsið mārteleo , of little ones shall kill
modoro zoom 300+10 ani neņārānčeñ bore- them , and the prosperity
ನಾಶ್ ಕರ್ತಲೆಂ. pon tankāñ naš kårte- of fools shall destroy
leñ. them .

33 ಪುಣೆ ಜೊ ಕೋಣ್ ಮಾಕಾ 33 Pun 20 kon maka 33 But he that shall

edags vage, ,yo paga poo aikat zaleār , bheñ nas- hear me, shall rest with
ಸೌಕಾಸ್ಮಾ ಕಾತೊಲೊ ಆನಿ ಸc | tandi Soukasai kaneito- out terror, and shall en
mazs zuordua etuo Jabodolfo lo ani sompurņai bhog- joy abundance, without
ಭಂ ನಾಸ್ತಾನಾಂ, tolo, vāițānčeñ bheñ fear of evils.
nāstanañ.

ಆ ವಸ್ವರ್ II. A vasvår II. Chapter II.

1 ಮೊಚ್ಯಾ ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾ, ( ತುಕಾ 1 Mojea burgeā (tukā 1 My son, if thou wilt
©
ತಿತ್ತೆಂ 2383ans Just Bo) 300 titleñ borepon meļte - receive my words, and |
 365

tamaಿ isdogos, leñ) tūñ mojiñ utrañ wilt hide my command

ಉತ್ರಾಂ ಕಾಶ
LAWO evigo
ಆನಿ ಮೊಜೆ ಉಪದೇಸ್ ತುಜೆ ಕಡೆ kanesi zalear , ani muje | ments with thee,
ಸಾಂಬಾಳ್ ದೆವೊರ್ತಿ ಜಾಲ್ಯಾರ್, [ updes tuje kade sam
bāln dovorši zaleār,
2 ( ಅಸೆಂ ) ತುಜೆ ಕಾನ್ ಬುದ್ 2 (Åseñ) tuje kān bud 2 That thy ear may
ಜೈಕಾತೆಲೆ: ತುಜೆಂ ಕಾಳಿಜ್ ವೊಂದೃ aikatele : tujeh kaliz hearken to wisdom : in
ಬುದ್ ಸಿಕ್ಕಾಕ್ , vondai bud sikčeāk. cline thy heart to know
prudence .
3 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ ತುವೆಂ 3 Kiteak molear tu- 3 For if thou shalt call
ಬುದ
Www JJETOSCS GO Jude to veñ bud māgleār ani for wisdom , and incline
ដូរ
Banga,cs go cajones: tujeñ kāļiz zāṇyāyek thy heart to prudence :
vondaileār :
4 ತುವೆಂ ತಿಕಾ ದುಡ್ವಾ ಬರಿ ಸೊ 4 Tuveñ tikā duduā 4 If thou shalt seek her
way sos, ero waondoa wo 370 bări sodleār, ani bāngā-as money, and shall dig
ಕೊಂಡ್ವಾರ್, rā bări tikā kondleār, for her as for a treasure:
5 ತೊವೊಳ್ ದೇವಾಚಿ ಭಿರಾಂತ್ 5 Toyo! Dēvāči bhi- 5 Then shalt thou un
Kvaatia suacraz, eta sewau sa rānt somzotoloi, ani derstand the fear of the
ತುಕಾ ಮೆಳ್ತಲಿ. Dēvāči zāņvāi tukāme!- Lord and shalt find the
teli . knowledge of God :
6 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ ದೆಉ ಬು 6 Kiteak Imolear Deu 6 Because the Lord
ದ್ ದಿತಾ, ಆನಿ ತಾಚ್ಯಾ ತೊಂಡಾಂ | bud dita , ani tated
tačeā giveth wisdom :: and out
ಬುದ್ ಆನಿ ಜಾಗ್ವಾ ( ಯೆತಾ). tondāntli bud ani zān- of His mouth cometh pru
vai ( yeta ). dence and knowledge.
7 ಸಮ ಚಿ ಲ್ಯಾಂಚಿ ಬೊಲ್ಯಾಕಿ| 7,7 Sama tsalteleanti 7 He will keep the
ರಾಕ್ರೋ ಲೊ , ಆನಿ ಸಾದೆಪೊಣಾನ್ bolaiki raktolo,
rāktolo, ani salvation of the righteous,
ಚಿಲ್ಯಾಂಕ್ ಸಾಂಬಾಳ್ಕೊಲೋ , sādepoņān tsålteleānk and protect them that
Sambaltolo, walk in simplicity,
8 ನೀತಿಚೊ ವಾಳೊ ಆನಿ ಬಾಗೆ 8 Nītičeo vāto ani bā- 8 Keeping the paths of
Jogooche Judosent datuk gevontāntso mārog rā- justice, and guarding the
kun . ways of saints .
9 ತೊವೊಳ ನೀತ್ ಆನಿ ಸೊಪ್ಪಿ 9 Toyo ! nit ani Som 9 Then shalt thou un
ಕ್ಯಾ ಆನಿ ನ್ಯಾ ಆನಿ ಸರ್ವೆ ಬೊರಿ Zikai ani nai ani sar- derstand justice, and
ವಾಟ್ ಸೊಪ್ಟೆತೊಲೊ . vụ bori vāt somzotoloi. judgment and equity, and
every good path.
 366

10 ಬುದ್ ತುಜ್ಯಾ ಮೊನಾಂತ್ 10 Bud tujea monant 10 If wisdom shall en

ರಿಗ್ಲಾರ್, ಆನಿ ಜಾಣ್ವಾ ತುಜ್ಯಾ | riglear, ani zanvai tu - ter into thy heart, and
ಆತ್ಮಾಕ ಮಾನೊಲ್ಯಾರ್: jeä åtmeāk mānuoleār: knowledge please thy
soul :

11 ಬುದ್ ಆನಿ ಜಾಣ್ವಾ ತುಕಾ 11 Bud ani zāņvāi 11 Counsel shall keep
ರಾಕಲಿ, tukā rākteli , thee, and prudence shall
preserve thee ,
12 ವ್ಯಾಟ್ ವಾಟೆಂತೊ ಆನಿ ವ್ಯಾ 12 Vait vatentlo ani 12 That thou mayest
eos evenowes Judo JUTO vāiț ulounčeā månšān- be delivered from the
ಸೋಡ್‌ os : tlo tukā sodounk : evil way, and from the
man that speaketh per
verse things :
13 ತೆ ( ವ್ಯಾಟ್ ಮನಿಸ್) ನೀವ್ 13 Te (vāiț mănis) 13 Who leave the right
ಮಾರೊಗ್ ಚುಕ್ತಾತ್ ಆನಿ ಕಾಳೊ| nit marog tsuktat ani way, and walk by dark
ಕಾಚ್ಯಾ ಮಾರ್ಗಾರ್ ಚಲ್ತಾತ್: kālokāčeā mārgār tsål- ways :
tāt :

14 ತೆ, ವ್ಯಾಟ್ ಆದಾರ್‌, ಸಂ 14 Te, väitādārn , san- 14 Who are glad when
ತೊಸ್ ಭೋಗ್ತಾತ್, ಆನಿ ಭೌ ವ್ಯಾ | tos bhogtat, ani bhou | they have done evil , and
fois JEU o ojo evcats 20 vāiț văstuñ thăiñ ulās rejoice in most wicked
ಗ್ತಾತ್ . bhogtāt. things :
15 ತಾಂಚೊ ವಾಟೊ ಬೊಟ್ಯೂ , 15 Tan&eo vato kho- 15 Whose ways are
ತಾಂಚೆಂ ನಾಡ್ಲೆಂ ಲಜಿಸ್ಟ್: teo, tānčen nādteñ lå- perverse, and their steps
jist. infamous.

16 ( ಬುದಿನ್) ದುಸ್ರ ಆನಿ ವ್ಯಂ 16 (Budin) dusre ani 16 That thou mayest be
ಜಾಲ್ಲೆ ಅಸ್ತಿಯೆಕ್ , ಚುಕೊನ್ ಭೌತ್ | nainzalle àstriek, tsu- delivered from the strange
ಲೊ , ತಿ (ಅಸ್ತಿ ) ಆಪ್ಲಾಂ ಉತ್ರಾನಿಂ kon ghetoloi, ti (&stri) woman , and from the
ಫುಸ್ಪ್ಯಾತಾ, apleāñ utrāniñfuslaitā;stranger, who softeneth
her words ;
17 ಆನಿ ದಾಕ್ಷೆ ಪಿರಾಯೆರ್ ತಿಕಾ 17 Ani dākte pirāyer 17 And forsaketh the
ಮೆಳ್ಳಾ, ದಾದ್ಲಾಕ್ ಸೊಡ್ತಾ; tika melleā dādleāk guide of her youth ;
sodtā ;
18 ಆನಿ ದೇವಾಚಿ ಸೋಮೋರ್ಥ್ 18 Ani Dēvācisomorth 18 And hath forgotten
Witgof; 330 (no los e as visărtā ; tičeñ (vāit ås- the covenant of her God ;
280) nos omaf76 warlaga: triečen) går morņāk bā- for her house inclineth
 367

eg 8180 suboo at 0 ಡಾ gotā, āni tičiñ metāñ unto death, and her paths
>

ಇಸಿಲ್ಯಾನ್ ವೊರ್ತಾತ್, yemkóņdā isileān vor- to hell .

tāt.
19 ತಿಚೆ ಕಡೆ ವೆತೆಲೆ ಪಾಟ ಯು 19 Tiče kåde vetele, 19 None that go in unto
ಉಂಚೆನಾಂತ್ ಆನಿ ಜಿಣಿಯೆಚ್ಯಾಂ೦ ವಾ | pati yeundenant ani ji- her, shall return again,
ಟಾನಿಂ ರಿಗ್ಟನಾಂತ್ . ņiečeāñ vātāniñ rigče- neither shall they take
nānt . hold of the paths of life.
20 ತರ್, ಬೊರೆ ವಾಟೆರ್ ಚಲ್ 20 Tar,
Tăr, hore water
vāter | 20 That thou mayest
es ashogaozisa Jadans tşăl ani nītivăntāntso walk in a good way : and
ಸೊಡಿನಾಕಾ . mārog sodinakā. mayest keep the paths of
the just.
21 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ , ಜೊ | 21 Kiteak molear 20- 21 For they that are
Espengo op 3.503s zaevido ao kāņ nītivånt zāun vor- upright , shall dwell in the
ರ್ತ ಉತ್ರಾ, ತೊ ಸೌಂಸಾರಾಂತ್ ಸು | tauta , to souñsārānt earth : and the simple
56 warto eua , eo modo sukh bhogtolo , ani sāde shall continue in it.
ತಲೆ. thaii taktele .
22 ಪುಣ್ ಖೋಟೆ ಸೌಂಸಾರಾಂತ್ 22 Pun khote Souh- 22 But the wicked shall
ನಾಂಚ್ ಜಾತೆಲೆ, ಆನಿ ಜೊಕೊಣ್ sarantle napkintz zá- be destroyed from the
Bu biomost oder ga, 720 tele, ani zokon khotepo- earth: and they that do
ರಾಂತ್ ಉರ್ಚೊ ನಾಂ . ņānt rāutā, souñsārānt unjustly shall be taken
urtsonāñ. away from it .

ಆ ವಸ್ವರ್ III, Ava s vår III. Chapter III.

1 ಮೊಜ್ಯಾ ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾ, ಮೊಜೆ ಈ 1 Mojea burgeā, moje 1 My son, forget not my
Joser og sto o JO FJdo upădēs ani mojiñ for- law, and let thy heart
ತುಜೆಂ ಕಾಳಿಜ್ ಸಾಂಬಾಳುಂದಿ . mānañ tujeñ kāļiz sām- keep my commandments.
ba]undi.
2 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್, ಆಚೆ ವೊ 2 Kitеāk moleār, āče 2 For they shall add to
OFO Fwans do ef9 28dce vorviñ săbār pirāi ani thee length of days, and
20 JAFO, eso On 30 jiņiečiñ vărsañ, ani sou- years of life and peace.
ಕಾ ಮೆಲಿ. kāsāi tukā meļteli.
3 ಕಾಕುಳ್ ಆನಿ ಸತ್ತ ಕೆದಿಂಚ್ 3 Kakult ani săt ke - ' 3 Let not mercy and
Zara Jaya; saotao 1984,036 dints sõdinakā ; tankāñ truth leave thee, putthem
ಗಾಲ you22 to 4 036 găleānt gāl ani tujeā about thy neck , and write
ಬೊರಸಿ kaļzānt borăi : them in the tables of thy
heart :
 368

4 ಆನಿ ದೇವಾ ಆನಿ ಮನ್ಯಾಂ 4 Ani Deva ani man- 4 And thou shalt find
ಮುಕಾರ್ , ತುಕಾ ಕುರ್ಪಾ esa šāñ mukār tukā kurpā grace and good under
ಸೊಬ್ಬ ಕ್ಯಾ ಮತ್ತೆಲಿ. ani somzikāi meļteli. standing before God and
men .

5 ಸಗ್ಯಾ ಕಾಳ್ವಾನ್ ದೇವಾಚೆ 5 Săg !eā kaļzān Dē- 5 Have confidence in

of Ja3003: GJ Juve wazos vāčer pātie : ani tuje the Lord with all thy
ಪಾತಿಯನಾಕಾ . budičer patienakā . heart , and lean not upon
thy own prudence .
6 ಸಮೆಸ್ತಾಂ ವಸ್ತುಂ ಥೈಂ ತಾ 6 Såmestañ văstuñ 6 In all thy ways think
Tolead")zdo36,UD EN JUX thăiñ takā ( Dēvāk ) čint, on Him , and He will direct
ಜಣಿ ಚತೊಲೊ . ani to tuji jiņi tsalăi- thy steps.
tolo.
7 ತುಜೆ ಮೋತಿಂತ್ ಬುದಿವಂತ್ | 7 Tuje motint budi-
7 Be not wise in thy
sievas eta Joms 28030 zs vånt zāun asai món own conceit : fear God,
ರಾವನಾಕಾ: ದೇವಾಕ್ ಭಿಯೆ , ಆನಿ &intun ravanaka : De- and depart from evil :
ವ್ಯಾಓ ಚುಕ್ಕ ; vak bhiye, ani vait tsu
kăi ;
8 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್, ತುಜೆ ಕು 8 Kitеāk moleār, tuje 8
8 For it shall be health
ಡಿಕ್ ಬೊಳ್ಳಾಕಿ ಆಸ್ತೆಲಿ, ಆನಿ ತು | kudik bolaiki asteli, ani | tothy navel, and moisten
No' Oddo 2306 1975 eiroz tujeañ hādāð bităr yēk ing to thy bones.
ಕಿಚೊ ರೊಸ್ ರಿಗೆಲೊ. bolāikitso rós rigtolo.
9 ದೇವಾಕ್ ಮಾನ್ ದೀ ತುಜೆ 9 Devak man di tuje 9 Honour the Lord with
ಆಸ್ತಿಕ್, ಆನಿ ತಾಕಾ( ದಿ ) ಸಮೆಸ್ತಾ೦ ೩stin , ani taka (di) sá- thy substance, and give
ಪ್ರೊಲಿಂ ಪೊಳಾಂ : mestañ poiliñ foļañ : Him of the first of all thy
fruits :
10 ಆನಿ ತುಜಿಂ ತುಮಿಂ ಬೊರ್ನ 10 Ani tujiö tupiñ 10 And thy barns shall
ಜಾತೆಲಿಂ, ಆನಿ ತುಜೆ ಗಾಣೆ ಸೊರಾ | born zatelih , ani tuje be filled with abundance ,
ನ್ ಸಂಪೂರ್ಣ ಜಾತಲೆ . gāņe sorean sămpūrņ and thy presses shall run
zātele . over with wine.
11 ದೇವಾನ್ ದಾಡ್ಲಿಲೆ ಶಿಕ್ಷಾ 11 Dēvān dādleli šik- 11 My son,, reject not
232,06 FJOfta, es 30 EJTO sa inkār kårnakā, ani the correction of the Lord:
ಸಮ ಕರ್ಚ್ಯಾ ವೆಳಾರ್ ತಾಕಾ ಸೊ to tuka sama karted and do not faint when
ಡಿನಾಕಾ : veļār takā sāļinakā : thou art chastised by
Him :
12 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್, ದೇ 12 Kiteak molear, Deu 12 For whom the Lord

Paroda isens 730F, Java koņātso mög kårtā , ta- loveth ,Hechastiseth : and
 369

to ata asa : es wada wo kā to šikšā ditā : ani as a Father in the son He

ಆಜ್ಞಾ ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾ ಫ್ಯಂ ಸಂತೊಸ್| bapa bari aplea bur- pleaseth himself.
ಪಾತಾ. gea thăiñ săntos pautā.
13 ಭಾಗೆವೊಂತ್ ತೊ ಮನಿಸ್ , 13 Bhāgevont to mă- 13 Blessed is the man
Bata Wamelalveg ega wa nis, zakā zāņvāi meltā that findeth wisdom and
ನ್ ಬೊರ್ತಾ: ani budin bortā : is rich in prudence :
14 ತೀ ಬೊಗ್ಗಿರುಪಿಯಾನಿಂ ವ್ಯಾ | 14 Ti bhogti rupianith 14 The purchasing
ಪಾರ್ ಕರ್ಚ್ಯಾ ಪ್ರಸ್ ಬೊರಿ, ಆನಿ | weapar k&red prás bo- thereof is better than the
320 45 epa pg46 e smjese, ri, ani tičeñ fò! bhou merchandise of silver,
ಬಾಂಗಾರಾ ಪ್ರಸ್ ( ಬೊರೆ ೦). nităļ ani poilea bāngā- and her fruit than the
rā prås (boreñ ). chiefest and purest gold :
15 ಸಮೆಸ್ತಾಂ ಆಸ್ಯಾಂ ಪ್ರಸ್ 15 Sămestañ āstiāñ
15 15 She is more precious
ಮೊಲಾದಿಕ್ , ಆನಿ ಸರ್ವೆ ಖುಶೆಚೊ | prás moladik ani sarvy than all riches : and all
JAU 300 Hof Fouons Leas. khušečeo văstu tikā săr the things that are de
karunk nozo. sired, are not to be com
pared with her.
16 ತಿಚ್ಯಾ ಉಜ್ಯಾ ಹಾತಾಂತ್ 16 Tičeā uzveā hā- 16 Length of days is in
ODO235 xeå, eso 3232. Wade, tant lāmb jiņi, ani tičeā her right hand, and in
Jaga og pa yo epo pow . dāveā hātānt grestkāi her left hand riches and
ani ānånd. glory.
17 Tičemārăg sundăr 17 Her ways are beauti
17 ತಿಚೆ ವಾರಕ್ ಸುಂದರ್ ಆ

o pots gesog a bioJono ani såkåd tičeo vāto ful ways, and all her
ಯೆಚೊ . soukāsāyečeo. paths are peaceable.
18 ಜೊ ಕೋಣ್ ತಿಕಾ ಭೋಗಿತ್ 18 Zo kon tika bhogit 18 She is a tree of life

wzea,o$,(269) Java assol zaleār, ( bud) takā jiņi- to them that lay hold on
uzeg Outo wo dago, eso no ečea ruka bărizatā, ani her : and he that shall
fums 323 Jonaga dalags zo kõn tiče sangātā rā- retain her is blessed.
ಜಾಲ್ಯಾರ್, ಭಾಗೆವಂತ್ , vat zaleār, bhāgevånt.
19 ದೇವಾನ್
ಜಾಣ್ವಾಯೆನ್ 19
Dēvān zāņvāyen - 19 The Lord by wisdom
19
JOO Jads nalg, want Josa souñsār gådlo, budin hath founded the earth,
* ಗಟ್ ಕೆಲೆಂ. moļāb găt keleñ. hath established the
heavens by prudence .
20 ತಾಚೆ ಜಾಣ್ವಾಯೆನ್, ಗುಂ 20 zāņvāyen 20 By His wisdom the
Tace
Dacia Daeteg og Tudo ev guņdāyo zāleo ani ku- depths have broken out,
ಬೆನ್ ಬೊರ್ತಾತ್ . pañ uben bortāt. and the clouds grow
thick with dew.
47
 370

21 ಮೊಚ್ಯಾ ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾ, ಯಿಂ 21 Mojea burgeā, yiñ 21 My son, let not these
(ಉತ್ರಾಂ) ವಿಸರ್‌ನಾಕಾ, ಉಪದೇಸ್ ( utrai ) visárnaka , upa- | things depart from thy
ಆನಿ ಬುದ್ ಸಾಂಬಾಳ್ : dēs ani bud sāmbā ?: eyes : keep the law and
counsel :
22 ಆನಿ ತುಜ್ಯಾ ಅತ್ಯಾಕ್ ಜಿಣಿ 22 Ani tujea atmeak 22 And there shall be
ಆನಿ ತುಜ್ಯಾ ಗಳ್ಯಾಕ್ ಏಕ್ ನೆಟೊನ್ | jini ani tujea gáleak life to thy Soul, and grace
ಮಳೆಲಿ. yek neton melteli. to thy mouth,
23 ತೊವೊಳ ಧ್ವರಾನ್ ಚಲ್ಲೊ | 23 Toyodhàirants & l- 23 Then Shaltthou walk
Sub, es busy wodano po toloi, ani tujea pāyāk confidently in thy way,
ತೊರ್ ಲಾಗೊ ನಾಂ . fātor lagtsonāñ . and thy foot shall not
stumble .
24 ನಿದ್ರನಾಂ ಭಿಯೆಚೆನ್ಯಾ, 24 Nidtanai bhiyetso- 24 If thou sleep , thou
ಸೌಕಾಸ್ಯಾ ಬೊಸ್ಕೊಲೊ ಆನಿ ತುಜಿ | nai, Soukasai bhogtoloi | shalt not fear : thou shalt
ನಿನ್ ಚೋರಿ ಜಾತೆಲಿ . ani tuji nid bori zateli. rest, and thy sleep shall
be sweet .
25 ಅಉಚಿತ ಬ್ಯಾಕ್ ಆನಿ ತು 25 Aučit bhyāk ani 25 Be not afraid of
ಜೆರ್ ಪೊಶ್ಚಾ ಬೊಮ್ಯಾಂಚೆಂ ಪೊಟ್ಟಿ tujer podbean khoteaf- sudden fear, nor of the
0

ಯೆಕ್ ಭಿಯೆನಾಕಾ. čeñ podviek bhiyenakā. power of the wicked

falling upon thee.
26 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್, ದೇಉ | 26 Kiteak molear, De-
Dē 26 For the Lord will be
Joe Feriado eso goed u tuje kåde astolo ani at thy side,and willkeep )

ಪ್ಯಾ ಸಾಂಬಾಳ್ತಿ , ನಾಡಿಂತ್ ಪೊ | tuje pai sambaltolo, na- | thy foot that thou be not
ಡಾನಾಂ ಜಾ ಉಂಕ್ , dint podanāñ zāunk . taken.
27 ಉಪ್ಪಾರ್ ಕರುಂಕ್ ಖುಶಿ 27 Upkār kårunkkhu- 27 Do not withhold him
agogFongTo Jato : 1907s ši vortăleāk aďāi nakā : from doing good, who
esposos, quora evba os 706. tank asleār, tuổi up- is able ; if thou art able,
kār kår. do good thyself also .
ಕಡೆ ಸಾಂಗಿ
28 ತುಜ್ಯಾ ಇಷ್ಟಾ 28 Tujeā išķā kåde 28 Saynot to thy friend::
ನಾಕಾ
3279:: ವೊಚ್
823 ಆನಿ
8 ಪೊರ್ತುನ್
BUF : 083: sānginakā:: vots anipor- Go,, and come again : and
poo asiassoson : B3FO6 tun ye : fāleā ditoloñ to-morrow I will give to
ತ್ಯಾಚ್ ಫಾರಾ ದಿಉಂಕ್ ತಾಂಕಾ
07. móņ : zărtăr teāts farā thee: when thou canst
diunk tanktā . give at present.
29 ತುಜ್ಯಾ ಇಷ್ಟಾ ಚೆ‌ ನಾಡಿ 29 Tujeā išķāčer naţi | 29 Practise not evil
70 % bata, + 30.no fueseos kärnakā, kiteāgāi mo- against thy friend, when
ತೊ ತುಜೆರ್ ಪಾತಿಯೆತಾ. ļeār to tujer pātiyetā. he hath confidence in
thee .
 371

30 ಎಕಾ ಮನ್ಯಾ ಕಡೆ ಕಾರಣ್ *** | 30 Yekā mănšā kåde 30 Strive not against a
ನಾಸ್ತಾನಾಂ ಜಗ್ಗಾನಾಕಾ, ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ | karan nastanah zágda man without cause, when
Jueva, os somo Judo o nakā, kiteāk moleār tā- he hath done thee no evil.
ವ್ಯಾಟ್ ಕರುಂಕ್ನಾಂ ņeñ tukā kāiñ vāit kă
runknän.
31 ನೀತನಾಳೆ ಬ್ಲ ಯಾ ಮನ್ಯಾಚೊ | 31 Nit natullea măn-
Nīt nātullea man 31 Envy not the unjust
Serious for pare, og sowas šātso mosor kårnakā, man, and do not follow
ಮಾರ್ಗಾರ್ ಚಲ್‌ನಾಕಾ: ani tačeā mārgār tsål- his ways :
nakā :
32 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ ಹ 32 Kitеāk moleār har- 32 For every mocker is
auFoo woodtobe to open yekā yeddaitoleāk Dēu an abomination to the
ಕಾಂಟಾಳ್ತಾ, ಆನಿ ದೆವಾಚಿ ಸಣ್ಣ | kantalta, ani Devati Lord, and his communi
ಸಾದ್ಯಾಂ ಕಡೆ, sălgi sādeāñ kåde. cation is with the simple.
33 ದೇವಾ ಥಾಉನ್ ಬೋಟ್ಯಾಂ 33 Deva thaun kote- 33 Want is from the
2oz Rodo 2306 HowF¢6703ānčeā garāñ bităr dur- Lord in the house of the
ರಿಗ್ರೆಲಿ; ಪುಣ್ ಬೊರಾಂಚ್ಯಾಂo ಗರಂ| balkai rigteli ; pun bo- wicked :: but the habita
* ಆಶಿರ್ವಾದ್ ಲಾಭ್ಲೆಂ. reānčeāñ gărānk āšir- tions of the just shall be
vād lābhteleñ . blessed .
34 ದುಸ್ರಾಂಕ್ ಚೆಸ್ಟಾ ಕರ್ತೆ 34 Dusreānk čestãi 34 He shall scorn the
O2,028, (Beers #wed FBF kårteleānči, (Dēu) keb- scorners, and to themeek
duo, eso 48,076 (seer ) daikårtolo, aniboleānk He will give grace.
ಕುರ್ಪಾ ದಿತೊಲೊ. (Dēu) kurpā ditolo .
35 ಬುದಿವಂತ ಬುದ್ ಬೊಗ್ಗೆ 35 Budivant bud
35 Budivånt bhog 35 The wise shall pos
budbhog-
ಲೆ: ನೇಣಾರಾಂಚೊ ಮಾನ್ ಲಚ್, | tele : nenarantso man
mān sessglory : the promotion
1àz . of fools is disgrace.

ಆವಸ್ವರ್ IV. Ava svăr IV . Chapter IV.

1 ಪುತ್ರಾನೆ , ಬಾಪಾಚ್ಯ ಸಿಕೊ 11 Putrāno, 1 Hear,, ye children, the
bāpāčeo
over ega, en suspo savo sikoņeo aikā, ani mòn instruction of a father,
ಬುದ್ ಸಿಕೊ ೦ಕ್. diā bud sikonk. and attend that you may
know prudence.
2 ಆಉಂ ಬೊರೆಂ ದೆಣೆಂ ತು 2:. Āuñ boreñ deņeñ 2 I will give you a good
ಮ್ಯಾಂ ದಿತೊಲೊ೦, ಮೊಜೆ ಉಪ | tumkan ditoloi, moje gift, forsake not my law,
ದೇಸ್ ಸೊಡಿನಾಕಾತ್, upadēs sõdinakāt .
3 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ಮೆಳ್ಯಾರ್, ಆಉಂಇ 3 Kitеāk moļeār , āuñi 3 For I also was my
Sowa, wa gazid 236 moeras mojea bāpātso put zāun father's son, tender and
47 *
 372

Gezuela o, sonygooduds Juo asulloñ,zāgrutāyen ma- as an only son in the sight

to JazzOro Ol) egg wJD236 w kā vādăilloñ ) ani ye- of my mother.
ರ್ಗ್ಯಾ ಬರಿ ಮೊಜೆ ಆಿ ಮುಕಾರ್, káts burgea bari moje
āuoi mukār .
4 ಆನಿ ತೊ ಮಾಕಾ ಸಿಕ್ತಾಲೊ 4 Ani to makā sikăi- 4 And he taught me ,
ಆನಿ ಸಾಂಗ್ತಾಲೊ : ತುಜೆಂ ಕಾಳಿಜ್ | talo ani sangtalo: tujet and said : Let thy heart
Jowo er ge o toreroa, mis kāliz mojiñ utrañ kāņ- receive my words keep
8o anoduo Fddo Adowasó espeundi, mojiñ formanañ my commandments, and
ಜಿಣಿ ಜಿಯೆತೊಲೊ . sambāļ ani jiņi jietoloi. thou shalt live.
5 ಜಾಣಾ
ಕ್ವಾಭೋಗ್, ಬುದ್ ಭೋ | 5 Zanvai bhag, bud 5 Get wisdom , get pru
06: Lowes Footario er se,o bhög : mojea toņdāčiñ dence: forget not, neither
ವಿಸಾರ್ ನಾಕಾ, ಆನಿ ತಿಂ ಚುಕ್ಕ | utrah visar naka, ani| decline from the words of
ನಾಕಾ. tiñ tsukăi nakā. my mouth .
6 ತಿಕಾ ( ಬುದ್) ಸೊಡಿ ನಾಕಾ : 6 Tikā ((bud) sódina- 66 Forsake her not, and
OD 3 Z170 000: Sašo to kā , ani ti tukā rākteli : she shall keep thee : love
ಗ್ ಕರ್, ಆನಿ ತಿ ತುಕಾ ಸಾಂಬಾಳ್ | titso mg kar, ani ti tu- her, and she shall pre
ದೂವೊರ್ತಲಿ. kā sambāļn dovorteli. serve thee.
7 ಜಾಣ್ವಾಯೆಚಿ ಸುರು (ಇ), 7 Zāņvāyeči suru (i), 7 The beginning of
tomed 230ens, ego non est zaņvāi bhāg, ani săgle wisdom, get wisdom, and
>

ಪ್ರಸ್ ಬುದ್ ಜೊಡ್ . asti prăs bud zūd. with all thy possessions
purchase prudence.
8 ತಿಕಾ ಧರ್ ಆನಿ ತಿ ತುಕಾ ವೊ 8 Tikā dhår ani ti tu- 8 Take hold on her,
ರ್ನಿಲಿ: ಆನಿ ತಿಕಾ ಪೊಟ್ಟು ನ್ ಗೆತಿ | ka vorniteli : ani tika and she shall exalt thee:
SO020, 32 poevas Guta e poțlun geši zaleār, tiče thou shalt be glorified by
ನಂದ್ ಎತಿ .
thāun tukā ānånd ye- her, when thou shalt em
tolo. brace her.
9 ತಿ ತುಜ್ಯಾ ಮಸ್ತಕಾಕ್ ಚಡ್ 9 Ti tujęā mostakāk 9 She shall give to thy
HugoF WBO, JEF0F6 Juu tsåd kurpā diteli, pår- head increase of graces,
ಕುತಾನ್ ತುಕಾ ಸಂಬಾಳ್ಳೆಲಿ. zálik mukutān tukā and protect thee with a
Sambalteli, noble crown .
Āik,mojea
10 ಅಕ್ , ಮೊಜ್ಯಾ ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾ, 10 hik, mojea bur gea,, 10 Hear, O my son,
burgeā
ಆನಿ ಮೊಜಿಂ ಉತ್ರಾಂ ಕಾಣ್ ತುಕಾ| ani mojith utrai kange and receive my words ,
ಜಿಣಿಯೆಚಿಂ ವರ್ಸಾ ೦ ಚಡಾಸಿಂ, tukā jiņiečiñ vărsāñ that years of life may be
trådāsiñ . multiplied to thee.
1) Lit. I have been educated with care.
 373

11 vero guia dong cours 11 Āuñtukā zāņvāye- 11 I will shew thee the
Jalos was bodloo op 820, či vāt dākăitoloñ : nīti- way of wisdom , I will >

JUOmaFof Jura de toelao: Čea mārgār tukā tsă- lead thee by the paths of
lăitoloñ : equity:
12 ತ್ಯಾ ಮಾರ್ಗಾರ್ ಪ್ರಾಗಾರ್ , 12 Teā mārgār pāi 12 Which when thou
sute dog tag on ie sao36 gāln, tuje pāi káštān shalt have entered, thy
es waevogadao u sao au tsålčenānt ani daunta- steps shall not be straiten
జినాం. nañ ādkaļ meļčināñ. ed, and when thou runnest
thou shalt not meet a
stumbling block .
13 ಸಕಾಪ್ ಸಾಂಬಾಳ್ , ತೆಂ 13 Sikāp sambā), teñ 13 Take hold on instruc
Lisa Jaga: 30 Off, IJ8 Wed sodinakā : teñ rāk , tuji tion, leave it not : keep it,
ಜಾಯಿನ್ ಆಸಾ ದೆಕುನ್, jiņi zāun asā dekun . because it is thy life.
14 Bietoa,oua, ouan't 0030 14 Khoteānčea mārgā 14 Be not delighted in
Hotund Jadagata, us so thăiñ såntos pāvānakā, the paths of the wicked,
Soos ons datos Jutt Ja Besoo ani khoțeānči vāț tukā neither let the way of evil
sa evo @ manuonāñ zāundi. men please thee.
15 3 ( Jados) isuos; to 15 Ti (vāt) tsukăi ; 15 Flee from it, pass
Lowa Jata: segree atozzo, teñeñ votsanākā : poisi- not by it : go aside , and
ಆನಿ ತಿ ಸೋಡ್ , leān vots, ani ti sõd . forsake it .
16 $ 70, s svydgos, wazees | 16 Kitеāk moleār vāit 16 For they sleep not
ಕೆಲ್ಸಾ ಶಿವಾ ತೆ ನಿದನಾಂತ್ ಆನಿ | kellea Sivai te nidanant | except they have done
Joonoo pear toaoso sopo ani tankā ñ nīd poda- evil : and their sleep is
toms Book nāñ mos kelleå šivāi. taken away unless they
have made some to fall.
17 Doganorio evodo 17 Khotepoņātso undo 17 They eat the bread
ಖಾತಾತ್ eo Doblemarto khātāt ani vāitpoņātso of wickedness, and drink
ಆನಿ

ಸೂರೋ ಪಿಯೆತಾತ್, soro piyetāt. the wine of iniquity.

18 6 23RDOrd sobos 18 Pun boreanči vāt 18 But the path of the
e Fogo evenwo wo awea părzăţik uzuādā bări just, as a shining light,
of usor, es poden F mukār tsåltā ani tsăd- goeth forwards and in
aegs JOOW Fogt. tā sămpūrņ dīs păriant. creaseth even to perfect
day.
19 Babe,od sobos costo 19 Khoteānče vāt kā- 19 The way of the
Joogs: 2jo goro 36 mois lokānt: khăiñ podtāt wicked is darksome : they
ತಾಂಕಾಂ ಕಳಾನಾಂ, món tankāñ kålanāñ. know not where they fall.
 374

20 ಮೊಜ್ಯಾ ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾ, ಮೊಜಿಂ 20 Mojea burgeā, mo- 20 My son, hearken to

er se o egos, eo Juoma, ev jiñ utrañ äik, ani mo- my words, and incline
ಲೌಣ್ಯಾಕ್ ಕಾನ್ ದಿ . jeā ulouneāk kān di. thy ear to my saying.
21 ತುಜ್ಯಾಂ ದೊಳ್ಯಾಂ ಥಾಉನ್ 21 Tujeañ doļeāñthā- 21 Let them not depart
Yogato ajoi pao zaevo@ gs; un pois votsănāñ zāun- from thy eyes, keep them
ಕಾಳಾ? todo 30 doo dit ; tujeā kaļzā modeñ in the midst of thy heart:
Justeg to'
ಬಾಳ, tiñ sambā !
22 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ ತಿಂ ಮೆ 22 Kitеāk moleār tiñ 22 For they are life to
ಲೈಲ್ಯಾಂಕ್ ಜಣಿಯೆಕ್ ಆನಿ ಸಮೆ | melteleank jiniek ani) those that find them , and
AD JUA ,og ovo, o se sămestañ månšānk vok- health to all flesh .
ಡ್ರಾತಿ , tāk podtāt.
23 ಚಡ್ ಜಾಗ್ರುತಾಯೆನ್ ತು 23 Tsăd zāgrutāyen 23 With all watchful.
to savdo zaowast, 52.3.6 tujeñ kāļiz sambā ), ta- ness keep thy heart , be
ನ್ ಜಣ್ ಉಬ್ಬಾತಾ ದೆಕುನ್, ntleān jiņ ubzātā de- cause life issueth out from
kun . it .

24 ತುಜೆ ಸರ್ಸಿಲಂ ವ್ಯಾಟ್ ತೂಂ 24 Tuje sărsileñ vāit 24 Remove from thee a
ಡ್ ಕಾಡ್: ಪೆಲ್ಯಾಚೊ ಮಾನ್ ಕಾಡ್ಡೆ tong kad: peleatso man frovard mouth, and let
ವೊಂವ್ ತುಜೆ ಪ್ರೊಸ್ ಕರ್, kādče voột tuje poiskår. detracting lips be far
from thee .

25 ತುಜೆ ದೊಳೆ ಸಮ ಪೊಳೆಉ o 25 Tuje dole săma po- 25 Let thy eyes look
ags, Gs 23 COD, JOO JUTROS a leundit, ani tsăltanañ straight on, and let eye
ಪ್ಸ್ ಗಾಲ , mukar dist gal. lids go before thy steps.
26 ತುಜ್ಯಾ೦ ಪಾಯಾಂಕ್ ಸೀಟ್ 26 Tujeāñ pāyānk nīt 26 Make straight the
ಮಾರೇಗ್ ಕರ್, ಆನಿ ಸಕಡ್ ತು | marog kar , ani sakad path for thy feet, and all
ಜೊ ವಾಟೊ ಗಟ್ ಜಾತೆಲ್ಲೋ, tujeo vāto găț zāteleo . thy ways shall be esta
blished.
27 ಉಚ್ಚಾ ಹಾತಾಕಿ ದಾವ್ಯಾ 27 Ujvea hataki dávea 27 Decline not to the
pagat outsas Laz36 para: hātāki tsukon vots na- right hand nor to the left:
3180 Judod o wojewa maevas kā : tujiñ metañ vāițā turn away thy foot from
ಪ್ರೊಸ್ ಕರ್, ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ | thaun pois k & r. Kiteak evil. For the Lord know
ಹಾತಾಕ್ except
evsat osats ಆಸ್ ಲ್ಲೊ ad moļeār ujveāhātākasal- eth the ways that are on
ಟೊ ದೇಉ ಜಾಣಾ , ಆನಿ ದಾವ್ಯಾ | leo vato Deu nana , ani | the right hand : but those
coa gaztez biens nobioJozeds. dāvea hātāk asalleo vā- are perverse which are
Ivo Juerg aabia FOU FEUF | to vāit. To tujeo vāto on the left hand. But He
 375

os en Espa aja maogh Jato sắma kårtolo, ani tukā will make thy courses
ಸಾಯೆನ್ ಚತೊಲೊ . poiņānt soukāsāyen tsă- straight, He will bring
lăitolo . forward thy ways in
peace.

Avasvár V.
ಆ ವಸ್ವರ್ V. Chapter V.
1 ಮೊಜ್ಯಾ ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾ, ಮೊಜಿ ಸಿ 1 Mojea burgeā, moji 1 My son, attend to my
ಕೊಣ್ ಲೈಕ್, ಆನಿ ಮೊಜೆ ಬುದಿಕ್ | sikon aik , ani moje bu- wisdom , and incline thy
ಕಾನ್ ದಿ . dik kān dī . ear to my prudence.
2 ತುಜಿ ಚಿಂತ್ನಾ ರಾಕುಂಕ್ , ಆನಿ 2 ( Tuji) čintna rā 2 That thou mayest
Juaze, o goobado evento kunk, ani tujeañ vontā- keep thoughts, and thy
Jooga&0076. eomesum.Les da niñ aple kāide sambā- lips may preserve instruc
ಕ್ ಕಾನ್ ದೀನಾಕಾ . lunk. Astriečeā mosāk tion . Mind not the deceit
kān di nakā . of a woman.

3 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾಂಕ್ ವ್ಯಾಟ್| 3 Kiteak molear vait| 3 For the lips of a har
e 528 asoods sowa wo man åstrieče vont movā bărilot are like a honeycomb
7o, e 320 ev sao gos og , s suādik, ani tičiñ utrañ dropping, and her throat
7

ಮೊವಾಳ ; telā prås movāl ; is smoother than oil .

4 ಪುಣ್ ತಿಚೊ ನಿಮಾಣ್ಯ 4 Puņ tičeo nimāņeo 4 But her end is bitter
my to :Wo #Atd, 8 Se văstu kazreā bări kodu , as wormwood, and sharp
zs çao oznao Joon wo anidón dhari asalle tăl- as a two-edged sword.
ದೊಮಾ ಜ್ಯೋ vāri bări domsāčeo.
5 ತಿಚೆ ಪ್ಯಾ ಮೊರ್ನಾ ಥಂ ಚ 5 Tiče pāi morpā thă- 5 Her feet go down into
OD 36; 28 3230 Butao at Jus iñ tsăltāt ; ani tičin me- death , and her steps go
ಕೊಂಡಾಂತ್ ರಿಗ್ತಾತ್. țañ yemkóņdānt rigtāt. in as far as hell.
6 ತಿ ಜಿಣಿಯೆಚ್ಯಾ ಮಾರ್ಗಾರ್ 6 Ti jiņiečeā mārgār 6 They walk not by the
vezao ತಿಚ್ಯ
ಚಲನಾಂ ದುಬಾ tsălanāñ; tičeo vāto path of life, her steps are
seks sobis quwa
೧) unac
Jazz e TonJOT" zvokio dubāvāčeo ani sāñgunk wandering, and
ಆಸಲ್ಲೊ . nozo asalleo. countable.
೯ ತರ್ ಆತಾಂ ಮಾಕಾ ಆಕ್ , 7 Tăr atañ makā āik, 7 Now therefore, my
272,F, G D Ames Isomawo burgeā, ani mojea ton- son, hear me, and depart
ಉತ್ರಾಂ ಸೋಡಿನಾಕಾ. dāčiñ utrañ sõdinakā. not from the words of my
mouth.
cb#
8 ತುಜಿ ವಾಟ್ ತಿಚೆ ಥಾಉ 8 Tuji vat tice thaun 8 Remove thy way far
urz
 376

3o umuoa, eo aue, nos pois asundi, ani tičea from her, and come not
ಬಾಗ್ಲಾ cand sewazara. garāčeā bāglā lagiñ nigh the doors of her
ಚ್ಯಾ wana
uza,
votsanakā. house .
9 Judo JJBE DJ1360 ** 9 Tuzo mān dusreānk 9 Give not thy honour
ಆನಿ
es sono ಜೀವ್ ನಿಷ್ಟುಲ್ಯಾಕ್
ತುಜೊ senso pat , atse 5 ani tuzo jīv nišțureāk to strangers, and thy
ROTO . dinakā . years to the cruel .
10 38 2390834 HUDDAH 10 Tuji bolāiki dus- 10 Lest strangers be
JEU FONDO saerozes za nie reāniñ pāụ kårināñ zā- filled with thy strength,
36 egg gua estrany Junta ,souza untea pasvot ani tujiāst and thy labours be in
Roots ಪೊಡ ండ్యs,ా
Jdoಂ wieలుvou
oudಾನಾ dusreānčeā gårāk poda- another man's house ,
ಪಾಸೊತ್ 1), nāñ zāunčea pasvot") ,
11 ತುಜೊ ಮಾನ್ ದುಸ್ರಾ ° | 11 Tuzo mān dusre- 11 And thou mourn at
76Dedos Fees oo, wānk dileār kadek rădši, the last, when thou shalt
JO JOJS erg 3JX tuas jedvañ tujeñ mās ani have spent thy flesh and
ನಾಶ್ ಬ್ಯಾಕ್ ಆನಿ ಸಾಂಗ್ಲಿ : tuji kud nāš zāit ani thy body, and say :
sāngši :
12 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ಆವಂ ಸಿಕೊ 12 Kitеāk āveñ si- 12 Why have I hated
goodden, og ef ,evito do kon kāņtālli, ani bes- instruction, and my heart
23:59 Tuotózao, tauņeñ mojeā kalzān consented not to reproof,
aikunknāñ,
13 eo Jero Aggte : 13 Ani makā sikăite- 13 And have not heard
30 engros GT3076 zao, en leānčen utărāikunk- the voice of them that
evatielogo go afDevogo Jao? nāñ, ani upadesink kān taught me, and have
diunknā ? not inclined my ear to
masters ?
14 coro eodo zás ವ್ಯಾ F 14 Lāgiñ lāgiñ sărvụ 14 I have almost been
Eva og up o; andF2868 vāițānt podlāñ ; igår- in all evil, in the midst
27 28 23 suario endpoora . ječe ani sabheče modeñ of the church and of the
astanāñi?) congregation.

15 Tuje bāintleñ ani 15 Drink water of thy

15 ತುಜೆ ಬ್ಯಾಂತ್ತೆಂ ಆನಿ ತು
wowos saevozo ewors tuje zăričeā vāuñčeñ own cistern, and the
200s. udāk piye . streams of thy own well:
1) Lit. In order that your health may not be spoiled by others, and your property
may not fall to another.
2) In the middle of so many good men I was so ashamed to commit so many sins.
 377

16 ತುಜಿ ಜರ್‌ ಬ್ಯಾರ್‌

16 Tuji zár bāir disa- 16 Let thy fountains be
ದಿಸಾ

was, w Euro enwe 220J6 zāi , ani tujiñ udkañ bi- conveyed abroad, and in
ವಾಂಟ್ , dint vānt . the streets divide thy
waters .
17 ತಿಂ ತು ೦ಚ್ ಭೋಗ್, ಆನಿ 17 Keep them to thy
17 Tiã tunts blog,
Bude ,so Jum 096 JOOP JD083 ani dusreañ månšānk self alone, neither let
ಮಳಾನಾಂ ಜಾಉ ೦ ದಿತ6. tānče vāṇte me!anāñ strangers be partakers
zāundit . with thee .
18 ತುಜೆ ಜರಿಕ್ ಆಶೀರ್ವಾದ 18 Tuje zărik āšīrvād 18 Let thy vein be
ಮೆಳುಂದಿ , ಆನಿ ತುಜ್ಯಾ ತರ್ನಾಟ್ಯಾ | melundi, ani tujeá tár- | blessed, and rejoice with
ಪಿರಾಯೆರ್ ( ತುಕಾ ಮೆಳ್ಳೆ ) ಅಸ್ತಿ natedpirayer (tuka mel- the wife of thy youth :
ಯೆ ಕಡೆ ಸೌಕಾಸ್ಕಾ ಭೋಗ್, le")) åstrye kåde sou
kāsāi bhõg .
19 ತಿ ಮೆಲ್ಟಾ ಬರಿ ಮೊಗಾಳ್ 19 Ti meruā bări 19 Let her be thy dear
ಆನಿ ಮಧ್ವಾಚ್ಯಾ
et Juop u , OD WO & 0328 mogāļ ani meruāčeā est hind, and most agree
zoer os estuoa : 3230 o4 pilā bări prītiči zāun able fawn: let her breasts
TOTOJOS PATS en 323.00 asundi: tičeñ fòļ soukā- inebriate thee at all
ಮೋಗ್ ಕರ್ನ್ ಸದಾಂಚ್ ಸಂತೋ / sayen bhog ani titso times, be thou delighted
ಸ್‌ ಪಾಉ , mög kårn sadānts săn- continually with her love.
tos pāu.
20 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್, ಮೊಹ್ಯಾ ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾ, 20 Kiteak, mojea bur- 20 Why art thou sedu
suz escou afoodFotoativo geā, dusre åstrie vor- ced, my son, by a strange
Joz e o BJJE32325ಚಾ ev tag036 viñ foțuotāi ani dusrea- woman , and art cherished
ಸೌಕಾಸ್ಮಾ ಕಾಣೆ ತ್ಯಾ ? čeā uskeānt soukāsāi in the bosom of another ?
kangetai ?
21 ದೇಉ ಮನ್ಯಾಚೊ ವಾಳೊ 21 Deu mănšačeo vā- 21 The Lord beholdeth
ಪೊಳ್ಳತಾ, ಆನಿ ತಾಚಿಂ ಸಮೆಸ್ ಮೆ | to polaita, ani ta if the ways of man, and
ಟಾಂ ಮೆಳ್ತಾ . såmest metañ meztā. considereth all his steps.
22 ಖೋಟೋ ಮನಿ ಆಪ್ಲಾ
ಆಪ್ಲಾ 22 Khoțo mănis aplea 22 His own iniquities
ಬೊಟೆಪೊಣಾನ್ ಸಾಂಪೊಡ್ತಾ, e khotepoņān sāmpodtā , catch the wicked , and he
on JOID, 0233; waoW
ಸಾ ಬಾ B, DDogs aplea pātkānčeā bānd- is fast bound with the
ಪೊಡ್ತಾ pāsānt poạtā . ropes of his own sins .
23 ತೊ ಮೊರ್ತೊಲೊ , ಬುದ್ 23 To mortolo , bud 23 He shall die , be
ತಾಕಾ ನಾತಲ್ಲಿ ದೆಕುನ್; ಆನಿ | taka natulli dekun ; ani | cause he hath not re

1) Whom you married.

48
 378

ಆಜ್ಞಾ ಸಬಾರ್ ಪಿಸ್ಯಾ ಪೊಣಾನ್ | aplea sabar piseaponan ceived instruction, and in
ನಾಡಿಂತ್ ಪೊಡ್ತಲೊ . nādint podtolo. the multitude of his folly
he shall be deceived .

ಆವಸ್ವರ್ VI, Ava svår VI. Chapter VI.

1 ಮೊಜ್ಯಾ ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾ, ತುಜ್ಯಾ ಇ 1 Mojea burgeā, tujea 1 My son, if thou be
atas wap is evith a3 ader; išķā bådlāk utar diši surety forthy friend, thou
ರ್, ಪರ್ಕ್ಯಾ ಕಡೆ ಹಾತ್ ದಿಲ್ಯಾ; ತು zalear, parkia kade hat hast engaged fast thy
steg tudo dowoso evig roomdo dilāi; tujea tondāčeañ hand to a stranger .
ಪಡ್ಡಾ' utrāniñ sāmpădlāi.
2 ತುಜ್ಯಾ ತೊಂಡಾಚ್ಯಾ ಉತ್ರಾಂ 2 Tujea tondacea u- 2 Thou art ensnared
ನಿಂ ಸಾಂಪಾಡೊ , ಆನಿ ತುಜ್ಯಾ೦ trainii sampadloi , ani | with the words of thy
Fwd,no woodeta arvas tujeañ săbdāniñ bān- mouth, and caught with
ಸಬ್ಬಾನಿಂ >

ವೊರ್ತ ಉತಲೆ . dụllo zāun vortautaloi. thy own words.

3 ತರ್, ಮೊಜ್ಯಾ ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾ, ಆ 3 Tăr, mojea burgeā, 3 Do therefore, my son ,
evo taong to Tos, es su āui sangtāñ teñ kår, what I say, and deliver
ಕಾಚ್ ಚುಕೊನ್ ಘ: ತುಜ್ಯಾ ಪೆಲ್ಯಾ ani tukats tsukon ghe: thyself: because thou art
war odsoogo docido dos tujeā peleāčeā bātānt fallen into the hand of
ನ್. woervo servomos, guazas podyloi dekun. Dāuñ, thy neighbour. Run
ಇಷ್ಟಾಕ್ ಉಟ್ಟಿ : auñsăr, tujea išķāk uțăi: about, make haste, stir
up thy friend :
4 ದೊಳೆ ದಾಂಪಿನಾಕಾ , ನೀದ್ 4 Dol
Doļeeda akāa ,nīd
pinnak
dāmmpi , nid 4 Give not sleep to thy
ಪೊಡಾನಾಂ ಜಾ
ಜಾ ಉ ೦ದಿ. podanāñ zāundi. eyes, neither let thy eye
lids slumber.
5 ಚಿತಾಳಾ ಬರಿ ಪೋಟ್, ಆನಿ 5 Čitālā bări põl, ani 5 Deliver thyself as a
TUTO
ಸು WO Asam dowg . sukņeā bări sikāregā- doe from the hand, and
ತಾಂ ಚುಕೊನ್ ಫೆ. rāčea hātāntlo tsukon as a bird from the hand
ghe. of the fowler.
6 ಮುಯ ಕಡೆ ವೊಚ್, ಆಲ್ಲಿ ಮ 6 Muye kadevots, alsi | 6 Go to the ant, 0
Je, GA
ನ್ಯಾ, 378 Waldase
ಆನಿ ತಿಚ್ಯ mănšā, ani tačeo vāto sluggard, and consider
ಬುದ ಸಿಕ್ : pole ani bud sik : her ways, and learn
wisdom :

7 ತಿ, ಮೊಸ್ತಕ್ ಆನಿ ಉಪದೇಸಿ 7 Ti , mostak ani upă- l 7 Which, although she
ಆನಿ ರಾ ನಾಸ್ತನಾಂ, dēsi ani rāi nastanan , hath no guide , nor master,
nor captain,
 379

8 ಗಿಮಾಚ್ಯಾ ವೆಳಾರ್ ಆಪ್ಲಾಕ್ 8 Gimatea velar ap- 8 Provideth her meat

ವೆಳಾ ಆಪ್ಲಾಕ್
ಖಾಣ್ ತಯಾರ್ ಕರ್ತಾ , ಆನಿ ಬೆ nak khan tayar k&rta, for herself in the sum
ಬ್ಯಾಚ್ಯಾ Jooos e soch odts ani beļeāčeā veļār ahār mer, and gathereth her
ಕರ್ತಾ . rās kårtā . food in the harvest.
9 ಕದೊಳ್ಳೆ ಪರ್ಯ ೦ ತ್ , ಆ 9 Kedo? păriant, al- 9 How long wilt thou
ಲ್ಯಾ , ನಿದ್ರಾ ? ಕ್ಯಂ ನಿದೆಂತ್ತೂ ಉ sia, nidtai? Kaif niden- sleep 0 sluggard ? when
ಟ್ಯ? tlo utši ? wilt thou rise out of thy
sleep ?
10 ಇಲ್ಲೆ ೦ ನಿನ್ನೊಲೊ, ಇಲ್ಲಿ 10 Illeñ nidtoloi , illi 10 Thou wilt sleep a
ನೀದ್ ಪೊಡ್ತಿಲಿ, ಇಲ್ಲೆಂ ಹಾತ್ ಜೊ | nid podteli , illei hát | little, thou wilt slumber
die dla ಸೌಕಾಸ್ಯಾ ಕಾಣೆಉಂಕ್
ka,torevotó: zodtoloi soukāsăi kā- a little, thou wilt fold thy
neunk : hands a little to sleep :
11 ಆನಿ ದುರ್ಬಳ್ಳಾ , ಪ್ರೊಣಾ | 11 Ani durbà] kai, poi- | 11 And want shallcome
oes WO BI GFdogs # 32 020 ņāriā bări ani akānt upon thee as a traveller,
man a
ežems Jurban wo jaevto . hatiārañ asalleā månšā and poverty as
s 2006F nderuisers, bări pāuteli . Pun tsurk armed. But if thou be
towo Bud 2380 00.00, er zāun asleār, zări bări diligent, thy harvestshall
ತುಜೆ dono 30.
ದುರ್ಬಳ Just
DowFoto tujeñ beļeñ yeteleñ,ani come as a fountain , and
durbălkāi tuje lāgsili want shall flee far from
veteli . thee .

12 ದೇವಾಕ್ ಸೊಡ್ವಲೊ, ಉ 12 Dēvāk sodtolo, up- 12 A man that is an

ಪ್ರಾರಾಕ್ ಪೊಡನಾತುಲ್ಲೊ ಮನಿಸ್, karak podanatullo má- apostate , an unprobtable
ಕಪಟಾನ್ ಚಲ್ತಾ. nis, kăpătān tsåltā . man walketh with a per
verse mouth .

13 ದೊಳೆ ಮೊಡ್ ಹಿಶಾರೆ ದಿ 13 Dole modn hišāre 13 He winketh with

sd, we zogja, voda,os er ditā, pāy bodăitā , botān the eyes, presseth with
ಲತಾ. ulăitā . the foot, speaketh with
the finger.
14 ವ್ಯಾಟ್ ಮೊನಾನ್ ವ್ಯಾಟ್| 14 Vait monan vait| 14 With a wicked heart
ಚಿಂತ್ತಾ ಆನಿ ಸದಾಂಚ್ ನ್ಯಾಯಿಕ & intta ani sadants nyai he deviseth evil ,, and at
ರೈತಾ. kărăitā. all times he soweth dis
cord .

15 ತೂ ಎಕಚ್ ಫಾರಾ ನಾಶ್ 15 To yekåts farā nāš 15 To such a one his

ಜಾತಲೊ, w7256 sada islomio zātolo, yekăts farā bhos- destruction shall present
zadacho,
48 *
 380

Buscles gol ISUFIOS motolo ani tāče mukār ly come , and he shall
ಆನಿ

ತಾಕಾ ವೊಕಾತ್ ಆಸ್ಟೆಂನಾಂ, takā vokāt asčeñnāñ. suddenly be destroyed,,

and shall no longer have
any remedy.
16 sper Faobaso, Burg DJ 16 Dēu kanţāltā teo 16 Six things there are
as od nog wat vetja. văstu să ani sātvi vås- which the Lord hateth,
tụ ă18iketa. and the seventh His soul
detesteth :

17 ಗರ್ವಿಸ್ಟ್ ದೊಳೆ, ಪೊಟಿ ಮಾ 17 Garvišť dole , foți 17 Haughty eyes, a

20F 880208, nugg,evo Jogo mārči jīb, guniāuñ nā- lying tongue, hands that
ರಗತ್ ವಾವೊತೊಲೊ ಹಾತ್‌ , tưlleñ ragat vāuoitolo shed innocent blood,
hāt ,
18 ವ್ಯಾಟ್ ಚಿಂತ್ನಾ ಬಾಂದ್ದೆ 18 Vāit čiñtna band- 18 A heart thatdeviseth
fogs, wasborn tubojo wes es čeñ mòn , vāițāk sompeñ wicked plots, feet that
ಪ್ಯಾ , tsåltele pāy , are swift to run into mis
chief,
19 083 ev satsero 19 Foți utsārtolo, fot- 19 A deceitful witness
& Dua nadnaos, es wadoo kiro sākšigār, ani bā- that uttereth lies, and
ಬಿತರ್ ಬೆಬನಾಉ ಕರ್ತೊಲೊ . vāñ bităr bebånāu kår- him that soweth discord
tolo . among brethren .
20 suoraz warto: F, wadar 20 Mojea burgeā , bā- 20 My son, keep the
evadento Joway Bostads, pāče upădēs sāmbāln commandments of thy
Go Eugen aus oli kiasis 36F dovor , ani tujeā māye- father , and forsake not
ಸೊಡಿನಾಕಾ. či somort sõdinakā. the law of thy mother.
21 - ಮೋನಾ ಬಿತರ್ ದಾಂಪ್ , 21 Te monā bitar 21 Bind them in thy
eso neozog naos. dāmp, ani găleānt gāl . heart continually, and
put them about thy neck.
22 ತುಂ ಚಲಾನಾಂ ತೆ ತುಜೆ 22 Tuñ tsăltanañ te 22 When thou walkest ,
Adonoso edevonas, tuo so tuje sāngatā tsålundit, let them go with thee :
poo Å GJTO ODTJongs, es tuñ nidtanañ, te tukā when thou sleepest, let
avatko odgao
ಜಾತನಾಂ Jaou
ತಾಂಚೆ brākundit, ani zāgo zā- them keep thee, and
eves tanañ tānče kăde ulăi. when thou awakest talk
with them .
23 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ಮೊಳಾರ್ ಫ್ರೆ 23 Kitеāk moleār for- 23 Because the com
JJ For alper dago, eos eva mān yēk divo, ani upă- mandment is a lamp, and
 -.381

Dezs alers erwarcos, e dēs yēk uzuād, ani ji- the law a light, and re
ali sod 2372,ervoud Atam nieči vāt bestaunči si- proofs of instruction are
kon : the way of life :
24 ತುಕಾವ್ಯಾಟ್ ಅಸ್ತಿಯೆಂತ್ತೊ , 24 Tuka vait & strien- 24 That they may keep
J703Fogy and evozi w203 od tlo, părkià fuslāunče thee from the evil woman ,
ಪಾಸುನ್ ,
ಕ್ಯಾಸಿ jibentlo rakčeā pāsun. and from the flattering
tongue of the stranger.
25 ತುಜೆಂ ಮೊನ್ ತಿಚಿ ಸೊಬಿ25 Tujeñ mòn tiči so- 25 Let not thy heart
30 0028 ega ToJao zaevoa, bitāieči āšā kårināñ zā- covet her beauty, be not
en sw , 6320002 do 2.36 undi, ani tičeā hišārān- caught with her winks :
ಪೊಡಾನಾಕಾ : če nādint podanakā :
26 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ ವ್ಯಾಟ್ 26 Kiteak molear vait
Kitеāk moleār vāit 26 For the price of a
e 30 zo goes tada, os alle åstriečeñ mol kášťān harlot is scarce one loaf :
* ಉಂಡೆ : ಪುಣ್ ಅಸ್ತ್ರಿ ಮನ್ಯಾಚೊ yek undo : pun &stri but the woman catcheth
SJODD75 esto DDODDnajsa. månšātso molādik åtmo the precious soul of a
man .
sāmpadăitā.
27 ಉಜೊ ಆಜ್ಞಾ ಹರ್ದ್ಯಾ೦ 27 Uzo aplea harde- 27 Can a man hide fire
36, PhimS SI JO JO AD Jānt, neson lāsanāsta- in his bosom, and his gar ೨

ಮನ್ಯಾನ್ ಲಿಪಯತ್ತೀ? nañ , månšān lipåyetgī? ments not burn ?

28 ಯಾ ಕೆಂಡಾಂಚೆರ್ ಪ್ಲಾ ಲಾ 28 Yā kendānčer pāi 28 Or can he walk up
ಸಾನಾಸ್ತಾನಾಂ ಚಲೆಯೆತ್ ? lāsanāstanañ tsăliyet- on hot coals, and his feet
gi ? not be burnt ?
29 ತಸೆಂಚ್ ಆಜ್ಞಾ ಪೆಲ್ಯಾಚ್ಯಾ | 29 Tåsents apleā pe- 29 So he that goeth un
ಅಸ್ತಿಯ ಕಡೆ ಚಲ್ಲೊ ಲೊ , ತಿಕಾ ಆ leatea &strie kade ts&l- to his neighbour's wife,
tolo, tikā apoďleleā ve- shall not be clean when
ಪೊಡ್ಲೆಲ್ಯಾ ವೆಳಾರ್ ನಿತಳ್ ನ್ಯಂ,
ļār nităļ năiñ. he shall touch her.
30 ಚೊರ್ಚೆ೦ ಭೌ ವ್ಯಾಟ್ ಪಾ 30 Tsorčen bhou vāit 30 The fault is not so
ತಕ್ ನೃಂ'); ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ patak naif ') ; kiteak great when a man hath
ಭುಕೆಲ್ಲೊ ಜೀವ್ ದಾದೊಸ್ಕರುಂಕ್ | molear: bhukello jiv da- stolen ; for he stealeth to
ಹೊರ್ತಾ, dos kărunk tsortā. fill his hungry soul :
31 ಆನಿ ತೊ ಸಾ ೦ ಪ್ಪಾ ಈ ಜಾ
ಸಾಂಪ್ಲಾ ಜ ಾ | 331 Ani to sampdat - 31 Andif he be taken,
Dogos, dogs agaeves izzas ao zaleār, sāt pāuți tzád he shall restore sevenfold ,
JAS ದಿತೊಲೊ : ಆನಿ
ಪಸ್ azadsa): ಆಪ್ಲಾ
operates vāpas ditolo”):ani apleā and shall give up all the
ರಾಚಿ ಸಗಿ ಆಸ್ ದಿತೊಲೊ. gårāči sågļi āst ditolo. substance of his house.
1) « Bhou vāit pātak năiñ ” muộčeñ : produāra mukār.— “ The fault is not so great” viz.
compared with adultery. 2) Cf. Exodus, Ch. 22 .
 382

32 ಪುಣೆ ಪೊದುವಾರಿ ಆಪ್ಪಾ 32 Pun produvari ap- | 32 But he that is an

tomowag datoto mans esetleā monādeā piseapo- adulterer, for the folly of
ಅತ್ತೂ ಹೋಗ್ದಾತಾ: ņān aplo åtmo hogļāită: his heart, shall destroy
his own soul :

33 ತೊ ಆಪ್ಲಾಕ್ ಅಕ್ಯಾನ್ ಆನಿ 33 To apņāk akmān 33 He gathered to him

ಲಜ್ ರಾಸ್ ಕರ್ತಾ, ಆನಿ ತಾಚೊ | ani làz ras karta, ani self shame anddishonour,
ಬ್ಯಾಬ್ರು ಉರ್ತೊಲೊ . tātso beabru urtolo . and his reproach shall
not be blotted out .
34 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ 34 Kiteak molear dad- 34 Because the jealousy
wengits
ಬ್ಲ್ಯಾಶ Listinos ens leātso mosor ani krõdh and rage of the husband
qƏOffTomoditas
ಪೊಣಾ aga va qo fārikpoņāčeā disā māf will not spare in the day
ಕರ್ಚೊ ನಾಂ . kărtsonāñ. of revenge.
35 ಆನಿ ಕೊಣೆಂಇ ಮಾಗ್ವಾರ್ 35 Ani koneii mag- 35 Nor will he yield to
ಆಕುಂಚೊನಾ ೦, ಆನಿ ಫಾರಿಕ್ಪೊಣಾ| leari aikuntsonal , ani any man's prayers , nor
Fwans to OJTondevo fārikpoņāk såbār kaņ- will he accept for satis
ಚೆನಾಂ, keoi kāņeuntsonāñ. faction ever so many gifts.

ಸಾಂ ಲುಕಾಚೆ ಪುಸ್ತಕ್ SAN LUKÀCEN ST. LUKE

PUSTAK

ಆ ವಸ್ವರ್ I. Avas vår I. Chapter I.

1 ಸಬಾರ್ ಮನ್ಯಾನಿಂ ಆಮ್ಮೆ ಬಿತ 1 Såbār månšāniñam- 1 Forasmuch as many
0 ಗಡಿOppo JAJ.OPŠ TJD do če bitår gadựlleañ vås- have taken in hand to
ಗುಂಕ್ ಪ್ರಯತನ್ ಕರ್ತಚ್ ; tunči katā sāngunk set forth in order a narra
prăgătăn kărtăts ; tion of the things that
have been accomplished
among us ;
೭ ಜಸೆಂ ಆಮ್ಯಾಂ ಸಿಕ್ಕಲಾಂ ಸಾ 2 Zăseñ amkāñ sikăi- 2 According as they
e owaeras Tonwou lāñ sākš zāun poļeleāñ have delivered them unto
ನಿಯಾಲ್ಯಾನಿಂ: šāstrā -muniāryāniñ : us, who from the begin
ning were eye-witnesses
and ministers of the word:
3 ಸಕ ವಸ್ತು ಸುರುವೆರ್ ಥಾ 3 Såkåd våstu suru- 3 It seemed good to me
ಉನ್ ಚತ್ರಾಯೆನ್ ಆನಿ ಕಮಾನ್ | ver thaun ts&trayen ani also, having diligently
BUTO nonwort, po 2000 kråmān tukā sängunk, attained to all things
 383

Bongbea, Juare a treo a bhou boreā Theophilā, from the beginning, to

ಸ್ಥಂ , makāi boreñ disleñ, write to thee in order,
most excellent Theophilus
4 ತುಂ ಸಿಕ್ ಲ್ಲೆಂ ಸತ್ ಖರೆಂ 4 Tuũ sikulleũ sắt 4 That thou mayest
ಮೊಣ್ ಸೊಮಾ ಸೆಂ . khåreñ mon somzaseñ. know the verity of those
words in which thou hast
been instructed.
5 ಹೆರೊದ್ ಮೋಳ್ಳಾ ಜುದೆಯಾ 5 Herod molleā Jude- 5 There wasin the days
23az daoddwas a da so vse yāčeā rāyāčeā disāniñ of Herod, the king of
AO BS0F36 estudio, Barzo åmko sāserdot asullo , Judea, a certain priest
Joero e sabons, ewe wag začeñ nāuñ Zakāriās, named Zachary, of the
Fudba, ša: Jari es eso la Ja Abiāčea kutmātso : tači course of Abia : and his
232,o Duddog, 3280 Joero åstri Aaronāčeāñ du- wife was of the daughters
NO302336. vāntli, ani tičeñ nāuñ of Aaron, and her name
Elizabet . Elizabeth .
6 Sonora Sead JUFSO6 6 Dogāni Dēvā mu- 6 And they were both
De330gr goers 30 Fersa kār nītivånt zāun vor- just before God, walking
Oo, es degali Foto evo Sets tautāliñ, ani Dēvāče să- in all the commandments
es desaw theSO320Faza kăd upădēs ani Dēvāči and justifications of the
ಸ್ವಾನಾಂ ಸಾಂಬಾಳ್ತಾಲಿಂ. somort tsukanāstanañ Lord without blame.
sambāltāliñ.
7 ಪುಣ್ ತಾಂಕಾಂ ಬುರ್ಗಿ ೦ ನಾ 7 Puņ tankāñ burgiñ 7 And they had no son,
jo, wošaiso Joss es nātựlliñ, Elizābet vānz for that Elizabeth was
Landora Juagado Daeris eo ani dogañi mātāriñ zā- barren , and they both
ಸೆಲ್ಲಿಂ ದೆಕುನ್, un asalliñ dekun . were well advanced in
years.
8 es so you toj 8 Ani to šāsträče kāi- 8 And it came to pass,
Jopa na oor sydos Jogo de takā nemsileā veļār when he executed the
ನಾ ೦ , pāļtanañ, priestly function in the
order of his course before
God ,
9 ಸಾರ್ಸೆತಿಚೆ ದಸ್ತುರಿ ಪ 9 Sāserdotiče dăsturi 9 According to the

JJOS , JFas wajos Jasa părmāņe, sărtin bāir custom of the priestly
Beasawa,no 3036 Ota muonea sărn dēvāčeā gărānt office, it was his lot to
evost; riglo dhumpounk ; offer incense, going into
the temple of the Lord ;
 384

10 ಆನಿ ಸೆಗೊ ಜೊಮೊ ಧುಂ 10 Ani sågļo zomo 10 And all the multi
38038 39306 Jaro FnF dhumpounčea veļārmā- tude of the people was
ಬ್ಯಾರ್ ಆಸುಲ್ಲೊ . gņeñ kårn bāir asullo. praying without at the
hour of incense ,

11 ಆನಿ
en degado bobo 11 Ani Dēvātso boļvo 11 And there appeared
quodda God Our ಉಜಾ
ಆಲ್ತಾರಿಚ್ಯಾ erzas
ಸ್ವಾ dhumpāčea altāričeā u- to him an Angel of the
ದಿಕ್ಕಾನ್ ತಾಕಾ ದಿಷ್ಟಿ ಪೊಡೋ. zveā dikkān takā dišți Lord, standing on the
podlo. right side of the altar of
incense .
12 ಜಾಕಾರಿ ಆಸ್ ಪೊಳೆಉನ್ ಭಿ 12 Zakāriās poļeun 12 And Zachary seeing
ಯೆಲೊ ಆನಿ ಕಾಂಪ್ಲೆ
0 . bhiyelo ani kāmplo. him was troubled, and
fear fell upon him .
13 ಆನಿ ಬೊಡ್ವಾನ್ ತಾಕಾ 13 Ani bodveān takā 13 But the Angel said
ಸಾಂಗ್ಲೆಂ: ಭಿಯೆನಾಕಾ, ಜಾಕಾರಿ | sangles : Bhiyenakā, to him : Fear not Zachary,
ಆಸಾ, ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ ( ದೇ Zakariasa, kiteak mole- for thy prayer is heard ;
wat, goso JUDIO e Faed :ār (Dēvān) tujeñ māg- and thy wife Elizabeth
GOD JIW es womari36 Juto ņeñ aikalāñ : ani tuji shall bearthee a son, and
ಎಕಾ ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾಕ್ ಪರ್ಸುತ್ ಜಾತೆ astri Elizabet tukā thou shalt call his name
ಲಿ, ಆನಿ ತಾಕಾ ಜುವಾಂ ಮೊಣ್| yeka burgeak parsut | John :
ನಾವುಂ ದೊವೊರ್ತೊಲೊ : zāteli, ani takā Juāuñ
món nāuñ dovortoloi :
14 ಆನಿ ತೊ ತುಕಾ ಸಂತೊಸ್ 14 Ani to tuka San- : 14 And thou shalt have

ಆನಿ ಉಲಾಸ್ ದಿತೊಲೊ , ಆನಿ ಸಬಾ | tos ani ulas ditolo, ani ( joy and gladness, and
Osರ್ ಲೋ ತಾಚ್ಯಾ todo Lo săbār lök tačeā zălmāk many shall rejoice in his
ಕ್ saber
Sapato
ತೊಸ್ ಪಾಉತೂಲೋ . santos pāutolo. nativity .
15 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ ತೊ 15 Kitеāk moļeār to 15 For he shall be
Soezas deasa utaos, es tu vod Dēvā mukār, ani great before the Lord :
ರೊ ಆನಿ ಅಮಲಾಚಿ ವಸ್ತ್ರ ಪಿಯೆ | soro ani amaladi vastu and shall drink no wine
evozio sao, eo dogo nogo piyeuntsonāñ , ani Spi- nor strong drink, and he
Ar visar vais oua, Judov28 ritā Santān born zātolo, shall be filled with the
ಕುಸಿಂತ್ ಆಸ್ತಾನಾpoಂ tomandos māyeće kusint astanāñ Holy Ghost even from bis
ಸತ್. moņāsăr săit . mother's womb .
16 ಆನಿ ಸಬಾರ್ ಇಸ್ರಾಯೆಲಾ 16 Ani sabar Izraye- 16 Andhe shall convert
ezago ayJ3,076 Jaower fead lāčeañ putrānk tančeā many of the children of
ಥೈಂ ಪೊರ್ತಿತಿ , Dēvā thăiñ portitolo . Israel to the Lord their
God.
 385

17 ಆನಿ ತೊ ಎಲಿಯಾ ಬರಿ 17 Ani to Elia bări 17 And he shall go

JOU JUTOOS ISABO;
co / 1
wa tače mukār vetolo ; bā- before him in the spirit
శాళం y ago 730 pānčiñ kāļzañ putrāñ and power of Elias ; that
వాంజం corpo
Jaordo
eto e ag song 075 ppi sao thăiñ ani anbāvāậtiānk he may turn the hearts
3002 war agoFervort; nītivontānče budik por- of the fathers unto the
iswaaro Domont doo tounk,Somiāk såmpūrņ children, and the incre
ತಯಾರ್ ಕರುಂಕ , zomo tăyār kårunk. dulous to the wisdom of
the just, to prepare unto
the Lord a perfect people .
18 ಆನಿ ಜಾಕಾರಿಆಸಾನ್ ಬೊ 18 Ani Zakāriāsān Bo- 18 And Zachary said to
20:37 10% :0830 Thooto dveā kåde moļen : yen the Angel: Whereby shall
soms naevozbo? +90 95 atlo kåseñ āveñ zāņā zāun- I know this ? for I am an
you os esevo Jagada e polo čeñ ? kiteāk moļeār, old man, and my wife is
ಜೆ ಅಸ್ತ್2,08396
ರಿ Zwaos long eno āuñ mātāro ani moje advanced in years.
åstriek såbār pirāi asā.
19 ಆನಿ ಬೊಡ್ವಾನ್ ಜಾಬ್ ದಿ 19 Ani Bodveān zāb 19 And the Angel an
er as doorlo:: eero paso wow diun sängleñ : āuñ Dēvā swering, said to him : I
tao devoziva nang DJEC6;eo mukār rāuntso Gābriel; am Gabriel who stand
(Ispao JS) Jugo yao o guate ani (Dēvān) makā dhād- before God; and am sent
na evers en oë6 ಆನಿ ooo lāň tuje găde ulounk to speak to thee, and to
ತುಕಾ ಪರ್ಗಟ್ ಕರುಂಕ್ ani yen tukā părgăț bring thee these good
kărunk. tidings.
20 ಆನಿ ಪೊಳೆ: ಮೊನೊ ಆಸೊ S- 2020
20 Ani poļe : mono as- And behold thou
sez, es evenevopsJoFotoloi, ani ulounk tānk shalt be dumb, and shalt
2 Jao, ofeng Jing Dagaj* 360 asčināñ, yeo văstu za- not be able to speak until
25

mosos; e EUTO Joonieestāt moņāsăr ; āveñ tu- the day wherein these
sty, so nowo otso kā sangụlleo văstu , jeo things shall come to pass ;
pooso gaz Soads, gooduo gadun yeteleo fāvoteā because thou hast not
ಕನ್ಯಾ ದೆಕುನ್, veļār, sătmandunknāi believed my words, which
dekun. shall be fulfilled in their
time .
21 ಅನಿ ಜೊಮೊ ಜಾಕಾರಿಆಸಾಕ್ 21 Ani zomo Zakāriā- 21 And the people were
Odtuds es muere , . Was sāk rākun asullo, ani waiting for Zachary, and
Zonds svo a7 % Fogs 38 ajāp zātālo to igărjent they wondered that he
en JF Borgh. todou kart món . tarried so long in the
temple.
49
 -
386

22 ಆಸಿ ಬ್ಯಾರ್ ಸರ್ನ್ ತಾಚೆ 22 Ani bāir sårn tāče 22 And when he came

not evernervozs spots Jazon gåde ulounk tānk nā- out he could not speak to
ef B FIFO ( DJJO:F5)FeOJO 20 təlli ani takā (zomeāk) them,and they understood
8o * JazB8F376 97 Fogo kălit zāleñki sāserdotik that he had seen a vision
WIS Den somseigărjent yēk dišť podul- in the temple. And he
to esFOTÓ RUIDF90 evezli món . Ani to lokāk made signs to them , and
goes dos seus operesus . gurtāniñ ulăitālo ani remained dumb.
mono rāulo .
23 e uten
es so 30 23 Ani apleā šāstrā 23 And it came to pass ,
JA22
doaus waren erwe,aos Rod čeñ kām zāleā uprānt after the days of his office
Hee . gårā gelo. were accomplished, he
departedto his own house.
24 ತ ದೀಸ್ ಜಾಲ್ಯಾ ಉಪ್ರಾಂ. 24 Te dis zalea up- 24 And after those days
go wosaiist, saideh,AWF rānt Elizābet, tači å- Elisabeth, his wife, con
to do es
ಆನಿ Jacks by ostri, gărbest zāli, ani ceived, and hid herself
ಪಾಂಚ್ ಮೊನೆ
BD S Jaontuit: pānts moine liptāli san- five months, saying :
gun :
25 Spavaco Sou zo oojo 25 Dēvān moje thăin 25 Thus hath the Lord
ಕೆಲಾಂ, ಹ್ಯಾ ದಿಸಾನಿಂ ತಾಣೆಂ yei kelab , jeani disanih dealt with me in the days
JUOTO 530 Juro 29306 taņeñ makā poļeili mă- wherein He hath had re
Houte soeta esa, novoduos6. nša bităr moje voilo gard to take away my
åkmān kādunk. reproach among men.
26 ಆನಿ ಸವ್ಯಾ ಮೈನ್ಯಾ ದೇ 26 Ani såveā moineā 26 And in the sixth
Jo as many other type 130 Dévān Gabriel mollea month, the Angel Gabriel
42,5 gada 1009,230, Jo Bodveāk dhādlo Gali- was sent from God into a
మాళ్ళాం BODOJó, Wade leāčeā Nazaret mollea city of Galilee, called
ದಾಚ್ಯಾ ಗರಾಣಾಚ್ಯಾ , šerānt, Dāvīdāčea gå- Nazareth ,
rāņeādea,
27 ಜೊಜೆ ಮೊಳ್ಳಾ ದಾದ್ಲಾ 27 Zoze mollea dād- 27 To a virgin espoused
** Edmor za borgo ea leā kåde kāzār zālle an- to a man whose name was
no; e Bote,0230 Jaevo Juo. kuāri lāgiñ ; ani anku- Joseph, of the house of
āričeñ nāuñ Mări . David ; and the virgin's
name was Mary.
28 29 231002 SAS 32 * 28 Ani Bodveāntiče kå- 28 And the Angel being
Solos do Joro: JoJsode, 70 de votsun sangleñ : Na- come in , said unto her :
SFAS SOFO , LUOJJ sicer mān , kurpen bhorlele, Hail, full of grace, the
 387

Jo jo e zo; eo , bao 2306 Somi Dēu tuje thăiñ Lord is with thee : bless
ತುಂ ಸದೆಉ ೦ . asā ; åstreāñ bităr tuñ ed art thou among
sădeuñ . women .

29 - ಆಕುನ್, ತ್ಯಾ ಸಾಂಗ್ಲಾಇ. 29 Ti aikun , tea Sang- 29 Who having heard,

ಪಾಸುನ್ ಭಿಯೆಲಿ; ಆನಿ ಚೆಂತಾಲಿ nea pasun bhiyeli ; ani ) was troubled at his Say
ಕಸಲೊ ನಮಸ್ಕಾರ್ ಮೊಣೆ . čintāli kasalo namas- ing, and thought within
kar mon . herself what manner of
salutation this should be .
30 ಆನಿ ಬೊಡ್ವಾನ್ ತಿಕಾ ಸಾಂ 30 Ani Bodveān tikā 30 And the Angel said
ಗ್ಲೆಂ : ಭಿಯೆನಾಕಾ, ಮರಿಯೆ , ತುಕಾ | sanglef : Bhiyenakā, to her : Fear not, Mary,
sipagd wuFIOS FUTOF 0838 Măriye, tukā Dēvā mu- for thou hast found grace
ದೆಕುನ್ , kār kurpā melleā de- with God.
kun .
31 ಪೊಳೆ: ಗರ್ಭಸ್ ಜಾತೆಲೀ , 31 Pole : gårbest zā- 31 Behold thou shalt
en woo wrogres RUF 35 telī, ani yekā burgeāk conceive in thy womb, and
zijo, od gotovo sons porsut zātelī, ani takā shalt bring forth a son;
ನಾಉಂ ದೊವೊರ್ತಲೀ , Jezu món nāuñ dovor- and thou shalt call his
telī. name Jesus.
32 ಓ ವೋಡ್ ಜಾಉನ್ ವೊ 32 Uo vod zāun vor- 32 He shall be great ,
ರ್ತಾ ಉತೊಲೊ , ಆನಿ ತಾಕಾ ಭೌ| tautolo , ani taka bhou ) and shall be called the
adopco segoriva my gfsoms so vod Dēvātso put món Son of the most High ,
e , eso deer gata a duelo montele , ani Dêu takā and the Lord God shall
Jau Judo way we wa280 ditolo tačeā mālgădea give unto him the throne
2o Jogo e Buo wadhawawe. Dāvīdāčeñ siasan ani of David his father : and
Room ,ogó FWD obdeh dating to Jakobāčeā gårāņeānt he shall reign in the
ವ್ಯಾ ಕರ್ತೊಲೊ . sådāñkālrāzvođkāikår- house of Jacob for ever,
tolo .
33 ಆನಿ ತಾಜೆ ರಾಜ್ಯೋಟ್ನಾಯ 33 Ani tače rāzvotkā- 33 And of his kingdom
ಕ್ ಸೆವೊಟ್ ಆಸೊ ನಾಂ .0 yek sevoţ assonāñ . there shall be no end.
34 ತೊವೊಳ ಮರಿಯನ್ ಬೊ 34 Toyo] Márien Bod- 34 And Mary said to
ಡ್ಯಾಕ್ ಸಾಂಗ್ಲೆಂ: ಯೆಂ ಕಸೆಂ ಜಾ yeak Sanglei : Yei kü- the Angel : How shall
2035? tiegto svesa eo señ zāviet ? Kitеāk mo- this be done ? because I
ಉಂ ದಾದ್ಲಾಕ್ ವೊಳ್ಳಾನಾಂ, leār āuñ dādleāk vol- know not man .
kanāñ .
35 ಆನಿ ಬೊಡ್ವಾನ್ ಜಾಬ್ ದಿ 35 Ani Bodveān zāb 35 And the Angel
evas zoolo: goi naoš su diun sangleñ : Spiritų answering, said to her :
0:

49 *
 388

dos periodoesto es pot aso Sāntụ tujer deuntolo The Holy Ghost shall
tout (Hewart) peo futa ndo ani bhou vodāči (Dēvā- come upon thee, and the
ಬಾಳೆಲಿ, ಆನಿ ತ್ಯಾ ಪಾಸುನ್ ತುಜೆ i) podvi tuka Sambal- power of the Most High
20 306 726F Jowaertsesoteli, ani teā pasun tuje shall overshadow thee.
ಗೆವೊಂತ್, ತಾಕಾ ದೇವಾಚೊ ಪುತ್ | bitar garb sambautolo | And therefore also the
ಮೊಣ್ ಮೊಲೆ. bhāgevont, takā Dēvā- Holy which shall be born
tso put món moạtele. of thee shall be called the
Son of God .
36 ಆನಿ ಪೊಳೆ: ಎಲಿಜಾಬೆತ, 36 Ani poļe :: Elizā.. 36 And behold thy
ತುಜಿ ಮಾಉಸಿ ಬೌಸ್, ಆಸ್ಥೆ| bet, tuji mausi boin , cousin Elizabeth, she also
Judga8 doo odos nos po aple mātāre pirāyer hath conceived a son in
ಬಾಉಲ್ಯಾ, ಸ ಮೊನ್ಯಾಂ ಥಾಉನ್; garb sambauled så moi- her old age : and this is
nean thaun ; the sixth month with her,
that is called barren ;
37 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ ದೇವಾಕ್ 37 Kitеāk
Kiteak moļeār Dě. 37 Because no word
molear D6.
ಕ್ಯಾಂಚ್ ಉತರ ಅಉಗಡ್ ನ್ಯಂ, vāk kāiñts utar augăd shall be impossible with
naih . God.
38 ಆನಿ ಮರಿಯನ್ ಸಾಂಗ್ಲೆಂ: 38 Ani Mariyen Sang- 38 And Mary said :
ಪೊಳೆ, ಆಉಂ ದೇವಾಚಿ ಚಾಕರ್ನ್; leh : pole, ಶut Devadi Behold the handmaid of
wird zo gube, evzgo atsākårn ; moje thăiñ tu- the Lord, be it done to
ರ್ವಾಣ ಜಾಉಂ. ego 323 00 jeañ utrañ părmāņe zā- me according to thy word.
ಗೈ ಲೊ ಬೊಡೋ ಗೆಲೊ . uñ. Ani tiče lāgsilo And the Angel departed
Bodvo gelo. from her.
39 ಆನಿ ಮರಿ ಉಟುನ್ ತ್ಯಾಂ 39 Ani Mari utan | 39 And Mary rising up
anado JJF JDOUGnadogs teañ disāniñ părvătāñ- in those days, went into
eevron as to watatawa čeā gāvānt ausărān ge- the hill country with haste
ಶಿರಾಂತ್ , li , Judeāče, šerānt. into a city of Juda.
40 ಆನಿ ಜಾಕಾರಿಆಸಾಚ್ಯಾ 40 Ani Zakāriāsāčeā 40 And she entered into
00036 others,, wOwait87 gărānt rigon Elizābetik the house of Zachary,
ಮಾನ್ ಕೆಲೊ. mān kelo. and saluted Elizabeth .
41 ಆನಿ ಎಲಿಜಾಬೆತ್ ಮರಿಯೆ 41 Ani Elizābet Må- 41 And it came to pass,
ออ JJUA ,O eyewas, w rietso namaskār āikun , that when Elizabeth heard
>

ne Far 32 Tulvogs evoons burgeān tiče kusint ulās the salutation of Mary,
ಬೊಗೊ, ಆನಿ ಎಲಿಜಾಬೆತ್ ಸ್ಪಿರಿತಾ| bhoglo , ani Elizabet| the infant leaped in her
ಸಾಂತಾನ್ ಭರ್ಲಿ Spiritā Santān bhorli : womb. And Elisabeth was
filled with the Holy Ghost:
 389

42 ಆನಿ ಬೊಬ್ ಮಾರ್ನ್ ಸಾಂ 42 Ani bõb mārn sang- 42 And she cried out
: es ,oodo 230S guo za leñ : åstreāñ bităr tun with a loud voice, and
evo, eso Estevo peroes gut sădeuñ, ani sădeuñ fòļ said : Blessed art thou a
ಕುಸಿಚೆಂ ಜೆಜು. tuje kusičen Jezu. mong women , and blessed
is the fruit of thy womb .
43 ಆನಿ ಕಸಿ ಮೊಜ್ಯಾ ದೇವಾಚಿ 43 Ani kåsi mojea Dē- 43 And whence is this to
ಮ್ಯಾ ಮೊಜೆ ಕಡೆ ಯಉಂಚ ? vāči māi moje kåde me, that the mother of my
yeunči ? Lord should come to me ?
44 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್, ಪೊಳೆ,44 Kitеāk moļeār, po- 44 For, behold, as soon
>

gueva sotto lawas to Jaost le, tuzo tāļo mojeā kā- as the voice of thy salu
ಪೊಡೊನ್, ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾನ್ ಮೊಜೆ ಕು | nant pogon, burgeantation soundedin myears,
ಸಿಂತ್ ಉಲಾಸ್ ಭೂಗ್ಲಾ. moje kusint ulās bhogla. the infant in my womb
leaped for joy,
45 ಆನಿ ಭಾಗವೊಂತ್ ತುಂ , ಸ 45 Ani bhāgevont tuñ 45 And blessed art thou

good ohne dating,34; 159,36 sătmandylleă pasvot ; that hast believed, be

aid tog os Dive Budamas suso kiteāk moļeār Somiān cause those things shall
ಸಾಂಗೆ ಲ್ಲೆ ೦, ತಂ ತುಜೆ ಥಂ ಗಡುನ್ | tuka Sangolleh, tei tuje | be accomplished that
ಯತಾಂ. thăiñ gåņun yeteleñ. were spoken to thee by
the Lord .

46 ಆನಿ ಮರಿಯೆನ್ ಸಾಂಗ್ಲೆಂ: 46 Ani Mariyen Sang- 46 And Mary said : My

ಮೋಜೋ
e suo pago30 /F30: len: Mozo åtmo Dēvāk soul doth magnify the
vorņitā : Lord :
47 ಆನಿ ಮೊಜೆಂ ಮೊನ ಸಂ 47 Ani mojen mòn sa- 47 And my spirit hath
ತೊಸ್ ಪಾಉಲೆಂ, ದೇವಾ, ಮೊಜ್ಯಾ | ntbs paulen , Deva, mo- rejoiced in God my
ಸೊಡ್ವಣ್ಣಾರಾ , ಧೃಂ. jea Sodvoņdarā , thăiñ. Saviour.
48 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ ಆಫ್ 48 Kiteakmolear,aple 48 Because He hathre
ಚಾಕರ್ನಿಚಿ ಕಿರ್ಕೊಳ್ಯಾ ತಾಣೆಂ| ts @karni &i kirkolai ta - garded the humility of
ಪೊಳ್ಳೆಲ್ಯಾ: ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್, | nen polelea : kiteak mo- His handmaid : for , be
ಪೊಳೆ, ಯ್ಯಾ ಮುಕಾರ್ ಸಕತ್ | lear, pole, yea mukar | hold, from henceforth all
ಸೊಸ್ತಿ ಮಾಕಾ ವೊರ್ಣಿಲ್ಲೊ . såkåd sosti makā vorņi- generations shall call me
teleo . blessed .
49 ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ ದೊಳ್ಯಾರ್ ಸರ್ವ್ 49 Kitеāk moleār sår- 49 Because He that is
ಪೊದ್ದೆದಾರಾನ್
zoowadapat ಮೊಜೆtuotteet joವೋಡ್
aloezas| vụ podvedārān moje mighty hath done great
Jav HCO, F",en gozdo pero thăið vöd våstu keleāt , things to me : and Holy
ಭಾಗವೊ ೦ ತ. ani tačeñ nāuñ bhāge- is His name .
vont .
 390 -

50 ಆನಿ ತಾಚಿ ಕಾಕುಳ್ ತಾಕಾ 50 Ani tači kāku !t 50 And His mercy is
2018.02.023230 Hive jogo w takā bhiyeteleānčeañ from generation to gene
ಳಾನಾಸ್ತಾನಾಂ ಮೆಳ್ತಾ. sostink khaļanāstanañ rations, to them that fear
meļtā. Him .
51 ಆಪ್ಲಾ ಹಾತಾಚೆಂ ಬೊಳ್ 51 Aplea hātāčeñ bol | 51 He hath shewed
wagjeo: es S JBOJS * dākăileñ: apleā monānt might in His arm : He
ರ್ವ ಕರ್ತೆಲ್ಯಾಂಕ್ ಭೋಸ್ಟಿಲೆ. gărvụ kårteleānk bhos- hath scattered the proud
mile . in the conceit of their
heart.

52 ಪೊದ್ದೆದಾರ್ ಮನ್ಯಾ೦ ಕ್ ತಾಂ 52 Podvedār månšānk 52 He hath put down

ಚ್ಯಾ soba ja ospoev zo godtančeā siāsanār thāun the mighty from their
moderno ,pozoJudas a esa.kāạn gāle, ani neņteānk seat, and hath exalted
mān dilo. the humble .

53 ಭುಕೆಲ್ಯಾಂಕ್ ಬೊರೆಪೊಣಾ 53 Bhukelleānk bore- 53 He hath filled the

ನ್ ಬೋರ್ಲಾತ್, ಆನಿ ಗ್ರೇಸ್ತಾಂಕ್ | ponan bhorleat, ani gre- hungry with good things :
ಖಾಲಿ ಸೊಡ್ಯಾತ್. stānk khāli sodleāt. and the rich He hath
sent empty away .
54 ಇಸ್ರಾಯೆಲಾಕ್ ಆಜ್ಞಾ ಚಾ 54 Izrāyelāk aplea 54 He hath received
7376 tong ea, sau TIFF tsākrāk kāņgelā, tāči Israel His servant, being
ರ್ಕ . kākuļt kårn . mindful of His mercy.
55 ಜಚೊ ತೊ ಆಮ್ಯಾಬ ಬಾ 55 Zătso to amčeañ 55 As He spoke to our
JBOLO, O,ewa,wa JJD EI Jos bāpānčeāñ, Abrāhāmā fathers, to Abraham and
Joga fisevejero Joaoga ani tače såntăti kåde to his seed for ever.
ಲಾಕ್ , ulăilo sadāñkālāk.
56 ಆನಿ ಮರಿ ತಿಚ ಸಾಂಗಾತಾ 56 Ani Mări tiče san- 56 And Mary abode
JuJode gerar Leine osajoz , gātā sumār tīn moine with her about three
ಆ ಪಾ ಗಾರಾ ಪಾಟ ಆಲಿ. rāvon , apleā gårā pāți months : and she returned
āili . to her own house .
57 ಆನಿ ಪೋರ್ಸುತ್ ಜಾಂಚ | 57 Ani porsut zauntso 57 Now Elisabeth's
ವೇಳ್ ಪಾವೊನ್, ಎಲಿಜಾಬೆತ್ ಎಕಾ | vél payon , Elizabet ye- full time of being deliver
ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾಕ್ ಪೋರ್ಸುತ ಚಾಲಿ. kā burgeāk porsut zāli. ed was come, and she
brought forth a son.
58 ಆನಿ ತಿಚ್ಯಾಂ ಸೆಜಾಲ್ಯಾನಿಂ 58 Ani tibeah
tičeāñ Sezare
sezāre- 58 And her neighbours
e o 70 po you past seasons aniñ ani seireäniñ āi- and kinsfolks heard that
 391

323 TOFUS Foog Soms, 370 kun ki Dēvān tiči kā- the Lord hath shewed
ಪೊರಾಬ್ ದಿತಾಲಿಂ. kult keliā món , tikā po- His great mercy towards
>

rāb ditāliñ . her, and they congratu

lated with her.
59 eso esboross, aga బు 59 Ani ațvea disā bur- 59 And it came to pass
negros POUFousoos Fouo geāk sirkumsizār kå- that on the eighth day
gh overas, goto wa jako runk yeun , takā bāpā- they came to circumcise
zaevo zaradens inos seus čeñ nāuñ Zakāriās món the child, and they called
ವೊರ್ತಾಲಿಂ. dovortāliñ. him by his father's name
Zachary.
60 ಆನಿ ತಾಚೆ ಆವೊನ್ ಜಾಬ್ 60 Ani tače avoin zāb 60 And his mother

Deruds Jaoffo: page, wnaos diun sangleñ : nakā, answering, said : Not so,
jiga zjadevo voso saevo băgār takā Juāuñ món but he shall be called
ದೊವೊ ರಿಜ್ಞಾ nāuñ dovorizāi . John .
61 ಆನಿ ಸಾಂಗ್ತಾಲೆ ತಿಚೆ ಕಡೆ 61 Ani sangtāle tiče 61 And they said to
* guztes 2000 20305 fumat kåde ki tujeā seireāñ her : There is none of
ತಸಲೆಂ ನಾಉಂ ನಾಂ ಮೊಣೆ . bitår koņāki tăsăleñ thy kindred that is called
nâuũ nãẽ món. by this name.
62 ಆನಿ ತಾಚ್ಯಾ ಬಾಪಾ ಕಡೆ 62 Anitačeā bäpā kå- 62 And they made
ಗುರ್ತಾನಿಂ ವಿಚಾರ್ತಾಲೆ, ಕಸಲೆಂ de gurtunit Vitsartale signs to his father, how
Joevo sapa tistooro uomo kăsăleñ nāuñ takā do- hewould have him called.
ಖುಶಿ ಆಸಾ. vorizāi món khuši asā .
63 ಆಸಿ ತಾಣೆಂ ಎಕ್ ಫೋಳಿ 63 Ani taņeñ yēk foļi 63 And demanding a
JOAUJS, 23.00peso noontuak: māgun borăileñ sāng- writing-table, he wrote,
saldo Jaevo wiadero songs. un : tačeñ nāuñ Juāuñ saying : John is his name.
ಆನಿ ಸಕಡ್ ಆಜಾಫ್ ಜಾಲೆ. món. Ani såkåď ajāp And they all wondered .
zāle.
64 ತ್ಯಾಚ್ ಫಾರಾ ತಾಚೆಂ ತೋಂ 64 Teāts farā tačeñ 64 And immediately
ಡ್ ಆನಿ ತಾಚಿ ಜೀಬ್ ಸುದ್ಧಿ ಆನಿ| tend ani tadi jib Sutli his mouth was opened,
Bogor soferirevor076 ani Dēvāk vorņoun u- and his tongue loosed,
earumo lonk laglo. and he spoke, blessing
God.
65 ಆನಿ ಭಂ ದಿಸ್ಲಿಂ ಸಮೆ 65 Ani bheñ disleñ 65 And fear came upon
19,0 30027,0 202,088,
O sămestañ tanteañ se all their neighbours ; and
Eneswordwao JJF300 zāreānk ani săg!eā Ju- | all these things were
 392

ಚೆರ್ ಯ್ಯೋ ವಸ್ತು ಪರ್ಗಟ್ ಜಾಲ್ಯ : | deatean pårvåtānčer noised abroad over all
yeo văstu părgăt zāleo: the hill-country of Judea:
66 ಆನಿ ಜೊಕೊಣ್ ಆಕತಾ| 66 Ani zokon aikata- 66 And all they that
ಲೋ, ತೆಂ ಆಪ್ಲಾ wo do 20306 lo , teñ apleā monā bi- had heard them laid them
Abowasa ಲೋelo ಸಾಂಗುನ್ ಓ|
doontudo:: ttår sambāltālo sangun:: | up in their heart,, saying::
ಬುರ್ಗೊ ಕೊಣ್ ಜ್ಯಾತ್? ಕಿತ್ಯಾಕ್ | u0 burgo kon Zait ? ki- | What an one, think ye,
lasecos Deer gard sondsa teāk moļeār. Dēu tače shall this child be ? For
ಆಸುಲ್ಲೊ . sangātā asullo. the hand of the Lord was
with him .

67 ಆನಿ ಚಾಕಾರಿಆಸ್, ತಾಚೊ | 67 AniZakarias, tatso 67 And Zachary his

warming Logo dangapo 2840 bāpui, Spiritā Santān father was filled with the
ರ್ಲೋ ಆನಿ ಮುಕಾರ್ ne ಜ bhórlo, ani mukār gad- Holy Ghost : and he pro
ವಸ್ತು ಸಾಂಗೆ ಲ್ಲೊ ಸಾಂಗುನ್ : čeo văstu sāngleo, sān- phesied saying :
gun :
68 ಇಸ್ರಾಯೆಲಾಚೊ ದೇಉ ಸ 68 Izraelātso Dēu să- 68 Blessed be the Lord
Bevo, +385 38 40,OS 30 deuñ, kiteāk moļeār to God of Israel : because
ಬೆಲ್ಲಾ, ಆನಿ ತಾಣೆಂ ಸೊಡ್ವಣ್ | betla, ani tanei sodvon He hath visited and
ಕೆಲ್ಯಾ ಆಫ್ ಪರ್ಜೆಚಿ. kelea aple părječi. wrought the redemption
of His people :
69 ಆನಿ ತಾಣೆಂ ಆಮ್ಯಾಂ ಎಕಾ 69 Ani tāneñ amkāñ 69 ind hath raised up
ಪೊದ್ದೆದಾರ್ ಸೊಡ್ವಣ್ಣಾರಾಕ್ ದಿ | yeka podveda sodvon- an horn of salvation to
ea, wagwa Bomans 13278,232, dārāk dilā , Dāvidā a- us, in the house of David
ಗರಾಂತ್ , pleā tsākrāčea gårānt, His servant.
70 ಜಚೊ ತೊ ಉಲೊ ಭಾಗೆ 70 Zatso to ulăilo 70 As He spoke by the
ajoogao sao 3000Fo, bhāgevontañ
o f 7
prophe- mouth of His holy pro
ಗೆಲ್ಲಾ ಕಾಲಾಂತ್ ಆಸಲ್ಲ. tāñ vorviñ, je gellęā phets, who are from the
kālānt asalle. beginning.
71 ಆಮ್ಯಾಂ ಆಮ್ಯಾಂ ದುಸ್ಮಾ 71 Amkan amčeāñ 71 Salvation from our
paodhet er vorio Lazio os 7 dusmānāntle ani amtso enemies, and from the
ರ್ತೆಲ್ಯಾಂತ್ ಸೊಡ್ಲ್ಯಾತ್ : mosor kårteleāntle so- hand of all that hate us :
dăileāt:

1) Latin bāšen : « sodroņičeñ ” Sing. muạčeñ : “ podvedār sodron".- According to the

Latin : “ horn of salvation " , i.e. " powerful salvation " .
 393

72 ( ತಾಣೆಂ ಸೊಡ್ವಣ್ಣಾ ರಾಕ್ 72 (Tāņeñ Sodvoņdā- 72 To perform mercy

DED) SupeowaUDOU TOFU rāk dilā) amčeāñ bā- to our fathers, and to
ದಿಲಾ ಆಮ್ಯಾಲೆ
ಕರುಂಕ್ ಆನಿ (ತಾಂಚೆ ಕಡೆ ಕೆಲ್ಸಾ ) | panti kakult karunk remember THis holy testa
ಆರಾರಾಚೊ ಉಗ್ಲಾ ಕರುಂಕ್ . ani (tanče kåde kelleā) ment.
kårārātso ugdās kă
runk.

73 ಪರ್ಮಾಣಾಚೊ (ಉಗ್ಲಾಸ್ 73 Parmanatso (uggas 73 The oath which He

ಕರುಂಕ್ ) do Jomo Goue kårunk) jeñ tāņeñ am- swore to Abraham our
wada ewa, a do 7 +8. čeā bāpā Abrahāmā kắ- father, that He would
(ಮೊಣ್ಣೆಂ) ಕಿ ತೊ ಆಮ್ಯಾಲ ( ತಿ, de kelen ( monten ) ki to grant to us,
ಕುರ್ಪಾ) ದಿತೊಲೊ ಮೊಗ್, amkāñ (titli kurpā) di
tolo món,
74 ಅಸೆಂಕಿ ಆಮಿ೦ ಆಮ್ಯಾ ದು 74 Aseñ ki amiñ am- 74 That being delivered
Aa Jaos Los my5236, 238020 čeā dusmānāntle sodăi- from the hand of our ene
ನಾಂ ತಾಚಿ ಚಾಕ್ರಿ ಕರುಂ, tåts , bhen nastanañ mies, we may serve Him
tači tsākri kåruñ, without fear,
75 ಬಾಗೆವೊಂತ್ತೊಣಾನ್ ಆನಿ 75 Bhāgevontpoņān 75 In holiness and

op gps goud Jutadt er ani nītin tače mukār justice before Him , all
ಮೆಸ್ತಾಂ ಜಿಣಿಯೆಚ್ಯಾಂ ದಿಸಾನಿಂ , amče såmestañ jiņiye- our days.
čeāñ disāniñ .
76 ಆನಿ ತುಕಾ, ಬುರ್ಗ್ಯಾ, ಭೌ 76 Ani tuka, burged | 76 And thou , child,shalt
agopass megazis de$ 35 Ismo bhou vód Dēvātso pro- be called the prophet of
poevo štoo, tzo,bo les vos phet món nāuñ zate- the Highest : for thou
to Be Jo JUUTIOS utsees leñ , kiteāk moleār Dē- shalt go before the face
ವಾಟ್ ತಯಾರ್ ಕರುಂಕ್ , vā mukār vetoloi vāț of the Lord to prepare
tAyar karunk , His ways .
77 ಸೋಡೋಣಿಚಿ ಜಾಣ್ವಾ , ಸಿ 77 Sodvoņiči zāņvāi 77 To give knowledge
ಕೊ ಉಂಕ್ ತಾಚೆ ಪರ್ಜೆಕ್ಕೆ
Ja sikounk tače părjek ofsalvation to His people
ತ್ಯಾಂಚೆಂ ಬೊಗ್ಲಾಣೆಂ ಮೆಳಾಸೆಂ : pātkānčeñ bogsaņeñ unto the remission of
meļāseñ : their sins :
78 ( ಯೆಂ ಬೊಗ್ಲಾಣೆಂ ಮೆಳ್ತಾ) | 78 (Yen bogsaneh me- 78 Through the bowels
ಆಮ್ಯಾಕೆ Dejar totue, S, Itā) amčeā Dēvāče kā- of the mercy of our God ,
Tatue is ev orzo qaeraso evos kultin , je kākultin unts in which the Orient, from
evolvo FuoloFeave o 23 éventhāun udeuntso suryo on high, hath visited us,
amkāñ betlā ,
50
 394

79 ( ತುಂ ಮುಕಾರ್ ವೆತೆಲ್ಯೂ ) 79 (Tuñ mukār veto- 79 To enlighten them

LamOFW taduatdog ey to loi) morņāčeā kāļokānt that sit in darkness, and
evlogo på og gogo evitaros ani sāuļent nidylleānk in the shadow of death :
Devogs, og erat nosoda uzvād diunk, ani amče to direct our feet into the
ofsea, JuanFor Welservors. pāi soukāsāyečeā mār- way of peace.
nk
gār tsălou .

80 en worlof Joan Du 80 Ani burgo vādtālo 80 And the child grew ,

es nasdeid ego 6 130 ani găț zatālo åtmea and was strengthened in
es do Joog6 ez due to a thăiñ ani rānānt asallo spirit: and was in the
22 ** raza abongo warzso to apņāk Izrāelāk dā- deserts until the day ofhis
ಪ್ಲಾಕ್
om 06. kăitā moņasăr. manifestation to Israel .
 GLEANING AND CLEANING, IAPEPION .
PART 1 .

I premise as the foundation of this Chapter, that from the

very beginning of this Grammar, I intended 1) to write a Gram
mar to be circulated privately only among my brethren of the
Society who know Latin, other Grammars etc.; 2) to omit all
niceties, although required by exactness, especially as regards
spelling, in which point I did not follow the Kanarese but the
Roman alphabet.. Hence many things are to be found, which
are not exact, if we judge of them according to the full science
of Grammar. But there is a rule of common sense to judge of
such works, not bad in themselves, according to the intention
of the author. In order to judge about other things, e.g., order ,
style etc. , consider that this Grammar has been composed within
a few months . As to Gleaning , I must limit myself to the most
necessary things, leaving many other things to the Dic
tionary, and omitting others in order not to increase too much
the size of this book . As to Cleaning, I do not correct things
which depend on the extraordinary circumstances , in which
this book has been composed , e. g. order, style, exercises ,
foreign words etc. Some Cleaning will be left to the Dịction
ary, for the above reason.
PART I. Chapt. I. 1 ) The explanation of the vowels
and consonants is only approximate ; strictly we should dis
tinguish four a (see p. 191 ) ; hence short vowels too can have the
stress of the voice as “ tzăd = much " (see l.c. and p. 231 , para. 8,
d .). 2) What I say of the Kanarese manner of writing etc. must
be understood not of the Kanarese language, but of the Kana
rese letters, used also for Tuļu by the Basel Mission Press in
Mangalore. This regards especially the 6 which in Kanarese
very seldom occurs and even then shows absence of a vowel ; in
50 *
 396

Tuļu it occurs at every step as a sign of a half vowel. 3) Some

principles laid down in this Chapter are not strictly adhered
to , first on account of having changed my plan , then on account
of great hurry , finally on account of the state of Konkani still
quite unsettled : I myself became aware of a more correct mode
only after a great part of the Grammar had been printed ;
many things have been omitted purposely, in order to make
the matters easier. 4) According to the Mahrātti I should
have written å in many cases in which it has been omitted,
and so other similar things.. The reason is because I do not
adapt Konkani to Mahrātti, which would be ridiculous , but
to the common pronunciation, which pronunciation and not the
Mahrātti is to be considered as the rule. - For the same
reason I have written some words not as the Kanarese words
of a similar root.
Page 2 , line 10. “ A short o” viz. closed o, if the accent
does not fall upon å. In Kanarese this closed o (a) is written e,
viz. short a which has some gradations to be learnt by practice.
Line 8, et seq. a fine. These words are said only on the
supposition that a kind of half vowel be pronounced at the
end of every word ending in a consonant ; but as this is not
the case, as I say in the note, hence whenever a word is writ
ten with a pure consonant at the end , pronounce it without
the half vowel, keeping this sound for ą or ų. As regards ą,
and ,
y, omnibus consideratis, it seems better to use only uụ for
both sounds, although between them there is some difference
which can be left to be learnt by practice. The reason of
this is, because the things are more simple in this way, and
for the Kanarese alphabet I introduced only one sign for both
viz . v . This half vowel occurs often in the middle of words.
Page 3 , para. 1. Add to these cerebral letters also !, ?,
as on p. 5 , 6 , and š, as on p. 191.
> > The difference between
š and ğ is this : š is palatal , šis cerebral.
Para . 2 . Add b to the letters which can be aspirated.
In Kanarese only the above letters have a peculiar sign : yet
 397

the aspirated h can occur also after other consonants (see

p. 194) . The Konkani aspiration is less strong than the Eng
lish one .
Page 4, para. 4. Ts would better render the sharp s,
expressed by the Kanarese e and Mahrātti 7. Hence tz and
tč could be put aside, for the sake of simplicity also. This
ts can be aspirated as in Kanarese and in Mahrātti; then it
should be written tsh , as the aspirated z becomes zh.
About the hard s see, however, p. 105 , note 1. This hard
s is not so rare . The soft z is like 8s in misery.
Para , 6. Also in the middle I write often ñ. The nasal
sound by itself sounds sometimes n, sometimes m; yet ă
might express, by convention , both sounds.
Page 5. The common à is pronounced somewhat open,
not very slowly, or very quickly. In Kanarese we have no
proper sign for it. See p. 191 .
Page 6. Closed o is as o in note, open o is as o in not.
No need to say that kš differs from ks.
Both u and y are called nearly u, but they differ: ų is
nearly u, because it is half vowel ; v is nearly u, because often
it is pronounced between y and u or also like an u; e.g.
“ uzvād = uzuād ".
Para , 1 , of the note, is premature .
Page 7. 8 ) " Aha ” perhaps is, in its origin, not vulgar, but
correct, because it comes from the Mahrātti " = I am ” .
2. Ts is expressed by 23 which sounds also č.
Chapter II. In many words the accent upon the last
syllable is so slight that you cannot perceive distinctly
whether it is upon the last or upon the penultimate ; e. g ." gāli.”
Besides the principal accent there is a secondary accent
upon a preceding syllable, especially in compound words
which have a secondary accent upon the last syllable of the
first word.
As to the diphthongs see some completion of this rule on p.
195. Perhaps we can make it clearer and more complete by
 398

saying that mostly the true (i.e. pronounced as one sound)

final diphthongs formed : 1 ) by a as first vowel and an
other true vowel, and 2) by ee combined with i and u, 3) by o
combined with i and u, have the accent upon the first vowel
(ai, ao, au, ei, eu, oi, ou, not ajo, ayi, aru etc.). The other
true or apparent (as, “ ia = ya ” etc.) diphthongs have more
commonly the accent upon the second vowel (as ea, eo, ie, io,
iu, ua, ui, ue, uo). The combinations ae, ao, ie, etc. which result
from the addition of the termination of the Declension to the
Original, have the accent upon the last vowel (see p. 195). In
Kanarese they would be written, usually, with y or v between
the two vowels, thus eye, iye, ayu etc., and so they would not even
appear as diphthongs. The most usual combinations of two
vowels are these comitting the combination of a vowel with
itself): 1) ae, ai, ao, au; 2) ea, ei, eo, eu ; 3) ia, ie, io, iu; 4) oa, oe,
oi, ou ; 5) ua, ue, ui, uo. The diphthongs in Italics have usually
the accent upon the first. Compare, however, the rule of the text.
Pronounce y (or the corresponding i) distinctly as a conso
nant : hence make the pause of the voice before y : " vidya =
vid - ya” .
Page 8, para. 1. .....not only low but also some of high
castes pronounce " bā" ra" etc.; " rā"ja = king "; " răjā " = leave.”
Para.. 2. “ sade = } " used with numerals, properly has
only half accent, because the second word has the principal
accent ; yet it seems to differ from other compounds, because
it has the secondary accent not upon the last but upon the
penultimate syllable : “ sade-tīn = 31."
Appendix . Many things could be said here, if time would
allow, about the change of quantity,
PART II. Chapter I. Page 9, line 13. Assemblage
of dialects, viz, apparently : see p. 317. A common language
in potentia at least is there ; dialects almost actu .
Page 10, line 7. Characteristic, i.e. distinguishing ; I do
not mean to say that we will call this case characteristic,
although it could be called so,
 399

Page 11 , line 13 , et seq. Strictly, the pure Adjectives used

as Adjectives have no proper form for the Original ; yet they
have it, if used as Pronouns.
Page 12 , line 17 , et seq. This rule does not hold good for
all cases .
Page 12 , line 24, et seq. This must not be taken as un
>

exceptional , because few Postpositions do not govern the

Original, as I say in Chapter VI.
Line 3 , a fine. What is said hereafter on p. 13, compared
>

with p. 14, n. 3 , can be considered as a general rule on this

>

point.
Page 13 , line 12. " In the same way ”, i.e. the same ter
minations of the singular ; but in the Vocative usually the
affix nu or no must be added. Perhaps somebody might consider
nu not as affix but as an essential part of the termination of
the Vocative.
Line 20, et seq . There are some exceptions to this rule ;
see Dictionary.
Page 13 , line 17 , et seq. This construction usually does
>

not take place, if the Noun , not contracted, would have as

many syllables in the oblique cases, as in the Nominative;
hence no contraction in the 3rd declension . A similar con
traction takes place also in Verbs; e. g. " utrun ” , instead of
"utarun having crossed”.
Page 14, n. 1. In Greek, Grammarians call a contraction
not only the fusion of two vowels into one, but also the omis
sion of one vowel ; hence we can call this omission simply
and properly contraction .
Note 6. To , ti, teñ are sometimes used really and pro
perly as Articles. (See p. 235.)
Line 29 , et seg. Some of these rules are premature.
Line 8 , a fine. This must be understood only of the obso
9

lete Postposition “ antų ". See p. 41 , para. 3 .

Para. 2. " anty" is still really used in Mahrātti as a Post
position (via) .
 400

Page 15 , para. 4. Cf. Ch. VI. and Part IV. Ch. II. Art. 6 .
At least two Postpositions govern the Nominative.
Para. 7. It should be put in the 1st Declension . More
over some at least of such Nouns in a can have a Plural
form in some cases, e.g. in the Dative.
Page 16 , line 1. “ krupa” , see page 20, n. 2 , its approxi
mately right spelling .
Para. 8. More simply say that the Nominative is du. Yet
in Mahrātti it is " dhuy " .
Para. 9. In some rare cases the preceding Nouns are left
in the Nominative .
B. In the following five paragraphs only common Nouns
are treated of.
Page 17 , para. 1 . Besides these two Nouns there are
some others which, usually, are not of Feminine Gender.
Add as 5) Abstract Nouns in sāņ may follow this De
clension ; e.g. " koļsāņ = bitterness", or the 4th ; as also 6) the
Feminine Nouns and Diminutive Nouns derived both from the
Masculine by changing o into i ; e.g. " bokļi, godi, guļi " etc.
Page 18 , line 2. To “ use the Original" add “ or some
times the Nominative or Dative " .
Line 13. “ Nominative yo" . This happens especially with
some Nouns in a used also in the Plural , and also with some
other Nouns ; e.g.“ kårn, -e ", " khuši, -e, or -še”; in the Plural
“ kårneo, khušeo " . In such cases y is kept also in the oblique
cases . Some of such Nouns can have -e, or -ie in the Original .
Page 19, line 2. "66 Rāņiāno ". The suffix must be always
added. This must be applied to the following Declensions
too .
Page 20, note 2. This note is useless, if we write with
Kanarese letters or also with Roman letters, but adhering
strictly to the Kanarese.
Page 20 , line 12. " sikša or šikša " .
66
Page 21 , line 1. et seq. It is better to omit the Verb “ assā ” .
Line 10, et seq. After further inquiring it seems that
 401

“ kurād" is of the 4th Declension : kul, -a, is n. , kuli, -e is f .:

both ways can be used .
Page 22 , para. 3. Also Masculine or Neuter Nouns in au
or ou usually are of the 2nd Declension : the spelling " āuñ or
āu" is better than " ao or āoñ ” .
Page 23 , line 4 , a fine. " Kěšť” is better used as Masculine .
Page 24, para. 4. This rule only hinted at, can be per
fected by saying that all or nearly all Masculine Nouns of
this Declension ending in ó change it into ă or, seldom, into
ò, in the Plural ; e.g. " poņós = jack -fruit ”, “ kolós = cupola ( ?)”,
“ soróp = snake”, “ māróg = way ", " koród = 100 lakhs" , " fātór =
stone " , " pormol = smell" , " hätór = bamboo -mat ” , “ dārvond =
door-frame " , " korvónt = saw " , " dongór = mountain " , " rākkós =
9 1

monster”, “ vonók = cocoanut-shell ”, “ bikóņ = bug" , " dukór =

>

pig ”, “ róng = colour" ; all these have å in the Plural. " Fód =
>

boil ", " dór = rope of plantain-tree " , " sór = necklace" , "“ kāsou
= small tortoise”, “ fóņd = grave” , “ rós = juice",....have
' ò in
the Plural . Hence instead of ă we cannot write o.
Masculine Nouns ending in é change it into è ; but I can
not say as yet, that this change of é into è is so extended as
the change of o. Of many Masculine Nouns having é in the
last syllable, up to this I could not find any one against this
rule .
66
Line 3 , a fine. “ Bāpai or pāpā ” , strictly " pāpā ” ; “ bāpai”
9

is another form .
66
Page 25 , line 2. “ Kāļiz " strictly means “ liver” ; yet
usually it is taken for " heart” .
6
Page 26 , para. 2. " Burgeānu” belongs to para . 1.
Page 29 , para. 1. There are some Nouns which take ia
not ea ; e.g. ubheñ , bhiā = fear ” . If a Noun ends in io or yo
or uo, euphony requires only a not ea to be added; e.g. ugurio
vo,
or suryorsun ", " suriāk = to the sun " . If we write yo and yo
we might say yea, vea etc.
Page 32 , para. 4. “ “Akānt” does not suit well , because
66
>

more commonly it is declined according to the 2nd Declension .

51
 - 402

Page 34, note 3. More commonly “ boiņ ” is of the 4th

Declension also in the Plural .
Line 3. Viz. this nasal sound sounds more distinctly
than the nasal sound of the Plural ; e.g. " burgeānk ”: exactly.
" burgeāñ -k ” , pronounced however as “ burgeānk ” ; but ñ of
such Nouns must sound distinctly a pure ñ.
Page 36 , Ex. 1. " Guru" is used by some also for priests
of the Old Testament.
Page 37 , line 10, a fine. " Såkåt", some say “ såkåd ” obli
que cases " săgdā ".
Page 38 , b. Names of girls take a Neuter termination
also in the Nominative, if possible ; hence “ Mărieñ = Mary ”
( girl): Mări (woman).
Page 39 , note. Premature.
Page 41 , para. 2. Premature.
Page 42 , para. 4. 66“ Lók” can be used in the Plural as in
Latin populus.
6) : " Månis ” , used for a woman , follows the 1st Declension
>

in the Singular, the 2nd Neuter in the Plural.

c) : " Dāg ” is often used also in the Singular.
Page 43 , line 5. The form “ bāpai" is more used in ad
dressing
Page 44, line 1. Only few consider small children as
Neuter.
Feminine: a) This exception is to be limited to certain
fixed cases ; usually younger female relatives (not the wife
by the husband ), and women in much lower condition are con
sidered as Neuter both in speaking to and about them ; in
other cases the Neuter Gender seldom occurs ; hence the be
ginner will better employ the Feminine Gender.
Page 45. Add to Feminine: Abstract Nouns in " sān" are
Feminine ; e.g. “ kodsāņ = bitterness” .
Page 46 , lines 6-7 , a fine. This difficulty can be consider
ably diminished so : Nouns of the 2nd Declension ending in a
syllable with ó or é, are mostly or always Masculine (see
 403

p. 400, note on p. 24) ; Nouns of the 2nd Declension having ò or

è in the Nominative Singular are mostly Neuter ; e.g. " mòn,
pòt, lėk ” .
Page 47. The names of male animals ending in 0, have
often , the Feminine ending in i.
Page 48, line 10 , a fine. There are some exceptions ; e.g.
“ fāvo = due ", is not declinable ; some Adjectives ending in a
consonant can sometimes take the terminations o , i, eñ. But
these two exceptions are very rare.
Page 49 , lines 1 , 2. If the Adjective is predicate, it
does not occur, usually, in the oblique cases.
>

Line 16. Some Adjectives ending in a consonant take a

in the oblique cases for all Genders.
Note 1. Such use is not very extended.
Lines 13 , 9, a fine. Yet Adjectives having a termination
which is found also in Substantives, e.g. i, can be declined es
pecially if used as Nouns ; e. g. " gårvi = proud ” , “ gărveañ
månšānk or gårveānk = to proud men ” .
Page 50, 6) : " boreo ástrio” , better boreo åstreo" , as in
>

the oblique cases too, e is used : still better “ ăstryo ".

Page 51 , line 17. " såkte " is derived from " såkåt" by
dropping the vowel a, because often in the Adjectives too
happens what has been remarked on p. 13.
§ 2. Perhaps this and the following paragraphs might
have been put more properly under Art. II.
Page 52 , para. 1. Premature. Remark however that the
rule here hinted at, holds good also when there are many
subordinate Adjectives. (See an example in para. 5 , page 53.)
Moreover the Adjective accompanying the Adjectival Genitive,
follows, in concord, this Adjective, not the principal Noun :
obore jiņiečiñ vărsañ = years of good life” .
Line 5, a fine. “sămestañ ' can also be Nominative Neu
ter ; better put this example: " săktañ gårānče fātăr = stones
of all the houses” . Here it appears as an oblique case. At
any rate the last part of this first observation is not obligatory.
51 *
 404

Page 53 , para. 3. In such a case there would be a composi

tion ; hence it would be better to put a hyphen : “ Dēvā -kurpa . "
Para. 4. According to para 1 , p. 52 , only “ Somia Jezu
Kristādea kāļzāčeñ fest” is right. By way of composition , we
might say: “ ...Krista -kāļzāčeñ fest”. People say : " Somia Jezu
kāļzāčeñ fest” .
To these subordinate Adjectives the rule of para. 1 is
to be applied. The parallel Adjectives seem to agree directly
with their Noun; e.g. " bangārāčiñ ani rupeānčiñ gărañ = houses
of gold and silver ” .
Para . 5 . The use of ea for e , of ee for ea, seems to be not
very correct theoretically ; yet in some cases, e.g. “ bāpāče
nāviñ ” , there is universal use which has the force of a rule ;
those cases must be kept.
Page 54, § III. Premature.
Page 55. An is the termination of the Instrumental ; hence
it implies the meaning “ through ”. (See Syntax.)
Line 5. The example is not very suitable.
Line 14. In conformity with the explanation it means
" you who are far, go " . " Poisilo " is better.
Line 12 , a fine. " Fo? ” for “ fruit , ” properly is n., and ò,
if figuratively, more commonly, is m. , and o.
Line 5 , a fine. " motto = very fat" ; " moto = fat”.
Page 57 , line 4. The last sentence is to be understood in
conformity with the definition of the Church.
Art. II. As only numerals have been put, another title
might have been better.
No. 2. “ doni, dogi,” they are declined just as “ dòn, dög” ,
9

to which you add i; hence " dogañ - " etc.

No. 7. “ Sāt (pronounced quickly )"; as there are two long
a, as I said in Ch. IX. P. III. , this a seems to be the less long one.
Page 58 , No. 43. " tečāļis or tevečāļis " ; the 2nd form is
more correct.
Page 59, No. 100. “ Señ "'; some pronounce “ šeň , sembor" :
this 2nd form agrees with the Mahrātti.
 405

Page 59 , No. 160. Some say also " yekšeñ ani sāt” .
Para. 1. The first manner of counting is vulgar.
Page 61 , line 1. Some do not use the second form for
irrational animals ; yet this form seems to be more common .
Para . 3. Cf. 231 , para. 8.
Para. 4. Strictly speaking “ såvāi ” does not mean 14 ,
but is a general particle, in Mahrātti " săvā ” , meaning
“ having a fourth more, or more by a fourth " ; hence it is the
66

proper form to express 14, 24, 34, etc.; in this way “ săvāi
។

dòn = 24"
21 , “" săvāi tīn = 3 " etc. To say 11 , “" yēk” is understood,
>

and can reasonably be understood according to the above mean

ing. For facilitating this- point, I put together these fractional
or mixed numbers :
" ] = pāu, or kāldo"; " d = årdho"; " f = pāuņo, or mukāl ";
“ lį = săvāi”; “ 1ļ = dēļ ”; “ 11 = pāuṇeñ dön ”; “ 24 = såvāi dòn ”
(and so 31, 41 .... ); “ 24 = edets or edez";' " 23 = pāuṇeñ tīn ””
(in a similar way 3 etc. ); “ 34 = sade tīn , “ 41 = sade-čār” etc.
For fractions lower than į see p. 244 n. 1 .
Page 62. § II. Add also " čouto = fourth " as irregular ;
moreover from 19 upwards insert a before adding vo ; e.g.
" yekuņisāvo, visāvo, yēk-visāvo, tisāvo” etc.
§ IV. The distributive numbers can be used for the
multiple numbers, because the distributive notion contains
also a multiple notion ; e.gi " čačār rupoi dovor = put the
Rupees four by four” ; hence you must have either 8 or 12 etc.;
but the prevailing notion is distributive, and properly it
cannot be used for multiple numbers. The last mode in
some contexts cannot be used exactly ; e. g. having received
four rupees and desiring to have four more , I cannot say :
" don pāuti tsåd di”, because this would mean 8 more ( 12) .
Instead of “ don pāuți tsåď” sometimes it would be better
to repeat the number ; e. g. " don pāuți čār = twice four”.
Page 63 . § VI. Few persons use “ dāñ ” (Mahrātti ai)
instead of“ pāuți” : Add moreover : to say “first, secondly.. ",
they say “ poile suāter, dusre suāter ” , lit, " in the first place, in
រ
 406

the second place”. The form “poileañ, dusreañ ” etc. as in

Mahrātti, can be also used, yet it would rather mean: " by the
first, by the second."
Page 64, line 4. " šeār” : more commonly “ šer "; in any
case it must be pronounced quickly with the accent upon a.
Line 10. Better " kitlo -temp zāi," at the end.
Line 14. “ Dedsea ” is better.
66
Page 66, line 4. " Săma" can also be used, e.g. “ Pedru
Paulāk såma assā =Peter is equal to Paul” . If the comparison
is in particular, then " săma ” does not seem very suitable.
Line 3, afine. " assā " better " zāun assā”.
Page 67 , line 4. " bhāgivånt” : some say sbhāgevont”.
>

Page 68, line 4. Perhaps suttim ” has the same origin as

the Italian " ottimo” and the Latin "optimus ”. It is used also
in Kanarese, Mahrātti, and Sanskrit.
These comparative and superlatives, except “stsåd”, might
perhaps be considered as independent words, which can
express also the comparative and superlative meaning of these
Adjectives.
Line 18. " tikeñ ” : “ čikeñ" is more common .
Add the termination -80. (See Part III. Ch . II.) In some
cases by -leñ some diminutives can be formed ; e.g. “ ghānțleñ =
small bell” .
Page 69 , line 8-10. Among these modes I mention here
another, viz. the doubling of the consonant, by which aug
mentative or superlative meaning is produced ; e.g. “ vodo ? =
lately , just now ”; “ yoddo? = some time ago ” ; “ moto = fat ”,
"motto = very fat”. I cannot say how far this last mode can
be used.
Exercise : “dhắiryavont", some say “ dhăiravont or dhăiri
9

vont” .

“ Sukh ”. According to Max Müller (Sanskrit Grammar for

Beginners, ch. II. $ 116) , final aspirate letters lose their aspira
tion, in Sanskrit; it seems that in the niece of Sanskrit, we
should follow the same rule ; hence either we should write
 407

" sukhụ or suk”. This remark regards other words too.. Yet
throughout the Grammar I did not observe strictly this point,
nor is it, perhaps, to be taken into consideration.
Page 70. § 1. Better " āveñ or åuen.
“ Amāñ” is an old Original of “ amiñ ” , e.g. " amāñ pasun
>

vináti kår = pray for us" .

Page 72 , para. 1. " amore tui= out of love to you ” .
Para. 2. viz. if the Postpositions govern the Original;
for if it governs the Dative or Nominative, then the pure
Dative or Nominative is used .
Para. 4. Cf. Part IV. Chapter I.
Para. 5. “ Chiefly ”; this kind of Instrumental is as well
used for the Nouns etc.
Page 73 , line 4 , a fine. " tintso " : this by analogy with " titso"
is right, but used by very few ; instead of it, “ tāntso " is used.
Page 74. In the table, before " tanče " , insert :
“ ....pl. m. pd. sn. tantso, tanči, tančeñ ."
Page 75, lines 4-6. Such derivation is not probable.
Line 10. They can be used as well also as masculine or
feminine.
Page 78, para. 3. In this example “ kon” is not an Interro
gative Pronoun .
Page 79 , line 18. “ Kon to” is not used commonly as a Pro
noun in the oblique cases ; as an Adjective, it becomes “ kon -tea ”.
$ 6. 1. These can be called Pronouns also in Latin .
6) " quilibet = any one ” .
Line 8 , a. f. " yeyēklo or yēkyēklo ”.
Page 80, line 11. Waliquis =somebody”; “nemo =nobody”.
Line 18. “ aliquis = somebody”.
Page 82 , line 19 . “ .... seems to be out of place” viz. to
Europeans, but in itself it is elegant. The exclusive meaning
(" only” ) probably is the emphatic meaning which in some
contexts takes naturally an exclusive meaning. Whatever it
may be, this -ts can be translated often by " only”.
 -
408

Page 82. $ 9. qualis... talis = as...as, quot...tot = as

many ... as many, quantus...tantus = how great...as great,
qui ... is = who...he, quicumque...is = whosoever...he .
=

Page 83 , para. 9 , see Syntax Ch. II. Art. III .

Page 84, line 20. " rāk = keep, i. e.e guard ” .
Line 11 , a fine. “ sărgār ” , better “ sărg ” ; or if you put
“ sărgār” , add wassā ” .
Line 7 , a fine. stinčiñ "': more common stančiñ ” .
Page 85 , line 8. " apun ", better “ apuņạts”. “ Apun " in the
2nd person usually does not sound well .
Line 15. “ Kontso išt" : better use the Accusative.
Line 13 , a fine. Some say and pronounce “ dåtårn "; yet
more common and more philological is dótórn ” .
Line 10 , a fine. “ Kåssåloi" means here " of any quality" ,
not only any.
Page 86 , line 8. Some say “ Rupoi, rupia” : this is more
>

correct .

Page 87. The beginners can read observation 7 , p . 118 ,

and the last part of observation 26, p. 125 , from line 7 , a fine,
before reading the Paradigm .
As a general rule all compound forms can be conjugated
fully also in their elements , if the elementary forms are
liable to conjugation ; so, e.g. , " geleāuñasleāuñ " , " veteāleuñ
asleāuñ ” , etc.; this must be kept in view, in order to be dis
pensed with repeating it many times. (See p. 123 , 1. 17.)
។

The conjugation of the Regular Verbs can be simplified,

as regards the more common tenses of the affirmative form
in this way (root : 2nd Person Imperative) :
1) -tā is the fundamental termination of the Present Indi
cative .
2) -lo ( -lā ) is the fundamental termination of the Past Ten
ses (“-lolo or -ụllo ” in the Past Perfect ).
3) -tālo (Present and Past joined) is the fundamental
termination of the Imperfect.
 409

4) -tolo is the fundamental termination of the Future, i.e.

nearly as the Imperfect.
-5) -so is the fundamental termination of the Imperfect
Subjunctive.
6) -tso is the fundamental termination of the Infinitive
Absolute, Gerundiye and Participle.
7) -un is the fundamental termination of the Subjunctive
and Optative Present.
8) -lear is the fundamental termination of the Imperfect
Conditional and Optative.
9) -iyet ( -yet) is the fundamental termination of the
Potential .
10) -zāi is the fundamental termination of the Necessary Mood .
11 ) -an (-in) is the fundamental termination of the Contin
gent Future .
1. The Participles usually have the termination of the
corresponding tense , except that -tolo is also Present , and
-tso is Present and Future .
2. The Compound Tenses are formed by adding " zatā or
assā” to the simple form .
3. The fundamental termination moreover must be modi.
fied a little , sometimes, in the different Persons : usually the
1st and 3rd Persons Singular are equal (o or a ); the 2nd
ends in i ( oi, ai ... ); the 1st Plural in uñ ( auñ... ); the 2nd
in -at (-eat ... ) . Sometimes this fundamental termination is
not only modified in the different Persons but also in the same
Person , according to the different Genders (terminations of
the Adjectives) .
For the sake of simplicity the periphrastic conjugation
should be eliminated from the paradigm , and explained wholly
separately.
Page 88, Perfect. The spelling -ia, instead of ea, is under
stood also for the Plural .
Page 89 , 1.2 and 4. ši, šât are more correct than či, čāt.
Line 2. a of an is a mean between å and á.
52
 410

Line 8, a fine. “ utinam is veniret = oh if he would come!”

“ Deus faciat bonum = God bless you !” butinam venisset
oh if he would have come ! "
Page 90. Imperfect. “ Corresponding ” etc. this is its chief
not its only meaning ; i is commonly inserted, not a. Some
times the Verb kår must be added .
Line 6, a fine. " sika zāleār "; probably it must be ssikat
zāleār " (see p. 89 , 1. 5 et seq.)
Line last. About -iyet cf. p. 127 .
Page 91. If you add the Past Perfect ete, of “ zatā ” or
" assā ” to the Present Potential and Necessary, you would
get the Past Perfect Tense etc.
Page 92 , note : Tči is too hard ; hence či, čeñ will do, and
so in other similar cases .
Page 93 , line 4, a fine. Some prefer the form “ natlo " etc.
to " natullo " etc.
Page 94, line 11. Better " natallo ”: I would prefer to say
“ natullo, natulli” etc. as in the Imperfect.
Line 19, et seq. Not all make this distinction.
Line last. The insertion of the euphonical vowel is to be
understood also of the 2nd Person Singular and Plural.
Page 95 , C. “ Not commonly used ” ; it is not rare.
Line 6 , a fine. "If you like” , i. e. if you like exactness.
(See g 5.)
Page 97. " Zatā” is irregular as the Verbs ending in a
vowel , not as kår, etc. (See $ 7.)
To " zatā ” and “ assā ” must be applied the remarks to be
made on the 1st and 2nd Future Negative, Conditional and
Conditionatum Negative of nid (see notes on pp. 112 , 113 , 114).
Page 100, line 12, et seq. Some say "zaisonāñ" etc.
Line 19. “ As explained above" , i.e. on p. 94.
Page 10.1, D. The full conjugation of " zatonāñ " is this :
9

Singular: 1. 2. as given ; 3) zatonāñ, zatināñ, zatenāñ.

Plural: 1 ) zatenāuñ , 2) zatinānt, 3) zatenānt, zateonant,
zatinânt .
 411

H. Better “ zāunknatullo (two l).

Note 1. This note is to be put after " assā " , p. 107 .
Page 102 , Note 1. Notwithstanding this reason, now I
9

would write " asā ” .

Page 104 , G. " aš-ci.... " the hyphen is used only to show
>

the reader the change of sound of s .

II. “ niñ ” , better snåiñ " . The full form massanāñ " etc.
occurs also.
Page 109 , line 1. This seems to be the common form of
2nd Future ; e.g. "when you will come I shall have finished”.
D. The 2nd Conditional " nidlo ” (ex. nidyllo) must be
conjugated as the Past Perfect.
Page 110, line 3 , " nidtoñ" is used also absolutely in the
2

meaning of “ I would sleep ”; so, e.g. "igărjent vetoñ : puņ vēl

nāñ = I would go to the church , but I have no time” .
E. 3 ) " niduñ " is vulgar.
Page 111 , line 5 , a fine. " nidanatuleāuñ, nidanataleāuñ ”.
Although it seems to be right , yet such a delicate shade is not
common , nor, perhaps, quite certain.
Page 112. 1st and 2nd Future. The exact form is as
given there ; yet very few use the full form ; more commonly
in the Plural 1st Person they use only the first form (nidče
nāuñ), and in 2nd Person the 3rd form (nidčinānt) or the 1st
(nidčenānt) . ' The other Persons are used, as given in the
Grammar.
Page 113. C. Imperfect. “ Nidanāñ” must be conjugated
as the Present Negative Indicative.
Past. “ Nidanatullo ” must be conjugated as the Imper
fect Negative Indicative. This remark holds good also for
the Conditional .
Page 114 , line 7, a fine. The Latin means “it was not
to sleep ”.
2nd Conditionatum . " Nidtonāñ" must be conjugated as
“ zatonāõ ” . (See note for p. 101.)
52*
 412

Page 115. “ Nidtsonāñ " could be used only in correlative

sentences (as “-tā to” ); better use “ nidanaye asollo ” .
Page 116 , para. 2. I is much more frequently inserted
than &.
Line 9, a fine. Some pronounce in such a way this v
that it seems to be an u ; consequently for the Verbs in u or
uñ no change would take place.
Page 117 , para. 3.3 b) There may be some exception re
quired, especially by euphony; e.g. " sik ” has “ sikan ", " zā”"
has " zāin " . " Sik ” is one of the excepted Verbs from the
“ kårmaņi ” construction. Perhaps these two irregularities are
connected ; time will clear up this point.
Page 119, line 8. The Future in -un (see p. 109) seems to
be simply the 2nd Future. Whereas the other forms (p. 108)
can be used only in some cases. (See note for p. 109.)
Para. 9. " Nidtonāñ asollo " is used commonly only as
2nd Conditionatum ; " nidtonāñ asollo zāin " is not often
used ; hence, for practice, the 1st Negative Future can be
used also as 2nd Negative Future.
Page 121 , line 10. For practice, keep only “" nidtonāñ”'.
as 1st Negative Conditional, and “ idtonāñ asollo ” as Past
Negative Conditional.
Page 122 , line 15. The Imperfect Subjunctive has a pure
8 ; hence the termination -80, -si, or -señ is not included.
Page 123, line 5. " Conspici potuit = could be seen " .
Line 8. " Facturus erat = was doing” , yet in such a mean
ing it is not common ; it is used, commonly , for fecerit. In the
65

above periphrastic meaning people say rather “ kårun assolo"

or skårtañ thăiñ assolo ” .
Line 18.. " ...in o " , add : " also if o is followed by nāñ”.
>

This double conjugation takes place also in other tenses (see

the preceding observations) .
Para. 20. The termination je is often used, but vulgar :
ze for zāi seems also, although frequently used , too dialec
tical ,
 413

Page 124, line 1. " nāñ" is not very nasal; in Mahrātti

it is not nasal , so that we might be entitled, perhaps, to
write nă.
Para. 23. Add " also the Masculine in the Plural changes
o into e ."
Page 128, line 5. " Khia !” perhaps “ khé!”: There is a
varying pronunciation .
Page 130, line 4. "Kiteñ āuveñ kărizāi" better : " uveñ
kiten kårizāi" .
Page 132 , § 1. Generally only xi or i is the right mood ;
ai or oi or ei generally is not quite correct ; yet in some rare
cases it may occur. Or we may say that ši seems to sound
ai or ei, if we do not consider it carefully.
§ 2. " Yekameka" can be put also in other cases ; e. g.
“ yekamekāčer kuţ kårtāt” .
Page 134, § 4. These Verbs are to be used with great
circumspection.
Page 135 , § 5. More exactly thus: " mārn geleñ = lit. the
>

having beaten went, i.e. finished " ; the Gerund in -un is the
subject of " geleñ ” .
§ 6. Except the form in “-tāſ, thăiñ assā ” , the others are
>

not commonly used, except in some peculiar cases .

Page 137 , para. 8. Only " yeunk ” can be considered as
>

grammatical .
Para. 9. " Vetso or veso ” – the first form is right.
Page 140, para . 12. " món " , better : " mhón” according to
>

the Mahrātti; some say “ mhun ”.

Para ., 13. " ubzono "; as it is doubtful, so better avoid it.
Para . 14. “ bosta" seems to be used for the Present , be
cause the Perfect is used for a thing which still continues
(see Syntax), yet in itself it is not Present .
Page 141. c) The same happens in the Supine; hence p. 142
" paloănk ”, or better “ palvonk ” . Yet this point is not settled
as yet.
 414

Page 142. Add the Participle “paloaunk natullo ” (Caus.)

and “ palvanatullo " ( Neuter).
Page 143 , para. 3. This is not clear, say simply : they
make -antso instead of -auntso. The initial vowel of the ter
mination (a or i of an in ... ) is omitted, if it is the same as
the last vowel of the root.
Para. 4. Add : This i is omitted also in the Imperative,
c.g. " ubză undi” , from “ ubzăi” .
Page 144, last line. “ Pedrun ”, right grammatically,, but
9

not common ; they would say : " Pedru vorviñ kårtāñ = I do =

through Peter " .

Page 145 , line 13 . More common "aplea itleāk mārn
ghetālo ” .
Line 3 , a fine of the text. " aplea ....jietāñ” —more com
mon: " yeklăts jietāñ ”.
66
Page 146 , lines 3 , 4. " kāņ " ; as correct form use “ kāņeun ”.
Line 14. Better “melāgī ? ”
Line 4 , a fine of the text. "siktolon astoloñ "'; more com
mon : " siktāñ thăiñ astoloñ ” .
Line 3 , a fine of the text. " kāņeuñso assā ”, more common :
kāņeizāi”.
Page 147. 1. a) " poisilo ” better than " poislo ".
" såklo " , say better " såkăilo ".
>

" tea kusilo ”, better tea kušitso " , and so the other
compounds.
Page 148. 6) "disā"dis ... or disāñdis, disāñdisātso”.
“ vegiñso ”: seldom used.
“māgirtso " better than " māgirlo ”.
“ yedóļ păriant”, Adjective " yedóļ păriantlo ”.
>

3
Add : « yedóļ = up to this", " yedó ?i = even up to this ”.
" sekin " : " sekintso " .
“ phude” , Adj. “phuậlo".
" āprupātso" better than " ăpruptso " .
c ) “ čiken " more common than “ tikeñ " .
" gumārso " , better : “ sumārātso " .
>
 415

Page 149. d) " såsārāyetso" or " såsār” .

“ kapās or ka pāz” .
" soukāsāyetso" is more correct.
Page 150. “ niñ ”, better say : " năiñ ” .
Page 152. " vesleān ", better : " issileān " .
Para. 3. “ -nt ” now is not a Postposition.
Page 153 , para. 6. " sărgārānt” , see about it Part. IV.
>

Ch. II . Art VI .
Page 154 , line 7 , a fine. " maldisāon" , better put it in the
9

beginning of the sentence.

Page 155. The English or in sentences like " does he come
or not” is omitted, and the negative particle only suffices :
“ to yetāgī nāñ ?”
Line 16. " Món " , some say smun "; better : '“mhón or
mhun ".
Line 2 , a fine. Not correct, the form " -leār " with “ zărtăr” .
(See p. 251.)
Page 157. " Synetymology" : Some might not approve of this
new word. I could not find a better single word. In two
words we could have said “ General Etymology” . See, however
the new words used by Max Müller, and you will either blame,
together with me, also Max Müller, or let such a title pass.
I grant, however, that the things spoken of here, I would have
put in Part I. , II. , IV., if I could have done so ; but this part
had arisen while printing, when it was too late to insert
these things in Part I. and II.; after all , this division is the
same quoad substantiam , as the division of Etymology in
particular and general, which division is no doubt right.
Moreover it seems to contribute to clearness to collect into
one place things distinct from Syntax and Etymology. I
grant also that I have anticipated some things of Part III.
in Parts I. and II. , because from the very beginning of print
ing I thought to put in Part I. and II., the most necessary
things treated of here.
 416

Page 158 , parà. 4. -re is used sometimes also for men ,

and -go also for women , especially by elder relatives towards
younger ones .
Page 161. c) Some pronounce nearly -ši, -señ ; it is better
-si, -señ .
Para 5. “ I” has sometimes an emphatic meaning when
joined to the negative particle, similar to the Latin ne quidem ,
nullus omnino etc.; see an example p. 165 , 1. 9 , a fine.
Page 162, Chapter IIl. The last example can be better
explained in another way. (See p. 241 , note).
Page 163 , Art 1. Instead of a, sometimes au or similar
forms are used.
Page 164, line 3. This is the common mode of making
a Substantive negative.
a ): This is the common mode of making an Adjective
negative.
d): “ năiñ assalo " can bechanged, e.g. , into " năiñastanað ” .
Page 167 , Ch . V. It seems that as we have Causative Verbs,
so we can have derived Causative Nouns; viz. if the Noun has a
causative meaning, it must insert some letters ( especially o or
a ); but this is not quite certain, althougth it is certain of some
Participial Adjectives; e.g. “ dukountso, dukitso”. Hence from
Causative Verbs are derived, in this supposition , Causative
Nouns, from non-causative Verbs non -causative Nouns.
Page 168, line 11 , a fine. “ Bāir-gālnen ” does not sound
well .
Last line. Add : Instead of -ni or -nen,, they use some
times -na; e.g. " sõd = seek ”, “ sodna = inquisition” .
- 1

Page 169 , line 1. " Sărkeñ " is an elegant but not much
used termination . Sometimes the termination -poņ, -ap etc.
have the same meaning .
Line 14. -Sermāvist” , not a common word.
Line 11 , a fine. " čedun " is rather derived from “ čedo ",
etymologically, although, as to the meaning, it is used for girls,
as “ burgo” for boys.
 417

Page 169, line 10 , a fine. “ pāļi" is formed regularly.

The termination in or n is used especially with Nouns
ending in a consonant, (in ar, in the first place) i is used with
Nouns ending in o.
Page 170, para. 1. -lo is added also to Adverbs or Post
positions ; e. g. " voir, voilo ; “ mukār, mukāvelo ” . Moreover
its meaning is, sometimes, not exactly, “ coming out ” . Strictly
it is the 1st Locative adjectivized; the meaning " out of"
must be rendered by some other word, e.g. " bāir”, or by the
context .
Page 172 , para. 5. This holds good also for the Negative
Adjectives. The Noun prefixed is Singular or Plural as the
meaning requires ; e. g. “ cloudy sky = kupañ ( pl.) asalleñ
moļăb ”.
,
Para . 6. Better " dik ” .
Page 176 , para. 2. In some cases to the Adverb in ceñ the
Gerund of -kăr (-kårn) is added.
Page 177 , line 1 , et seq. "zāuñ= lit. by being or becom
>

ing or by having been or become" ; hence to know whether

this form can be used , substitute this literal translation ,
and see whether then it is suitable.
Page 180 , line 1. " reunion ”, say better : " college”.
Page 181 , Ch . VII. Perhaps the rules about ñ could be
simplified, especially in compounds; viz. ñ might be omitted
in some of the indicated cases, although strictly speaking
there should be ñ.
Page 182 , e) There are some exceptions; e.g. " pațlāu ”..
Page 183 , line 4. But Pronouns have ñ also in the Instru
mental , and the Pronouns of 1st and 2nd Person also in the
Nominative Singular and Plural.
c) This never or almost never happens.
Page 185 , line 8 , a fine, et seq. Although this is true, yet
for the sake of simplicity, let us distinguish only what is
absolutely required, i. e. 8, ts, č, leaving the other shades to
practice.
53
 - 418

Page 186 , line 3 . “ ...into tě”, in order to simplify, let

>

us say “ into č ” .
Line 9. upuasing is a Kanarese word, ( månuša = man”)
not a Konkani word written with Kanarese letters.
Line 20. e. g. " porza, porze = people”: yet some say
-

" porje ” .
Line 22. e.g. "māz, mazā = centre".
Page 188, line 11. " ...to the Canarese 6,"" i.e. this sign of
the Kanarese Alphabet is used as a sign of half vowel in some
languages, e.g. in Tuļu ; in Kanarese it is a sign of an absent
vowel. (See note on Part I.)
Page 189 , line 1 . As I did not pay great attention to
this point, especially to its spelling, so this rule has not much
value .
At all events , as I said, let us keep only ų as a sign of
half vowel .
Line 4. afine. Add the change of ó into å or ò. (See
notes on 2nd Declension.)
The sound of 4 or y can be approximately perceived in
pronouncing, e.g. " et” , by removing suddenly the tongue
from the roof of the mouth after having pronounced t.
Page 190 , line 4, et seq. This rule requires further consi
deration : it is however true that euphony seems to require
the indicated changes .
Page 191 , line 7 , a fine. “ šē !", some pronounce ošel ” .
Page 192 , line 7. " throat ", add " and nose” .
Line 17 , et seq. This letter is called vocalized r by the
author of the Polyglot Vocabulary, most appropriately, as far
as I can judge in this delicate matter, which is rather foreign
>

to my subject: it never or very seldom occurs in Konkani.

Page 193, line 15 , a fine. It seems better to use 6 for the
>

svirāma” , u for ų.
Page 194, line 15. Hodson says that it is a vowel or a
consonant according to the position.
 419

Page 196 , line 12 , 13. It is more common to let the word

agree with the Masculine in preference to the Feminine (as
I remarked in line 10-12) instead of using the Neuter. The
same holds good for Verbs.
Page 197, line 6 . In Mahrātti the Neuter Plural in such
case is used : but after having written this page, I came to
know, that commonly the daughter -in -law, speaking about the
mother -in -law , and the wife of a younger brother , speaking
about the wife of an elder brother, use the Plural Neuter ; in
other cases such a use is not common .
The Verbs compounded of a Noun and an Adjective
sometimes are considered, as to concord, as simple Verbs ;
e.g. “ nāš kăr, inkār kår ", which consequently govern the
Accusative, although etymologically they should govern other
cases.

Note 1. Probably it is a mistake ; at any rate it seems

better to avoid such a use.
Page 198 , para. 6 . Not seldom the adjectival Genitive
seems to follow , as to concord, the rules of Nouns rather than
the rules of Adjectives.
Line 7 , a fine. Cf. note to p. 240.
Page 199, para 9. It can be reduced to para. 6 ; because
in the full sentence we should say "zakā ukto kelā ”.
Para. 10. Time will clear this point : some say that “ yord”
means only " news" , and even in a meaning of contempt:
the Noun should be “ vordegār" .
Page 200, line 17. If the Neuter is used, in some cases
it is better to add « kårn ” .
Page 201 , Exercises, line 1. “ Kon ” better “ koņ-i (Inde
finite ).
Exercises, line 7. " ismāl", perhaps better : “ ismål or
ismól” : at any rate it is a foreign word.
Exercises, line 10. " astit” , better : " assāt” ,
Page 203 , line 12, a fine. The termination -neñ is not in
common use, except for few Nouns.
53 *
 420

Page 205 , line 14. “keļambo ", some say “" kelambo" .
B. " Omitting” etc. this remark regards not only the
Nominative but also the other cases and other parts of speech.
The things clear by themselves or common also to Latin
or English are often omitted.
§ 1. 1. Materially is Nominative, but philosophically is
Accusative in a different form and so also 2. When the English
Noun is or can be preceded by “ as” , that Noun is put in the
Nominative followed by “ món" (or “ mollo” etc.)
Page 206 , Exerc., line 1. mēlnītidār
“ " , better addkårn " .
>

Ş.2 , line 6. “ Author of the..." i.e. of the Grammar which

has the title " The Student's Manual of the Mahrātti Grammar".
Whenever I mention Mahrātti Grammar, I intend to quote
this Grammar.
Line 5 , a fine. “ -unčeāk ” , add : " or only -čeāk”.
Page 207 , line last. “ but...." , viz. etymologically; yet use
can prevail over etymology.
Remark about Dative as also about Accusative etc. that
there are other cases in which Dative (or Accusative etc ..)
must be used ; e. g. ste šikšek tårtărtāň = I tremble at that
punishment” .
Page 209 , line 7. " kirkoļi ": compound of “ kirko ! ” and “i.'
Line 9. "seguņā thăiñ" seems to be better than " segun
āniñ " ; this second form does not express exactly the meaning
of “ thăiñ "'; yet " seguņāniñ" is more common .
Line 10. " sålgi” : some think that " sålgi” cannot be used
in a good meaning as here ; such opinion comes from the abuse
of “ sålgi” for bad things ; yet in itself it is a good word and
used also in a good meaning ; see in the Mahrātti Dictionary
of Bābā Padmānji, its meaning agreeing with the Konkani mean
ing. What is the good thing of which no abuse can be made ?
Page 211, note 1. Perhaps better “ vidye-sāl, or pāța-sāl".
Page 212 , line 9, a fine. " poisleān ", better " poisileān ” .
Para. 7. Adjectives in -ntlo and -lo are different; e.g.
“ šerāntlo....voilo " .
 421

Page 213, para. 9. Such form in -čeān or -jeān is some

times used also with the Potential. (See P. IV. Ch. III.)
Para . 9 , last line. “ thăiñ " and " tantleān" probably
have a different root ; moreover the meaning differs somewhat.
Page 214, line 10. The meaning is : “ It is not required to
go through the town of Goa, although you pass near to Goa " .
Line 11. Some say “ Rupiā ” etc. in the oblique cases,
instead of " Rupoiā ”.
Page 215 , para. 1. I said elsewhere that this -nt comes
from the Mahrātti -ánt, still used in that language as a
special word, but not in Konkani.
Page 216 , line 10. “ dhu " . In Mahrātti it is aspirated ;
yet in Konkani it seems to sound not aspirated.
Para 4. We can say also “ Devāk satmand ” etc.
Page 217 , line last of the text. viz. That author says
>

(p. 17) that the Vocative is the crude form .

Page 218, para . 3. In such case there would be a com
position ; hence hyphen , and would coincide with para. 4.
Page 220 , line 2. There seems to be a slight difference
of meaning between using the Dative and the Communicative.
Exercises, line 4. In this example it is better to use
“ thăiñ ” , not “ kåde”.
9

Page 223 , line 2. " Drăštāntāk ” perhaps not in common use.

Page 224 , para. 7.
> Sometimes such a Substantive must
be put in the Plural , and then the Noun converted into an
Adjective (Genitive) should agree with it also in number,
(although we find examples in which that Adjective does not
agree in Number) ; e.e.g.
g. “ dusreānčeo čestāio kår = mock
others” . Moreover there are some Verbs of this kind which
cannot govern the Genitive, although etymologically the Ge
nitive should be used, e.g. " nāš kår" .
Page 225 , line 14. What is said about -lo, must be under
stood of the Adjectives in -ntlo; for the others may not be
according to this explanation. Sometimes the Adjective in
-ntlo means " ....out of...'
 422

Page 226 , line 4. " tirzāun " is not a real Adverb.

bり) " . ... et memorari ... = and to remember his Holy
Testament the oath which he swore" . Remark that " ugļās””
is masculine ; yet -jeñ agreeing with " pårmāņ ".
Page 229 , line 2. The Postposition must be used, but
with the required changes, e. g. with a full relative sentence or
with a participial sentence.
Page 231 , line 1. Better " an answer to be given by them
became impossible ”.
Para. 7. You find many of these Adjectives in the Diction
ary. Usually it is better to resolve them into a Finite Mood,
or at least not to use them as a predicate (p. 199, 1.7-4 , a . f.)
Para. 8 , d) “ ....short but slowly ” , viz : closed and
9

slowly.
Page 233. a) and 6) are elegant but not common modes.
Page 234. § 1. This is a gleaning of Part II.
§ 2 , a. “ ....usually are not” , say " not often are ... " .
9

Pgae 235. d ) Better say that “ to is like an article”; then

we could say: " o to mănis = this is the man " , or " manis ..
0 = (the) man ..... this ” .
Line 2 , a fine. If we do not consider " tintso " (as I noted
when gleaning the Pronouns) , then we must take away 12
combinations , 6 of « -tintso ” , 6 of c -intso " .
9

Page 237. a) In such sentences " tasolo " is often used

in the second part.
Page 238, line 13 , a fine, et seq. Yet instead of “ intso ”
people use " zantso "'; hence only 18 combinations.
Page 240, line 13 , et seq. It seems that if there is no
word in the Nominative with which they should agree, they
are put in the Neuter Singular. Perhaps the rule of the
Mahrātti Grammar can be useful here, viz.: These declinable
Adverbs are put in the Neuter Singular, a) when the subject
of the Intransitive Verb is omitted : 6) when such a subject
is inflected : c) when both subject and object of the Transitive
Verb are inflected,
 423

Page 242. b) Some say “ khăintso" instead of “ kontso” ; I

think however that “ khăintso" and " kontso " are two different
Pronouns. We may add skăintso ” derived from “ kăiñ = when ".
These Pronouns can be also non -interrogative.
Page 245, para. 3 , 4. About Past and Perfect we might
>

perhaps follow this simple rule : Use the Perfect to express

that an action has been very recently completed or that an
action has been completed in past time, yet the state of
things brought about continues up to the present, for other
past actions use the Past or the Past Perfect.
Para. 5. I doubt about the correctness of using the Past
Perfect for the Imperfect.
Page 247 , para. 7. In some cases the form in an (or in)
can be properly used as 2nd Future. (See p. 273 , note.)
See the note on this point, in the 2nd Part, viz. on page
109 .
Add : This mood is used for the Future when this contains
something Imperative; e. g . “ make peace, then you will offer
your offering to God ” .
Page 249 , para. 2 , line 6. " Only” is not exact, if we take
" only ' rigorously, (see page 266 , line 9, a fine.)
Page 250, line 8, et seq. The form in “ sarko" probably
means also suitableness, as I said of the Adjectives compounded
with " sarko " .
Page 254, line 6. The form in -ton can also be used in
this meaning ; e.g. " āuñ itsārtoñ = I should like to ask ” .
Line 15 , " see below " . This has been explained already.
Page 263 , line 5, a fine. " yetanañ ”, better : “ yeun or aileā
uprānt.” The Latin means : " and the rest I will set in order
when I come” .
Page 268 , line 1. " astāñ etc. = I am habitually” .
Page 273 , para. 12.
>
2) In this meaning it is not often
used .
Para . 14 . “Vātsunk tanktā ” seems to be improperly
>

used for " licet legere " .

 424

Page 273-274, and alibi. Some of the Latin sentences are

rather Konkani-Latin than pure Latin, in order to show more
distinctly the things.
Page 274, line 12. " above mentioned" , " uprānt” excepted.
Page 276 , line 21 , to " -un ” add " and -unk ” .
Page 279 , para. 6. Some take these Verbs as Neuter ; yet
after careful inquiry, I can say that many take them also
really as passive, if the vowel is open ; much more, that
this is in conformity with Sanskrit, the grandmother of
Konkani.
Page 280. See another mode by pāu in the I. Appendix,
p. 331 , which however is low. It corresponds nearly to the
Hindustāni " jānā ", and Mahrātti “ jāņeñ = to go ", whereby
the passive voice is expressed sometimes in those languages.
Page 286, § 7 , line last. Better : " yekamekāčer”; else it
>

is doubtful.
Page 288, line 3, et seq.. The given example does not
suit the Latin expression well ; we should take a compound
Verb , one element of which expresses something more vague
and undetermined ; e. g. " āpoun ād or tzálun vetā ” ., Notwith
standing, the given example can be made suitable by modi
fying somewhat the explanation. I need not say that I do
not intend to find in this kind of Verbs a perfect similarity
to the famous materia and forma, as the particle " as” of the
text shows ; I intend only to imprint in the mind this unknown
point by a known similar point.
Page 296 , para. 2. " moņsăr” , variety of " moņāsăr” .
>

Page 297 , line 2. " phuda " , some say : " phudār ; " probably
they are two Nouns.
Para 9. " Khāl” occurs also in a proper meaning, and for
material things : stala ”, properly, according to the Mahrātti,
should mean “ at the bottom of ” .
Page 298, line 8 , 7 , 6, a fine, belong to para. 11 .
> >

Page 300 , para. 22. Often skaạtso " is used for thāun ” viz.
if for " from " we could substitute literally “ being near or
 425

from being near ” ; yet an exact literal translation of “ kaậtso ”

is not easy. (See p. 298 , para. 10.)
Page 301 , para. 25. “ Magčeā vorviñ ”, better “ māg -ņeñ
kărčeā vorviñ ", or “ Dēvā lāgiñ māgčeā vorvin ".
>

CC
“ Khālinastanañ , ” better : " khālanastanañ” or “ khālnasta
nañ ” .
Para . 26. By accident “ šivāi” has not been put in the
66
example : it should be “ ... sosullea šivāi” .
Page 306. a) In such cases the Accusative usually is not
omitted , as it can be omitted in Latin ; e.g. " I have been edu
cated = educatus sum, makā vādăilā ”.
c) Some do not say “ takā khāviet" ; yet it is not wrong.
e) This remark holds good also for the Negative form .
Very few persons do not follow this rule ; they say :
e. g. stuveñ mojiñ utrañ āikaliñgi ?"': get the almost universal
use must prevail over the use of a few persons. They will say :
the Verb must agree with the object. I answer : universal use
is a stronger rule on this point, than the rule of concord.
At any rate time will clear up this point.
Page 307. f) If these Verbs are made Causative, they follow
the “ kårmăņi” construction.
Page 308, line 1. The same participial sentences are used
also when an English secondary sentence is translated by a
Konkani Postposition ; because this governs the Participle.
The only change to be made is of the Verb into the Participle.
(See some examples p. 339.)
Page 310 , $ 1. In interrogative sentences it is not requir
ed, as a general rule, to put the subject after the Verb.
Page 311. If there are two or more subordinate sentences ,
that which governs follows the governed one.
Page 312. As regards the sequence of tenses , nearly the
same rule of the English holds good, except that very often
the Indicative is used for the Subjunctive.
When the secondary sentence does not imply any oratio
indirecta, then it cannot be resolved into a directa oratio, but
54
 426

the rule of the sequence of tenses is observed ; e.g. " he saw

that the bear was excited = asvel utsambol zāun assaleñ món
taņeñ poļeilāñ ”. Yet sometimes Konkani uses the Present
instead of the Imperfect or Past ; e.g. " to Igårjent todou
kårtā món poļeun ajap zāle = having seen that he remained
long time in the church, they were astonished ” .
Page 313. From this change of the oratio obliqua into
oratio directa derives the frequent use of Present Tense
instead of Past Tense. Yet this change is not obligatory.
An English oratio indirecta (at least in potentia ), can
be translated 1 ) by changing it entirely into an oratio directa,
retaining however “ món " : " he prays God to forgive = bogos
món ... " ; 2) by putting only the Verb in the tense required
by the oratio directa : “ Let us pray God to extend His hand
over us = Dēvā lāgiñ māgiān, to āplo hāt lambăi món amče
voir”; 3) by putting the Verb in the Mood or Tense, but not
in the Person , required by the oratio indirecta : " Saserdot
māgtā Spirita Santā lāgiñ to tumče voir yeundi móņ = the
priest prays the Holy Ghost to come in you ".
Page 314, Art 1. In North Kanara many speak also Kon
kani, but as I am informed, so different in some places from
the Konkani of South Kanara, that it approaches to the
Goanese branch, if it is not the really Goanese branch, which
is considerably different from our branch both in rules and
words, as I have seen by comparing some words and sentences
of that country with ours.
Page 315 , line 21. " etc.” Among these other languages
hinted at, I mention especially Hindusthāni.
Line 2 , a fine. If this book should happen to fall into
the hands of learned philologists, I admonish them beforehand
that I do not insist much upon the words Dravidian , Gau
rian, Turenian etc.
Page 317. b) In order not to contradict what I said on
p. 316 , we must understand these things thus : actu Konkani
is almost a collection of dialects ; in potentia there are common
 427

forms, which although apparently different, however by diligent

consideration may appear in the main also actu common .
Hence we can say that Konkani is on the way to become a
formed language .
Page 318. The purists of Konkani, instead of begging
at every step from Mahrātti or Sanskrit, should try to express
the notions with Konkani words , avoiding however too vulgar
modes of speaking; this is certainly a very difficult but useful
task. I do not however deny that in some cases we may
borrow some words from those languages.
Page 319, para. 3. Not only composition , but derivation
also should be employed, and what is more important, inquir
ing wbich existing words in Konkani could render properly
or metaphorically, the Latin or English word, although the
words are not commonly used in such a way.
One of the many things to be done, not mentioned there,
would be to try to have some uniformity both in rules and
words, in order to make a cultivated language above so
many varieties. If some of the rules of this Grammar and
some words of the Dictionary are found not well founded or
not suitable, others should be substituted as more fit; but we
should stop then at some.
Page 324,, para,. 7 , line 4. “Negative form”, add , " of
Verbs”; yet such mode is perhaps not vulgar.
Page 325 , para. 1 , et seq. Only a small number of the
different senses of these Verbs has been given .
We may add out of many other things, as a peculiarity of
Konkani, the frequent use of converting into Adjectives, Ad
verbs or Postpositions .

APPENDIX I.

As the title shows, it is not my intention to put down all

the difficult modes of speaking, nor do I intend to put down only
really difficult modes ; but to gather out of a number some
54 *
 --
428

modes of speaking, which passim have been hinted at through

out Grammar, or have not been put at all.
Page 330, last line. " bòļ karinastana " , better say "ād-aileā
šiväi" .
Page 331 , ac si ..." paullea bări”, is too vulgar ; better :
" ....mārleleā bări” .
Quippe qui. " gratsār” means fortune,“ i.e. fate” .
Page 332 , line 8. " sarlea " , better wbāir -sărleā " , or " geleā ” .
Page 334, Donec. a) With smoņāsăr” it is more common
to put the Verb in the 3rd Person Singular of the Present
Indicative (also for Past Tenses ); e.g. " te (tuñ, āmiñ) yetā
moņāsăr” .
Page 334, line 18. " tsåď ” , better " zaļān = lit. with burning
(sorrow )”.
APPENDIX II.

1. In writing Konkani with Kanarese letters I have

followed the principle of similarity, i.e. I have written in such
a way that only those letters which are pronounced and their
pronunciation should be written ; e.g. ši is expressed not by
i but by es; because ă is rendered by es not by - . Hence
I have deviated somewhat from the common way, and also
from the Kanarese rules regarding writing ; e.g. I writeeer jo
(zāun) , not 2 (zāvun) , deer , not se etc. The reasons
of this deviation are : a ) because the beginners, not versed
in the vernaculars, would have taken up, in doing else , a
wrong pronunciation, unless I had given some other rules
about this point ; 6) because in Mahrātti, which is the proper
alphabet of Konkani, I found a similar manner of writing ; so
I found written " 973 = pāus”, not “ pāvus ”, as some write") ;
5

1) The same remark holds good for other deviations ; e. g. about joined
to es , e etc.Yet I did not keep Mahrātti as ruling principle in every case :
the ruling principle is the common usage in speaking and conformity of pro
nouncing with reading according to the Roman way of reading, which way
more or less prevails at least as to the sound of the vowels, and has been laid
down as the foundation on p. 1 .
 429

c) this manner is more simple, easier and also more scientific.

This reason especially prevails when we have to settle the
manner of writing. This I could do the more readily , as
Kanarese is not the proper alphabet of Konkani , and nothing
is settled. d) The rule about accent should have been chang
ed, if I had followed the Kanarese common manner.
2. As regards the translation , I have used some foreign
or less exact words , although there is the pure or exact
Konkani word , for the reason stated in P.IV. Ch. III .; so, e.g. ,
to say "Gospel" there is a beautiful Konkani word used
also in Sanskrit, Mahrātti, Kanarese and Tulu .
3. Although I tried to adhere to the Latin text, for the
reasons stated above, yet in some cases it was rather difficult
without losing too much of Konkani propriety ; hence in
some rare cases the translation is not quite literal . Moreover
while translating into Konkani I had under my eyes, not the
English, but the Latin Vulgate with the Notes of Menochio and
the French paraphrase of Carrières ; hence some sentences
literally agree with the Latin , not with the English trans
lation .
4. We need not remark on some imperfections owing
partly to the literal translation , partly to the great hurry with
which this has been done . Hence, no doubt, a better translation
could have been made in other circumstances ; consequently
I limit myself to remark on only these more striking points.
Page 360, v. 3 , ei alibi. “ somzikāy” , better “ somzon ” .
Page 369 , v . 19 , " găt", better " tir " .
Page 370, v. 28, " išta kåde ”, better " išķāk ” .
Page 376 , v. 13. Some decline “ upădēsi”, according to the
>

2nd Declension ; yet this is not so correct.

 430

PART II .

This 2nd part is at the same time a kind of "Errata

Corrige” and reduction to uniformity. Nobody can be surprised
at the following list ; for 1 ) a perfectly correct mode of writing
throughout, was beyond my aim (see pp. 2, 6 , 295) ; 2) many
things can be written and are pronounced in many ways; hence
sometimes I have written the same word in one way, some
times in another way : here, for the sake of simplicity, I choose
>

one of these modes , viz. , what I judge to be more correct;

3) nothing is settled in this language ; hence although I esta
blished the signs to be used from the very beginning, yet,
owing to the state of Konkani, on the way I saw that some
thing could have been better put in another way ; hence also,
the variety in writing the same word. Therefore the many
corrections often are rather only a reduction to uniformity.
However I do not intend to correct every thing which perhaps
could be mentioned , because about some points I am not sure,
especially as regards the aspirated and cerebral sound. Many
of these correct modes of writing have been hinted at in
Grammar. Here I put them together.

A. General Corrections.

1. Complexive Corrections .
1. " So ", termination of the Adjectival Genitive and of
>

some Participles should always be written -tso (see p. 122 ,

para . 15).
2. ja, ča, termination of some words of the 3rd Declension ,
should be written jea, cea (see p. 26, et seq .).
3. 2nd person singular of Contingent Future ši for či, and
2nd person plural šāt for čāt.
4. Past Participle in compound tenses with two 1 (“ lolo
-ụllo, -llo ”), and so also all Past Participle in lo used as
Adjectives (see p. 262) .
 - 431

5. Tz, always ts (see pp. 193 , 397).

Té either ts or pure č.
6. Sometimes the euphonical vowel has been omitted .
7. Imperfect Subjunctive should be written with one s.
8. Causative Verbs in äi or i only.
9. Na should be always nasal , although in Mahrātti is
not nasal, and in Konkani too it is not very much nasal.
10. -nt of the Locative is -ñt: and so often i has been
written n, when there was no necessity to write ñ.
11 . The Past Tenses should have u instead of ă.
12. Whenever an Adjective or Participle has o in the
penultimate, it is changed into e (sometimes y) when the last
syllable has not the vowel o (see p. 187) .

2. Single words which often occur .

Errata - Corrige. Errata - Corrige.
-

ād ...hād ') (var. ad) bógår ...băgār (var. băgăr,

adār ... adār bógår)
altsi... alsi ; some make it bor...bhor (var. bor)
cerebral, in Mahrätti čo (in compounds)... čou
it is not cerebral. dadlo ...dadlo
årdo . . . årdho (var. årdo) dik (direction )..dikkų
ăriyeklo ...hăryeklo dosmānkai...dusmānkāi
ātmo ... åtmo (although in duddu ... dudu
Kanarese ā-) duv ... du
bāgivont...bhāgivont gāl... ghāl (var. gāl)
bair ...bhāir (var. bāir) går ... ghår (many say also
bāš...bhāš (var.bāš) [ bāu) “ går " )
bau ...bhāu (brother) (var.
.
ge ... ghe (var. ge)
beñ . ..bheñ, bhya hanga ... anga
benjer...benjar kālto...khālto
bet ...bhet (var. bet) kāi ... kaiñ
betai... bhețai (var. bețăi) kai ... kain (if it means
bitor ...bităr “ where ": khăin )
1) What is said of the original form , must be said of its derivations.
 432

Errata - Corrige. Errata - Corrige.

kakult ...kāku !t răng ( sing ) ... róng ( sing )
kassolo (kosso ) răng ( Plur.)
with one s
tassolo (tasso) sarti... sådti
assolo (asso ) i.e. -kaso
sollo ... sollo
lo " etc.
zasso sotrai... tsătrai
kel ... khe! tāmdo... tāmbdo
kotto ... khoto taniñ, taneñ etc. ... taņiñ ,
kumzār...kumsār taņeñ etc. (and so
kuši...khuši (var. kuši) similar terminations )
lukšān ... luksān tala... tala
matoun ...mātou tår (kind )...thår (although
māuñ ..māu ( = scar; father not aspirated in Kanarese)
in -law = māuñ ) thår (therefore) ... tăr
moļaba ...mo?ba ui” ... voi ”
molleār ... moleār uttar...utar
monis ...månis upkār n... .upkār m . (hence
nilso ... niltso Pl. Nom . upkār , not
pānz...pānts upkārañ)
păriånt... păriant vors ...Vårs
patlauñ ... pațlau vorvi ... vorviñ
phade...phudeñ yemkaņd . . yemkåņd or yem
-pon (termination of Abstract koņd
Nouns) ...-pon

B. Particular Corrections

Errata Corrige
P. 2 , 1. 7. faro farò .
‫לל‬ 1.10 . short closed.
‫לל‬ l. 7 , a f. this
>
this hhf yowel
‫وو‬ 4, 1. 9 , a f. m . n.
> m. n

‫وو‬ 5 , 1.12 . hås-čeñ hās-čeñ

‫و‬
1. 6. tai thăiñ
10 , 1.8. je ye
 433

Errata Corrige
P. 13 , 1. last. vonad, vondi voņåt (or yoņót) , voạti
14, 1. 6. animate inanimate
Para . 6. hac haec
9 ‫לל‬ 1. 22. There 7. There
1.26. that that " gér" that " ger” is an abbreviation
is a corruption
1.8. aa f. bāpāvorvi bāpā vorviñ
15, para. 4 , l. 4. Few Few others govern the Dative.
others govern the Dative See Postpositions
Singular Postpositions .
9 15 , l. 2 , a f. if the mean omit these words
ing is Plural
20, 1.13 . sobit = necessary sobit = nice
21 , 1.1 . assā zāun assā
22 , 1. 4. dudiñ , -ņ dudiñ , n.
25 , 1.13, a f. dis assā
> dis zāun asā
26 , 1.1 . confrier confrère
‫יל‬ 1.2. kurouñ kurou
‫לל‬ 31 , 1.6 . såddāntz sădānts (and so elsewhere )
35 , throughout, 4th
7
read 5th
, 37 , 11. 7,8. văstu
9 våstu
99 39, 1. 17. Šesar Sezār
92 ‫לל‬ 1.4, a f. Indiānt Indient
9 1.3 , a f. on the on the Himalayas
Himalaya
‫وو‬ 41 , last l. yēkavorsā yēka vărsā
42 , para . 4. kårkår karkar
9 māli māļie
48, l. 11 , a f. man
> men
50. c. balseñ baļseñ
‫לל‬ 51 , l. 11 , af. Appendix etc. Part III.
‫وو‬ 52 , last I. kottepoņāñso khoteāntso
53 , 1. 19. Kristāčeñ
> Kristādea
54, § 3. tāun omit it
55
 434

Errata Corrige
P. 54 , 1. 19. tāun thāun (and so elsewhere)
(var. tāun)
55 , l. 10 , a f. nilso niļtso (in Mar. not cerebral)
> 1. 8, ۱۱ ålduvo ålduvo
56 , 1. 9. Moje Mojeñ
1. 4, a f. Sezāričea Sezāryādea
57 , No. 17. sotra sătra
26. sovis să vis
‫לל‬ 27. sattāvis satāvis
29. yēkuntis better : yēkuņeñtis
" uņeñ ” should be always
nasal.
58, last l. yeksåst
2 yeksašť (and so in the follow
ing numbers)
29 59 , l. 7 , a f. so ?
så
‫לל‬
1. 5, 9
26 21
60, l. 2. can count cannot count
64 , 1. 5. bokši bogsi (and so elsewhere)
1. 9. kitleń kitliñ
.

99 1. 12 , a f. assulo zāun assullo

1. 10 , Pončisvea Ponpončisvea
។
»

‫و‬ 67, l. 3, a f. bhās

a bhāš
68, l. 9. libriceino libriccino
97 1. 8, af. rāu! (m.) rāu ! (n.)
, 76, l. 6. guņāzo guņātso
,, 77 , 1, 5 , a f. apņānzo apņāntso
79 , I. 22. irregularity irregularities
ai
)
១

‫و‬ l. 6 , a f. ei
84, 1.4. adar=commit (v.)
>
=
adar = commit
9 ‫לל‬ 1. 15. kāints nā better : khaintsa -nāñ
1. 21. bāpui. Tāso bāpui : tātso
85 , l. 6, a f. assā? assā .
,, 86, 1, 2, sărgārtāun sårgār thāun
87. Imperfecte Imperfect
 I
435

c
Errata Corrige
P. 90, 1. 6 , a f. assā zatā
93 , 1. 1. -ta -tañ
95 , 1. 17. zāun zāuñ
111 , II. nondormiebam non dormiebam
1.5, a f.nid-nataleaoñ nid -a -nataleaon
119 , l. 9 , a f. nidteten
។ nidtelen
122, 1. 12. This 16th This 15th
123 , 1. 8. erit erat
9 last l. be become
, 126 , 1. 5. Art. Chapt.
128, 1. 10. lačil laččil
1. 11. sår bāir sår
1. 14. game
>

ghame (var. game)

129, 1. 3. paisāvānt paišavānt
1. 13. Koinča Kăincea
{‫ל‬ 1. 8-9, a f. Sākor Sākår
„, 130, 1. 11. bog bhog (var. bog)
> ‫ور‬ 1.3 , a f. vago
> văgo or vógo
131 , l. 6 , a f. assaleañ assalleañ
dileñ dillen
2

9 ‫לל‬ 1.3 , moje mozo

132 , l. 2. mojān amčeān
>

‫לל‬ 1. 11. poļņañ podanañ

99 1. 3 , a f. ai ai
1. 2. por - tan portatāñ
1.
133 , 15. $ 6 . $ 7.
1. 16. not Causative non-causative
134, 1. 14. sudlo
> suțlo
1. 15. fudlo futlo
> sudtā suţtā
1. 16. fudtā futtā
, 135 , 1. 10. to beat him after having beaten him
144, § 8. Defective Verb Defective Verbs
, 146 , 1. 6. adli
9 adli
55 *
 436

Errata Corrige
P. 148, 1. 20. kațieso kadetso
‫לל‬ 150 , l. 2 , a f. tzărlo sărlo
151 , 1. 1. tintz tinats
1.9. kāņeitoleānk kāņeiteleānk
čīt čit
‫לל‬152, 1. 18. băuntaņeñ băuntăņiñ
‫ور‬ 97 1.3 , a f.emkaņdāntlo yemkåņdāntlo
154, l. 12, a f.vitzārnakāt visarnakāt
167, 1. 10, a f. niškål
? niskål
, 170, 1.4, a f. boreñ boroñ
171 , 1. 6. as " at was at
1.7 . as the as at the
99 173 , para. 9. fit to do . . '
> cofit to ... "
9 175, 1.12, a f. kātăr kātār
176 , 1. 10. Substantive Substantive or Adjective
‫לל‬ 178, 1. 17 , 18. that -un that in -un
184, 1.9. č and z,
, into č, and z into
‫לל‬ 194, 1. 19. dukhụ duhkų or duhkhy
9 198 , 1. 13 , a f. burgāčeā burgeāčeā
> 200, 1.4. thing things
206 , 1.6 , a f. javaņāk
> jeuņāk
99 209, 1.2, a f. of the gram of Grammar
mar

211, Exerc.l.4 .sāngnakā

.
sānganakā
213, 1.3 . sukoi tsukăi
, 214 , 1. 4. Kristāči Kristāčeñ
1.5 . papsilā papsilāñ
$ 5, 1. 3. distinction perspicuity
217 , Exerc. 1. 3. Dåñparā Danpār
220, 1. 10. mātrụ āuñ .. āuñ . ..uleināñ mātrų
uleināñ
1.14 . betăitoloi better : bhețai
222, Exercise, 1.5. sākor sākår
223 , last l. father house
 437

Errata Corrige
dis - a
P. 224, l. 14, a f. dis
227 , 1. 9. Postposition Postpositions
9 228 , 1.19 , 20. hurdle screen
> 233 , Exercise.. 1. 2. tzălti tsălto
235 , 1. 14. lāsleño lasleñ ò
240, l. 8 , a f. dhadlā
> dhaļlāñ
1.2 , a f. correspond
‫לל‬ corresponds
244, last line. “ the date” add of months"
,, 251 , 1. 7. tuven tuñ
263 , l. 13, a f. be being
269 , 1. 5. is were

9 1.10, a f. vānčasonān vāntsatsonāñ

‫וי‬ 275, 1. 16. āuveñ āuñ
1. 4, a f. as far it as far as it
279 , 1. 13. khālto astolo khālto kello astolo
280, l.1 14, a f. “ tut " sut
9 283 , 1.5, aa f. poļeitats
9 poleitāñts
9 284 , 1. 11. ålsai alsai
1. 22. kătār kātār
9 1.3, a f. by a blow by blowing
286, 1.2.
66
294, l. 6. (As .... ) (As to the insertion of “ gi”
see p. 241.)
297 , 1. 3-4. is immediate is after
ly after
304 , 1. 1. tiņeñ
>
ti
> 320 , l. 4. viz . is
330 , 1. 10. beată beatäñ
>> 336 , para . 7. cum eum

‫לל‬ 348 , v. 16. 1) omit 1)

349 , v. 21 , 1. 1. ratzlo ratsleo
351 , v. 31 , 1. 5. Sovo săvo
355 , v. 21 , 1. 3. boreantli borintli
358 , v. 13 , 1. 3. kelāin keleiñ
 438

Errata Corrige
P. 358 , v. 13 , 1. 5. foțeilin foțeilen
364, v. 28 , l1. 3. 5. -tso
. -či
» 369 , v. 15 , 1. 1. astian astiñ
369, v. 19. gåt ghăț (var. găt)
377 , v . 20, l. 3. dusreāčeā
. dusrečea
» 378, v . 1. tujea..sāmpa omit it
dlãi
‫לל‬ v. 2, 1. 4. vortautaloi vortauloi
385 , v . 20 , 1.3 . zatāt zatā
396 , 1. 16. this closed this nearly closed
, 409 , 1.20 . the a

99 415 , 1.10, a f. had has

N. B. 1. On page 432 , line 2 , a f. instead of ,, „ l. 6 ,

9

read : „ 7, 1.4, a f.
2. a f. means that the pages must be counted from the
bottom to the top.
3. " var.” means variety of pronunciation ). The pro
nunciation within brackets seems to be less correct, although
perhaps more common than the other.

The kind reader can make by himself some other little

corrections , if there be any more, either with the aid of the
rules laid down in Grammar, or with his own good judgment.
The Kanarese text of the Bible has not been corrected at all ;
for, the middle column is mostly, a sufficient help for what
little mistakes there may be : see however what is said about this
point in the Preface. Generally, the manner of writing in
the fourth part is more correct than that of the other parts ;
because then I had made up my mind to pay some attention
also to spelling. In making the above corrections I tried to
follow the common pronunciation ; consequently I have written
some words differently from the similar Mahrātti words (see
 439

p. 396) ; yet as I do not pretend to know perfectly the com

mon pronunciation, it may be that some corrections are the
expression of a peculiar pronunciation , not of the common
one, notwithstanding my efforts to distinguish one from the
other. In this case, i.e. if there is a variety among the
natives themselves, I would rather follow the manner which
agrees more with Mahrātti . Accordingly, some words , espe
cially those which deviate from the Mahrātti may be found
later on as needful of correction. But the reader in his good
sense will understand that in the present state of Konkani
it is thoroughly impossible to be perfectly accurate in these
niceties, if it is difficult, not to say impossible, to be quite
accurate in the most essential points. Hence I omit, out of
many, some other more prominent remarks which I had to
make about some points ; we must be content with what we
have until the Konkani language has reached a more settled
state .